diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-0.txt | 12810 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/77886-h.htm | 19624 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/001.png | bin | 0 -> 635458 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/048.jpg | bin | 0 -> 257691 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/061.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15027 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/069.jpg | bin | 0 -> 189410 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/111.jpg | bin | 0 -> 253600 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/153.jpg | bin | 0 -> 257523 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/187.jpg | bin | 0 -> 257403 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/194.jpg | bin | 0 -> 257700 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/201.jpg | bin | 0 -> 259408 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/271.jpg | bin | 0 -> 254132 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/308.jpg | bin | 0 -> 258697 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/334.jpg | bin | 0 -> 256828 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/390.jpg | bin | 0 -> 255179 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/428.jpg | bin | 0 -> 259461 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/460.jpg | bin | 0 -> 259853 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/504.jpg | bin | 0 -> 261764 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/534.jpg | bin | 0 -> 256837 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 255498 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
23 files changed, 32450 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/77886-0.txt b/77886-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..221ead2 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12810 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 *** + + + + +Transcriber’s Note: Italic text is enclosed in _underscores_. +Superscript characters are preceded by ^. Small capital text has been +changed to all capital. Additional notes will be found near the end of +this eBook. + + + + + [Illustration: Map of Mexico and South America] + + + + + AN + HISTORICAL ACCOUNT + OF ALL THE + VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD, + PERFORMED BY + ENGLISH NAVIGATORS; + INCLUDING THOSE LATELY UNDERTAKEN + By ORDER of his PRESENT MAJESTY. + + THE WHOLE + Faithfully Extracted from the JOURNALS of the + VOYAGERS. + + DRAKE, undertaken in 1577-80 + CAVENDISH, 1586-88 + COWLEY, 1683-86 + DAMPIER, 1689-96 + COOKE, 1708-11 + ROGERS, 1708-11 + CLIPPERTON and SHELVOCKE, 1719-22 + ANSON, 1740-44 + BYRON, 1764-66 + WALLIS, 1766-68 + CARTERET, 1766-69 + COOK, 1768-71 + + TOGETHER WITH + + That of SYDNEY PARKINSON, Draftsman to JOSEPH BANKS, Esq; who + circumnavigated the Globe with Capt. COOK, in his Majesty’s Ship the + ENDEAVOUR. + AND + + The Voyage of Mons. BOUGAINVILLE round the World, Performed by Order of + the French King. + + Illustrated with Maps, Charts, and Historical Prints. + + IN FOUR VOLUMES. + + To which is added, + + An APPENDIX. Containing the JOURNAL of a VOYAGE to the NORTH POLE, by + the Hon. Commodore PHIPPS, and Captain LUTWIDGE. + ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── + VOLUME THE FIRST. + ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + LONDON: + Printed for F. NEWBERY, the Corner of St. Paul’s Church-Yard. + ──────────── + M DCC LXXIV. + + + + + PREFACE. + + +Perhaps there never was brought together, in so small a compass, in any +language, a more copious collection of rational entertainment, than will +be met with in the following sheets. To trace the progress of the +discoveries that have successively been made, in passing round the +globe, must fill the reader’s mind with such a variety of new objects, +as cannot fail to raise his wonder, and entertain him with infinite +delight. + +He will, in this work, be safely conducted through regions that were +once thought inaccessible, and be made acquainted with countries +altogether different from that in which he dwells. Every page he reads +will furnish him with novelties, and every Voyage will bring him nearer +to that unknown country, in search of which so many able commanders have +been sent in vain. + +The discovery of the western continent by Columbus, gave geographers +reason to believe, that a like continent existed somewhere in the south. +Without such an equipoise they could not conceive how the globe could +preserve its balance. + +Magellhaens, a Portuguese mariner, was the first who attempted to +immortalize his name by the discovery. He passed the Streights, that to +this day bear his name, and entered the Pacific Ocean, where no European +vessel had ever sailed before. He discovered the Ladrone and Phillippine +Isles, and returned by the Cape of Good Hope, having surrounded the +whole earth, and proved, to demonstration, the spherical figure of the +globe. + +He was followed by navigators of different nations, who, emulous of his +glory, sought to pursue the track, which he had pointed out, with better +success; but the dangers they encountered, and the disasters they met +with, rendered the difficulties that attended the prosecution +insurmountable; many perished, and those who survived were glad to +return home after a fruitless search. + +The ill success which attended these first attempts threw a damp upon +the enterprize, and it remained long unnoticed, except in the writings +of the learned. Some French geographers, fully persuaded of the reality +of such a continent, endeavoured, a few years ago, to revive in their +countrymen the spirit of enterprize, with a view to derive honour to +their country, by compleating the discovery; but the taste for great +navigations among the French seemed entirely extinct, and it was not +till the Dolphin and Tamar had sailed from England that they thought of +renewing it. + +We have been told that his Majesty, our most gracious Sovereign, very +early in life, formed the design of distinguishing himself by +patronizing the prosecution of new discoveries in the unknown regions of +the southern hemisphere; and that he declared his intention, soon after +he came to the crown, of appropriating a part of his revenue for that +particular purpose. Nothing can more endear a British monarch to his +maritime people, than a steady perseverance in this laudable resolution. + +The love of glory is a passion natural to Kings; the conquerors of the +world are placed before them as patterns, and they are encouraged by +example to seek occasions for war to acquire a name. But how much more +glorious is it to enlarge the earth with a new region, than to triumph +in the conquest of some rival state!--to extend protection to a remote, +and it may be, a defenceless people, than to boast of levelling +fortresses, and, by a general carnage of friends and foes, become master +of a few desolated towns, purchased at an expence, a thousand times +greater than what is necessary to insure the success of new discoveries. + +Can there be any comparison between the glory of a successful +enterprize, founded on the laudable motives of diffusing happiness +through regions, whose inhabitants, for ought we know, are yet immersed +in savage darkness; and that of engaging in a hazardous war, by which +millions of treasure must be expended, and thousands of lives +sacrificed? Is not the chance of succeeding in the first case much more +probable than that of conquering in the other? And does not success in +the discovery of the long sought region of the south, promise much +greater advantages to a trading nation, than the conquest of any part of +the earth on this side the globe? Did not the little Phœnician state +reap a more glorious harvest from the discoveries of its merchants, than +Alexander could boast from all his conquests? Was it not the +perseverance of the Princes Henry, John, and Emanuel, in supporting the +charges of prosecuting new discoveries in the fifteenth century, that +laid the foundation of the Portuguese greatness, whose territories in +Europe are of no considerable extent? + +If the glory of aggrandizing a state, and perpetuating a name to +posterity be the first object of human ambition, where, among all the +tyrants who have depopulated the earth, can be produced a conqueror, +whose name will be remembered, when that of Christopher Columbus is +forgotten? Or where shall we look for a monarch, who, after having +spread murder and desolation throughout the world, descended to the +grave with that heart-felt satisfaction that attended the Florentine +merchant Americus Vespucius, when he saw all Europe agreeing, with one +consent, to transfer his name to more than a third part of the +terrestrial globe? + +The success which has attended our gracious Monarch’s first essays in +the Voyages we are now about to relate, though it has yet produced no +solid advantages to compensate the sums expended in the prosecution of +them, yet it has been such as to open the way to new islands, from whose +inhabitants new arts may be learnt, and from whose productions new +acquisitions may be made, both to the vegetable and fossil kingdoms, by +which the regions of science may be enlarged, and the gardens of the +curious enriched and beautified. + +It is no small satisfaction to an inquisitive mind (were there no other +advantage to be gained from these Voyages) to be made acquainted with +the genius, the arts, the various pursuits, the customs, the manners, +the religious notions, the distinctions of rank, and the subordination +that is to be met with among the people of various islands and +countries, distinct from each other, and from us, in language, habits, +learning, and ways of living. Who is it that can read of the poverty and +misery of the wretched inhabitants of _Terra del Fuego_, who have +nothing but the skins of beasts loosely thrown over them, to defend them +from the severity of the cold, in a climate so dreadful, that two out of +twelve of the attendants of Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, being overtaken +in a storm, in a clear evening, in the middle of summer, perished at the +foot of a mountain, though they had but two miles to go to receive +succour? Nor are they, in any respect, better provided with food than +with raiment. The woods that are three parts in four of the year +impenetrable on account of the snow, and the sea-coast and rivers that +are equally inaccessible, are their only resources. Who then, I say, can +read the story of these forlorn creatures, without lamenting the +condition of human beings, destitute, as these appear to be, of every +comfort and convenience, and exposed every moment to the piercing rigour +of the climate, and the still severer cravings of unsatisfied hunger! + +On the contrary, who can think of these, while, at the same time, he is +told of the pleasurable lives of the happy islanders in the +new-discovered countries, who abound in flesh, fish, and fruits, even to +profusion! without admiring the ways of Providence, that, for purposes +unknown to us, has so unequally bestowed its dispensations. + +When we read in these Voyages of men that eat men, not for hunger, but +from savage ferocity, we shudder to think of the depravity of our +nature, and are convinced of the necessity of bounding our passions by +wholesome laws, and of correcting the irregularities of our appetites by +the restraints of religion. + +But what can we think of those civilized Barbarians, of those polished +monsters, who, with all the advantages of religion and enlightened +education, could yet be so wantonly cruel, as to introduce a disease +among a happy people, odious in its nature, and, to them, more +pernicious than a pestilence in its effects; who could carry the +venereal taint between the tropics, and entail it as a curse upon those +by whom they were most highly favoured? + +Who but must regret the friendly hospitality of these honest, +unsuspecting islanders to strangers, the very best of whom but +ill-deserved their favours? But who can with-hold his indignation at the +ingratitude of the meaner sort, with which their benefactors were +requited? + +The variety of incidents that happened in the course of these Voyages, +when they come to be historically recited, unencumbered with the jargon +of sea-phrases, will afford a fund of entertainment, seldom to be met +with in the productions of the press. The many singular adventures, +unforeseen dangers, and providential escapes, that every ship +experienced in passing round the globe, can only be conceived by those +who read, and believed by those who have seen the wonders of the deep. + +Nothing can excite or gratify curiosity more than relations of +marvellous events that happen in succession, and in circumstances +equally critical and important. The moment a ship launches into the +ocean to proceed on new discoveries, every man on board demands his +share of attention as well as the commanding officer. The story of the +black, who, with his two companions, perished on the mountains of _Terra +del Fuego_, is no less affecting than that of the murder of the poor +Indians, who set the Endeavour at defiance, and bravely opposed the +landing of the crew. + +There is not an object that presents itself either by sea or land, but +affords some degree of use or speculation. The fish that swarm about the +ship, and the fowls that present themselves in the ocean, are +indications by which the skilful mariner avails himself, either to guard +against the storm, or to prepare for land; and the reader, as +circumstances arise, either shares his danger, or partakes of his +refreshment. + +When the Endeavour is encircled in the wide ocean with rocks of coral, +her sheathing beaten off, and her false keel floating by her side, a +hole in her bottom, and the men alternately fainting at the pumps, what +heart is so callous, as not to sympathize with the despairing crew, and, +anxious for their safety, drop a tear for their deliverance? + +And what must be the joy of every feeling heart, when, after sailing +many hundred leagues, and arriving safe at Batavia, it was found that +two of her planks next the keel, and part of a third in the ship’s +bottom, were, for six feet together, rubbed thinner, by her friction +against the rocks, than the ordinary sole of a man’s shoe! + +Who that shall interest himself in the fate of Toobaiah, an Indian +priest, who voluntarily offered himself as a guide against the attacks +of the neighbouring islanders, and of the Indian youth Tayota, who +accompanied him, but must regret the death of the last, and admire the +more than Christian friendship of the former, who could not long survive +the loss of his companion? + +It is to bring together a vast variety of interesting events, and to +relate them in a narrow compass, that the present work is undertaken. +The Writers of Voyages, having a more important object in view than mere +amusement, are under the necessity of interrupting the thread of their +narrations by the workings of the ship, the bearings and distances of +the capes and bays, the latitudes and longitudes of the various stations +in which their ships cast anchor, the variations of the needle, and the +soundings of the shores; matters, though of infinite concern to future +navigators, and without which the Voyages themselves would be useless, +yet are of no moment to the generality of readers, who are curious only +to know what dangers were encountered, what adventures were met with, +what lands discovered, what people possessed them, what novelties were +seen, what new arts were practised, what wars were carried on, what +weapons and utensils were in use, and, above all, by what laws, +religion, and forms of government, the various nations were +distinguished that lie scattered round the globe. + +These subjects of entertainment the reader will find amply reported in +the course of the Volumes now presented to his view. And as the +relations are authenticated by gentlemen of known veracity, who were +eye-witnesses, and bear testimony to the truth of the facts, the reader +will find uncommon pleasure in the perusal. + + + + + THE + INTRODUCTION. + + +Previous to our entering upon the detail of the discoveries and +adventures of the English navigators who have surrounded the globe, it +may, perhaps, afford some entertainment to the curious reader, to be +made acquainted with the first steps that led to so bold an undertaking, +and with the characters of those happy geniuses, who not only conceived +the plan, but contributed not a little by their example to facilitate +the execution. + +We are told that the shadow seen in the moon in the time of her eclipse, +first pointed out to the early navigators the true figure of the earth; +and that, from this simple observation, Columbus, by revolving it in his +mind, deduced the possibility of passing round its surface, or, to speak +with more precision, of sailing from one side of the continent to the +other; for as yet one great continent, and one great ocean, with their +appendages, were thought to compose the whole material world. + +Full of this idea, he was naturally led to conclude, that, by sailing in +a direct course from any given point of land on one side, he must of +necessity arrive at another point of land in the same parallel on the +opposite side, provided his provisions were proportioned to the voyage, +and no accident from tempests or shipwreck intervened to interrupt his +progress. It was on this obvious principle that Columbus founded the +certainty of his discovery, the infallibility of which served to support +his hopes, when absolute despair had seized the greatest part of his +followers. + +It is true, that, though the figure of the earth was in effect +conceived, yet its dimensions were wholly unknown: but as the road +over-land to the eastern coasts of the continent was no secret, Columbus +was persuaded that a passage by sea by a western course, if no +intermediate lands prevented, would assuredly bring him to the same +coasts. From his knowledge, therefore, of the position of those +countries, from whence the rich productions of the East were circulated +thro’ all the kingdoms of the West, he was led to steer, first, a +south-west, and then a direct west course, which brought him among those +broken fragments of the western continent, which he at first mistook for +the islands of the Indian Ocean, and to the richest of which he imagined +another voyage would certainly open a passage. + +The discovery being once made, the principle upon which it was grounded +could no longer be concealed. Those belonging to the naval department +about the Court of Spain, who had been most violent in opposing the +undertaking, as appearing to them in no better light than as the +visionary conceit of some crack-brained projector, now assumed another +tone, and affected to speak of it as a discovery that required no +extraordinary talents to accomplish; that it was not the result of +science, but a thing that must follow of course to the first adventurer; +and that it was fortunate for Columbus that he could prevail upon their +Majesties to furnish the means to undertake it, as with such +encouragement there were not wanting officers in the royal navy much +better qualified to have conducted the enterprize, tho’ by his +unparallelled assurance he had obtained the preference. In this slight +and contemptuous manner it was the humour at Court to speak of the new +discovery; and though Columbus, after his return, was for a while +caressed by the Royal Family, yet the frequent repetition of these +indignities could not fail in time to lessen the idea of the merit of a +man who had no advocate to support his credit but the evidence of his +own superior abilities. At a court-entertainment, however, to which he +was invited, an incident happened that contributed not a little to +heighten his character, and mortify his enemies. The conversation at +table turned, as was usual, upon the importance of the new discoveries; +and though all seemed to agree that the advantages would be immense that +must inevitably result to Spain, yet little they thought was due to the +first discoverer, because any ordinary seaman, by keeping his ship’s +head to the westward, must have fallen in with the same countries. +Columbus, without seeming to regard their discourse, when dinner was +over, and the table uncovered, called for an egg, and twirling it about +with his hand, as if by way of amusement, asked if any of the company +could make that egg stand upon its little end without additional +support. The company, after trying their skill, pronounced _the thing +impossible_; when Columbus, taking it again in his hand, and bruising +the shell a little at bottom with his nail, produced it upon the table +standing upright. The company all fell a-laughing, and one cried out, +that any fool could do as much as that. I doubt not, replied Columbus, +but any of you may do it, now you have seen it done; and so may any +miserable pilot in the navy sail to the Indies, now that I have pointed +out the track; but till the issue had shewn it practicable, addressing +himself to the naval gentlemen, that, too, you pronounced an _impossible +thing_. The King and his Royal Consort, particularly the latter, were +highly pleased when they were told this story, admiring the promptness +of a mind which, ever collected, neither malice nor envy could +disconcert. + +Other navigators, equally enterprizing, tho’ less sagacious, were now +inflamed with the desire of immortalizing their names by new +undertakings; so that it is no wonder that the business of discovery +went rapidly on for a succeeding century. + +It was in 1492 that Columbus made his first expedition to the Bahama +Islands; and in 1496, John Cabbot, in the service of England, discovered +the continent of North America. + +Columbus, in his first voyage, had not yet conceived the idea of a +double continent, but believed, as we have already noted, that he had +discovered a passage by sea to those islands in the East that were +already known by the name of the East Indies; in conformity to which he +gave to the islands that he discovered the appellation of the _West +Indies_, which they retain to this day. + +In 1493, having made a second voyage, and carried his discoveries +considerably farther to the South, it is said, he received some faint +notions of a sea beyond a great land, by which the islands he had first +discovered were bounded; but it was not till after his third voyage in +1497, that he attained a sight of that continent which Cabbot had +discovered the year before. + +It may seem, from what has just been said, that the eastern passage to +the Indian Ocean had been discovered by the Portuguese; and that the +East Indies were known to that people before this western discovery by +Columbus: but, though several journies by land had been made, with a +view to the opening an advantageous commerce with the eastern countries, +by Portuguese Ambassadors well instructed in the Arabian language, by +whose address some progress had been made in that business, yet it was +not till 1495 that Bartholomew Diaz doubled the Cape of Good Hope, nor +till the year 1497 (the same year that the American continent was +discovered by Cabbot), that Don Vasquez de Gama, by steering the nearest +course, passed the Cape which Diaz had discovered, and sailed into the +Indian Ocean, where he afterwards made considerable conquests, and by +his prudent management very suddenly diverted the current of Indian +commerce into an entire new channel. The notion, therefore, that +Columbus borrowed his idea of a western passage from the discoveries +made by the Portuguese towards the East, is ill founded. These last had, +indeed, made a considerable progress in their discoveries by land; but +the passages to the Eastern and Western Indies by sea were discovered +about the same time, without the least connection or intelligence +between the respective discoverers. And here we cannot help entering our +protest against the honour ascribed to Columbus by Mr. Campbell, and +other judicious naval historians, as being the first circumnavigator, +because, as Mr. Campbell observes, “it was his [Columbus’s] opinion, +that there was a passage from the North Sea into the South, and from +thence it might be very possible to sail to the East Indies.”----That it +was the opinion of Columbus, that there was a western passage to the +East Indies is readily granted; it was his original idea: but that there +was a passage from the East Indies to Europe, without returning the same +way he went, he could have no conception of, till after the passage by +the Cape of Good Hope was discovered by the Portuguese. Had he dreamt of +an eastern passage _by sea_ to the East Indies, he would most certainly +have preferred it to a western passage, because it might have been +performed without losing sight of land; and therefore, with much less +risque than by launching into an immense unknown ocean, of which no one +could tell the extent. But his notion was, that the earth, like a bowl, +inclosed the sea, and that it could only be traversed from side to side +by water, and then from shore to shore by land. Many irrefragable proofs +of his having no conception of _sailing_ round the globe might be +adduced; but that of his returning the same way back a second time, +without his _knowing_ for certainty, or _believing_ there was any other +sea to sail upon, or having even determined the extent of that sea on +which he had already ventured so far, may serve without farther proof to +convince the intelligent reader, that Columbus had never thought of but +one sea when he undertook his discovery, and that that sea was only to +be crossed from West to East, and _vice versâ_. + +But to proceed:--Soon after the eastern passage to the Indies was laid +open, the coast of Brazil, opposite to the Cape of Good Hope, was +discovered by Cabral, a Portuguese pilot, who was driven out of his +course by stress of weather. The same coast was likewise discovered the +same year by Yannez Pinçon, who commanded a carvel that accompanied +Columbus in his first expedition to the West Indies. This man contested +the honour of the first discovery with Columbus, and insisted that it +was through his perseverance alone that land was descried, the crew of +Columbus having absolutely determined to steer back before the discovery +took place. Be that as it may, this able mariner afterwards examined the +coast from the Bay of Mexico to the Equinoctial Line, and, in the year +1500, discovered the great river of Amazons, which it was thought would +have opened a passage to the South Sea. + +In 1502, Columbus made his fourth and last expedition, when he fully +satisfied himself that the islands he had discovered were totally +disconnected from those he went in quest of, and that another continent +existed besides that which was known to Europeans. He was still, +however, of opinion, that a western passage to the old continent from +the new would be practicable, whenever a way was found to the Great Sea +by which it was surrounded: and now it is not at all improbable but that +he might foretel what afterwards came to pass, that one day or other the +whole globe might be circumnavigated, though he did not live to see it +executed. + +In 1509, the Portuguese first found the way to Sumatra, and from thence +extended their discoveries to the Moluccas. + +About this time a contest arose between the Spaniards and Portuguese, +concerning the right of possessing countries, to which neither of them +had any other claim than that of being the first Europeans who happened +to land upon their coasts: a claim of the same kind his Otaheitean +Majesty may pretend to the western part of Europe, his subject Aotourou +being incontestibly the first Tropical inhabitant that ever set foot on +that continent. This contest, however, the Pope took upon him to decide; +and, to prevent the bloody consequences that might ensue between two +such powerful competitors, he published a bull, which, at that time of +blind obedience, was held decisive, decreeing, that whatever discoveries +were made to the westward should belong to Spain, and such as were made +to the eastward, to Portugal. This seemed for a while to content both +parties; but, in 1520, Ferdinand Magellan, or Magellhanes, as Mr. +Dalrymple affects to call him, having made his famous discovery to the +Molucca Islands by a new passage, the contest was again revived, and the +competitors claimed a second time the Pope’s interposition to settle the +limits of their respective claims by more precise and determinate +boundaries. The claims of the Spaniards were now extended to near three +parts of the globe; and those of the Portuguese, which by a false +representation had been much diminished, were now to be restored, or +rather regulated by a more exact standard. The two contending powers +were to divide the globe between them, by what was then stiled a line of +demarkacion. This _line_ was to cut the globe into two hemispheres, and +was to be acknowledged a _first_ meridian: all the discoveries in the +western hemisphere were to belong to Spain; and all in the eastern to +Portugal. But still there arose a dispute about the precise spot where +this meridian line should be fixed. By the Pope’s bull it had been +placed 100 leagues to the westward of St. Antonio, one of the islands of +Cape Verde; but, by this new regulation, it was removed 270 leagues +farther to the west. This alteration was intended to deprive Portugal of +the possession of the Moluccas; but the Portuguese pilots were not to be +thus deceived: they suffered the line of demarkacion to be fixed; but, +when it was finally determined, they insisted on their right to the +Moluccas, as still within their limits, and future observations have +since confirmed their claims. But, notwithstanding the justice of their +claims (if justice can at all be admitted to exist in cases of +usurpation), the Spaniards held the Moluccas till 1529, when the +Portuguese purchased an exclusive right of trading to them by a loan of +350,000 ducats.----But to return from this digression: + +We have already observed, that the coast of Brazil, and the river of +Amazons, was first discovered by Yannez Pinçon, in 1500; but it was not +till twelve years afterwards that John de Solis discovered the river +Plate. + +In 1513, Vasco Nunez de Bilboa got sight of the Great South Sea, from +the mountains of Pancas in the province of Panama and from that time +Ferdinand Magellan, a Portuguese officer, conceived the design of +surrounding the globe, by finding a passage by which he might enter that +sea. He now began to consider the earth as divided into two continents, +with their concomitant seas; and, as a promontory was found, by the +doubling of which one continent might be visited on both sides, he made +no doubt but that another promontory existed, by which the other might +be visited in like manner. Perhaps the idea of a strait might not at +first strike his mind, till the opening at Cape Virgin suggested it. His +original thought was to coast along to the southward, as the land +trended; and by perseverance, he persuaded himself, that a boundary +would be found, by which the land of the new continent would be +terminated, though he did not, nor could not then ascertain to what +height it might reach. He had in view a nearer way to the Moluccas than +that by the Cape of Good Hope; and he at first imparted his views to the +Ministers of his Court, who, probably suspecting that by such a passage +the right to the Moluccas might be brought in question by Spain, treated +his project with a contemptuous neglect. To a man full of the importance +of such a discovery, nothing could be more mortifying. He determined, +since he was so coolly received at home, to try his fortune abroad. For +this purpose he repaired to the Court of Spain, where, after making +himself known to the leading Minister, he undertook to prove the +Moluccas, and other rich islands then reputed in the East, to be within +the Spanish line of demarkacion to the West, and by a new passage to +them he engaged to confirm the truth of what he advanced incontestibly. + +These propositions, after being properly examined, and approved by the +ablest astronomers and geographers at that time in Spain, was eagerly +embraced by the Emperor Charles the Fifth, an enterprizing Prince, who +then held the kingdom, and who gave him audience in the council-chamber +at Saragossa, and conferred upon him, and his companion Ruy Falero, the +order of St. Jago, both of whom, his Imperial Majesty honoured with the +title of _his Captains_. + +This encouragement, and these honours, could not fail to alarm the Court +of Portugal; but all the interest and opposition which Alvaro de Acasio, +the Portuguese Ambassador, could make, had no effect; the preparations +for the voyage were prosecuted with more than ordinary diligence, and +five ships were soon got in readiness to put to sea. + +But, previous to their setting sail, a difference arose concerning the +necessary forms of command, which had well nigh ruined the voyage before +it was undertaken; the honour of carrying the royal standard was +contested by Ruy Falero, and some other indignities were offered to +Magellan on account of his country. These, however, were redressed by +the interposition of the imperial authority; Ruy Falero was persuaded to +suspend his departure on account of his health, and Magellan was +declared General of the squadron, which was now committed to his sole +direction. + +On the 10th of August, 1519, this little fleet, consisting of the +Admiral’s ship; the St. Antonio, Capt. Juan de Cartagena, Vice-Admiral; +the Victoria, Capt. Luys de Mendoça, Rear-Admiral; the St. Jago, Capt. +Juan Rodriguez Serrano; and the Conception, of which Gasper de Quezada +was Master; left Cadiz, and proceeded to Teneriff, from whence they took +their departure, on the 2d of September, and on the 13th of December +arrived at Rio de Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, where they staid till +the 27th; and, after being plentifully supplied with all necessary +refreshments at a very moderate price, they weighed anchor, and +continued their voyage, in the course of which much discontent arose +concerning the track they were to steer; but on Easter evening they +entered St. Julian river, and were next day ordered on shore by the +General to hear mass. Three of the Captains refused to obey; namely, +Luys de Mendoça, Gasper de Quezado, and Juan de Cartagena, this last +being already in arrest for disrespect to his General. + +Their disobedience put Magellan on his guard. He perceived that the +majority both of officers and men were averse to the undertaking, and +that a general murmuring prevailed throughout the whole squadron. Only a +few trusty friends were ready to support their General, and willing to +follow wherever he should lead. The weather was now set in very severe, +and the Spaniards, unused to the rigour of such a climate, were hardly +to be restrained. They represented the inutility of proceeding, as they +were already in a climate too boisterous and inclement to be navigated +by Spaniards; that it could never be the Emperor’s intention to +sacrifice the lives of his subjects, without the least prospect of +advantage to the State; and that now it was manifest, though the +discovery were certain, the navigation would be impracticable, and +therefore useless. To these representations, and others more full of +asperity, Magellan coolly made answer, “that he was determined to die +rather than return back; that he should pass the winter where he then +was; and that neither provisions nor wine should be wanting to those who +would be contented with a moderate allowance; but that if any persisted +in spreading discontents, and encouraging disobedience, he knew how to +punish as well as to reward.” + +Barros says, that the three Captains _Cartagena_, _Quezada_, and +_Mendoça_, conspired together to kill Magellan, and to return and make +their report of the usage they had met with, and the hardships they had +endured in the voyage; but Magellan, considering the danger, and that in +certain circumstances _temerity_ is better than _caution_, ordered the +people of his own ship to arms; and, manning his boat with thirty trusty +friends, he clapt the Victoria aboard; and while Mendoça was reading a +letter directed to him from the General, the messenger that delivered it +stabbed him to the heart.--The moment the order was executed, the thirty +men entered to the assistance of the assassin, and quietly took +possession of the ship. This done a council of war was called, and a +conspiracy was detected, in which more than forty of the principal +people on board the several ships were found to be deeply concerned; but +Magellan, that he might not appear too sanguinary or vindictive, +sentenced _Quezada_ only to be executed, and _Cartagena_ to be left on +shore, accompanied by a French Priest; a punishment that probably was +worse than immediate death, as it subjected the criminals to hardships +which instant execution would have prevented. Mendoça and Quezada, he +ordered to be quartered as traitors, to strike the disaffected with the +greater terror. This put an end to all opposition for the present. + +When the winter months drew towards a conclusion, Magellan was vigilant +to hasten the departure of his fleet; and, as soon as the cold abated, +he dispatched Serrano to coast along the shore to make observations. +Serrano, at about twenty leagues distance, found a river a league broad +at the entrance, which he named St. Cruz, because he fell in with it on +that Saint’s day. In examining this river, and in fishing for seals, he +spent six days, at the end of which a furious storm arose, which split +his sails, and drove his ship on shore, where she bulged, and was beaten +to pieces. The crew, however, were saved, but reduced to the last +extremity for want of food. Two of the company undertook to travel over +land, to give the General notice of the miserable situation of their +fellow-sufferers; and, after 11 days fatigue, they at length surmounted +every difficulty, and accomplished their purpose. Magellan, pitying +their distresses, sent a vessel with provisions, which came seasonably +to their relief. + +The time for sailing being now come, and the ships in readiness, they +left the bay of St. Julian on the 24th of August, 1520, after setting +Juan de Cartagena, and Pedro Sanchez de Revora, the Priest, who was also +found deep in the plot, ashore on that desolate coast. They supplied +them plentifully with bread and wine; but as they were never afterwards +heard of, there can be no doubt of their perishing miserably. + +The squadron, consisting now of four ships, kept coasting along to the +southward, with imminent danger of shipwreck, till towards the latter +end of October, when they fell in with a promontory, which the General +named Cape Virgin, because it was discovered on St. Ursula’s-day. This +Cape opened an inlet, which Magellan judged favourable to his design. He +cast anchor at the entrance of the inlet, and ordered two ships to +examine its course. In five days these ships returned, and one of them +affirmed it was a strait, because the flood was greater than the ebb; +the other reported that they saw nothing but inlets and breakers. The +General, on these different relations, determined to sail into the +opening, in order to be more precisely informed. He accordingly weighed, +and came to an anchor in a commodious bay, where he first sent his skiff +with 10 men to reconnoitre the shore, and then the St. Antonio to trace +out the inlet to a certain distance. When the men returned from the +shore, they said, they had found a burying-place with more than 200 +graves, and had seen the skeleton of a whale in a cove upon the beach, +but had seen neither house nor inhabitant. The Captain of the St. +Antonio on his return gave a more flattering account. He said, he had +followed the inlet for more than 50 leagues; that its course was due +east and west; and that he made not the least doubt but that it was the +passage so much desired. This news was received with repeated +acclamations. A council was called of the chief officers and pilots, in +which a very warm debate arose, whether, in the circumstances the ships +were then in, it were better to return to Spain, having obtained the +main object of the voyage, or to proceed to complete what the General +had undertaken to perform, namely, to trace out a western passage to the +Molucca Islands. Estevan Gomez, the pilot of the St. Antonio, a man of +excellent parts and sound judgment, insisted on returning back, and +bringing another squadron to complete the discovery, alledging, that +they had still a great and unknown sea to pass, and that, if either +tempests or calms intervened to retard their passage over it, the whole +fleet must inevitably perish. His opinion was supported by the whole +council, Magellan only excepted, who declared, that, if he were sure to +be reduced to the necessity of eating the hides that covered the yards, +he would persevere in the discovery. He accordingly gave orders for +weighing anchor immediately; and, proceeding down the strait, sent the +Antonio to examine some inlets that promised a nearer passage to the +main ocean than that they were pursuing; but the pilot Gomez, and the +purser Guerra, seized and stabbed Alvara de Mesquita, the Commander, and +carried home the ship. In the mean time, Magellan supposing some +disaster had befallen her, went himself in pursuit of her; but after six +days fruitless search, he determined to continue his voyage; “and it +pleased God, says my author, that, at the end of twenty days, he entered +into the Great South Sea, and was the first who had found the passage so +much sought after, whereby the memory of this excellent Captain shall be +eternally celebrated.” + +Finding that the land trended northwards, Magellan directed his course +accordingly, that he might as soon as possible clear those cold and +dreary coasts that had caused so much murmuring among the mariners, and +so much caballing among the officers; but before he reached the Tropic +he met with most tempestuous weather, by which the three remaining ships +were very much shattered in their sails and rigging. In this passage +they discovered two uninhabited islands, St. Pedro and Tiburon, about +the situation of which mariners are still divided; and it has been +questioned, whether either of them have since been seen. + +As they approached the Line, they found the wind to stand fair. Magellan +then ordered the ships to change their course, and steer N. W. and +W. N. W. till he reached the Line. + +Harris takes notice that it was on the 28th of December when Magellan +entered the Great South Sea, and that in this wide ocean the ships that +accompanied him sailed three months and twenty days without seeing any +other land than the two islands just mentioned, which afforded them no +refreshment. At length, when they had undergone all the miseries that +human nature is capable of sustaining, from hunger, thirst, and +sickness, they fell in with the Ladrone islands, where they landed; but +where the inhabitants were such thieves that they were in fear lest +their ships should be pulled to pieces and carried away before their +faces, the crews not having strength enough left to defend either their +lives or their properties. They therefore shortened their stay among +these plunderers; and were more fortunate in their next attempt. + +On the 10th of March, landing on the island of Zamal, they found springs +of delicate water, which to them were more precious than fountains of +the choicest wines; fruit in abundance, that surpassed any they had till +then tasted; and inhabitants humane and civil, who, pitying their +distresses, brought their richest productions to relieve them. From this +island they continued to steer between the west and south-west, till +they arrived at Buthuan, or, as it has since been called, Buton, the +King of which gave them honourable entertainment. They visited several +other isles, and in all of them were well received; till at length +coming to the Isle of Mathan, they were attacked by an army of Indians, +against whom the General himself being engaged was shot with a poisoned +arrow, and afterwards pierced in the head with a lance; and thus ended +the life and actions of this gallant Commander, whose name will be +perpetuated with honour to latest posterity. After his death, a company +of his followers being invited to an entertainment on shore, were +treacherously murdered by a pretended friendly King, and only Don Juan +Serrano, of all who landed, was reserved alive, in order to procure a +large supply of fire-arms and ammunition by way of ransom; but those who +remained on board, fearful of being trepanned, would have no farther +intercourse with the perfidious infidels so that poor Serrano was left +to their mercy. Those on board the ships, 80 in number, directed their +course towards the Moluccas, and arrived at Teridore, one of the +principal of those islands, on the 8th of November, 1521. Here they were +hospitably received, and here they staid till the middle of January, +1522; and, being now come into well known seas, we shall accompany them +no farther; only remarking, that, of the whole squadron only one ship, +namely the Victoria, had the good fortune to return to Spain; and of 234 +officers and seamen, the complement at first setting out, if we except +those who returned in the St. Antonio, of whom we have no account, only +13 Spaniards survived to return to Seville. Their Commander John +Sebastian Cano was received with extraordinary marks of favour by the +Emperor, who gave him for arms the Terrestrial Globe, with this motto, +_Primus me circumdedistis_, and otherwise liberally rewarded him. The +voyage he lived to make took up three years and thirty-seven days, and +is, perhaps, the most remarkable that ever was performed. + +This voyage opened a new field for discovery; the Spaniards, who were +already settled on the western coasts of America, were very curious to +examine what countries might be situated along that vast space which +divided the new continent from the old; and accordingly Cortez, the +celebrated conqueror of Peru, fitted out two ships for the purpose, the +command of one of which he gave to Ferdinand Grijalva, the other to Don +Alvarado. + +Grijalva departed from Pageta, in 6 deg. N. lat. about the beginning of +April, 1537, and steered W. and S. W. into 29 deg. S. lat. where his +ship springing her mast, he stood again to the Line, in which tract a +mutiny happening among the crew, Grijalva and his nephew were both +assassinated; and the ship, after a passage of four months, was carried +to Papua, where falling to pieces, the crew, reduced by famine and +fatigue to seven men, took to their boat and coasted along the shore, +till being boarded by a number of Indians, it was sunk. The Spaniards, +however, were saved by the humanity of the captors, and sold for slaves. +This ship, it is affirmed, sailed 1000 leagues on both sides the Line +without seeing land. Among the islands, however, which they afterwards +fell in with before they came to Papua, was that called Isla de los +Pescadores, called in the late voyages BYRON’S ISLAND, and supposed to +be a new discovery. + +Alvarado was instructed to pursue his discoveries along the Line, +without deviating either to the right or left, farther than the most +advantageous method of navigating his ship required; and in that +direction he discovered the islands of Papua. He also discovered other +islands, named the Guelles, in 1 deg. N. lat. east and west from +Teronate, and 125 leagues from that of Moro, with Hamei, 170 leagues +from Tidore, and many others that have since been thought new +discoveries. After his return, he was again employed upon services of +the like kind, and was instrumental in establishing the trade of +Manilla. + +But of all the Spanish discoveries that have been made, or pretended to +have been made, in the South Seas, that of Juan Fernandez, who first +pointed out the way from Lima to Chili by sailing to the westward, _if +real_, is by far the most important. This pilot, (the same who +discovered the island which still bears his name) in the latitude of 40 +deg. S. was brought, as it is said, in courses between west and +south-west, upon the coast of a continent, from what he could judge, +very fertile and delightful, inhabited by white people, hospitable, and +well-disposed, of a middle stature, dressed in very fine cloaths, and so +peaceable and civil, that, in every way they could express, they +endeavoured to gratify the strangers, and to accommodate them with the +best things their country afforded, the fruits whereof were excellent +and abounding in the greatest profusion. It is added, that, being +over-joyed with having discovered the coast of that great continent so +much talked of, and so ardently sought after, he returned to Chili +intending to make a second voyage properly fitted out to improve this +fortunate discovery to his own and his country’s enrichment; but before +he could persuade his friends to give entire credit to his report, he +died, and the secret of the precise situation of his new continent +perished with him, for it has never since been found; though Mr. +Alexander Dalrymple, author of an Historical Collection of Voyages to +the South Pacific Ocean, whose opinion is of no small weight, is +persuaded that Fernandez did discover the SOUTHERN CONTINENT, and that, +whenever it is again visited, it will be no new discovery, but a +confirmation of the existence of that land which has already been found. + +But, besides this dubious discovery, there is still another, which has +not yet been clearly ascertained, and about which geographers are much +divided. This discovery is attributed to Alvaro Mendana, who, in 1567, +is said to have fallen in with a cluster of islands abounding with gold +and pearl, which were named by him the Isles of Salomon; and for the +settling of which an unsuccessful attempt was made by Mendana himself; +and a second strongly solicited by Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, the chief +pilot who accompanied that General, and who afterwards made a voyage +thither on his own account, in which he made many discoveries. + +It was in April, 1595, that Mendana left Callao, in Peru, to settle the +Salomon Isles. He had with him two large ships, a galleasta, and a +frigate, on board of which were embarked from Lima 400 followers, +including women and children. Of this embarkation Lope de la Vega, his +brother-in-law, was Admiral; Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, chief pilot; and +Pedro Merino Manriquez, Maitre de Campo. According to Figueroa, who +wrote an account of this voyage, the Admiral’s ship was named the St. +Isabella; Mendana’s ship, the St. Jerome; the galleasta, St. Philippe; +and the frigate, St. Catalina: of the two last the Commanders were Capt. +Philip Corço, and Lieut. Alonzo de Leyla. In this expedition Mendana was +accompanied by his Lady Donna Isabella Barretos, with her three +brothers; and, after parting company with the Admiral’s ship the very +night they came in sight of the island on which they settled, Mendana +cast anchor in a bay which he called _la Graciosa_, and the island he +named Santa Cruz. Here on the 8th of October, the Maitre de Campo, and +Thomas de Ampuero, were hanged, and Ensign Jean de Buy beheaded, for +mutinous behaviour; and here Mendana himself died the 18th of the same +month. Don Lorenzo, brother to Donna Isabella, who, by the loss of the +Admiral, had succeeded as Captain-General, died also on the 2d of +November; and, in less than seven days after, Father Antonio de Serra, +Chief Priest, and Juan de Espinosa, his Vicar. In short, from change of +climate, food, and customs; from labour, going in the sun, being wet +without having wherewithal to shift themselves, sleeping on the ground, +and from other disorders and sufferings, dangerous diseases attacked the +whole company; they began to die a-pace, it being lamentable to see them +in their distress creeping into huts, some delirious, and others at the +last gasp; some going to the ships to seek health; others shifting from +the ships to the shore; but no remedy, nor any physician to apply to for +relief. In this calamitous state things were, when Donna Isabella, on +the 18th of October, broke up the settlement; and embarking the few +people that remained alive, on board the St. Jerome, the frigate, and +the galleasta, they set sail, intending to pursue their course to +Manilla: but the frigate soon lost company, and, it is said, was +afterwards found on a desart coast with all her sails set, and the +people on board dead and rotten and the galleasta put into an island +near the coast of Mindanao. The St. Jerome, however, after suffering +unspeakable hardships, got to Manilla, where Donna Isabella married Don +Ferdinando de Castro, and returned in his ship to New Spain the very +next year. The Admiral’s ship was never heard of.--Thus ended this +unfortunate expedition. + +The island of Santa Cruz, in which this settlement was attempted, is +said to be 100 leagues in circumference, and to lie E. S. E. and +W. N. W. in lat. 10 deg. 20 min. S. distant from Lima 1800 leagues. They +cast anchor on the north side of it, in a harbour, to the north of which +is a volcano, or burning mountain, that from its top frequently casts +forth fire, and from the inside of which proceeds a noise sometimes +louder than thunder. To the west of it the harbour is a small island +about four leagues in compass, separated from the great island by sunken +rocks and banks of sand. The port is formed at the bottom of the bay by +a great river, and the country round it is fine and plentiful. A more +exact description than this, one would think, could not have been given. + +Quiros, who navigated Donna Isabella, first to Manilla, and afterwards +accompanied her to New Spain, was so charmed with the beautiful +appearance of these enchanting islands, that he continued for the space +of ten years incessantly to weary the Court of Spain with memorial after +memorial to renew the settlement of them; and at length he +prevailed.----Previous to his voyage, he spent several months in +building two ships and a zebra, the stoutest and best equipped with men, +provisions, and warlike stores, of any that had ever been fitted out in +New Spain. He was accompanied by six Franciscan Fathers, with whom he +took his departure on the 21st of December, 1605; and sailing without +any material incident till the 26th of January 1606, he on that day fell +in with an island to the south-west, just 1000 leagues from the coast of +Peru, in lat. 25 deg. S. which island he unluckily found uninhabited. +From this island he sailed on different courses, passing several +inaccessible islands, till the 10th of February, on which day a sailor +joyfully cried out, _Land a-head!_ Here, on their landing, they +surprized a woman, but so old in appearance, that it was matter of +astonishment that she could stand upright. In her youthful days it was +easy to perceive that she had been of a graceful mien, and she still +retained a dignity about her that shewed she was of quality. Being asked +by signs to go on board, she complied without hesitation; and when +there, she eat of whatever was given her, and received presents with a +becoming ease. After cloathing this lady very fine, they set her on +shore; and, on her landing, the people flocked about her, and among them +a tall, stout, well-made man, who had on his head a plume of feathers, +and by his deportment appeared to be a Chief. Him they endeavoured to +entice on board; but, when he came to the ship’s side, fearing +treachery, he refused to enter. Quiros directed that no force might be +used, made him some presents, and dismissed him. This island by +observation was in 17 deg. 40 min S. and was named by Quiros Sagitaria. +They left it on the 12th, after some skirmishes with the inhabitants, +and, passing by several other islands, in which they could procure no +refreshment, on the 2d of March they fell in with an island which +promised fair to supply their wants. Here on their attempting to land +they were accosted by about 100 Indians, the tallest, genteelest, +whitest, and strongest-made people they had ever yet seen; but, though +they shewed fair in countenance, they were in fact the cruelest enemies +they had to encounter in the whole voyage. One of them in a swift canoe +approached the ship singly, and, brandishing his lance, made those kind +of contortions with his face, arms, and legs, by which Parkinson has +remarked the South-Sea Indians provoke their enemies to battle; he even +mounted the balcony of the Admiral’s ship, and with his lance made a +thrust at one of the officers on the quarter-deck, with an intent to +kill him, and instantly leaping into his canoe rowed off at a great +rate. He repeated his visits and his insolence; but it was not long +before they shot him dead. While this was passing on board the Admiral, +the zebra, that had cast anchor near the shore, was still in a worse +situation, surrounded by a multitude of fierce barbarians, who, having +fastened a rope to her head, were endeavouring to drag her on shore; but +perceiving that the people on board were preparing to cut the rope, they +pushed a little off, and were fastening it to the cable, when a volley +of small arms was discharged among them, by which some were killed, some +wounded, and all terribly frightened: this, however, failed of the +desired effect; for neither kindness nor chastisement could prevail upon +them to furnish the ships with water or provisions; so that they were +obliged to set sail without a supply of either. This island lies north +and south, and was called by Quiros the Island of Handsome People. + +They now pursued their course for the island of Santa Cruz without +interruption till the 7th of April, when they discovered land bearing +W. N. W. high, and black like a volcano; but night coming on, they stood +off till next morning, and then sent the zebra to look out for a safe +harbour for the ships to cast anchor. On the 9th she returned, having +succeeded; and about noon the same day the ships were moored in 25 +fathom water, to the great joy of the desponding crew. The boats were +instantly dispatched to make peace with the natives; and before night, +they returned with water, plantains, cocoa-nuts, potatoes, palmetos, and +sugar-canes, than which the riches of Potosi could not have been more +welcome. They next day discovered a fort, constructed by art, the +materials of coral stone, in which were about 70 houses surrounded by +the sea, and designed as a refuge from enemies, whenever an invasion was +threatened by the warlike inhabitants of the adjoining country. To this +fort they made their next approach, and, lest they should meet with +opposition, they took care to be properly armed; but the inhabitants +were desirous of nothing so much as peace, and received them hospitably: +so different are the dispositions of people inhabiting the same climate, +and separated only by a portion of the sea. Here they were supplied at +an easy rate with wood and water, in the shipping of which they were +assisted by the friendly natives; and here they had plenty of the fruits +and provisions which the country produced; in return for which, the +grateful Spaniards seized four of the natives, with a view to carry them +off; but in spite of their vigilance three made their escape, and only +one continued with them, who, being a slave where he was, cared but +little what master he served in that capacity. + +At the end of seven days, the people being pretty well refreshed, Quiros +again set sail, and on the 21st of April passed an island in lat. 12 +degrees S. which the Indians called Tucopia. They now approached the +islands of which they were in quest; and on the 25th a consultation was +held on board the Admiral, to consider which of the lands in sight they +would chuse to settle, when it was concluded not to return to Santa +Cruz, but to stand to the southward in search of that great land, of +which they had heard so much. This they did, passing many islands, some +of considerable extent, some small but very populous, and all of them +exhibiting a most delightful prospect of woods, lawns, inclosures, and +water-falls, till at length in lat. 14 deg. 50 min. S. they came to a +land stretching from east to west, to the extent of which they could see +no end. On the zebra’s approaching this land, the people on board were +not a little surprized to see an Indian come down from the mountains, +and without invitation throw himself into the sea, and make towards the +ship. A boat was immediately hoisted out, in order to take him up; but +as he appeared spirited and strong, and made the usual contortions by +way of defiance, it was judged proper to confine him, by clapping a +chain upon his legs to prevent mischief. In this manner they purposed to +have carried him on board the Admiral, who wanted to get some native in +his power to use with kindness, in order to facilitate a peace; but, +perceiving their intent, and concluding that his imprisonment was a +prelude to his death, he seized in his passage a favourable opportunity, +and snapping his chains with his hands, leapt suddenly into the sea. +Night coming on, it was in vain to pursue him, and accordingly they +continued their course to acquaint the Admiral with what had happened. +They had scarce been an hour on board, when the watch on the forecastle +called out, _A voice!_ and knowing it to be that of a native, they +instantly handed him up, when, to the great surprize of the boat’s crew, +who had just come on board, they perceived, by the remains of the chain +about his leg, that it was the man who had made his escape. He was quite +exhausted with swimming, and chose rather to surrender to the strangers +than perish in the sea. He was kindly received, had wine and sweet-meats +given him, put to bed, and in the morning was richly cloathed in +taffety, and sent on shore: in return for which civilities, he caused a +number of hogs to be sent on board, with plantains and other fruits; but +at the same time he gave his benefactors to understand, that he was not +to be diverted from the defence of his country by the dissembled +kindness of pretended friends. When, therefore, the Spaniards attempted +to land, a few Indians, headed by this gallant Chief, appeared upon the +shore, and, feigning to conduct them to an open beach, led them along +the skirts of a wood, where a numerous body of natives lay concealed, +who watching their opportunity, let fly a volley of poisoned arrows, by +which, however, one Spaniard only was wounded in the face. The Spaniards +returned the compliment, by a discharge of musquetry; but the opposition +they expected from these _uncivilized barbarians_ (for so they are +called for defending their country) deterred them from prosecuting their +design. They returned to their ships without setting foot on shore; and +on their return, finding themselves mistaken, it was thought proper +again to put to sea, in search of that great country and that friendly +people, of whole happy situation they had heard so much. + +On the 30th of April, about three in the afternoon, steering south-west, +they discovered land right a-head, and before night came up with it. In +the morning the zebra was sent along shore to examine the soundings, and +after twelve hours absence returned, and made report, that they had +found a spacious bay, and had exchanged some trifles with a people of an +enormous size, who, nevertheless, appeared to be good natured, and +desirous of peace. This news gave universal satisfaction. The ships +followed their pilot; and it being the day of St. Philip and St. James +when they arrived, they called the bay by that name. Here they found a +most delightful port, situated between two noble rivers (the one they +named the Jordan, and the other Salvador); the people numerous and +friendly; the climate mild and serene; and the air so wholesome that in +a few days all the sick recovered. The soil they afterwards found +fruitful to a degree of luxuriance; the woods and plains abounding with +herds and beasts of various kinds, and the seas well stored with fish. +In short, nothing was wanting to complete their wishes, but a more +numerous company to secure possession. On their first landing the +Spaniards were hospitably received; but when it was perceived, by their +overtures for peace, that they intended to prolong their stay, a +jealousy arose that they came with no good design; and they were treated +afterwards as enemies and invaders. All friendly intercourse very soon +ceased; the market for provisions was stopt; and nothing was to be +obtained to subsist upon but by force or stratagem. While they were on +these terms, an incident happened that it was thought would at once have +put an end to their fears and their hopes. Among the vegetables which +grew wild, and on which they were obliged chiefly to live, they had +gathered some poisonous plants, of which the people in general had +eaten, and all who had eaten soon began to feel the direful effects. The +symptoms were the more alarming, as all parts of the flesh seemed to +partake of the noxious quality of the plants. The ships were like the +hospitals of a city infested with the plague, where the numbers of the +healthy were not sufficient to administer to the infirmities of the +sick. Nothing, in short, was to be heard but lamentations and +supplications; all expected to die without remedy. But their fears, as +it fell out, were greater than their danger; for, after a certain time, +the violence of the poison abated, and the sick were restored to a more +vigorous state of health than they enjoyed before. But they were scarce +relieved from this misfortune, when another succeeded. Despairing of +ever being able to reconcile themselves to the natives at this port, +they set sail, after having founded a city between the _Jordan_ and the +_Salvador_, to which they had given the name of _New Jerusalem_. +Coasting towards the south with a view to find a more fortunate +settlement, they were overtaken by a most dreadful storm, in which the +ships were separated. The Admiral was driven off the coast, and never +again returned; but the other ship, and the zebra, with difficulty +returned to port. What afterwards became of them we are not told. +Quiros, after attempting in vain to rejoin them, made the best of his +way to New Spain and on his arrival undertook a voyage to Old Spain, +where he continued to solicit the Court for a new embarkation; but he +died before he could obtain it. + +From this time the Spaniards seem to have given over all thoughts of a +settlement in those islands, to the true situation of which they appear +at this day to be strangers. Neither have other nations been more +successful in their attempts to discover them; for unless (as Mr. +Alexander Dalrymple has endeavoured to prove in his Historical +Collection of Voyages to the South Pacific Ocean) they are the same with +those which Dampier has dignified with the name of New Britain, no +others have yet been found that answer to their description. To Mr. +Dalrymple’s data there can be only one objection, and that is this: +Quiros, in his memorial to the Court of Spain, reporting the voyage of +Mendana, says, that, in prosecuting his discoveries, he fell in with +four islands [the Marquessas], inhabited by so good a people, that there +is no account of any other having ever been found equal to them; and +that these islands were 1000 leagues from Lima, 650 from the nearest +coast of New Spain, and 1000 leagues from New Guinea. Here the distance +from Lima to New Guinea is precisely fixed by Quiros; but at the same +time it is to be noted, that the distance from Lima to the isles in +question are as precisely fixed; and in the same memorial they are said +to be between the 7th and 12th degrees of south latitude, 1500 leagues +from the city of Lima. Thus they are placed by Quiros, precisely in the +midway between the Marquessas and New Guinea; whereas the isles called +New Britain are divided by Dampier from New Guinea to the eastward only +by a strait. + +But this by the bye.--We shall now proceed to relate what other material +discoveries have been made by other nations in the southern hemisphere, +particularly by the Dutch:--Le Maire and Schouten left the Texel on June +the 14th, 1615; and passing Strait Le Maire January 25, 1616, on the +10th of April the same year fell in with an island in latitude 15 deg. +12 min. S. 3700 miles from the coast of Peru, to which they gave the +name of DOG ISLAND. Pursuing their course to the isles of Salomon, on +the 16th they came to another island, in lat. 14 deg. 46 min. S. to +which they gave the name of WATERLAND, because in this island, tho’ +uninhabited, they found a supply of fresh water, and some herbs, of +which they gathered sackfuls to make pottage to refresh the men, who +were now much afflicted with the scurvy. + +On the 3d of May they saw many dolphins, the first they had seen in the +South Seas. + +On the 11th, after passing several uninhabited islots, they discovered +an island in lat. 16 deg. 10 min. S. where they had an engagement with +the natives, whom they found to be great thieves; they were, however, +very handsome; their limbs well-proportioned, of large stature, quite +naked, excellent swimmers, and very active. This island they called +Cocos Island, because they were here plentifully supplied with that +fruit. A league from it lay another, which they named Traitors Island, +because the inhabitants had formed a design to cut them off. + +On the 18th, having sailed near 5000 miles from the coast of Peru, +without discovering the least appearance of a southern land, or falling +in with the so much celebrated isles of Salomon, and being in lat. 16 +deg. 5 min. S. it was there considered in full council what course to +steer next; when it was determined to return home by the well known +track to the northward of New Guinea. + +In pursuit of this resolution they changed their course to the N. N. W. +and on the 22d, being in lat. 14 deg. 56 min. S. they fell in with an +island which, by its beautiful appearance, promised fair to afford +refreshment. Sending the shallop to sound, they found 50 fathom, sand +and shells, in a kind of bason over-against a small river issuing from a +valley edged with trees. This gave unspeakable pleasure to the whole +company. + + [Illustration: _Horn-Island._] + +On the 23d they moored the ship; and, while they were yet busy, they +were visited by whole troops of the natives, who expressed their +admiration a thousand different ways. At length, a venerable old man +approached the ship, and with great gravity made an oration, at the +conclusion of which, the people who surrounded him expressed their +approbation by general acclamations. A traffic for provisions now +commenced; and, after a pretty sharp skirmish, in which half a dozen +natives were killed by the musquetry, the same was continued till their +departure with great civility and honesty. The Chiefs of the island, +after an exchange of hostages, came on board, and were magnificently +entertained. They were given to understand, that the ships were in want +of water, and they made their people assist in supplying their wants. +They caused hogs, dogs, fowls, and fruits, to be sent in plenty, which +were exchanged for nails, beads, dolls, and looking-glasses. As a +present, when the Chiefs returned to shore, they sent to the Commander +two hogs ready drest; they had taken out the entrails, and put in the +place of them burning stones, to roast them in the inside, and sweet +herbs to make them savoury. In short, their manners, their desires, +their behaviour, their customs, their habitations, and their arts, so +exactly correspond with what has lately been reported of the inhabitants +of the supposed newly discovered islands in the South Seas, that there +does not remain a doubt, but that this island which the Dutch named +Hoorne Island, together with the adjoining island which they called the +Island of Good Hope, are two of those that lie between the 10th and 17th +degrees of south latitude, of which our late voyagers have given so +flattering an account. One particular reported by the Dutch is +strikingly characteristic: The men, say they, were valiant, and large in +stature, the tallest among them surpassing very much in height the +tallest of ours; _their women were not handsome, but so totally +destitute of shame, that what modesty requires to be done in privacy, +they performed with their men in public, by way of entertainment, before +their Kings_. In the new map accompanying Hawkesworth’s Voyages, King +George’s Island is placed in the latitude of 14 deg. 29 min. S. long. +148 deg. 50 min. W. In the Dutch maps Hoorne Island is placed in lat. 14 +deg. 56 min. S. long. 83 deg. 30 min. W. from Arica, on the coast of +Peru, which answers to long. 153 deg. 30 min. W. from London, being only +2 deg. 40 min. more to the west, and 27 min. more to the south than King +George’s Island; a difference very inconsiderable indeed! allowing for +the difference of time from 1616 to 1765, and for the improvement that +has been made in the instruments of navigation during that period, +particularly in those for ascertaining longitude. + +On the 1st of June, as has been already observed, they took their +departure from Hoorne Island, highly pleased with their kind reception, +and on the 25th came in sight of the coast of New Guinea. + +We should have mentioned, that Schouten was of opinion, that Hoorne +Island was one of the Salomon Isles, mentioned by Quiros, none other +they had met with having answered so well to the Spanish description of +them. + +The next remarkable voyage, undertaken professedly with a view to +discovery in the southern hemisphere, is that of Abel Jansan Tasman, +who, in 1642, sailed from Batavia in the East Indies, and touched at the +Isles of Mauritius, in latitude 20 deg. 20 min. South; long. 78 deg. 47 +min. East. On the 8th of October, the same year, he left the Mauritius, +and, keeping a southerly course, on the 24th of September fell in with +the land, to which he gave the name of Anthony Van Diemen’s land, in 42 +deg. 25 min. S. long. 163 deg. 50 min. E. Here they met with much bad +weather, which obliged them to steer eastward; and on the 1st of +December they anchored in lat. 43 deg. 10 min. S. long. 167 deg. 55 min. +E. in a bay to which they gave the name of Frederic Henry’s bay. Their +whole force consisted only of a small ship about 300 tons, named the +Hemskirk, and the Zee Haan pink for examining the coast. Here they +landed, but could discover no human being, though they had reason to +believe the country was inhabited. They gathered plenty of good +pot-herbs that grew wild, and saw trees full two fathom and an half in +the girt, and from 60 to 75 feet high, in which steps had been cut for +the purpose of climbing them, five feet distant from each other, and +from this circumstance they concluded that the inhabitants must be men +of gigantic stature. + +On the 5th of December, Tasman pursued his course in search of the +Salomon Isles, and on the 13th had sight of a very high and mountainous +country, now well known by the name of New Zealand. By its lofty +appearance, he judged it to be the southern continent and coasted it +along to the north eastward, till on the 18th of December, he came to a +spacious bay, three or four miles in breadth, in lat. 40 deg. 49 min. S. +long. 191 deg. 41 min. from whence he could discern on the shore men of +a strong robust make, partly clothed, and partly naked, to whom he made +signals, inviting them on board, but none of them would venture to +approach within the reach of a peteraro. It was therefore resolved to go +to them; but before that resolution could be carried into execution, the +barbarians made an attack upon the Zee Haan’s boat, and murdered most of +the crew, in the manner related in the course of the work. + +Not caring to sacrifice any more of his people against a barbarous race +of manslayers, he weighed anchor, and pursued his voyage along the coast +till he came to an island in latitude 34 deg. 25 min. S. which he named +THREE KINGS ISLAND, where some of his people landed, and where they saw +at a distance about 40 men of an uncommon stature, who called to them in +a very gruff tone of voice, and approached them hastily with prodigious +strides. The Dutchmen, being few in number, thought fit to retreat. +Their business being that of discovery, not of war, the Captain thought +fit to quit that inhospitable coast, and direct his course to the +islands of Cocos or Hoorne, where he was sure of refreshing his men, and +supplying their wants without danger of bloodshed, happy that he could +find a passage into an open sea. On this coast, however, he observed +many fair plantations, handsomely laid out, and to all appearance well +cultivated. + +On the 19th of January, 1643, he discovered three islands, to which he +gave names. The southernmost he called Pylstaart’s Island, the +middlemost Amsterdam, and the most northerly Middleburgh. This last lay +in lat. 21 deg. 20 min. S. long. 205 deg. 20 minutes. At these islands, +which seemed remote from any other land, they trafficked for provisions; +and the inhabitants, who were of a tawney complexion, and somewhat above +the common size, behaved very civilly, and shewed no signs of a hostile +disposition. Among the natives of these islands came a lusty man with a +St. Thomas’s arm, and a woman with a natural beard. A venerable old man +came also among the rest, and made an oration; after which a croud of +men and women, young and old, came on board with all kinds of +provisions. It is remarkable, that, among all the islands in the South +Seas, the only tame four-footed animals are hogs and dogs, and of these +the inhabitants here had plenty. They found another island at no great +distance, equally abounding in the usual productions, besides being +plentifully supplied with water. It appears strange to us, that the +people in those hot climates can subsist without fresh water; yet nature +seems in part to have supplied that defect by furnishing a fruit that +both allays thirst and assuages hunger, and that too without either art +or labour. By vegetables suited to their subsistence, it should seem +that the animals, indigenous to the climate, are nourished and made fat. +Indeed, where springs, brooks, and lakes are wanting, the forests have +few, if any, inhabitants; but if we may credit the relations of +voyagers, the people have hogs and dogs, where they have neither river, +well, or lake; for though in Amsterdam Island, the strangers might have +purchased 100 hogs a day for a few baubles, yet a can of fresh water was +not to be procured at any rate. In an island, called by the natives +Annamokka, but by the Dutch Rotterdam, water was found in plenty, yet it +was no better inhabited than the islands before mentioned, which seemed +to be wholly without. Rotterdam Island is placed in lat. 20 deg. 15 min. +S. long. 206 deg. 19 min. To this island they repaired to take in water, +and there they compleated their stock of fresh provisions, finding the +people courteous and civil, though somewhat inclined to be thievish. +Being now fully refreshed and provided, without making any further +discoveries worth relating, they returned to Java, by the way of New +Guinea. + +Jacob Roggewein was the next Dutchman who sailed professedly on the +business of discovery. He was furnished by their East-India Company with +three ships, namely, the Eagle, the Tienhoven, and the African Galley: +with these he set sail from Amsterdam, July the 16th, 1721, and towards +the latter end of November came in sight of the coast of Brazil. After a +few days stay in the neighbourhood of Rio de Janeiro, he weighed, and +went in quest of Hawkins’s Maidenland, which is said to lie in 30 deg. +S. but not being able to find it, he pursued his course towards the +straits, till on the 21st of December, in lat. 40 deg S. the ships met +with a violent storm, in which the Tienhoven lost company. About the +beginning of January, Roggewein discovered a large island 200 leagues in +circuit, in lat. 52 deg. S. long. 95 deg. W. about 80 leagues from the +coast of America. He named this island BELGIA AUSTRALIS, and it is the +same now known by the name of Falkland’s Island. Leaving this island to +windward, he passed the strait of Le Maire, and on the 24th of February +came in sight of Juan Fernandez, where he fortunately found the +Tienhoven, that island having been the place appointed to rendezvous in +case of separation. + +There the ship continued three weeks, and sailed from thence about the +middle of March, steering W. N. W. in search of Davis’s Land, which, +however, they could not find. Neither has that or Hawkins’s Maiden Land +ever been seen by any other navigator, except the first discoverers. +Being in lat. 28 deg. S. long. 268 deg. they saw many birds and other +tokens of high land, but to the astonishment of the Admiral came in +sight of none till they had sailed 12 leagues farther west. They then +discovered an island, which they called EASTER-ISLAND, because they came +in sight of it on Easter-day. They found this island well inhabited. The +first man that came on board was painted with various kinds of figures, +was of a brown complexion, with large ears, so long that they hung down +to his shoulders. He was tall, robust, active, of an agreeable +countenance, and lively disposition. They offered him wine, but he threw +it in his eyes. They gave him meat, cloathed him, and sent him on shore, +but afterwards killed him in a skirmish with his countrymen. On this +island they observed many idols, and saw one man quite white, whom they +took to be a priest. He had pendents in his ears a pound weight each. On +landing 150 in number, the natives crouded so close upon them, that they +were forced to fire upon them to keep them off. By this discharge +several were killed, and many wounded. These poor people, seeing their +friends bleed, and fall dead, filled the air with doleful cries and +lamentations; and brought offerings of fruits, roots, and fowls, to +appease the wrath of the invaders. To implore the bodies of their +murdered friends, they cast themselves on the earth, and made other +signs of supplication. They were indulged in their timidity, and it was +held a crime to approach a Dutchman without reverence; when they brought +them presents, they laid them at their feet. + +This country was full of inclosures, and seemed neatly cultivated. The +people had coverings of a manufacture that felt soft like silk. The +women in general were painted with a rouge far surpassing in brightness +any thing of that colour known in Europe; they were very obliging, and +enticed the strangers to every kind of familiarity both by their looks +and gestures. Their idols were chiefly of stone, well-proportioned, and +wrought with exquisite workmanship. While they lay at anchor at this +delightful island, a storm arose, which prevented the Admiral’s design +of extending his researches to the remoter parts of it, as it appeared +diversified with woods, forests, lawns, gardens, and cultivated fields; +and in every respect well supplied with necessaries for the refreshment +of ships bound to the southern lands; but the fury of the storm +increased so fast, that those on shore were glad to recover their ships. +They were scarce embarked when the billows rose to such a height as to +make it dangerous to hazzard their security to the anchors with which +they were moored; they, therefore, instantly weighed and put to sea, +and, as the wind blew fair, they proceeded at a great rate towards the +bad sea of Schouten, to which they were bound. After a run of 800 +leagues from _Easter-Island_, they got sight of an island in latitude 15 +deg. 45 min. S. which they took to be _Dog-Island_, discovered by +Schouten, and therefore did not stay to examine it. + +The trade-wind began now to shift, and to veer about to the south-west, +by which the ships in the night were driven among a cluster of islands, +and the African galley being a-head was jammed between the rocks, of +which a more particular account will be found in the course of the Work. + +These islands were situated between the 15th and 16th degrees of south +latitude; and Roggewein’s _Pernicious Island_ is no doubt the same with +that where Commodore Byron found the carved head of a rudder that had +belonged to a Dutch long-boat, and where he also found a piece of +hammered iron, a piece of brass, and some small iron tools, which the +ancestors of the present race of inhabitants had obtained from this ship +after her shipwreck. + +Here the crews of the remaining ships grew troublesome and unruly. They +had already been out ten months, and had experienced nothing but +hardships, without the least prospect of advantage, either to themselves +or country. A council was therefore called, and it was determined to +return home by way of the East Indies. On quitting Pernicious Island +they fell in with a small island, which they called Aurora, because it +was discovered at break of day and soon after with another small island, +which they called Vesper, because they came in sight of it in the +evening. About twenty-five leagues to the westward of Pernicious Island, +they found themselves entangled among a cluster of islands, which they +called the Labyrinth, because it was some time before they could +disengage the ships from the rocks and shoals with which they were +surrounded. Having providentially escaped this imminent danger, they +continued their course to the westward; and, after some days sail, fell +in with an island, which by its beautiful appearance promised some +refreshment. They saw many natives with lances and long pikes passing +and repassing along the shore, and they sent two boats well manned to +speak with them, and to encourage them to trade. Their endeavours, +however, were ineffectual, till, by killing some and dispersing the +rest, they made good their landing. When they had gained the shore, the +savages seemed more tractable; they even assisted them in gathering +herbs, and bringing them water; the women, in particular, appeared +enamoured with them, and by many alluring ways endeavoured to gain their +confidence; but they were to the last degree deceitful. Being decoyed +into an ambuscade the savages surrounded them on all sides and, +notwithstanding a brisk fire was kept up, which killed many, and wounded +more, not a Dutchman that fell into the snare escaped unwounded. After +this misfortune it was with reluctance that any one ventured ashore to +look for refreshments. This island they called Recreation, on account of +its salutary herbs, and it is placed in lat. 16 deg. S. and in long. 285 +deg. The natives were of the middle size, but strong and well-made, +lively, and of a bold undaunted spirit. Their bodies were painted, and +covered with a kind of net, which they wrapt about them decently enough; +The women were covered from head to foot with a very pretty stuff that +felt soft like silk; their complexion was dark, with shining black hair, +very white teeth, and brilliant eyes; and to sailors who had long been +at sea they were not a little inviting. The third day after they left +this island, they fell in with several islands at once, to which they +gave the name of Bauman’s Islands, where the inhabitants were altogether +as courteous and civil as those they had left had been treacherous and +cruel. They came and trafficked with great good-nature and honesty, and +were to appearance as fair and beautiful as those in the most celebrated +parts of Europe. They now thought themselves near the islands which +Dampier has named New Britain; but it was many days sail before they +came in sight of them, in which interval the scurvy made dreadful +havock. The sailors were very desirous of staying in these islands to +refresh, and to recover their strength; but the Commander, who had other +views, pursued his course to the East Indies with all imaginable +dispatch. + +Thus, all this grand expedition, by which the expectations of the +Commander in Chief and his employers had been raised to a very high +pitch, came to nothing. The men were dissatisfied with their officers +for going so far, and the officers with their Commander for not going +farther. The existence of a southern continent still remained as +doubtful as ever; and so it continues at this period, June 22, 1774. + +Since the above was written, the Adventure, who accompanied Capt. Cook +in the Resolution on a new voyage, is arrived, and reports, that they +had sailed between the 55th and 67th degrees of south latitude, but had +found no land; so that if any land lies farther to the southward, it +must be uninhabitable. + + [Illustration: Decorative Image.] + + + + + LIST + OF + SUBSCRIBERS. + + + A. + + Mr. Thomas Adams, Tower + Ralph Adye, Esq; Swallow-street + Roger Ap-Williams, Esq; ditto + Mr. Luke Adlington + Mr. Michael Angelo + Mr. John Ainsworth + Mr. Aldwinckle + Mr. Anderson + John Ayscough, Esq; + Mr. Francis Armstrong, Bow + Mr. Matth. Akenside, Kensington + Mr. Peter Ambler + Mr. Jeremiah Alcock + Mr. Ralph Andrews, Holborn + Mr. Christopher Appleby + Mr. John Atkinson + Mr. Allen + + B. + + Sir George Booth + Mr. Bristow, Lewes + Mr. John Bruckshaw, Royal Exchange + Mr. James Blackburn, ditto + Mr. Wm. Benson, Teddington + Mr. Denham Berry, Victualling-office + Mr. Richard Barwick + Mr. Banks + Mr. Thomas Buchanan + William Blackwell, Esq; + Thomas Broxholm, Esq; + Mr. Wm. Brooke, St. John’s lane + Mr. Richard Butler + Mr. Wm. Barnes, Nightingale-lane + Mr. James Bicknell, Hackney + Mr. Andrew Brocklesby + Mr. Philip Bristow + Mr. Richard Bennet, West Smithfield + Mr. Nicholas Bond, Lambeth Marsh + Mr. Robert Birchall + + C. + + Mr. Cobby, Lewes + Mr. Joseph Cox, Chelsea + Mr. Edw. Chandler, Knightsbridge + Mr. Coulston, Cavendish-squ. + Mr. Cadell + Capt. Cookson, Crown-street + Mr. John Coventry, Red Cross-street + Mr. John Collinson, Gravel-lane + Mr. Coleman, Clare-market + Mr. Wm. Curtis, Hogsdon + Mr. Anth. Clarke, Shoreditch + Mr. Ezekiel Clements + Mr. Stephen Cameron + Mr. Cooke + Mr. Collyer + Mr. Cockshute + + D. + + Mr. Bon. Dobree, East Cheap + Mr. Thos. Draper, Westmin. + Mr. Jos. Dowglass, Long-Acre + Mr. Edw. Dobson, Old-street + Mr. John Davis, John-street + Mr. Davis, Castle-court + Mr. John Day, Castle lane + Mr. David Davies + Mr. Josias Dugdale, Little-Britain + Mr. John Dobson + Mr. Dobson, Oxford-road + Mr. Drinkwater, ditto + Mr. James Dupont + Mr. Henry Dyson + Mr. De Jersey + + E. + + Mr. James Evans + Mr. Evans + Mr. Thomas Edwards, Friday-street + Mr. Elston, Wapping + Mr. Michael Eglington + Mr. Jarvis Erwas + Mr. Stephen Emery + Mr. Stukely Emerson + Mr. John Entick + Mr. Thomas Eversham + Mr. Edwards + Mr. Ellis + + F. + + Mr. James Fog, Moorfields + Mr. William Fog + Mr. Edward Fly + Mr. Joseph Foreman + Mr. Peter Fenwick + Mr. Henry Freeman + Mr. Charles Featherstone + Mr. Flint, Swallow-street + + G. + + Mr. James Gadge, North Pickenham + Mr. John Greenwell, Red-lion-street + Mr. Stephen Gamidge + Mr. Timothy Green + Mr. John George Giles + Mr. Francis Greatree + Mr. Abraham Gunston + Mr. Gwin, Long-Acre + Mr. Geo. Gilson, New-street + Mr. Isaac Greenway + Mr. Daniel Greaves + Mr. Caleb Glover + Mr. William Griffiths + Mr. Goring + Mr. Groombridge + Mr. Goodwin + + H. + + Capt. Rich. Hinchcliffe, York + Mr. Howes, jun. Northleech + Mr. John Howe, Wycombe + Mr. Wm. Hawkins, Crane-court + Mr. Haxby, at the Archbishop of Canterbury’s + Mr. Wm. Hart, Cecil-street + Mr. Hughes, Fleet-street + Mr. Henry Haggard + Mr. Richard Haynes + Mr. John Harvest + Mr. James Harsh, Temple + Mr. Thos. Harrison, St. John’s street + Mr. Hatton, Salisbury-court + Capt. Robert Hinde, Bruton-street + Mr. Thos. Hatford, Wapping + Mr. John Hemsted + Mr. Hutton + Mr. Horne + Mr. Hincks + + I. + + Mr. Jones, Silver-street, Golden-square + Mr. James Innes, Cheney-row, Chelsea + Judah Jacobs, Esq; + Mr. Joseph Jackson, Shoe-lane + Mr. David Jefferies + Mr. William Jenkinson + Mr. Arthur Jameson + Mr. John Jones + Mr. Joseph Isaacs + + K. + + Mr. Kennedy, at Litcham + Mr. Christopher Kay, Silver-street + Mr. Charles Kingman, New-street + Mr. Stephen Kent, Charles-street + Mr. William Kenworthy + Mr. Thomas Kirkman + Mr. James Kempson + Mr. William Kirkland + + L. + + Mr. Manvel Lima, Abchurch-lane + Mr. Lewis, jun. Wrexham + Mr. William Lewis, Bow + Mr. Sampson Luker, Newington + Mr. Geoffrey Larkworthy, Clerkenwell + Theophilus Lane, Esq; + Mr. Thomas Lancaster + Rev. Mr. Long, Spixworth, Norfolk + Mrs. Eliz. Levi, Portsmouth + Mr. Lewellin, Dartmouth-str. + Capt. Lawson, Temple + Mr. Isaac Lamb + Mr. Stephen Lumley + Mr. Miles Largess + Mr. Peter Laughton, Wapping + Mr. Richard Leviston + Mr. Lambert + Mr. Leach + Dr. Lowther + + M. + + Mr. Robert Main, Swaffham + Mr. George Mytton + Mr. Thomas Milner + Mr. Henry Martyn + Mr. Charles Merryman + Mr. John Miers + Mr. Jonas Moxon + Mr. Andrew M‘Ewer + Mr. Jonathan Manning + Mr. William Markham + Mr. Thomas Mackintosh + Mr. John Moody + Mr. Malie + Mr. Molineux + Mr. Maude + Mr. Mayne + + N. + + John Norton, Esq; Golden-square + ──── Nicol, Esq; Argyle-street + Mr. Marmaduke Newby, Southmolton-street + Mr. Nevill Noble + Mr. Nicholas Nugent + Mr. Philip Noble + Mr. Peter Norris + Mr. John Newbolt + Mr. William Newcome + + O. + + Mr. Ogilvie, Swallow-street + Mr. William Overton + Mr. Peter Oxenford, Stratford + Mr. John Jones Owen + Mr. Charles Ogilvie + Mr. Humphry Orton + Mr. William Oxlade + + P. + + Mr. Rich. Privat, Petty-France + Mr. Perrot, Purser of the Culloden + Mr. John Penn + Mr. Thomas Perkins + Mr. Benjamin Pell + Mr. Robert Preston + Mr. William Primrose + Mr. Charles Paget + Mr. Samuel Pickering + Mr. Joseph Phillips, Rose-street + Mr. Henry Pullon, Broad-court + Mr. John Proper, Long-lane + Mr. Robert Price, Belton-street + Mr. Pinegar + Mr. Price + Mr. Piggot + + R. + + Mr. Joseph Richards, Lambeth-marsh + Mr. Sa. Ravensworth, Chelsea + Mr. Peter Rooker, Islington + Mr. William Robinson + Mr. Samuel Richardson + Mr. Richard Rowe + Mr. Joseph Roper, Bow + Mr. John Robertson + Mr. Isaac Robley + Mr. Stephen Rivers + Mr. James Rickards + Mr. Alexander Reid + Mr. Reid + Mr. Richards + + S. + + Mr. Henry Schutz, Rose-street + James Spencer, Esq; Warwick-street + Lieut. John Staunton + Mr. John Severn + Mr. Sparks, Maddox-street + Mr. William Simmonds + Mr. Henry Stewart + Mr. John Arthur Smith, Victualling-office + Mr. William St. John + Mr. Charles William Stevenson + Mr. Charles Stanhope + Mr. Edward Spoor, Bow + Mr. Wm. Suxspeck, Radcliffe + Mr. Barker Simson, jun. Salisbury-court + Mr. Senhouse, Piccadilly + Mr. Sovard, Oxford-road + Mr. Jeremiah Smith + Mr. William Henry Sibthorpe + Mr. Samuel Parker Southwell + Mr. William Stockham, Wardour-street + Mr. Edward Stone + Mr. John Simpson + Mr. Frederick Stark + Mr. Philip Sergeant + Mr. Moses Strickland + Mr. Edmund Smith, Swallow-street + Mr. Smith + Mr. Smith, Swan-lane + Mr. Strahan + + T. + + Rev. Mr. Trancker + Mr. Edward Terry, Victualling-office + Mr. Thomas Thrilwind + Mr. Francis Thomson + Mr. Charles Timbrel + Mr. James Thistlethwayte + Mr. Henry Thoroughgood + Mr. Philip Turton + Mr. James Thatcher, Wapping + Mr. Thompson, Plumtree-str. + + U. + + Mr. James Thomas Upton, Wapping + Mr. Francis Unwin, ditto + + W. + + Mr. Edward Warner, Royal-Exchange + Mr. John Wilson + ──── Walters, Esq; Curzon-street + Mrs. Williams, Fleet-street + Mr. William Warburton + Mr. John Whitworth + Mr. Isaac Wentworth + Mr. Charles Walker + Mr. Welch, Oldford + John Wood, Esq; Old Belton-street + James Wall, Esq; Stratford + Mr. Robert Wight + Mr. Charles Williams + Mr. Michael Wentworth + Mr. John Wenman + Mr. Alexander Wareham + Mr. Temple Wharton + Mr. West + Mr. Westgarth + Mr. Weale + Mr. Woodward + Mr. Wells + + Y. + + Mr. Joseph Young + Mr. William Yeraway + Mr. John Yeats + Mr. George York + + + + + Directions _to the_ Bookbinder _for placing the_ Plates: + + + In VOL. I. + Map of Mexico and South America to be placed at the beginning. + Horn Island ──── (_Introduction_) _to face page_ xxxviii + Head of Sir Francis Drake 1 + Drake going off to sea on a raft 41 + Beheading of Capt. Doughty 88 + Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich Spanish ship 113 + Drake conveying away the Spanish Judges and criminal savages 118 + Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh of New Albion 123 + Cavendish plundering and burning Paita 191 + The King of Java’s Wives destroying themselves 226 + Cavendish’s crew in great distress, &c. 250 + Capt. Davis’s men taken off a rock 304 + Dampier’s men seizing oxen, mules, &c. at a farm-house 340 + Capt. Swan entertained by Rajah Laut 370 + Dampier and his companions overtaken by a storm 412 + Cowley and his men taking in provisions at Juan Fernandez 440 + + In VOL. II. + Alexander Selkirk making his cats and kids dance 24 + Miscellaneous Plate of fish, trees, &c. 48 + Mr. Hatley and crew whipped 89 + Distressed situation of the Success 120 + Sea-lion, sea-lioness, and seals 181 + Californian Woman habited in a deer’s skin 229 + Californian Man returned from fishing, and another in his bark-log 230 + Lawn where Commodore Anson pitched his tent at Juan Fernandez 289 + + In VOL. III. + The three Charts of the tracks of the Dolphin, Tamar, Swallow, + Endeavour, and M. Bougainville, to be accurately joined, and + placed at the beginning + Comm. Byron conversing with a Patagonian woman _to face page_ 11 + The wolf-fox of Falkland’s Islands 18 + Straits of Magellan 22 + The Queen of Otaheite taking leave of Capt. Wallis 99 + View of a town in the island of Terra del Fuego 196 + Musical youth in the new-discovered islands 218 + Mr. Banks receiving a visit from the King of the D. of York’s + Island 238 + A Morai, or burial-place 257 + A woman and a boy of the new-discovered islands 270 + A Priest of the new-discovered islands in the habit of his order 287 + Representation of a dance in the island of Ulietea 299 + View of a perforated rock in Tolaga-bay 326 + Head of a New Zealand Chief curiously tattooed 327 + View of an arched rock on the coast of New Zealand 371 + War-canoe, and a branch of the bread fruit tree 396 + New Zealand warrior in the dress of his country 398 + Warriors of Otaheite and New Zealand defying their enemies 399 + + In VOL. IV. + The hooded serpent, and an ape of Java 85 + M. Bougainville crossing St. Lucia river in a canoe drawn by + horses 126 + Bougainville hoisting the French colours in the straits of + Magellan 194 + Prospective view of the great cascade in Cascade-bay 201 + + In the VOYAGE to the NORTH POLE. + Map of the Icy Sea ──── (_Introduction_) i. + Chart of Spitzbergen, or New Greenland 33 + View of the Whale Fishery 40 + + + + + [Illustration: _S^R. FRANCIS DRAKE._ _J. June Sculp._] + + + + + SIR FRANCIS DRAKE’S + VOYAGES, + PARTICULARLY THAT + ROUND THE WORLD, + In 1577, 1578, 1579, and 1580. + + +Before we proceed to the relation of the particular Voyages that +characterize the navigators who first surrounded the globe, and who +immortalized their names by their skill and their courage, it may be +expected that we should give some account of their families and first +setting out, the distinguishing marks of genius that led them to prefer +the fatigues and dangers of a sea-faring life to learned ease, or the +calm pursuit of less hazardous employments; and that we should trace the +steps by which they rose to eminence by their bravery and their conduct. + +The bare narration of the incidents recorded in a single voyage, however +memorable, would convey but a very imperfect knowledge of the general +character of those renowned heroes, who carried the glory of their +country to the remotest regions of the earth. We shall, therefore, +endeavour to follow them as they advance to fame, and accompany them +from their highest elevation to that period when all distinctions are +levelled. + +The celebrated mariner, of whom we are now to give an account, was son +to Edmund Drake, a gentleman of Tavistoke, in Devonshire, who, being +inclined to the doctrine of the Protestants, at that time much opposed +by Q. Mary, was obliged to quit his place of residence, and retire to +Medway, in Kent; where, after that Queen’s death, he was first appointed +Chaplain in the royal navy, and afterwards Vicar of Upnor. In these +employments, his appointments being small, and his family large, he owed +the education of several of his children to the kindness of his +relations, and that, in particular, of Francis, the eldest of twelve, to +Sir John Hawkins; under whom, as it appears, he very early distinguished +himself, and laid the foundation both of his fame and his fortune. + +The learned Camden, indeed, informs us, that he was put apprentice to +the master of a small trading vessel, in whose service he behaved so +well, that his master, dying a batchelor, left him his vessel as a +reward for his diligence: but Stowe, who seems better informed, +represents him in a superior light; tells us, that Francis Russel, +afterwards Duke of Bedford, was his godfather; and that Sir John Hawkins +was his near relation. What Camden relates of Francis may, however, be +true of his brother; for there were no less than four who were bred to +the sea. + +Be this as it may, the first enterprize of consequence, in which we find +him engaged, was in a voyage to the West-Indies, as Captain of the +Judith, under his relation already mentioned. Those islands, having but +lately been discovered, and very little frequented by the English, were +thought so much to abound in wealth, that no voyager thither could fail +of being recompensed with great advantages. Nothing was talked of among +the mercantile or adventurous part of mankind but the beauty and riches +of the new world. Fresh discoveries were frequently made; new countries +and nations, never heard of before, were daily described; and it may +easily be concluded, that the relators did not lessen the merit of their +discoveries, by suppressing or diminishing any circumstance that might +produce wonder, or excite curiosity. + +This was the age of enterprize and discovery; and her Majesty encouraged +the ardour of her subjects by furnishing ships and commissions to such +officers of distinction in her royal navy as were willing to engage in +hazardous pursuits. + +The projects, however, that were formed, were not always successfully +carried into execution; they were frequently defeated by the ignorance +of the adventurers, but more often by the malice of the Spaniards, who, +from the first discovery of America, considered every other nation that +attempted to follow them, as invaders of their rights, and incroachers +on _their_ territories. At that time, however, as now, it was no +uncommon thing for those who went in search of new discoveries, to carry +on a kind of contraband trade with the new settlers; which, though +prohibited by the Crown of Spain, was yet countenanced by the Viceroys +and Governors: but even these would sometimes take advantage of the +power lodged in their hands, and make prize of the profits of the +voyage, under pretence of an illicit trade. + +Among those who suffered most by the injustice of the Viceroys, was Sir +John Hawkins; who, having struck out a new trade, highly advantageous to +the parties concerned, though disgraceful to humanity, supplied the +Mexican Spaniards with slaves from Africa, and received from them, in +return, large remittances in gold and silver. This was connived at, +though we do not find that it was absolutely tolerated, by the Spanish +court. + +It was, however, after one of those successful voyages, in which we find +two of the Queen’s ships engaged (namely, the Jesus, commanded by +Hawkins, as Admiral; and the Minion, of which Captain John Hampton was +Commander; with four other armed trading ships, among which was the +Judith, Captain Drake), that, being driven by stress of weather into the +port of St. John d’Ulloa, in the bay of Mexico, they were there waiting +for a supply of provisions, when the Spanish fleet from Europe arrived, +consisting of 12 sail, richly laden with European merchandize, and on +board of which was a new Viceroy. + +As the port was then absolutely in the power of the English, it was +debated, among the principal officers, whether the Spanish fleet should +be suffered to enter; as their Admiral suspected, that, if they were +admitted, they would contrive some means of distressing him; and if they +were not, they must perish at sea; an event that would certainly bring +on a war,--a consequence he could by no means justify. + +Upon mature deliberation, it was, therefore, judged safest to propose an +agreement with the Viceroy, to which he consented, and by which it was +stipulated, that the English should hold one side of the harbour, and +the Spaniards the other; and that hostages should be given on both +sides, that no injury should be done to either. But it was soon +discovered, that, though on the part of the English, six gentlemen were +sent, yet, on that of the Spaniards, the hostages were only common men, +finely dressed. This gave cause of distrust; yet the English, naturally +honest, were not sufficiently on their guard. + +The Spaniards for some weeks behaved with seeming cordiality; mutual +civilities passed between the officers of both nations; and the English, +having supplied their wants, were preparing to depart, when, all of a +sudden, at a signal given, the Spaniards assaulted their ships as the +officers were at dinner, boarded the Minion by a concealed ambuscade, +which, however, was repulsed with loss, and then a general massacre +ensued. The English who were on shore were all put to death; three of +the four trading ships were presently sunk; and the Minion and Jesus +were so embarrassed by their moorings, that it was almost a whole hour +before they could be placed in a posture of defence; which, however, was +at last effected. They then returned the attack with so much fury, that +the Spanish Vice-Admiral was soon blown up, and in her perished 300 men; +and not long after the Spanish Admiral himself was sunk. The Spaniards, +in revenge, set two of their ships on fire to burn the Minion and Jesus, +the first of which set sail and escaped; but the Jesus, after shifting +her crew on board the Judith, fell a victim with the rest to Spanish +treachery. + +In the night, the Judith having made her escape, endeavoured, but in +vain, to join the Minion; and being only a bark of 50 tons, alone, on a +hostile coast, crouded with men, and having only provisions on board for +her own slender crew, a mutiny arose among the mariners, and by far the +greatest number insisted on being put on shore, chusing rather to take +their chance among the savages, than to remain on board to starve at +sea, or again to fall into the power of the merciless Spaniards. + +Accordingly, Captain Hawkins, gave every man his choice, either to land +on the continent, or sail with him, and share his fate. About 100 of the +stoutest seamen chose the former; of whom five only lived to return to +England. These gave an account, that, on their landing, the natives, +mistaking them for Spaniards, fell upon them suddenly, and killed eight +of their number; that, after they were known to be enemies to the +Spaniards, they were used with kindness; that, however, being tired of +living among savages, they agreed to part, and seek the means of +returning home; some directed their course to the northward, and watched +the opportunity of seizing a small vessel, and, crossing the Gulph, +traversed an immense tract of land, till they arrived at a French +settlement in the North; of those who travelled westward, which was by +far the greatest part, sixty-five fell into the hands of the Spaniards, +and suffered various torments from the Inquisition, three were burnt +alive, and two only survived to reach their own country. Of those who +followed the other course, five found means, after enduring incredible +hardships, to get to Nova Scotia, of whom three were brought safe to +England in French merchants ships. + +It was in the above engagement that Capt. Drake first distinguished +himself; and to his judicious conduct, that those who escaped from the +Jesus owed their preservation. The Judith had the good fortune to arrive +safe in England, having purchased some provisions on the Island of Cuba; +but what became of the Minion we have not been able to learn. + +In this expedition Sir John Hawkins lost an immense sum. It was in vain +to make complaint to his sovereign of the infraction of the peace. The +Spanish minister vindicated the injustice of the Viceroy and the Queen, +tho’ she secretly resented the loss of her ships, could not openly abett +the illicit trade carried on by her servants. + +Drake, who shared in the misfortune of his relation, possessed both his +spirit and his industry. He did not sit down to lament the loss he had +sustained; but, having acquired some degree of credit by his gallant +behaviour, and some knowledge of the weakness and wealth of his enemies, +he determined to profit by his losses, and to make reprisals whenever a +fair opportunity should offer. + +It was no difficult matter to engage new adventurers in new projects in +those early days of Mexican commerce, and Drake was not long before he +raised a fund to begin trade on a new footing. In 1570 he made his first +expedition, chiefly on his own account, with two ships, the Dragon and +the Swan; and the next year in the Swan alone; in both which voyages he +enlarged his experience, but it does not appear that he repaired his +loss. + +In 1572 he found means, however, to fit out a much greater force, in +order to carry into execution an enterprise which he had meditated, not +only to reinstate his fortune, but to revenge the treachery of his +enemies. + +About this time war was agitating between England and Spain, to which it +must be confessed the illicit trade carried on to the Spanish +settlements not a little contributed. He, therefore, set sail from +Plymouth in the Pascha, a letter of marque ship, of 70 tons, accompanied +by the Swan, of 50 tons, the command of which he entrusted to his +brother John; in both which ships he had embarked 73 choice men, with a +year’s provisions and such warlike stores and ammunition as he judged +necessary for the enterprize he had in view. He had, likewise, the +precaution to take with him the frames of two or three small pinnaces, +that, if any accident should befal either of his larger ships, he might +have it in his power to preserve the crew without being driven to the +necessity of leaving any of them behind; a precaution which experience +had taught him in the unfortunate voyage of his kinsman Sir John. But +this was not the only use for which he foresaw these small vessels would +be wanted, as will appear in the sequel. + +With this warlike force, inconsiderable as it may now appear, he cleared +the land of England on the 12th of May, 1572; and, the weather +continuing fair, and the wind favourable, on the 29th of June he passed +between Dominica and Guadaloupe, and on the 6th of July came in sight of +the high land of Santa Martha; then continuing his course to the +southward, on the 15th of the same month both ships arrived at Port +Pheasant, which lay at a convenient distance from Nombre de Dios, the +place of their destination. + +Here he proposed to build his pinnaces, and was going a-shore with a few +men unarmed; when, discovering a smoke at a distance, he made the signal +for another boat to follow him with an armed force. Being joined by this +reinforcement, he marched towards the fire, where he found a plate of +lead nailed to a tree, with an inscription engraven upon it by one +Garret, an Englishman, who had left that place a day or two before, and +had taken that method of informing him that the Spaniards had been +advertised of his intended visit, and of his rendezvous at that port; +and that, therefore, it would be prudent for him to make but a very +short stay. + +Drake, surprized, no doubt, at the news, but at the same time knowing +how convenient this place was for his designs, and considering that the +hazard, and waste of time, which could not be avoided in seeking another +station, was equivalent to any other danger which was to be apprehended +from the Spaniards, determined to follow his first resolution; only, for +his greater security, he ordered a kind of palissade or fortification to +be made, by felling a number of large trees, and laying the trunks and +branches one across another, on an elevated spot that commanded the +river. This done, he set the carpenters to work; and while they were +employed in putting the frames of the pinnaces together, one Captain +Rause happened to touch at the same port, with a bark of 50 men. To +Rause Drake imparted his design; and, when the pinnaces were ready, both +set sail together, shaping their course to Nombre de Dios. They touched +at the Island of Pines, where they were informed, by the negroes they +found there, that the inhabitants of that place were in daily +expectation of some soldiers, which the Governor of Panama had promised +to send, to defend them from the Symerons, or fugitive negroes, who, +having escaped from the tyranny of their masters, had settled themselves +under two kings, or leaders, on each side of the passage between Nombre +de Dios and Panama; and not only asserted their natural right to liberty +and independance, but endeavoured to revenge the cruelties they had +suffered, and had lately put the inhabitants of Nombre de Dios into the +utmost consternation. These negroes the Captain set on shore on the main +land, so that they might, by joining the Symerons, recover their +liberty, or at least might not have it in their power to give the people +of Nombre de Dios any speedy information of his intention to invade +them. Then, selecting 53 men from his own company, and 20 from the crew +of his new associate Captain Rause, he embarked with them in his new +pinnaces, and set sail for Nombre de Dios. + +On July the 28th, at night, he approached the town undiscovered, and +dropt his anchors under the shore, intending, after his men were +refreshed, to begin the attack; but, finding that they were terrifying +each other with formidable accounts of the strength of the place, and +the multitude of the inhabitants, he determined to hinder the panic from +spreading farther, by leading them immediately to action; and, +therefore, ordering them to their oars, he landed without any +opposition, there being only one gunner upon the key, though it was +fortified by six brass cannon of the largest size. But the gunner, while +they were employed in throwing the cannon from their carriages, alarmed +the town, as they soon discovered by the bells, the drums, and the noise +of the people. + +Drake, leaving twelve men to guard the pinnaces, marched into the town +with little or no opposition. After a short skirmish, the forces that +the alarm had hastily drawn together were soon dispersed, except a few +whom he detained as prisoners, in order to shew him the Governor’s +house, and also the store-house, where the mules that bring the silver +from Panama were unloaded. + +Being now in full possession of the town, he posted the main of his +small body, under the command of his brother, in the market-place; and +then followed the guides, with the rest, to the store-house; where, +forcing the door, and entering the room where the silver was deposited, +they found it heaped up in bars, in such quantities as almost exceed +belief, the pile being, as they conjectured, seventy feet in length, ten +in breadth, and twelve in height, each bar weighing between thirty and +forty-five pounds. It is easy to imagine, that, at the sight of this +treasure, nothing was thought of, by the English sailors, but by what +means it might best be conveyed to their boats, and, doubtless, it was +not easy for Drake (who, considering their distance from the shore, and +the number of their enemies, was afraid of being intercepted in their +retreat) to hinder his men from encumbering themselves with so much +silver as might have retarded their march, and obstructed the use of +their weapons: however, by promising to lead them to the King’s +treasury, where there were gold and jewels to a far greater value, and +where the plunder was not only more portable, but nearer the shore, he +persuaded them to follow him (not, however, without every man his bar), +and rejoin the main body in the market-place. Here he found his little +troop much discouraged by the apprehension that, if they stayed any +longer, the enemy might gain possession of their pinnaces, and that they +should then, without any means of safety, be left to stand alone against +the whole force of that country. Drake, not indeed easily terrified, but +sufficiently cautious, sent to the harbour to examine the ground of +their fears, and to learn if the same panic had taken possession of the +men whom he had left to guard his boats; but, finding no foundation for +these dreadful apprehensions, he persisted in his first design, and led +the troop forward to the royal treasury. In their way there fell a +violent shower of rain, which wet some of their bow-strings, and +extinguished many of their matches (spring-locks for muskets not being +then invented); a misfortune which might soon have been repaired, and +which, perhaps, the enemy might suffer in common with them; but which, +however, on this occasion, very much embarrassed them, as the delay +produced by it repressed that ardour which, sometimes, is only to be +kept up by continued action. + +It was in vain for Drake to expostulate, or to represent the disgrace of +returning in rags, after having the chief treasure of the world within +their power; he therefore reproached their cowardice, set before their +eyes the imminent danger to which they would inevitably be exposed, if +they failed to behave like men anxious for glory, and zealous for the +honour of their country. Animated by these incentives, they resumed +their former spirit, and, pushing briskly forward, the whole company +followed till they arrived at the treasury, which they instantly forced. +Having thus far succeeded, Drake committed the care of the riches to his +brother, and Oxenham, of Plymouth[1], (a man known afterwards for his +bold adventures in the same parts) while he, with the main body, should +again return and reconnoitre the market-place, and disperse any parties +of the Spaniards that might be forming into a body to oppose their +progress. With this view, as he was advancing, his strength suddenly +failed him, and he fell down speechless. + + [1] This man made himself remarkable by one of the boldest + undertakings that ever was devised. As soon as he arrived in England, + with the prize-money acquired in this expedition, he purchased a bark + of 140 tons, and manned it with 70 brave seamen; with these he sailed + to the Isthmus of Darien, and, laying his bark up in a creek, marched + cross the neck of land which separates the North Sea from the great + Pacific Ocean, where he arrived, with his companions, without being + discovered; and, having there seized a ship for their purpose, they + ranged the coast, and made themselves masters of an immense treasure; + but, falling out among themselves, they separated; and, thus weakened, + they became an easy prey to the Spaniards, who recovered their + treasure; and Oxenham being taken, with those that continued with him, + and having no commission to produce, both he and his companions were + executed as pirates. When they parted, they had in their possession + two ships laden with gold, to the amount of half a million sterling. + +Then it was that his companions perceived a wound in his leg, that he +received in the first encounter, but hitherto concealed, lest his men, +easily discouraged, should make their concern for his life a pretence +for returning to their boats. Such, however, had been his loss of blood, +as was discovered upon nearer observation, that it had filled the prints +of his foot-steps; and it appeared scarce credible, that, after such an +effusion, life should remain. The bravest were now willing to retire; +neither desire of honour, or of riches, was thought to prevail in any +man over his regard for his leader. + +Drake, whom cordials soon restored to his senses, was the only man who +could not be prevailed on to leave the enterprize unfinished. It was to +no purpose that they advised him to submit to go on board to have his +wound dressed, and promised to return with him to compleat their design. +He well knew how impracticable it was to regain the opportunity when it +was once lost, and could easily foresee that a respite of but a few +hours would enable the Spaniards to recover from their consternation, to +assemble their forces, refit their batteries, and remove their treasure. +What he had undergone so much danger to obtain, was now in his hands, +and the thoughts of leaving it untouched was too mortifying to be +patiently borne; however, as there was little time for consultation, and +the same danger attended their stay in that perplexity and confusion, as +their return, they bound up his wound with his scarf, and, partly by +force, partly by intreaty, they carried him back to the boats, in which, +with what treasure they were able to bring off, they all embarked by +break of day. Then taking with them, out of the harbour, a sloop laden +with wines, they went to the Bastimento’s, an island about a league from +the town, where they staid two days, to recover the wounded men who had +been hurt in the first rencounter, and to regale themselves with the +wines they had taken, and with the fruits that grew in great plenty in +the gardens of that island. + +During their stay here, there came over to that island a Spanish +gentleman, sent by the Governor with instructions to inquire whether the +Captain was that Drake who had before been on their coast; whether the +arrows with which many of their men were wounded were not poisoned; and +whether they wanted provisions or other necessaries? The messenger, +likewise, extolled their courage with the highest encomiums, and +expressed his admiration of their daring undertaking. Drake, though he +knew the civilities of an enemy are always to be suspected, and that the +messenger, amidst all his professions of regard, was no other than a +spy, yet knowing that he had nothing to apprehend, treated him with the +highest honours that his condition admitted of. In answer to his +inquiries, he assured him, that he was the same Drake with whose +character they were before acquainted; that he was a rigid observer of +the laws of war, and that he never permitted the arrows discharged by +his followers to be poisoned. He dismissed him with considerable +presents and told him, that, though he had in part failed in this +attempt, he would never desist from his design of revenging the +treachery of the Viceroy of Mexico, till he had shared with Spain the +treasures of America. + +He then resolved to return to the Isle of Pines, where they had left +their ships, and to consult about the measures they were now to take; +and, having arrived on the 1st of August at their former station, they +dismissed Captain Rause, who, judging it unsafe to stay any longer on +the coast, desired to be no farther engaged in their designs. But Drake, +not to be diverted from his purpose, after being cured of his wound, +inquired of a negroe, whom he took on board at Nombre de Dios, the most +wealthy settlements, and weakest parts of the coast, who advised the +attack of Carthagena. This the Admiral seemed to approve; and, setting +sail without loss of time, came to anchor, Aug. 13, between Charecha and +St. Barnard’s, two islands at a little distance from the harbour of +Carthagena. Then passing with his boats round the island, he entered the +harbour, and in the mouth of it found a frigate with only an old man in +it, who voluntarily informed him, that, about an hour before a pinnace +had passed by, with sails and oars, and all the appearance of expedition +and importance; that, as she passed, the crew on board her bid him take +care of himself; and that, as soon as she touched the shore, he heard +the noise of cannon, fired as a warning, and saw the shipping of the +port drawn up under the guns of the castle. The Captain, who had himself +heard the discharge of the artillery, was soon convinced that he was +discovered; and that, therefore, nothing could be attempted there with +any probability of success. He therefore contented himself with taking a +ship of Seville, of 240 tons (which the relator of this voyage mentions +as a very large ship), and two small frigates, in which he found letters +of advice from Nombre de Dios, intended to alarm that part of the coast. + +Drake, now finding his pinnaces of great use, and not having a +sufficient number of sailors for all his vessels, was desirous of +destroying the Swan, the ship commanded by his brother, that the others +might be better manned. This, necessary as it was, could not easily be +done without disgusting his company; who, having made several prosperous +voyages in that vessel, would naturally be averse to her destruction. + +Drake knew that nothing but the love of their leaders could animate his +followers to encounter such hardships as he was about to expose them to; +and, therefore, rather chose to bring his designs to pass by artifice +than by authority. He sent for the carpenter of the Swan, took him into +his cabin, and, having first engaged him to secrecy, ordered him in the +middle of the night, to go down into the well, and bore three holes +through the bottom, laying something against them that might hinder the +bubbling of the water from being heard. To this the carpenter, after +some expostulation, consented, and the next night performed his promise. +In the morning, August the 15th, Drake, going out with his pinnace +a-fishing, rowed up to the Swan; and, having invited his brother to +partake of his diversion, inquired, with a negligent air, why the Swan +was so deep in the water? Upon which, his brother, being alarmed, sent +down his steward to learn the cause, who returned immediately, with an +account that the ship was leaky, and in danger of sinking in a very +little time. They had instantly recourse to the pump; but, having +laboured for five hours, and gained very little upon the water, they +willingly, according to Drake’s advice, set the vessel on fire, and went +on board the Pascha. + +Finding it now necessary to lie concealed for some time, till the +Spaniards should forget their danger, and remit their vigilance, they +set sail for the Sound of Darien, and, without approaching the coast, +that their course might not be observed, they arrived there in six days. + +This being a convenient place for their reception, both on account of +privacy, it being out of the road of all trade, and as it was well +supplied with wood, water, wild-fowl, hogs, deer, and all kind of +provisions, he stayed here fifteen days, to careen his vessels, and +refresh his men, who worked interchangeably, on one day the one half, +and on the next day the other half. + +On the 5th of September, Drake left his brother with the ship at Darien, +and set out with two small vessels towards the Rio Grand, which they +reached in three days, and on the 9th of the same month were discovered +by a Spaniard from the land, who, believing them to be his countrymen, +made a signal for them to come on shore, with which they very readily +complied; but he, soon finding his mistake abandoned his plantation, +where they found great plenty of provisions, with which having laden +their vessels, they departed. + +In the mean time, his brother, Captain John Drake, went, according to +the directions that had been left him, in search of the Symerons, or +fugitive negroes, from whose assistance they now entertained hopes of +completing the success of their voyage: and, touching upon the main +land, by means of the negroes whom they had taken from Nombre de Dios, +engaged two of the Symerons to come on board his ship, leaving two of +his own men as hostages for their safe return. Those men, having assured +him of the affection of their nation, appointed an interview between +Drake and their leaders. With this appointment Drake being made +acquainted, he immediately quitted Port Plenty, so named by the English +from the great store of provisions they had amassed at that place, and +came, by the direction of the Symerons, into a secret bay, among +beautiful islands covered with trees, which concealed their ships from +observation, and where the channel was so narrow and rocky that it was +impossible to enter it by night; so that there was no danger of a sudden +surprize. Here they met, and entered into engagements, which common +enemies and common dangers preserved from violation. But the first +conversation informed the English that their expectations were not +immediately to be gratified: for, upon their enquiries after the most +probable means of acquiring gold and silver, the Symerons told them, +that, had they known sooner the chief end of their expedition, they +could easily have gratified them; but that during the rainy season, +which was now begun, they could not recover the treasure, which they had +taken from the Spaniards, out of the rivers in which they had concealed +it. Drake, therefore, proposing to wait in this place till the rains +were passed, built with the assistance of the Symerons, a fort of earth +and timber; and, leaving his brother and part of his company with the +Symerons, set out with three pinnaces towards Rio de la Hacha, being of +a spirit too active to lie still patiently, even in a state of plenty +and security, and with the most probable expectations of immense riches. + +In their way thither, they anchored within sight of Carthagena without +landing, and on the 17th of October took a Spanish bark, with which they +entered the harbour in disguise; but were soon accosted by a Spanish +gentleman whom they had sometime before taken and set at liberty; who +coming to them in a boat, as he pretended, without the knowledge of the +Governor, made them great promises of friendship, and professions of +esteem. But Drake, having waited till next morning without receiving the +information he had been encouraged to expect, found that all this +pretended kindness was no more than a stratagem to amuse him, while the +Governor was raising forces for his destruction. + +This appeared more clearly on the 20th, when two frigates, well armed +and manned, came out in the night with a view to surprize the pinnaces, +and make prisoner of Drake: but these being discovered, and their design +frustrated, Drake, when day-light approached, leapt intrepidly ashore +single, in defiance of their troops, which hovered at a distance in the +woods and on the hills, without ever venturing to advance within reach +of the shot from the pinnaces. To leap, however, upon an enemy’s coast, +in sight of a superior force, only to shew how little they were feared, +was an act that in these times would meet with little applause: but +motives of policy might influence the conduct of Drake, and make that +necessary then which now appears a ridiculous bravado. Finding the whole +country advertised of his attempts, and in arms to oppose him, he might +make a feint only of landing to increase their fears, and encourage +their alarms, that they might keep together till he should assault them +in their deserted posts; a stratagem which there is reason to think he +put in practice, as he continued upon the coast till one of his vessels +had only a gammon of bacon and a small quantity of bread on board for +seventeen men, and till there was on board his own vessel even a greater +scarcity. But resolution and success reciprocally produce each other. +They had not sailed more than three leagues on their return to their +ships before they fell in with and attacked a coasting vessel, which +after some resistance they took, and happily found it laden with +excellent provisions. He now determined to return to the Symerons, with +whom, as has been said, he left his brother, and part of his force; and +to attempt, by their assistance and direction, to make his way over, and +invade the Spaniards in the inland parts, where they would probably +never dream of an enemy. + +When they arrived at Port Diego, so named from the negroe who had +procured them their intercourse with the Symerons, they found Captain +John Drake and one of his company dead, being killed in attempting, +almost unarmed, to board a frigate well provided with all things +necessary for its defence. The Captain was unwilling to make the attack, +and represented to his company the madness of their proposal; but, being +over-borne by their clamours and importunities, to avoid the imputation +of cowardice, complied to his destruction. + +But this was not the only misfortune that befel this little company; for +soon after many of them fell ill of the calenture, a malignant fever, +very frequent in the hot climates, which carried off, among several +others, Joseph Drake, another brother of the Commander. + +While Drake was employed in the recovery of the sick, the Symerons, who +ranged the country for intelligence, brought him an account that the +Spanish fleet was arrived at Nombre de Dios, the truth of which was +confirmed by a pinnace which he sent out to make observations. This, +therefore, was the time for their journey, when the treasures of the +American mines were to be transported from Panama, over land, to Nombre +de Dios. He, therefore, by the direction of the Symerons, furnished +himself with all things necessary; and, on the third of February in the +following year, set out from Port Diego. Having lost already twenty +eight of his company, and being under the necessity of leaving some to +guard his ship, he took with him only 18 English and 30 Symerons, who +not only served as guards to shew the way, but as purveyors to procure +provisions. + +They carried with them arrows for war, and arrows for hunting and +fowling, the heads of which are proportioned in size to the game they +are pursuing. For oxen, stags, or wild boars, they have arrows or +javelins with heads weighing a pound and half, which they discharge near +hand, and which scarcely ever fail of being mortal. Their second sort +are about half as heavy as the other, and are generally shot from their +bows; these are intended for smaller beasts. With the third sort, of +which the heads are an ounce in weight, they kill birds. As this nation +is in a state which does not set them above continual cares for the +immediate necessaries of life, he that can temper iron best is among +them most esteemed; and, perhaps, it would be happy for every nation, if +honours and applauses were as justly distributed, and he were most +distinguished whose talents were most useful to society. + +Every day by sun-rising they began to march, and having travelled till +ten, rested near some river till twelve; then travelling again till +four, they reposed all night in huts, or wigwams, which the Symerons had +either left standing in their former marches, or very readily erected +for them, by setting up three or four posts in the ground, and laying +poles from one to another, in the form of a roof, which they covered +with palmetto boughs and plantain leaves. In the vallies, where they +were sheltered from the winds, they left three or four feet next the +ground open; but, on the hills, where they were more exposed to the +chill blasts of the night, they thatched them close to the ground, +leaving only a door for entrance, and a vent a-top in the middle for the +smoke of the fire to escape. + +In their march, they met not only with plenty of fruits upon the banks +of the rivers, but with wild swine in abundance, of which the Symerons +without difficulty killed, for the most part, as many as were wanted. +One day, however, they found only an otter, and were about to dress it; +at which Drake expressing his wonder, was asked by Pedro, the chief +Symeron, “Are you a man of war, and in want, and yet doubt whether this +be meat that hath blood in it?” For which Drake in private rebuked him, +says the relator; whether justly or not, it is not very important to +determine; only it shews the genius of the times when superstition +prevailed, and when the greatest men were not wholly exempt from its +influences. + +On the third day of their march, and the 6th of February, they came to a +town of the Symerons, situated on the side of a hill, and encompassed +with a ditch and a mud wall, to secure it from any sudden surprize. Here +they lived with great neatness, and in plenty; and with some observation +of religion, paying great reverence to the cross; a practice which, the +relator says, Drake prevailed upon them to change for the use of the +Lord’s Prayer; which, however, in so short a stay, is very unlikely. +Indeed, it is added, that here they strongly importuned Drake to prolong +his abode, promising to double his force; but he, either thinking +greater numbers unnecessary, or fearing, that, if any difference should +arise between them and his own men, he should be overborne by numbers, +he prudently declined their invitation, and their offer of additional +assistance, and that in such terms as expressed his eagerness to engage, +and his confidence of success from the bravery of his followers. + +The Symerons continued to conduct him on his journey, and led him +through rural shades and lofty woods, which sheltered his people so +effectually from the sun, that their march was less toilsome than if +they had travelled in England during the heat of summer. Four of the +Symerons that were acquainted with the way, went about a mile before the +main body, and cut off branches as marks to direct them, for there was +no beaten track; then followed twelve Symerons, after whom came the +English, with the two leaders; and the other Symerons closed the rear. +In this order, on the 11th of February, they arrived at the top of a +very high hill, on the summit of which grew a tree of a wonderful height +and magnitude, in which they had cut steps for the more easy ascent to +the top, where there was a kind of alcove, to which they invited Drake, +and from thence shewed him not only the North Sea, from whence they +came, but the great Pacific Ocean, on which no English vessel had ever +yet sailed. This prospect exciting his natural curiosity and ardour for +adventures and discoveries, he lifted up his hands to God, and implored +his blessing upon the resolution which he that instant formed of sailing +in an English ship on that immense sea. + +From this stupendous mountain they descended, after having feasted their +eyes with the grandest prospect the earth can furnish; and in two days +came into an open level country, where their march was incommoded with +the grass, which is of a peculiar kind, consisting of a stalk like that +of a bull-rush, and a blade on which the oxen and other cattle feed till +it grows too high for them to reach: then it is that the natives set the +whole on fire; and it is no uncommon thing to behold vallies of immense +extent in a blaze at once; from whence the cattle fly in the utmost +terror, and many perish by the sudden conflagration. It might be +supposed, that this burning of the soil, would, in a hot climate, check +the powers of vegetation, and that it would be years before the earth +could recover its fertility; but it is just the contrary; the ashes of +the reeds are hardly extinguished before a new verdure begins to appear; +and before a month is elapsed, the whole valley, beheld at a distance, +looks as green as ever; so astonishingly wonderful are the powers of +Nature on this happy soil! + +When they had arrived within a convenient distance of the road from +Panama, they posted themselves in a grove or wood, near which the +treasure was to be conveyed from thence to Nombre de Dios. They then +dispatched a trusty Symeron, in the habit of a slave, properly +instructed, to learn on what day the mules, on whose backs the treasure +is carried, were to set out. The man was so well qualified for the +service, and so industrious in the prosecution of it, that he soon +returned with an account, that the treasurer of Lima, intending to +embark for Europe, would pass the night following with eight mules laden +with gold, and one with jewels; that it was their custom to travel by +night, and to rest in the day, to avoid the heat; and that Venta Cruz +was to be their first stage. + +On this intelligence, they changed their situation, and immediately +directed their march towards Venta Cruz, sending, for security, two +Symerons, habited as before, to examine the way, who, as they passed +along, perceived, by the scent of a match, that some Spaniard was before +them and creeping silently forward, surprized a soldier asleep upon the +ground. They bound him, without offering any other violence, and brought +him to Drake, who, upon enquiry, found that their spy had not deceived +them in his intelligence. The soldier, having informed himself of the +Captain’s name, conceived such a confidence in his well-known clemency, +that, after having made an ample discovery of the treasure that was now +at hand, cautioned them likewise against being deceived by the recoes, +or carriers, from Nombre de Dios, who met the others by the way, and who +were hourly expected, with merchandize and provisions, but without any +gold. He closed his examination with an humble petition to Drake, that, +when the expected treasure should fall into his hands, he would be +graciously pleased to allow him as much of it as would maintain himself +and his children during the remainder of their lives, since there would +abundantly more arrive than he and his company could carry away. Drake +agreed to his request, upon condition that he led him to a place of +secrecy, where he could conceal his men till the time of action, and +where there was no danger of the mules passing by without being +perceived. This the man did; and Drake placed his ambush accordingly. + +Before the time expected, the men were properly refreshed and +instructed. Oxenham was appointed to head the Symerons, assisted by +Pedro their leader; and Drake was to command the English. The parties +were then divided; the English took the right of the way in front, and +the Symerons the left at a small distance in the rear. In this manner +they were posted, that one company might be in readiness to seize the +hindmost mule at the same time that the other had seized the foremost; +for the mules, it seems, being tied together, travel in a line, and are +all guided by leading the first. + +Every thing being now as well concerted as human prudence could direct, +and the critical moment of action soon expected, they lay down and +covered themselves in the grass, at about eighty or ninety paces +distance from the road, that the noise of their breathing might not be +heard by the guard that conveyed the treasure. + +They had not been more than an hour in this situation, when the bells of +the mules on the left, coming from Venta Cruz, began to be heard: but +previous orders having been given to meddle only with those from Panama, +those from Venta Cruz were suffered to pass unmolested. Unfortunately, +however, it happened, that one Robert Pike, being heated with liquor, +prevailed upon the man that was next him to creep forward with him, in +order to be in readiness to signalize themselves, by being the first to +seize the mules from Panama. At that instant, an officer, who +accompanied the recoes from Venta Cruz, perceiving something white +moving in the grass (for Drake had ordered all his company to put their +shirts over their clothes, to distinguish them in the night), took the +alarm, and, from a walk, was observed to push his horse forward on a +smart trot; and, before he had passed the hindmost ambuscade, he was +heard to ride along in a full gallop; but neither Drake, who commanded +the English, nor Oxenham, who headed the Symerons, being apprized of the +reason, had any thought of taking measures to intercept his journey. + +It was not, however, long before the recoes from Panama came up, and +were eagerly seized by the English in front, and secured by the +Symerons, as had been agreed upon, in the rear but, to their great +mortification, they found two of them only loaded with silver, and the +rest with provisions, six of those from Panama, which carried the +valuable burdens of gold and jewels, being ordered back, and the like +number that came from Venta Cruz sent forward in their room. The drivers +were brought immediately to the Captain, and examined, who informed him, +that a horseman who met them riding in haste had talked with the +treasurer, and advised him to send back his gold and jewels, and suffer +those only to proceed that were now in his [Drake’s] power, that he +might, by that cheap experiment, discover whether there was any ambush +in the way. + +That Drake was not less enraged than his followers at this +disappointment cannot be doubted; but there was now no time to be spent +in complaints. The whole country, he knew, would soon be alarmed, and +all the force of the Spaniards assembled to overwhelm him; he had no +fortress to retire to; every man was his enemy; and every road better +known to the Spaniards than to himself. This was an occasion that +demanded all the qualities of an hero, an intrepidity never to be +shaken, and a judgment never to be perplexed. He immediately considered +all the circumstances of his present situation, and found that it +afforded him only the choice of marching back by the same way through +which he came, or forcing his passage through Venta Cruz. He foresaw +many difficulties in marching back, besides the hazard of having his +ships seized before his return; he, therefore, determined to pass +forwards to Venta Cruz, before the enemy could be prepared to oppose +him. He asked Pedro, the leader of the Symerons, whether he was resolved +to follow him? and, having received from him the strongest assurance +that nothing should separate them, commanded his men to refresh +themselves, and prepare to set forwards. When they came to the gates of +the town, they dismissed the mules they had made use of to carry their +prize, and continued their march with as little noise as possible; yet +they discovered that the alarm had been spread, and the forces of the +town hastily drawn together, to oppose their entrance. Drake, who was +not unacquainted with the behaviour of that kind of military, received +their first onset, and then breaking in upon them, drove them before him +without farther opposition, and was seconded by the Symerons, who could +not be restrained from making plunder of the town: but Drake hastened in +person to the Spanish ladies, and assured them that no injuries should +be offered to them; so inseparable is humanity from true courage. + +Having thus broken the spirits, and scattered the forces of the +Spaniards, he continued his march to the ships without any apprehension +of danger, yet with great speed, being very solicitous about the state +of the crew; so that he allowed his men, harrassed as they were, but +little time for sleep or refreshment; but by kind exhortations, gentle +authority, and a chearful participation of all their hardships, +prevailed upon them to bear without murmur, not only the toil of +travelling, but, on some days, the pain of hunger. In this march, he +owed much of his expedition to the assistance of the Symerons, who, +being accustomed to the climate, and naturally robust, when any of the +English fainted by the way, two of them would carry him between them for +miles together. Nor was their valour less than their humanity, after +they had learned from their English companions to dispise the fire-arms +of the Spaniards. + +When they were within five leagues of the ships, they found a town built +in their absence by the Symerons, at which Drake consented to halt, +sending a Symeron to the ships with his gold toothpick as a token, +which, though the master knew it, was not sufficient to gain the +messenger credit, till, upon examination, he found that the Captain, +having ordered him to regard no message without his hand-writing, had +engraven his name upon it with the point of his knife; he then sent the +pinnace up the river, which they met, and afterwards sent to the town +for those whose weariness had made them unable to march farther. + +On February the 23d, the whole company was re-united and Drake, whose +good or ill success never prevailed over his piety, celebrated their +meeting with thanks to God. + +Drake, not yet discouraged, soon turned his thoughts to new projects; +and, without languishing in melancholy reflections upon past +miscarriages, employed himself in forming schemes for repairing them. +Eager of action, and acquainted with man’s nature, he never suffered +idleness to infect his followers with cowardice; but kept them from +sinking under any disappointment, by directing their attention to some +new enterprize. + +Upon consultation with his own men, and the Symerons, he found them +divided in their opinions; some declaring, that, before they engaged in +any new attempt, it was necessary to increase their stores of +provisions; and others urging that the ships, in which the Spanish +treasure was embarked, should be immediately attempted. The Symerons +proposed a third plan, and advised them to undertake another journey +over-land, to the house of one Pezoro, near Veragua, whose slaves +brought him every day more than 200 pounds sterling from the mines, +which he heaped together in a strong stone house, that might, by the +help of the English, be easily forced. But Drake, being unwilling to +fatigue his followers with another journey over land, determined to +steer a middle course between these variable opinions; and, manning his +two pinnaces, the Bear and the Minion, he sent John Oxenham in the Bear +towards Tolu, to seek provisions; and went himself in the Minion to the +Cabezes, to endeavour to intercept the treasure that was to be +transported from Veragua and that coast, to the fleet at Nombre de Dios; +first dismissing with presents those Symerons who desired to return to +their wives, and ordering those that chose to remain with him to be +kindly entertained. Drake took at the Cabezes a frigate of Veragua, the +pilot of which informed him, that there was in the harbour of Veragua a +ship freighted with more than a million of gold; to which he offered to +conduct him, being well acquainted with the soundings, if he might be +allowed his share of the prize; so much was his avarice superior to his +honesty. + +Drake, after some deliberation, complying with the pilot’s conditions, +sailed towards the harbour; but had no sooner entered the mouth of it +than he heard the report of artillery, which was answered by others at a +greater distance; upon which the pilot told them that they were +discovered, this being the signal appointed by the Governor to alarm the +coast. + +Drake now thought it convenient to return to the ships, that he might +enquire the success of the other pinnace, which he found with a frigate +that she had taken with twenty-eight fat hogs, 200 hens, and a great +store of maize or Indian corn. The vessel itself was so strong and +well-built, that he fitted it for war, determining to make a second +attempt on Nombre de Dios. + +On March the 21st, he set sail with the new frigate and the Bear towards +the Cabezes, at which he arrived in little more than two days, and found +there one Totu, a Frenchman, with a ship of war. Having supplied his +ship with water, and other articles of which he was in want, the Captain +desired to join the Admiral in his new attempt, to which Drake +consented, and admitted him to accompany him with 20 of his men, +stipulating to allow them a proportionable share of whatever booty they +should acquire: yet they were not without some suspicions of danger from +this new ally, he having eighty men, and they being now reduced to +thirty-one. Manning, however, the pinnaces, they set sail for Rio +Francisco, at which place they arrived on the 29th of March. Here they +landed; and, having dismissed their pinnaces for fear of discovery, and +ordered them to repair to the same place on the 4th day following, they +began their march through the woods towards Nombre de Dios, and +continued it with such silence and regularity as surprized the French, +who did not imagine the Symerons so discreet and obedient to command as +they appeared to be, and were therefore in perpetual anxiety about the +fidelity of their guides: nor did the Symerons treat the Frenchmen with +that submission and regard which they paid to the English, whose bravery +and conduct they had already tried. At length, after a laborious march +of more than seven leagues, they began to hear the hammers of the +carpenters in the bay, it being the custom in that hot season to work in +the night, and to rest in the day; and, in a short time, they perceived +the approach of the recoes, or droves of mules, from Panama. They now no +longer doubted that their labour would be rewarded, and every man +imagined himself secure from poverty for the remaining part of his life; +they, therefore, when the mules came up, rushed out, and seized them +with an alacrity proportioned to their expectations. The three droves +consisted of one hundred and nine mules, each of which carried 300 +pounds weight of silver. It was to little purpose that the soldiers, +ordered to convoy the treasure, attempted resistance. After a short +combat, in which the French Captain and one of the Symerons were +wounded, it appeared with how much greater ardour men are animated by +interest than fidelity. + +As it was possible for them to carry away but a small part of this +treasure, after having wearied themselves with hiding it in the +thickets, they determined to return by the same way they came; and, +without being pursued, they traversed the woods, where the French +Captain, being disabled by his wound, was obliged to stay, two of his +company continuing with him. When they had gone forward about two +leagues, the Frenchmen missed another of their company, who, upon +enquiry, was known to be intoxicated with wine, and supposed to have +lost himself in the woods by neglecting to observe the guides; but +common prudence not allowing them to hazard the whole company by too +much solicitude for a single life, they travelled on towards Rio +Francisco, at which they arrived on the 3d of April; and, looking out +for their pinnaces, were surprized with the sight of seven Spanish +sloops, and immediately concluded that some intelligence of their +motions had been carried to Nombre de Dios, and that these vessels had +been fitted out to pursue them, which might undoubtedly have overpowered +the pinnaces and their feeble crews. Nor did their suspicions stop here; +but immediately it occurred to them, that their men might be compelled +by torture to discover where their frigate and ship were stationed, +which being weakly manned, and without the presence of the chief +Commander, would fall into their hands almost without resistance, and +all possibility of escaping be entirely cut off. These reflections sunk +the whole company into despair; and every one, instead of endeavouring +to break through the difficulties that surrounded him, resigned himself +up to his ill fortune; when Drake, whose intrepidity was never to be +shaken, and whole reason was never to be surprized or embarrassed, +represented to them, that, though the Spaniards should have made +themselves masters of the pinnaces, they might yet be hindered from +discovering the ships. He put them in mind, that the pinnaces could not +be taken, the men examined, their examinations compared, their +resolutions formed, their vessels sent out, and the ships taken, in an +instant. Some time must necessarily be spent before the last blow could +be struck; and, if that time were not neglectfully lost, it might be +possible for some of them to reach the ships before the enemy, and +direct them to change their station. + +They were animated with this discourse, by which they observed that +their leader was not without hope; but, when they came to look more +narrowly into their situation, they were unable to conceive upon what it +was founded. To pass by land was impossible, as the way lay over high +mountains, thick woods, and deep rivers; they had not a single boat in +their power, so that passage by water seemed equally impracticable. But +Drake determined upon the only means of success which their condition +afforded them; and, ordering his men to make a raft out of the trees +that were then floating in the river, offered himself to put out to sea +upon it, and chearfully asked who would accompany him. John Owen, John +Smith, and two Frenchmen, who were willing to share his fortune, +embarked with him on the raft, which was fitted out with a sail made of +the biscuit sacks in which they had carried their provisions, and formed +a kind of oar to direct its course instead of a rudder. Then, having +comforted the rest with assurances of his regard for them, and +resolution to leave nothing unattempted for their deliverance, he put +off; and, after having with much difficulty sailed three leagues, +descried two pinnaces hasting towards him, which, upon a nearer +approach, he discovered to be his own; and, hailing them, proposed that +they should anchor behind a point that jutted out into the sea, while he +put to shore; and, crossing the land on foot, was received by his +company with that satisfaction which is only known to those who have +been acquainted with dangers and distresses. + + [Illustration: _Cap^t. Drake, going off to Sea on a Raft in Quest of + his two Pinnaces._ _J. June. Sc._] + +The same night they rowed silently to Rio Francisco, where they embarked +the whole company, with what treasure they had been able to bring with +them through the woods; then sailing back with the utmost expedition, +they returned to their frigate, and soon after to their ship, where +Drake divided the gold and silver equitably between the French and +English. + +Here they spent fourteen days in fitting out their frigate more +completely; during which time, the Frenchmen, with their ship, lay among +the Cabezes, while twelve English and sixteen Symerons travelled once +more into the country, as well to recover the French Captain, whom they +had left wounded, as to bring away the treasure which they had hid in +the woods. Drake, whom his company would not suffer to hazard his person +in another land expedition, went with them to Rio Francisco, where he +found one of the Frenchmen who had staid to attend their Captain, and +was informed by him, upon his enquiries after his fortune, that, half an +hour after their separation, the Spaniards came upon them, and easily +seized upon the wounded Captain; but that his companion might have +escaped with him, had he not preferred money to life; for seeing him +throw down a box of jewels that retarded him, he could not forbear +taking it up, and, with that and the gold which he had already, was so +loaded that he could not escape. With regard to the bars of gold and +silver which they had concealed in the ground, he informed them that 200 +men had been employed in searching for them. The people, however, either +mistrusting the informer’s veracity, or confident that what they had +hidden could not be found, pursued their journey; but, upon their +arrival at the place, found the ground turned up for two miles round, +and were able to recover no more than 13 bars of silver, and a small +quantity of gold. They discovered afterwards, that the Frenchman who was +left drunk in the woods, falling into the hands of the Spaniards, was +tortured by them till he confessed where Drake and his company had +concealed their plunder; so fatal to Drake’s expedition was the +drunkenness of his followers. + +Then, dismissing the French, they passed by Carthagena with their +colours flying, and soon after took a frigate laden with provisions and +honey, which they valued as a great restorative, and then sailed away to +the Cabezes. Here they staid about a week to careen their vessels, and +fit them for a long voyage, determining to set sail for England; and +that the faithful Symerons might not go away unrewarded, broke up their +pinnaces, and gave them the iron, the most valuable present in the world +to a nation whose only employments were war and hunting, and amongst +whom show and luxury had no place. Pedro, their Captain, being desired +by Drake to go through the ships, and to chuse what he most desired, +fixed his eye upon a scymetar set with jewels, which the French Captain +had presented to Drake for the provisions with which he had supplied +him, and, being unwilling to ask for so valuable a present, offered for +it four large quoits, or thick plates of gold, which he had formerly +concealed in the waters; but Drake, desirous to shew him, that fidelity +seldom is without a recompence, gave it him with the highest professions +of satisfaction and esteem. Pedro, receiving it with the utmost +gratitude, informed him, that by bestowing it he had conferred greatness +and honour upon him; for, by presenting it to his King, he doubted not +of obtaining the highest rank among the Symerons. He then persisted in +his resolution of giving him the gold, which was generously thrown by +Drake into the common stock; for he said, that those at whose expences +he had been sent out, ought to share in all the gain of the expedition, +whatever pretence cavil and chicanery might supply for the appropriation +of any part of it. Thus was Drake’s character consistent with itself; he +was equally superior to avarice and fear; and, through whatever danger +he might go in quest of gold, he thought it not valuable enough to be +obtained by artifice or dishonesty. + +They now forsook the coast of America, which for many months they had +kept in perpetual alarms, having taken more than 100 vessels of all +sizes between Carthagena and Nombre de Dios, of which they never +destroyed any, unless they were fitted out against them, nor ever +detained the prisoners longer than was necessary for their own security +or concealment, providing for them in the same manner as for themselves, +and protecting them from the malice of the Symerons; a behaviour which +humanity dictates, and which, perhaps, even policy cannot disapprove. He +must, certainly, meet with obstinate opposition who makes it equally +dangerous to yield as to resist, and who leaves his enemies no hopes but +from victory. + +What riches they acquired is not particularly related; but, it is not to +be doubted, that the plunder of so many vessels, together with the +silver seized at Nombre de Dios, must amount to a very great sum, though +the share that was allotted to Drake was not sufficient to lull him into +effeminacy, or to repress his natural inclination to adventures. They +arrived at Plymouth on the 9th of August, 1573, on Sunday in the +afternoon; and so much were the people delighted with the news of their +arrival, that they left the preacher, and ran in crouds to the key with +shouts and congratulations. + +Drake having, in the voyage just mentioned, had a view of the South Sea, +as has already been related, and formed a resolution to sail upon it, +did not suffer himself to be diverted from his design by the prospect of +any difficulties that might obstruct the attempt, nor any danger that +might attend the execution. His reputation was sufficiently established +to remove all obstacles (for obstacles he met with), and to obviate the +motives that produced them; but it was not till the year 1577, that he +was able to assemble a force proportioned to his design, and to obtain a +commission from the Queen, by which he was constituted Captain-General +of a squadron, consisting of five vessels, of which the Pelican, of 100 +tons, was commanded by himself as Admiral; the Elizabeth, of 80 tons, +Vice-Admiral, commanded by John Winter; the Marygold, of 30 tons, by +John Thomas; the Swan, of 50 tons, by John Chester and the Christopher, +of 15 tons, by Thomas Moon, the honest carpenter, who, on the former +voyage, destroyed the Swan by Drake’s direction. + +These ships, equipped partly by himself, and partly by other private +adventurers, he manned with 164 stout sailors, and furnished with such +provisions as he thought necessary for so long and hazardous a voyage: +nor did he confine his concern to the ordinary equipment of his ships +with naval stores and military preparations, but carried with him +whatever he thought might contribute to raise, in those nations with +which he should have intercourse, the highest ideas of the arts and +grandeur of his native country. He, therefore, not only procured a +complete service of silver-plate for his own table, and furnished the +cook-room with many vessels of the same metal, but engaged several +musicians to accompany him; rightly judging, that nothing would more +excite the admiration of savages, or uncivilized people, than the powers +of music. On this occasion, however, it must not be concealed, that he +engaged his men on the false pretence of sailing to Alexandria; and that +it was not till after he arrived on the coast of Brazil, that he +acquainted them with his design of passing the Straits, and entering the +South Seas. + +On the 15th of Nov. 1577, about three in the afternoon, he sailed from +Plymouth; but a heavy storm (such as no man on board had ever seen the +like), taking him almost as soon as out of port, forced him into +Falmouth, where he staid till the 13th of December to refit. He then +took his departure, and on the 25th of the same month fell in with the +coast of Barbary, and on the 27th cast anchor at the island of Mogadore, +about one mile distant from the main, between which and the isle they +found a very convenient harbour. Here he began to build the pinnaces, +the frames of which he brought ready from Plymouth to be put together, +as in his former voyage. While the carpenters were employed in this +service, they were discovered by the Moors that inhabit those coasts, +who sent two of their Chiefs on board Drake’s ship, receiving at the +same time two of his company as hostages. These men he not only treated +in the most hospitable manner, but presented them with such things as +they appeared most to admire; it being with him an established maxim to +endeavour to secure in every country a kind reception to such Englishmen +as should come after him, by treating the inhabitants with kindness and +generosity. + +But this friendly intercourse was in appearance soon broken; for, on the +next day, observing the Moors making signals from the land, they sent +out their boat, as before, to fetch them to the ship; and one John Frye +leapt ashore, intending to become an hostage, as on the former day, when +immediately he was seized by the Moors; and the crew, observing great +numbers start from behind a rock with weapons in their hands, thought it +next to madness to attempt his rescue, and, therefore, provided for +their own security by returning to the ship. Frye was mounted on +horseback, and immediately carried up into the country to their King, +who being then in continual expectation of an invasion from Portugal, +suspected that these ships were sent only to reconnoitre the coast, and +discover a proper harbour for a more formidable fleet; but, being +informed who they were, and whither they were bound, not only dismissed +his captive, but made large offers of friendship and assistance; which +Drake, however, did not stay to receive; but being disgusted at this +breach of the laws of commerce, and apprehending further treachery, he +quitted the coast on December 31, and on the 17th of January arrived at +Cape Blanco, having in their passage taken several Spanish vessels, and +found one in the harbour with no men. + +Here, while Drake was employing his men in catching fish, and training +them for land as well as sea service, the natives came down to the +sea-side with ambergrease and other gums, to traffic for such +commodities as they then stood most in need of, and with which Drake +very generously supplied them. + +Having rifled and discharged the Spanish ships which they had taken, +they sailed on the 22d of January towards the isles of Cape Verd, and on +the 27th came to anchor before Mayo, hoping to furnish themselves with +fresh water; but, having landed, they found the chief town deserted; +and, marching farther up the country, saw the vallies extremely +fruitful, and abounding with ripe figs, cocoes, and plantains, but could +by no means prevail upon the inhabitants to converse or traffic with +them. However, they were suffered by them to range the country without +molestation, but found no water, except at such a distance from the sea, +that the labour of carrying it to their ships was greater than it was at +that time necessary for them to undergo. Salt, had they wanted it, might +have been obtained with less trouble, being left by the sea upon the +sands, and hardened by the sun, during the ebb, in such quantities, that +the chief traffic of this island is carried on by means of it. Thus, +though the island abounded with goats, poultry, and delicious fruits of +various kinds, they could procure none of any consequence, because the +Portuguese, who were then in possession of it, were prohibited all +commerce with strangers on very severe penalties. + +On the 31st of January they made St. Iago, an island at that time +divided between the natives and the Portuguese, who, first entering +these islands under the shew of traffic, by degrees established +themselves, claimed a superiority over the natives, and harrassed them +with such cruelty, that they obliged them either to fly to the woods and +mountains, where many of them perished with hunger, or to take arms +against their oppressors, and, under the insuperable disadvantages with +which they contended, to die almost without a battle. Such treatment had +the natives of St. Iago received, which had driven them into the rocky +parts of the island, from whence they made incursions into the +plantations of the Portuguese, sometimes with loss, but generally with +that success which desperation produces; so that the Portuguese were in +continual alarms, and lived with the natural consequences of guilt, +terror, and anxiety. They were wealthy but not happy, and possessed the +island, but did not enjoy it. + +In passing this island, the garrison of the fort discharged three pieces +of cannon at them, but without effect. For this insult they took a +Portuguese ship laden with wines, the pilot of which they retained, but +set the rest of the crew on shore. This man, Nuno da Silva by name, was +very useful to them in traversing the coast of Brazil, being acquainted +with the bays and harbours where fresh water and provisions were to be +obtained. Him they continued to detain captive, though they broke up his +ship before they entered the Straits, till they were about to leave the +coasts of Peru, when finding him no longer serviceable, they set him on +shore in the Spanish settlements, from whence he afterwards returned +home, and wrote an account of the voyage as far as he went, which is +thought by many to be very authentic. + +It was soon after the capture of this ship that a difference arose +between Drake and his friend, Mr. Thomas Doughty, which, gradually +increasing, grew into inveteracy, and terminated at last in the death of +the latter. Doughty was a gentleman and a scholar, whom Drake had +persuaded to embark in this expedition to better his fortune and to +whom, till the incident happened which we are about to relate, he had +shewn particular marks of favour and friendship; but trivial beginnings +are often productive of the most important events. + +The ground of the malevolence with which Drake pursued Doughty, under +the colour of justice, has hitherto lain concealed from the public eye; +but we shall now trace it, step by step, till the fatal period when the +unhappy victim was brought to the block, and when Drake, by suffering +revenge to triumph over virtue, left an indelible blot upon his +character, which no panegyric can wipe away. + +Among the Harleian manuscripts there is a written account of this +voyage, in which the author has particularly had his eye on this +transaction. As he was an eye-witness of all that passed, his relation +will best appear in his own words: “Captain Drake, says he, having +boarded the ship of Nuno da Sylva, and feasted his eyes with the view of +the commodities, he committed the custody and well-ordering of this +prize unto Master Thomas Doughty, as his good and esteemed friend, +praying him in any case to see good order kept, and whoso should be the +breaker thereof, to give him to understand of any such without exception +of any. + +“It thus chanced that General Drake had a brother (not the wisest man in +christendom), whom he put into this said prize, as also divers others. +This Thomas Drake, as one more greedy of prey than covetous of honesty +or credit, offered himself the first and only man to break the General +his brother’s commandment; for he, contrary to his strict prohibition, +did not only break open a chest, but did dive suddenly into the same, +that Master Doughty knew not how to discharge himself against the +General but by revealing it unto him; yet first Master Doughty called +Thomas Drake unto him, and shewed him his great folly in this behalf, +who, yielding unto his fault, prayed Master Doughty to be good unto him, +and keep it from the General; but he briefly told him he could not keep +it, but he would deliver it with what favour he might. So at the +General’s next coming on board the prize, Master Doughty opened the same +unto him, who presently falling into a rage, not without some great +oaths, seemed to wonder what Thomas Doughty should mean to touch his +brother; and did, as it were, assure himself that he had some farther +meaning in this, and that he meant to strike at his credit, and he would +not, or could not, by God’s life (as he phrased it), suffer it. From +this time forth grudges did seem to grow between them from day to day, +to the no small admiration of the rest of the company, although some +envying his former favour and friendship with the General, and some, I +think, doubting that his capacity would reach too far to the +aggrandizing his credit in the country, talked variously of the matter; +however, Master Doughty was put again into the Pelican. Thus grudges, +although they had not long rested, yet were they grown to great +extremities, such and so great as a man of any judgment would verily +think that his love towards him in England was more in brave words than +hearty good will or friendly love.” So writes our author. + +In proceeding on their voyage, they came within sight of Fogo, an island +so called from a mountain about the middle of it continually burning, +and like the rest inhabited by the Portuguese. Two leagues to the south +of Fogo lies Brava, which has received its name from its fertility, +abounding with all kinds of fruits, and watered with great numbers of +springs and brooks, but, having neither harbour nor anchorage, was at +that time uninhabited. + +Drake, having sent out his boats with plummets to sound, was not able to +find any ground about it; and it is reported, that many experiments of +the like kind have been made without success. However, he took in water +sufficient; and on the 2d of Feb. set sail for the coast of Brazil. + +On February the 17th, he passed the equator, after being becalmed near +three weeks, during which time they had dreadful storms of thunder with +lightning, but without any memorable accident, till, continuing their +voyage, on March 28, one of their vessels with 28 men, and the greatest +part of the fresh water on board, was, to their great discouragement, +separated from them; but their perplexity lasted not long, for on the +next day they discovered her, and she again joined her associates. In +their long course, which gave them opportunities of observing several +animals, both in the air and water, at that time very little known, +nothing entertained or surprized them more than the flying-fish, which +is nearly of the same size with a herring, and has fins of the length of +his whole body, by the help of which, when he is pursued by the benito +(a large kind of mackarel), as soon as he finds himself upon the point +of being taken, he springs up into the air, and flies forward as long as +his wings continue wet, moisture being, as it seems, necessary to make +them pliant and moveable; and, when they become dry and stiff, he falls +down into the water, unless some vessel intercepts him, and dips them +again for a second flight. This unhappy animal is not only pursued by +fishes in his natural element, but attacked in the air, where he hopes +for security, by the don or spar kite, a great bird that preys upon +fish; and their species must certainly be destroyed, were not their +increase so great, that the young fry, in one part of the year, covers +that part of the sea. + +There is another fish, named the cuttle, of which whole shoals will +sometimes rise at once out of the water, and of which a great multitude +fell into their ship. + +At length, having sailed without sight of land for 54 days, they arrived +April the 5th on the coast of Brazil. “In the mean while, you shall +hear, says our author, what befel: Master Drake, never leaving to seek +and force upon Master Doughty, found, in the end, this opportunity to +degrade him. Whether of purpose, or his own voluntary, it chanced John +Brown the trumpet to go aboard the Pelican, where, for that he had been +long absent, the company offered him a hobbey, among the which, Master +Doughty putting in his hand, said, Fellow John, you shall have in my +hand, although it be but light amongst the rest; and so laying his hand +on his buttock, which perceived of John Trumpet, he began to swear +wounds and blood to the company to let him loose, for they are not all +(said he) the General’s friends that be here; and with that turned him +to Master Doughty, and said unto him, (as himself presently after told +me in the prize) God’s wounds, Doughty, what dost thou mean to use this +familiarity with me, considering thou art not the General’s friend; who +answered him, What, fellow John! what moves you to this, and to use +these words to me, that am as good and as sure a friend to my good +General as any in this place, and I defy him that shall say the +contrary. But is the matter thus? why yet, fellow John, I pray thee let +me live until I come into England. Thus, John Brown coming again +presently aboard the prize, had not talked any long time with the +General, but the boat went aboard and rested not, but presently brought +Master Doughty to the prize’s side, General Drake sitting in the midst +of his men, who hearing the boat at the ship’s side stood up, and Master +Doughty offering to take hold of the ship to have entered, said the +General, Stay there, Thomas Doughty, for I must send you to another +place, and with that commanded the mariners to row him on board the +fly-boat, saying unto him, it was a place more fit for him than that +from whence he came: but Master Doughty, although he craved to speak +with the General, could not be permitted, neither would he hear him.” +Soon after this, the fly-boat here mentioned, (called the Swan,) was +separated from them by a violent storm, “in all whose absence, says our +author, the General never ceased to inveigh against Master Doughty, +terming him a conjurer and a witch; and, at any time when we had foul +weather, he would say that Tom. Doughty was the occasion thereof, and +that it came out of Tom. Doughty’s capcase, and would avouch the same +with oaths.” + +After the storm above-mentioned, they steered near the land to the +southward; and on the 14th anchored under a cape, which they afterwards +called Cape Joy, because in two days the vessel that was missing +returned to them. Here they refreshed their weary crews, and took in +fresh water; but, finding the country, though pleasant, without +inhabitants, they weighed anchor, and, by running a little farther to +the southward, found a small harbour between a rock and the main, where +the rock breaking the force of the sea, the ships rode at anchor with +the greatest security. On this rock they killed several seals, keeping +them for food, and found them wholesome, though not palatable. + +Their next course was directed to the great river of Plate, in 36 deg. +of south latitude; but, not finding anchorage in that river, they sailed +in quest of a more convenient harbour, when they were surprized by a +sudden storm, in which they again lost sight of the fly-boat. This +accident determined Drake to contract the number of his ships, that he +might not only avoid the inconvenience of such frequent separations, but +ease the labour of his men, by having more hands in each vessel. For +this purpose he sailed along the coast and on May the 13th discovered a +bay, which, though it promised fair, he durst not enter before it was +examined: he, therefore, ordered his boat to be hoisted out, and, taking +the line into his own hand, went on sounding the passage till he was +three leagues from his ship, when on a sudden the weather changed, the +skies blackened, the wind rose, and all the usual forerunners of a storm +began to threaten them. Nothing was now thought of but the means of +returning to the ship; but the thickness of the fog intercepting it from +their sight, made the attempt almost impracticable. In this perplexity, +which Drake was not more sensible of than those whom he had left in the +ships, nothing was to be omitted, however dangerous, that might tend to +extricate them from it. Captain Thomas, therefore, having the lightest +vessel, steered boldly into the bay, and, taking the Admiral on board, +dropt anchor, and lay out of danger; while the rest that were in the +open sea suffered much from the tempest, and the Mary (the Portugueze +prize) was driven before the wind. The others, as soon as the tempest +was over, discovering by the fires that were made on shore where Drake +was, repaired to him. + +Here they met with no inhabitants, though there were several wigwams or +huts standing, in which they found some dried fowls, and among them +ostriches, of which the thighs were as large as those of a sheep. These +birds are too unwieldy to rise from the ground; but with the help of +their wings, or rather stumps, they run so swiftly, that the English +could never come near enough to shoot any of them. + +Not finding this harbour convenient, or well stored with wood and water, +they left it on the 15th of May, and on the 18th entered another much +safer and more commodious, which they no sooner arrived at, than Drake +sent Winter to the southward in search of those ships that were absent, +and immediately after sailed himself to the northward, and happily +meeting with the Swan, conducted her to the rest of the fleet; after +which, in pursuance of his former resolution, he ordered her to be +broken up, preserving the iron work for a future supply. The other +vessel which was separated in the late storm, could not be discovered. +While they were thus employed upon an island about a mile from the main +land, to which, at low water, there was a passage on foot, they were +discovered by the natives, who appeared upon a hill at a distance, +dancing, and holding up their hands, as beckoning to the English to come +to them, which Drake observing, sent out a boat with knives, bells, and +bugles, and such things as by their usefulness or novelty he imagined +would be agreeable. As soon as the English landed, they observed two men +running towards them as deputed by the company, who came within a little +distance, and then standing still, could not be prevailed upon to come +nearer. The English, therefore, tied their presents to a pole, which +they fixed in the ground, and then retiring, saw the Indians advance, +who taking what they found upon the pole, left in return such feathers +as they wore upon their heads, with a small bone about six inches in +length, carved round the top and burnished. Drake observing their +inclination to friendship and traffic, advanced with some of his company +towards the hill, upon sight of whom the Indians ranged themselves in a +line from east to west, and one of them running from one end of the rank +to the other, backwards and forwards, bowed himself towards the rising +and setting of the sun, holding his hands over his head, and, frequently +stopping in the middle of the rank, leaped up towards the moon, which +then shone directly over their heads thus calling the sun and moon, the +deities they worship, to witness to the sincerity of their professions +of peace and friendship. While this ceremony was performing, Drake and +his company ascended the hill, to the apparent terror of the Indians, +whose apprehensions when the English perceived, they peaceably retired, +which gave the natives so much encouragement, that they came forward +immediately, and exchanged their arrows, feathers, and bones, for such +trifles as were offered them. Thus they traded for some time but by +frequent intercourse, finding that no violence was intended, they became +familiar, and mingled with the English without the least distrust. They +go quite naked, except the skin of some animals, which they throw over +their shoulders when they walk or lie in the open air. They roll up +their hair, which is very long, with a plume of ostrich’s feathers, and +usually stick their arrows in it, that they may not encumber them, they +being made with reeds headed with flint, and therefore not heavy. Their +bows are about an ell long. Their chief ornament is paint, which they +use of several kinds, delineating generally upon their bodies the +figures of the sun and moon in honour of their deities. + +It is observable, that the inhabitants of most nations amongst whom the +use of cloaths is unknown, paint their bodies. Such was the practice of +the inhabitants of our own country. To this custom did our earliest +enemies, the Picts, owe their denomination. As it is not probable that +caprice or fancy should be uniform, there must be doubtless some reason +for a practice so general, and prevailing in distant parts of the world +which have no communication with each other. The original end of +painting their bodies was probably to exclude the cold; an end, which, +if we believe some relations, is so effectually produced by it, that the +men thus painted never shiver at the most piercing blasts: but, +doubtless, any people so hardened by continual severities, would, even +without paint, be less sensible of the cold than the civilized +inhabitants of the same climate. However, this practice may contribute +in some degree to defend them from the injuries of winter, and, in those +climates where little evaporates by the pores, may be used with no great +inconvenience: but in hot countries, where perspiration in a greater +degree is necessary, the natives only use unction to preserve them from +the other extreme of weather, or, more probably, from the inconvenience +of the flies, which, were it not for that or some such defence, would be +intolerable. + +These savages had no canoes, like the other Indians, nor any method of +crossing the water; which was probably the reason why the birds in the +adjacent islands were so tame that they might be taken with the hand, +having never been before frighted or molested. The birds here spoken of +are, without doubt, the penguins of which so ample a description is +given in the Voyages of Byron and Wallis. The great plenty of these +fowls, and of the seals that were found every-where on the shores of +this coast, contributed much to the refreshment of the English, who +named the bay where they then lay, Seal-bay, from the number they there +killed of those animals. + +These seals seem to be the chief food of the natives; for the English +often found raw pieces of their flesh half eaten, and left, as they +supposed, after a full meal, by the savages, whom they never knew to +make use of fire, or any art in dressing or preparing their victuals. +Nor were their other customs less wild or uncouth than their way of +feeding. One of them, having received a cap off the General’s head, and +being extremely pleased as well with the honour as the gift, to express +his gratitude, retired to a little distance, and thrusting an arrow into +his leg, let the blood run upon the ground, testifying, as it is +probable, that he was ready to shed his blood in his defence. + +When the Swan fly-boat was separated from the fleet in the storm off the +coast of Brazil, the crew, despairing of ever being able to rejoin it, +began to be in fear for provisions. They were on a desart coast, had no +place of rendezvous, and were ignorant even of their place of +destination. In this untoward situation a dispute arose among the +officers, of which the author of the manuscript before cited, gives the +following relation:--He had already taken notice that Master Thomas +Doughty had been sent on board this vessel as a kind of punishment, and +in truth so it proved; for the master of the vessel, who seems also to +have been the purser, knowing upon what terms he stood with Drake, took +every occasion to insult, or, as our author’s phrase is, to discredit +him; for those were always ranked among Drake’s friends who were enemies +to Master Doughty. “This man, foreseeing that provisions might run +short, put himself from the mess of Master Doughty, Captain Chester, and +the rest of the gentlemen, and did set himself amongst the sailors, +nothing at all sparing, but rather augmenting his own diet; but how +scantily those gentlemen did fare, there be some come home, that, except +they will deny their own words, can make relation thereof. + +“Master Doughty, with Master Chester, whom the General had made Captain +of the fly-boat, found themselves so ill used, that Master Doughty +accosted his friend one day in these words: I marvel, Master Chester, +that you will take it at his hands to be thus used, considering that you +were here authorized by the General to be our Commander. And, at the +same time, he spoke to the Master, and told him, that he used so much +partiality in the distribution of his provisions, that the same could +not be borne, considering the extremity they were like to fall into for +want of victuals; and that it was against reason that he and his +messmates should be so plentifully fed, while others were at the point +to starve. The Master hereat putting himself in a rage, swore that such +rascals as he was should be glad to eat the shoals (husks) when he would +have them. Master Doughty answered him again, that reason would will +that he should be used as well as other men, considering his advantages. +Thou any advantage here! replied the Master, I would not give a point +for thee nor thy advantages; and if ever thou comest home to enjoy any +advantages, I will be trussed up. Then in multiplying words, and as I +heard a blow or two passing between them, the Master, in the spleen of +his heart, looking at him with an evil eye, Thou! will thou have +victuals! thou shalt be glad, if we do not meet with the General, the +rather to eat that falls from my tail on the anchor-fluke ere thou +gettest home again. Then Master Doughty, turning to Master Chester, said +unto him, Master Chester, let us not be thus used at this knave’s hands. +Lose nothing of that authority that the General committed unto you. If +you will, we will put the sword into your hands again, and you shall +have the government. This case I will aver to be true, for there were +two or three witnesses sworn to these articles, as some of the special +matter that he had to lose his head for.” + +It was not many days after this quarrel before the Swan fell in again +with the fleet; when Drake, as has been said, caused her to be hauled on +shore, set on fire, and burnt; or, as others say, broke up and converted +into fire-wood for the use of the fleet. + +Mr. Doughty, being here delivered from the fly-boat, was again restored +to the Pelican, where the master with whom he had the dispute appears to +have preferred a complaint against him, and with such aggravations as he +thought proper to add; all which were favourably heard, and credit given +to the whole relation by the General, who wanted only a pretence to +persevere in his severity to the man who, being once his favourite, was +now become the object of his most inveterate hatred. Doughty, provoked, +no doubt, by the misrepresentations of the master, and the partiality +with which they were heard, gave the General some opprobrious, language, +adding, “that the lightest word that came out of his (Doughty’s) mouth +was to be believed as soon as the General’s oath. Whereupon the General +did not only strike him, but commanded him to be bound to the mast; for +the accomplishment of which, the master of the fly-boat took no little +pains. This happened as the two ships (the Pelican and the Canter) lay +together; and as soon as Doughty was released, he was put into the +Canter, although greatly against his will, for that he said he knew them +to be there that sought his life, as namely the master of the fly-boat, +and some other desperate and unhonest people; but would he or no, +thither he must, or else the General swore he would lift him out with +the tackle, and for that purpose commanded the tackle to be loosed. Thus +aboard the Canter he went, and his brother John Doughty with him.” The +Canter was a vessel taken from the Spaniards on the coast of Africa. + +While they lay in this harbour, there is one remarkable incident related +by this author that deserves particular notice, as it tends to +illustrate the previous steps that were pursued to accomplish the ruin +of this unfortunate gentleman. + +“On board the fly-boat, says he, was one, Thomas Cuttle, who some time +had been Captain of the Pelican under Drake, with whom the General had +been tampering. This man came out from him in great wrath, and offering +to go over to the main, between the which, and the island where they +then lay, was (as has been said) but a shallow water. He, standing well +nigh up to the middle in the water with his piece, uttered these words, +Well, my Masters, quoth he, I find I am heavily borne with here, because +I will not accuse this gentleman (meaning Doughty) of that, as I take +God to witness, I know not by him; and, therefore, I declare before you +all, that, whatsoever becomes of me, I never knew any thing by him but +to be the General’s friend; and, rather than I will bide this hard +countenance at the General’s hands, I will yield myself into cannibal’s +hands; and so I pray you all to pray for me.” + +After this public declaration the man departed; and, having reached the +opposite shore, he went up into the country, where firing his piece to +bring the natives to him, Drake taking it for a signal that he wanted to +return, sent a boat over to the main, and brought him back. + +Just before their departure from this harbour, which lay in a bay a +little to the southward of Cape Hope, “Captain Drake himself came on +board the Elizabeth, and calling all the company together, told them, +that he was to send thither a couple of men, the which he did not know +how to carry along with him this voyage, and go through therewithal, as +namely, quoth he, Thomas Doughty, who is a commotioner and a seditious +fellow, and a very bad and lewd fellow, and one that I have made that +reckoning of as of my left hand; and his brother the young Doughty, a +witch, a poisoner, and such a one as the world cannot judge of, having +his knowledge from the devil; and so warning the company that none +should speak to them, nor use any conference with them; if they did, he +would hold them as his enemies, and enemies to the voyage. And he willed +that great care should be taken that they should neither write nor read; +and then he declared what wealth the worst boy in the fleet should get +by this voyage, and how the worst boy should never need to go again to +sea, but should be able to live in England with a right good gentleman; +for, quoth he, you shall see that we will have gold come as plentiful as +wood into the ships. Having finished his speech, he departed, and +shortly after sent the said Thomas Doughty and his brother aboard the +Elizabeth, commanding them, as they would answer it with their lives, +not to set pen to paper, nor yet to read but what every man might +understand and see. And sure, adds our author, their entertainment there +was accordingly; for men durst not speak to them, although willingly +perhaps they would; and as their fare was with the simplest in the ship, +so was their lodging. But he, Thomas Doughty, having agreed with the +boatswain of the ship for a cabin which stood, God knows, in an +uncomfortable room, yet must he pay 3 l. for the same in England. But +what came of this to the poor fellow! he was fain for his friendly using +him to lose his office, and continue in heavy displeasure.” + +Having staid fifteen days in the harbour, during which time they +continued their friendly intercourse with the savages, on June the 3d +they set sail towards the South Sea, and six days afterwards stopt at a +little bay to break up the Christopher, which from the smallness of its +size was found incapable of living in those boisterous seas, of which, +before they entered them, they had conceived no adequate idea. Then +passing on, they found it necessary to call anchor in another bay, with +a view to recover the Portuguese prize, which was separated from them in +the storm of the 27th of April, and had not yet rejoined them. To return +in search of it was sufficiently mortifying; to proceed without it, was +not only to deprive themselves of a considerable part of their force, +but to expose their friends and companions, who had voluntarily embarked +on board her, to certain death or certain captivity. This consideration +prevailed; and, therefore, on the 18th, after prayers to God, with which +Drake (for example’s sake) never forgot to begin an enterprize, he put +to sea, and the next day near Port Julian discovered their associates, +whose ship was now grown leaky, having suffered much in the first storm +by which they were separated, and afterwards in the fruitless attempts +to regain the fleet. Drake, therefore, being desirous to relieve their +fatigues, entered Port Julian. They no sooner landed than they were +accosted by two of the natives, of whom Magellan left a very terrible +account, having described them as a nation of giants and monsters: nor +did they find his narrative entirely without foundation; for the least +of those they saw was larger and taller than the largest of their +company. The two who accosted the English appeared much pleased with +their new guests, received willingly whatever was given them, and very +exactly observed every thing that passed, seeming more particularly +delighted with seeing Oliver, the master-gunner, shoot an English arrow. +They shot themselves likewise in emulation, but their arrows always fell +to the ground far short of his. + +Soon after this friendly contest came another, who, observing the +familiarity of his countrymen with the strangers, appeared much +displeased; and, as the Englishmen perceived, endeavoured to persuade +them from such an intercourse. What effect his arguments had was soon +after apparent; for another of Drake’s companions, being desirous to +shew the third Indian a specimen of the English valour and dexterity, +attempted likewise to shoot an arrow; but, drawing it with his full +force, burst the bow-string: upon which, the Indians, who were +unacquainted with their other weapons, imagining them disarmed, followed +the company as they were walking negligently down towards their boat, +and let fly their arrows, aiming particularly at Winter, who had the bow +in his hand. He, finding himself wounded in the shoulder, endeavoured to +refit his bow; and, turning about, was pierced with a second arrow in +the breast. Oliver, the gunner, immediately presented his piece at the +insidious assailants, which failing to take fire, gave them time to +level another flight of arrows, by which he was killed; nor, perhaps, +had any of them escaped, surprized and perplexed as they were, had not +Drake animated their courage, and directed their motions, ordering them, +by perpetually changing their places, to elude as much as might be the +aim of their enemies, and to defend their bodies with their targets; and +instructing them by his own example to pick up and break the arrows as +they fell, which they did with so much diligence that the Indians were +soon in danger of being disarmed. Then Drake himself taking the gun, +which Oliver had so unsuccessfully attempted to make use of, discharged +it at the Indian that first began the fray and had killed the gunner, +aiming it so happily that the hail-shot, with which it was loaded, tore +open his belly, and forced him to such terrible outcries, that the +Indians, though their numbers increased, and many of them shewed +themselves from different parts of an adjoining wood, were too much +terrified to renew the assault; and suffered Drake without molestation +to withdraw his wounded friend, who, being hurt in his lungs, languished +two days, and then dying, was interred with his companion with the usual +ceremony of a military funeral. + +They staid here two months after this quarrel, without receiving any +other injuries from the natives, in which time they discovered the +gibbet on which Magellan had formerly executed some of his mutinous +company, and where “Drake, according to the writers of the Biographia +Britannica, did the least commendable action of his life, in executing +Mr. _John_ Doughty, a man next in authority to himself; in which, +however, he preserved a great appearance of justice.” + +To clear this matter fully, it will be necessary to bring together the +substance of what these authors have said on the subject, and then to +add the plain relation from the manuscript already quoted. + +‘Here it was (at Port St. Julian), say these writers, that on a sudden, +having carried the principal persons engaged in the service to a desart +island lying in the bay, he called a kind of council of war, or rather +court martial, where he exposed his commission, by which the Queen +granted him the power of life and death, which was delivered him with +this remarkable expression from her own mouth; _We do account, that he, +Drake, who strikes at thee, does strike at us._ He then laid open, with +great eloquence, (for, though his education was but indifferent, he had +a wonderful power of speech) the cause of this assembly. He proceeded +next to charge Mr. John Doughty, _who had been second in command, during +the whole voyage_, when Drake was present, and first in his absence, +with plotting the destruction of the undertaking, and the murder of his +person. He said he had the first notice of this gentleman’s bad +intentions before he left England; but that he was in hopes his +behaviour towards him would have extinguished such disposition, if there +had been any truth in the information. He then appealed for his +behaviour to the whole assembly, and to the gentleman accused. He next +exposed his practices from the time that he left England, while he lived +towards him with all the kindness and cordiality of a brother; which +charge he supported by producing papers under his own hand, to which Mr. +Doughty added a full and free confession. After this, the Captain, or, +as in the language of those times he is called, the General, quitted the +place, telling the assembly he expected that they should pass a verdict +upon him, for he would be no judge in his own cause. Camden, as the +reader will see, says, that he tried him by a jury; but, other accounts +affirm, that the whole forty persons of which the court was composed, +had judged him to death, and gave this in writing under their hands and +seals, leaving the time and manner of it to the General. Mr. Doughty +himself said, that he desired rather to die by the hands of justice than +to be his own executioner. Upon this, Captain Drake having maturely +weighed the whole matter, presented three points to Mr. Doughty’s +choice: first, to be executed upon the island where they were; next, to +be set on shore on the main land; or, lastly, to be sent home to abide +the justice of his country. He desired he might have till the next day +to consider of these, which was allowed him, and then, giving his +reasons for rejecting the two last, he declared that he made the first +his choice; and, having received the sacrament with the General, from +the hands of Mr. Francis Fletcher, Chaplain to the fleet, and made a +full confession, his head was cut off with an axe by the +Provost-Marshal, July the 2d, 1578. + +‘As to the imputation which this matter brought upon Drake, we will +first cite what Camden says of this transaction: “On the 26th of April, +entering into the mouth of the river of Plate, he saw an infinite number +of sea-calves; from thence sailing into the haven of St. Julian he found +a gibbet, set up, as it was thought, by Magellan for the punishment of +certain mutineers. In this very place John Doughty, an industrious and +stout man, and the next unto Drake, was called to his trial for raising +a mutiny in the fleet, found guilty by twelve men after the English +manner, and condemned to death, which he suffered undauntedly, being +beheaded, having first received the holy communion with Drake. And, +indeed, the most impartial persons in the fleet were of opinion, that he +had acted seditiously, and that Drake cut him off as an emulator of his +glory, and one that regarded not so much who he himself excelled in +commendation for sea matters, as who he thought might equal him; yet +wanted there not some who, pretending to understand things better than +others, gave out that Drake had in charge from Leicester to take off +Doughty upon any pretence whatever, because he had reported that the +Earl of Essex was made away by the cunning practices of that Earl.” + +‘We find this matter, add the writers just cited, touched in several +other books, and particularly in two, which were written on purpose to +expose the Earl of Leicester, and, perhaps, deserving the less credit +for that reason. + +‘It may be offered in defence of Sir Francis Drake, that this man was +openly put to death, after as fair a trial as the circumstances of time +and place would permit; that he submitted patiently to his sentence, and +received the sacrament with Drake, whom he embraced immediately before +his execution. Besides these, there are two points that deserve +particular consideration: first, that, in such expeditions, strict +discipline, and legal severity, are often absolutely necessary; +secondly, that, as to the Earl of Essex, for whose death Doughty had +expressed concern, he was Drake’s first patron, and it is, therefore, +very improbable he should destroy a man for endeavouring to detect his +murderer. We may add to all this, if liberty may be indulged to +conjectures, that this man, presuming upon the Earl of Leicester’s +favour (who very probably imposed him upon Drake to be rid of him), was +from thence encouraged to form designs against Drake; and this might +also be the reason which hindered him from inclining to an absolute +pardon, as doubting whether it was possible to trust one who had so far +abused his confidence already, and whose known interest with so great a +man might always enable him to find instruments, in case he was wicked +enough to enter upon fresh intrigues.’ + +We shall just remark upon, what is above quoted, that the authors do not +seem to have been well informed for they have all along imputed to John +Doughty what related to his brother Thomas; and, if credit may be given +to the author of the manuscript (John Cook by name), this unfortunate +Thomas fell a sacrifice to Drake’s resentment. “On this island in Port +St. Julian, says he, passed many matters, which, I think, God would not +have to be concealed, especially for that they tended to murder; for he +(Drake) spewed out against Thomas Doughty his venom. Here he ended all +his conceived hatred, not by courtesy and friendly reconcilement, but by +most tyrannical blood-spilling; for he was never quiet while he lived, +who in wisdom and honest government as far surpassed him, as he in +tyranny surpassed all men. The world never committed a fact like unto +this; for here he murdered him that, if he had well looked unto himself, +had been a more sure and stedfast friend unto him than ever was Pythias +to his friend Damon, as I think the sequel of this case will shew. + +“The last day of June, the General himself, being set in place of +judgment, and having the whole company brought on shore, and having +Captain John Thomas set close by him, who opened a bundle of papers that +were rolled up together, wherein was written divers and sundry articles, +the which, before they were read, the General spoke unto the purport of +them, and turning himself to Thomas Doughty, who was there present, +being before brought thither more like a thief than a gentleman of +honest conversation, he began his charge thus: Thomas Doughty, you have +here sought by divers means, in as much as you may, to discredit me, to +the great hinderance and overthrow of this voyage; besides other great +matters with which I have to charge you, the which, if you can clear +yourself of, you and I shall be very good friends; whereof if you +cannot, you have deserved death. Master Doughty answered, It should +never be approved that he had merited ill by undertaking any villainy +towards him. By whom, quoth the General, will you be tried? Why, good +General, said he, let me live to come unto my country, and I will there +be tried by her Majesty’s laws. Nay, Thomas Doughty, said he, I will +here impannel a jury on you to enquire into those matters that I have to +charge you withal. Why, General, replied Doughty, I hope you will see +your Commission be good. I’ll warrant you, answered the General, my +Commission is good enough. I pray you then let us see it, said Master +Doughty; it is necessary that it should be here shewn. Well, quoth he, +you shall _not_ see it. Then, addressing himself to the company, You +see, my Masters, how this fellow is full of prating, bind me his arms, +for I will be safe of my life. My Masters, you that be my good friends, +Thomas Good, Gregory ----, you there, my friends, bind him; so they took +and bound his arms behind him. Then he uttered divers furious words unto +Thomas Doughty, as charging him to be the man that poisoned my Lord of +Essex; whereas Master Doughty avouched it to his face, that he was the +man that brought the General first to the presence of my Lord in +England. Thou bring ME, quoth the General, to my Lord! See, my Masters, +see here how he goeth about to discredit me. This fellow with my Lord +was never of any estimation. I think he never came about him as a +gentleman; for I that was daily with my Lord never saw him there above +once, and that was long after my entertainment with my Lord. + +“Then, in fine, was there a jury called, whereof Master John Winter was +foreman. Then by John Thomas were the articles read unto them, _even +once over for a last farewel_, for fear that men should have carried +them away by memory; all which appeared to consist of words of +unkindness, and to proceed of some choler when the prisoner was +provoked, all which Doughty did not greatly deny; until at length came +in one Edward Bright, whose honesty of life I have nothing to do with, +who said, Nay, Thomas Doughty, we have other matter for you yet, that +will a little nearer touch you. It will i’ faith bite you to the +girskin. I pray thee, Ned Bright, said the prisoner, charge me with +nothing but truth, and spare me not. Then John Thomas read further for +his last article to conclude the whole withal, That Thomas Doughty +should say to Edward Bright, in Master Drake’s garden, that the Queen’s +Majesty and Council would be corrupted. So Bright holding up his finger, +said, How like ye this gare, sirrah? Why, Ned Bright, said Master +Doughty, what should induce thee thus to belye me? thou knowest that +such familiarity was never between thee and me: but it may be, that I +have said, if we brought home gold, we should be the better welcome; but +yet this is more than I do remember. Then it came out, on farther +evidence, that Master Doughty should say, that my Lord Treasurer had a +plot of the present voyage. No, that he hath not, quoth General Drake. +The other replied, that he had, and had it of him. See, my Masters, said +Drake, what this fellow hath done. God will have his treachery all +known; for her Majesty gave me special commandment, that of all men my +Lord Treasurer should not know it; but you see his own mouth hath +bewrayed him: so this was a special article against him to hurt his +throat, and greatly he seemed to rejoice at this advantage. + +“Then Master Doughty offered him, if he would permit him to live, and to +answer these objections in England, he would set his hand to whatso was +there written, or to any thing else that he would set down. Well, once +let these men, quoth the General, first find whether you are guilty in +this or no, and then we will talk further of the matter. And then he +delivered (after they had all taken their oaths given by John Thomas) +the bills of indictment, as I may term them, unto Mr. John Winter, who +was foreman of this inquest. Then Master Leonard Vicary, a very assured +friend of Master Thomas Doughty’s, said unto him, General, this is not +law, nor agreeable to justice, that you offer. I have not to do with you +crafty lawyers, neither do I care for the law; but I know what I will +do. Why, quoth Master Vicary, who was one of his jury, I know not how we +may answer his life. Well, Master Vicary, quoth he, you shall not have +to do with his life; let me alone with that; you are but to find whether +he be guilty in these articles that here are objected against him, or +no. Why, very well, said Master Vicary, then there is, I trust, no +matter of death. No, no, Master Vicary, quoth he; so with this the jury +went together, finding all to be true, without any doubt or stop made, +but only to that article that Edward Bright had objected against him; +for it was doubted of some whether Bright were sufficient with his only +word to cast away the life of a man. And truly it did argue small +honesty in a man to conceal such a matter if it had been spoken in +England, and to utter it in this place where will was law, and reason +put in exile; for, an honest subject would not have concealed such +matter, which made some doubt of an honest dealing. But, to be brief, +answer was made, that Bright was a very honest man; and so the verdict +being given in, it was told to the General, that there was doubt made of +Bright’s honesty. Why, quoth Master Drake, I dare to swear that what Ned +Bright has said is very true (yet within a fortnight after, the same +Bright was in such disliking with him, as he seemed to doubt his life; +and having displaced him of the Pelican, and put him into the Marygold, +he gave for reason, that himself would be safe, and he would put him far +enough from him). Thus having received in the verdict, he rose off the +place, and departed towards the water-side, where, calling all the +company with him, except Master Thomas Doughty and his brother, he there +opened a certain bundle of letters and bills, and, looking on them, +said, God’s will! I have left in my cabin that I should especially have +had (as if he had there forgotten his Commission): but, whether he +forgot his Commission or no, he much forgot himself, to sit as Judge +without shewing that he had any; but, truly, I think he shewed to the +uttermost what he had: for here he shewed forth, first, letters that +were written, as he said, by Master Hankins to my Lord of Essex for his +entertainment; secondly, he shewed letters of thanks from my Lord of +Essex unto Master Hankins, for preferring so good a servitor unto him, +and how much he had pleasured him; then read he letters that past from +my Lord of Essex unto Secretary Walsingham in his great commendation +then shewed he letters of Master Hatton’s unto himself, tending for the +acceptance of his men John Thomas and John Brewer, for their well usage +in this voyage; and, lastly, he read a bill of her Majesty’s adventure +of a thousand crowns (but I most marvelled that so many noblemen and +gentlemen did leave their letters in his hands, except it were to shew +in this place for his credit). So when he had all done, he said, Now, my +Masters, you may see whether this fellow hath sought my discredit or no, +and what should hereby be meant but the very overthrow of the voyage; +as, first, by taking away of my good name, and altogether discrediting +me, and then my life, which I being bereaved of, what then will you do? +You will fain one to drink another’s blood, and so to return again unto +your own country; you will never be able to find the way thither. And +now, my Masters, consider what a great voyage we are like to make, the +like was never made out of England; for by the same the worst in this +fleet shall become a gentleman; and, if this voyage go not forward, +which I cannot see how possibly it should, if this man live, what a +reproach it will be, not only unto our country, but especially unto us, +the very simplest here may consider of. Therefore, my Masters, they that +think this man worthy to die, let them with me hold up their hands; and, +they that think him not worthy to die, hold down their hands; at the +which, divers that envied his former felicity, held up their hands; some +others, again, for fear of his favouritry, sticked not to lift their +hands, although against their hearts; but some, again, lifted up their +hands and very hearts unto the Lord, to deliver us of this tyrannous and +cruel tyrant; who upon the same, coming to his former judgment-seat, +pronounced him the child of death, and persuaded him withal, that he +would by this means make him the servant of God: and said farther, if +any man could, between this and next meeting, devise any way that might +save his life, he would hear it; and wished himself to devise some way +for his own safeguard. Well, General, quoth he, seeing it is come to +this pass, _that I see you would have me made away_, I pray you carry me +with you to Peru, and there set me ashore. No, truly, Master Doughty, I +cannot answer it to her Majesty, if I should so do; but, how say you, +Thomas Doughty, if any man will warrant me to be safe from your hands, +and will undertake to keep you sure, you shall see what I will say unto +you. Master Doughty then calling on Master Winter, said unto him, Master +Winter, will you be so good as to undertake this for me? Then Master +Winter said unto Master Drake, that he should be safe of his person, and +he would warrant him, if he did commit him to his custody. Then Drake, a +little pausing, said, See then, my Masters, we must thus do; we must +nail him close under the hatches, and return home again without making +any voyage, and if you will do so, then speak your minds. Then a company +of desperate bankrupts that could not live in their own country without +the spoil of that as others had got by the sweat of their brows, cried, +God forbid, good General! which voice was no less attentively heard, for +there needed no spur to a willing horse. Thus, telling Master Doughty to +prepare for his death, and having given him one whole day’s respite to +set all things in order, he rose and departed, promising that his +continual prayers to God should not cease, that it would please God to +put it into his head how he might do him good: but he had so often +before sworn that he would hang him, that I think at this present he +meant to do him little good. Thus Master Doughty continuing all this +night, the next day, and the second night in his prayers, except some +small time that he used in setting his worldly business in some way, and +distributing to such as he thought good, such things as he then had with +him, was the 2d day of July commanded to prepare himself, and to make +ready to die. Then Master Doughty, with a more chearful countenance than +ever he had in all his life, to the show, as one that did altogether +contemn life, prayed him, that, ere he died, he might receive the +sacrament; which was not only granted, but Drake himself offered to +accompany him to the Lord’s Table, for the which Master Doughty gave him +hearty thanks, never worse terming him than my good Captain. Master +Drake offered him withal to make choice of his own death, and for that +he said he was a gentleman he should but lose his head, the which kind +of death was most agreeable to his mind, in as much as he must needs +die. And, truly, I heard say, that Master Drake offered him, if he +would, that he should be shotten to death with a piece, and that he +himself would do that exploit, and so he should die by the hands of a +gentleman. But, in fine, they together received the Lord’s Supper; the +which, I do ever assure myself, that he did take with as uncorrupted a +mind as ever did any innocent of the world; for he, sure, shewed himself +to have all his affiance and only trust in God; he shewed himself so +valiant in this extremity as the world might wonder it; he seemed to +have conquered death itself, and it was not seen, that of all this day +before his death, that ever he altered one jot of his countenance, but +kept it as staid and firm as if he had some message to deliver to some +nobleman. They having thus received the sacrament, there was a banquet +made, such as the place might yield, and there they dined together, in +which time, the place of execution being made ready, after dinner, as +one not willing any longer to delay the time, he told the General, that +he was ready as soon as pleased him; but prayed him, that he might speak +alone with him a few words, with the which they talked a-part the space +of half a quarter of an hour, and then with bills and staves he was +brought to the place of execution, where he shewed himself no less +valiant than all the time before; for, first, here kneeling on his +knees, he first prayed for the Queen’s Majesty of England his Sovereign +lady and mistress; he then prayed to God for the happy success of this +voyage, and prayed to God to turn it to the profit of his country: he +remembered also therein divers his good friends, and especially Sir +William Winter, praying Master John Winter to commend him to that good +Knight; all which he did with so chearful a countenance, as if he had +gone to some great prepared banquet, the which, I sure think, that he +was fully resolved that God had provided for him; so, at the last, +turning to the General, he prayed him that he might make water ere he +died, for, quoth he, the flesh is frail, and withal turned him about and +did so; and coming again, said, Now, truly, I may say as said Sir Thomas +More, that he that cuts off my head shall have little honesty, my neck +is so short: So turning him, and looking about on the whole company, he +desired them all to forgive him, and especially some that he did +perceive to have displeasure borne them for his sake, whereof Thomas +Cuttle was one, Hugh Smith was another, and divers others: whereupon, +Smith prayed him to say before the General then, whether ever they had +any conference together that might redound to his (the General’s) +prejudice or detriment. He declared it at his death, that neither he, +nor any man else, ever practised any treachery towards the General with +him; neither did he himself ever think any villainous thought against +him. Then he prayed the General to be good unto the same Hugh Smith, and +to forgive him for his sake. So the General said, Well, Smith, for +Master Doughty’s sake, and at his request, I forgive thee; but become an +honest man hereafter. So then, Master Doughty embracing the General, +naming him his good Captain, bid him farewel; and so bidding the whole +company farewel, he laid his head to the block, the which being stricken +off, Drake most despitefully made the head to be taken up and shewed to +the whole company, himself saying, See, this is the end of traitors! So +he being buried, and those things finished, the whole company being +together, Master Drake protested before God, that whosoever he was who +should offend but the eighth part that Thomas Doughty had done, should +die for it. He also protested, and swore by the life of God, and the +blessed sacrament which he that day had received, that whosoever he were +within the fleet that did give another a blow, should lose his hand, +without exception of any; and yet, the next day, it fortuned that Master +Doughty’s younger brother, walking both silently and mournfully, as well +for remembrance of his brother’s late death, as also weighing the +imminent peril over his own head, (as what has been already said and the +present consequence may purport), there comes unto him this Edward +Bright, the chief instrument of his brother’s death, saying unto him, +God’s wounds! thou villain, what knowest thou by my wife? and withal +struck at him with his ruler, as of purpose to pick a quarrel, to hasten +his end also. Why, Ned Bright, quoth he, thou seest in what case I am, I +pray thee let me alone; and withal bore off the blow with his arm, +wherewith the ruler broke: but Bright, seeming very furious, thrust him +in the face with the piece that remained in his hand, the splinters +whereof entered an inch into his face; presently upon the which, he went +unto the General to complain of Bright. Why, John Doughty, quoth he, +without having any regard of his oath the day before made, Ned Bright +will be open to your revenge in England; for, I dare say, thy brother +did belye her, when he said that she had an ill name in Cambridge. Then +might every man perceive the little-meant honesty.” + + [Illustration: _The beheading of Capt^n. Doughty by Drake._ _J. June + Sc._] + +From this plain narrative of the trial and execution of Doughty, of the +genuineness of which there cannot be the least doubt, as the concomitant +little circumstances all concur to confirm the author both an eye and +ear witness of what he has related, there is reason to believe, that the +success of the voyage covered the iniquity of the undertaker; and that +the immense booty which Drake brought to England, enabled him to stifle +the complaints of individuals; and, by a proper address, to convert the +acts of oppression, murder, and pyracy, of which he was guilty, into so +many deeds of necessary duty, in order to the accomplishment of the main +object, the acquisition of wealth at the expence of honesty. + +That Drake never had a Commission from the Queen, as his friends would +suggest, appears not only from his not producing it at the trial of +Doughty (which can hardly be justified, in contempt to the prisoner), +but from his not producing it upon another occasion, when, as shall be +shewn immediately, he vauntingly produced other credentials of far less +moment, in order to justify his conduct, and give him credit with his +company. The story, then, of the remarkable words foisted into the mouth +of his Sovereign, and recited by his biographer, is as false as +inconsistent with the character of that wise Princess, who, though there +is reason from her after-conduct to conclude that she was privy to the +voyage, yet never openly countenanced it, till after it was completed, +and the issue of it determined; as appears from the account of the +conversation which Drake himself gave to his followers, a few days +before he left Port St. Julian to seek a passage into the South Seas. + +“On the 6th of August, says our author, he commanded his whole company +to be ashore, and, placing himself in a tent, one side of which was +open, and calling Master Winter on one side of him, and John Thomas on +the other side, his man laid before him a great paper book, and withal +Master Fletcher offered himself to make a sermon. Nay soft, Master +Fletcher, said he, I must preach this day myself, although I have small +skill in preaching. Well, all ye the company, here are ye, or not? +Answer was made, that they were all here. Then commanded he every ship’s +company severally to stand together; which was also done. Then, said he, +My Masters, I am a very bad orator, for my bringing up hath not been in +learning; but whatso I shall here speak, let every man take good notice +of, and let him write it down, for I will speak nothing but what I will +answer it in England, yea, and before her Majesty, as I have it here +already set down [but whether it were in his book or not, that I know +not, but this was the effect of it, and very near the words]: Thus it +is, my Masters, that we’re very far from our country and friends; we are +compassed in on every side with our enemies; wherefore we are not to +make small reckoning of a man, for we cannot have a man if we would give +for him ten thousand pounds; wherefore we must have these mutinies and +discontents that are grown amongst us redressed; for, by the life of +God, it doth even take my wits from me to think on it. Here is such +controversy between the sailors and the gentlemen, and such stomaching +between the gentlemen and sailors, that it doth even make me mad to hear +it. But, my Masters, I must have it cease; for I must have the gentlemen +to haul and draw with the mariners, and the mariners with the gentlemen: +and let us shew ourselves to be all of a company; and let us not give +occasion to the enemy to rejoice at our decay and overthrow. I would +know him that would refuse to set his hand to a rope; but I trust there +is not any such here; and, as gentlemen are very necessary for +government sake on the voyage, so have I shipt them for that purpose, +and to some further intent; and yet, though I know sailors to be the +most envious people of the world, and so unruly without government, yet +may not I be without them. Also, if there be any here willing to return +home, let me understand of them; and here is the Marygold, a ship that I +can very well spare, I will furnish her to such as will return with the +most credit that I can give them, either by my letters or any way else; +but let them take care that they go homeward; for, if I find them in my +way, I will surely sink them; therefore, you shall have time to consider +hereof until to-morrow, for, by my troth, I must needs be plain with +you; _I have taken that in hand that I know not in the world how to go +through withal_; it passeth my capacity; it hath even bereaved me of my +wits to think on it. [Well, yet the voice was, that none would return; +they would all take such part as he did.] Well then, my Masters, quoth +he, came ye all forth with your own good wills, or no? They answered, +All, willingly. At whose hands, my Masters, take ye to receive your +wages? At yours, answered the company. Then, said he, how say you, will +you take wages, or stand to my courtesy? To your courtesy, good Captain, +was the reply. Then he commanded the steward to the Elizabeth to bring +him the key of the stores, the which he did; then, turning him unto +Master Winter, he said, Master Winter, I do here discharge you of your +Captainship; and so in brief he said to all the Officers. Then Master +Winter and John Thomas asked him what should move him to displace them? +He asked in return, whether they could make any reason why he should not +do so? So willing them to content themselves, he willed silence in those +matters, saying, Ye see here the great disorders we are entangled into; +and, although some have already received condign punishment, as by +death, who, I take God to witness, as you all know, was to me as my +other hand, yet you see, over and besides the rest, his own mouth did +bewray his treacherous dealings: and see, how, trusting to the +singularity of his own wit, he over-reacht himself at unawares. But see +what God would have to be done; for her Majesty commanded, that of all +men my Lord Treasurer should have no knowledge of this voyage, and to +see that his own mouth hath declared that he had given him a plot +thereof. But, truly, my Masters, and as I am a gentleman, there shall no +more die; I will lay my hand on no more, although there be here who have +deserved as much as he; and so charging one Worrall that was present, +that his case was worse than Doughty’s, who, in Master Doughty’s +extremities, was one of Drake’s chief confellows, who, humbling himself +to Drake, even upon his knees, prayed him to be good unto him, Well, +well, Worrall, said he, you and I shall talk well enough of this matter +hereafter. Then he charged one John Audley with some ill dealings +towards him, but opened no matter, but said, he would talk with him +alone after dinner. Here is some again, my Masters, not knowing how else +to discredit me, say and affirm, that I was set forth on this voyage by +Master Hatton; some by Sir William Winter; and some by Master Hankins; +but these are a company of idle heads that have nothing else to talk of. +And, my Masters, I must tell you, I do know them as my very good +friends; but, to say that they were the fitters forth of this voyage, or +that it was by their means, I tell you it was nothing so. But, indeed, +thus it was, My Lord of Essex wrote in my commendation unto Secretary +Walsingham more than I was worthy; but by like I had deserved somewhat +at his hands, and he thought me in his letters a fit man to serve +against the Spaniards for my practice and experience that I had in that +trade; whereupon, indeed, Secretary Walsingham did come to consult with +his Lordship, and declared unto him, that for that her Majesty had +received divers injuries of the King of Spain, for the which, she +desired to have some revenge; and withal, he shewed me a plot, willing +me to set my hand, and to write down where I thought he might most be +annoyed; but I told him some part of my mind, but refused to set my hand +to any thing, affirming, that her Majesty was mortal, and that, if it +should please God to take her Majesty away, it might so be that some +person might reign that might be in league with the King of Spain, and +then will mine own hand be a witness against myself. Then was I very +shortly after, and on an evening, sent for unto her Majesty by Secretary +Walsingham; and, the next day, coming to her Majesty, these, or the like +words, she said, Drake, so it is that I would gladly be revenged on the +King of Spain for divers injuries that I have received: and said +further, that he was the only man that might do this exploit, and withal +craved his advice therein, who told her Majesty of the small good that +was to be done in Spain, but the only way was to annoy him by his +Indies. Then, with many more words, he shewed forth a bill of her +Majesty’s adventure of 1000 crowns, which, however, he said at some time +before, that her Majesty did give him towards his charges. He shewed +also a bill of Master Hatton’s adventure, and divers letters of credit +that had passed in his behalf; but he never let them come out of his own +hands. He said also, that her Majesty did swear by her crown, _That, if +any within her realm did give the King of Spain hereof to understand (as +she suspected but two), they should lose their heads therefore_. And +now, Masters, said he, let us consider what we have done: _We have now +set together by the ears three mighty Princes, namely, her Majesty, the +Kings of Spain and Portugal; and, if this voyage should not have good +success, we should not only be a scorning, or a reproachful +scoffing-stock unto our enemies, but also a great_ BLOT _to our whole +country for ever; and, what triumph would it be to Spain and Portugal; +and, again, the like would never be attempted_. And now, restoring every +man again to his former office, he ended: thus shewing the company that +he would satisfy every man, or else he would sell all that he ever had +even unto his plate; for, quoth he, I have good reason to promise, and +am best able to perform it; for, I have somewhat of mine own in England; +and, besides that, I have as much adventure in this voyage as three of +the best whatsoever; and, if it so be, that I never come home, yet will +her Majesty pay every man his wages, whom indeed you and I all came to +serve; and, for to say you came to serve me, I will not give you thanks; +for it is only her Majesty that you serve; and this voyage is only her +fitting forth: so willing all men to be friends, he willed them to +depart about their business. The 8th of August, they weighed anchor and +departed; but, the day before, he came on board the Elizabeth, and swore +very vehemently, I know not upon what occasion, that he would hang to +the number of 30 in the fleet that had deserved it: and then again +charged Worrall that his case was worse than Doughty’s, and that by +God’s wounds he had deserved to be hanged. And, Master Winter, said he, +where is your man Ulysses? By God’s life, if he were my man, I would cut +off his ears: nay, by God’s wounds, I would hang him; but wherefore +truly I do not know.” + +Nothing can be a clearer proof that Drake had no Government Commission +than the above account. In his speech, which the writer says is nearly +in his own words, he does not so much as pretend to have received any +Commission, only a private intimation from the Queen and Walsingham, +that her Majesty wanted to be revenged of divers injuries received from +the King of Spain. But was countenancing four or five piratical +plunderers to rob innocent people, a princely way for one Sovereign to +take revenge of another, in times of profound peace? It was, indeed, a +pitiful connivance in Queen Elizabeth to engage 1000 crowns in a +piratical adventure of this kind, and what could never have been +credited of that magnanimous Princess, had she not afterwards approved +of his piracy, by going aboard his ship, and openly approving what, it +was even then said, least became a trading nation to encourage, the +breach of treaties, and piratical practices. But, it is remarkable, that +five months elapsed after his return to England before her Majesty’s +pleasure was publicly known; during which time men talked variously of +the expedition, and the fate of Drake seemed to hang in suspence; so +true proved Doughty’s prediction, that “the Queen’s Majesty and Council +might be corrupted.” + +That Drake bore no naval Commission appears still more clearly, from his +displacing the Captains and Officers of all his ships without demanding +from them their Commissions; from his lifting his men, not for any +hostile expedition, but for a trading voyage to Alexandria; and from his +asking them, before his setting sail from the Port of St. Julian to +enter the South Seas, from whom they expected their wages. From these +circumstances it follows incontestibly, that, if he had a naval +Commission, he was the only Officer in the fleet possessed of +one;--Doughty, whom he beheaded, and who, before their falling out, was +second in command, bore no naval Commission; and, it is more than +probable, that this gentleman’s questioning the Commission of Drake was +the real cause of his death, as Drake more than once charges him with +the overthrow of the voyage, which he could no otherwise effect than by +discrediting a Commission, on the authority of which both Officers and +men were to be persuaded to plunder a people at peace with their nation, +and without which every man was liable to be executed for piracy, +whenever he should be overpowered. + +It were needless for us to enlarge our remarks; every reader has now the +subject before him, and every reader will form a judgment for himself. + +What we have said, in consequence of having traced this transaction from +beginning to end, may seem to clash with the opinion we previously +entertained of Drake’s humanity, courage, and kindness to his followers, +but will not seem strange to those who are acquainted with the nature of +periodical writings, where one part of the work is necessarily printed +off before the other is written. In pursuing the course of this voyage, +new authors have been consulted, and new lights collected, which have +enabled us to detect not only the errors of other writers, but also to +correct our own; and, from the sequel of this voyage, we may venture to +foretel, that the reader will concur in sentiment with us, that, though +Drake was bold, he was not honest; that, though he did not kill those he +plundered and had no motive to destroy, he spared none who opposed his +designs, or who did not pay implicit obedience to his arbitrary will; +that, though he was an able seaman, he was a jealous rival; and that, +though he was a gallant leader, he was a most tyrannical Commander. We +shall now accompany him to the South Seas, where the Spaniards, not +suspecting an enemy, were in no condition to defend themselves against +his attacks. + +Drake having reduced the number of his ships to three, they left the +port, and on August the 20th entered the Straits of Magellan, in which +they struggled with contrary winds, and the various dangers which the +intricacy of that winding passage exposed them to, till night, when they +had passed the first narrow, and had entered a wider sea, where they +discovered an island, to which they gave the name of Elizabeth, in +honour of their Sovereign. On the 24th they came to an island, in which +they found such an infinite number of birds, since called penguins, that +they killed 3000 of them in one day. This bird, of which they then knew +not the name, they describe as somewhat less than a wild goose, without +feathers, and covered with a kind of down, unable to fly or rise from +the ground, but capable of running and swimming with amazing celerity. +They feed on fishes in the sea, and come to land only to rest in the +day, and lay their eggs, which, according to later voyagers, they +deposit in holes, as regularly dispersed and as numerous as the cells in +a beehive. + +From these islands to the South Sea the strait becomes very crooked and +narrow; so that sometimes by the interposition of head-lands the passage +seems entirely shut up. To double these capes they found it very +difficult, on account of the frequent variations to be made in the +course. Here are, indeed, as Magellan observes, many harbours; but in +most of them no bottom is to be found, which, however, does not seem +verified by experience; the harbours being in general good, though the +tides and blasts continually rushing in from various directions create +the danger. The land on both sides rises into innumerable mountains; the +tops of them were encircled with clouds and vapours, which, being +congealed, fall down in snow, and increase their height by hardening +into ice; an observation which might naturally occur to Drake, who +passed the strait in their winter before the snows were dissolved. +However, even at that season, which answers to our February, they found +the vallies, in some places, green, fruitful, and pleasant. Anchoring in +a bay near Cape Forward, Drake, imagining the strait quite shut up, went +in his boat to endeavour to find some other passage out; and, having +found an inlet towards the North, was returning to his ships; but +curiosity soon prevailed upon him to stop for the sake of observing a +canoe or boat with several natives of the country in it. He could not at +a distance help admiring the form of this little vessel, which seemed +inclining to a semi-circle, the stern and prow standing up, and the body +sinking inward; but much greater was his wonder, when, upon a nearer +inspection, he found it made only with the barks of trees, sewed +together with thongs of seal-skin, so artificially, that scarcely any +water entered the seams. + +The people were well shaped, and painted like those who have been +already described. On the land they had a hut built with poles, and +covered with skins, in which they had water-vessels and other utensils, +made likewise with the barks of trees. Among these people they had an +opportunity of remarking, what is frequently observable in savage +countries, how natural sagacity and unwearied industry may supply the +want of such manufactures or natural productions as appear to us +absolutely necessary for the support of life. Though the inhabitants +were wholly strangers to iron and to the use we make of it, yet, instead +of it, they substituted the shell of a muscle, of prodigious size, found +upon their coasts. This they ground upon a stone to an edge, which was +so firm and solid, that neither wood nor stone were able to resist it. +With instruments made of shells, these simple people were able to +perform all their mechanic operations; nor do they seem so deformed and +ugly as our late voyagers represent them, who being, perhaps, more +refined than those who sailed with Captain Drake, might fancy a greater +difference between themselves and these savages than in nature there +really is. + +On this occasion we cannot forbear remarking, that, though Drake entered +the strait in what is accounted the most unfavourable season, yet he +passed it in sixteen days, though, at that time, wholly unknown; a +passage the more extraordinary, as none of our later voyagers made it in +less than thirty six days in the middle of summer, and Captain Wallis +was at least four months in making it. + +Drake, as has been said, having taken a survey of the country from Cape +Forward, continued his course to the North-west-ward, and, on the sixth +of September, entered the great South Sea, on which no English vessel +had ever been navigated before; and proposed to have directed his course +towards the Line, that his men, who had suffered by the severity of the +climate, might recover their strength in a warmer latitude. But his +design was scarce formed, before it was frustrated; for on September the +seventh, after an eclipse of the moon, a storm arose so violent that it +left them little hopes of surviving it: nor was its fury so dreadful as +its continuance; for it lasted, with little intermission, thirty-two +days, in which time they were driven more than 200 leagues out of their +course, without being able either to avail themselves of their sails, or +make use of their anchors. + +In this storm, on the 30th of September, the Marigold, Captain Thomas, +was separated from them; and on the 7th of October, having entered a +harbour, where they hoped for some intermission of their fatigues, they +were in a few hours forced out to sea again by a violent gust, at which +time they lost sight of the Elizabeth, Captain Winter, whose crew, as +was afterwards discovered, wearied with labour, and discouraged with the +prospect of future dangers, recovered the straits the day following, +and, returning by the same passage through which they came, sailed along +the coast of Brazil, and, in the year following, arrived in England. + +They were now driven Southward 55 degrees, where they discovered a +cluster of islands, in one of which they anchored and staid two days, to +the great refreshment of the crew, having met with excellent water, and +plenty of greens. Not far distant from this bay they entered another, +where they beheld some naked inhabitants ranging along the coast in +their canoes in search of provisions. With these they exchanged some +toys for such refreshments as they had to supply. + +And now, being furnished with wood and water, they again set sail, and +were, by a new storm, driven to the latitude of 57 degrees, when they +beheld the extremities of the American coast, and the confluence of the +Atlantic and Southern oceans. Here they arrived on the 28th of October, +and at last were blest with the sight of a calm sea, having, for almost +two months, endured such a storm, as no voyager has given an account of, +and such as in that part of the world, though accustomed to hurricanes, +the inhabitants were unacquainted with. + +On the 30th of October, they steered towards the place appointed for the +rendezvous of the fleet, in case of separation, which was in 30 degrees +South; and, on the next day, discovered two islands, so well stocked +with fowls, that they victualled their ships with them. After this +supply, they sailed northward, along the coast of Peru, till they came +to 30 degrees, where, finding neither ships, nor any convenient port, +they came to anchor Nov. the 29th, at Mucho, an island inhabited by such +Indians as the cruelty of their Spanish conquerors had driven from the +continent, to whom they applied for water and provisions, offering them +in return such things as they imagined most likely to please them. The +Indians seemed willing to traffic; and, having presented them with +fruits and two fat sheep, shewed them a place where they might come for +water. + +Next morning, according to agreement, the English landed with their +water-vessels, and sent two men forward towards the place appointed, +who, about the middle of the way, were suddenly attacked by the Indians +and immediately slain. Nor were the rest of the company out of danger; +for behind the rocks was lodged an ambush of 500 men, who, starting up +from their retreat, discharged their arrows into the boat with such +dexterity, that every one of the crew was wounded by them. The sea being +then high, and hindering them from either retiring or making use of +their weapons, Drake himself received an arrow under his eye, which +pierced him almost to the brain; and another in his breast. The danger +of these wounds was much increased by the absence of their surgeon, who +was in the Elizabeth, so that they had none to assist them but a boy, +whose age did not admit of much experience or skill; yet so much were +they favoured by Providence, that they all recovered. No reason could be +assigned for which the Indians should attack them with so furious a +spirit of malignity, but that they mistook them for Spaniards, whose +cruelties might very reasonably incite those to revenge, whom they had +driven, by incessant persecution, from their country, wasting immense +tracts of land by massacre and devastation. Nuno da Sylva adds, that +none of the Indians were hurt by the English, though they came so near +the boat, as to seize and carry off four of the oars. + +On the afternoon of the same day they set sail, and on the 30th of +November dropt anchor in Phillip’s bay, where their boat, having been +sent out to discover the country, returned with an Indian in his canoe +whom they had intercepted. He was of a graceful stature, drest in a +white coat or gown, reaching almost to his knees; very mild, humble, and +docile; such as perhaps were all the Indians, till the Spaniards taught +them revenge, treachery, and cruelty. This Indian, having been kindly +treated, was dismissed with presents; and informed, as far as the +English could make him understand, what they chiefly wanted, and what +they were willing to give in return; Drake ordered his boat to attend +him, and set him safe on shore. + +When he was landed, he made signs for the boat to wait till his return, +and meeting some of his countrymen, gave them such an account of his +reception, that, within a few hours, several of them repaired with him +to the boat, with fowls, eggs, and a hog; and with them one of their +captains, who willingly came into the boat, and desired to be conveyed +by the English to their ship. + +By this man Drake was informed that no supplies were to be expected +here; but that Southward, in a place to which he offered to be his +pilate, there was great plenty. This proposal was accepted, and on the +5th of December, under the direction of the good-natured Indian, they +came to anchor in the harbour called by the Spaniards Val Parizo, in 33 +deg. 40 min. S. latitude, near the little town of St. Jago, where they +met not only with sufficient stores of provisions, and with storehouses +full of the wines of Chili, but with a ship called the Captain of +Morial, richly laden, having, together with large quantities of the same +wine, some of the fine gold of Baldivia to the amount of threescore +thousand pezoes, each pezo of the value of eight shillings, and a great +cross of gold set with emeralds. The Spaniards at first, mistaking the +English for friends, invited them to feast with them; but soon being +undeceived, one of the crew jumped overboard, and alarmed the town; but +the inhabitants, instead of making opposition, fled hastily, and left +whatever was in the town a prize to the enemy. In the chapel Drake and +his men found the most valuable booty. + +Having spent three days here in storing their ships, and loading the +money and effects, they departed, and landed their Indian pilot where +they first received him, after having rewarded him much above his +expectations or desires. They had now little other anxiety than for +their friends, who had been separated from them, and whom they now +determined to seek. But considering that, by entering every creek and +harbour with their ships, they exposed themselves to unnecessary +dangers, and that their boat could not contain such a number as might +defend themselves against the Spaniards, they determined to station +their ship at some place where they might commodiously build a pinnace, +which, being of light burden, might safely sail where the ship would be +in danger of being stranded; and, at the same time, carry a sufficient +force to resist the enemy, and afford better accommodation than it was +possible to obtain in the boat. To this end, on the 19th of December, +they entered a bay near Coquimbo, a town inhabited by the Spaniards, +who, discovering them immediately, issued out to the number of 100 +horsemen, with about 200 naked Indians running by their sides. The +English, observing their approach, retired to their boat without any +loss, except of one man, whom no persuasions or intreaties could move to +retire with the rest, and who was therefore overtaken by the Spaniards, +who thought to have taken him prisoner, but, having an halbert in his +hand, he manfully defended himself, till, being overpowered by numbers, +he was run through the body with a lance. The Spaniards, exulting at the +victory, ordered the Indians to draw the dead carcase from the rock on +which he fell, and in the sight of the English beheaded it, and then cut +off the right hand, and tore out the heart, which they carried away in +triumph. + +Leaving this place, they soon found a harbour more secure and +convenient, where they built their pinnace, in which Drake went to seek +his companions; but, finding the wind contrary, he was obliged to return +in two days. + +From hence they came to a port called Sarcipaxa, where, being landed, +they found a Spaniard asleep with silver bars lying by him to the value +of 4000 Spanish ducats: notwithstanding the insults which they had +received from his countrymen, they did not think fit to disturb this +harmless man’s repose, but, taking the silver, left him quietly to sleep +out his nap. + +Coasting along the shore, they observed a Spaniard driving eight +Peruvian sheep, which on landing they found to be laden with silver, +each sheep having 100lb. weight in two leather bags across his back. +They delivered the poor animals of their heavy burdens, and lodged the +bags in their own ships. + +Farther on lay some Indian towns, from which the inhabitants repaired to +the ship on floats made of seal-skin blown full of wind, two of which +they fasten together, and, sitting between them, row with great +swiftness, and carry considerable burdens. They very readily traded for +glass and such trifles, with which the old and the young seemed equally +delighted. + +Arriving at Marmarena on the 26th of January, Drake invited the +Spaniards to traffic with him, which they accepted; and supplied him +with necessaries, selling to him, among other provisions, some of those +sheep which have been mentioned, whose bulk is equal to that of a cow, +and whose strength is such, that one of them can carry three tall men +upon his back; their necks are like a camel’s, and their heads like +those of our sheep. They are the most useful animals of this country, +not only affording excellent fleeces and wholesome flesh, but serving as +carriers over rocks and mountains, where no other beast can travel for +their foot is of a particular form, which enables them to tread firm on +the steepest and most slippery places. + +On all this coast, it is said, the mountains are so impregnated with +silver, that from one hundred weight of common earth five ounces of fine +silver may be separated. + +They continued their course towards the North, and on the 7th of +February arrived at Arica, in 8 deg. 30 min. S. latitude, and in this +port found three small barks, in which they found 57 slabs of silver, +each of the size and shape of an ordinary brick, and weighing about +20lb. They took no prisoners; for the crews, fearing no interlopers, +were all on shore carousing with one another. At this port the Spaniards +were wont to land their merchandize, and to embark the silver, which was +transported from thence to Panama; but, since Drake’s incursion, they +carry their silver over land to Lima, and load no more treasure here, +except what they pay for the purchase of such merchandize as is brought +from Europe to supply their market. Wanting numbers to assault the town, +they proceeded in their course, and falling in with a small +coasting-vessel, laden with linen and other cloaths, Drake supplied his +crew with what quantity of those articles they stood in need of, and +dismissed the Spaniards with the remainder. + +From hence they sailed to Chuli; in which port there was a ship that had +300,000 pezoes of silver in bars; but the Spaniards had sent an express +from Arica, to acquaint the Governor that Drake was upon the coast. This +express arrived at Chuli, just two hours before Drake entered the port; +in which time the master of the ship had thrown his treasure overboard, +and had secured himself and crew on shore, leaving only one Indian on +board to make the report. Drake, fearing the alarm would spread faster +than he could sail, lost no time in hazardous searches, but instantly +departed, and steered for Lima, where they arrived on the 15th of +February, and entered the harbour without resistance, in which, +according to some writers, there were thirty sail of ships; others say, +twelve; but all agree, that several of them were of considerable force: +so that Drake’s security consisted not in his strength, but in his +reputation, which had so intimidated the Spaniards, that the sight of +their own superiority could not rouse them to opposition. Instances of +such panic terrors are to be met with in other relations; but as they +are, for the most part, quickly dissipated by reason and resolution, a +wise Commander will rarely ground his hopes of success on them; and, +perhaps, on this occasion, the Spaniards scarcely deserve a severer +censure for their cowardice, than Drake for his temerity. A writer of +good authority, to reconcile the matter, tells us, that Drake took them +at unawares, and that the crews, as is usual in times of perfect +security, were with their families on shore; and many of those who were +ready to sail, were taking leave of their friends. Be this as it may, +all seem to agree, that Drake made here a considerable booty, having +taken from one ship a chest full of rials of plate, which he found +concealed under the steerage, and, from other ships, silks and linen +cloth to a considerable value. He did not, however, remain long in this +harbour, but hastened in pursuit of the Cacafuego, which ship had sailed +but three days before, and which, they were here informed, was bound to +Paita. In the pursuit, they fell in with another ship, out of which they +took a large quantity of gold, together with a crucifix of the same +metal, richly adorned with emeralds. They continued the pursuit; but, +having gained intelligence, that, instead of Paita, she was gone to +Panama, Drake crouded all the sail he could, and, to encourage the +pursuers, promised, that whoever first descried the prize should have +his gold chain as a reward; which fell to the lot of his brother John. +On the 1st of March they came up with her, and, after exchanging a few +shot, they boarded her, and found not only a quantity of jewels, and +thirteen chests of money, but eighty pounds weight of gold, and +twenty-six tons of uncoined silver, with services of wrought plate to a +great value. In unlading this prize they spent six days; and then +dismissing the Spaniards, stood off again to sea. + + [Illustration: _Sir Francis Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich + Spanish ship._ _J. June Sculp._] + +Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, tells us, that, in less than 24 hours after +their departure from Lima in pursuit of the Cacafuego, news was brought +that Drake was upon the coast, but that the Governor had already +assembled the force of the country to oppose his landing; and that, +finding he had left the harbour, he ordered three ships with six pieces +of cannon (being all he could collect), and 250 men, to pursue him: but, +the equipment of these vessels necessarily requiring time, Drake had +gained the advantage of them: and, coming within sight of the prize off +Cape Francisco, the Captain of which, Juan de Anton, a Biscayan, seeing +at a distance a ship crouded with sails, and imagining the Viceroy of +Peru had dispatched her on some message to him, struck his sails, and +lay to till Drake approaching nearer, he discovered his mistake. He +would then have made his escape, but Drake nearing him fast with his +great ordnance, against which the Captain could make no defence, he was +constrained to yield. “There was in this ship, adds the Spaniard, eight +hundred and fifty thousand pezoes of silver, and forty thousand pezoes +of gold, all which silver and gold was customed: but what treasure they +had uncustomed, I know not; for many times they carry almost as much +more as they pay custom for; otherwise the King would take it from them, +if they should be known to have any great sum; wherefore every ship +carries a bill of custom, that the King may see it. All the treasure +which Drake took was merchants and other mens goods, saving 180,000 +pezoes of the King’s. He had also out of this ship good store of +victuals, with other necessaries, which were to be carried from Panama, +and was five days in taking out such things as he needed. + +“This done, he sailed to the coast of New Spain, without going to +Panama. The ships that were sent by the Viceroy of Peru from Lima, +arrived off Cape St. Francisco 20 days after Drake had taken the +Cacafuego, and had intelligence by a ship coming from Panama, which they +met at the said Cape, that Francis Drake had taken the ship with silver, +and was not gone for Panama; whereupon the Commander of the three ships, +thinking that Captain Drake had been gone for the Straits of Magellan, +directed his course that way to seek him.” + +Thus Drake, changing his course to the west, escaped his enemies, and +fell in with a ship from the East Indies laden with silks, China ware, +and cotton. The owner, a Spaniard, was on board, who presented Drake +with a falcon wrought in massy gold, with an emerald set in the breast +of it, the largest he had ever beheld. With this present, and a golden +cup from the pilot, Drake was contented, and dismissed the ship, taking +only four chests of China ware, which at that time was of great value in +Europe. + +On the 13th of March they came in sight of land, which happened to be a +small island about two leagues from the main continent. There they found +a harbour, and anchored in five fathom water, where they staid till the +20th, on which day, a little coasting frigate passing by, was pursued by +the pinnace, boarded, and taken. Being laden with sasaparilla, honey, +butter, and other country goods, Drake unloaded the sasaparilla, and in +the room of it put the gold and silver from his own ship, in order to +heave her up, to new caulk her sides, and stop her leaks; in which +service the crew were employed till the 26th of the same month, when +having reloaded the cargo, and taken in a sufficient quantity of wood +and water, they continued their course westward along the coast, taking +the Spanish frigate with them to bear them company. + +On April 6, a little before sun-set, they discovered a ship, that held +on her course about two leagues to seaward from the main land. To this +ship they gave chace, and before morning they neared her, and suddenly +boarded her while the men slept. Being masters of this prize without +resistance, they ordered the prisoners on board their own ship, among +whom was one Don Francisco Xarate, who meant to sail to Panama, and from +thence to China, with the letters and patents that were found in his +possession (among which were the letters of the King of Spain to the +Governor of the Philippines); as also the sea charts wherewith they were +to be directed in their voyage, which were of admirable use to Drake in +his return home. From this ship they took great quantities of +bale-goods, and other valuable merchandize, and then dismissed her. They +also took a young negroe girl, whom Drake or some of his companions +having got with child, they afterwards inhumanly set her on shore on an +island in their way home, just as she was ready to lie in; of which +notice will be taken in its proper place. Having retained a Spanish +pilot from this ship, they obliged him to direct them to a safe harbour, +where they might supply themselves with provisions for their intended +voyage. This man brought them to the harbour of Anguatulco, or, as +others write, Guatalco, where arriving on the 13th of April, they staid +till the 26th of the same month, and then set sail, having first +dismissed all their Spanish prisoners, together with Nuno da Sylva, the +Portugueze pilot, whom they brought from the Canaries, and who had +served them faithfully in all their trials and dangers; in reward for +which he was now abandoned by Drake to the mercy of the enemy. This man, +when he landed on the continent, was first carried to Mexico, and there +put to the torture to make discoveries. He was afterwards sent prisoner +into Old Spain, and there examined; and, having given a faithful +relation of all he knew, was released, and returned home to his own +country, where he published, as has already been said, an account of the +voyage as far as he went, which was afterwards translated into all the +European languages, and universally read. + +On their arrival at Anguatulco, they had no sooner landed than Drake +with part of his men marched up to the town, where they found the chief +magistrate sitting in judgment upon a parcel of poor savages, and ready +to pass sentence of death upon almost all of them, they being charged +with a conspiracy to kill their masters, and set fire to the town. Drake +changed the scene, and made judges and criminals without distinction, +his prisoners, conducting them all in procession to his ship. Here he +made the Judge write an order to the Commanding Officer to deliver up +the town, in which they found a great pot, says my author, as big as a +bushel, full of rials of plate, a gold chain, and a few jewels. The gold +chain was taken from a gentleman who was making his escape from the +town, but was intercepted by an English sailor, who rifled him of all +the valuables he had about him, of which the gold chain was thought to +be of the least value. + + [Illustration: _Drake Conveying the Spanish Judges and Criminal Savages + of Anguatulco; in Procession on Board his own Ship._] + +Being now sufficiently enriched, and having given over all hopes of +finding their associates, and, perhaps, beginning to be infected with +that desire of ease and pleasure which is the natural consequence of +wealth obtained by successful villainy, or, what is still more probable, +being in fear of a surprize before they had secured their booty, they +began to consult about their return home; and, in pursuance of Drake’s +advice, resolved first to find out some convenient harbour where they +might more safely lie and equip themselves for the voyage, and then +endeavour to discover a nearer passage from the South Seas into the +Atlantic Ocean; a passage that would not only enable them to return home +with full security, and in a shorter time, but would much facilitate the +navigation into those parts, and of course immortalize their names. + +For this purpose they had recourse to a port in the island of Canes, +where they met with fish, wood, and fresh water; and, being sufficiently +stored with other provisions, with which they had supplied themselves +from their prizes and at Anguatulco, they set sail first with a +resolution of seeking a passage by the north-west, and, if that failed, +by the Moluccas, and thence, following the course of the Portugueze, to +return by the Cape of Good Hope. + +In pursuance of the first resolution, they sailed about 600 leagues, +till coming into the latitude of 43 deg. north, they found the air so +excessive cold, that the men could no longer bear to handle the ropes to +navigate the ship: they, therefore, changed their course till they came +into the latitude of 38 deg. and 30 min. under which height they +discovered a very good harbour, and, fortunately, had a favourable wind +to enable them to enter it. + +Here, on the 17th of June, they cast anchor, and, in a short time, had +opportunities of observing that the natives of that country were not +less sensible than themselves; for, the next day, there came a man +rowing in his canoe towards the ship, and, at a distance from it, made a +long oration with very extraordinary gesticulations, and great +appearance of vehemence; and, a little time afterwards, made a second +visit in the same manner; and then returning a third time, he presented +them, after his harangue was finished, with a kind of crown of black +feathers, such as their kings wear upon their heads, and a basket of +rushes filled with a particular herb, both which he fastened to a short +stick, and threw into the boat: nor could he be prevailed upon to +receive any thing in return, though pushed towards him upon a board, +only he took up a hat that was flung in the water. + +Three days afterwards, the ship, having received some damage at sea, was +brought nearer to land, that her lading might be taken out; in order to +which, the English, who had now learned not to commit their lives too +negligently to the mercy of savage nations, raised a kind of +fortification with earth and palissades, and erected their tents within +it. All this was not beheld by the inhabitants without the utmost +astonishment, which incited them to come down in crouds to the coast, +with no other view, as it afterwards appeared, but to compliment the +beautiful strangers that had condescended to touch upon their country. + +Drake, neither confiding too much in appearances, nor wholly distrusting +the friendly disposition of the inhabitants, directed them to lay aside +their bows and arrows, and, on their approach, presented them with linen +and other necessaries, of which he shewed them the use. They then +returned to their habitations, about three quarters of a mile from the +English camp, where they made such loud and violent noises, that they +were heard by the English, who had vanity enough to believe that they +were paying them a kind of melancholy adoration. + +Two days afterwards, they perceived the approach of a far more numerous +company, who stopt at the top of a hill which over-looked the English +settlement, while one of them made a long oration, at the end of which +all the assembly bowed their bodies, and pronounced the syllable _Ob_ +with a solemn tone, as by way of confirmation of what had been said by +the orator. Then the men laying down their bows, and leaving their women +and children on the top of the hill, came down towards the tents, and +seemed transported in the highest degree at the kindness of Drake, who +received their gifts, and admitted them to his presence. The women at a +distance appeared seized with a kind of phrenzy, such as that of old +among the Pagans in some of their religious ceremonies, and, in honour +as it seemed of their guests, tore their cheeks and bosoms with their +nails, and threw themselves upon the stones with their naked bodies. + +Three days after this, on June 25, 1579, Drake received two Ambassadors +from the Hioh, or King, of the country, who, intending to visit the +camp, required that some token might be sent him of friendship and +peace. This request was readily complied with; and soon after came the +King, attended by a guard of about an hundred tall men, and preceded by +an Officer of State, who carried a sceptre made of black wood, adorned +with chains made of a kind of bone or horn, which are marks of the +highest honour among them. Behind him was the King himself, dressed in a +coat of beasts skins, with a crown woven with feathers upon his head. +His attendants followed, dressed nearly in the same manner all but the +crown; and after them came the common-people, with baskets platted so +artificially that they held water, in which, by way of present, they +brought roots and fish. + + [Illustration: _Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh, or King of New + Albion._] + +Drake, not lulled into security, ranged his men in order of battle, and +waited their approach, who coming nearer, stood still, while the +scepter-bearer made an oration; at the conclusion of which, they came +again forward at the foot of the hill, and then the scepter-bearer began +a song, which he accompanied with a dance, in both which the men joined, +but the women danced without singing. Drake now distrusting them no +longer, admitted them into his fortification, where they continued their +song and dance a short time; and then both the King and some others of +the company made a long harangue, in which it appeared, by the rest of +their behaviour, that they entreated them to accept of the government of +their country; and the King, with the concurrence of the rest, placed +the crown upon Drake’s head, graced him with the chains and other signs +of authority, and saluted him with the title of _Hioh_. The kingdom thus +offered, though of no farther value to him than that it furnished him +with present necessaries, Drake thought it not prudent for him to +refuse; and, therefore, took possession of it in the name of Queen +Elizabeth, not without ardent wishes that this acquisition might be of +use to his native country. The kingdom being thus consigned, and the +grand affair at an end, the common people left their King and his Nobles +with Drake, and dispersed themselves over the camp; and when they saw +any one that pleased them more than the rest, they tore their flesh and +vented their outcries, as before, in token of reverence and respect. +They then proceeded to shew them their wounds and diseases, in hopes, +perhaps, of a miraculous cure; to which the English, to benefit and +undeceive them at the same time, applied such remedies as they used on +like occasions. + +They were now grown confident and familiar, and came down to the camp +every day, repeating their ceremonies, till they were more fully +informed how disagreeable they were to those whose favour they were so +studious of obtaining. They then visited them without ceremony, indeed, +but with a curiosity so ardent, that it left them no leisure to provide +the necessaries of life, with which the English were, therefore, obliged +to supply them. They had, then, sufficient opportunity to remark the +custom and disposition of these new allies, whom they found tractable +and benevolent, strong of body far beyond the English, yet unfurnished +with weapons either for assault or defence, their bows being too weak +for any thing but sport. Their dexterity in taking fish was such, that, +if they saw them so near the shore that they could come to them without +swimming, they never missed them. + +The same curiosity that had brought them in such crouds to the shore, +now induced Drake and some of his companions to travel up into their +country, which they found at some distance from the coast very fruitful, +filled with large deer, and abounding with a peculiar kind of cunnies +smaller than ours, with tails like rats, paws such as those of a mole, +and bags under their chins, in which they carry provisions to their +young. + +The houses of the inhabitants were round holes dug in the ground, from +the brink of which they raise rafters, or poles, shelving towards the +middle, where they all meet in a ridge, and are crampt together; the +people lie upon rushes, and make the fire in the middle of the house, +letting the smoke fly out at the door. The men are generally naked; but +the women make a kind of petticoat of bulrushes, which they comb like +hemp, and throw the skin of a deer over their shoulders. They are very +modest, tractable, and obedient to their husbands. The soil is but badly +cultivated; but contentment seems to prevail in a very eminent degree +among all ranks of this happy people. + +The land was named by Drake New Albion, from its white cliffs, in which +it bore some resemblance to his native country, and the whole history of +the resignation of it to the English was engraven on a piece of brass, +then nailed on a post, and fixed up before their departure, which being +now discovered by the people to be near at hand, they could not forbear +perpetual lamentations. + +When the English on the 23d of July weighed anchor, they saw them +climbing to the tops of hills, that they might keep them in sight, and +observed fires lighted up in many parts of the country, on which, as +they supposed, sacrifices were offered. + +Near to this harbour, they touched at some islands where they found +abundance of seals; and, despairing now to find any passage through the +northern regions, they, after a general consultation, determined to +steer away to the Moluccas; and, setting sail July 25, they held a +western course for 68 days without sight of land; and, on September 30, +arrived within view of some islands, about 20 deg. northward from the +Line, from whence the inhabitants resorted to them in canoes hollowed in +the middle, and raised at both ends so high above the water, that they +seemed almost a semi-circle; they were burnished in such a manner that +they shone like ebony, and were kept steady by a piece of timber fixed +on each side of them. The first company that came brought fruits, +bananas, and other things of no great value, with an appearance of +traffic, and exchanged their lading for other commodities with great +show of honesty and friendship. But having, as they imagined, laid all +suspicion asleep, they sent another fleet of canoes, of which the crews +behaved with all the insolence of savages, and all the rapacity of +thieves; for, whatever was suffered to come into their hands, they +seemed to consider as their own, and would neither pay for it nor +restore it: and, at length, finding the English resolved to admit them +no longer, they discharged a shower of stones from their boats, which +insult Drake prudently and generously returned, by firing his great guns +without hurting them; at which they were so terrified, that they leaped +into the water, and hid themselves under their canoes. + +Here we cannot help remarking how nearly this description agrees with +the accounts given by the late navigators, of the temper and disposition +of the inhabitants of the islands lately discovered between the Tropics. +Drake, indeed, found the firing of his guns without hurting them, +sufficient to intimidate these ignorant people; but our later voyagers +have thought their vengeance not complete for any slight insult, without +murdering them by wholesale to strike them with terror. The writer of +the late voyages says, “Our men shewed as much impatience to destroy +them as a sportsman to kill his game.” + +Having for some time but little wind, they did not arrive at the +Moluccas till the 3d of November; and then, designing to touch at +Tidore, as they coasted along the island Mutua, belonging to the King of +Ternate, they were visited by his Viceroy, who informed them that it +would be more advantageous for them to have recourse to his master for +supplies, than to the Portuguese, with whom he was at enmity. Drake was, +by the arguments of the Viceroy, prevailed upon to alter his resolution; +and, on November the 5th, cast anchor before Ternate. Scarce was he +arrived, before the Viceroy, with others of the chief nobility, came out +in three large barges rowed by forty men on each side, to conduct the +ship into a safe harbour; and, soon after, the King himself, having +received a velvet cloak by a messenger from Drake, as a token of peace, +came with such a retinue and dignity of appearance, as was not expected +in those remote parts of the world. He was received with discharges of +cannon, and every kind of music, with which he was so much delighted, +that he invited the performers on board his barge. + +The King was of a graceful stature and royal carriage, of a mild aspect +and low voice. His attendants were dressed in white cotton or callico, +of whom some, whose age gave them a venerable appearance, seemed as +councilors, and the rest officers or nobles. His guards were not +ignorant of fire-arms, but had not many among them, being equipped for +the most part with bows and darts. The King, having spent some time in +admiring the new objects that presented themselves, retired as soon as +the ship was brought to anchor, and promised to return on the day +following and in the mean time the inhabitants, having leave to traffic, +brought down provisions in great abundance. The King came not aboard, +according to his promise, but sent his brother to excuse him, and withal +to invite Drake ashore, proposing to stay himself as an hostage for his +return. Drake declined going himself, but sent some gentlemen of his +retinue in company with the King’s brother, and kept the Viceroy till +their return. + +These gentlemen were received by another of the king’s brothers, and +conduced in great state to the castle, where there was a court of, at +least, 1000 persons, among whom were threescore ancient men, privy +counsellors to the king; and on each side of the gate without, stood +four old men of foreign countries, who served as interpreters in +commerce. In a short time appeared the King himself, drest in cloth of +gold, with his hair woven into gold ringlets, a chain of gold upon his +neck, and on his fingers rings very artificially set with diamonds and +jewels of great value. Over his head was borne a rich canopy and by his +chair of state stood a page with a fan set with sapphires, to moderate +the excess of the heat. Here he received the compliments of the English, +and then honourably dismissed them. The castle, which they had some +opportunity of observing, seemed of no great force. It was built by the +Portuguese, who, attempting to reduce this kingdom into absolute +subjection, murdered the King, and intended to pursue their plot by the +destruction of all his sons. But the general abhorrence which cruelty +and perfidy naturally excite, armed the whole nation against them, and +procured their total expulsion from all the dominions of Ternate, which, +from that time, increasing in power, continued to make new conquests, +and to deprive them of other acquisitions. + +Here they shipt between four and five tons of cloves, intending to bring +them to Europe. While they lay before Ternate, a gentleman came on board +attended by his Portuguese interpreter. He was dressed somewhat in the +European manner, and soon distinguished himself from the natives of +Ternate, or any country they had ever yet seen, by his civility and +quick comprehension. Such a visitant may easily be imagined to excite +their curiosity, which he gratified by informing them that he was a +native of China, of the family of the King then upon the throne; and +that being accused of a capital crime, of which, though he was innocent, +he had not sufficient evidence to clear himself, he had petitioned the +Emperor that he might not be exposed to a trial; but that his cause +might be referred to Divine Providence; and that he might be allowed to +leave his country, with a prohibition against returning, unless heaven, +in attestation of his innocence, should enable him to bring back to the +King some intelligence that might be to the honour and advantage of the +Empire of China. In search of such information he had now spent three +years, and left Tidore for the sake of conversing with the English +General, from whom he hoped to receive such accounts as would enable him +to return with honour and safety. Drake, whether he credited or +disbelieved his story, caused a recital to be made by one of the +company, who talked the language of the interpreter, of such adventures +and observations as he judged would be most pleasing to his visitor, to +all which the Chinese Exile gave the utmost attention; and, having +caused them to be repeated a second time, to impress them in his mind, +thanked the Creator of the World for the knowledge he had gained, he +then proposed to the General to sail to his country, to which he +willingly undertook to be his pilot; but Drake could not be induced to +prolong his voyage. + +He therefore set sail, on Nov. the 9th, in quest of a more convenient +harbour, where he might clean and refit his ship, which, by the length +of the voyage, and the heat of the climate, was now become foul and +leaky. Directing his course southward, he soon fell in with an +uninhabited island, which, by its appearance, promised fair to answer +his purpose. At a distance it looked like a beautiful grove; the trees +were large, straight, and lofty; but, what was more extraordinary, they +were interspersed with such an astonishing number of shining flies, that +the whole island in the night seemed to glow with fire. Here they found +a convenient haven, and here they landed and continued 26 days. They +found upon this island tortoise, but of a monstrous size, and various +sorts of fruits of a delicious flavour. + +Leaving this place on the 12th of December, they cruelly deserted the +unhappy mulatto girl whom they had taken for their pleasure from a ship +that fell into their hands on the coast of New Spain. They had, at the +same time, taken on board a negroe youth, who they thought might be +serviceable to them in conversing with his nation in their way home; +but, finding him of little or no use on board, and provisions beginning +to fail, they pretended to send this simple couple far into the country +to gather fruits, and, in the mean time, unmoored the ship, and hoisted +sail; and, before the return of the victims, were out of sight of their +tears, and out of hearing of their cries: a melancholy instance this of +the depravity of man’s heart, and of the relentless cruelty of minds +addicted to rapine and lust. The poor girl, not yet fifteen, was ready +to be delivered of an innocent babe; and the youth, not twenty, was the +only resource in the midst of her distress. What befel them cannot be +known; but Providence seemed to punish the perfidy of the crew by a +severe trial of their fortitude soon after. + +Having a wind not very favourable, they happened to be intangled among a +multitude of islands, interspersed with dangerous shallows, till January +the 9th, 1580. When they thought themselves clear, and were sailing +along with a brisk gale, they were, at the beginning of the night, +suddenly surprized in their course by a sudden shock, the cause of which +was instantly discovered, for they were thrown upon a concealed rock, +and, by the speed of their course, fixed too fast for any hope of +escaping. + +Here the intrepidity of Drake was shaken, and his dexterity baffled: +here all the horrors of mind, attendant on conscious guilt, concurred to +aggravate the distress of those who were instrumental in abandoning the +harmless slaves. Those who were innocent reproached the guilty with +being the authors of their present distress; and, among the rest, Mr. +Fletcher, the chaplain, exclaimed against the Captain, as one whose +crimes of murder and lust had brought down divine vengeance on all the +company. Drake, who knew well how to dissemble his resentment, judging +this an improper time to encourage disputes, endeavoured, by every means +in his power, to appease the increasing animosity. To preserve, +therefore, the minds of the company at rest, he found it necessary to +keep their hands employed, and, for that purpose, ordered the pumps to +be constantly plied. Convinced by this experiment that the water did not +gain upon them in the hold, he conceived hopes, that, by lightening the +ship, they might possibly be able to heave her off. He knew it would be +in vain to persuade them to part with their treasure, and, therefore, he +first caused the guns to be thrown overboard, and then the spices; and, +afterwards, the water-casks to be bulged, being in hopes, that, if they +could be released, water might again be supplied from the neighbouring +islands, some of which were at no great distance. His next attempt was +to discover about the shallows some place where they might fix an +anchor, in order to bring their ship to, and, by that means, clear her +from the rock: but, upon examination, it was found that the rock on +which they had struck, rose, as many others in those seas do, almost +perpendicular, and that there was no anchorage, nor any bottom to be +fathomed a boat’s length from the ship. But this discovery was by Drake +wisely concealed from the common sailors, lest they should abandon +themselves to despair, for which there was, indeed, much cause, there +being no prospect left, but that they must there sink along with the +ship. + +In this deplorable situation they had remained for four and twenty +hours, when Drake, finding all human efforts vain, addressed himself to +his companions in distress, and exhorted them to lay aside all +animosities, and prepare themselves, by forgiving each other, for +obtaining that mercy through Christ, which they could not hope to +receive on any other terms. “On this occasion,” says my author, “every +thief reconciled himself to his fellow-thief, and Fletcher administered +the sacrament to them all.” At length, when their hopes had forsaken +them, and no new struggles could be made, they were, on a sudden, +relieved by the wind’s shifting, and a fresh breeze springing up, which +taking the ship on the leeward quarter, she reeled off the rock, without +receiving any very dangerous hurt, to the unspeakable joy of every soul +on board. + +This was the greatest and most inextricable distress which they had +suffered, and made such an impression upon their minds, that for some +time afterwards they durst not adventure to spread their sails, but went +slowly forward with the utmost circumspection, till, arriving at the +fruitful island of Baretene, they entered the port to repair what damage +the ship had received upon the rock. They found the people of this +island of an amiable and obliging disposition, courteous in their +manners, and honest in their dealings. They are finely proportioned, +tall of stature, and of comely features. The men, in general, go naked; +but the women cover themselves from the waist downwards, are modest, yet +not insensible of love and pleasure. They found the island abounding +with every necessary, and not as few of the comforts of life. + +Having repaired the ship and refreshed the men, they continued their +course without any material occurrence till the 11th of March, when they +came to anchor before the island of Java, and sending to the King a +present of cloth and silks, received from him in return a present supply +of refreshments; and on the day following Drake went himself on shore, +and entertained the King with music, and obtained leave to store his +ship with provisions. This island was governed by a great number of +petty Kings or Rayas, subordinate to one Chief. Of these princes three +came on board together a few days after their arrival, and having, upon +their return, recounted the wonders they had seen, and the civilities +with which they had been treated, incited others to satisfy their +curiosity in the same manner; and Raya Denan, the chief King, came +himself to view the ship, with the warlike armaments and instruments of +navigation. This intercourse of civilities somewhat retarded the +business for which they came; but, at length, they not only victualled +their ship, but payed the bottom, which was the more necessary +frequently to be repeated, as, at that time, sheathing of ships was not +in practice. + +The Javans were at this time a warlike people, well armed, with swords, +targets, and daggers, forged by themselves, and exquisitely wrought. +They were sociable, full of vivacity, and beyond description happy. They +were likewise hospitable to strangers, and not at all addicted to +thievery, the general characteristic of the islanders in the Pacific +Sea. + +From Java Drake intended to have visited the Malaccas, but his company +became troublesome, being desirous of returning home. On this occasion +he called to mind the speech of Master Fletcher, while they remained +hopeless upon the rock, and, under pretence of his spiriting up the +people to oppose him, he caused him, says my author, “to be made fast by +one of his legs with a chain, and a staple knocked fast into the +hatches, in the forecastle of the ship. He called all the company +together, and then put a lock about one of his legs; and Drake, sitting +cross-legged on a chest, and a pair of pantofles in his hand, he said, +Francis Fletcher, I do here excommunicate thee out of the Church of God, +and from all the benefits and graces thereof, and I renounce thee to the +devil and all his angels; and then he charged him, upon pain of death, +not once to come before the mast; for, if he did, he swore he should be +hanged, and Drake caused a posey to be written, and bound about +Fletcher’s arm, with charge, that if he took it off he should then be +hanged; the posey was, FRANCIS FLETCHER, THE FALSEST KNAVE THAT LIVETH.” +It does not, however, appear how long he was obliged to wear this posey +as it is called. But Drake was obliged to alter his resolution, and +comply with the company’s desires. + +On the 25th of March, 1580, he, therefore, took his departure, and, on +the 15th of June, they doubled the Cape of Good Hope, having then on +board his ship fifty-seven men, and but three casks of water. + +On the 12th of July they passed the Line, reached the coast of Guinea on +the 16th, and on July the 22d arrived at Sierra Leona, after a most +delightful passage, in which they discovered how much the Portuguese had +abused the world in their false representations of the horrors and +dangers that attended the navigation round the Cape. At Sierra Leona +they staid two days to refresh the men, and, having furnished themselves +with wood and water for the remainder of the voyage, they set sail for +England in high expectation of enriching their country with the spoils +of the Spaniards. + +On the 11th of September they made the island of Ferara, and, on the +third of November, they entered the harbour of Plymouth. In this voyage +Drake surrounded the world, which no Commander in Chief had ever done +before; and what, at that time appeared a thing extraordinary, by +steering a western course they had lost a day in their account. + +Their success in this voyage, and the immense wealth[2] they brought +home, raised much discourse throughout the kingdom; some highly +commending, and some as loudly decrying the principles upon which it was +acquired. The former alledged, that this enterprize was not only +honourable to the Commander who conducted, and the crew who assisted in +the performance of it, but to their country; that it would establish our +reputation for maritime skill in foreign nations, and raise a laudable +spirit of emulation at home; and that, as to the money, our merchants +having suffered deeply by the treachery and villainy of the Spaniards in +the new discovered country, there was nothing more just than that the +nation should receive an equivalent by the reprisals which Drake and his +company, at the hazard of their lives, had bravely extorted. + + [2] Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, says, that Drake carried from the + coast of Peru, 866,000 pezoes of silver, equal to 866 quintals, equal + to 100 pound weight each quintal, amounting to 1,139,200 ducats. He + also carried away 100,000 pezoes of gold, equal to 10 quintals, each + quintal valued at 1500 Spanish ducats; and all this over and above the + treasure in the ship, which was not entered, consisting of gold, + silver, pearls, precious stones, coined money, and other things of + great value. He also rifled the ships from the Philippines, laden with + spices, silks, velvets, and other rich merchandize, the value not + known.--By the above account, the silver only, at 5s. per oz. amounts + to 259,800l. and the gold to 48,000l. sterl. But we have seen a + manuscript that makes the value of the whole cargo brought home by the + Golden Hind (for that was the name that Drake chose his ship, the + Pelican, should be known by) amount to 800,000l. though that which was + divided among the crew was only 80,000l. Is it not reasonable then to + conclude, that the Queen and Council had a considerable share of the + remainder? + +The other party argued, that Drake, in fact, was no better than a +pirate; that, of all others, it least became a trading nation to +countenance such depredations; that the expedition was not only a breach +of all our treaties with Spain, but likewise of our old leagues with the +House of Burgundy; and that the consequences would infallibly involve +the Queen in a war, by which the nation would suffer infinitely more +than the riches acquired by a single ship could counterbalance. + +These were the sentiments, and these the speculations with which the +different parties amused themselves for some time after the arrival of +Drake in his native country. At length, the approbation of the Queen +determined the dispute; for all acquiesced in the wisdom of their +Sovereign. + +On the 4th of April, 1581, her Majesty went to Deptford, and dined on +board the ship in which so many Kings had been entertained before; and, +after dinner, she conferred the honour of knighthood on her Commander; +an honour not to be obtained in those days on trivial occasions, but as +a reward for signal services. This mark of distinction was a full +declaration of her Majesty’s approbation, silenced Drake’s enemies, and +gave joy to his friends. She likewise gave directions for the +preservation of the ship, that it might remain a monument of his own and +his country’s glory. + +What contributed the more to render the fame of Drake illustrious, was +the frequent attempts that had been made by navigators, the most +renowned in their time, to atchieve the fame; but without success. In +1527 the Spaniards sent Gracca de Loaisa, a Knight of Malta, with a +squadron of seven ships to follow the rout of Magellan, who, though his +ship returned to Spain, yet he himself lost his life, before he arrived +at the Malaccas, the promised islands. Loaisa passed the straits, +indeed, lost some of his ships in the South Seas, others put into the +ports of New Spain, and only his own vessel and one more reached the +East Indies, where himself and all his people perished. + +In 1526, the Genoese sent two ships to pass the straits, of which one +was cast away, and the other returned home without effecting any thing. + +Sebastian Cabot, in the service of the crown of Portugal, made the like +trial; but, not being able to find the straits, returned into the river +of Plate. + +Americus Vespusius, a Florentine, from whom the new world received its +name, undertook to perform, in the service of the crown of Portugal, +what Cabot had promised without effect; but that vain man was still more +unfortunate; for he could neither find the straits, nor the river of +Plate. + +Some years after this, the Spaniards equipped a stout squadron, under +the command of Simon de Alcasara; but, before they reached the height of +the straits, the crews mutinied, and obliged their Commander to return. + +Such repeated miscarriages discouraged even the ablest and boldest +seamen; so that from this time both Spaniards and others dropped all +thoughts of emulating Magellan, till Drake conceiving his design, as has +already been said, concealed it in his breast till ripe for execution. + +Being now advanced to eminence, in 1585 he was employed in the Queen’s +service, and sent on an expedition to the West Indies as Commander in +Chief; and having under him Captain Martin Forbisher, Captain Knollys, +and other experienced Officers of the royal navy, he took St. Jago, St. +Domingo, Carthagena, and St. Augustin. He returned elated with his +success; but, as my author says, not much enriched by the plunder. + +In 1587, he was again employed in an expedition to Lisbon, in which +Captain Forbisher also bore a part. Here they gained intelligence that a +considerable fleet was assembled in the bay of Cadiz, with a view to the +forming an armament for the invasion of England; he immediately repaired +to their place of rendezvous, and fell upon them at unawares; and, as it +is said, burnt 10,000 tons of shipping, with all the stores which they +were amassing for the intended invasion. + +In their return they fell in with a carrack from the East Indies, richly +laden, of which they likewise got intelligence in the port of Lisbon. +This was the St. Philip, of which Linschoten gives the following +account, when this Dutchman was at Goa, the chief settlement of the +Portuguese in the East Indies: “There came in, he says, from the island +of Japan, certain Jesuits, and with them three Princes, being the +children of so many Kings of that country, wholly apparelled like +Jesuits, not one of them above the age of 15 years, being minded by the +persuasion of the Jesuits to visit Portingall, and from thence to go to +Rome to see the Pope, thereby to procure great profit, privileges, and +liberties for the missionaries in that island. + +“In 1584, they set sail for Portingallo, and from thence travelled into +Spain, where, by the King and all the Spanish nobility, they were with +honour received, and presented with many gifts, which the Jesuits kept +for themselves. + +“Out of Spain, they rode to see the Pope; that done, they travelled +throughout Italy, where they were much honoured, and presented with many +rich presents, by means of the great report the Jesuits made of them. + +“To conclude, they returned to Madrid, where with great honour they took +their leave of the King, who furnished them with letters of +recommendation to the Viceroy, and all the Portingall Governors of +India; so they went to Lisbon, and there took shipping in 1586, and came +to Goa in the ship called St. Philip, which ship, in her return to +Portingall, was taken by Captain Drake, being the first that was taken +coming from the East Indies; which the Portuguese took for an evil sign, +because the ship bore the King’s own name;” both Spain and Portugal +being at that time governed by the same Sovereign. + +“When the Princes and Jesuits of Japan arrived at Goa on their return +from Europe, they were received, adds Linschoten, with great rejoicings; +for it was verily thought they had all been dead. On their landing they +were all three apparelled in cloth of gold and silver after the Italian +manner, being the same the Italian noblemen and gentlemen had given +them. They came to Goa very lively and in high spirits; and the Jesuits +were not a little proud, that through their means the voyage had been +successfully performed. In Goa they staid till the monsoon or time of +the wind’s setting in to sail for China, and thence to Japan, where, +with great triumph and wondering of all the people, they were received +and welcomed home, to the great furtherance of the Jesuits.” + +The St. Philip, in her voyage to Goa, had been driven by stress of +weather into Masambique, where she met with the St. Laurence, homeward +bound, that had likewise been driven into the same port disabled, having +lost her masts, and received other considerable damage, by which she was +rendered unserviceable. The St. Philip, therefore, as soon as she had +landed her passengers at Goa, returned to Masambique, and took in the +lading of the St. Laurence, which enabled her to make her voyage to +Europe about the usual time; a circumstance fortunate for Drake, as it +increased both his fame and his fortune. + +In 1588, Drake was appointed Vice-Admiral, under Charles Lord Effingham +Howard, High-Admiral of England, to oppose the formidable armada that +had for three years before been secretly preparing in Spain for the +invasion of England. In Drake’s letter to Lord Treasurer Burleigh, +acquainting him with the approach of the Spaniards, he concludes with +this elegant compliment to his superior: “That, though the strength of +the enemy out-went report, yet the chearfulness and courage which the +Lord Admiral expressed gave all who had the honour to serve under him +assurance of victory;” a compliment which was the more admired in Drake, +as in a former letter to the same Minister, in which he tells him of his +gallant atchievement in the port of Cadiz, “Not resting, said he, at +Lisbon, we sailed so close to the Spanish King, _that we singed his +beard_;” a course metaphor, it must be owned, but strongly +characteristic. + +Drake’s good fortune still accompanied him; for in the engagement which +afterwards happened on the arrival of the armada, though he committed +the greatest error that ever Commander was guilty of, by pursuing some +hulks belonging to the Hans Towns for plunder, when he was entrusted to +carry lights in the night for the direction of the English fleet, he +misled the Admiral; yet he was the only Commander who profited most by +the destruction of the enemy. Lord Howard, supposing the lights of the +Spanish Admiral to be the lights which Drake was ordered to carry, was +entangled in the very centre of the Spanish fleet, before he found his +mistake; but, fortunately, night favouring his escape, he disengaged +himself before he was discovered. This blunder was afterwards effaced by +the gallant behaviour of Drake, than whom no man was ever bolder, or +more determined. We do not, however, find his name among the Commanders +whom the Lord High Admiral thought proper to thank for their services on +that occasion. On the 2d of July, says Strype, Sir Francis, observing a +large Spanish galleon, commanded by Don Pedro de Valdez, who was the +reputed projector of the invasion, floating at a distance from both +fleets, sent his pinnace to summon the Captain to surrender, who at +first vauntingly set him at defiance; but being told it was Drake that +required him to yield, he immediately struck his colours, and, with 46 +of his crew, came on board the conqueror. In this ship he found 50,000 +ducats, with other effects to a much greater amount. + +The next year he was appointed Admiral of a squadron sent to place Don +Antonio on the throne of Portugal, to which that Prince pretended to +have a right. “But, says Rapin, (whose account of this expedition we +shall follow) as the Queen was extremely frugal, and an undertaking +against Spain could not but be very expensive, she so ordered it, that +Drake and Norris took upon them to be at the charge, in hopes of making +themselves amends by the booty they should meet with. So she only found +them six ships of war, with a present of 60,000 l. with leave to raise +soldiers and sailors for the expedition. Drake had already tried the +Spaniards in America and in the Channel, and was convinced they were +more formidable in common opinion than in reality; wherefore, joining +with Sir John Norris, and some other private persons, they equipped a +fleet, and embarked 11,000 soldiers and 1500 marines. The Hollanders +having also added some ships, the fleet consisted, according to Stow, of +146 sail, transports and victuallers included. Drake commanded at sea, +and Norris was General of the land forces. They took with them Don +Antonio, who hoped, by the assistance of the English, to be put in +possession of his kingdom, where he pretended to have many friends. + +“They sailed from Plymouth on the 18th of April, and soon after arrived +at the Groyne, where landing their troops, they assaulted the lower +town, and carried it by storm. Then they besieged the upper town. But +Norris, having advice that the Conde di Andrada was approaching with a +body of troops to relieve the place, suddenly raised the siege to march +against him; and, overtaking him, slew 3000 of his men. This done, he +burnt several villages; and, without returning to the siege, re-embarked +his troops, their principal design being against Portugal. + +“Whilst they were sailing towards the coasts of that kingdom, they were +joined by the Earl of Essex, with some ships he had armed at his own +charge, unknown to the Queen. Some days after, they arrived at Panicha, +a little town in Portugal, and, taking it, restored it to Don Antonio; +from thence Norris marched by land to Lisbon, Drake promising to follow +with the fleet up the Tagus. The army marched 40 miles without +opposition; and encamping before Lisbon, took the suburbs of St. +Catharine: but, as Drake performed not his promise, and the army wanted +cannon and ammunition, it was resolved in a council of war to retire. +This resolution was taken, because there was no appearance that the +Portuguese were inclined to revolt, as Don Antonio had expected; and +also, because there was no news of the succours he had boasted of from +the King of Morocco. The army marching towards the mouth of the Tagus, +met Drake, who had taken the town of Cascaes, and excused himself upon +the impossibility of performing his promise. Some days after, the castle +of Cascaes surrendering, it was blown up; and, to make themselves amends +for the charges of the expedition, the English seized sixty vessels +laden with corn, and all manner of naval stores to equip a new fleet +against England, belonging to the Hans Towns. Then they went and took +Vigo, which was abandoned by the inhabitants; and, firing the town, +returned to England. This expedition did some damage to the King of +Spain, but was of no benefit to Elizabeth; and the booty was not +sufficient to pay for equipping the fleet, though Camden says, they +brought home 150 pieces of heavy cannon, and a great booty. Above six +thousand men perished in this expedition by sickness.” + +The writers of Drake’s life say, that Norris grievously reproached Drake +with breach of his promise, and charged the miscarriage of the +expedition to his timidity. Indeed, Drake’s good genius seems now to +have forsaken him; and happy, say the same writers, if, having received +this first check at play, he had withdrawn his stake. + +As the war with Spain continued, Hawkins and Drake, who, as it should +seem, wanted to continue their old game, where the profits were more, +and the danger less, united their interest to persuade the Queen and +Council to undertake an effectual expedition to the West Indies, by +which the nation might be enriched, and the enemy deprived of those +resources by which they were enabled to carry on the war. + +For this purpose they procured, according to Rapin, twenty-six of the +Queen’s ships, the equipment of which, like the former, seems to have +been supplied by private adventure; a practice at that time very common, +where plunder was to be the reward. The preparations for this +expedition, however, as it far exceeded all former enterprizes to the +American Indies, could not be made so privately, or conducted so +secretly, but that the Spaniards found means to discover both its +strength and destination, and prepared themselves accordingly. + +As the places that were to be attacked lay at a great distance, it was +necessary to gain time, in order to fortify them. It was, therefore, +found necessary to devise some expedient to prevent the sailing of that +formidable armament, till every thing was in readiness to oppose it. +Accordingly, it was given out, that a second invasion was intended +against England; and when the Spanish fleet was ready to sail for +America, that had been equipping under pretence of an invasion, a sham +attack was made upon Cornwall, in order to spread an alarm, and give it +countenance. + +This had the desired effect. It was thought improper to part with so +many stout ships while the nation was threatened; and the expedition was +therefore retarded, till the panic had subsided. + +It was therefore the 28th of August, in 1695, before the Commanders +obtained permission to sail; and in the mean time the Queen having +received advice that the plate fleet was safe arrived in Europe, and +that only one ship, which had sprung her mast, remained behind, her +Majesty acquainted them with the intelligence, and advised them to +attack Porto Rico, before they pursued their grand enterprize, by which +they might make themselves masters of the galleon without losing much +time in the conquest. + +Sir Francis Drake, who was not formed to act in conjunct expeditions, +had not been long at sea before he differed in opinion from his fellow +Commander, and pursued a project totally different from the first object +of the voyage, in which, however, he was seconded by Sir Thomas +Baskerville, Commander of the land forces. This scheme was to attack the +Canaries in the way to America; in which, however, they failed; and +spending necessarily much time in the island of Dominica in landing and +refreshing the men, who, being unused to long voyages in hot climates, +were many of them unfit to proceed, the Spaniards had so effectually +prepared themselves, that, when the Generals came to action, they found +an opposition very different from what they expected; and were soon +sensible, that what they had formerly effected by surprize with a +handful of sailors, was not now to be accomplished with a whole army of +disciplined troops. + +In their course to Porto Rico, one of the sternmost ships of the English +fleet fell into the hands of five Spanish frigates that had been sent +from Spain to convoy home the galleon from that port. From this ship +they gained the intelligence of the intended attack, the consequences of +which being foreseen by Sir John Hawkins, it threw him into a sudden +disorder, of which in a few days he died--some say, of a broken heart. + +They were now, Nov. 12, 1595, before Porto Rico, and the same evening +that Sir John Hawkins died, as the principal officers were at supper, a +cannon-shot from the fort pierced the cabin, killed Sir Nicholas +Clifford, wounded Captain Stratford, mortally wounded Sir Brute Browne, +and struck the stool from under Sir Francis Drake, as he was drinking +success to the attack. + +The next day, pursuant to a resolution of a council of war, a general +attack was made upon the shipping in the harbour, but without effect. +The Spaniards suffered much, but the English more; who, finding it +impossible to make an impression upon the fortifications of the town, +weighed anchor, and steered to Rio de la Hacha, set fire to the town and +burned it to the ground: they likewise performed some other exploits of +the like kind; but having landed the troops destined to cross the +isthmus to attack Panama, after a fatiguing march in which they were +great sufferers, they returned, without being able to reach the place. +This disappointment materially affected Drake, who having, as he +thought, provided a sufficient force to carry into execution the +enterprize which he had well-nigh effected with a few sailors and +Symerons some years before, could not bear the thought of surviving his +disgrace. “Now, says Fuller, began the discontent of Sir Francis Drake +to feed upon him. He conceived, that expectation, a merciless usurer, +computing each day since his departure, exacted an interest and return +of honour and profit proportionable to his great preparations, and +transcending his former atchievements. He saw that all the good which he +had done in his voyage, consisted in the evil he had done the Spaniards +afar off, whereof he could present but small visible fruits in England. +These apprehensions accompanying, if not causing, the disease of the +flux, wrought his sudden death; and sickness did not so much untie his +cloaths, as sorrow did rend at once the robe of his mortality asunder. +He lived by the sea, died on it, and was buried in it.” + +This account of the manner of Sir Francis Drake’s death seems to be +authentic, though some have not scrupled to insinuate, that sickness had +no part in that catastrophe. Be that as it may, Fuller’s reflections +upon it deserve to be remembered. “Thus, says he, we see how great +spirits, having mounted to the highest pitch of performance, afterwards +strain and break their credit in striving to go beyond it; Or, it may +be, God oftentimes leaves the brightest men in an eclipse, to shew that +they do but borrow their lustre from his reflection.” + +Thus we have endeavoured to trace the actions of this celebrated +navigator from beginning to end. If we have withdrawn the veil, which +has hitherto covered his infirmities, it has been in the pursuit of +truth; not with a design to detract from his real merit, but to shew his +character in the true light. In the current of success, even crimes of +the deepest die are sometimes patronised even by the public. The actions +which gave rise to Drake’s popularity, are such as a courageous leader, +with an hundred armed followers, might in these peaceable times easily +perform, by entering the cities or towns on the coast of Britain, in the +dead of night, cutting the throats of the watch, and all who happen to +be awake in the streets, breaking open and plundering houses, and +churches, seizing every thing valuable that should fall into their +hands, and before the people could recover from their consternation, +making their escape with their booty. Were such a company masters of an +armed vessel, if there were no ship of force to oppose them, what should +hinder their sailing from place to place, and, _provided they could +out-run report_, performing the like exploits in every town they came +to? Would there be anything truly great in this? Or would the man who +should undertake and execute an enterprize of such a horrid nature, be +justly entitled to the name of Hero? If not, what shall we say of +Drake’s nocturnal enterprize on Nombre de Dios; of his way-laying the +treasure in the road from Panama; of his ranging the unarmed coasts of +Chili and Peru; and of his plundering villages, towns, and ships +belonging to a peaceable unsuspecting people, with whom his nation was +at peace, and from whom opposition was not to be dreaded? What, indeed, +did the people at that time say? Those who were the sufferers cried out +loudly against the plunderer; and Bernardine de Mendoza, the Spanish +Ambassador at the court of Queen Elizabeth, insisted that he should be +punished for his robberies, and that all the money and effects he had +seized should be restored; but, if the Queen was a private adventurer, +as, from Drake’s declaration to his followers, and from other instances +of the womanish littlenesses of that Princess, there is reason to +suspect, What hope was there of justice or restitution from +remonstrance? Indeed, it served that avaricious Queen for a pretence to +sequester the treasure which Drake brought home, and to convert, it is +probable, the greatest part of it to her own use; for, as we have +already shewn from good authority in a note, though the whole booty was +valued at 800,000l. yet only 80,000l. was divided among the plunderers; +and Rapin tells us, that some part of the treasure was afterwards repaid +by the Queen to Spain. If she had not retained enough in her hands, no +one will suppose, that the Sovereign, who could cause the goods of her +favourite Leicester to be set to public sale after his death, for the +payment of money she had lent him, would have repaid to Spain from her +own coffers the plunder that had been unjustly taken by one of her +meaner subjects. + +To dignify actions, therefore, of the most infamous piracy with the name +of great, is to exalt vice, and to substitute successful villainy in the +place of substantial virtue. If we view Drake in the light of a +courageous plunderer, he may vie with the De la Poles, the Blackbeards, +or any of those daring disturbers of the times in which they lived, who +struck a panic wherever they roved to commit their ravages: but, +consider him as a Commander, employed in the defence of his country, and +we shall see nothing to admire, except his courage. In the first +enterprize in which he was engaged, he was indeed successful. The Queen, +suspecting an intention in Philip of Spain to revenge the injuries his +subjects had received, pitched upon Drake, who had given the offence, as +the fittest man to prevent the consequences. He, therefore, as he had +done before, attacked the enemy by surprize, and set fire to a +defenceless number of transports assembled in the harbour of Cadiz, +without a ship of war to protect them, or a gun fired by way of +opposition. The accident which afterwards threw the rich India ship in +his way, on his return home, did him no honour as a Commander, though it +gave him credit as a fortunate adventurer: nor did his behaviour in the +Channel, when, instead of maintaining his post, he pursued the Hans +merchant ships, add at all to his reputation as a Vice-Admiral. His +American enterprize with Lord Carlisle was attended with no laurels; and +the only two enterprizes in which he was employed in a joint command, he +ruined by his perfidy and self-conceit. + +It may, indeed, be urged in Drake’s defence, that it was the policy of +the Queen his Sovereign, to countenance her subjects in distressing +Spain, and in mortifying the haughty monarch who sat upon the throne; +and that almost all the heroes of her active reign, acquired their glory +by practices founded on the same prevailing principle. + +This argument in his favour cannot be denied its due wright. The +expeditions of Sir John Hawkins; of Sir Walter Raleigh; of Lord +Carlisle; of Sir John Norris; of the Earl of Essex; of Cavendish; and, +indeed, of most others undertaken against Spain; were professedly with a +view to plunder; and the charges of fitting them out were chiefly borne +by those who were to be sharers in the booty: yet, surely, there is a +material difference between the glory that is purchased by valour in the +field, and fame that is acquired by compacts to surprize the innocent, +and invade the property of the peaceable. + +Having now seen Drake in two distinct points of view, as a leader of a +company of plunderers, and as a Commander in the royal navy, let us do +justice to his character by viewing him as a mariner, and in that light +he will hardly have his equal. To project a voyage round the globe, and +to conduct it without the assistance of a single mariner on board who +had ever crossed the Line, Nuno da Silva, the Portuguese pilot, +excepted, was, perhaps, one of the boldest exploits that ever man +performed. His navigating his ships along the coast of Brazil; his +carrying them through the straits of Magellan in a shorter time than any +mariner has ever done since; his keeping the sea in a storm for thirty +days together; his skill in navigating the coasts of Chili, Peru, and +New Spain, where no English ship had ever sailed; his accuracy in +discovering the track of the Spanish ship from the East Indies, and his +consummate sagacity in pursuing a new course home to avoid pursuers; +cannot be enough admired or applauded. His knowledge of the globe is +manifest from the first attempt he made to return home by a northern +passage; a passage which he knew would not only secure him from the +danger of pursuers, but, were it practicable, would open a free +intercourse between his nation and the rich inhabitants of that opulent +country in which he was then situated. Finding himself, however, +disappointed in this design, how great was his sagacity in the discovery +of an unknown country, wherein to repair his ship, refresh his +followers, take in wood and water, and to supply himself with every +necessary for the vast voyage by sea he was to encounter; and yet, such +was his knowledge in making provision against every contingency that +might happen, that he lost but one man by sickness during the long run +from the coast of New Spain to the Ladrones, in which Commodore Anson +lost near half his crew. Nor is his skill less to be admired in his +return from the Ladrones, the most dangerous navigation of any part of +the known world; for, except the accident upon the rock, as has already +been related, he sailed from the Ladrones to Java unembarrassed; from +Java to Sierra Leona, on the coast of Africa, without touching at any +port, or encountering any difficulty, save from a scarcity of water; a +thing hardly to be credited, and which was never performed by any +mariner before his time, or since. + + + + + THE + VOYAGES + OF + CAPT. THOMAS CAVENDISH, + THE SECOND ENGLISH NAVIGATOR WHO SAILED ROUND THE WORLD. + + +This Gentleman was descended from an antient family in Suffolk, whose +ancestors came into England with William the Conqueror. His father, +William Cavendish, of Trimley St. Martin, near Ipswich, dying young, +left his son Thomas a minor, and heir to the manors of Trimley, +Stratton, and Grimston, with other lands of inheritance to a very +considerable amount: but this youth, whose atchievements we are about to +relate, being of a high-spirited disposition, and, as soon as he came of +age, subject to no controul, fell early into the fashionable gallantries +and vices of the times, and dissipated the best part of his ample +fortune before he entertained any thoughts of applying to business, or, +perhaps, was sensible how deeply his affairs were embarrassed. + +But he no sooner began to reflect, and to perceive, that, without +application to some kind of employment, he must be undone, than he made +choice of a sea-faring life, not only as most suitable to his unsettled +turn of mind, but also as the most likely means of restoring his +fortune, and establishing his credit. + +The kingdom was now involved in war with the Spaniards, the then most +powerful, and consequently the haughtiest and most formidable people in +Europe, who, drawing immense riches from their new acquisitions in +America, not only raised the envy but the enmity of other powers, by +their pride and their perfidy. + +Gentlemen of fortune, and gentlemen of no fortune, were about this time +equally encouraged to distress the enemy. The war laid open an immense +field for enterprize; and every one was at liberty to share the harvest, +who was willing to bestow the pains of gathering the produce and +bringing it home. + +Among the most active and the most indefatigable was Sir Walter Raleigh, +who not only was the most experienced, but the most successful leader of +his time. With him our adventurer first determined to embark; and, as +Sir Walter had just projected a new voyage to America at his own charge, +he was ready enough to admit associates, who were able and willing to +bear a part of the expence. Unfortunately for our new adventurer, all +the advantage he derived from this project was only in the knowledge he +obtained of sea affairs, and of the temper and genius of the people with +whom he had to deal; for the profits that accrued from the voyage by no +means answered the sums employed in pursuing it. He observed, that, by +means of their great riches, the Spaniards could command intelligence of +all that was in agitation against them on this side the globe; but that, +if they were to be taken off their guard, the southern hemisphere must +be the place of action. He had already an example, in Sir Francis Drake, +of the immense wealth that was to be acquired on the coast of Peru, if +secrecy could be preserved, and he determined to be upon his guard, and +to keep his design solely within his own breast. + +With this view he sold a part of the remains of his estate, and set +about building two ships proper for his enterprize at Harwich, at that +time an obscure port, namely, one called the _Desire_, of 120 tons; and +another of 60, called the _Content_; to these he added the _Hugh +Gallant_, a bark of 40 tons. In the equipment of this little squadron, +he purchased many articles of commerce to cover his design, and then +privately laid in guns, ammunition and stores, with a moderate quantity +of provisions, intending to purchase the rest at some other convenient +port, when he was just ready to depart. + +He likewise enlisted but half his complement of men; and when he arrived +at Plymouth he supplied the rest. In the whole conduct of what has been +already related, he was his own sole director, and none of those who +sailed with him knew whither he was bound, till after their embarkation +at Plymouth. It is even uncertain whether Lord Hounsdon, who procured +his commission, knew the place of his destination. + +An enterprize so well concerted cannot fail to excite curiosity; and as +it was excellently written by Mr. Pretty, brother to Sir William, who +accompanied Cavendish throughout the voyage, it will best appear in its +ancient dress. + +“We departed, says Mr. Pretty, out of Plymouth on Thursday the 21st of +July, 1586, with three sails (to wit, the Desire a ship of 120 tons, the +Content of 60 tons, and the Hugh Gallant a bark of 40 tons); in which +small fleet were 123 persons of all sorts, with all kind of furniture, +and victuals sufficient for the space of two years. On Tuesday the 26th +of the same month, we were forty-five leagues from Cape Finis Terræ, +where we met with five sails of Biscayers, coming from the Grand Bay in +Newfoundland, as we supposed, which our Admiral shot at, and fought with +them three hours; but we took none of them, by reason the night grew on. + +The 1st of August we came in sight of Fort Ventura, one of the isles of +the Canaries, about ten o’clock in the morning. + +On Sunday, being the 7th of August, we were gotten as high as Rio del +Oro, on the coast of Barbary. + +On Monday the 19th, we fell in with Cape Blanco, but the wind blew so +much at the North, that we could not get up where the Canters do use to +ride and fish: therefore we lay off six hours west-south-west, because +of the sand which lieth off the Cape south-west and by south. + +The 15th day of the same month we were in the height of Cape Verd, by +estimation fifty leagues off the same. The 18th, Sierra Leona did bear +east of us, being forty leagues from us; and the same day the wind +shifted to the north-west; so that, by the 20th day of the said month, +we were in six degrees thirty minutes to the northward of the +Equinoctial Line. + +The 23d, we set sail for Sierra Leona, and on the 25th day we fell in +with the point on the south-side of Sierra Leona, which Mr. Brewer knew +very well, and went in before with the Content, which was Vice-admiral: +and we had no less than five fathoms water when we had least, and had, +for fourteen leagues in south-west, all the way running into the harbour +of Sierra Leona, sixteen, fourteen, twelve, ten, and eight fathoms of +water. + +The 26th of the said month, we put into the harbour; and, in going in, +we had by the southmost point at least five fathoms water by the rock, +which lieth at the said point: and after we came within two or three +cables length of the said rock, we never had less than ten fathoms water +until we came up to the road, which is about a league from the point, +bordering always on the south-side until you come up to the +watering-place, in which bay is the best road: but you must ride far +into the bay, because there runs prodigious great tides in the offing, +and it commonly floweth into the road at a south-east and by east moon. + +It is from England to this place 930 leagues; which we ran from the 21st +of July to the 26th of this month of August. On Saturday, being the 27th +day, there came two negroes from the shore aboard our Admiral, and made +signs unto our General that there was a Portuguese ship within the +harbour; so the Hugh Gallant, being the Rear-admiral, went up three or +four leagues, but, for want of a pilot, they went no farther; for the +harbour runneth up three or four leagues more, and is of a prodigious +breadth, and very dangerous, as we were afterwards informed by a +Portuguese. + +On Sunday the 28th, the General sent some of his company on shore, and +there, as they played and danced all the forenoon among the negroes, to +the end that they might hear some good news of the Portuguese ship, and +as they were returning to go on board, they spied a Portuguese, which +lay hid among the bushes, whom we took and brought away with us the same +night: and he told us it was very dangerous going up with our boats in +search of the ship that was at the town. Whereupon we went not to seek +her, because we knew he told us the truth for we bound him and made him +fast, and so examined him. He told us also, that his ship was there cast +away, and that there were two more of his company among the negroes. The +Portuguese’s name was Emmanuel, and was by his occupation a chalker, +belonging to the port of Portugal. + +On Monday morning, being the 29th day, our General landed with 70 men, +or thereabouts, and went up to their town, where we burnt two or three +houses, and took what spoil we could, which was but little; but all the +people fled: and, in our retiring on board, in a very little plain, at +their town’s end, they shot their arrows at us out of the woods, and +hurt three or four of our men. Their arrows were poisoned; but yet none +of our men miscarried at that time. Their town is very artificially +built with mud walls; their houses built round, with their yards paled +in, and kept very clean, as are their streets. These negroes used great +obedience to their King, as one of our men said, which was an hostage +for the negroes which came first. There were in their town, by +estimation, about one hundred houses. + +The first of September, there went many of our men on shore at the +watering-place, and did wash shirts very quietly all the day. And the +second day they went again, and the negroes were in ambush round about +the place; and the carpenter of the Admiral going into the wood, to do +some special business, espied them by good fortune. But the negroes +rushed out upon our men so suddenly, that, in retiring to our boats, +many of them were hurt; among whom Wm. Pickman, a soldier, was shot in +the thigh; who, plucking the arrow out, broke it, and left the head +behind; and he told the chirurgeons that he plucked out all the arrow, +because he would not have them lance his thigh: whereupon the poison +wrought so that night, that he was prodigiously swolen, and the next +morning he died; the piece of the arrow with the poison being afterwards +plucked out of his thigh. + +The 3d day of the said month, divers of our fleet went up four miles +within the harbour with our boat, and caught great store of fish, and +went on shore, and took lemons from the trees; and, coming on board +again, saw two buffaloes. + +The 6th day we departed from Sierra Leona, and went out of the harbour, +and staid one tide three leagues from the point of the mouth of the +harbour, in six fathoms, and it flowed south-south-west. + +On Wednesday, being the 7th of the same month, we departed for one of +the isles of Cape Verd, which is ten leagues distant from the point of +Sierra Leona and about five o’clock the same night we anchored about two +miles off the island, in six fathoms water, and landed the same night, +and found plantains only upon the island. + +The 8th day, one of our boats went out, and sounded about the island, +and they passed through a Sound at the west end of the island, where +they found five fathoms water round about the island, until they came to +the very gut of the Sound, and then for a cast or two they had but two +fathoms water, and presently after six fathoms, and so deeper and +deeper. And, at the east end of the island, there was a town where +negroes resorted at some times, as we perceived by their provision. + +There is no fresh water on all the south-side that we could perceive; +but, on the north-side, three or four very good places of fresh water: +and all the whole island is a wood, save certain little places where the +houses stand, which are environed round about with plantain trees, +whereof the fruit is excellent meat. This place is subject very much to +thunder, rain, and lightning, in this month: I think the reason is, +because the sun is near the Line Equinoctial. On Saturday the 10th, we +departed from the said island about three o’clock in the afternoon, the +wind being at the south-west. + +The last of October, running west-south-west, about twenty-four leagues +from Cape Frio in Brazil, we fell in with a great mountain, which had an +high round knob on the top of it, standing like a tower. + +The first of November, we went in between the island of St. Sebastian +and the main land, carried several things on shore, set up a forge, and +had our casks on shore; our cooper made hoops: and so we remained there +until the 23d day of the same month in which time we fitted our things, +built our pinnace, and filled our fresh water. And while our pinnace was +building, there came a canoe from the river of Janeiro, meaning to go to +St. Vincent, wherein were six naked slaves of the country, which did row +the canoe, and one Portuguese; and the Portuguese knew Christopher Hare, +Master of the Admiral; for that Mr. Hare had been at St. Vincent, in the +Minion of London, in the year 1581: and, thinking to have John Whithal, +the Englishman, which dwelleth at St. Vincent, come unto us, which is +twenty leagues from this harbour, with some others, thereby to have had +some fresh victuals, we suffered the Portuguese to go with a letter unto +him, who promised to return or send some answer within ten days, for +that we told him we were merchants, and would traffic with them; but we +never received any answer from him and seeing that he came not according +to appointment, our business being dispatched, we weighed anchor, and +set sail from St. Sebastian on the 23d of November. + +The 16th day of December we fell in with the coast of America, in 47 +deg. and 20 min. the land bearing west from us about six leagues off; +from which place we ran along the shore until we came into 48 deg. It is +a steep beach all along. + +The 17th of December, in the afternoon, we entered into an harbour, +where our Admiral went in first; wherefore our General named the said +harbour Port Desire; in which harbour is an island or two, where there +is a wonderful great store of seals, and another island of birds, called +grey gulls. These seals are of a wonderful bigness, huge and monstrous +of shape; and, for the fore-part of their bodies, cannot be compared to +any thing better than to a lion: their head, neck, and fore-part of +their bodies, are full of rough hair; their feet are in the manner of a +fin, and in form like unto a man’s hand; they breed and cast every +month, giving their young milk, yet continually get they their living in +the sea, and live altogether upon fish: their young are extraordinary +good meat; and being boiled or roasted, are hardly to be known from lamb +or mutton. The old ones are of such bigness and force, that it is as +much as four men are able to do to kill one of them with great staves; +and he must be beaten down with striking on the head of him; for his +body is of that bigness, that four men could never kill him, but only on +the head; for being shot through the body with an harquebuss, or a +musket, yet he will go his way into the sea, and never care for it at +the present. Also the fowls that were there were very good meat, and +great plenty of them: they have burrows in the ground like conies, for +they cannot fly; they have nothing but down upon their pinions; they +also fish and feed in the sea for their living, and breed on shore. + +This harbour is a very good place to trim ships in, and to bring them on +ground and grave them in, for there ebbeth and floweth much water; +therefore we graved and trimmed all our ships there. + +The 24th of December, being Christmas-eve, a man and a boy of the +Rear-admiral went some forty scores from our ships, unto a very fair +green valley at the foot of a mountain, where was a little pit or well +which our men had digged and made some two or three days before, to get +fresh water; for there was none in all the harbour; and this was but +brackish; therefore this man and boy went thither to wash their linen: +and being in washing at the said well, there were great numbers of +Indians which were come down, and found the said man and boy in washing. +These Indians being divided on each side of the rocks, shot at them with +their arrows, and hurt them both; but they fled presently, being about +fifty or threescore, though our General followed them but with sixteen +or twenty men. The man was shot quite through the knee, the boy into the +shoulder; either of them having very sore wounds. Their arrows are made +of little canes, and their heads are of a flint stone, set into the cane +very artificially. They are as wild as ever was a buck, or any other +wild beast; for we followed them, and they ran from us as we had been +the wildest things in the world. We took the measure of one of their +feet, and it was eighteen inches long. Their custom is, when any of them +die, to bring him or them to the cliffs by the sea-side, and upon the +top of them they bury them; and in their graves are buried with them +their bows and arrows, and all their jewels which they had in their +life-time, which are fine shells that they find by the sea-side, which +they cut and square after an artificial manner; and all are laid under +their heads. The grave is made with large stones of great length and +bigness, being set all along full of the dead man’s darts, which he used +when he was living. And they colour both their darts and their graves of +a red colour, which they use in colouring themselves. + +The 28th of December, we departed out of the port of Desire, and went to +an island which lieth three leagues to the southward of it; where we +trimmed our saved penguins with salt, for victuals, all that and the +next day, and departed along the coast south-west and by-south. + +The 31st we fell in with a rock, which lieth about five leagues from the +land, much like unto Edistone, which lieth off the sound of Plymouth; +and we sounded, and had eight fathoms rocky ground, within a mile +thereof; the rock bearing west-south-west. We went coasting along +south-south-west, and found great store of seals. This rock standeth in +48 deg. 30 min. to the southward of the Line. + +The 2d day of January, we fell in with a very fair white cape, which +standeth in 51 degrees, and had seven fathoms water a league off the +land. + +The 3d, we fell in with another great white cape, which standeth in 52 +deg. 45 min. from which cape there runneth a low beach about a league to +the southward; and this beach reacheth to the opening of the dangerous +strait of Magellan, which is in divers places five or six leagues wide, +and in two several places more narrow. Under this cape we anchored, and +lost an anchor; for it was a great storm, and lasted three days very +dangerous. + +The 6th day we put in for the straits. + +The 7th day, between the mouth of the straits and the narrowest place +thereof, we took a Spaniard, whose name was Hernando, who was there with +23 Spaniards more, which were all that remained of four hundred left +there three years before, all the rest being dead with famine. And the +same day we passed through the narrowest of the straits, where the +aforesaid Spaniard shewed us the hull of a small bark, which we judged +to be a bark called the John Thomas, one of Drake’s fleet. It is from +the mouth of the straits unto the narrowest of the straits fourteen +leagues, and the course lieth west and by-north. The mouth of the +straits lieth in 52 degrees. + +From the narrowest of the straits unto Penguin island is ten leagues, +and lieth west-south-west, somewhat to the southward, where we anchored +the 8th day, and killed and salted plenty of penguins for victuals. + +The 9th day we departed from Penguin island, and ran south-south-west to +King Philip’s city, which the Spaniards had built; which town or city +had four forts, and every fort had in it one cast piece, which pieces +were buried in the ground; the carriages were standing in their places +unburied: we digged for them and had them all. They had contrived their +city very well, and seated it in the best place of the straits for wood +and water: they had built up their churches by themselves: they had laws +very severe among them, for they had erected a gibbet, whereon they had +done execution on some of their company. It seemed unto us, that their +whole living for a great space was altogether upon muscles and limpets; +for there was not any thing else to be had, except some deer which came +out of the mountains down to the fresh rivers to drink. These Spaniards +came to fortify the straits, to the end that no nation should have +passage through into the South Sea, saving their own only: but, as it +appeared, it was not God’s will so to have it; for during the time that +they were there, which was two years at the least, they could never have +any thing to grow, or in any ways prosper; and, on the other side, the +Indians often preyed upon them, until their victuals grew so short, +(their store being spent which they had brought with them out of Spain, +and having no means to renew the same) that they died like dogs in their +houses, and in their clothes, wherein we found some of them still at our +coming, until that in the end the town being wonderfully tainted with +the smell and savour of the dead people, the rest which remained alive +were driven to bury such things as they had there in their town, and so +to forsake the town, and to go along the sea-side to seek their victuals +to preserve them from starving, taking nothing with them, but every man +his harquebuss, and his furniture, that was able to do it (for some of +them were not able to carry them for weakness), and so lived, for the +space of a year and more, on roots, leaves, and sometimes a fowl which +they might kill with their piece. To conclude, they set forward, +determined to travel towards the river of Plate, there being only +twenty-three persons left alive, whereof two were women, which were the +remainder of four hundred. In this place we watered and wooded well and +quietly. Our General named this town Port Famine: it standeth in 53 +degrees by observation to the southward. + +The 14th day we departed from this place, and ran south-south-west, and +from thence south-west unto Cape Froward, five leagues west-south-west, +which cape is the southermost part of all the straits, and standeth in +the latitude of 54 degrees. From which cape we ran west and by-north +five leagues, and put into a bay or cove on the south side, which we +called Muscle-cove, because there was great plenty of them: we rode +therein six days, the wind being still westerly. + +The 21st day of January we departed from Muscle-cove, and went +north-west and by-west ten leagues, to a very fair sandy bay on the +north-side, which our General called Elizabeth-bay: and, as we rode +there that night, one of our men died which went in the Hugh Gallant, +whose name was Grey, a carpenter by his occupation, and was buried there +in that bay. + +The 22d we departed from Elizabeth-bay in the afternoon, and went about +two leagues from that place, where there was a fresh water river, up +which our General went with the ship’s boat about three miles; which +river hath very good and pleasant ground about it. It is low and +champaign soil, and we saw no other ground in all the straits, but what +was craggy rocks, and monstrous high hills and mountains. In this river +are a great many savages, which we saw, and had conference with them. +They were men-eaters, and fed altogether upon raw flesh, and other +filthy food: which people had lately preyed upon some of the Spaniards +before spoken of; for they had gotten knives, and some pieces of rapiers +to make darts of. They used all the means they could possibly to have +enticed us farther up the river, on purpose to have betrayed us; which +being perceived by our General, he caused us to shoot at them with our +harquebusses, whereby we killed many of them. So we sailed from this +river, to the channel of St. Jerome, which is two leagues off. + +From the river of St. Jerome, about three or four leagues, we ran west +into a cape which is on the north-side; and from that cape unto the +mouth of the straits the course lieth north-west and by-west, and +north-west; between which place and the mouth of the straits, to the +southward, we lay in harbour until the 23d of February, by reason of +contrary winds, and most vile and foul weather, with such rain and +violent stormy winds which came down from the mountains and high hills, +that they hazarded the best cables and anchors that we had for to hold; +which, if they had failed, we had been in great danger to have been cast +away, or at least to have been famished: for, during this time, which +was a full month, we fed almost altogether on muscles, limpets, and +birds, or such as we could get on shore, seeking every day for them, as +the fowls of the air do where they can find food in continual rainy +weather. + +There is, at every one or two miles end, an harbour on both sides of the +land. And there are, between the river of St. Jerome and the mouth of +the straits, going into the South Sea, about 34 leagues, by estimation; +so that the whole length of the straits is about 90 leagues: and the +mouth of the said straits standeth nearly in the same height that the +entrance standeth in when we pass out of the North Sea, which is about +52 deg. and 40 min. to the southward of the Line. + +The 24th day of February, we entered into the South Sea; and on the +south side in going out of the straits is a fair high cape, with a low +point adjoining to it; and on the north-side are four or five islands +which lie six leagues off the main, and much broken and sunken ground +about them. By noon, the same day, we had brought these islands east of +us five leagues off; the wind being southerly. + +The first of March, a storm took us at north, which night the ships lost +the company of the Hugh Gallant, being in 49 degrees 30 min. and 45 +leagues from land. This storm continued three or four days and for that +time we in the Hugh Gallant, being separated from the other two ships, +looked every hour to sink, our bark was so leaky, and ourselves so +fatigued and weakened with freeing it of water, that we slept not during +three days and three nights. + +The 15th of March, in the morning, the Hugh Gallant came in between the +island of St. Mary and the main, where she met with the Admiral and the +Content, who had rid at the island of La Mocha two days, which island +standeth in south latitude 38 deg. at which place some of our men went +on shore with the Vice-Admiral’s boat, where the Indians fought with +them with their bows and arrows, and were very wary of their calivers. +These Indians were enemies to the Spaniards, and belonged to a great +place called Arauco, and took us for Spaniards, as we afterwards +learned. + +The above-mentioned place, Arauco, is very rich, and full of gold mines; +and yet could it not be subdued at any time by the Spaniards; but they +always returned with the greatest loss of men: for these Indians are +quite desperate, and careless of their lives, living at their own +liberty and freedom. + +The 15th day aforesaid, in the afternoon, we weighed anchor, and ran +under the west side of St. Mary’s island, where we rid very well in six +fathoms water, and very fair ground, all that night. + +The 16th day, our General went on shore himself, with 70 or 80 men, +every one with his furniture. There came down to us certain Indians, +with two which were the Chiefs of the island, to welcome us on shore, +thinking we had been Spaniards, for it is subdued by them; who brought +us up to a place where the Spaniards had erected a church, with crosses +and altars in it; and there were about this church two or three +store-houses, which were full of wheat and barley ready threshed, and +made up in cades of straw, to the quantity of a bushel of corn in every +cade. The wheat and barley was as fair, as clear, and every way as good +as any we have in England. There were also the like cades full of +potatoe-roots, which were very good to eat, ready made up in the +store-houses, for the Spaniards when they should come for their tribute. +This island also yielded many sorts of fruits, hogs, and hens. These +Indians are held in such slavery by their masters, that they dare not +eat a hen or hog themselves: but the Spaniards have made them all in +that island christians. Thus we filled ourselves here with corn as much +as we would have, and as many hogs as we had salt to salt them with, and +great plenty of hens, with a number of bags of potatoe-roots, and about +500 dried dog-fishes, and Guinea wheat, which is called maiz. And having +taken as much as we would, yet we left a prodigious great store behind +us. Our General had the two Chiefs of the island on board our ship, and +provided great cheer for them, and made them merry with wine: and they, +in the end, perceiving that we were not Spaniards, made signs, as near +as our General could perceive, that, if we would go over unto the main +land to Arauco, there was much gold; making us signs, that we should +have great store of riches. But, because we could not understand them, +our General made haste, and within two or three days we furnished +ourselves, and departed. + +The 18th day, in the morning, we departed from this place; and ran all +that day north-north-east about ten leagues, and at night lay with a +short sail off and on the coast. + +The 19th, we ran in east-north-east with the land, and bore in with a +place called the Conception, where we anchored under an island, and +departed the next morning without going on land. + +The 20th, we departed from the Conception, and went into a little bay, +which was sandy, where we saw fresh water and cattle; but we staid not +there. + +The 30th day, we came into the bay of Quintero, which standeth in 33 +deg. and 50 min. + +The said day, presently after we were come to an anchor in the bay, +there was a herdsman, that kept cattle, lying upon the point of the hill +asleep; who, when he awaked, and had espied three ships which were come +into the bay, before we could get on shore, he had mounted a horse which +was feeding by, and rode his way as fast as ever he was able; and our +General, with thirty shot with him, went on shore. He had not been on +land an hour when there came three horsemen with bright swords towards +us, so hard as they could ride, till within a quarter of a mile of us, +and then stopt, and would come no nearer unto us: so our General sent +unto them a couple of our men with their shot, and Hernando, who was the +Spaniard that we had taken up at the mouth of the straits. But the +Spaniards would not suffer our men to come near with their shot, but +made signs that one of our men should come alone unto them: so the said +Hernando, the Spaniard, went unto them, and our two men stood not far +from them. They had some conference; and, in the end, Hernando came back +from them, and told our General that he had parlied with them for some +victuals, and they had promised as much as we would have. Our General +sent him back again with another message, and another shot with him; and +being come near unto them, they would not suffer any more than one to +approach them: whereupon our men let the Spaniard go unto them alone; +who being at some good distance from them, they staid but a small time +together, before the said Hernando leaped up behind one of them, and +rode away with them, notwithstanding the damnable oaths which he had +made continually to our General, never to forsake him, but to die on his +side before he would be false. Our General, seeing how he was dealt +with, filled water all that day with good watch, and carried it on +board: and night being come, he determined next day to send into the +country to find their town, and to have taken the spoil of it, and to +have fired it, if they could have found it. + +The last of March, Captain Havers went up into the country, with 50 or +60 men, with their shot and furniture with them, and we travelled seven +or eight miles into the land: and, as we were marching along, we espied +a number of herds of cattle, of kine and bullocks, which were +wonderfully wild: we saw also great plenty of horses, mares, and colts, +which were very wild and unhandled: there is also great store of hares +and conies, and plenty of partridges, and other wild fowls. The country +is very fruitful, with fair fresh rivers all along, full of wild-fowl of +all sorts. Having travelled so far, that we could go no farther for the +monstrous high mountains, we rested ourselves at a very fair fresh +river, running in and along fair low meadows, at the foot of the +mountains, where every man drank of the river, and refreshed himself. +Having so done, we returned to our ships, the likeliest way we thought +their town would be; so we travelled all the day long, not seeing any +man, but we met with many wild dogs; yet there were two hundred horsemen +abroad that same day, by means of the Spaniard which they had taken from +us the day before, who had told them that our force was but small, and +that we were wonderfully weak; and, though they did espy us that day, +yet durst they not give the onset upon us; for we marched along in +array, and observed good order, whereby we seemed a greater number than +we were, until we came unto our ships that night again. + +The next day, being the first of April, 1587, our men went on shore to +fill water at a pit which was a quarter of a mile from the water-side; +and, being early hard at their business, were in no readiness: mean +while, there came pouring down from the hills almost two hundred +horsemen, and before our people could return to the rocks from the +watering-place, twelve of them were cut off, part killed, and part taken +prisoners; the rest were rescued by our soldiers who came from the rocks +to meet with them; for though only fifteen of us had any weapons on +shore, yet we made the enemy retire in the end, with the loss of +twenty-four of their men, after we had skirmished with them an hour. + +After the loss of these men, we rode at anchor, and watered in despite +of them, with good watch and ward, until the 5th of the said month. + +The 5th day, we departed out of this bay of Quintero; and off from the +bay there lieth a little island, about a league distant, whereon there +are great store of penguins, and other fowls, whereof we took to serve +our turns, and sailed away north, and north-by-west; for so lieth the +coast along this place. + +The 15th, we came thwart of a place, which is called Morro-Moreno, which +standeth in twenty-three degrees thirty minutes, and is an excellent +good harbour: and there is an island which maketh it an harbour; for a +ship may go in at either end of the island. Here we went with our +General on shore, to the number of thirty men; and as soon as we had +effected our landing, the Indians of the place came down from the rocks +to meet us, with fresh-water and wood on their backs. They are in great +awe of the Spaniards, and very simple people, living most savagely: for +they brought us to their dwellings, about two miles from the harbour, +where we saw their women and bedding, which is nothing but the skin of +some beast laid upon the ground; and over them, instead of houses, is +nothing but five or six sticks laid across, which stand upon forked +sticks stuck in the ground, and a few boughs laid over them. Their diet +is raw fish, which stinketh most vilely: and when any of them die, they +bury their bows and arrows with them, and all that they have; for we +opened one of their graves, and saw the order of them. Their canoes or +boats are very artificially made of two skins resembling bladders, and +are blown full at one end with quills: they have two of these bladders +blown full, which are sewed together, and made fast with a sinew of some +wild beast; which, when they are in the water, swell, so that they are +as tight as may be. They go to sea in these boats, and catch plenty of +fish, but they use it in a beastly manner. + +On the 23d, in the morning, we took a small bark, which came out of +Arica road, which we kept and called the George. The men forsook it, and +went hastily away with their boat. Our Admiral’s pinnace followed the +boat, and the Hugh Gallant’s boat took the bark: our Admiral’s pinnace +could not recover the boat before it got on shore, but went along into +the road of Arica, and laid aboard a great ship of one hundred tons, +riding in the road right before the town, but all the men and goods were +gone out of her, only the bare ship was left alone. They made three or +four very fair shots at the pinnace as she was coming in, but missed her +very narrowly with a minion-shot which they had in the fort. Whereupon +we came into the road with the Admiral and the Hugh Gallant: but the +Content, which was the Vice-admiral, was behind out of sight; by means +whereof, and for want of her boat to land men withal, we landed not: +otherwise, if we had been together, our General with the company would +resolutely have landed to take the town, whatsoever should have come of +it. The cause why the Content staid behind, was, that she had found, +about fourteen leagues to the southward of Arica, in a place where the +Spaniards had landed a whole ship’s lading of botigas of wine of +Castile, whereof the said Content took into her as many as she could +conveniently carry, and came after us into the road of Arica the same +day. By this time we perceived that the town had gathered all their +power together, and also conveyed all their treasure away, and buried +it, for they had heard of us. Now, because it was very populous with the +aid of one or two neighbouring places, our General saw there was no +landing without loss of many men; wherefore he gave over that +enterprise. While we rode at anchor they shot at us, and our ships shot +at them again for every shot two. Moreover, our pinnace went in close +almost to the shore, and fetched out another bark which rode there, in +despite of all their forts, though they shot still at the pinnace, which +they could never hit. After these things our General sent a boat on +shore with a flag of truce, to know if they would redeem their great +ship or no: but they would not; for they had received special +commandment from the Viceroy at Lima, not to buy any ship, or ransom any +man, upon pain of death. Our General did this, in hopes to have redeemed +some of our men, which were taken prisoners on shore by the horsemen at +Quintero, otherwise he would have made them no offer of parley. + +The 25th, riding still in the road, we spied a sail coming from the +southward, and our General sent out his pinnace to meet her, with all +our boats; but the town made such signs from the hill with fires and +tokens out of the watch-house, that before our pinnace could get to +them, they ran the bark on shore two miles to the southward of the town; +but they had little leisure to carry any thing with them, but all the +men escaped, among whom there were certain friars, for we saw them in +their friar’s weeds as they ran on shore. Many horsemen came from the +town to rescue them and to carry them away, otherwise we had landed and +taken or killed them: so we went on board the bark as she lay sunk, and +fetched out the pillage; but there was nothing in it of any value: and +we came on board our ships again the same night, and the next morning we +set the great ship on fire in the road, and sunk one of the barks, +carrying the other along with us, and so departed from thence and went +away north-west. + +The 27th, we took a small bark which came from St. Jago, near unto +Quintero, where we lost our men first. In this bark was one George, a +Greek, an intelligent pilot for all the coast of Chili. They were sent +to the city of Lima with letters of advice of us, and of the loss of our +men: there were also in the said bark one Fleming and three Spaniards, +and they were all sworn, and received the sacrament, before they came to +sea, by three or four friars, that, if we should chance to meet them +they should throw those letters overboard; which as we were giving them +chace with our pinnace, before we could reach them, they had accordingly +thrown away. Yet our General wrought so with them, that they did confess +their errand; but he was fain to cause them to be tormented with their +thumbs in a winch, and to repeat it several times with extreme pain: +also he made the old Fleming believe that he would hang him, and the +rope being about his neck, he was pulled up a little from the hatches; +and yet he would not confess, chusing rather to die than he would be +perjured. + +The 3d of May, we came into a bay where are three little towns, which +are called Paracca, Chincha, and Pisca; where some of us landed, and +took certain houses wherein was bread, wine, figs, and hens: but the sea +went so high that we could not land at the best of the towns, without +sinking of our boats, and great hazard of us all. This place standeth in +thirteen degrees and forty minutes to the southward of the Line. + +The 5th of May, we departed from this harbour, leaving the Content, our +Vice-admiral, at the island of Seals, by which means at that time we +lost her company. + +The 9th, we gave chace to a sail, but we could not reach it. + +The 10th day, the Hugh Gallant, in which bark I Francis Pretie was, lost +company of our Admiral. + +The 11th, we who were in the Hugh Gallant put into a bay which standeth +in twelve degrees forty minutes, in which bay we found a river of fresh +water about eight o’clock at night; and though we were but of small +force, no more than one bark and eighteen men in it, yet we went on +shore to fill water; where, having filled one boat’s lading, while our +crew were going on board, two or three of our company which were on +shore, as they were going a little from the watering-place with their +furniture about them, spied where there were four or five hundred bags +of meal on an heap covered with a few reeds; so that night we filled +water, and took as much meal as we thought good, which fell out well for +us who were then lost, and stood in need of victuals: and, by break of +day in the morning, we came on board, and there staid and rode until the +afternoon; in which time the town, seeing us ride there still, brought +down much cattle to the sea-side to have enticed us to come on shore; +but we saw their intent, and weighed anchor, and departed the 12th day. + +The 13th day at night, we put into a bay which standeth in nine degrees +twenty minutes, where we saw horsemen. And that night we landed, namely, +Mr. Bruer, captain; myself; Arthur Warford; John Way, preacher; John +Newman; Andrew Wight; William Gargefield; and Henry Hilliard; and we +eight only, having every man his harquebuss and his furniture about him, +marched three quarters of a mile along the sea side, where we found a +boat of five or six tons hauled up dry on the shore about a cable’s +length from the water; and with extreme labour we launched the bark. +When it was on float, Captain Bruer and I went in, while the rest were +fetching their things; but suddenly it was ready to sink, and the +Captain and I stood up to the knees, laving out the water with our +targets; but it sunk down faster than we were able to free it, insomuch +that in the end we had much ado to save ourselves from drowning. When we +were out, we stood in great fear that our own boat, wherein we came on +shore, was sunk; for we could no where see it. Howbeit, the Captain +commanded them to keep it off for fear of the great surge that went by +the shore, yet in the end we spied it, and went on board by two and two, +and were forced to wade up to the arm-pits sixty paces into the sea, +before we could get into the boat, by reason of the shoalness; and then +departed the fourteenth day in the morning. + +The 16th, we took with the Hugh Gallant, being but sixteen men of us in +it, a large ship which came from Guaianil, which was called the Lewis, +and was of the burthen of three hundred tons, having twenty-four men in +it, wherein was a pilot, one Gonsalvo de Ribas, whom we carried along +with us, and a negroe called Emmanuel. The ship was laden with nothing +but timber and victuals, wherefore we left her seven or eight leagues +from the land very leaky and ready to sink: we sunk her boat, and took +away her foresail and some provisions. + +The 17th of May, we met with our Admiral again, and all the rest of our +fleet: they had taken two ships, the one laden with sugar, melasses, +maize, skins, many packs of pintadoes, some marmalade, and a thousand +hens. The other ship was laden with wheat-meal, and boxes of marmalade. +One of these ships, which had the chief merchandize in it, was worth +twenty thousand pounds, if it had been in England, or in any other part +of Christendom, where we might have sold it. We filled all our ships +with as much as we could of these goods; the rest we burnt and the ships +also, and set the men and women that were not killed on shore. + + [Illustration: _Cavendish plunders & burns Paita._] + +The 20th day in the morning, we came into the road of Paita; and, being +at an anchor, our General landed with sixty or seventy men, skirmished +with some of the town, and drove them all to flight to the top of the +hill which is over the town; except a few slaves and some others who +were of the meaner sort, who were commanded by the Governor to stay +below in the town at a place which was building for a fort, having with +them a bloody ensign, being in number about an hundred men. Now, as we +were rowing between the ships and the shore, our gunner shot off a great +piece out of one of the barks, and the shot fell among them, and made +them to fly from the fort, as fast as they could run; but, having got up +upon the hill, they in their turn, shot among us with their small-shot. +After we were landed, and had taken the town, we ran upon them and +chaced them so fiercely for the space of an hour, that we drove them in +the end away by force; and, being got up the hills, we found where they +had hid what they had brought out of the town. We also found the +quantity of twenty-five pounds weight of silver in pieces of eight, and +abundance of houshold stuff, and storehouses full of all kinds of wares. +But our General would not suffer the men to carry much cloth or apparel +away, because they should not cloy themselves with burdens; for he knew +not whether our enemies were provided with fire-arms according to the +number of their men, for they were five men to one of us, and we had an +English mile and an half to our ships. Being come down in safety to the +town, which was very well built, and kept very clean in every street, +with a town-house or guildhall in the midst of it, and had to the number +of two or three hundred houses at least in it; we set it on fire, and +burnt it to the ground, and goods to the value of five or six thousand +pounds. There was also a bark riding at anchor in the road, which we set +on fire and departed, directing our course to the island of Puna. + +The 25th of May, we arrived at the island of Puna, where is a very good +harbour. There we found a great ship of 250 tons riding at anchor with +all her furniture, which was ready to be hauled on ground, for there is +a special good place for that purpose. We sunk it and went on shore, +where the Lord of the island dwelt, who had a sumptuous dwelling, which +was by the water-side, exceedingly well contrived, with many very +singular good rooms and chambers in it, and out of every chamber was +framed a gallery, with a stately prospect towards the sea on one side, +and into the island on the other side, with a magnificent hall below, +and a very great storehouse at one end of the hall, which was filled +with botigas of pitch and bast to make cables with; for the most part of +the cables in the South Sea are made upon that island. This great +Casique obliged all the Indians on the island to work and trudge for +him: he is an Indian born, but is married to a beautiful woman who is a +Spaniard, by reason of his pleasant habitation and his great wealth. + +This Spanish woman, his wife, is honoured as a Queen in the island, and +never walketh upon the ground on foot, but accounteth it too base a +thing for her; but when her pleasure is to take the air, or to go +abroad, she is always carried in a sedan upon four mens shoulders, with +a veil or canopy over her, to shade her from the sun or the wind, having +her gentlewoman still attending about her, with a great troop of the +best men in the island with her. But both she and the lord of the +island, with all the Indians in the town, were nearly fled out of the +island before we get could get to an anchor, by reason we were becalmed +before we could get in, and were gone over unto the main land, having +carried with them 100,000 crowns, which we knew by a Captain of the +island, an Indian, whom we had taken at sea as we were coming into the +road, being in a balsa or a canoe for a spy to see what we were. + +The 27th, our General himself, with certain shot and some targetliers, +went over to the main unto the place where this Indian Captain told us +the Casique, who was Lord of all the island, was gone unto, and had +carried all his treasure with him: but, at our coming to the place where +we went to land, we found newly arrived there four or five great balsas +laden with plantains, bags of meal, and many other kinds of victuals. +Our General marvelled what they were, and what they meant, asking the +Indian guide, and commanding him to speak the truth upon his life. Being +then bound fast, he answered, being very much abashed, as well as our +company were, that he neither knew from whence they should come, nor who +they should be, for never a man was in either of the balsas; yet he had +told our General before, that it was an easy matter to take the said +Casique and all his treasure; and that, there were but three or four +houses standing in a desart place, and no resistance; and that if he +found it not so, he might hang him. Again being demanded to speak upon +his life what he thought these balsas should be? he answered, that he +could not say what they were, nor from whence they should come, except +it was to carry sixty soldiers, who he did hear were to go to a place +called Guaiaquil, which was about six leagues from the said island, +where two or three of the King’s ships were on the stocks in building, +and where there were continually an hundred soldiers in garrison, who +had heard of us, and had sent for sixty more, for fear of burning of the +ships and town. Our General, not any whit discouraged, either at the +sight of the balsas unlooked for, or at hearing of the sixty soldiers +not until then spoken of, bravely animating his company to the exploit, +went presently forward, being in the night in a most desart path through +the woods, until he came to the place; where, as it seemed, they had +kept watch either at the water-side, or at the houses, or at both, and +were newly gone out of the houses, having so short warning that they +left the meat both boiling and roasting at the fire, and were fled with +their treasure with them, or else buried it where it could not be found. +Our company took hens, and such things as we thought good, and came +away. + +The 29th, our General went in the ship’s boat unto a little island +adjoining, whither the Casique, who was Lord of Rena, had caused all the +hangings of his chambers, which were Cordovan leather, all gilded over, +and painted very fair and rich, with all his houshold stuff, and all the +ships tackling which were riding in the road at our coming in, with +great store of nails, spikes of iron, and very many other things, to be +conveyed; all which we found, and brought away what our General thought +requisite for the ships. + +This island is very pleasant for all the delights of life, and fruitful; +but there are no mines of gold or silver in it. There are, at least, 200 +houses in the town about the Casique’s palace, and as many in one or two +towns more upon the island, which is almost as big as the Isle of Wight, +in England. There is planted, on the one side of the Casique’s house, a +fair garden with all herbs growing in it, and at the lower end a well of +fresh water, and round about it are trees set, whereon bombazine cotton +groweth after this manner: The tops of the trees grow full of cods, out +of which the cotton groweth, and in the cotton is a seed of the bigness +of a pea, and in every cod there are seven or eight of these seeds; and +if the cotton be not gathered when it is ripe, then these seeds fall +from it and spring again. + +There are also in this garden fig-trees, which bear continually; also +pompions, melons, cucumbers, raddishes, rosemary, and thyme, with many +other herbs and roots. At the other end of the house there is also +another orchard, where grow oranges, sweet and sour lemons, +pomegranates, and limes, with divers other fruits. There is very good +pasture-ground in this island and there are many horses, oxen, bullocks, +sheep very fat and fair, a great many goats, which are very tame, and +are used continually to be milked. They have also abundance of pigeons, +turkies, and ducks of prodigious bigness. + +There was also a very large and great church near to the Casique’s +house, whither he caused all the Indians in the island to come and hear +mass, for he himself was made a christian when married to the Spanish +woman before spoken of; and upon his conversion he caused the rest of +his subjects to be christened. In this church was an high altar, with a +crucifix, and five bells hanging in one end thereof. We burnt the +church, and brought the bells away. + +By this time we had hauled on ground our Admiral, and made her clean, +burnt her keel, pitched and tarred her, and had hauled her on float +again; and, in the mean time, kept watch in the great house both night +and day. + +The 2d of June, in the morning, by day-break, every one of the watch +having gone abroad to seek provisions, some one way and some another, +some for hens, some for sheep, some for goats; upon a sudden there came +down upon us an hundred soldiers, with musquets, and an ensign, which +were landed on the other side of the island that night, and all the +Indians of the island along with them, everyone with weapons, and their +baggage after them; which happened by means of a negroe, whose name was +Emmanuel, who fled from us at our first landing there. Thus, being taken +at a disadvantage, we had the worst, for our company did not exceed +sixteen or twenty, whereof they had slain one or two before they were +come to the houses; yet we skirmished with them an hour and a half. At +last, being greatly over-charged with multitudes, we were driven down +from the hill to the water side, and there we kept them in play a while, +until in the end our halberdier, who had kept the way of the hill, and +had slain a couple of them as he breathed himself, had an honourable +death, for a shot struck him to the heart; who, feeling himself mortally +wounded, cried to God for mercy, and fell down dead. But, soon after, +the enemy was driven back from the bank side to the green; and, in the +end, our boat came, and carried as many of our men as could go in her +without hazard of sinking; but one of our men was shot through the head +with his own piece, being a snap-hand, as he was getting into the boat. +Four of us were left behind, which the boat could not carry, of whom +myself was one, who had our shot ready, and retired into a cliff until +the boat came again, which was presently after they had carried the rest +on board. There were forty-six of the enemy slain by us, whereof they +dragged some into bushes, and some into old houses, which we found +afterwards. We lost only 12 of our men. + +The same day we went on shore again with 70 men, and had a fresh +skirmish with the enemy, and made them retire. This done, we set fire to +the town, and burnt it to the ground; and, shortly after, made havock of +their fields, orchards, and gardens, and burnt four great ships more, +which were building on the stocks. + +The 3d of June, the Content, which was our Vice-Admiral, was hauled on +ground to grave at the same place, in spite of the Spaniards; and also +our pinnace was new trimmed. + +The 5th, we departed out of the road of Puna, where we remained eleven +days, and turned up to a place which is called Rio Dolce, where we +watered; at which place also we sunk our Rear-Admiral, called the Hugh +Gallant, for want of men, being a bark of 40 tons. + +The 10th, we set the Indians on shore, which we had taken before as we +were coming into the road of Puna. + +The 11th, we departed from Rio Dolce. + +The 12th, we doubled the Equinoctial Line, and continued our course +northwards all that month. + +The 1st of July, we had sight of the coast of Nueva Espanna, being four +leagues distant from land, in the latitude of 10 degrees to the +northward of the Line. + +The 9th, we took a new ship of 120 tons burthen, wherein was one Michael +Sancius, whom our General took to serve his turn to water along the +coast; for he was one of the best coasters in the South Sea. This +Michael Sancius was a provincial born in Marseilles, and was the first +man that told us news of the great ship called the Santa Anna, which we +afterwards took coming from the Philippines. + +There were six men more in this new ship. We took her sails, ropes, and +fire-wood, to serve our turns, set her on fire, and kept the men. + +The 10th, we took another bark, which was going with advice of us and +our ships all along the coast, as Michael Sancius told us; but all +company that were in the bark were fled on shore. Neither of these ships +had any goods in them; for they came both from Sonsonate, in the +province of Guatimala; the new ship, for fear we should have taken her +in the road; and the bark, to carry news along the coast, which bark we +also set on fire. + +The 26th, we came to anchor in ten fathoms, in the river of Copalita, +where we intended to water; and that same night we departed with +thirty-two men in the pinnace, and rowed to Aguatulco, which is but two +leagues from the aforesaid river, and standeth in 15 deg. 40 min. to the +northward of the Equinoctial Line. + +The 27th day, in the morning, by break of day, we came into the road of +Aguatulco, where we found a bark of 50 tons, which was come from +Sonsonate, laden with cocoas and anil, which they had there landed; and +the men were all fled on shore. We landed there, and burnt the town, +with the church and custom-house, which was very fair and large, in +which house were 600 bags of anil to dye cloth, every bag whereof was +worth 40 crowns; and 400 bags of cocoas, every bag whereof is worth 10 +crowns. These cocoas go among them for meat and money; for 150 of them +are in value one rial of plate in ready payment. They are very like an +almond, but are not so pleasant in taste. They eat them, and make drink +of them: this the owner of the ship told us. I found in this town, +before we burnt it, a flasket full of boxes of balm. After we had +spoiled and burned the town, wherein there were some hundred houses, the +owner of the ship came down out of the hills with a flag of truce unto +us, who before with all the rest of the townsmen run away, and at length +came on board our pinnace upon Captain Havers’ word of safe return. We +carried him to the river of Copalita, where our ships rode. When we came +to our General, he caused him to be set on shore in safety the same +night, because he came upon the Captain’s word. + +The 28th, we set sail from Copalita, because the sea was so great that +we could not fill water, and ran the same night into the road of +Aguatulco. + +The 29th, our General landed, and took with him thirty men two miles +into the woods, were we took a Mestizo, whose name was Michael de +Truxillo, who was customer of that town, and we found with him two +chambers full of his stuff; we brought him and his stuff on board: and +whereas I say he was a Mestizo, it is to be understood, that a Mestizo +is one who hath a Spaniard to his father, and an Indian to his mother. + +The 2d day of August, having watered, and examined the said Mestizo and +set him on shore again, we departed from the port of Aguatulco the same +night; which standeth, as I said before, in 15 deg. and 40 min. to the +northward of the Line. Here we overslipped the haven of Acapulco, from +whence the ships are fitted out for the Philippines. + +The 24th, our General with thirty of us went with the pinnace to an +haven called Puerto de Natividad, where we had intelligence by Michael +Sancius that there should be a pinnace; but, before we could get +thither, the said pinnace was gone to fish for pearls twelve leagues +farther, as we were informed by certain Indians whom we found there. We +took a mullatto in this place in his bed, who was sent with letters of +advice concerning us along the coast of Nueva Galicia, whose horse we +killed. We took his letters, left him behind, set fire to the houses, +and burnt two new ships of 200 tons each which were building there on +the stocks, and came on board of our ships again. + +The 26th, we came into the bay of St. Jago, where we watered at a fresh +river, along which river many plantains were growing. Here is abundance +of fresh fish; here also some of our company dragged for pearls, and +caught some quantity. + +The 2d of September, we departed from St. Jago, at four o’clock in the +evening. The bay of St. Jago standeth in nineteen degrees and eighteen +minutes to the northward of the Line. + +The 3d, we arrived in a little bay a league to the westward of Port de +Natividad, called Malacca, which is a very good place to ride in; and +this day, about twelve o’clock, our General landed with thirty men, and +went up to a town of Indians which was two leagues from the road, which +town is called Acatlan: there were in it about 20 or 30 houses, and a +church which we defaced, and came on board the same night. All the +people fled out of the town at the sight of us. + +The 4th, we departed from the road of Malacca, and sailed along the +coast. The 8th we came to the road of Chacalla, in which bay there are +two little houses by the water-side. This bay is 18 leagues from the +Cape de los Corientes. + +The 9th, in the morning, our General sent up Captain Havers with forty +men of us before day, and, Michael Sancius being our guide, we went unto +a place about two leagues up into the country, in a most obscure desart +path, through the woods and wilderness, and in the end we came to a +place where we took three housholders with their wives and children, and +some Indians, one carpenter (who was a Spaniard), and a Portuguese. We +bound them all, and made them come to the sea-side with us: our General +made their wives fetch us plantains, lemons, oranges, pine-apples, and +other fruits, whereof they had abundance, and so let their husbands +depart, except Sembrano, the Spanish carpenter, and Diego, the +Portuguese, and the tenth day we departed from the road. + +The 12th, we arrived at a little island called the isle of St. Andrew, +on which there is great store of fowl and wood; where we dried and +salted as many of the fowls as we thought good. We also killed there +abundance of seals and oguanos, which are a kind of serpents with four +feet, and a long sharp tail, strange to them who have not seen them, but +they are very good meat. We rode here until the 17th, at which time we +departed. + +The 24th, we arrived in the road of Massatlan, in twenty-three degrees +thirty minutes, just under the Tropic of Cancer. It is a very great +river within, but is barred at the mouth; and upon the north side of the +bar without is good fresh water, but there is much difficulty in filling +it, because at low water it is shoal half a mile off the shore. There is +great store of fresh fish in this bay, and good fruits up in the +country, whereof we had some, though not without danger. + +The 27th, we departed from the road of Massatlan, and ran to an island +which is a league to the northward of the said Massatlan, where we +trimmed our ships, and new built our pinnace. There is a little island a +quarter of a league from it, on which are seals; where a Spanish +prisoner, whose name was Domingo, being sent to wash shirts, with one of +our men to keep him, made his escape and swam to the main, which was an +English mile distant; at which place we had seen thirty or forty +Spaniards and Indians, who were horsemen and kept watch there, and came +from a town called Chiametla, which was eleven leagues up into the +country, as Michael Sancius told us. We found upon the island where we +trimmed our pinnace, fresh water, by digging two or three feet deep into +the sand, where no water nor sign of water was before to be perceived; +otherwise we must have gone back 20 or 30 leagues to water, which might +have occasioned our missing the prey we had long waited for: but one +Flores, a Spaniard, who was also a prisoner with us, made a motion to +dig in the sands. Now, our General, having had experience before of the +like, commanded to put his motion in practice, and, digging three feet +deep, we found very good and fresh water: so we watered our ships, and +might have filled a thousand tons more if we had pleased. + +We staid in this island until the ninth day of October, and then +departed at night for the Cape of St. Lucar, which is on the west side +of the point of California. + +The 14th, we fell in with the Cape of St. Lucar, which cape is very like +the Needles at the isle of Wight, and within the said cape is a great +bay, called by the Spaniards Aguada Segura, into which bay falleth a +fair fresh river, about which many Indians use to keep. We watered in +the river, and lay off and on with the said cape of St. Lucar, until the +4th of November, and had the winds hanging still westerly. + +The 4th of November, beating up and down upon the head-land of +California, in 23 degrees 40 minutes to the northward, between seven and +eight o’clock in the morning, one of the company of our Admiral, who was +the trumpeter of the ship, going up unto the top, espied a sail bearing +in from the sea with the cape; whereupon he cried, with no small joy to +himself and all the company, A sail! a sail! With which chearful word, +the Master of the ship, and divers others of the company, went also up +to the main-top, who, perceiving his speech to be very true, gave +information unto our General of this happy news, who was no less glad +than the cause required: whereupon he gave in charge presently unto the +whole company, to put all things in readiness; which being performed, he +gave them chace for three or four hours, standing with our best +advantage, and working for the wind. In the afternoon we got up to them, +giving them a broadside with our great ordnance, and a volley of small +shot, and presently laid the ship aboard, whereof the King of Spain was +owner, which was Admiral of the South Sea, called St. Anna, and thought +to be seven hundred tons in burthen. Now, as we were ready on the ship’s +side to enter her, there not being above fifty or sixty men at most in +our ship, we perceived that the Captain of the Santa Anna had made +sights fore and aft, and hid their sails close on their poop, their +midship, with their forecastle, and not one man to be seen, they +standing so close under their sights, with lances, javelins, rapiers, +targets, and an innumerable quantity of large stones, which they threw +overboard upon our heads, and into our ships so fast, and being so many +of them, that they put us off the ship again, with the loss of two of +our men, who were slain, and four or five wounded. But for all this, we +new trimmed our sails, and fitted every man his furniture, and gave them +a fresh encounter with our great ordnance, and also with our small shot, +raking them through and through, to the killing and wounding of many of +their men. Their Captain, still like a valiant man, with his company, +stood very stoutly unto his close sights, not yielding as yet. Our +General encouraging his men afresh, with the whole noise of trumpets, +gave them the other encounter with our great ordnance, and all our small +shot, to the great discouragement of our enemies, raking them through in +divers places, killing and wounding many of their men. They being thus +discouraged and spoiled, and their ship being in hazard of sinking, by +reason of the great shot which were made, whereof some were under water, +after five or six hours fight, set out a flag of truce, and parlied for +mercy, desiring our General to save their lives, and to take their +goods, and that they would presently yield. Our General promised them +mercy, and willed them to strike their sails, and to hoist out their +boat, and to come on board: which news they were full glad to hear, and +presently struck their sails, hoisted out their boat, and one of their +chief merchants came on board unto our General, and, falling down upon +his knees, offered to have kissed our General’s feet, and craved mercy. +Our General pardoned both him and the rest, upon promise of their true +dealing with him and his company, concerning such riches as were in the +ship; and sent for their Captain and pilot, who, at their coming, used +the like duty and reverence as the former did. Our General promised +their lives, and good usage. The said Captain and pilot presently +certified the General what goods they had on board, viz. 122,000 pezoes +of gold; and the rest of the riches that the ship was laden with, were +silks, sattins, damasks, with musk, and divers other merchandize, and +great plenty of all manner of provisions, with the choice of many +conserves, and several sorts of very good wines. These things being made +known to the General by the aforesaid Captain and pilot, they were +commanded to stay on board the Desire; and on the 6th day of November +following we went into an harbour, which is called by the Spaniards +Aguada Segura, or Puerto Seguro. + +Here the whole company of Spaniards, both men and women, to the number +of 190 persons, were set on shore; where they had a fair river of fresh +water, with great plenty of fresh fish, fowl, and wood, and also many +hares and conies upon the main land. Our General also gave them plenty +of provisions, garvances, peason, and some wine. Also they had all the +sails of their ship to make them tents on shore, with licence to take +such store of planks as should be sufficient to make them a bark. Then +we fell to heaving in of our goods, sharing of the treasure, and +allotting to every man his portion; in division whereof, the 8th of this +month, many of the company fell into a mutiny against our General, +especially those who were in the Content, which were nevertheless +pacified for the time. + +On the 17th day of November, which is the day of the happy coronation of +her Majesty, our General commanded all his ordnance to be shot off, with +the small shot, both in his own ship, and in the Content, which was our +Vice-Admiral. This being done, the same night we had many fire-works, +and more ordnance discharged, to the great admiration of all the +Spaniards who were there, for the most of them had never seen the like +before. + +This ended, our General discharged the Captain, and gave him a royal +reward, with provision for his own and company’s defence against the +Indians, both of swords, targets, pieces, shot, and powder, to his great +contentment. But before his departure, he took out of this great ship +two young lads born in Japan, who could both read and write their own +language; the eldest, being about twenty years old, was named +Christopher; the other was called Cosmus, about seventeen years of age; +both of very good capacity. He took also with him, out of their ship, +three boys born in the isles of Manilla; the one about fifteen, the +other about thirteen, the youngest about nine years of age: the name of +the eldest was Alphonso, the second Anthony de Dasi, the third remaineth +with the Right Honourable the Countess of Essex. He also took from them +one Nicholas Roderigo, a Portuguese, who had not only been in Canton, +and other parts of China, but had also been in the islands of Japan, +being a country most rich in silver mines, and had also been in the +Philippines. He took also from them a Spaniard, whose name was Thomas de +Ersola, who was a very good pilot from Acapulco, and the coast of Nueva +Espanna, unto the islands of Ladrones, where the Spaniards put in to +water, sailing between Acapulco and the Philippines; in which isles of +Ladrones they found fresh-water plantains, and potatoe-roots: howbeit, +the people are very rude, and heathens. + +The 19th day of November aforesaid, about three o’clock in the +afternoon, our General caused the King’s ship to be set on fire, which, +having to the quantity of 500 tons of goods in her, we saw burnt unto +the water, and then gave them a piece of ordnance, and set sail joyfully +homewards towards England, with a fair wind, which by this time was come +about to east-north-east; and, night growing near, we left the Content +a-stern of us, which was not as yet come out of the road: and here, +thinking she would have overtaken us, we lost her company, and never saw +her after. + +We were sailing from this haven of Aguada Segura, in California, unto +the isles of Ladrones, the rest of November, and all December, and so +forth until the 3d of January, 1588, with a fair wind, for the space of +forty-five days; and we esteemed it to be between seventeen and eighteen +hundred leagues. + +The 3d of January, by six o’clock in the morning, we had sight of one of +the islands of Ladrones, called the island of Guarsa, standing in 13 +deg. 40 min. towards the north; and, sailing with a gentle gale before +the wind, by one or two o’clock in the afternoon we were come within two +leagues of the island, where we met with sixty or seventy sail of +canoes, full of savages, who came off to sea unto us, and brought with +them in their canoes, plantains, cocoas, potatoe-roots, and fresh fish, +which they had caught at sea, and held them up unto us for to truck, or +exchange with us; which, when we perceived, we made fast little pieces +of old iron upon small cords and fishing lines, and so veered the iron +into their canoes; and they caught hold of them, and took off the iron, +and in exchange of it they would make fast unto the line, either a +potatoe-root, or a bundle of plantains, which we hauled in: and thus our +company exchanged with them, until they had satisfied themselves with as +much as did content them; yet we could not be rid of them; for, +afterwards, they were so thick about the ship, that it stemmed and broke +one or two of their canoes; but the men saved themselves, being in every +canoe four, six, or eight persons, all naked, and excellent swimmers and +divers. They are of a tawny colour, marvellously fat, and ordinarily +bigger of stature than the most of our men in England, wearing their +hair very long, yet some of them have it made up and tied with a knot on +the crown, and some with two knots, much like unto their images, which +we saw them have carved in wood, and standing in the head of their +boats, like unto the images of the devil. Their canoes were as +artificially made as any that ever we had seen, considering they were +made and contrived without any edged tool: they are not above half a +fathom in breadth, and in length some seven or eight fathoms, and their +heads and sterns are both alike: they are made out with rafts of canes +and reeds on the starboard-side, with mast and sail: their sail is made +of mats of sedges square or triangle ways; and they sail as well right +against the wind as before it. These savages followed us so long that we +could not be rid of them until in the end our General commanded our +harquebusses to be made ready, and he himself fired one of them, and the +rest shot at them; but they were so nimble, that we could not discern +whether they were killed or not, because they could fall backward into +the sea and prevent us by diving. + +The 14th, by break of day, we fell in with an head-land of the +Philippines, which is called Cabo del Spirito Santo, which is of very +great bigness and length; high land in the midst of it, and very low +land, as the cape lieth east and west, trending far into the sea to the +westward. This cape or island is distant from the isle of Guana 310 +leagues. We were in sailing of this course eleven days, with scant winds +and foul weather, bearing no sail two or three nights. This island +standeth in thirteen degrees, and is inhabited for the most part by +heathens, and very woody through the whole island. It is short of the +chiefest island of the Philippines, called Manilla, about sixty leagues. +Manilla is well planted, and inhabited by Spaniards to the number of six +or seven hundred persons, who dwell in a town unwalled, which hath three +or four small block-houses, part made of wood and part of stone, being +indeed of no great strength. They have one or two small gallies +belonging to the town. It is a very rich place in gold and many other +commodities; and they have yearly traffic from Acapulco, in Nueva +Espanna, and also twenty or thirty ships from China, and from the +Sanguelos, which bringeth them many sorts of merchandize. The merchants +of China and the Sanguelos are part Moors and part heathens; they bring +great quantities of gold with them, which they traffic and exchange for +silver, and give weight for weight. These Sanguelos are men of great +genius for inventing and making all manner of things, especially in all +handicrafts and sciences; and every one is so expert, perfect, and +skilful in his faculty, that few or no Christians are able to go beyond +them in that which they take in hand. For drawing and embroidering upon +sattin, silk, or lawn, either beast, fowl, fish, or worm, for liveliness +and perfectness both in silk, silver, gold, and pearl, they excel. + +The 14th, at night, we entered the straits between the island of Lucon +and the island of Camlaia. + +The 15th day, we fell in with an island called Capul, and had, betwixt +that and another island, a very narrow passage, occasioned by a ledge of +rocks, lying off the point of the island of Capul, and no danger, but +water enough a good way off. Within the point there is a fine bay, and a +very good harbour in four fathoms water, within a cable’s length of the +shore. Our ship was no sooner come to an anchor, than presently there +came a canoe rowing on board us, in which was one of the chief Casiques +of the island, whereof there are seven, who, supposing that we were +Spaniards, brought us potatoe roots, which they call camotas, and green +cocoas, in exchange for which we gave his company linnen to the quantity +of a yard for four cocoas, and as much linnen for a basket of potatoe +roots, of a quart in quantity, which roots are very good eating, and +very sweet either roasted or boiled. + +This Casique’s skin was carved and cut with various coloured strakes and +devices all over his body; we kept him still on board, and caused him to +send those men who brought him on board back to the island, to invite +the rest of the principal men to come on board: who were no sooner gone +on shore, than presently the people of the island came down with their +cocoas and potatoe roots, and the rest of the Casiques likewise came on +board, and brought with them hens and hogs. They used the same order +with us which they do with the Spaniards; for they took for every hog, +which they call balboye, eight rials of plate, and for every hen or cock +one rial of plate. Thus we rode at anchor all that day, doing nothing +but buying roots, cocoas, hens, hogs, and such things as they brought, +refreshing ourselves very much. + +The same day, at night, Nicholas Roderigo, the Portuguese whom we had +taken out of the great Santa Anna, at the Cape of California, desired to +speak with our General in secret; which, when our General understood, he +sent for him, and asked him what he had to say to him. The Portuguese +made him answer, That, although he had offended his worship heretofore, +yet now he had vowed his faith and true service to him; and, in respect +whereof, he neither could nor would conceal such treason as was plotting +against him and his company; which was this, that the Spaniard who was +taken out of the great Santa Anna for a pilot, whose name was Thomas de +Ersola, had written a letter secretly, sealed it, and locked it up in +his chest, meaning to convey it, by the inhabitants of this island, to +Manilla; the contents whereof were, that there had been two English +ships along the coast of Chili, Peru, Nueva Espanna, and Nueva Galicia, +and that they had taken many ships and merchandize in them, and burnt +divers towns, and spoiled all that ever they could come unto; and that +they had taken the king’s ship which came from Manilla, and all his +treasure, and all the merchandize that was therein, and had set all the +people on shore, taking himself away by force; therefore he willed them +that they should make strong their bulwarks, with their two galleys, and +all such provision as they could possibly make. He further signified, +that we were riding at an island called Capul, which was at the end of +the island of Manilla; being but one ship with small force in it; and +that the other ship, as he supposed, was gone for the north-west +passage, standing in fifty-five degrees; and that, if they could use any +means to surprize us, being there at anchor, they should dispatch it, +for our force was but small, and our men but weak; and that the place +where we rode was but fifty leagues from them: otherwise, if they let us +escape, within a few years they must make account to have their town +besieged and sacked by an army of English. This information being given, +our General called for him, and charged him with these things, which, at +the first, he utterly denied; but, in the end, the matter being made +manifest and known of certainty by special trial and proofs, the next +morning, our General gave orders that he should be hanged, which was +accordingly performed the 16th of January. + +We rode for the space of nine days about this island of Capul, where we +had divers kinds of fresh victuals, with excellent fresh water in every +bay, and great plenty of wood. The people of this island go almost +naked, and are of a tawny colour. The men wear only a girdle about their +waists, of a kind of linnen of their own weaving, which is made of +plantain leaves, and an apron, which, coming from their back and +covering their nakedness, is made fast to their girdles at their navels. + +These people use a strange kind of order among them, which is this: +every man and man-child among them hath a little peg-nail thrust through +the head of his privy parts, being split in the lower end, and rivetted, +and on the head of the nail is as it were a crown; which they take out +and in as they have occasion: and for the truth thereof we ourselves +have taken one of these nails from a son of one of their kings, who was +of the age of ten years. + +On the 23d of January, our General, Mr. Thomas Cavendish, caused all the +chiefs of this island and of an hundred islands more, whom he had made +to pay tribute to him, which tribute was in hogs, hens, potatoes and +cocoas, to appear before him, and made himself and his company known +unto them, that they were Englishmen, and enemies to the Spaniards; and +thereupon spread his ensign, sounded his trumpets, and beat his drums; +which they much wondered at. To conclude, they promised both themselves +and all the islands thereabout, to aid him whensoever he should come +again to overcome the Spaniards. Also our General gave them, in token +that we were enemies to the Spaniards, money back again for all their +tribute which they had paid, which they took very friendly, and rowed +about our ship to give us pleasure. At last our General ordered a sacre +to be shot off, whereat they wondered, and, with great contentment, took +their leave of us. + +The next day, being the 26th of January, we set sail, about six o’clock +in the morning, and ran along the coast of the island of Manilla, +shaping our course north-west, between Manilla and the isle of Masbat. + +The 28th in the morning, about seven o’clock, riding at an anchor +between two islands, we spied a frigate under her courses, coming out +between two other islands, which, as we imagined, came from Manilla, +sailing close by the shore along the main island of Panama. We chaced +this frigate along the shore, and gained fast upon her, until in the end +we came so near that she stood in for the shore, close by a wind, and +being becalmed, banked up with her oars; whereupon we came to an anchor +with our ship a league and a half from the place where the frigate rowed +in, and manned our boat with half a dozen shot, and as many men with +swords, who did row the boat. Thus we made after the frigate, which had +run into a river where we could not reach her; but as we rowed along the +shore, our boat came into very shallow water, where many marks were set +up in divers places in the sea, from whence two or three canoes came +forth, whereof one made somewhat near unto us with three or four Indians +in it. We called unto them, but they would not come nearer unto us, but +rowed from us, whom we durst not follow too far, for fear of bringing +ourselves too much to the leeward of our ship. Here, as we looked about +us, we spied another balsa or canoe of a great bigness, which they who +were in her did set along, as we usually set a barge, with long staves +or poles, which was builded up with great canes, and below near the +water made to row with oars, wherein were about five or six Indians and +one Spaniard. Now, as we were come almost at the balsa, we ran aground +with our boat, but one or two of our men leapt overboard and freed it +again presently, and keeping thwart her head, we laid her aboard, and +took into us the Spaniard, but the Indians leaped into the sea, and +dived and rose again far off from us. Presently, upon the taking of this +canoe, there appeared upon the sands a band of soldiers, marching with +an ensign having a red cross like the flag of England, who were about +fifty or sixty Spaniards, lately come from Manilla to that town, which +is called Reguan, in a bark to fetch a new ship of the king’s, which was +building in a river within the bay, and staid there only for certain +irons to serve for the rudder of the said ship, which they looked for +every day. + +This band of men shot at us from the shore with their musquets, but hit +none of us, and we shot at them again. They also manned a frigate, and +sent it out after our boat to have taken us, but we with our oars went +from them; and whether they perceived they could not overtake us, but +that they must come within danger of the ordnance of our ship, they +stood in with the shore again, and landed their men; and presently sent +their frigate about the point, but whither we knew not: so we came on +board with this one Spaniard, who was neither soldier nor sailor, but +one who was come among the rest from Manilla, and had been in the +hospital there a long time before, and was a very simple fellow, and +such a one as could answer to very little that was enquired of him +concerning the state of the country. Here we rode at anchor all that +night, and perceived that the Spaniards had dispersed their band into +two or three parties, and kept great watch in several places with fires +and shooting-off of their pieces. + +This island hath much plain ground in it in many places, and many fair +and straight trees grow upon it, fit to make excellent masts for all +sorts of ships. There are also mines of very fine gold in it, which are +in the custody of the Indians. And, to the southward of this place, +there is another very great island, which is not subdued by the +Spaniards, nor any other nation. The people who inhabit it are all +negroes; and the island is called the Island of Negroes. It is almost as +big as England, standing in nine degrees. The most part of it seemeth to +be very low land, and, by all likelihood, is very fruitful. + +The 29th day of January, about six o’clock in the morning, we set sail, +sending our boat before, until it was two o’clock in the afternoon, +passing all this time as it were through a strait, betwixt the said two +islands of Panama and the island of Negroes; and, about 16 leagues off, +we espied a fair opening, trending south-west and by-south; at which +time our boat came on board, and our General sent commendations to the +Spanish Captain, whom we came from the evening before, by the Spaniard +we had taken, and desired him to provide good store of gold, for he +intended to see him with his company at Manilla within a few years, and +that he did but want a bigger boat to have landed his men, or else he +would have seen him then; and so caused him to be set on shore. + +The 8th day of February, by eight o’clock in the morning, we espied an +island near Gilolo, called Batochina, which standeth in one degree from +the Equinoctial Line, northward. + +The 14th day of February, we fell in with eleven or twelve very small +islands, lying very low and flat, full of trees; and passed by some +islands which are sunk, and have the dry sands lying in the main sea. +These islands, near the Moluccas, stand in three degrees ten minutes to +the southward of the Line. + +On the 17th day, one John Gameford, a cooper, died, who had been sick of +an old disease a long time. + +The 20th day, we fell in with certain other islands, which had many +small islands among them, standing four degrees to the southward of the +Line. + +On the 21st day of February, being Ash-Wednesday, Captain Havers died, +of a most violent and pestilent ague, which held him furiously for seven +or eight days, to the no small grief of our General, and of all the rest +of the company, who caused two falcons and one sacre to be shot off, +with all the small shot in the ship; who, after he was shrouded in a +sheet, was thrown over-board, with great lamentation of us all. +Moreover, presently after his death, myself, with divers others in the +ship, fell very sick, and so continued in very great pain for the space +of three weeks, or a month, by reason of the extreme heat and +intemperateness of the climate. + +The 1st day of March, having passed through the straits of Java Minor +and Java Major, we came to an anchor, under the south-west parts of Java +Major; where we espied certain of the inhabitants, who were fishing by +the sea side in a bay which was under the island. Then our General +taking into the ship-boat certain of his company, and a negroe who could +speak the Morisco tongue, whom he had taken out of the Santa Anna, made +towards those fishers; who, having espied our boat, ran on shore into +the woods, for fear of our men. But our General caused his negroe to +call unto them; who had no sooner heard him call, than presently one of +them came to the shore side, and made answer. Our General, by the +negroe, enquired of him for fresh water; which they found; and caused +the fisher to go to the King, and to acquaint him of a ship that was +come to have traffic for victuals, and for diamonds, pearls, or any +other rich jewels that he had for which, he should have either gold, or +other merchandize in exchange. The fisher answered, that we should have +all manner of victuals that we would request. Thus our boat came on +board again. Within a while after, we went about to furnish our ship +thoroughly with wood and water. + +About the 8th of March, two or three canoes came from the town unto us, +with eggs, hens, fresh fish, oranges, and limes, and brought word we +should have had victuals more plentifully, but that they were so far to +be brought to us where we rode. Which when our General heard, he weighed +anchor, and stood in nearer for the town; and, as we were under sail, we +met with one of the King’s canoes coming towards us: whereupon we dropt +some of our sails, and staid for the canoe until it came aboard us, then +stood into the bay, which was hard by, and came to an anchor. In this +canoe was the King’s Secretary, who had on his head a piece of died +linnen, folded up like unto a Turkish turban. He was all naked, except +about his waist; his breast was carved with the broad arrow upon it; he +went bare-footed. He had an interpreter with him, who was a Mestizo, +that is, half an Indian and half a Portuguese, who could speak very good +Portuguese. This Secretary signified unto our General, that he had +brought him an hog, hens, eggs, fresh fish, sugar canes, and wine, which +wine was as strong as aqua-vitæ, and as clear as any rock-water. He told +him farther, that he would bring victuals so sufficiently for him as he +and his company would request, and that within the space of four days. +Our General used him singularly well, banquetted him most royally with +the choice of many and sundry conserves, wines both sweet and otherwise; +and caused his musicians to make him music. This done, our General told +him, that he and his company were Englishmen; that we had been at China, +and had trafficked in that country; that we were come thither to make +enquiries, and purposed to go to Molucca. The people told our General, +that there were certain Portuguese in the island, who staid there as +factors continually, to traffic with them, to buy negroes, cloves, +pepper, sugar, and many other commodities. This Secretary of the King, +with his interpreter, lay one night on board our ship. The same night, +because they lay on board, in the evening at the setting of the watch, +our General commanded every man in the ship to provide his harquebuss, +and his shot; and so with shooting off forty or fifty small shot, and a +sacre, himself set the watch. This was no small wonder to these heathen +people, who had not commonly seen any ship so furnished with men and +ordnance. The next morning we dismissed the Secretary and his +interpreter, with all humanity. + +The fourth day after, which was the 12th of March, according to their +appointment, came the King’s canoes: but the wind being somewhat scant, +they could not get on board that night, but put into a bay under the +island until the next day; and, presently after the break of day, there +came to the number of nine or ten of the King’s canoes, so deeply laden +with provisions as they could swim, with two live oxen, half a score of +large fat hogs, a number of live hens, ducks, and geese, with eggs, +plantains, sugar-canes, sugar in plates, cocoas, sweet oranges, and +bitter limes, great store of wine and aqua-vitæ, salt to season meat +with, and almost all manner of provisions besides, accompanied with +divers of the King’s Officers who were there. Among all the rest of the +people, in one of these canoes, came two Portuguese, who were men of +middle stature, and very proper personage: they were each of them in a +loose jerkin and hose, which came down from the waist to the ancle, +according to the fashion of the country, and partly because it was Lent, +and a time for doing of their penance. They account it as a thing of +great dishonour among these heathens, to wear either hose or shoes on +their feet. The Portuguese had on each of them a very fair and a white +lawn shirt, with falling bands on the same, very decent, their bare legs +excepted. These Portuguese were no small joy unto our General, and all +the rest of our company; for we had not seen any christian that was our +friend for a year and an half before. Our General used and treated them +singularly well with banquets and music. They told us, that they were no +less glad to see us than we were to see them, and enquired into the +estate of their country, and what was become of Don Antonio, their King, +and whether he were living or not; for that they had not been in +Portugal for a long time, and that the Spaniards had always brought them +word that he was dead? Then our General satisfied them in every demand, +assuring them that their King was alive and in England, and had +honourable allowance from our Queen; and that there was war betwixt +Spain and England, and that we were come under the King of Portugal into +the South Sea, and had warred upon the Spaniards there, and had fired, +spoiled, and sunk all the ships along the coast that we could meet with, +to the number of eighteen or twenty sail. With this report they were +abundantly satisfied. + +On the other side, they declared unto us the state of the island of +Java: First, the plentifulness, great choice, and store of provisions of +all sorts, and of all manner of fruits, as before set down; then the +great and rich merchandizes which are there to be had. Then they +described the nature and properties of the people, as followeth: The +name of the King of that part of the island was Raya Bolamboam, who was +a man had in great majesty and fear among them. The common people may +not bargain, sell, or exchange any thing with any other nation, without +special licence from their King; and, if any so do, it is present death +for him. The King himself is a man of great years, and hath an hundred +wives; his son hath fifty. The custom of the country is, that, +whensoever the King doth die, they take the dead body and burn it, and +preserve the ashes of him; and, within five days next after, the wives +of the said King so dead, according to the custom and use of their +country, every one of them go together to a place appointed; and, the +chief of the women, who was nearest to him in account, hath a ball in +her hand, and throweth it from her; and to the place where the ball +resteth, thither they go all, and turn their faces to the eastward, and +every one, with a dagger in her hand (which dagger they call a crise, +and is as sharp as a razor), stab themselves to the heart, and, with +their own hands, bathe themselves in their blood, and falling flat on +their faces, so end their days. This thing is as true as it may seem to +any hearer to be strange. + + [Illustration: _The_ KING _of_ JAVA’_s Wives destroying themselves at + his Death_.] + +The men of themselves are very politic and subtle, and singularly +valiant (being naked men) in any action they undertake, and very +submissive and obedient to their king: for example, if their king +command them to undertake any exploit, be it ever so dangerous or +desperate, they dare not nor will not refuse, though they should die +every man of them in executing the same; for he will cut off the heads +of every one of them who return alive, without bringing their purpose to +pass; which is such a thing amongst them as maketh them the most valiant +people in all the south-east parts of the world; for they never fear any +death; for being in fight with any nation, if any of them feeleth +himself hurt with lance or sword, he will willingly run himself upon the +weapon quite through the body to procure his death the more speedily, +and in this desperate manner end his days, or overcome his enemy. +Moreover, although the men be tawny of colour, and go continually naked, +yet their women are fair of complexion, and go more apparelled. + +After they had thus described the state of the island and the order and +fashion of the people, they told us further, that, if their king, Don +Antonio, would come unto them, they would warrant him to have all the +Moluccas at command, besides China-Sanglos and the isles of the +Philippines; and that he might be assured to have all the Indians on his +side that were in the country. After we had fully contented these +Portuguese, and the people of Java who had brought us provisions in +their canoes, they took their leave of us with promise of all good +entertainment at our return; and our General gave them three great +pieces of ordnance at their departing. + +Thus, the next day, being the 16th of March, we set sail towards the +Cape of Good Hope, called by the Portuguese Cabo de Buena Esperanca, on +the most southern coast of Africa. + +The rest of March, and all the month of April, we spent in traversing +that mighty and vast sea, between the island of Java and the main of +Africa, observing the heavens, the Crosiers, or the South-pole, the +other stars, the fowls which are marks unto seamen of fair weather and +foul weather, approaching of lands or islands, the winds, the tempests, +the rains and thunder, with the alterations of tides and currents. + +The 10th day of May, we had a storm from the west, and it blew so hard +that it was as much as the ship could steer close by under the wind; and +the storm continued all that day and all that night. + +The next day, being the 11th of May, in the morning, one of the company +went up to the top, and espied land bearing north and north-by-west of +us; and about noon we espied land to bear west of us, which we imagined +to be the Cape of Buena Esperanca, whereof indeed we were short about +forty or fifty leagues; and, by reason of the scantness of the wind, we +stood along to the south-east until midnight, at which time the wind +came fair, and we hauled along westward. + +The 12th and 13th days we were becalmed, and the sky was very hazy and +thick until the 14th day at three o’clock in the afternoon, at which +time the sky cleared, and we spied land again, which was that called +Cabo Falso, which is short of Cabo de Buena Esperanca forty or fifty +leagues. + +This cape is very easy to be known, for there are right over it three +very high hills, standing but a small way one off another, and the +highest standeth in the midst, and the ground is much lower by the +sea-side. The Cape of Good Hope beareth west and by-south from the said +Cabo Falso. + +The 16th day of May, about four o’clock in the afternoon, the wind came +up at east a very brisk gale, which continued till Saturday with as much +wind as ever the ship could go before. At which time, by six o’clock in +the morning, we espied the promontory or head-land called the Cabo de +Buena Esperanca, which is a pretty high-land; and at the westernmost +point, a little off the main, appear two hummocks, the one upon the +other, and three other hummocks lying further off into the sea, yet low +land between and adjoining unto the sea. + +This Cape of Buena Esperanca is set down and accounted 2000 leagues from +the island of Java in the Portuguese sea charts, but it is not so much +by almost 150 leagues, as we found by the running of our ship. We were +in running of these 1850 leagues just nine weeks. + +The 8th day of June, by break of day, we fell in sight of the island of +St. Helena, seven or eight leagues short of it, having but a small gale +of wind, or almost none at all, insomuch as we could not get into it +that day, but stood off and on all that night. + +The next day, being the ninth of June, having a pretty easy gale of +wind, we stood in with the shore, our boat being sent away before to +make the harbour; and, about one o’clock in the afternoon, we came to an +anchor in twelve fathoms water, two or three cables length from the +shore, in a very fair and smooth bay under the north-west side of the +island. + +This island is very high land, and lieth in the main sea; standing, as +it were, in the midst of the sea, between the main land of Africa, the +main of Brazilia, and the coast of Guinea; and is in fifteen degrees +forty-eight minutes to the southward of the Equinoctial Line, and is +distant from the Cape of Buena Esperanca between five and six hundred +leagues. + +The same day, about two or three o’clock in the afternoon, we went on +shore, where we found an exceeding fair and pleasant valley, wherein +divers handsome buildings and houses were set up; and one particularly, +which was a church, was tiled and whitened on the outside very fair, and +made with a porch; and within the church, at the upper end, was set an +altar, whereon stood a very large table, set in a frame, having in it +the picture of our Saviour Christ upon the cross, and the image of our +Lady praying, with divers other histories curiously painted in the same. +The sides of the church were hung round with stained cloths, having many +devices drawn on them. + +There are two houses adjoining to the church, on each side one, which +serve for kitchens to dress meat in, with necessary rooms and houses of +office. The coverings of the said houses are made flat, where is planted +a very fair vine, and through both the said houses runneth a very good +and wholesome stream of fresh water. + +There is also over against the church a very fair causeway, made up with +stones reaching unto a valley by the sea side, in which valley is +planted a garden, wherein grow great store of pompions and melons; and +upon the said causeway is a frame erected, whereon hang two bells, +wherewith they ring to mass; and near to it a cross is set up, which is +squared, framed, and made very artificially of free-stone, whereon is +carved in cyphers what time it was built, which was in the year of our +Lord 1571. + +This valley is the fairest and largest low plot in all the island, and +is exceeding sweet and pleasant, and planted in every place, either with +fruit or with herbs. + +There are fig-trees which bear fruit continually and very plentifully; +for on every tree you may see blossoms, green figs, and ripe figs all at +once, and it is so all the year long. The reason is, that the island +standeth so near the sun. There is also great store of lemon-trees, +orange-trees, pomegranate-trees, pomecitron-trees, and date-trees, which +bear fruit as the fig-trees do, and are planted carefully and very +artificially, with pleasant walks under and between them; and the said +walks are overshadowed with the leaves of the trees; and in every void +place is planted parsley, sorrel, basil, fennel, anniseed, mustard-seed, +radishes, and many very good herbs. The fresh-water brook runneth +through divers places in this orchard, and may, with very small pains, +be made to water any one tree in the valley. + +This fresh-water stream cometh from the tops of the mountains, and +falleth from the cliff into the valley the height of a cable; and hath +many arms issuing out of it, that refresh the whole island, and almost +every tree in it. The island is altogether high mountains and steep +vallies, except it be on the tops of some hills, and down below in some +of the vallies, where great plenty of all those fruits before spoken of +do grow. There are much more growing on the tops of the mountains than +below in the vallies; but it is very toilsome and dangerous travelling +up unto them and down again, by reason of the height and steepness of +the hills. + +There are also upon this island great store of partridges, which are +very tame, not making any great haste to fly away, though one come very +near them, but only to run away and get up into the steep cliffs; we +killed some of them with a fowling-piece; they differ very much from our +partridges which are in England both in bigness and also in colour, for +they are almost as big as hens, and are of an ash colour, and live in +covies, twelve, sixteen, and twenty together; you cannot go ten or +twelve score paces but you shall see or spring one or two covies at the +least. + +There are likewise no less plenty of pheasants in the island, which are +also very big and fat, surpassing those which are in our country in +bigness and in numbers in a company; they differ not very much in colour +from the partridges before spoken of. We found, moreover, on this +island, plenty of Guinea-cocks, which we call turkies, of colour black +and white, with red heads; they are much the same in bigness with ours +in England; their eggs are white, and as big as a turkey’s egg. + +There are in this island thousands of goats, which the Spaniards call +cabritos, which are very wild; you shall see one or two hundred of them +together, and sometimes you may see them go in a flock almost a mile +long; some of them (whether it be the nature of the breed of them or of +the country I know not) are as big as an ass, with a mane like a horse, +and a beard hanging down to the very ground; they will climb up the +cliffs, which are so steep that a man would think it a thing impossible +that any living creature could go there. We took and killed many of them +for all their swiftness, for there are thousands of them upon the +mountains. + +Here are in like manner great store of swine, which are very wild and +fat, and of great bigness; they keep altogether upon the mountains, and +will very seldom abide any man to come near them, except it be by mere +chance, when they are found asleep, or otherwise, according to their +kind, are taken lying in the mire. + +We found in the houses, at our coming, three slaves who were negroes, +and one who was born in the island of Java, who told us, that the +East-Indian fleet, which were in number five sail, the least whereof was +in burden eight or nine hundred tons, all laden with spices and Calicut +cloth, with store of treasure, and very rich stones and pearls, were +gone from the said island, St. Helena, but twenty days before we came +thither. + +This island hath been found long ago by the Portuguese, and hath been +altogether planted by them for their refreshment, as they come from the +East-Indies; and, when they come, they have all things in plenty for +their relief, by reason that they suffer none to inhabit there, that +might eat up the produce of the island, except some very few sick +persons of their company, whom they suspect will not live until they +come home; these they leave there to refresh themselves, and take them +away the year following, with the other fleet, if they live so long. +They touch here rather in their coming home from the East Indies, than +at their going thither, because they are thoroughly furnished with corn +when they set out of Portugal; but are meanly victualled at their coming +from the Indies, where there groweth but little corn. + +The 20th day of June, having taken in wood and water, and refreshed +ourselves with such things as we found there, and made clean our ship, +we set sail about eight o’clock at night towards England. At our setting +sail we had the wind at south-east, and we hauled north-west and +by-west. The wind is commonly off the shore at this island of St. +Helena. + +On Wednesday the 3d day of July, we went away north-west, the wind being +still at south-east; at which time we were in one degree and forty-eight +minutes to the southward of the Equinoctial Line. + +The 12th day of the said month of July there was very little wind; and, +towards night, it was calm, and blew no wind at all, and so continued +till Monday, being the 15th day of July. + +On Wednesday the 17th day of the said month, we had a small gale at +west-north-west. We found the wind continually to blow at east and +north-east, and east-north-east, after we were in three or four degrees +to the northward; and it altered not until we came between thirty and +forty degrees to the northward of the Equinoctial Line. + +On Wednesday the 21st day of August, the wind came up at south-west a +fair gale; by which day at noon we were in thirty-eight degrees of north +latitude. + +On Friday in the morning, being the 23d of August, at four o’clock we +hauled east and east-by-south, for the most northern islands of the +Azores. + +On Saturday the 24th day of the said month, by five o’clock in the +morning, we fell in sight of the two islands of Flores and Corvo, +standing thirty-nine degrees thirty minutes; and sailed away north-east. + +The 3d of September, we met with a Flemish hulk that came from Lisbon, +and declared unto us the overthrowing of the Spanish fleet, to the +singular rejoicing and comfort of us all. + +The 9th of September, after a terrible tempest, which carried away most +part of our sails, by the merciful favour of the Almighty, we recovered +our long-wished-for port of Plymouth, in England, from whence we set +forth at the beginning of our voyage.” + +[The wealth acquired in this voyage, though very considerable, was soon +dissipated; and, in less than three years, Cavendish again found himself +under the necessity of preparing for a second, in which, however, he was +very unfortunate. He had, indeed, increased his preparations; and, it is +not to be doubted, but that the certainty he had conceived of acquiring +a more ample fortune by a second enterprize, made him the more careless +in the management of the treasure he had acquired by the first. + +The ships fitted out on this occasion were the Leicester, commanded by +himself as Admiral; the Roebuck, Captain Cocke, Vice-Admiral; the +Desire, Captain Davis, Rear-Admiral; the _Dainty_, Captain Coffen; and +the _Black Pinnace_, whose Commander’s name is not mentioned. The +Commanders in this expedition were some of the ablest navigators the +nation produced, and the highest expectations were formed from their +fortitude and approved experience. + +Of the accounts that have been given of this expedition, that published +by John Jane, a gentleman who accompanied Captain Davis in the Desire, +is the most complete; for which reason, we shall give it in the writer’s +own words, as it is but in few hands, and full of interesting events: + +“The 26th of Aug. 1591, we departed from Plymouth, says Mr. Jane, with +three large ships and two barks. + +The 29th of November, we fell in with the bay of Salvador, upon the +coast of Brasil, twelve leagues on this side Cape Frio, where we were +becalmed until the 2d of December: at which time we took a small bark +bound for the river of Plate, with sugar, haberdash-wares, and negroes. +The master of this bark brought us to an isle called Placentia, thirty +leagues west from Cape Frio, where we arrived the 5th of December, and +rifled six or seven houses inhabited by the Portuguese. The 11th, we +departed from this place, and, the 14th, arrived at the island of St. +Sebastian; from whence Mr. Cocke and Captain Davis presently departed +with the Desire and Black Pinnace, for taking the town of Santos. The +15th, at evening, we anchored at the bar of Santos, from whence we +departed, with our boats, to the town; by which expedition, we took all +the people at mass, both men and women, whom we kept all that day in the +church as prisoners. The cause why Mr. Cavendish desired to take this +town, was to supply his great wants; and, having it now in quiet +possession, we stood in assurance of having provisions in great +abundance. But such was the negligence of Captain Cocke, that the +Indians were suffered to carry out whatsoever they would in open view, +and no man did controul them: and the next day, after we had won the +town, our prisoners were all set at liberty; only four poor old men were +kept as pledges to supply our wants. Thus, in three days, the town, +which was able to furnish such another fleet with all kinds of +necessaries, was left unto us nakedly bare, without people and +provisions. + +Eight or ten days after, Mr. Cavendish himself came hither, where he +remained until the 22d of January, seeking by entreaty to have that +whereof we were once possessed. But, in conclusion, we departed worse +furnished from the town, than when we came unto it. The 22d, we burnt +St. Vincent’s to the ground. The 24th, we set sail, shaping our course +for the straits of Magellan. + +The 7th of February, we had a very great storm; and, the 8th, our fleet +was separated by the fury of the tempest. Then our Captain called unto +him the master of our ship, a very honest and sufficient man; and, +conferring with him, he concluded to go for Port Desire, hoping that the +General would come thither, because that in his first voyage he had +found great relief there; for our Captain could never get any direction +what course to take in any such extremities, though many times he had +entreated for it, as often I have heard him with grief report. In +sailing to this port, by good chance, we met with the Roebuck, wherein +Mr. Cocke had endured great extremities, and lost his boat, and +therefore desired our Captain to keep him company, for he was in a very +desperate situation. Our Captain hoisted out his boat, and went on board +him to know his estate, and, returning, told us the hardness thereof, +and desired the Master and all the company to be careful in all their +watches not to lose the Roebuck, and so we both arrived at Port Desire +the sixth of March. + +The 16th of March, the Black Pinnace came to us; but the Dainty came +not, but returned back to England, leaving their captain on board the +Roebuck, without any provision more than the apparel that he wore. The +18th the Leicester came into the road, and Mr. Cavendish came into the +harbour in a boat which he had made at sea; for his long boat and +pinnace were lost at sea: and being on board the Desire, he told our +captain of all his extremities, and spoke most hardly of his company, +and of divers gentlemen that were with him, purposing no more to go on +board his own ship, but to stay in the Desire. We all sorrowed to hear +such hard speeches of our good friends; but having spoken with the +gentlemen of the Leicester, we found them faithful, honest, and resolute +in proceeding, although it pleased our General otherwise to conceive of +them. + +The 20th of March, we departed from Port Desire, Mr. Cavendish being in +the Desire with us. The 8th of April, we fell in with the straits of +Magellan, enduring many furious storms between Port Desire and the +strait. The 14th, we passed through the first strait. The 16th, we +passed the second strait, being ten leagues distant from the first. The +18th, we doubled Cape Froward, which cape lieth in 53 degrees 30 +minutes. The 21st we were forced, through the fury of the weather, to +put into a small cove with our ships, four leagues from the said cape, +upon the south shore, where we remained until the 15th of May. In the +which time we endured extreme storms, with perpetual snow, where many of +our men died with cursed famine, and miserable cold, not having +wherewith to cover their bodies, nor to fill their bellies, but living +by muscles, water, and weeds of the sea, with a small relief, from the +ship’s store, in meal, sometimes. And all the sick men in the Leicester +were most uncharitably put on shore into the woods, in the snow, rain, +and cold, when men of good health could scarcely endure it, where they +ended their lives in the highest degree of misery, Mr. Cavendish all the +while being on board the Desire. In these great extremities of snow and +cold, doubting what the end would be, he asked our captain’s opinion, +because he was a man that had good experience of the north-west parts, +in his three several discoveries that way, employed by the merchants of +London. Our captain told him, that this snow was a matter of no long +continuance, and gave him sufficient reason for it, and that thereby he +could not much be prejudiced or hindered in his proceeding. +Notwithstanding, he called together all the company, and told them, that +he purposed not to stay in the straits, but to depart upon some other +voyage, or else to return again for Brazil: but his resolution was to go +for the Cape of Good Hope. The company answered, that, if it pleased +him, they did desire to stay God’s favour for a wind, and to endure all +hardness whatsoever, rather than to give over the voyage, considering +they had been here but a small time, and because they were within forty +leagues of the South Sea, it grieved them now to return: +notwithstanding, whatever he ordered, that they would perform. So he +concluded to go for the Cape of Good Hope, and to give over this voyage. +Then our captain, after Mr. Cavendish was come on board the Desire from +talking with the company, told him, that, if it pleased him to consider +the great extremity of his situation, the slenderness of his provisions, +with the weakness of his men, it was no course for him to proceed in +that new enterprize: for if the rest of your ships (said he) be +furnished answerable to this, it is impossible to perform your +determination; for we have no more sails than masts, no victuals, no +ground-tackling, no cordage more than is over-head, and, among +seventy-five persons, there is but the master alone that can order the +ship, and but fourteen sailors: the rest are gentlemen, serving-men, and +artificers. Therefore it will be a desperate case to take so hard an +enterprize in hand. These persuasions did our captain not only use to +Mr. Cavendish, but also to Mr. Cocke. In fine, upon a petition delivered +in writing by the chief of the whole company, the General determined to +depart out of the straits of Magellan, and to return again for Santos in +Brazil. + +So the 15th of May, we set sail, our General being then in the +Leicester. The 18th, we were free of the straits, but at Cape Froward it +was our hard hap to have our boat sunk at our stern in the night, and to +lose all our oars. + +On the 20th, being thwart of Port Desire, in the night the General +altered his course, as we suppose, by which occasion we lost him: for, +in the evening, he stood close by a wind to seaward, having the wind at +north-north-east, and we standing the same way, the wind not altering, +could not the next day see him: so that we then persuaded ourselves, +that he was gone for Port Desire to relieve himself, or that he had +sustained some mischance at sea, and was gone thither to remedy it. +Whereupon our captain called the General’s men unto him, with the rest, +and asked their opinion what was to be done. Every one conjectured that +the General was gone for Port Desire. Then the Master, being the +General’s man, and careful of his master’s service, as also of good +judgment in sea-matters, told the company how dangerous it was to go for +Port Desire, if we should there miss the General: for (said he) we have +no boat to land ourselves, nor any anchors or cables that I dare trust +in so quick streams as are there: yet, in all likelihood concluding that +the General was gone thither, we steered our course for Port Desire, and +by chance met with the Black Pinnace, which had likewise lost the fleet, +being in a very miserable case: so we both concluded to seek the General +at Port Desire. + +The 26th day of May, we came to Port Desire, where not finding our +General as we hoped, being most slenderly victualled, without sails, +boat, oars, nails, cordage, and all other necessaries for our relief, we +were struck into a deadly sorrow. But, referring all to Providence, we +entered the harbour, and found a place of quiet road, which before we +knew not. Having moored our ship with the pinnace’s boat, we landed upon +the south shore, where we found a standing pool of fresh-water, which by +estimation might hold about ten tons, whereby we were greatly comforted. +From this pool we fetched more than forty tons of water, and yet we left +the pool as full as we found it. And, because at our first being at this +harbour we were at this place and found no water, we persuaded ourselves +that God had sent it for our relief. Also there were such extraordinary +low ebbs as we had never seen, whereby we got muscles in plenty and +great abundance of smelts, so that, with hooks made of pins, every man +caught as many as he could eat: by which means we preserved our ship’s +victuals, and spent not any during the time of our abode here. + +Our Captain and Master, considering our ability to go to the General, +found our wants so great, as that in a month we could not fit our ship +to set sail; for we must needs set up a smith’s forge to make bolts, +spikes, and nails, besides the repairing of our other wants. Whereupon +they concluded it to be their best course, to take the pinnace, and to +furnish her, and to go to the General with all expedition, leaving the +ship and the rest of the company until the General’s return; for he had +vowed to our Captain, that he would return again to the straits, as he +had told us. The Captain and Master of the pinnace, being the General’s +men, were well contented with the motion. + +But the General having in our ship two most pestilent fellows, when they +heard of this determination, they utterly misliked it, and, in secret, +dealt with the company of both ships, vehemently persuading them that +our Captain and Master would leave them in the country to be devoured by +the cannibals, and that they were merciless and without charity: +whereupon the whole company joined in secret with them, in a night, to +murder our Captain and Master, with myself and all those they thought +were their friends. There were marks taken in his cabbin, how to kill +him with musquets through the ship’s side, and bullets made of silver +for the execution, if their other purposes should fail. All agreed +hereunto except the boatswain of our ship, who, when he knew the matter, +revealed it to the Master, and so to the Captain. Then the matter being +called in question, those two murderous fellows were found out, whose +names were Charles Parker and Edward Smith. + +The Captain, being thus hardly beset, in peril of famine, and in danger +of being murdered, was constrained to use lenity, and by courteous means +to pacify this fury: shewing, that, to do the General service, unto whom +he had vowed faith in this action, was the cause why he purposed to go +unto him in the pinnace, considering that the pinnace was so necessary a +thing for him, as that he could not be without her, because he was +fearful of the shore in so great ships. Whereupon all cried, with +cursing and swearing, that the pinnace should not go unless the ship +went. Then the Captain desired them to shew themselves christians, and +not so blasphemously to behave themselves, without regard and +thanksgiving to God for their great deliverance. By which gentle +speeches, the matter was pacified, and the Captain and Master, at the +request of the company, were content to forgive this great treachery of +Parker and Smith, who, after many admonitions, concluded in these words: +“The Lord judge between you and me:” which after came to a most sharp +revenge, even by the punishment of the Almighty. Thus, by a general +consent, it was concluded not to depart, but to stay there for the +General’s return. Then our captain and Master, seeing that they could +not do the General that service which they desired, made a motion to the +company, that they would lay down under their hands the losing of the +General, with the extremities wherein we then stood: whereunto they +consented, and wrote under their hands what followeth: + + _The Testimonial of the Company of the_ Desire, _touching the losing + of their General, which appeareth to have been utterly against their + meanings._ + +“The 26th of August 1591, we whose names are here underwritten, with +divers others, departed from Plymouth, under Mr. Thomas Cavendish our +General, with four ships of his, viz. the Leicester, the Roebuck, the +Desire, and the Black Pinnace, for the performance of a voyage into the +South Sea. The 19th of November, we fell in with the bay of Salvador, in +Brazil. The 16th of December we took the town of Santos, hoping there to +revictual ourselves, but it fell not out to our contentment. The 24th of +January we set sail from Santos, shaping our course for the straits of +Magellan. The 8th of February, by violent storms, the said fleet being +parted, the Roebuck and the Desire arrived at Port Desire the sixth of +March. The sixteenth of March, the Black Pinnace arrived there also: and +the 18th of the same, our Admiral came into the road, with whom we +departed the 20th of March in poor and weak estate. The 8th of April +1592, we entered the straits of Magellan. The 21st of April we anchored +beyond Cape Froward, within 40 leagues of the South Sea, where we rode +until the 15th of May. In which time we had great store of snow, with +some gusty weather, the wind continuing still west-north-west against +us. In this time we were inforced, for the preserving of our victuals, +to live the most part upon muscles, our provision was so slender; so +that many of our men died in this hard extremity. Then our General +returned for Brazil, there to winter, and to procure victuals for this +voyage against the next year. So we departed the straits, the 15th of +May. The 21st, being thwart of Port Desire, 36 leagues off the shore, +the wind then at north-east and by-north; at five of the clock at night, +lying north-east, we suddenly cast about, lying south-east and by-south, +and sometimes south-east: the whole fleet following the Admiral, our +ship coming under his lee, shot a-head of him, and so framed sail fit to +keep company. This night we were severed, by what occasion we protest we +know not, whether we lost them or they us. In the morning we only saw +the Black Pinnace, then supposing the Admiral had overshot us. All this +day we stood to the eastwards, hoping to find him; because it was not +likely that he would stand to the shore again so suddenly. But missing +him towards night, we stood to the shoreward, hoping by that course to +find him. The 22d of May, at night, we had a violent storm, with the +wind at north-west, and we were inforced to hull, not being able to bear +sail; and this night we perished our main tressle-trees, so that we +could no more use our main-top-sail, lying most dangerously in the sea. +The pinnace likewise received a great leak, so that we were inforced to +seek the next shore for our relief. And, because famine was like to be +the best end, we desired to go for Port Desire, hoping, with seals and +penguins, to relieve ourselves, and so to make shift to follow the +General, or there to stay his coming from Brasil. The 24th of May we had +much wind at north. The 25th was calm, and the sea very lofty, so that +our ship had dangerous foul weather. The 26th, our fore-shrouds broke, +so that, if we had not been near the shore, it had been impossible for +us to get out of the sea. And now, being here moored in Port Desire, our +shrouds are all rotten, not having a running rope whereto we may trust, +and being provided only of one shift of sails, all worn, our top-sails +not able to abide any stress of weather; neither have we any pitch, tar, +or nails, nor any store for the supplying of these wants; and we live +only upon seals and muscles, having but five hogsheads of pork within +board, and meal three ounces for a man a day, with water for to drink. +And for as much as it hath pleased God to separate our fleet, and to +bring us into such hard extremities, that only now by his mere mercy we +expect relief, though otherwise we are hopeless of comfort; yet, because +the wonderful works of God, in his exceeding great favour towards us his +creatures, are far beyond the scope of man’s capacity, therefore by him +we hope to have deliverance in this our deep distress. Also, for as much +as those upon whom God will bestow the favour of life, with return home +to their country, may not only remain blameless, but also manifest the +truth of our actions, we have thought good, in christian charity, to lay +down under our hands the truth of all our proceedings, even till the +time of this our distress. + +Given in Port Desire, the 2d of June, 1592,” &c. + +After they had delivered this under their hands, then we began to labour +to preserve our lives; and we built up a smith’s forge, and made nails, +bolts, and spikes; others made ropes of a piece of our cable; and the +rest gathered muscles, and took smelts, for the whole company. Three +leagues from this harbour there is an isle with four small isles about +it, where there are abundance of seals; and, at that time of the year, +the penguins came thither, in great plenty, to breed. We concluded with +the pinnace, that she should sometimes go thither to catch seals for us; +upon which condition we would share victuals with her man for man; +whereunto the whole company agreed. So we parted our poor store, and she +laboured to fetch us seals to eat, wherewith we lived when smelts and +muscles failed; for in the nep-tides we could get no muscles. Thus, in +the most miserable calamity, we remained until the 6th of August, still +keeping watch upon the hills to look for our General and so great was +our vexation and anguish of soul, as I think never flesh and blood +endured more. Our misery daily increasing, time passing, and our hope of +the General being very cold, our Captain and Master were fully persuaded +that the General might, perhaps, go directly for the straits, and not +come to this harbour: whereupon, they thought no course more convenient, +than to go presently for the straits, and there to stay his coming; for, +in that place he could not pass, but of force we must see him: Whereunto +the company most willingly consented, as also the Captain and Master of +the pinnace; so that upon this determination we made all possible speed +to depart. + + [Illustration: Cavendishes Crew _in Great distress at Port desire, + Setup a Forge & repair their shatterd Vessels_.] + +The 6th of August we set sail, and went to Penguin Isle; and, the next +day, we salted 20 hogsheads of seals, which was as much as our salt +could do. The 7th, towards night, we departed from Penguin Isle. The +9th, we had a sore storm, so that we were constrained to hull, for our +sails were not fit to endure any force. The 14th, we were driven in +among certain isles never before discovered by any known relation, lying +fifty leagues, or better, off the shore, east and northerly from the +straits; in which place, had not the wind ceased, we must of necessity +have perished. But, the wind shifting, we directed our course for the +straits; and, the 18th of August, we fell in with the Cape in a very +thick fog; and, the same night, we anchored ten leagues within the Cape. +The 19th, we passed the first and second straits. The 21st, we doubled +Cape Froward. The 22d, we anchored in Salvage Cove, so called because we +saw many savages there. Notwithstanding the extreme cold of this place, +yet do all these people go naked, and live in the woods like satyrs, +painted and disguised, and flee from you like wild deer. They are very +strong, and threw stones at us of three or four pounds weight, an +incredible distance. The 24th, in the morning, we departed from this +cove, and the same day we came into the north-west reach, which is the +last reach of the straits. The 25th, we anchored in a good cove, within +14 leagues of the South Sea: in this place we purposed to stay for the +General; for the strait at this place, is scarce three miles broad, so +that he could not pass but we must see him. After we had staid here a +fortnight in the depth of winter, our victuals consuming (for our seals +stunk most vilely, and our men died pitifully through cold and famine, +for the greatest part of them had not cloaths to defend them from the +extremity of the winter’s cold) being in this heavy distress, our +Captain and Master thought it the best course to depart from the straits +into the South Sea, and to go for the isle of Santa Maria, which is to +the northward of Baldivia, in 37 deg. 15 min. where we might have +relief, and be in a temperate clime, and there stay for the General, for +of necessity he must come by that isle. So we departed the 13th of +September, and came in sight of the South Sea. On the 14th, we were +forced back again, and recovered a cove, three leagues within the +straits from the South Sea. Again we put forth, and being eight or ten +leagues free of the land, the wind rising furiously at west-north-west, +we were forced back again into the straits for want of sails; for we +never durst bear sail in any stress of weather, they were so weak: so +again we recovered the cove three leagues within the straits, where we +endured most furious weather; so that one of our two cables brake, +whereby we were hopeless of life: yet it pleased God to calm the storm, +and we unreeved our sheets, tacks, halliards, and other ropes, and +moored our ship to the trees, close by the rocks. We laboured to recover +our anchor again, but could not, it lay so deep in the water, and, as we +think, covered with oaze. Now had we but one anchor, which had but one +whole fluke, a cable spliced in two places, and a piece of an old one. +In the midst of these our troubles, the wind came fair the first of +October; whereupon, with all expedition, we loosed our moorings, and +weighed our anchor, and so towed off into the channel; for we had mended +our boat in Port Desire, and had five oars of the pinnace. When we had +weighed our anchor, we found our cable broken; only one strand held. +Being in the channel, we reeved our ropes, and again rigged our ship; no +man’s hand was idle, but all laboured even for the last gasp of life. +Here our company was divided; some desired to go again for Port Desire, +and there to be set on shore, where they might travel for their lives; +and some stood with the Captain and Master to proceed. Whereupon the +Captain said to the Master, “Master, you see the wonderful extremity of +our estate, and the great doubts among our company of the truth of your +reports, as touching relief to be had in the South Sea. Now, good +Master, for as much as you have been in this voyage once before with +your Master the General, satisfy the company of such truths as are to +you best known; and, you the rest of the General’s men, who likewise +have been with him in his first voyage, if you hear any thing contrary +to the truth, spare not to reprove it, I pray you.” Then the Master +said, “If you think good to return, I will not gainsay it: but this I +think, if life may be preserved by any means, it is in proceeding; for +at the isle of Santa Maria I do assure you of wheat, pork, and roots +enough. Also, I will bring you to an isle where pelicans be in great +abundance, and we shall have meal in great plenty, besides a possibility +of intercepting some ships upon the coast of Chili and Peru. But, if we +return, there is nothing but death to be hoped for: therefore, do as you +like, I am ready; but my desire is to proceed.” These his speeches, +being confirmed by others that were in the former voyage, there was a +general consent for proceeding; and so, the 2d of October, we put into +the South Sea, and were free of all land. This night the wind began to +blow very much at west-north-west, and still increased in fury, so that +we were in great doubt what course to take. To put into the straits we +durst not, for lack of ground-tackle: to bear sail we doubted, the +tempest was so furious, and our sails so bad. The pinnace came round +with us, and told us that she had received many grievous seas, and that +her ropes did every hour fail her, so as they could not tell what shift +to make. We, being unable in any sort to help her, stood under our +courses in view of the lee-shore, still expediting our ruinous end. + +The 4th of October, the storm growing beyond measure furious, the +pinnace, being in the wind of us, struck suddenly a hull, so that we +thought she had received some grievous sea, or sprung a leak, or that +her sails failed her, because she came not with us; but we durst not +hull in that unmerciful storm, but sometimes tried under our main +course, sometimes with a haddock of our sail, for our ship was very +leeward, and most laboursome in the sea. This night we lost the pinnace, +and never saw her again. + +The 5th, our fore-sail was split and all torn: then our Master took the +mizzen, and brought it to the fore-mast, to make our ship work, and with +our sprit-sail we mended our fore-sail, the storm continuing beyond all +description in fury, with hail, snow, rain, and wind, such and so +mighty, as that in nature it could not possibly be more, the sea such +and so lofty, with continual breach, that many times we were doubtful +whether our ship did sink or swim. + +The 10th of October, being, by the account of our Captain and Master, +very near the shore, the weather dark, the storm furious, and most of +our men having given over to labour, we yielded ourselves to death +without further hope of succour. Our Captain sitting in the gallery very +pensive, I came and brought him some _rosa solis_, to comfort him; for +he was so cold, that he was scarce able to move a joint. After he had +drank, and was comforted in heart, he began, for the ease of his +conscience, to make a large repetition of his forepassed time, and, with +many grievous sighs, he concluded with a short prayer for our +preservation. Having ended, he desired me not to make known to any of +the company his intolerable grief and anguish of mind, because they +should not thereby be dismaid. And so suddenly, before I went from him, +the sun shined clear; so that he and the Master both observed the true +elevation of the Pole, whereby they knew by what course to recover the +straits. Wherewithal our Captain and Master were so revived, and gave +such comfortable speeches to the company, that every man rejoiced, as +though we had received a present deliverance. The next day, being the +11th of October, we saw Cape Deseado, being the cape on the south shore +(the north shore being nothing but a company of dangerous rocks, isles, +and shoals). This cape being within two leagues to the leeward of us, +our Master greatly doubted that we could not double the same: +nevertheless, being a man of good spirit, he resolutely made quick +dispatch, and set sail. Our sails had not been half an hour on board, +but the foot-rope of our fore-sail brake, so that nothing held but the +oylet-holes. The seas continually brake over the ship’s poop, and flew +into the sails with such violence, that we still expected the tearing of +our sails, or over-setting of the ship; and, besides, to our utter +discomfort, we perceived that we fell still more and more to lee-ward, +so that we could not double the cape. We were now come within half a +mile of the cape, and so near the shore, that the counter-surf of the +sea would rebound against the ship’s side, so that we were much dismaid +with the horror of our present end. Being thus at the very point of our +death, the wind and the seas raging beyond measure, our Master veered +some of the main sheet; and whether it was by that occasion, or by some +current, or by the wonderful power of God, as we verily think it was, +the ship quickened her way, and shot past that rock, where we thought +she would have shored. Then between the cape and the point there was a +little bay; so that we were somewhat farther from the shore: and, when +we came so far as the cape, we yielded to death; yet the Father of all +mercies delivered us, and we doubled the cape about the length of our +ship, or very little more. Being shot past the cape, we presently took +in our sails, which only God had preserved unto us; and when we were +shot in between the high lands, the wind blowing trade, without an inch +of sail, we spooned before the sea, three men being not able to guide +the helm, and in six hours we were put twenty-five leagues within the +straits, where we found a sea answerable to the ocean. + +In this time we freed our ship from water, and after we had rested a +little, our men were not able to move; their sinews were stiff, and +their flesh dead, and many of them (which is most lamentable to be +reported) were so eaten with lice, as that in their flesh did lie +clusters of them, as big as pease, yea and some as big as beans. Being +in this misery, we were constrained to put into a cove, for the +refreshing of our men. Our Master knowing the shore, and every cove very +perfectly, put in with the shore, and moored to the trees, as before +time we had done, laying our anchor to the sea-ward. Here we continued +until the 20th of October; but not being able any longer to stay, +through extremity of famine, the 21st we put off into the channel, the +weather being reasonably calm: but before night it blew most extremely +at west-north-west. The storm growing outrageous, our men could scarcely +stand by their labour; and, the straits being full of turning reaches, +we were constrained by the discretion of the Captain and Master in their +accounts, to guide the ship in the hell-dark night, when we could not +see any shore, the channel being in some places scarce three miles +broad. But our Captain, as we first passed through the straits, drew +such an exquisite plan of the same, as I am assured it cannot in any +sort be bettered: which plan he and the Master so often perused, and so +carefully regarded, as that in memory they had every turn and creek, and +in the deep-dark night, without any doubting, they conveyed the ship +through that crooked channel: so that I conclude, the world hath not any +so skilful pilots for that place, as they are; for otherwise we could +never have passed in such sort as we did. + +The 25th, we came to an island in the straits, named Penguin Isle, +whither we sent our boat to seek relief, for there were great abundance +of birds, and the weather was very calm; so we came to an anchor by the +island in seven fathoms. While our boat was on shore, and we had great +store of penguins, there arose a sudden storm, so that our ship did +drive over a breach, and our boat sunk at the shore. Captain Cotton and +the Lieutenant, being on shore, leapt into the boat and freed the same, +and threw away all the birds, and with great difficulty recovered the +ship: myself also was in the boat at the same time, where for my life I +laboured to the best of my power. The ship, all this while, driving upon +the lee-shore, when we came on board we helped to set sail, and weighed +the anchor; for before our coming they could scarce hoist up their +yards, yet with much ado they set their fore-course. Thus in a mighty +fret of weather, the 27th day of October we were free of the straits, +and the 30th of October we came to Penguin Isle, being three leagues +from Port Desire, the place where we purposed to seek for our relief. + +When we were come to this isle we sent our boat on shore, which returned +laden with birds and eggs; and our men said the penguins were so thick +upon the isle, that ships might be laden with them; for they could not +go without trampling upon the birds, whereat we greatly rejoiced. Then +the captain appointed Charles Parker and Edward Smith, with twenty +others, to go on shore, and to stay upon the isle, for the killing and +drying of these penguins, and promised, after the ship was in harbour, +to send the rest, not only for expedition, but also to save the small +store of victuals in the ship. But Parker, Smith, and the rest of their +faction, suspected that this was a device of the captain’s to leave his +men on shore, that, by these means, there might be victuals for the rest +to recover their country: and when they remembered that this was the +place where they would have slain their captain and master, surely +(thought they) for revenge hereof will they leave us on shore. Which, +when our captain understood, he called God to witness, that revenge was +no part of his thoughts; they gave him thanks, desiring to go into the +harbour with the ship, which he granted. So there were only ten left +upon the isle, and the last of October we entered the harbour. Our +master, at our last being here, having taken careful notice of every +creek in the river, in a very convenient place, upon sandy oaze, ran the +ship a-ground, laying our anchor to sea-ward, and with our running ropes +moored her to stakes upon the shore, which he had fastened for that +purpose; where the ship remained till our departure. + +The 3d of November, our boat with water, wood, and as many as she could +carry, went for the isle of Penguins; but being deep she durst not +proceed, but returned again the same night. Then Parker, Smith, +Townshend, Purpet, with five others, desired that they might go by land, +and that the boat might fetch them when they were against the isle, it +being scarce a mile from the shore. The captain bade them do what they +thought best, advising them to take weapons with them: “For, (saith he) +although we have not at any time seen people in this place, yet in the +country there may be savages.” They answered: “That here were great +store of deer, and ostriches: but if there were savages, they would +devour them.” Notwithstanding, the captain caused them to take weapons +with them, carlivers, swords, and targets: so the 6th of November, they +departed by land, and the boat by sea; but from that day to this day we +never heard of our men. The 11th, while most of our men were at the +isle, only the captain and master, with six others, being left in the +ship, there came a great multitude of savages to the ship, throwing dust +in the air, leaping and running like brute beasts, having vizards on +their faces like dogs faces, or else their faces are dogs faces indeed. +We greatly feared lest they would set our ship on fire, for they would +suddenly make fire, whereat we much marvelled: they came to windward of +our ship, and set the bushes on fire, so that we were in a very stinking +smoak; but as soon as they came within our shot, we shot at them, and +striking one of them in the thigh, they all presently fled; so that we +never saw more of them. Hereby we judged, that these cannibals had slain +our nine men. When we considered who they were that were thus murdered, +and found that they were the principal men who would have murdered the +captain and master, with their friends, we saw the just judgment of God, +and made supplication to his Divine Majesty to be merciful unto us. +While we were in this harbour, our captain and master went with the boat +to discover how far this river did run, that, if need should enforce us +to leave our ship, we might know how far we might go by water: so they +found, that, farther than twenty miles, they could not go with the boat. +At their return they sent the boat to the isle of penguins: whereby we +understood that the penguins dried to our hearts content, and that the +multitude of them was infinite. All the time that we were in this place, +we fared passing well with eggs, penguins, young seals, young gulls, and +other birds, such as I know not, of all which we had abundance. In this +place we found an herb called Scurvy-grass, which we fried with eggs, +using train-oil instead of butter. This herb did so purge the blood, +that it took away all kinds of swellings, of which many had died, and +restored us to perfect health of body; so that we were in as good case +as when we came first out of England. We staid in this harbour until the +22d of December, in which time we had dried 20,000 penguins; and the +captain, the master, and myself, had made some salt, by laying +salt-water upon the rocks in holes, which, in six days would be kerned. +Thus God did feed us, even as it were with manna from heaven. + +The 22d of December, we departed with our ship for the isle, where, with +great difficulty, by the skilful industry of our master, we got 14,000 +of our birds, and had almost lost our captain in labouring to bring the +birds on board: and, had not our master been very expert in the set of +those tides, which run after many fashions, we had also lost our ship in +the same place. The 22d at night we departed with 14,000 dried penguins, +not being able to fetch the rest, and shaped our course for Brazil. Now, +our captain rated our victuals, and brought us to such allowance, as +that our victuals might last six months for our hope was, that within +six months we might recover our country, though our sails were very bad. +So our allowance was two ounces and an half of meal for a man a-day, and +to have so twice a-week; so that five ounces did serve for a week. Three +days a week, we had oil, three spoonfuls for a man a-day; and two days +in a week pease, a pint among four men a-day, and every day five +penguins for four men, and six quarts of water for four men a-day. This +was our allowance; wherewith we lived, though weakly, and very feeble. +The 30th of January, we arrived at the isle of Placentia in Brazil, the +first place that, outward-bound, we were at: and having made the shoal, +our ship lying off at sea, the captain, with twenty-four of the company, +went with the boat on shore, being a whole night before they could +recover it. The last of January, at sun-rising, they suddenly landed, +hoping to take the Portuguese in their houses, and by that means to +recover some Casavi meal, or other victuals for our relief; but when +they looked for the houses, they were all razed and burnt to the ground, +so that we thought no man had remained on the island. Then the captain +went to the gardens, and brought from thence fruits and roots for the +company, and came on board the ship, and brought her into a fine creek +which we had found out, where we might moor her by the trees, and where +there was water, and hoops to trim our casks. Our case being very +desperate, we presently laboured for dispatch away; some cut hoops, +which the coopers made, others laboured upon the sails and ship, every +man travailing for his life; and still a guard was kept on shore to +defend those that laboured, every man having likewise his weapon by him. +The 3d of February, our men, with twenty-three shot, went again to the +gardens, being three miles from us upon the north shore, and fetched +Casavi-roots out of the ground, to relieve our company, instead of +bread; for we spent not of our meal while we staid here. The 5th of +February, being Monday, our captain and master hastened the company to +their labour; so some went with the coopers to gather hoops, and the +rest laboured on board. This night many of our men in the ship dreamed +of murder and slaughter: in the morning they reported their dreams: one +saying to another, “This night I dreamed that thou wert slain.” Another +answered, “And I dreamed that thou wert slain.” And this was general +through the ship. The captain hearing this, who likewise had dreamed +very strangely himself, gave very strict charge, that those who went on +shore should take weapons with them, and saw them himself delivered into +the boat, and sent some of purpose to guard the labourers. All the +forenoon they laboured in quietness, and when it was ten o’clock, the +heat being extreme, they came to a rock near the wood’s side (for all +this country is nothing but thick woods), and there they boiled +Casavi-roots, and dined. After dinner some slept, others washed +themselves in the sea, all being stripped to their shirts, and no man +keeping watch, no match lighted, and not a piece charged. Suddenly, as +they were thus sleeping and sporting, having got themselves into a +corner, out of sight of the ship, there came a multitude of Indians and +Portuguese upon them, and slew them sleeping: only two escaped, one very +sore hurt, the other not touched, by whom we understood of this +miserable massacre. With all speed we manned our boat, and landed to +succour our men; but we found them slain, and laid naked in rank one by +another, with their faces upward, and a cross set by them: and withal we +saw two very great pinnaces come from the river of Janeiro very full of +men; who we suspected came from thence to take us; because there came +from Janeiro soldiers to Santos, when the General had taken the town, +and was strong in it. Of seventy-six persons who departed in our ship +out of England, we were now left but twenty-seven, having lost thirteen +in this place, with their chief furniture, as muskets, calivers, powder, +and shot. Our casks were all in decay, so that we could not take in more +water than was in our ship, for want of casks, and that which we had was +marvellous ill-conditioned. And being there moored by trees, for want of +cables and anchors, we still expected the cutting of our moorings, to be +beaten from our decks with our own furniture, and to be assailed by them +of Janeiro. What distress we were now driven into, I am not able to +express. To depart with eight tons of water in such bad casks, was to +starve at sea, and in staying our case was ruinous. These were hard +choices; but, being thus perplexed, we made choice rather to fall into +the hands of the Lord than into the hands of men. So, concluding to +depart, the 6th of February we were off in the channel, with our +ordnance, and small shot, in readiness for any assault that should come; +and, having a small gale of wind, we recovered the sea in most deep +distress. Then bemoaning our estate one to another, and recounting over +all our extremities, nothing grieved us more than the loss of our men +twice, first being slaughtered by the cannibals at Port Desire, and at +this isle of Placentia by the Indians and Portuguese. And considering +what they were who were lost, we found that all those who conspired the +murdering of our Captain and Master were now slain by savages, the +gunner only excepted. Being thus at sea, when we came to Cape Frio the +wind was contrary; so that three weeks we were grievously vexed with +cross winds; and, our water consuming, our hope of life was very small. +Some desired to go to Baya, and to submit themselves to the Portuguese, +rather than to die for thirst: but the Captain, with fair persuasions +altered their purpose of yielding to the Portuguese. In this distress it +pleased God to send us rain in such plenty, as that we were well +watered, and in good comfort to return. But after we came near unto the +sun, our dried penguins began to corrupt, and there bred in them a most +loathsome and ugly worm, of an inch long. This worm did so mightily +increase, and devour our victuals, that there was in reason no hope how +we should avoid famine, but be devoured of these wicked creatures; there +was nothing that they did not devour, iron only excepted; our cloaths, +hats, boots, shoes, shirts, and stockings: and for the ship, they did so +eat the timbers, as that we greatly feared they would undo us, by +gnawing through the ship’s side. Great was the care of our Captain, +Master, and company, to consume these vermin, but the more we laboured +to kill them, the more they increased; so that at the last we could not +sleep for them, but they would eat our flesh, and bite like musquetos. +In this woeful case, after we had passed the Equinoctial Line towards +the north, our men began to fall sick of such a monstrous disease, as I +think the like was never heard of: for in their ancles it began to +swell; from thence in two days it would be in their breasts, so that +they could not draw their breath; and then fell into their lower parts, +and there did swell most grievously, and most dreadful to behold, so +that they could neither stand, lie, nor go: whereupon our men grew big +with grief. Our Captain, with extreme anguish of his soul, was in such +woeful distress, that he desired only a speedy end; for divers grew +raging mad, and some died in most loathsome and furious pain. It were +incredible to write our misery as it was. There was no man in perfect +health, but the Captain and one boy; the Master being a man of good +spirit, with extreme labour, bore out his grief, so that it grew not +upon him. To be short, all our men died, except sixteen, of which there +were but five able to move. The Captain was in good health, the Master +indifferent, Captain Cotton and myself swolen and short-winded, yet +better than the rest who were sick, and one boy in health: upon us five +only the labour of the ship did stand: The Captain and Master as +occasion served, would take in and heave out the top-sails; the Master +only attended on the sprit-sail; and all of us at the capstan without +sheets and tacks. In fine, our misery and weakness was so great, that we +could not take in or heave out a sail: so our top-sail and sprit-sail +were torn all in pieces by the weather. The Master and Captain taking +their turns at the helm, were mightily distressed, and monstrously +grieved with the woeful lamentation of our sick men. Thus, as lost +wanderers upon the sea, the 11th of June 1593, it pleased God that we +arrived at Bear Haven in Ireland, and there ran the ship on shore; where +the Irishmen helped us to take in our sails, and to moor our ship for +floating; which slender pains of theirs cost our Captain ten pounds, +before he could have the ship in safety. Thus, without victuals, sails, +men, or any furniture, God only guided us into Ireland, where the +Captain left the Master and three or four of the company to keep the +ship; and, within five days after, he and certain others had passage in +an English fisher-boat to Padstow, in Cornwall. In this manner our small +remnant, by God’s mercy only, were preserved and restored to our +country, to whom be all honour and glory world without end.” + + +We have already observed, that the above relation is the only complete +account of this voyage which has hitherto appeared; by which we would be +understood to mean, that it is the only complete account of the +proceedings of any one of the ships engaged in this second expedition of +Cavendish, from her first setting out till her return home. There are +other accounts of the distresses attending this voyage, but they refer +to parts only, and do not contain a regular series of events from +beginning to end, as we shall endeavour to shew, in pursuance of our +plan of tracing the great out-lines of the lives of our celebrated +circum-navigators, from their first entering upon action till the period +of their retreat. + +When the impartial reader revolves in his mind the effects of distresses +like those already described in the foregoing account, upon a company of +ungovernable sailors, not under that subordination which regular +discipline always establishes to Officers properly commissioned, he will +then be prepared to determine, whether Cavendish complains with reason +against Davis, as being the death of him, and to use his own words, “the +decay of the whole action;” or, whether the miscarriage did not arise +partly from unavoidable accidents, and partly from the impetuosity of +his own temper, and his own misconduct. + +The misfortunes that attended the progress of this most distressful +voyage, appear to us to have taken their rise from the accident of being +becalmed for seven-and-twenty days under the Line; during which time +they not only consumed a considerable proportion of their provisions, +but the men became sick; and the scurvy, which seldom makes its +approaches on this side the Equator, had already infected near half the +crews. + +This reduced them to the necessity, not only of seeking land where fresh +provisions might be procured, but of wasting more time with a view to +the recovery of the sick, than was consistent with the navigation of +those boisterous seas through which they were to pass. + +We have already seen that when they were masters of Santos, they were in +the utmost distress for want of provisions, and yet the opportunity was +suffered to pass without obtaining any effectual relief; and that this +distress is not aggravated by the writer of the above voyage, appears +from the testimony of Knivet, in Purchas’s Pilgrams, who says, “that +here they had such disorders among themselves, that if the Portuguese +had been of any courage, they might have destroyed the whole fleet; for +our men, says he, would fight for their victuals, as if they had been no +Christians but Jews”, (which by the way shews the strange notions which +the multitude in those days entertained of the uncharitable disposition +of the Jews to one another; a characteristic not at all applicable to +that people); “and they that got the best would get them into some hole, +or into the wilderness under some tree, and there they would remain as +long as they had meat.” + +From this early beginning of distress, very little hope could be +reasonably entertained of the issue. The season was advancing fast, when +the severity of the weather would render their proceeding into the South +Seas by the straits of Magellan very dangerous; and, being already in +want of provisions, they could have no means of an effectual supply till +they could reach the fertile countries on the opposite side of those +straits; the General’s prolonging his stay therefore on the eastermost +coasts of Brazil till the 22d of January, was not only an imprudent but +a fatal delay; and, as it was foreseen, proved the actual ruin of the +voyage. + +At the time when they should have passed the straits of Magellan, they +were in consultation, if not worse employed, at Santos; and after they +set sail they were attacked by a storm, of which Cavendish himself says, +“a _worser_ might not be endured. Such was the fury of the +west-south-west winds, as we were driven from the shore four hundred +leagues, and constrained to beat from 50 deg. to the southward into 40 +degrees to the northward again, before we could come near the shore; in +which time we had a new shift of sails clean blown away, and our ship in +danger to sink in the sea three times; which with extremity of men’s +labour we recovered.” Here the reason that prevented Cavendish’s arrival +at Port Desire till the 18th of March, 12 days after the Desire and +Roebuck, is fully explained. And after he had refitted his ship and +refreshed his men, and was ready to sail, he goes on in the same letter, +which is directed to Sir Tristriam Gorges, “And now,” says he, “we were +almost four months beating between the coast of Brazil and the straits, +being in distance not above 600 leagues, which is commonly run in twenty +or thirty days; but such was the adverseness of our fortune, that in +coming thither we spent the summer, and found in the straits the +beginning of a most extreme winter, not durable for Christians.” + +After this concession, compared with what the writer of Davis’s voyage +has related of the sufferings of his people, let the reader determine +with what justice Cavendish arraigns Davis, when he attributes to the +villainy of that officer his own death, and the ruin of the voyage. + +But to pursue the narrative of the General’s proceedings from the time +of his parting with the Desire and Black Pinnace in the night of the +20th of May, as already related in the preceding voyage. It appears +indeed, that he continued his course to the coast of Brazil accompanied +by the Roebuck, which, however, was parted from him in lat. 36° S. in +one of the most grievous storms, as he himself confesses, that any +Christians ever endured upon the seas to live, in which the Roebuck +sprung her masts, and was otherwise so much damaged as to arrive in the +bay of St. Vincent in the greatest distress, being little better than a +mere wreck. + +The General himself suffered considerably, and was forced to take +shelter likewise in the same bay, though the little town of St. Vincent +they had burnt on their leaving Santos the summer before. Here +twenty-five of his men, getting drunk on shore, were suddenly set upon +by the Portuguese, in revenge for their former treatment, and every man +of them slaughtered. To revenge this treachery, as it is called, +Cavendish determined to attack Santos, and to level it with the ground; +and now, being joined by the crew of the Roebuck, he landed above the +town, but was most shamefully repulsed, after having plundered a few +farm-houses, and, as it should seem the custom was, set them on fire. + +Here being disappointed of his revenge, he departed with a view to +attack a small inhabited island about twenty leagues to the westward; +from whence, when he had provided himself with such necessaries as the +island could afford, he intended, according to his promise, and +agreeable to the expectations of Davis, to have returned to the straits +of Magellan, and to have proceeded to the South Seas in prosecution of +his first design. But there seemed a fatality attending every measure he +devised. + +He was diverted from the prosecution of this enterprize by the +persuasions of a Portuguese pilot on board, who advised the attack of +Spirito Santo, as the only place that could supply his wants, and enable +him to refit his ships. In this undertaking he lost fourscore of his men +killed, and forty wounded. And now, having no alternative, but either to +return home, or to burn one of his ships for want of hands, and proceed +with the other to the straits; the crew of the Roebuck, fearing, as they +well might, that theirs was the ship destined for the flames, watched +their opportunity when their Captain was sick on board the General, to +make their escape in the night, taking with them both the surgeons, and, +as Cavendish says, double the proportion of provisions for their number +of men, “having with them at their departure but six and forty men, and +carrying away with them the proportion for six months victual of 120 men +at large.” Yet it is not easy to reconcile the truth of this assertion +with the distresses for want of provisions which are all along +complained of from their first arrival on the coast of Brazil in the +summer to the present time. In the straits of Magellan, it is asserted, +that, to save their victuals, they were forced in a great measure to +live upon sea-weeds, muscles, periwincles, and the fruits of the +country; for, says Knivet, the allowance from the ship was but +little.--But to proceed: + +Cavendish, finding himself thus forsaken, every-where disappointed, +betrayed, as he complains, and distressed to the last extremity, his +ship full of sick and wounded, and himself with a wounded spirit, +directed his course to the island of St. Sebastian, 200 leagues to the +westward of Spirito Santo, where he arrived when he had but just one +cask of water left. Here he set 20 of his sick men ashore; and, having +refitted his ship, and refreshed his people, he wanted very much to have +sailed back to the straits: “But, says his biographer, his mutinous crew +obliged him to sail for England;” and he died before his return. + +In his letter to Sir Tristriam Gorges, which appears to have been +written a little before his death, he discovers the utmost perturbation +of mind. “And now, says he, what with grief for the loss of my most dear +cousin [John Lock], and the continual trouble I endured among such +hell-hounds [his ship’s crew], wishing myself upon any desart place in +the world, there to die, rather than thus basely to return home again; +which course I had put in execution, had I found an island which the +charts make to be in eight degrees to the southward of the Line. I swear +to you I sought it with all diligence, meaning (if I had found it) there +to have ended my unfortunate life. But God suffered not such happiness +to light upon me; for I could by no means find it; so was forced to come +towards England.” + +The bitterness which he expresses against his crew might, and did, +probably, arise from their determined resolution not to expose +themselves to the like hardships they had already undergone, and in +which the major part of their companions were suffered to perish without +pity, and to languish without relief: for, if we may believe Jane, the +sick men on board the General were most uncharitably put on shore into +the woods in the straits of Magellan; where, according to Cavendish’s +own account, “there was nothing but such flights of snow, and +extremities of frosts, as in his life he had never beheld or felt the +like. The men, adds he, were well in the morning, and by night frozen to +death.” In this miserable manner, in seven or eight days, 40 of his crew +actually perished, and 70 more sickened. + +Of the ships that sailed in this expedition, consisting of five sail, we +can trace only three that returned to England, namely, the Galleon, +otherwise named the Leicester, of which the General was Commander; the +Dainty, commanded by Captain Cotton, who went a volunteer, and whose +ship, having parted company on her first arrival on the coast of Brazil, +instead of pursuing her voyage to the South Seas, returned back to +England with very little damage. + +The Roebuck, in which sailed from Plymouth 170 brave seamen, after +stealing away from the General in the night, as already related, was +never more heard of; the Black Pinnace foundered in a violent storm in +the South Sea, and in her about 70 men. Of the crews of the Desire, only +26 out of 150 lived to see their native country; and, of the General’s +ship, though the number that perished cannot be exactly ascertained, yet +there could not more than 50 at most survive their General. + +Now, if the gallant actions and glorious exploits that entitle men to +fame and immortality, involve in their atchievement so many of their +fellow-creatures in misery, let the benevolent and humane unite with us +in depreciating such murderous practices; and, instead of holding forth +a Drake, or a Cavendish, as examples worthy of imitation, let us hold in +detestation all those false worthies, whose actions have their rise in +“a ravenous appetite for robbery, and in an insatiable desire of +acquiring wealth without industry, and greatness without virtue.” + + + + + THE + VOYAGES + OF + CAPT. WILLIAM DAMPIER. + + +Among the Navigators who first surrounded the globe, Captain William +Dampier, considered as a Mariner and Naturalist, will ever be held in +the foremost rank. From his Voyages the world received the earliest and +best information of remote countries, and their genuine productions; and +it is on his plan that future navigators have thought fit to proceed in +giving an account of new discoveries. His history will afford a notable +instance of the power of genius and application unassisted by learning, +when the mind is wholly bent upon the pursuit and improvement of one +art. + +He was the son of parents who lived in the parish of East Coker, in +Somersetshire, reputable, but not rich. While they lived they gave him +an education very ill suited to a sea-faring life; but they both dying +when he was yet young, those to whose care he was entrusted removed him +from the grammar-school, and put him to an English school to learn +writing and accompts. Here he did not remain long before an opportunity +offered of placing him with the master of a ship at Weymouth, agreeable +to the inclinations which he had very early discovered of going to sea; +a lesson to parents and guardians to consult the genius of children, if +they would wish them to rise to eminence in the profession to which they +are bred. + +With this master he made a short voyage to France, and was highly +gratified: but, his next voyage being to Newfoundland, where he was +employed a whole summer in the fishery, the rigour of the climate and +the nature of the service so cooled his ardour for sea-adventures, that +he determined to relinquish the employment, and return to his friends. + +He was now eighteen years of age; and, after leading for some time an +idle life, finding his friends begin to look cool upon him, he formed a +resolution to leave the country, and to try his fortune in town. His +course of life, and the natural bent of his inclination, led him to seek +the company of sea-faring companions, who, being pleased with his jovial +humour, encouraged him to resume his old employment, to which, having an +opportunity to enter on board an Indiaman, he was easily persuaded. + +In this ship, the John and Martha, Captain Earning, he sailed to Bantam, +in quality of a foremastman; and in little more than a year returned to +England, perfectly reconciled to the business of a mariner, which, by +the severity of the service he was first employed in, he had determined +never to follow. + +In this voyage, by favour of the master of the ship, he learned the +rudiments of the art of navigation, in which he afterwards became a +great proficient; but he had not yet learned to keep a journal. It +should seem that he employed the following year, after his Indian +voyage, in improving those hints which he received from the master, and +in qualifying himself for an easier and more advantageous birth, than +that of going before the mast for the future. With this view he retired +again into the country, and spent the summer with his brother. But, +tired of a studious life, he embraced the occasion of the Dutch war, to +enter on board the Royal Prince, commanded by Sir Edward Sprague, but in +what station does not appear. He tells us, indeed, that he was in two +engagements; but that, falling sick, he was put on board the hospital +ship, and saw the third only at a distance, in which his Commander was +unfortunately killed: so that he does not seem to have risen higher at +this period than the ordinary rank of an able seaman. + +Being soon after removed to Harwich among the rest of the sick and +wounded, he there languished till the conclusion of the Dutch war, when +he received his discharge; and then returned again to Somersetshire for +the recovery of his health; which was no sooner restored than he +prepared again to go to sea. + +But Colonel Hellier, a neighbouring Gentleman, having a large plantation +in Jamaica, being acquainted with his resolution, made him an offer of +going there as a superintendant, with a handsome appointment; which he +very readily accepted; and, about the beginning of the year 1674, +embarked for Jamaica. But he soon grew tired of land service; his roving +disposition still inclining him to seek the sea. The road, he says, to +take possession of his new office, when he arrived at Jamaica, was +formerly a great way round: but Mr. Hellier, the Colonel’s brother, +being desirous of shortening the way, coasted along the river with some +companions, till they found it run between rocks that rose perpendicular +on both sides: they endeavoured to climb that which intercepted the way +to the plantation: but, while they with the utmost danger and difficulty +were surmounting the rock, a dog they had with them found a more +convenient passage through a hole. This suggested to Mr. Hellier a new +track: so by blowing up some fragments of the rock in one part, and +levelling some hollows in others, a passage was obtained wide enough for +a loaded horse. By this accidental discovery the road was shortened near +one half. + +He was now in his 22d year. In six months after his arrival at Jamaica +he was tired of his superintendency, and quitted it; and soon after +engaged in a trade with the logwood-cutters in Campeachy bay; which +trade he followed near three years, and then commenced logwood-cutter +himself. Unsettled in his mind, and still eager in pursuit of new +adventures, in less than a year he quitted the logwood-cutters; and +about the beginning of 1678, returned to England. + +In 1679, we find him again returned to Jamaica, with a cargo of +merchandize, which being sold at Port Royal, he furnished himself with +other goods, such as he knew he could carry to a good market at +Campeachy; and by this advantageous traffic, he so enriched himself, as +to be able to purchase an estate in his own country, of one whom he knew +had a good title to it. And now, sufficiently happy, he was preparing to +return home; when one Mr. Hobby invited him to make a short trading +voyage to the Moskito-shore, a part of the world he had not yet seen. +This invitation to embark in a new adventure he could not resist and, +therefore, sent home the writings of his late purchase to his brother, +with the same friends whom he purposed to have accompanied to England +himself, and then went on board with Mr. Hobby. + +The Moskitos, he says, are Indians that inhabit the main, between the +Honduras and Nicaragua. They are tall, well-made, raw-boned, lusty, +strong, and nimble of foot, long visaged, have lank black hair, look +stern, are hard favoured, and of a dark copper-coloured complexion. They +are but a small nation; the same, perhaps, that Drake calls Symerons. +They are very dexterous at throwing the lance, fisgig, harpoon, or any +manner of dart, being bred to it from their infancy; for, the children, +imitating their parents, never go abroad without a lance, which they +throw indifferently at almost every object that falls in their way, till +by constant practice they become masters of the art. They next learn to +parry a lance, arrow, or dart; and the training of them to this exercise +is in this manner: Two boys place themselves at a small distance, and +throw light blunt lances at each other; one throws the lance, and the +other parries, alternately. He that parries holds a small stick in his +right hand, with which he turns aside the lance that is darted at him: +and, by constantly practising in this manner, they at last become so +dexterous, that they will shoot arrows at each other, and parry them as +fast as they are shot. This they will do with a small stick no bigger +than the rammer of an ordinary fowling-piece. + +Before they arrive at manhood, they become so dexterous, that they +disregard the arrows of their enemies; and, unless they are poured thick +upon them, and come more than one at a time, they will suffer not one in +a thousand to hit them. + +They are no less expert at striking of fish; and two or three of them +will in those seas maintain a ship’s company of 100 men. Turtle and +manatee are their principal pursuit: the former will commonly weigh 600 +weight; and two Moskito-men will strike two of them a-day, while the +season lasts, for many days together. The manatee is known also by the +name of the sea-cow, and is struck with a harpoon, so contrived by the +Moskito-men as to be thrown with a long stick; but they are very +cautious of discovering their art even to the English--the Spaniards +they hate mortally. The turtle they strike with a different instrument, +of which our author has given a cut. + +About this time the æra of buccaneering commences. The buccaneers were a +set of low men, who, in humble imitation of their betters, first began +with fitting out small vessels in some of the islands in the West +Indies, and then cruising in them till they were able to make themselves +masters of better ships. This being accomplished, they went in +formidable companies as occasion offered, and declared open war against +all the Spanish settlements. These freebooters had generally two or +three Moskito-men on board each of their vessels, whom they found +serviceable in many other respects besides supplying them with fish. By +their situation they had opportunities of being well acquainted with the +strength and riches of the Spanish settlements, and by their inclination +they were their avowed enemies. They therefore served the buccaneers for +guides, and at the same time assisted in their most hazardous attacks. + +This being premised, let us now return to Dampier, who, as has just been +said, had agreed to make a voyage with Captain Hobby; and having set +sail from Port Royal, either by accident or design, they fell in with +Coxen, Sawkings, Sharp, and other buccaneers, who were riding at anchor +on the west side of the island of Jamaica, and were then meditating an +enterprize over the isthmus of Darien, in order to fall suddenly upon +the Spaniards in the South Seas. This expedition, it was given out, +would enrich the undertakers; and as all who engaged in it, according to +the law of buccaneers, were to be proportionable sharers, all Captain +Hobby’s men deserted him to join the buccaneers, Dampier only excepted, +who, after three or four days consideration, was easily persuaded to +make one among the rest. + +Shortly after Christmas, 1680, they all set sail, and steering to Porto +Bello, on the 5th of April, they landed near Golden Island, to the +number of between three and four hundred men, and began their march +guided by chiefs of the Muskito Indians, and headed by Captain Sawkings, +who, by general consent, was chosen their leader. + +After a fatiguing journey of nine days, in which many of them suffered +great hardships, they arrived at Santa Martha, a Spanish settlement on a +river of that name that empties itself into the Southern ocean; which +after some opposition they took. They were made to believe, before they +approached it, that it was a place of considerable strength, abounding +in riches, and inhabited by merchants of considerable property; but upon +entering it, they were greatly disappointed, and therefore, as might be +expected from such a lawless crew, they were as ready to fall upon those +who had projected the enterprise, as upon those whom they accounted the +enemy. + +They now, much discontented with one another, parted company. One party, +continuing their march to the Southern ocean, and there embarking, some +in canoes, some in periagos, and some in small barks which they found in +the river, continued their course to the bay of Panama, and in their way +attempted the little town of Puebla Novo, before which their commander +in chief Captain Sawkins was killed, and his followers defeated. In what +manner this undisciplined crew procured ships, guns, and ammunition, we +are not told; yet ships, guns, and ammunition to pursue their ravages +they did procure as appears by the sequel. + +Captain Coxen, with his company, foreseeing many difficulties in this +Southern project, after the taking of Santa Martha returned to the North +Seas, where he continued his piracies with various success. + +Dampier, however, followed the views of those who persevered in their +first resolution of prosecuting their fortune in the South Seas; and he +continued to accompany them during the year 1680; but, after the death +of Sawkings, Captain Sharpe being chosen commander in chief in his room, +Dampier with many of his companions, suspecting both the courage honesty +of their new leader, entered into a confederacy to displace him, and to +choose Captain Watling in his room, which they soon found means to +accomplish by general consent. Under Captain Sharpe the only enterprize +of consequence was the taking of Ylo, a small island on the Peruvian +coast, from whence they sailed to Juan Fernandez, where, as has been +said, Captain Sharpe was displaced. + +It happened, however, that Captain Watling, soon after his advancement, +having planned an attack upon Arica, fell a victim to his own project; +for he was killed in the first onset, and his party defeated. The +confederates, after this misfortune, remaining some time without a +leader, fell again into party divisions; one party declaring themselves +in favour of their former Commander, the other opposing his re-election. +To put an end to these dissentions, it was at last agreed to part +companies, and to cast lots which company should keep possession of the +ship. It happened that the party in opposition to Dampier proved the +fortunate party; so that Dampier and his companions were reduced to the +necessity of returning either to the N. Sea over the same isthmus by +which they came into the South, or submitting themselves to the mercy of +the Spaniards. Nor does it appear that any of them carried more riches +back than they brought with them, notwithstanding the vast promises with +which they had been flattered at their first setting out: for it has +been generally observed, that the confederacies of the wicked are +defeated by their own deceit; and that they themselves are, for the most +part, the instruments of their own misfortunes. + +The company with which Dampier chose to associate, consisted of 44 men +who bore arms, a Spanish Indian who bore arms also, two Moskito Indians, +already described, with five slaves taken in the South Seas, whom they +kept to carry their luggage. The vessels they had to carry this company +were, the long-boat belonging to the ship, and two canoes, one of which +had been sawn asunder, and joined again; and these were furnished for +their defence with two patararoes, the companies small arms, and very +scanty proportion of provisions and ammunition: and, thus equipped, they +had to sail more than 200 leagues before they reached the river of Santa +Martha, from whence they were to set out on their march by land for the +North Sea. Such an enterprize, one would imagine, could hardly have been +undertaken with any hope of succeeding by reasonable men. + +On April the 17th, 1681, they parted with Captain Sharpe, 12 leagues to +the north-west of the island of Plate; and, on May the 1st, they landed, +after many strange adventures, in the bay of Panama, in order to pursue +their journey. Here they found the river Santa Martha, of which they +meant to avail themselves, blocked up by a ship of considerable force, +that had been stationed there for more than six months to intercept +their passage. This obliged them to seek a new tract, through which, +however, the greatest part of the company, with incredible difficulty, +passed safe to the opposite shore, among whom was Dampier, whose +hardiness enabled him to undergo the severest trials, and whose +well-judged precautions exempted him from many unnecessary sufferings to +which others by their imprudence frequently exposed themselves. + +On the 1st of May, about three in the afternoon, they began their march; +and, on the 23d, they completed their journey; in which time they +travelled 110 miles, crossing some lofty mountains, but chiefly keeping +along the vallies among deep and dangerous rivers, some of which they +forded, some they passed by felling large trees upon the banks, and some +they were obliged to swim over in their cloaths and accoutrements. Those +who could not swim were dragged through by means of ropes. Their first +landing-place upon the south coast was very disadvantageous to them, and +forced them to a circuit of 50 miles more than was necessary, could they +have landed in the bay of Santa Martha, or navigated the river Chepoa, +by either of which the Indians pass from one shore to the other in three +days, and sometimes in less. + +Those who arrived on the north coast first, among whom was Dampier, +embarked immediately on board a French buccaneer, Captain Tristrian, +Commander, who, in two days after they arrived, joined eight sail of +buccaneers more, who were planning another expedition over-land to +Panama: but, when they were told of the ill success of the first, the +fatigues they must undergo, the risques they must run, and at length the +uncertainty of the event, they unanimously concurred in relinquishing +that design, and held a consultation what other enterprize was fit for +such a formidable body of them to undertake. At length, they concluded +to attack a Spanish town up Carpenter’s river, and for that purpose set +sail one after another, in order to preserve secresy, having previously +appointed a place of rendezvous. When the ship in which our navigator +sailed arrived at the place appointed, they found Captain Wright there +before them, who had taken a Spanish Tartan with 30 men, well furnished +with small arms, and four patararoes, who with 12 armadillos had been +fitted out to seek the buccaneers, and to sink them. This, they that +came over-land, who were heartily tired with living among the French, +thought a good opportunity to set up for themselves; they, therefore +applied to Captain Wright, requesting him to fit up the Tartan for them; +to which, after some hesitation, he consented, on condition that they +should be under his command as one and the same ship; to which they made +no objection. + +The rest of the fleet not arriving at the general rendezvous, according +to agreement, it was soon discovered, that the Spanish armadillos [or +small men of war] had fallen in with and dispersed them. Every one, +therefore, was at liberty to pursue his own enterprise; and Captain +Wright with his new associates chose the coast of Carthagena to try +their fortune. Here they were joined by Captain Yankey; and, falling in +with a stout ship, they fought and took her. She proved to be a prize of +14 guns and 40 men, laden with sugar and tobacco, and had eight or ten +tons of marmalet on board. The Captains differed about the right to the +ship. Yankey, however, took possession by vote of the crews; and Captain +Wright took Yankey’s ship, which was better than his own. The cargo, +after a great deal of difficulty, they disposed of at a Dutch settlement +for less than one-fourth of its value. + +However, the goods being now converted into ready money, the produce was +shared, and the Captains parted. Captain Wright stood for the Caracca +coast, with his men drunk, and quarrelling every day; and Captain Yankey +pursued a quite different course. On the coast of the Caraccas, Captain +Wright took three barks, one laden with hides, one with European +commodities, and a third with earthen-wares and brandy. With these barks +he went to the island Rocu; and, having divided the cargoes into three +equal parts, he gave to every 20 men (for they were 60 in all) one part +and a bark, and so dismissed them. That in which our navigator had an +interest was brought to Virginia on July 16, 1682, where we shall leave +both him and the ship, to give some account of Captain Yankey. + +On board of Yankey sailed one Mr. Cook, as quarter-master, the second in +command, according to buccaneer law; and, they having taken a prize from +the Spaniards, the command of the prize was claimed by Mr. Cook, on +board of which all who chose to sail under the new Captain had liberty +so to do: among others there were several who came over land with him +from the South Seas (for he too had left Captain Sharpe, and had +followed the example of Dampier). All these chose to follow the fortune +of their old acquaintance: but the Frenchmen grudging the English the +possession of so fine a vessel, together with their share of the goods +on board her, combined together; and, after plundering them of ship, +goods, arms, and money, turned them all a-drift on the island of Vacca. +In this destitute condition, Captain Tristrian, of whom mention has +already been made, shewed some compassion, by taking on board about +eight or nine of them, among whom were Captain Cook and Captain Davis, +formerly masters of buccaneers, who, being carried into Petit Guavres, +found means, when the French crews were carousing on shore, to make +themselves masters of their benefactor’s ship, to slip her cable, and to +steer with all the sail they could spread to Vacca to the relief of +their starving countrymen, who, overjoyed to be released, instantly came +on board; and, soon after they set sail, had the good fortune to make +prize of a ship laden with wine, which was newly come from France. They +afterwards fell in with a ship of good force, of which they likewise +made prize; and in her they came to the resolution of sailing into the +South Seas, and ranging the coasts of Chili and Peru. But, first, it was +necessary for them to sail to Virginia to dispose of their spare ships +and cargoes, and to fit their capital prize for war. This they did by +mounting her with 28 guns, and furnishing her with stores, provisions, +and other necessaries for the prosecution of so long a voyage. When +these ships arrived at Virginia, Dampier, and all those who came +over-land with him, happened to be there; and, being made acquainted, +with Captain Cook’s intention, they very readily agreed to join in his +adventure. + +And now, having followed Dampier through all the busy scenes of action +in which he was engaged, till his 30th year, we come at length to that +period, at which the more notable adventures of his life commence. + +On the 18th of August, 1683, he set sail from Achamack river, in +Virginia, in the prize under the command of Captain Cook; and, on the +23d, they met with a violent tempest, which lasted without intermission +till the 28th, during which time they shipt some of the heaviest seas +that ever ship endured. But as soon as the storm abated, they had fine +weather, and a brisk gale, till they arrived at the islands of Cape +Verd, where they staid to careen their ship, to refresh themselves, and +to take in fresh water. This they did at the little island of Sal: but, +being told that the island of Mayo abounded most with cattle, they left +Sal, and went to Mayo to purchase provisions. Here they met with a cold +reception; the inhabitants absolutely refusing to have any traffic with +them, or to suffer them to land: the reason was, that about a week +before, an English ship pretending friendship had cast anchor, and by a +shew of kindness had invited the Governor with his train on board; but, +as soon as they had them in their power, they caused them to write for +cattle and other provisions, by way of ransom, to regain their liberty; +and, what was still more base, after they were furnished with what they +required, they carried off their prisoners, who had not then been heard +of. Dampier afterwards learnt, that the Englishman who was guilty of +this treachery was Captain Bond, who afterwards surrendering himself to +the Spaniards, entered into their service, and taught them to fit out +fire-ships, of which they were before totally ignorant in the South +Seas. + +From Mayo they sailed to Sherboro, on the coast of Africa, where they +staid a few days, and purchased rice, palm-wines, sugar, honey, and +fowls, and then made sail for the straits of Magellan. On the 6th of +February, 1684, they came in sight of the straits mouth; but the wind +being contrary, they continued their course to the south, and doubled +Cape Horn. In latitude 57, when they thought themselves clear of the +cape, they encountered a storm on the 14th of February, which lasted +without abatement till the 3d of March, during which time the rain +poured down immoderately for many days; by which, however, they were +plentifully supplied with fresh water. + +When the storm abated, the wind changed to the south, and proved very +favourable; for at this time they found themselves in lat. 60 deg. S. +But, the gale continuing brisk, by the 17th of March they had run to the +height of Baldivia, in 48 deg. S. On the 19th, in the morning, they saw +a ship to the southward coming after them with all the sail she could +croud. Supposing her to be a Spanish ship from Baldivia and Lima, they +lay by for her; but, on her nearer approach, they saw she was an English +ship; and, upon hailing her, was told that her Captain’s name was Eaton, +that she came from London, and was bound for a cruise in the South Seas. + +Rogues are always good friends till they come to share their booty; so +these free-booters agreed to sail together; and accordingly kept company +to the island of Juan Fernandez, where they both prepared to refresh and +refit. + +March 22, 1684, they anchored in the south bay, in 25 fathoms water, not +a cable’s length from the shore; and as soon as Captain Cook’s ship was +moored, Dampier was eager to go ashore to look for a _Moskito-man_, whom +they had left in this island, when they were driven from it in the year +1681, by three Spanish men of war, Dampier being at that time in the +ship commanded by Captain Watling, just after Captain Sharpe was +displaced. This man, when Captain Watling drew off his crew, happened to +be in the woods hunting for goats; and the ship was under sail before he +came back. Dampier was curious to know whether this Moskito-man was yet +alive; and, if he was, how it had fared with him and it seemed that the +Indian was no less anxious to enquire after his friends, when he saw +that the ships that were approaching were English ships. The poor fellow +had observed them the day before, when first they came in sight, and, +judging about what time they would come to an anchor, he had killed +three goats, and gathered greens, ready to dress as soon as the company +should be at liberty to come on shore. He was already upon the beach +before the ships could be well secured, and was first seen by one of his +countrymen who happened to be on board; and it was no small pleasure to +mark the excessive joy of these two Indians at their meeting. The +Moskito-man belonging to the ship was named _Robin_: he on the island +_Will_. Robin was the first who leapt on shore; and, running to Will, +threw himself flat on his face at his feet, who, helping him up, and +embracing him, fell flat in like manner with his face at Robin’s feet, +and was by him taken up and embraced as before. The surprize, the +tenderness, the solemnity of the interview, which was exceedingly +affectionate on both sides, was admired even by the crews of buccaneers, +who were spectators from the ships of what passed on shore. When +Dampier, who was his old friend, came up, _Will_ was no less transported +with joy to see him than to meet his countryman, but he expressed it in +quite another manner: other friends too he met with among the crew who +knew him, and they were all over-joyed at meeting so unexpectedly; for +these men are very much beloved on board the ships wherever they sail, +for their readiness to assist in whatever service they are put upon. +When the ceremonies of congratulation were over, and they had time to +make enquiries, he told them, that he was several times sought after by +the Spaniards, who knew that he was left upon the island; because when +the ship set sail he was in sight of the shore, and was seen by them +before he could secret himself: but as he was continually upon the +watch, and had discovered a secret retreat, they never had been able to +find him. He had with him, he said, his gun and his knife, a small horn +of powder, and a few shot. These being soon spent, he contrived a way, +by notching his knife, to saw the barrel of his gun in small pieces, +with which he made harpoons, lance-heads, hooks, and a long knife; +heating the pieces first in the fire, which he lighted after the English +manner, by striking his gun-flint against the back of his knife. The +iron when it was hot he hammered with stones, and formed it into the +various shapes he had occasion to apply it. By continued labour and +perseverance, he had worked himself such a complete set of instruments, +for killing and catching his provisions by land and water, as surprized +the people when they were brought out for their inspection. But, says +Dampier, it is no more than these Moskito-men are accustomed to do in +their own country, where they make their own fishing and striking +instruments, without either forge or anvil: and other Indians are still +more ingenious; for they make hatchets of a very hard stone, with which +they cut down trees, make canoes, and frame their houses. + +Poor Will had built himself a little house about half a mile from the +shore, which he had made warm and convenient, by lining it with +goat-skins. He had likewise raised himself a couch about two feet above +the ground, which he had also made soft with the fur of the animals he +caught, and with the down of the young birds (for he could catch no +other) which he occasionally met with and pluckt. Cloaths he had none; +for he had worn them to rags among the bushes and brambles through which +he was often obliged to pursue his prey. He had been on the island about +three years; and in all that time had never conversed with any human +being. He had seen Spaniards; but he always took care, after the first, +that none of them should ever see him. + +At this island these free-booters staid sixteen days; and, on the 8th of +April, the two ships set sail together, and pursued their course +northwards towards the Line, at the distance of 12 or 14 leagues from +the shore, for fear of being seen. The land from 24 deg. to 10 deg. S. +is of a most prodigious height, with ridges of such lofty mountains from +one end of Peru and Chili to the other, that their summits seem to rise +above the clouds; and from the sea they appear for ever blue. Dampier +attributes to the excessive height of these mountains, the want of great +rivers in all this tract; and says, there seldom falls any rain from 30 +deg. to 4 deg. S. He adds, that the limits of the Pacific Ocean ought to +be confined within that space extended westward indefinitely; for, in +all this tract of water, says he, there are no dark rainy clouds, nor +any winds, but trade winds, no tempests, no tornadoes, or hurricanes, +though north of the Line, they are met with in this Ocean as well as the +Atlantic. There is, however, often a thick horizon, so as to hinder an +observation of the sun with the quadrant; and, sometimes, hazy mornings, +and thick mists, but not such as will wet one. The rivers in all this +tract, he says, run small; sometimes they run at one season of the year, +and at others are quite dry. These observations, if just, are truly +wonderful. + +They coasted along the Pacific Ocean from Juan Fernandez to lat. 90 deg. +40 min. S. without meeting with any thing worthy of note; but, on the 3d +of May, they fell in with a ship laden with timber, which they instantly +took without resistance. From this ship they learnt, that the Spaniards +were apprized of their being upon their coasts, and that the Viceroy had +sent expresses to all the sea-ports to put the inhabitants upon their +guard against any sudden attack. + +On this intelligence they immediately altered their course, and steered +for Lobos de la Mer, in lat. 6 deg. 24 min. S. Here they cleared their +ships bottoms; and strictly questioned their prisoners concerning the +state of the country, and which were the towns of greatest note. Several +towns were mentioned; but Truxillo appeared to be that which, if +conquered, would yield the most profit: Truxillo was therefore the place +agreed upon to make a descent. In their passage they descried three +sail: Eaton pursued two of those to seaward; and Cook presently made +prize of that which was nearest the land. They were ships laden with +flour for Panama; in one of which was found a letter from the Viceroy of +Lima to the President of Panama, acquainting him with enemies being upon +the coast, and with the supposed strength of their forces. They also +found an image of the Blessed Virgin in wood, and a stately mule, being +a present to the President, with seven or eight tons of marmalate of +quinces, which is eaten as a great delicacy in that country. From the +prisoners taken in these prizes they learned, that the Spaniards were +fortifying Truxillo, and that a garrison was already established. The +attack of that town was therefore judged impracticable; and it was +resolved to retire to the Gallapagos with the prizes, and there to +consult what next was best to be undertaken. The Gallapagos are a +cluster of islands lying on the Equator, very little known or +frequented, till the buccaneers found their way into the South Seas; the +nearest of them lies 110 leagues to the westward of the main, in long. +70 deg. W. from England. For these islands they set sail on the 29th of +May, and reached them on the 31st. Here they found plenty of turtle, +which they feasted upon fresh every day. They staid about ten or twelve +days; and laid up about 5000 packs of meal from their prizes to serve as +a future supply in case of necessity. + +Being told by an Indian prisoner that was born at Rio Lexa, that there +were great riches in his city, and that he would shew them the way to +the place, they concluded to set sail, and to trust to the fidelity of +their Indian guide; intending, however, to anchor by the way at the +island of Cocos, in lat. 5 deg. 40 min. S. to lodge some of their meal, +as more convenient to have recourse to on ordinary occasions than the +islands of Gallapagos. With this intent their stoutest meal-ship was +taken with them; but, not being able to make the island, they steered to +the continent. + +It happened, however, in the course of this short run, that Captain +Cook, who had been taken ill at Juan Fernandez, as soon as he came +within a few leagues of Cape Blanco, in latitude 9 deg. 56 min. S. +suddenly died, “though in the morning, says Dampier, he was as likely to +live as he had been for a long time before;” but, he adds, “it is usual +for sick men coming from the sea, to die off as soon as they come within +sight of land.” The death of Captain Cook occasioned a general +consultation, when it was agreed to come to an anchor in Caldera-bay, +within a league of Cape Blanco, and there to give him christian burial. +While the men were employed in digging the grave, three Indians came up +to see what they were about, and entered into conversation with the +diggers, at the same time appearing very shy; but, notwithstanding their +caution, as soon as the corps was decently interred, they were all three +seized at once by the company, and very strictly examined. They at first +pretended to know nothing of the Spaniards; but at length they +acknowledged that they were sent from Nicoya, a town about 12 leagues +off, to learn what they could concerning any strangers that should touch +upon the coast, the people of that town having advice that enemies were +in the adjoining seas, and that therefore it behoved them to be upon +their guard. They learnt likewise from these Indians, that the +inhabitants in that neighbourhood were chiefly husbandmen, and bred +cattle; that they traded in hides, corn, and other provisions, for which +they received in return, shoes, hats, linnen, and other cloth; and that, +at no great distance, there were some very large cattle-pens, where they +might furnish themselves with as many buffaloes as would fill their +ships. This was welcome news to sailors, none of whom had tasted any +fresh meat for many weeks; and a company of 24 of them set out +immediately with an Indian for their guide, to look for the cattle-pens. + +After a short march of between three and four miles, they came in sight +of a savannah where a great number of cattle were grazing; of which, +some were for instantly killing as many as they could carry away, while +others were for staying all night, and driving them into the pens to +supply the ships at once, before the owners were apprized of their +design. This resolution prevailed; but Dampier, who was of the party, +and who never chose to run unnecessary hazards, returned to the ships +with about half the company, together with the Indian guide, while the +rest chose to stay where they were. In the morning, when these voluntary +drovers were expected to return with their cattle, none came: it was +therefore feared that some disaster had befallen them; and boats were +manned, and sent out to look for them. + + [Illustration: _Capt^n Davis’s Men taken off the Rock by their + Comrades._] + +As the boats were rowing along, some of the company happened to spy a +number of people upon a rock up to their middles in water; and, upon +nearing them, they soon saw that they were the very people they were in +search of; and, therefore, hastened to take them on board. Lucky it was, +that the boatmen happened to spy them just as they did, for in an hour +more they had been all swallowed up by the tide. They had been suffered +to sleep all night unmolested; and in the morning when they were +scattered about among the cattle, and driving them into the pens, they +were surprized by the sudden appearance of about 60 Spanish soldiers +well armed, who placed themselves in a convenient situation to cut off +their retreat. Alarmed at this unexpected discovery, they hastened to +join in a body, resolving to sell their lives dear, if they found it +impossible to make their escape. Accordingly, they looked well round +them in order to discover an opening to some other part of the shore, +than that against which their ships rode, marching at the same time in +as good order as their situation would admit, and giving the Spaniards +now-and-then a volley of shot, to keep them at a proper distance. The +Spaniards, who are not over eager to come to a close engagement, kept +themselves sheltered behind the bushes, whistling some random shot at +the fugitives, by way of return; which, however, did them no harm. In +this cautious manner they advanced slowly towards the beach where +Captain Cook was buried; and, looking for their boat, saw her in flames +by the water-side, near the spot where they had grounded her the night +before. All hope of retreat being now cut off; and the Spaniards, to +make sure of their surrender, having posted themselves in such a manner +as to prevent all communication with the ships, they were at length +reduced to the last extremity; when, fortunately, spying a rock just +above water, about 100 yards from the shore, they all determined to +commit themselves to the mercy of the ocean, rather than fall into the +hands of the Spaniards. With this resolution they rushed together into +the tide, holding fast by one another, and determining that if one +perished all should perish. In this manner they made good their landing +upon the rock, where they had continued seven hours when they happened +to be discovered by their comrades, who were suffered by the Spaniards +to release them without firing a gun. + +After this disappointment it was thought adviseable not to hazard a +second attempt; they therefore weighed anchor, and continued their +course to Ria Lexa, having first chosen Mr. Edward Davis, the next in +command to Captain Cook, Commander in his room. On the 20th of July they +set sail, and in three days they were a-breast of their intended port. + +Ria Lexa is known by a high-peaked volcano, which smokes all the day, +and in the night sometimes sends forth flames of fire. It lies a +considerable distance from the main, and before you approach the town +there is a small island on which the Spaniards had placed a guard. This +guard the buccaneers surprized; but from them they learnt, that the town +was strongly fortified; that the Governor was informed of their being +upon the coast, and that the garrison was well provided for defence. +This news discouraged the adventurers, who did not come to fight but to +plunder: they therefore instantly withdrew from Ria Lexa, and steering +for the gulph of Amapalla, they there careened their ships, and parted +company. This gulph is a large arm of the sea running ten leagues up +into the country. On the south point lies Cape Cawina, and on the N. W. +St. Michael’s Mount, in lat. 12 deg. 40 min. N. But before they came to +the gulph, it was agreed that Captain Davis should go before with two +canoes well-manned, in order, by surprising some of the natives, to gain +intelligence. Accordingly, as soon as they approached the gulph, the +canoes departed, and Captain Davis, the first night, arrived at a small +island on which there was a town called Mangera, which, for want of a +guide, he could not find. In the morning he found it; but the Indian +inhabitants had all fled, and left the place deserted; only the padre, +with two boys to attend him, were left to take their fate. As all that +Captain Davis wanted was a prisoner for the sake of information, one +more intelligent than the friar could not have fallen into his hands. +From him they learnt, that there were several Indian villages in the +gulph; but that there were only three towns that had churches; that he +served all the three; that there was only another white man, besides +himself, in the whole gulph, who was a kind of secretary to the Spanish +government, and who collected the revenues and kept the accompts. + +Captain Davis, upon receiving this intelligence, taking with him the +friar and his two boys, ventured to approach Amapalla, which stands upon +an eminence. As Davis with his men gained the ascent, the Secretary, +attended by the Casique or Indian Chief, demanding, in Spanish, who they +were, and from whence they came, was answered by Davis, that they were +Biscayers, and that they were sent thither by the King of Spain to clear +the seas from enemies; that their ships were foul, and were coming there +to clean; and that he was come before to prepare a convenient station, +and to demand assistance from his Majesty’s Indian subjects. The +Secretary bid him welcome; said he loved an Old Spain man; and gave him +and his followers a kind invitation to come and take their residence in +the town. Captain Davis ascended the hill, placing the friar in the +front. They were received with every possible mark of respect both by +the Secretary and the Indian inhabitants, and after the first +salutations were past, they were conducted to the church, where all +business of a public nature is transacted. Accordingly, the friar +entered first and was followed by Captain Davis and most of the +by-standers; but one or two of the Indians loitering behind were pushed +in by Davis’s men, who then, suspecting some mischief, sprung back +again, and all the rest of the Indians taking the alarm, followed their +example, leaving Davis and the friar, looking at one another in high +confirmation, ignorant as posts of the cause that had occasioned the +desertion, while, at the same time, the brutes who had caused the rout +were firing upon the poor Indians for flying, and in the skirmish the +Secretary was killed upon the spot, the only person in all the gulph +that could speak Spanish, the friar and his two boys excepted. + +Davis’s design was, when they were all in the church, to have shut them +in, and made his own terms with them: but, poor wretches! there was no +need to practice farther treachery with them; for, notwithstanding the +brutality of these pretended Biscayers, the Indians shewed them every +kind of civility, helped them to repair their ships, hewed down timber +for them, and brought it to the docks; furnished them with cattle and +fresh provisions from the main; and assisted them in filling water, and +carrying wood aboard. All this while the friar with his two lads were +kept prisoners, and it was feared, when they were ready to sail, that +they would have carried them off; for the Indians had a great veneration +for their priest. He had learned their language, and was very useful to +them both by his kind offices and admonitions. + +They remained here from the latter end of July till the 3d of September, +when they set the friar and his youths on shore; and, the two Captains, +or more properly the two crews, having quarrelled, each of them pursued +a different course. Davis steered along the main of Peru, till having +ranged the whole coast of South America, they came to the island of +Plata, in lat. 1 deg. 10 min. S. so called by the Spaniards, after Drake +had shared the plunder of the Cacafuego upon it. Here the two ships met +again, when Captain Eaton’s men reported that they had met in their +course with dreadful tornadoes, with thunder and lightning frightful to +the last degree; that the air smelt of sulphur, and they every moment +expected to be involved in smoke and flame. Captain Eaton proposed a +reconciliation but, his terms being rejected, he staid but one night, +and the day following Davis left the island, and attempted the little +town of Manta, about seven or eight leagues from Plata. They found the +place deserted, and brought away one old woman, the only living creature +they found in the place. She informed them, that a great many enemies +were come over-land from the north seas; that they were yet in canoes +and periagoes; and that the Viceroy had commanded all the Spanish +trading ships on the coast to be burnt, to prevent their falling into +the enemies hands. On this news, Davis retired again to the island of +Plata, to wait the event, where soon after an English ship arrived, +called the Cygnet, commanded by Captain Swan. This ship had been fitted +out by some merchants of London, with a view to trade; but all trade +being effectually at a stop, Swan was easily persuaded to put his goods +up to auction among the adventurers with whom he accidentally fell in, +to man his ship with them, and to turn buccaneer himself. The new comers +were headed by a Captain Harris, who contented himself for the present +to command a small bark under Captain Swan. There was great joy at this +meeting; and Captain Davis and Captain Swan were, like other rogues, +very fond of each other for their own villainous purposes. They now +wished for Captain Eaton again, that having men enough they might all +unite, and undertake some place of consequence. With this view they +fitted up a small bark, and dispatched her in pursuit of him, appointing +a place of rendezvous, if the bark should be fortunate enough to meet +with him. In the mean time they set sail, directing their course to +Payta, a small town in lat. 5 deg. 15 min. S. built under a rock near +the sea-side. In their way they fell in with a large ship of 400 tons, +laden with timber, by whom they received intelligence that the Viceroy +had ordered 10 frigates to be fitted up with all expedition, in order to +drive them out of those seas. “Captain Davis’s unsettled crew, says +Dampier, began now heartily to repent their not accepting of Captain +Eaton’s terms.” However, they pursued their course, and on the 3d of +November landed in the road of Payta, and next morning attempted the +town, which they found deserted, and not so much as one day’s provisions +left in the whole place. Here they got intelligence, that Captain Eaton +had burnt a ship in that road the week before, and was sailed to the +westward; by which they judged that he had taken his departure for the +East Indies, by which course it was always his intention to return home. +They, therefore, began to prepare for their defence, in case of being +attacked by the Spanish frigates. They burnt Captain Harris’s bark, +because she was a heavy sailor, and fitted up another small bark for a +fire-ship; and, having examined their powder and ammunition, and +overhauled their rigging, and put every thing in the best order they +could, they made sail for the isles of Lobos. At Lobos they found a +letter left by the bark that was sent in quest of Captain Eaton, +acquainting them that he had been there, but had sailed some days before +the arrival of the bark; and that the bark was gone to Plata, the place +of rendezvous. Here it was concerted to attempt the town of Guaiaquil, +before they returned to Plata. Accordingly, on the 29th in the morning, +they set sail from Labos, steering directly for the bay of Guaiaquil. +This bay runs in between Cape Blanco on the south side, and Point +Shanday on the north, 25 leagues from Cape Blanco. In the bottom of this +bay lies the island of Santa Clara, in the form of a corpse laid out in +a shroud, of which the east end represents the head, and the west end +the feet. Ships that are bound to the port of Guaiaquil keep to the +southward of this isle, to avoid the shoals on the north side, where, it +is reported, a very rich wreck lies sunk, and that a person, who came +from the King of Spain with a patent to fish for wrecks, had taken up +some of the plate, but he dying, the patent expired without much effect. +The Indians, however, have taken some by stealth, and would probably +have got much more but for the swarms of cat-fish that hover round this +island, the prick of whose fins is so poisonous that whenever they draw +blood the wound proves mortal. From Santa Clara to Puna Arona is about +seven leagues, on which island the inhabitants, who are all seamen or +fishermen, are obliged to keep constant watch, and to give notice to the +Governor of Guiaquil of the approach of all shipping, whether friends or +foes. The houses in the town of Puna stand upon posts 10 or 12 feet +high, with ladders on the outsides to ascend the rooms. Dampier says, he +never saw any such in any other part of the world, except among the +Malayans in the East Indies. They are thatched with palmeto-leaves, and +their chambers well boarded, in which they exceed the Malayans. From +Puna to Guiaquil is seven leagues, and at the distance of one league +from the entrance of the river, which rises about two miles on the other +side Guiaquil, it is divided into two streams, one stream leading to +Leon, the other to Guiaquil. Guiaquil, according to Dampier, is one of +the principal sea-ports in the South Seas. The commodities exported from +that city are cocoa, hides, tallow, sarsaparilla and other drugs, and +woolen-cloth, commonly called Quito cloth. This cloth, which is made at +the rich inland town of Quito, is worn by all the common people +throughout the kingdom of Peru. But, besides cloth, Quito abounds with +gold, washed down from the mountains that surround it, which the Indians +make a trade of gathering in the adjacent brooks, where it is sometimes +found in solid lumps, but generally in small dust mixed with sand. + +As soon as the ships entered the bay they cast anchor off Cape Blanco; +and the crews manned their boats and small barks to advance with the +more secrecy towards the town. In their way they made prize of a small +vessel, laden with Quito-cloth, the master of which told them of the +watch at Puna; and at the same time acquainted them that three ships +were expected to sail from Guiaquil next tide with 1000 negro slaves. +They had not rowed far before they fell in with one of the ships laden +with negroes, and took her. They cut her main-mast down, and left her at +anchor. The next day they made prize of the other two; but in taking +them they alarmed the town: and, there being no discipline observed, no +Commander in Chief to lead them on in a body, one party counteracted the +other party; so that none of their attacks took place. Captain Davis +advanced with a party of his men till they were quite exhausted in +marching through swamps and mangroves. Captain Swan and most of his men +were for retreating, seeing the town alarmed; but, being upbraided with +cowardice, agreed to proceed. They had two Indian guides; and one of +them undertook to lead the way into the town, and was followed by a +Davis’s man, who was fastened to him by a rope, to prevent his making +his escape. But, a little before they came within musket-shot, Davis’s +man, who had boasted of his courage, and sought the post of honour, to +be next man to the guide, cut the string, and let the guide loose; who, +finding himself at liberty, took to his heels, and made his escape. The +other, when he saw him out of reach, cried out, that somebody had cut +the string, and that the guide was gone. This spread a general panic; so +the design was all at once defeated; for, after that, not a man would +advance a step farther, but all retired to their boats and embarked +without either firing a gun, or having a gun fired at them. After +looking at the town for half an hour, they departed: and, having drest a +cow, and filled their bellies, they fell down the bay with the tide, +rifled the negro-ships, and took about 40 of the stoutest men along with +them, and turned the rest adrift. Dampier remarks upon this miscarriage, +that there never was a fairer opportunity for men to enrich themselves +than they had: but all their golden dreams vanished at once; and they +returned as they went, directing their course to Plata, to meet the bark +sent in search of Captain Eaton. + +When they arrived, they found her with her crew almost famished; for +having sought the ships at Lobos, and from Lobos to Plata, and from +Plata to Lobos again, without finding them, and having scarce 14 days +provisions on board when they set out, they were constrained to make a +descent upon the village of Santa Helena, where they succeeded, and got +a small quantity of maize, with which and the turtle they happened to +strike, and some boobies and penguins they killed, they had made shift +to subsist, though with the utmost difficulty. Such was the regard these +plunderers bore for each other, when projects of robbery were in view. +Here the cargo of the cloth-bark, the only booty they had made, was +shared by lots, and Captain Swan had the bark to serve him as a tender. +Here also, according to custom, they quarrelled; Captain Davis’s men +placing the miscarriage to the cowardice of Captain Swan’s; and Captain +Swan’s to the over-forwardness of Captain Davis’s. At length the matter +was compromised by the mediation of the two Commanders; and they agreed +in the next place to attack Lavelia, a pretty large town in the bay of +Panama, about seven leagues from the sea-side, on the banks of a river +on the north-side of the bay. + +On this expedition they set sail the 23d of December, 1684. On the 28th, +they arrived at a small village called Tomaco, which they surprized and +took, and in it a Spanish Knight, Don Diego de Pinas, who came in a ship +from Lima to load timber, in which ship there were only eight Spaniards, +and twelve or thirteen jars of good old wine. The wine they seized, but +let the ship go. + +On the 1st of January, 1685, in passing from Tomaco to Gallo they took a +packet-boat from Panama to Lima with letters. The Spaniards threw the +letters over-board; but there being a string and a small buoy to the box +in which they were inclosed, the box was seen and taken up. The contents +of the public dispatches were, that the armada from Old Spain were +arrived at Porto Bello, and that the President of Panama had received +orders to hasten the Plate fleet from Lima. + +This was joyful news for the buccaneers, who now thought of nothing but +sharing the treasures of Peru. They laid aside their pitiful project +upon Lavelia, and concluded to careen their ships at the King’s Isles, +near the entrance of the gulph of Panama, to which gulph no ships could +sail without being seen from these isles. There were now two ships and +three barks in company, a fire-ship, and two small tenders. They all +changed their course, and steered for the isles, in their way to which +they took a ship of 90 tons, laden with flour. On the 23d of January +they arrived at the place appointed; and on the 25th, they cast anchor +in the harbour of Galleria, setting all hands to work to clean the +barks, in order to cruise in the channel till the next spring-tide, when +the large ships might be laid up to be cleaned also. + +On the 27th, the barks, being finished, were sent to cruise in the +entrance of the gulph; and on the 4th day after, they brought in a prize +laden with corn, salt-beef, and fowls. The beef and fowls came in good +time. The 14th of February, they made an end of careening their large +ships, took in wood and water, and, on the 15th, sailed into the +channel, to cruise for the plate-fleet. When they came a-breast of Old +Panama, they sent their Knight upon his parole with a letter to the +President, to treat for the exchange of prisoners; but by some accident, +says Dampier, he was killed. The next day they sent another letter to +the President by a _Mestiso_ (a mixed breed, half Indian half Spaniard). +This letter produced the desired effect. The English prisoners were +released, and about 40 Spaniards were returned in their room. + +Leaving Panama, they cast anchor before Tobago; and, while they lay in +that road, a stratagem was played upon them that was near proving fatal +to men and ships. A pretended merchant from Panama came by stealth to +trade with them for such merchandize as they might have on board (a +thing not uncommon on those coasts), and was well received. It was +agreed, that in the night he should send his bark out with such +commodities as they wanted, and take back such as they had to return. +Accordingly the bargain was made, and the bark came out as was expected, +hailing the ships with the watchword that was to be her security. Being +cautious, however, lest some mischief should be intended, they called to +the people on board the bark to cast anchor; which they not regarding, +were instantly fired at; upon which the crew took to their canoes, and +set fire to the pretended smuggling ship, which had been prepared as a +fireship by that Capt. Bond who carried off the officers from Mayo, as +has been already related in the beginning of the voyage. This was aimed +chiefly at Captain Davis’s ship; but at the same time, Captain Swan’s +people observed a small float on the water with something like a man in +it, making towards their ship; the man, seeing he was discovered, dived, +and the float disappeared: this, they apprehended, when they saw the +fireship blow up, was some combustible matter intended to be stuck to +the rudder of Swan’s ship, as was formerly attempted upon that of +Captain Sharpe’s in the harbour of Coquimbo. Both ships, however, were +glad to cut their cables, and it was with difficulty that Davis’s +escaped. The fireship drove burning, towards Tobago, but after the first +explosion she did not burn clear, only made a smother, not being +properly contrived. + +This Bond, who instructed the Spaniards in making her, after he left the +Cape de Verd isles, as has already been related, steered for the South +Seas, and in his passage meeting with Captain Eaton, Bond’s pilot, +Richard Morton by name, persuaded him to join with Eaton and to make the +voyage conjointly; but after they had sailed in company two days, Morton +took an opportunity to slip on board Eaton, and persuaded him to drop +Bond, which he did in the night, Morton still continuing on board with +Eaton. Bond being thus deserted, and having no navigator with him who +had ever been in the South Seas, and having been scouted for +mal-practices in the North Seas, had no other resource but that of +betraying his countrymen’s designs to ingratiate himself with the +Spaniards. With this view he steered directly for Porto Bello, +surrendered himself and crew to the Governor, informing him of the +buccaneer’s designs in the South Seas, and offering to remain himself as +surety for the truth of what he said. The Governor, not doubting the +fact, entertained him, and sent him over to the Viceroy of Lima to be +employed by him as he should think fit; and he proved a very useful +instrument in defeating the enterprizes of his old companions. + +But to proceed. In the morning when it was light, the ships returned to +their buoys to fish up their anchors; and while they were thus employed, +they were alarmed by a multitude of canoes and periagoes that were in +motion all round the island. They seemed to make directly towards the +ships, and when they came within call, the people on board learnt that +they were a new company of English and French invaders just arrived from +the North Seas to try their fortune along with the old, and were headed +by two captains, one Grenet, the other Lequie; that they consisted of +200 French and the rest English; and that 180 English more were still on +the isthmus, under the command of Captain Townley, and were daily +expected to arrive in order to join the rest. All the Englishmen were +immediately taken on board Captain Davis and Captain Swan; and the +French were accommodated with the flour prizes, of which mention has +already been made, and Captain Grenet, as the eldest officer, was made +choice of to command his countrymen. In a few days, Captain Townley +arrived, having already made himself master of two ships, one laden with +flour, the other with wine, brandy, and oil: the prisoners they took in +these ships declared, that the fleet from Lima was ready to sail. Soon +after the arrival of Capt. Townley, there came a canoe out of the river +of Santa Martha, who said there were 300 men more on the isthmus of +Darien in their way to these seas. On the 15th, they fell in with a bark +with five or six Englishmen in her that belonged to Captain Knight, who +had been six months in the South Seas, and was now upon the coast of +Mexico, where he came in sight of this bark, but not being able to come +up with her in his ship, had sent the men that were found in her in a +canoe to make prize of her; who, having succeeded, had lost company in +the night, and could not recover their ship again. This bark Captain +Swan took under his care, on pretence that the men had run away and left +their commander, and gave her to Captain Harris, who presently manned +her. + +The time approached when the Lima fleet was expected, and some letters +were intercepted that contained the instructions to the commanders which +course to steer. In consequence whereof the captains of the buccaneers +held a consultation in what manner to steer in order to intercept them; +but, while they were yet undetermined, word was brought that the Spanish +fleet was advancing, and, as it should seem, to give them battle. This +news was by no means agreeable. Such a motley crew of common plunderers +were but ill suited to stand a regular engagement. However, there was +now no alternative, either they must fight or run away; in which case, +being taken singly, they probably would all be destroyed; but by +fighting some might chance to escape. The Spaniards were 14 in number; +of which the Admiral carried 40 guns and 540 men; the Vice-admiral 40 +guns, 400 men; the Rear-admiral 36 guns, 360 men; one ship of 24 guns, +300 men; one of 18 guns, 250 men; and one of eight guns, 200 men; two +fireships; six ships with only small arms, some periagoes and tenders, +having eight hundred men among them all. + +The English, who were to engage this formidable squadron, consisted of +ten sail; Captain Davis’s ship of 36 guns, 156 men, mostly English; +Captain Swan, 16 guns, 140 men, all English; these were the only ships +of force; the others being furnished with none but small arms; Captain +Townley had 110 men, all English; Captain Grenet 308 men, all French; +Captain Harris 100 men, most English; Captain Branley 36 men, some +English, some French; Davis’s tender, eight men; Swan’s tender, eight +men; Townley’s bark, eighty men; and a small bark of thirty tons made +into a fireship, with a canoe’s crew in her; in all 960 men. The +English, notwithstanding the superiority of the enemy, resolved to begin +the attack, having the advantage of the weather gage, which gave them +the choice either to fight or run. Accordingly, about three in the +afternoon, they bore down right before the wind on the enemy, who kept +close upon a wind to meet them; but night came on without any thing +material being done on either side. + +When it grew dark, the Spanish Admiral put forth a light as a signal for +the fleet to cast anchor, and presently hoisted a light on his top, +which after continuing there an hour was taken down, and in a little +time hoisted again. The English, being still to windward, were not aware +of this stratagem; for the Spaniard, knowing of what consequence it was +to gain the weather gage, hoisted the second light upon the topmast of +one of his barks, and edged away silently himself, followed by his +capital ships, and, as soon as it was day-light, appeared to windward of +the English. This was an unexpected stroke, and left them no other +course to take but to fly. + +Captain Townley being hard pressed by the enemy, made a bold push +through a narrow gut that parted the isles, and was followed by several +of the smaller ships, by which they escaped. Captain Harris was chaced +to the westward, and returned no more. And Captain Davis maintained a +running fight all day round the bay of Panama, with the loss only of a +single man. At night the Spaniards gave over the pursuit, and suffered +the English to rendezvous at the same islands from whence they sailed +the day before to begin the attack. + +The 30th, the Spaniards, without pursuing their victory, continued their +course to Panama; and the English having lost Captain Harris in the +engagement, as has just now been mentioned, set sail to the keys of +Quibo in search of him, that being the place appointed to rendezvous in +case of being dispersed. Here they cashiered their cowardly French +Captain, who never came into the engagement at all; and, having found +Captain Harris, they held a consultation about their future operations. + +All their hopes being now frustrated of effecting any thing considerable +by sea, they turned their thoughts on making their fortunes by land; and +for that purpose their prisoners were all strictly examined, with regard +to the strength and riches of the principal cities along the sea-coast, +and within 20 or 30 miles within land. + +On the 5th of July they were joined by Captain Knight, of whom mention +has already been made. He had been cruising more than six months, and +had got nothing except a good ship. He expected to have found the fleet +at King’s Islands enriched with the treasures of the Spanish fleet: but +when he came there, he was informed by the master of a bark-log which he +took, that they were worsted, and had fled to the westward, where he had +now come to join them. + +In order more effectually to pursue their inland enterprizes, they set +about providing canoes for navigating the rivers that led to the chief +cities, against which they had formed designs, and on the 20th of July +they sailed from Quibo, bending their course for Ria Lexa, the nearest +port to Leon, the city they determined first to attack. Their whole +force consisted of 640 men in eight ships, commanded by the Captains +Davis, Swan, Townley, and Knight, with a fireship and three tenders. + +Being arrived within eight leagues of the shore, they quitted their +ships and embarked to the number of 520 men in 31 canoes; and after a +dangerous passage, in which they met with two dreadful tornados, and in +which the large canoes were very near sinking; they arrived at length at +the creek that leads to Leon, and advancing within five miles of the +city without the loss of a man, they landed to the number of 470, +leaving the remainder under the command of Dampier to guard the canoes. + +They marched from the boats in three divisions. Captain Townley with 80 +of the briskest men led the van; Captain Swan with 100 men followed +next, to support him; Captain Davis headed the main body, consisting of +170 men, and Captain Knight with the remainder, composed the rear. +Captain Townley, who had advanced more than two miles a head of the +rest, met a party of Spanish horsemen, and defeated them. Encouraged by +this success, his men pushed briskly on, and entered the town, driving +all before them. When they had gained the high-street they were opposed +by the main body of the Spaniards, drawn up on the parade in order of +battle; but, on two or three of their principal Officers being killed, +they were soon dispersed; and Captain Townley had made himself master of +the city before the foremost division that was to support him had +entered the suburbs. About six in the evening the rearguard came +straggling in; many of the men who composed it, being tired and unable +to keep pace with the rest, came dropping in all night; and one old man +was killed next morning by the Spaniards, from whom he refused to accept +of quarter. He fired his piece among them, reserving his pistols to +defend himself when he should come to close engagement; but they +returned his fire, and shot him dead at a distance. He was a stout +grey-headed old man, aged about 84, and had served under Oliver in the +time of the Irish Rebellion; after which, he entered on board a ship, +and sailed to Jamaica, where he had followed buccaneering for many +years. He could not be prevailed on to tarry with the canoes, but said +he would venture as far as the boldest man among them. He was much +regretted, being a cheerful old man, and never dispirited. + +The Spaniards likewise picked up another straggler, one Mr. Smith, a +merchant, who had accompanied Capt. Swan with an intent to trade, when +that gentleman took in his cargo at London for the South Seas. This +gentleman was carried before the Governor of Leon, who was encamped at +some distance from the town, and was examined by him concerning the +number of the invaders. Being known to a Mulatto servant that attended +the Governor, he was the more easily credited; when he told him, that +they were 1000 strong in the town, and that 500 were left to guard the +canoes. This information had its effect; for the Governor, who was +assembling the force of the country to fall upon the assailants, sent +next day a flag of truce, with an offer to ransom the city. They +demanded 300,000 pieces of eight, and provisions for 1000 men for four +months. The demand, it is probable, exceeded the Governor’s abilities; +so that he was obliged to suffer the city to be set on fire, because he +could not comply with their exorbitant demands. In the mean time, Mr. +Smith being exchanged for a lady that had fallen into the hands of the +invaders, and a Spanish gentleman released, upon promise of sending them +150 oxen to Ria Lexa, the next town they intended to assault, they left +Leon in flames, and returned to their canoes. It does not appear that +the plunder of Leon answered the expectations of the assailants. Be that +as it may, they prowled down the river, stealing cattle, or any thing +that fell in their way; and, on the 16th of June, reached Ria Lexa, in +the harbour of which the ships were already arrived. The Spaniards, for +their better defence, had thrown up an intrenchment at the mouth of a +narrow creek leading to the town, and had placed 110 soldiers to defend +it; they had besides thrown a boom across the river, to prevent either +ships or boats from advancing up the channel: so that these men might +have maintained their posts against an army of 500 regulars. But when +the English came in sight of the breast-work, they fired but two guns +before the Spaniards run away. They were about half an hour in cutting +the boom; and, the channel being now clear, they entered the town +without farther opposition. Here they found nothing but empty houses, +except such things as the inhabitants could not, or would not carry +away; these were about 500 sacks of flour, some pitch, tar, and cordage, +all which, though things of little value to the Spaniards, were +notwithstanding of great use to them. They therefore conveyed them +aboard the ships; and having here received the 150 beeves (the ransom of +the gentleman released on his parole at Leon), some were employed in +killing and salting, while others made excursions to the neighbouring +farms and sugar-works, from whence they rarely returned empty handed. + +They staid here from the 17th to the 24th, “when some of our destructive +crew (to use Dampier’s own words) set fire to the houses, I know not by +whose order, but we marched away, and left them burning.” + +The 25th, the Captains Davis and Swan agreed to part company. They had +hitherto been unsuccessful in concert; they therefore determined to try +their fortunes separately. Knight and Harris accompanied Davis; and +Townley with his two barks followed Captain Swan. + +In a few days Davis set sail for the coasts of Peru; but Capt. Swan, +after staying to take in wood and water, and to recover his men, pursued +his course to the westward, intending first to examine the country of +Mexico towards the north, and then to steer for the East-Indies, and by +that course to return home. This was a very flattering voyage for +Dampier, who was no less earnest to store his mind with the knowledge of +new countries, than to enlarge his fortune by the riches they contained: +he therefore quitted Davis, and entered on board with Captain Swan. + +On the 3d of September they set their prisoners and pilots on shore; the +latter being of no farther use, and the former only an incumbrance. A +malignant fever continued to rage on board, which carried off many of +their men. As the same distemper broke out in the fleet of Captain +Davis, it was concluded that they had taken the infection at Ria Lexa, +where, a few months before their arrival, the inhabitants had been +visited by a kind of plague, which had almost depopulated the town. They +had still, however, about 340 men in tolerable health in four ships. + +In their course to the north-westward, they met with most tempestuous +weather, violent tornadoes from the north-east almost every day, with +such flashes of lightning and claps of thunder, as no man on board had +ever heard. + +On the 14th they came in sight of the well-known volcano of Guatimala, +which appears at first with a double peak. Between these peaks fire and +smoke with dreadful roarings frequently break forth, and spread the +alarm far and wide; yet the inhabitants of Guatimala continue to reside +near the foot of the mountain, and are not so much intimidated upon +those occasions as those who live at a greater distance. This city is +famous for many rich commodities, the produce of the neighbouring hills +and savannas among which it is situated. It lies about eight leagues +from the South Sea, and by report not above 40 or 50 leagues from the +North, to which it sends annually great quantities of indico, anatta, +silvester, and cochineal. The indico plant grows wild about Guatimala, +and has lately been introduced and cultivated in Georgia and Carolina. +The anatta is a red dye, and is made from the flowers of a shrub which +grows in many of the southern provinces of America. Silvester is the +seeds of a fruit not unlike the prickly pear of England; and cochineal +is a collection of insects bred in fruit of the same shape and size. +Both the trees grow wild about Guatimala; and both the silvester and +cochineal yield the same kind of dye, and are sometimes substituted one +for the other, though the cochineal is generally accounted the most +valuable. + +The volcano of Guatimala is seen at 75 miles distance; and the sea, as +they approached it, was full of floating pumice-stones, washed by the +rains from the adjacent hills, and precipitated by the floods into the +main ocean, where, by a constant accumulation, they cover an immense +space. Driftwood they likewise observed in great abundance; and the +trees were large and not much rotted. + +When they had reached the latitude of Toguantapeque, in 14 deg. 30 min. +N. Captain Townley, with 106 men in nine canoes, attempted to land; but +found the country defended by huge sandy hills, against which the waves +beat high with incredible fury. The wind being fair, he coasted along +the shore for several days, and the ships continued to follow him with +an easy sail: at length, grown desperate, he rushed upon a sandy beach, +but the canoes overset before they could reach the land. In this attempt +one or two men perished; some had a leg or an arm broke, and others were +very much hurt. However, the majority having made good their landing, +dragged afterwards their boats on shore; but what gave them the greatest +concern was, that all but those who had been provident enough to seal up +their cartouch-boxes, had wetted their powder, and rendered their +fire-arms useless. This gave a damp to their enterprize; yet they +prepared to penetrate the country, and to get sight of the town of which +they were in search: but either there was no such place, or their fears +prevented their discovering it; for all that were alive returned on +board the ships without procuring a meal’s provisions to refresh the +sick. + +After this fruitless expedition, they still continued coasting to the +westward, with the wind at east-north-east, till they came to Tangola, a +small island where there was good anchorage; from thence they sailed to +Guatulco, a sea-port in lat. 15 deg. 30 min. N. the best in Mexico. On +one side of the entrance into this harbour there is a small island, and +on the other a hollow rock, through which the billows as they pass +produce a horrible roaring, and, being compressed against the sides, are +forced through a hole at the top, and rise like the waters of an +artificial fountain to an incredible height. In this harbour there is +good anchorage. It is about three miles in depth and one in breadth, +runs in north-west, and on the west side small ships may ride +land-locked secure from wind, or weather. At the bottom of this harbour, +Drake found a fine rivulet of water, near a village, of which hardly any +traces remained, except the ruins of a small chapel enclosed in a fine +grove of trees that gave it a very venerable appearance. Here the sick +on board the ships were brought ashore; and here a project was formed to +traverse the country, and plunder the inland towns; but, after +travelling 14 miles, and seizing two or three Indian guides, they could +only find a little village, where some vanellos were drying, the cods of +which are held in great esteem by the Spaniards. They grow upon vines +that creep like ivy about trees of greater magnitude, and flourish in +the bay of Campeachy, as well as in the country of Guatulco; but the +Indians keep the method of curing them a secret to themselves. The +Indians of this village could speak but little Spanish, appeared to be a +poor harmless people, had neither gold nor silver among them, nor could +they tell where those precious metals were to be obtained. It was +therefore to no purpose to pursue their march through a country, rich, +indeed, in natural productions, but destitute of cultivation, and almost +without inhabitants; they therefore returned to their ships; and, while +the sick were endeavouring to regain their strength, the healthy +employed themselves in providing necessaries to continue the voyage. + +On the 8th, four canoes well manned set forwards to the port of Angels, +with orders to wait there till the arrival of the ships. In the mean +time their instructions were to take some prisoners. + +On the 12th, the malignity of the distemper with which they had been +long afflicted being abated, and the sick in a fair way of recovery, the +ships set sail in order to follow the boats. The boats, however, had +mistaken the harbour, and two of them, in attempting to land at a place +near which they had observed some cattle feeding, were overset in the +beach, and with difficulty got out again to sea, with the loss of one +man drowned, and some others hurt. They lost likewise four of their +guns, and spoiled their ammunition; and, in a very distressed condition, +the next day met the ships. The other two canoes parted from them in the +night of the 9th, and had not rejoined them since. The harbour of Port +Angels lies in latitude 15 deg. N. and is open to all winds, except +those from the land. The Spaniards had compared it to that of Guatulco; +but there being no similitude, the boats had passed it without knowing +it; and the two that were missing had rowed as far as Acapulco before +they discovered their mistake. When the ships arrived before the +harbour, the missing boats were ready to join them; and there appearing +to be plenty of cattle at no great distance from the shore, 100 men were +landed to supply the ships with beef. + +The country round this harbour exhibited a most delightful prospect; the +hills were covered with large and lofty trees, the plains with a most +beautiful verdure, and the savannas interspersed with rills and rivers, +on the banks of which were innumerable little shrubs, the beauty and +variety of whose flowers surpass description. Here they made no doubt of +being furnished with whatever their wants required. In less than four +miles march, the party that were landed met with a grazing seat +belonging to Don Diego de la Rosa, in which they found store of salt, +and a considerable quantity of maize, but no inhabitants, the family +having fled on the first appearance of a descent. They found also +poultry in abundance, and hogs or cabritos without number. Here they +feasted for two or three days, and every man brought away as much as he +could carry; but the ruggedness of the road, and the weakness of the +company, debilitated by sickness, prevented their improving so +favourable an opportunity to the best advantage. They relinquished with +reluctance many good things which they had in possession, more than +sufficient for present enjoyment, but too cumbersome to be conveyed to +the ships for future use. + +In the harbour of Port Angels there is good riding in 13, 20, and 30 +fathom water. The flood rises about five feet, sets to the north-east; +and the ebb at south-west. + +The 27th in the morning they set sail from Port Angels, and in the +evening came to an anchor in 16 fathom water, under a small rocky island +six leagues to the westward of their former station, of which island the +Spanish books give no account. The next day they weighed and continued +their course; and, being a-breast of a small lagune whence the missing +boats had a few days before taken a quantity of fish, they lay to, and +sent in a boat with 12 men to bring off a more ample supply. The +Spaniards, on marking the trim of the ships, suspected their intent; +and, concealing themselves behind a rock at the narrow entrance of the +lagune, discharged a volley of small arms at the boat just as it passed +the place of their ambuscade, by which five of the crew were dangerously +wounded. Alarmed at this sudden attack, and finding it impossible to +retreat, because of the narrowness of the channel, they pushed forwards +into the lagune, where they could lie out of gunshot till the enemy +dispersed, or till they should be relieved by the vigilance and valour +of their own people. In this situation, however, they continued two days +and three nights; till at length Captain Townley, fearing some disaster +had befallen them, manned his canoes, and, beating the Spaniards from +the rocks, opened the sufferers a free passage to the sea. Their joy was +the greater, as the pains of the wounded men began to grow intolerable; +and, had they not then been relieved, they must in another day, nay, +some of them, perhaps, in a few hours, have died in the greatest +agonies. This lagune lies in latitude 16 deg. 40 min. N. + +On the 2d of November they passed by a remarkable rock, called by the +Spaniards the Algatross; five or six miles to the westward of which are +seven or eight white cliffs that serve to direct mariners to avoid a +dangerous shoal stretching about a league and a half south-by-west. A +little farther to the westward the Spaniards have erected a breast-work +upon a small island at the mouth of a fair river, which at that time was +defended by 200 men. They manned their boats, and being determined to +land, the Spaniards, after firing 20 or 30 shot, deserted the island, +and left the channel open. They entered on the west side, and found +plenty of salt laid up in cabbins for curing the fish which they catch +in the lagunes, but in what manner Dampier could not conceive, for he +neither saw hook, line, net, boat, or canoe. At the distance of three +leagues from the entrance of the river they came to a house in which was +a Mulatto servant, who informed them, that at Acapulco there was a stout +ship from Lima; and that a little higher up the river, there was maize +and cattle in abundance, to which place he offered to be their guide. + +On this intelligence a contention arose between the commanders. Captain +Townley, who was in want of a better ship, proposed to sail immediately +to Acapulco to make himself master of that from Lima; but Captain Swan +was first for procuring provisions to enable them to subsist while they +were pursuing the grand object they had in view, that of intercepting +the Manilla ship which every year comes constantly from the East Indies +richly laden, and arrives nearly at a certain season off the southermost +point of California in her course to Acapulco. As questions of this kind +are always decided by numbers among voluntary adventurers, Captain +Townley’s proposal was not only seconded by his own crew, but also by +the greatest part of Captain Swan’s. They accordingly returned to the +ships with all expedition, and set sail on the 5th, and on the 7th came +in sight of the high land of Acapulco, a port easy to be distinguished +from all others, by means of three hills, the middlemost of which rises +like a sugar loaf, and the westermost of the other two has on its summit +two hillocks which shew in appearance like two paps. When the ships came +to the distance of about 12 leagues they brought to, and Captain Townley +with 140 men embarked on board canoes with a view to seize the Lima ship +by surprize, before his own ships should come in sight. + +They had hardly sailed four leagues before there arose so dreadful a +tornado that those on board the ships thought themselves in the utmost +peril of their lives, and everyone concluded that the boats must perish. +Happily, however, they weathered the storm; but were driven in great +distress into Port Marquis, a tolerable harbour about a league to the +eastward of Acapulco. Here they staid to dry their cloaths, and refit +their furniture, and in the night of the following day they rowed softly +into Acapulco harbour; “and, because they would not be heard,” says +Dampier, “they hauled in their oars, and paddled as softly as if they +had been seeking manatee. They paddled close to the castle; then struck +over to the town, and found the ship riding between the breastwork and +the fort, about 100 yards from each. When they had well viewed her, and +considered the danger of the design, they thought it impossible to +accomplish it; therefore they paddled softly back again till they were +out of command of the forts, and then they attempted to land, but were +opposed by a company of Spanish soldiers, who fired at them and kept +them at a distance from the shore till day-light; when, taking a view of +the town and castle, and not liking their appearance, they returned on +board, tired, hungry, and heartily mortified at their disappointment.” + +Acapulco lies in 17 deg. N. on the west-side of the continent of +America, famous for its trade to the East Indies, and to Lima; in which +trade three ships are annually employed; two of them are so regulated, +that each has the advantage of the trade-winds that blow between the +Tropics, both in going and returning to their respective ports. The +third is employed in supplying the other two with Spanish goods from +Lima, and in bringing to Lima the Indian merchandize and money brought +from Manilla. + +On the 11th, the ships sailed from Acapulco, and continued coasting +along the shore to the westward. Near the sea-side the land is low, but +rises gradually till within land it appears to touch the clouds. Though +the ground is clean and the anchorage good at a mile from land, yet it +is defended by breakers that render the shore inaccessible, except at +the utmost hazard of men’s lives. In their passage, observing a cluster +of little round hills a little to the westward of the promontory of +Petaplan in 17 deg. 20 min N. they examined the coast narrowly, and +discovered a small river, at the entrance of which they landed 170 men, +who, after marching about 14 miles up the country, came to a wretched +Indian village, in which a Mulatto woman and four children were the only +living creatures left. These they brought to the ships; and, by the +intelligence they received from the old woman, they proceeded to the +harbour of Chequetan, from whence she conducted them, through a pathless +wood, to a farm-house, where they found a caravan of sixty mules laden +with flour, chocolate, and cheese; all which, together with some oxen, +they brought down to their canoes. The cargo of the caravan they +instantly conveyed on board the ships; but the oxen, with eighteen cows +which they afterwards seized without opposition, they first killed and +cured, and, having divided the whole into lots, every ship’s crew took +their own share on board. + + [Illustration: _Dampier’s Comrades seizing the Oxen & Mules laden with + Flour, Cheese &c. at a Farm House._] + +On the 21st they quitted this fortunate harbour, leaving the Mulatto and +her four children to their fate. On the 25th they passed a lofty hill +divided into peaks, in lat. 18 deg. 8 min. N. near which the Spanish +maps place a town called Cupan, which however they could not find; after +a short stay in search of it, they proceeded along the coast, till on +the 28th they came in sight of the volcano of Colima, in lat. 18 deg. 36 +min. N. at the foot of which is situated the rich town of Colima, from +whence it takes its name. Of the valley by which this burning mountain +is surrounded, the Spaniards give a most luxuriant description; but our +navigators found it absolutely inaccessible from the sea; for the surf +ran so high, and the breakers appeared so formidable, that the boldest +of them durst not attempt it: they therefore very reluctantly quitted +the neighbourhood, and proceeded in quest of Sallagua, the bay of which +they discovered in lat. 18 deg. 52 min. N. Here they landed 200 of their +best men, who were opposed by a body of Spanish foot, supported by a +party of horse; but, on the first charge, the foot gave way, and the +horse soon followed. In the pursuit the English were led into a broad +road, and followed it, through a woody and rocky country, to the +distance of four or five leagues, without seeing house or inhabitant. In +their way back they met with two straggling Mulattoes, who told them the +road led to the city of Oarrah four days journey off, and the soldiers +whom they had defeated were sent from thence to escort the passengers +from India that were expected to land in Sallagua bay, from on board the +Manilla ship that every year touched upon that coast. + +Encouraged by this intelligence, they hastened to embark; and, setting +sail on the 6th of December, steered directly for Cape Corientes, at the +height of which they expected to meet their prize. In this passage, +Dampier, who had hitherto by temperance preserved his health, was seized +with a fever and ague, which at length terminated in a dropsical +disorder that was very near carrying him off, and which carried off many +of the men. The dropsy, Dampier says, is a general disorder on this +coast, and the natives pretend that the stone of the alligator dried and +powdered, and drank in water, is an infallible remedy. The same receipt +he found mentioned in a Mexican almanac; but could find no alligator to +give it a trial. + +On the 11th of December they came in sight of Cape Corientes. It is of a +moderate height, flat and even a-top, cloathed with woods, and +projecting into the sea in steep cliffs. It is laid down in the Spanish +maps in latitude 20 deg. 28 min. N. and longitude 230 deg. 56 min. W. +from Teneriff, or in 121 deg. 41 min. W. from the Lizard-point in +England. + +They were now four ships in company; Captain Swan and his tender, and +Captain Townley and his tender. These were all properly stationed to +gain intelligence; but, provisions growing short, Captain Townley’s bark +was dispatched with 60 men to traverse the coast to the westward of the +Cape, in search of some town or village where their wants might be +supplied. On the 17th the bark returned, being unable to weather the +cape, or make any useful discovery. She had left, however, four canoes +with 46 men, who determined to double the cape, or perish in the +attempt. + +On the 18th, all the ships quitted their stations, and sailed for the +island of Chametley, about 16 or 18 leagues to the eastward of the cape, +to take in wood and water. On these islands live the fishermen, who, as +the Spaniards say, fish for the inhabitants of the city of Purification. +On the 20th, they anchored between the islands and the main in five +fathom water, clear sand. Here they caught plenty of rock-fish, but saw +no inhabitants. On the 21st Captain Townley with about 60 men went to an +Indian village about seven or eight leagues to the westward, to +endeavour to procure provisions; and next day Captain Swan returned to +his station off the cape. On the 24th, the four canoes who had doubled +the cape, returned to the cruisers, and reported, that they had rowed to +the bay of the valley of Valderas, or Val d’ Iris, and had landed in the +garden of the world, where they found fruits of the most delicious +flavour growing wild in the plains, and where the cattle were feeding at +large among the streams of water that flowed meandering in the savannas, +and lost their waters among the finest groves of trees they ever beheld; +but when they marched in pursuit of the beeves that were every where +straying in the vallies, they were suddenly surrounded by a body of +Spaniards, who briskly attacked them, some on foot, and some on +horseback. They made a gallant defence, and suddenly retreated into an +adjoining wood, where they were followed by the Spanish horse. These +were armed each with a case of pistols, and some of them, besides their +pistols, had short guns. The English, being covered by the trees, made +use of their fire-arms with advantage; and, after killing about 17 of +the assailants, and wounding several others, the rest being unsupported +by the foot, fled with precipitation. In this skirmish four English were +shot dead, besides two desperately wounded; and, not daring again to +attempt the valley, they killed a horse, and, having satisfied their +hunger, they returned to their canoes. + +On the 25th, being Christmas-day, they cruised close to the cape, and +sent in three of their strikers to kill fish. In the afternoon they +returned with three great jew-fish, which afforded them all a +Christmas-dinner. Captain Townley on the 28th came to his station, and +brought with him 40 bushels of maize, which he had seized at an Indian +village four or five leagues up the country, and which his men were +obliged to carry all that way on their backs. + +They cruised till the 1st of January, 1686, off Corientes, and then +steered towards the valley of Valderas, in order to furnish themselves +with beef; and before night they anchored in 60 fathom water a mile from +the shore. The next day they landed, dividing themselves into two +parties; one party posted themselves on the hills to watch the motions +of the Spaniards, while the other party traversed the vallies to kill +the cattle. The Spaniards frequently presented themselves in companies, +but did not dare to come near enough to engage. They continued here till +the 7th, in which time they had killed and salted beef enough for two +months allowance for their whole company, and, had not their salt failed +them they might have stored themselves with much more. + +They now gave over all farther expectation of the Manilla ship, it being +the general opinion that she had escaped (as they were afterwards +assured she had) while the ships were employed in seeking provisions. +“So this design failed,” says Dampier, “through Captain Townley’s +eagerness after the Lima ship, which he attempted in Acapulco harbour. +For though,” adds he, “we took a little flour hard by, yet the same +guide who told us of the Lima ship, would have conducted us where we +might have had store of beef and maize; but instead thereof we lost both +our time and the opportunity of providing ourselves, and so were forced +to be victualling when we should have been cruizing, to the total ruin +of the enterprize.” + +Being now provided with beef in abundance, and having taken in wood and +water in proportionable quantities, the two commanders, Swan and +Townley, having separate views, though united in this one grand object +of intercepting the Manilla ship, thought proper to part company, +Captain Swan intending to steer westward, and Captain Townley to return +eastward. Hitherto a Moskito chief with three of his men had sailed with +Captain Swan, but being now about to depart never more to return to +their country, he was desirous of recommending them to the care of +Captain Townley, who being bound to the coast of Peru, might there put +them on shore at some convenient place, from whence they might travel +over land to the North Sea. This Captain Townley undertook to perform; +and the ships being now under sail, they saluted each other, and parted. + +Our navigator continued to sail with Captain Swan. Before night they +passed Point Pontique, which forms the westernmost point of the bay, +distant from Cape Corientes about twenty leagues. This point is in lat. +20 deg. 50 min. N. a league to the westward of which are two barren +islands, called the islands of Pontique. Beyond these islands the land +trends to the northward, presenting a very rugged unpleasant appearance +as far as the eye can extend the prospect. On the 14th, they came in +sight of a small white rock in lat. 21 deg. 15 min. N. which at a +distance seemed like a ship under sail. From this island the land runs +full more northerly, and the sea tumbles in with such violence upon the +shore, that for many leagues together there is no landing; there is, +however, every where good anchoring as far as the islands of Chametley. +These islands are six in number, and different from those of the same +name on the east of Cape Corientes, being a little within the Tropic of +Cancer, and not above three leagues from the main. On these islands +grows a fruit called the penguin, of which there are two sorts, the +yellow and the red. The yellow grows on a thick stem about a foot high, +the leaves narrow and about half the length of the stem edged with +prickles. The fruit grows out from the top of the stem in two or three +large clusters, 16 or 20 in a cluster. It is round and in size like a +small pullet’s egg; the outer coat is thick and tough, and the pulp in +the inside is full of little black seeds. The red penguin is in shape +like a little nine-pin; grows up on stools from the ground in clusters +of 60 or 70 on a stool, standing upright like the leaves of houseleek, +and are smaller than the yellow: they are surrounded by leaves a foot +and a half long, edged with prickles like the former. They have a sharp +pungent taste, are very wholesome; but those who eat of them +immoderately find them heating. They grow wild, and in the bay of +Campeachy Dampier says they are so plentiful, that one can hardly range +the plains for their prickly leaves. + +From these islands Captain Swan embarked 100 men in canoes, and went +himself in search of Coolican, a river in the province of Cullacan, with +a town of considerable trade (probably that marked Pastla in the Spanish +maps) upon its banks, the inhabitants whereof pass in boats to the +island of California and fish for pearls. They coasted along the shore +as far as lat. 24 deg. N. but found no river; and after three or four +days absence returned without making any discovery. + +A few leagues to the N.N.W. of Chametley is a narrow entrance into a +lake, called by the Spaniards Rio de Sal, which runs about 12 leagues +easterly, parallel with the shore, forming many low mangrove islands, +and having depth of water every where for boats to row along its banks. +In this lake Captain Swan entered, accompanied by 150 of his men in 12 +canoes. In his progress he observed a grazing farm, and landing some of +his men, they found the house deserted, and the cattle driven away. On +proceeding further along the lake, two Indians were seen running at some +distance, whom they took for spies, and having discharged a volley of +small arms, one of them was wounded in the thigh, and not being able to +continue his race, was seized by a party landed for that purpose who +brought him on board. He informed them, that, about four leagues from +the place where they there were, an Indian town was situated in a +savanna, abounding with cattle. The company were scarcely landed to go +in search of this town before they were attacked by a body of Spanish +horse, who not being properly armed, made but a faint opposition, and +suddenly retired. While the English were in pursuit, the enemy played +off a stratagem that greatly annoyed them. We have already mentioned, in +the voyages of Captain Sir Francis Drake, the nature of the grass that +covers the savannas on the isthmus of Darien between the North and the +South Seas. Such was the grass with which the pursuers were surrounded, +when the Spaniards set it on fire, and, being dry as stubble, it burnt +with astonishing fury, and spread with such rapidity, that it was with +the utmost difficulty the whole party escaped being involved in the +flames. This disaster not only made them more cautious, but occasioned a +delay, which gave the Spaniards time to collect their force and to make +a more formidable opposition. When the English arrived the next day at +the village of which they had intelligence, they found it occupied by an +armed garrison, whom it was necessary to overcome before they could +enter; but as the Spaniards were, for the most part, destitute of +fire-arms, and the Indians wholly unexperienced in their use, the +advantage the English derived from that circumstance soon decided the +contest in their favour. The enemy fled after the loss of some of their +leaders, and left the conquerors master of the place, having only one +man killed with an arrow, and their surgeon sorely wounded. + +They were told by their prisoners, that, about five leagues from the +town of which they were now in possession, two rich gold mines were +wrought by Indian slaves belonging to the Spaniards of Compostella, the +most considerable Spanish city in that district. It was not now a time +to search for gold, when they were in want of every kind of food, except +the beef they had cured at Valderas. Their chief search was now for +maize, and having plundered the village of all they could find, they +conveyed it to their boats with great labour; and next day quitted the +lake, and returned on board the ships. This lake is laid down in +latitude 23 deg. 30 min. N. + +On the 2d of February, Captain Swan made another excursion with 80 men +in search of the river Rosario, at the entrance of which they landed, +and marched to an Indian town of the same name. Here they were told, +that the gold mines were not above two leagues from the town; but, like +the cock in the fable, they rejected the pearl and chose the +barley-corn; about 90 bushels of maize, and the other provisions they +found in the place, though insufficient for the purpose of their +intended voyage, were yet of more value in their present necessity than +all the gold of Compostella. + +On the 3d the ships came to an anchor off the river’s mouth of Rosario, +in seven fathom water, oozy ground, in lat. 22 deg. 51 min. N. + +On the 7th, the Captain with his company came on board. The quantity of +provisions which he had procured was but trifling for so many men; he +therefore sent the next day a party in search of the river Oleta, but +they returned without having found it. The river St. Jago was next +attempted, and on the 11th they anchored in seven fathom water near the +mouth of it, three leagues E. S. E. of the white rock of Maxentelbo, the +high hill of Zelisco bearing S. E. This is one of the principal rivers +upon the coast, and lies in latitude 22 deg. 15 min. N. + +On the 11th, 70 men were sent up the river to make discoveries; they +spent two days in examining the creeks and inlets, and at length came to +a large field of maize which they had begun to gather, when they spied +an Indian who had been sent to watch the corn, whom they seized and +carried on board, in hopes of gaining from him some intelligence, by +which they might obtain a more effectual and speedy supply. He told +them, there was a town called Santa Pecaque, about four leagues from the +place where he was taken, in which there was great store of provisions, +and to which he undertook to be their guide. Captain Swan, overjoyed at +the news, ordered 140 men to be instantly embarked on board the canoes, +and to proceed with the Indian as he should direct. After rowing five +leagues up the river, they came in sight of the town, when they landed +in the night, and next morning set out on their march by land. About 10, +they had advanced within musket-shot; and, having dispatched a party to +reconnoitre, they found the town deserted, and entered it without +opposition. + +The town of Santa Pecaque is seated near the side of a wood in a +spacious plain, neatly built, with a square in the middle, on each side +of which the houses are furnished with balconies, from whence the +inhabitants, in general, are spectators of the frequent processions +exhibited by the Spanish priests, in order to convert the Indians, who +are now almost all become christians in the Spanish settlements. The +town, though small, has two churches; and they were told, that about 70 +white families constantly resided in it, besides those who occasionally +came there as carriers from the mines, and as merchants from +Compostella. These carriers furnish the adjacent miners with maize, +sugar, salt, and salt-fish, of all which there was great plenty in Santa +Pecaque. + +Captain Swan being acquainted by an express with the success of this +expedition, and with the opportunity that now offered to supply his +wants, hastened to the town to give the necessary orders. When he +arrived, he divided his men into two parties; one party he employed in +conveying the provisions to the boats; the other in plundering and +packing up. These he relieved alternately; and when both parties were +wearied out with this laborious service, they caught horses, and, having +laden them with maize, dispatched them under a strong escort down to the +canoes. + +On the 17th, when they arrived, they found the men who guarded the +canoes in high spirits, though they had been attacked by the Spaniards, +and had one man desperately wounded. The party that escorted the horses +thought it adviseable, however, to reinforce the canoe-guard, lest the +Spaniards should renew the attack. Next day they returned to the town, +and the party left therein were preparing to convoy more maize to the +canoes; but, before they set out, Captain Swan understood by an Indian +whom they had made prisoner, that 1000 men were in arms in order to +attack them, and that they were already advanced within three leagues of +the place. Upon this intelligence, the Captain advised all his men to +load as much maize as they could altogether bear away, and instantly to +depart in a body. With this advice they absolutely refused to comply, +being determined not to leave Santa Pecaque while a load of provisions +remained within it. It was in vain to endeavour to persuade those whom +he could not punish for disobeying orders; and, therefore, on the 19th, +he suffered 50 of them to depart with as many loaded horses; exhorting +them, however, to march in a body, that they might be the better able to +defend themselves against any sudden surprize. They were equally deaf to +advice and instruction; they pursued their old course, marching in a +line, and every one leading a single horse. The Spaniards had remarked +their manner of marching, and had placed themselves in ambush the +preceding night. They had scarce travelled half a league before they +were suddenly set upon, and every man cut to pieces before they could +assemble to prepare for their defence. Captain Swan, who had heard the +firing, hastened with his party to the place of action; but on his +approach he was struck with horror at the sight of such a number of his +followers weltering in their blood, stript of their arms, and divested +of their charge. The Spaniards, after the slaughter, having possest +themselves of their musquets, &c. seized also the loaded horses, and +instantly fled. Though the party commanded by Captain Swan did not +exceed the number of those already slain, yet they were suffered to pass +unmolested to the canoes, on board of which they embarked, and, with the +provisions they had already secured, returned to the ships. Among the +slain on this occasion was Mr. Ringrose, who wrote that part of the +history of the buccaneers that relates to Captain Sharpe. + +The slaughter of this unfortunate party dampt the spirits of the +survivors, and discouraged them from attempting any farther descents +upon this coast. It was therefore determined to steer directly for Cape +St. Lucas on the island of California, where they might lie secure from +the attacks of the Spaniards, till the men were refreshed, and the ships +put in a condition to undertake a new voyage. + +The lake of California (for so it is called in the Spanish charts) is +either very little known to the Spaniards, or very carefully concealed. +Though they have mines open already more than they can work, in Mexico, +Chili, and Peru, yet they are very unwilling to allow other European +powers to share the treasures of those countries, though they themselves +cannot exhaust them; nor is it at all likely that any considerable +advantages will ever be made by others, till by some lucky chance a +nearer passage into those seas is discovered. “Were I,” says Dampier, +“to attempt a North-west passage, I would go first to the South Seas, +bend my course from thence along by California, and that way seek a +passage into the Western Seas. If I succeeded in my attempt, I should +then be without that dread which others must have had of passing from a +known to an unknown region; and which, it is not improbable, obliged +them to relinquish the pursuit just as they were on the point of +accomplishing their designs. In like manner,” he adds, “were I to be +employed in search of a North-east passage, I would winter about Japan, +Conca, or the North-east part of China; and taking the spring and summer +before me, I would make my first trial on the coast of Tartary, wherein +if I succeeded I should come into some known part, and have a great deal +of time before me to reach Archangel or some other European harbour.” + +On the 21st they set sail, directing their course for California; but, +being opposed by contrary winds, were unable to reach their destined +port, and obliged to put in at the Maria islands, in latitude 21 deg. 40 +min. N. distant about 40 leagues from Cape St. Lucas, and 20 from Cape +Corientes. These islands are three in number, and they came to an anchor +at the east end of the middlemost in five fathom water, clear sand; +where, as soon as they moored their ships, they instantly began to unrig +them, in order to careen. + +Here Captain Swan proposed to his company to return home by way of the +East Indies, which was highly approved by some, and as violently opposed +by others, who, being ignorant, imagined, as Dampier says, that he would +carry them out of the world. At first coming they lived upon nothing but +seal; but in two or three days their strikers furnished them plentifully +with turtle; and they likewise killed guanicoes, conies, and large +pigeons; so that they consumed none of their ship provisions during +their stay. While the sailors were working upon the ships, the officers +employed themselves in surveying the stores and measuring the maize; +which they divided into three parts, and allotted two parts to the ship, +and one part to the bark, the ship carrying one hundred men, the bark +only fifty. + +Here Dampier, who had been long ill of the dropsy, tried a very uncommon +remedy. He stripped himself stark naked, laid himself down upon the hot +sand, and caused the surgeon to cover him all but his head; in this +manner he lay near half an hour; but being unable to endure it any +longer, he was carried to his tent and put to bed. While he was in the +sand he sweat immoderately, and to that operation he ascribes the +recovery of his health. + +They staid till the 26th, when their ships being clean, they sailed to +the valley of Valderas, in order to take in fresh water. Here they came +to an anchor at the mouth of the river where they had anchored before; +but, now that the dry season prevailed, they found the water brackish, +and unfit for use. They then weighed, and, coming to a fine fresh-water +brook at the foot of a little round hill about four leagues from Cape +Corientes, they filled on the 29th 32 tons of excellent water, a +quantity sufficient to serve their voyage. + +Being provided with every thing they had reason to expect in this +country, they now began seriously to consider of the possibility of +performing their intended voyage. Upon a nice calculation, they found +they had only 60 days provisions on board, at a little more than half a +pint of maize a-day for each man; they had a great many rats on board, +which they could not prevent from consuming a part of the maize; they +had, according to the Spanish account, more than 7000 miles to run from +Cape Corientes to Guam, the nearest land; and, that island being subject +to the Spaniards, they had no certainty of a supply when they came +there. All these discouragements staggered the most forward of them; and +nothing could prevail with the majority but a promise from Captain Swan +to cruise off Manilla, to intercept the register ship, as soon as they +should arrive in the proper station. To this condition Captain Swan was +forced to submit, though much against his inclination; for he had no +mind to commence plunderer at first; and now he was heartily tired of +the trade. + +On the 31st of March, 1686, they took their departure from Cape +Corientes, the Cygnet, Captain Swan, with 100 men; and the bark, Captain +Teat, with 50. At first they steered with a small land breeze at +E. N. E. which carried them three or four leagues; then the sea-wind +came on at W. N. W. and changed their course S. W. By six o’clock in the +evening they were nine leagues S. W. from the cape. About 10 the next +morning they had the sea-breeze at N. N. E. so that at noon they were 30 +leagues from the cape. It then blew a fresh gale, which carried them +into the true trade-wind. At first they had it at N. N. E. and then +northerly. At 250 leagues from the shore it settled at E. N. E., and +there stood till they came within 40 leagues of Guam. + +After the second day of their departure, having fine clear weather, and +a fresh trade-wind, they crouded all the sail they could spread, and had +frequently observations of the sun, moon, and stars; so that they could +calculate their longitudinal distance by way of amusement almost every +day. At their first setting out they steered into the latitude of 13 +deg. N. and it is remarkable, that in a run of more than 6700 miles in +this latitude they saw none of those small islands that are so +plentifully interspersed in the same latitude on the opposite side of +the Line; nor did Commodore Anson, who afterwards pursued the same track +from Acapulco, see land till he arrived at the island of Tinian. As they +run at a great rate, and the wind had every appearance of continuing, +after being at sea about 20 days, the men began to grow clamorous to +have their allowance enlarged; with which the Captain was forced to +comply, though he endeavoured to persuade them to patience, and +represented to them the danger of being becalmed, of missing their +intended port, or of being refused a supply when they arrived. But none +of these could prevail. The cry was for an augmentation, and an +augmentation they had. Till the 20th of April their allowance was eight +spoonfuls of boiled maize a man; but after that it was enlarged to ten. +Dampier, who, as has been before noticed, had long been troubled with a +dropsical disorder, gathered strength by this spare regimen; but those +who were in full health it very much weakened. He says, he constantly +drank three times a-day; but there were many on board who did not drink +once in nine or ten days, and some not in twelve; one in particular did +not drink in 17 days, and then said he was not a-dry, though he made +water every day. Amidst these hardships one poor fellow was found guilty +of theft, and sentenced to receive three stripes with a two-inch rope on +his bare back from every man in the ship. Captain Swan, Dampier says, +began first, and struck with a hearty good will, and his example was +followed by all the rest; a punishment that must make every feeling mind +shudder. + +Though by the Spanish account the distance from Cape Corientes to Guam +is said to be 2400 leagues, or 7200 English miles, yet Captain Swan had +persuaded his men, that, by the English account the distance was only +1900 leagues; and that, as Drake and Cavendish had run it in less than +50 days each, they with better built ships might run it even in less +than either of them: when, therefore, they had run the 1900 leagues, and +the 50 days were nearly expired, they began to grow very mutinous and +those who had declared against the voyage from the beginning, exclaimed +bitterly against the Captain, and against all those who had persuaded +them to undertake it. They had, during this long run of 6000 miles, seen +neither fish, fowl, bird, or insect, except once when, at the distance +of 4975 miles from Cape Corientes, they spied some ruabies, which they +apprehended had come from islands or cliffs at no great distance, though +they never came in sight of any. The Captain in the midst of these +tumults gave them fair words; told them, that it was probable, the +Spanish accounts might be the best, and encouraged them by giving them +hopes, that, as the breeze continued, a few days patience would put an +end to their troubles. On the 18th of May they met with some rain, and +the clouds settling in the west foretold their near approach to land. On +the 20th, the bark being near three leagues a-head, ran over a rocky +shoal, on which there was only four fathom water. On the shoal they +observed abundance of fish swimming every where about; and Captain Teat +imagining that land was near, clapt upon a wind with the bark’s head to +the north, and lay by to speak with the ship. When the ship came up, +Captain Teat went on board, and related what he had seen; on which, +being then in lat. 12 deg. 55 min. N. and Guam being laid down in 13 +deg. N. they clapt on a wind, and steered to the northward, very +doubtful, however, of being right, as no shoals near Guam are noticed in +the Spanish charts. They pursued this course, however, till four in the +afternoon; when, to their unspeakable joy, they saw the island of Guam +at eight leagues distance. “And happy it was, says Dampier, that we got +sight of it before our provisions were gone, of which we had but enough +for three days more; for, as I was afterwards informed, the crew had +combined first to kill Captain Swan, and eat him, when the victuals were +gone; and, after him, all of us who were accessary in promoting the +voyage.” + +Nothing can exhibit a more striking indication of the ferocity of man’s +nature, than the resolution formed by this abandoned crew. After a long +series of enormities, robberies, murders, burning of houses and towns, +exposing their fellow-creatures to want of food and shelter, and +spreading terror and devastation wherever they set their feet, they at +length, distressed and half-famished themselves, begin to murmur against +their leaders, and the greater number combine to murder the lesser +number, and to make food of their flesh. Need we, after reading this, +have recourse to those we call barbarous nations for instances of the +savage nature of man! The most uncultivated of those eat only the flesh +of enemies killed in war; but these wretches, who called themselves +christians, exceeded in their intention every horrid example we read of; +they conspired to kill and eat their own Chiefs! + +On the 21st of May they came to an anchor about the middle of the island +of Guam on the west side. This is one of the Ladrone islands. Dampier +places it in 13 deg. 21 min. N. and computes the meridian distance of +Guam from Cape Corientes to be about 7302 miles; and supposes the South +Sea to be of greater breadth by 25 degrees than is commonly allowed by +hydrographers. It is about twelve leagues in length and four in breadth; +on it the Spaniards have a small fort of six guns, garrisoned by 20 or +30 soldiers, and commanded by a Governor, and one or two subordinate +Officers. The climate is healthy, and the natives active, docile, and +ingenious, and are the best boat-builders throughout the Indian seas. +Dampier believes their boats sail the best of any in the world. He tried +one of them by the log; and, by the rate she ran in half a minute, +computes her course at 24 miles within the hour. These Indians are no +less dexterous in navigating than in building their boats. By report +they will pass to other islands at 30 leagues distance, do business, and +return again in 12 hours. + +They had no sooner cast anchor than a Spanish friar came on board, with +three Indians: Captain Swan received the priest with great civility told +him they came with no hostile intention, but as friends to purchase with +their money provisions to continue their voyage. The priest replied, +that provisions were now scarce upon the island, but would engage the +Governor to do his utmost to supply their wants. They thought proper, +however, to detain the padre till his promise was fulfilled. + +Next day a messenger was sent with letters and a present to the +Governor, and in the mean time two boats were manned, one to fish, and +another to purchase cocoa-nuts; the former returned empty, but the +latter came back laden. The Governor, on the receipt of the letters and +present, in token of friendship complimented the Captain with six hogs, +12 musk-melons, and as many water melons; and at the same time sent an +order to the Indians in the nearest town to bake every day as much +bread-fruit as the ships should require, and to assist the mariners in +gathering cocoa-nuts and other fruits; with which order the Indians very +readily complied. During this friendly intercourse the Manilla ship came +in sight; but, being first seen from the fort, the Governor found means +to apprize her of her danger, and she stood off, and escaped without +being discerned by the ships. But in steering to the southward to avoid +them, she was very near sharing a worse fate; for she struck upon the +shoal already mentioned, and, after three days incessant labour, floated +off with the loss of her rudder. During her distress the men got +intelligence of her situation; but Captain Swan, who had determined no +longer to follow the infamous employment of plundering, found means to +divert them from their purpose of attacking her. + +On the 30th of May the Governor sent his last present to Captain Swan, +consisting of some hogs, a jar of pickled mangoes, a jar of excellent +pickled fish, a jar of rusk or bread made of fine flour, and six or +seven packs of rice. In return, at his own request, he was furnished +with powder and shot of which he was in want; but what he coveted most +was a fine English dog which they had on board, with which he was +likewise gratified. The friar’s civility was rewarded with a brass +clock, an astrolabe, and a large telescope; in return for which he sent +the Captain six hogs, some bushels of potatoes, a roasting pig, and half +a hundred weight of fine Manilla tobacco. The ships were plentifully +supplied, besides, with every thing the island afforded; cocoa-nuts and +bread-fruit as many as the ships could stow, and upwards of 50 hogs in +pickle. Captain Swan was desirous of the Governor’s letter to the +merchants of Manilla, having a private view to trade, which he concealed +from his villainous crew. + +On the 2d of June, they departed from Guam, directing their course to +Mindanao, one of the Philippines; a range of islands extending in length +from the 5th to the 19th degree of North latitude, and occupying in +breadth about six degrees of longitude. The principal island in this +range is Luconia on the north, where Magellan, in his voyage round the +world, was slain with a poisoned arrow, and where the Spaniards made +their first settlement, and established at Manilla a mart of traffic +with the richest kingdoms of the east. + +On the south, Mindanao is the principal island. It is in length about 60 +leagues, and in breadth fifty. It is diversified with hills and vallies. +The hills abound with gold, and the vallies are covered with perpetual +verdure. It is finely watered with rivers and springs; and the plains +and lawns are interspersed with groves of lofty trees, some of which are +formed for shade, and some afford food for the inhabitants. + +Of the pith of one they make their bread, and of the sap of others they +make a pleasant drink. The marshy grounds abound with rice, and on the +dry hilly land they cultivate yams, potatoes, melons, and a variety of +vegetables unknown to Europeans. Their chief fruits are plantains, +bonanoes, nutmegs, cloves, beetel-nuts, durians, jaccas, cocoa-nuts, +bread-fruit, and oranges. + +The plantain Dampier calls the king of fruit, and prefers it to every +other. The tree that bears it is between three and four feet in +circumference, and rises about ten or twelve feet high. When at its +height, there springs from the top a stem about the size of a man’s arm, +round which the fruit grows in clusters, in shape not unlike the Turkey +cucumber, the coat of which is of a yellow colour when ripe. The +inclosed fruit is of a delicate flavour, and melts in the mouth like +mamalet. It is highly esteemed by all Europeans, and all their +settlements are furnished with plantain walks, some families subsisting +wholly upon that fruit. + +The bonanoe differs but little from the plantain, except in size, being +small and less luscious. + +The nutmeg and clove trees are rare in this island, but those that grow +are large and fine. The natives discourage their growth for fear of +exciting the jealousy of the Dutch, who have monopolized the whole trade +for spices, and who keep in pay a company of armed soldiers to cut down +the spice-trees in the uninhabited islands, lest other European nations +should avail themselves of their plenty. Dampier says, that he has been +assured that, in some of the eastern islands, it is usual to see, at the +shedding time, cloves three or four inches deep under the trees. + +Of the beetel-nut all the Eastern people are immoderately fond. It is +the fruit of a tree that grows like the cabbage-tree to the height of +ten or twelve feet, without either leaf or branch, and then sends forth +shoots on every side, among which the fruit is found in clusters, on +tough stalks about the bigness of a man’s finger. It is larger than a +nutmeg, and rounder; they cut it, when green, in quarters, wrapping each +quarter up in an arek-leaf, and chewing both together. It tastes rough, +dyes the lips red, and makes the teeth black. + +The durian grows on trees like apple-trees, and are in size as large as +pumpkins, covered with a thick rind, which, when ripe, opens and sends +forth a strong scent, not unlike that of roasted onions. It divides into +chives, each about the size of a pullet’s egg, the inside of which is of +the consistence of cream, and must be eaten in its prime, or there is no +enduring its rankness. + +The jacca differs very little from the durian; only the inside of the +former is yellow, and that of the latter white. + +The island of Mindanao abounds likewise with animals of various kinds; +and, according to Dampier, is one of the most plentiful islands in the +world; and, though so near the Equator, being in 7 deg. N. the air is +temperate, enjoying gentle sea breezes in the day, and cooling +land-winds in the night. + +Though they arrived on this coast about the middle of June, yet it was +the middle of July before they could come to an anchor. They were +ignorant of the situation of the chief town; and, arriving first on the +opposite side, had been all that time plying about the island in search +of it. At length they cast anchor near the river that bears the name of +the island, and leads to the chief city. They fired seven guns, and were +answered from the shore by three. They were presently after invited by a +Raja and one of the Emperor’s sons, who demanded in Spanish, who they +were, and from whence they came? They were answered by Mr. Smith (the +gentleman made prisoner at Leon), that they were English, and had been +long from their country. They were told, they were welcome; and asked if +they were come to settle a factory, and to open trade? They said, they +came only to purchase provisions. At which the Mindaneians appeared +disconcerted. Captain Swan was some time at a loss to account for this +circumstance; but he afterwards understood, that a Captain Goodluck had +been there some time before, with some proposals from the East-India +Company; and that, when he went away, he had given them some reason +shortly to expect an Ambassador from England, to complete the treaty. + +The Raja and Prince sat in their canoes; and, after half an hour’s +conversation, took their leave, having invited Captain Swan ashore, and +promised to assist him in procuring provisions. + +There are three small islands called Meangis, within 20 leagues of +Mindanao, that abound with gold and cloves; and, while Captain Swan was +beating along the coast, in his passage from Guam to the river where the +ships now were at anchor, they were observed by the Princes of that +country, and known to be English. The Prince of those islands, having +heard a good report of the English, and fearing a visit from the Dutch, +sent secretly his nephew to Captain Swan, to invite him and his company +to come and settle in his territories, offering every advantage in point +of trade and security that he should require. Nothing could have been +more advantageous, both to the nation and the settlers than this offer; +but Captain Swan paid no regard to it. + +As the season was now approaching when the westerly monsoon was about to +set in, which would necessarily oblige the ships to stay a considerable +time in the port of Mindanao, Captain Swan judged it his interest to +cultivate a good understanding with the reigning Sultan. With this view +he caused a magnificent present to be prepared for the Sovereign, +consisting of scarlet-cloth, gold lace, a Turkish scymetar enriched with +jewels, and a case of pistols, together with presents of less value to +his chief Ministers; and, being in readiness, he sent them on shore by +Mr. More, who sailed with him from London as chief supercargo, when his +design was to trade in the South Seas. These presents were graciously +received. The Sultan made Mr. More sit down by him, and asked him many +questions concerning England, by means of a Spanish interpreter; and, +after an hour’s conversation, dismissed him with marks of the highest +esteem. Next day Captain Swan was invited on shore, and admitted to an +audience in form; when the Sultan shewed him letters from the East-India +Company, and desired to know if he came to settle in consequence of +those letters? He talked with him much concerning the produce of his +country, and the nature of carrying on commerce; and seemed highly +entertained with the accounts he gave of it, and of the countries +through which he had passed, and the novelties he had seen. He was three +hours in close conversation; and, when he was dismissed, was entertained +by Raja Laut, the King’s uncle, with a sumptuous banquet, after their +manner, consisting of boiled rice, fish, and fowls. + + [Illustration: _Captain Swan Entertaind by the Raja Lout; Uncle to the + King of Mandanao._] + +On this occasion, Captain Swan was given to understand, that, while Mr. +Goodluck resided in that city, he had been robbed by a servant belonging +to Raja Laut, and that the fellow absconded till Mr. Goodluck took his +leave; but that he was now returned, and was ready to be delivered up to +be punished, in such manner and with such severity as crimes of the like +nature are punished by the laws of England. But Captain Swan told him, +that in his country none but the injured party could prosecute the +criminal; and, as the man had committed no offence against him, he could +take no cognisance of his crime. The Raja heard him with astonishment; +and, to shew that the Princes of Mindanao were far from countenancing +such practices, he caused the fellow to be stript naked, tied to a post, +and exposed a whole day with his face to the burning sun; while at the +same time the Moskitos continually tormented him without a possibility +of being able to brush them off; a kind of torture that few have +hardiness enough to survive. This condescension, in offering to deliver +up the criminal to be punished by the Captain, was followed by a like +offer from the Captain, with respect to any of his men who should offend +against the laws of the Mindaneians; but the Minister returned the +compliment, and left the punishment to the Captain himself, who, upon +the least complaint, punished his men with a severity that shewed more +of revenge than of justice, and which they afterwards look occasion to +resent. Among those who felt the effects of his indignation was Captain +Teat, his chief mate, who commanded the bark that accompanied him in his +run across the Southern Ocean; and others, who had offended him on +board, he remembered, now he had the countenance of the court on shore. + +Captain Swan was highly caressed by the Chiefs of Mindanao, and pressed +to stay and secure his ships from the approaching tempests, which always +attend the change of the monsoons; and, as the river before the rainy +season generally runs low, finding it difficult to float his ship over +the bar, fifty or sixty Mindaneian fishermen were immediately sent with +their canoes, to assist him in lightening his ship, and floating her up +the river. She was no sooner moored than a free intercourse with the +natives commenced. They expressed their regard for the English by signs +that were easily understood. When the Dutch were mentioned to them, they +would spread their fore-fingers half a foot apart, saying _Bujeto_, they +are so far distant in friendship: when speaking of the Spaniards, they +would spread their fingers still wider; but when the English were spoken +of, they would bring their fingers quite close, saying _Samo_, we are +all one. They were very fond of getting the men to their houses, where +they kindly entertained them, after their manner, with tobacco, and +beetel-nut; and where those who had money, and were decently dressed, +were pressed to connections with the best families, and courted by the +young females to the most familiar intimacy. To men who have long been +at sea, such inducements are irresistible; and many of them made +themselves poor by being too easily drawn in by these allurements to +spend their money lavishly. Some who accompanied Harris from the North +Seas had gold in abundance; and the Mindaneian misses, when they knew +their power, very soon found the way to ease them of it. In Mindanao +they had goldsmiths and other artificers, who charged double their value +for such baubles as these prodigals were for ever bespeaking to present +to their favourites; besides, some of them bought houses, and hired +servants, and lived as profusely as the Raja himself, imitating the +custom of the country, and having a pagelly or principal companion, and +half a dozen mistresses. It was not long before the town’s-people +discovered the true humour of English sailors, and they likewise took +care to make their advantage of it. As they had no other but gold in +lumps, when they wanted change, they gave them at the rate of 11 or 12 +dollars an ounce. To others the same gold was exchanged for 18 dollars. +The price of provisions and common necessaries was in like manner +enhanced by those spendthrifts; and thus, says Dampier, the poor were +made to suffer by the folly of the rich, and a foundation was laid for +imposing upon all Englishmen who should hereafter have occasion to take +up their residence in that port. + +Captain Swan himself was seldom seen at any other house but Raja Laut’s +or the royal palace. At the latter he made frequent visits, and at the +former dined every day, attended by such of his men as had no money to +spend, who had rice in plenty provided for them, and sometimes the +remains of fowls or pieces of buffalo, drest in a course, and served in +a hoggish manner. The Mindaneians use neither knives nor forks in +eating, and they cram their mouths with lumps as large as they can take +in, those being accounted the genteelest who can open their mouths the +widest. + +The religion of Mindanao is the Mahometan, and when the ships first cast +anchor, it was their _Ramadam_, which answers to our Lent, when all +sports and pastimes are suspended; on this account the Raja made an +apology for not entertaining the Captain with the usual diversions of +the country. The wet season too came on, which caused a general +suspension of all out-door business. + +During the month of August the weather became tempestuous, and the rains +excessive. The river swelled and overflowed its banks; and it was with +the utmost difficulty the ships were prevented from driving on the main +land, or into the open sea; for trees of vast magnitude came floating +down with the torrent, and frequently pressed against their bows with +such weight, that they were in continual fear lest their cables should +give way. During the time of these inundations the city stands, as it +were, in a pond, and there is no communication between house and house +till the floods abate. It was probably this circumstance that suggested +to them the manner of constructing their houses. They are all built upon +posts from 12 to 20 feet high. These posts are larger or smaller +according to the height or magnitude of the superstructure. The Sultan’s +palace has but one floor, on which, however, there are many rooms, to +which they ascend by stairs from the street. It stands upon 180 posts, +and is twenty feet above the level of the ground. The ordinary houses +are also of one floor, and ascended by ladders. The roofs are all +covered with palmeto leaves. The area beneath their houses is usually +fenced in, and there the poorer sort keep their poultry; and there also +is received the common draught of their sculleries; and, were it not for +the frequent inundations that carry off the soil, the nastiness of the +meaner people would render living in Mindanao impossible: but every +crevice is scoured clean by the violence of the currents, which +frequently overset the houses; though the posts on which they stand are +sunk deep in the ground. + +The inhabitants of Mindanao are, like all the Eastern people, very clean +in their persons; they constantly bathe every day once, and sometimes +oftener; they wash after every meal: and, if they happen to touch by +accident any unclean thing, they have their times of purification +allotted, before the expiration of which they are not permitted to leave +their chambers. Swine are held with them in abomination, and though they +run wild in the woods, yet they are never eaten. The chief food of the +people is rice, sago, plantains, bread-fruit, cocoa-nuts, and other +nutritious fruits; among the better sort, fowls and beef are used rather +by way of relish, than as solid subsistance; for they are boiled to rags +in their strange messes. + +The Mindaneians are of low stature, small limbs, straight bodies, little +heads, and are of a brown copper-colour. The women are fairer than the +men, and their hair is black and long, and generally well dressed. Their +visage too is rounder, and better featured than that of the men; only +their noses are small, and so flat between their eyes that the rising is +scarce discernible. At a distance they look tolerable, but on a nearer +approach these imperfections are rather disgusting. Their dress consists +of a petticoat and a loose jacket. The sleeves of the jacket are long +and wide at the shoulders, but sloping down to their wrists, where they +are so tight that it is with difficulty they get their hands through in +putting them on. They then rise in folds about the arm, and in that lies +their pride. The better sort of people wear fine callico or silks; the +meaner sort, an ordinary cloth made of the plantain-tree, which they +call saggen. The women, in general, (as has been noted) love the company +of strangers, especially of white men; and Dampier adds, that the men +belonging to the ships could scarce walk the streets without being +pulled into their houses. + +The chief artists among them are goldsmiths, ship-builders, carpenters, +and smiths; all of whom are excellent in their way, allowing for the +badness of their tools. Dampier gives a description of their smith’s +bellows, which is simple and ingenious. It is composed of two hollow +cylinders, like the large wooden pipes used by us for the conveyance of +water; they are cut flat at both ends, in length about four feet, and +placed upright at the distance of two feet from each other upon a stone +hearth before the fire. Within two inches of the bottom of each a pipe +is placed, projecting like a cock towards the fire, but bending so as +that the pipes from both cylinders meet and terminate in one before they +reach it. Thus constructed, and fixed firm, a man with two light brushes +made of feathers, which he works alternately like two pistons, keeps up +a continual blast; and with this simple contrivance, without either vice +or anvil, other than a large stone or the butt-end of an old cannon, +they fabricate their work to admiration. Their carpenters have neither +saws nor planes, and yet they split and smooth their boards with great +neatness. This requires time, but their work is the more durable for it, +because the grain being unbroken the timber remains the tougher. + +In Mindanao there is only one mosque, or place of worship, and that but +little frequented by the meaner people. In this mosque they have a +contrivance for striking the time. A drum of vast dimensions, shaped in +form of a bell, is placed over a large hollow cavity, the head of which +drum is covered with brass, and called a gong. A certain number of men +are appointed to attend this gong, who relieve each other alternately +night and day, and with a stick as large as a man’s arm, with a ball at +the end of it, at certain intervals, they strike the gong, the sound of +which is heard from one extremity of the town to the other, and supplies +the place of a clock. + +The Mindaneians use circumcision, and that operation is performed with +great ceremony. The usual time among the common people is about the age +of twelve; but the Princes of the blood are circumcised, like the Jews, +at the end of eight days. On this occasion, the warriors all appear in +arms, and, like Europeans at a review, make a sham-fight, for the +diversion of the spectators, in which both the Sultan and his General +are principal performers. + +When the waters were subsided, and the Ramadam over, Raja Laut, the +Sultan’s brother, and General of his forces, to entertain Captain Swan, +assembled the dancers, who are women bred from their infancy, like those +in Europe, to that art. On this occasion, more than 50 of them were +assembled, who, being ranged in a ring, danced to their own music. In +these dances their feet and legs are but little employed. Having no +other than vocal music, they sing at first solo parts in slow time; but +their chorusses are brisk; and then their hands, arms, heads, and +bodies, are all employed in such contortions, that one would think they +were made without bones. + +Dancing and processions were the favourite diversions among the Chiefs +of this island; and, Captain Swan, in conformity to the prevailing +taste, resolving to give an English entertainment, ordered his music +ashore, and such of his men as could dance were likewise ordered to +attend. Accordingly, having hired a convenient house, he invited the +Sultan, and Chiefs of the place, with their women, to be spectators of +the splendor of the European dances. He had caused the house to be hung +round with the richest silks, of which he had store on board and +decorated it with gold and silver-lace, which, when illuminated with a +profusion of wax-candles, made a most brilliant appearance. When the +company assembled, they were struck with amazement, and thought all they +beheld was the effect of enchantment. Among the dancers, there was one +Jack Thacker, a common sailor, who at the music-houses at Wapping had +learned to dance a horn-pipe. This man attracted the notice of the +Mindaneians more than all the rest, because more in the antic manner to +which they were accustomed. Him, therefore, they fixed their eyes upon, +and considered as a man of consequence. When they had spent the best +part of the night in feasting their eyes and their appetites (for +Captain Swan had ordered his cook to prepare a cold collation of +sweet-meats, and other savoury dishes), they were still unwilling to +retire; and it was almost day-break before the Sultan retired, and, very +unwillingly, was accompanied by his female train. Raja Laut and his +women staid longer; and, it is said, notwithstanding his devotion to his +prophet, drank plentifully of wine. + +Nothing was talked of so much among the Mindaneians, during the stay of +the ships, as the comic English dancer, of whom Raja Laut was willing to +know the history; and, having enquired, was told by one of his +companions, that he was an English nobleman who travelled for his +diversion, and that all those who wore fine cloaths were gentlemen of +inferior quality, who left their own country out of curiosity to see the +countries abroad. + +This harmless imposition, being told by the General to Captain Swan, who +was of a morose unsociable disposition, cost the poor fellow a hearty +drubbing, though he was wholly ignorant of what had been told. He was +first stript of his fine cloaths, in the presence of the Raja, by his +Captain’s orders, and then stript of his nobility by flogging his back. +It was not long, however, before the man was revenged. + +About the middle of November they began to prepare for their departure, +and for that purpose their first business was to examine the ships +bottoms, the sheathing of which they found eaten by the worm like a +honey-comb; and the bottom of the bark not being sheathed, was eaten to +the timbers, and the vessel thereby rendered unserviceable: application +was therefore made to the Raja for planks to new sheathe the ship. The +Raja’s sincerity was never suspected, till this incident gave reason for +jealousy. When he came down to the river, and saw the carpenters ripping +off the sheathing, he shook his head, and seemed much disconcerted, +declaring he had never before seen a ship with two bottoms. His hope +was, that the ship, like the bark, would have been eaten through, and +that he should have had all her guns. A like accident had formerly +entitled him to a like advantage, when a Dutch ship, by anchoring in the +same river during the westerly monsoon, was entirely disabled, and never +again put to sea. He was sensible enough of the mischief that would +infallibly ensue to the ships by lying so long among those destructive +vermin; for, whenever the natives disuse their vessels, they haul them +up on the dry beach, burn their bottoms, and there let them lie, till +they want again to use them. + +While some were employed in ripping off the old worm-eaten planks, +others were busy in preparing new and, by the beginning of December, the +sheathing was repaired and tallowed. The latter part of the month was +taken up in putting the ballast, stores, and guns aboard: this was a +work of the greater labour, as it was first necessary to carry the ship +out to sea before it was undertaken. About the beginning of January they +began to fill water, and to take in rice; and application was made to +Raja Laut to furnish buffaloes, as he had all along promised to do. He +now began to form excuses, and pretended to take men out every day +a-hunting (for those creatures always run wild); but always came home +empty, and pleaded ill success. The Captain too began to act very +mysteriously. By the help of the government on shore, he had got the +absolute ascendancy over his men, and was as implicitly obeyed as if he +had been Captain of a king’s ship. When he was importuned to declare +when he intended to sail, he chose to be silent; and when the men wanted +to know upon what enterprize they were next to be employed, he +reproached them with their eagerness for piracy. He had sold Raja Laut +some tons of iron and lead, and was to have had in return rice and beef; +as to the first, the Raja had failed in furnishing the stipulated +quantity, and the latter he had hitherto in no shape fulfilled. The Raja +had besides borrowed of him 20 ounces of gold; and, when he required +payment, the Raja demanded a much larger sum for his own board, and the +board of his men. This treatment, and these disappointments, served to +discompose a mind naturally sour, and to put him out of humour with +every body about him. + +All this while the westerly monsoon was wasting that was to carry them +on to India. The men began again to murmur, and grow unruly: some, weary +of rambling about, and who had formed connections with the natives, were +for staying at Mindanao: some, who had husbanded their money, of whom +indeed there were but few, were eager to get home; and others, who were +poor (by far the majority), were for continuing their ravages, and were +impatient to be in action. + +While matters were in this situation, strong representations were made +to the Captain to come on board, and to declare himself; and, after many +delays, a day was at length fixed for a determination. + +In the mean time, those who were bent on returning home, foreseeing that +continued extravagancies would necessarily create new wants, and that +new wants would require new means of supply, took occasion secretly to +purchase a canoe, and formed a design to depart in the night for Borneo, +where, by a letter just received from thence by a Mindaneian vessel, +they hoped to meet with an English factory, and from thence find a +passage home; but Captain Swan getting intelligence of their design, +seized their canoe, and threatened to punish for deserters all those +concerned in the plot. + +Another party about the same time, hearing that the ship was about to +sail, retired into the country, to conceal themselves till after her +departure. + +The party on board, who had nothing but the ship’s allowance to subsist +on, became unruly, and sent ashore to the merchants iron to sell for +arrack and honey, with which they made themselves drunk, and grew +quarrelsome. All these disorders, Dampier says, might easily have been +redressed, had Captain Swan exerted his authority in time, and +established proper discipline on board the ship; but he living with his +merchants constantly on shore, and leaving every one to do as he pleased +on board, they encouraged one another in their villainies, and at length +grew mutinous. + +When these things were come to extremity, he gave orders that the whole +crew should attend him on board the ship, on the 13th of January [1687]; +but, unluckily for him, two days before this meeting was to take place, +Captain Swan sent his gunner to fetch something he had occasion for out +of the locker of his cabin. This man, in rummaging for what he wanted, +among other things happened to take out the Captain’s journal, which, +being laid carelesly by, was taken up by one John Read, (an ingenious +young man, who likewise kept a journal) out of mere curiosity to peep in +it, to see how nearly his and the other agreed. + +At the first opening of the book he cast his eye on a part in which the +Captain had made a memorandum of the mutinous behaviour of his men in +their passage from Cape Corientes to Guam, and had particularly noted +that of one John Read, a Jamaica-man, a namesake of the Read who took +the journal, but no relation. This naturally excited his curiosity to +look farther, and he found means, while the gunner was busy, to convey +the journal away to examine it at his leisure. As soon as the gunner was +gone ashore, John Read, the artist, shewed the book to John Read, the +Jamaica-man, and both of them held a consultation with their comrades on +the contents. These men, who were before ripe for mischief, now grew +outrageous, and it was unanimously agreed to consult Captain Teat, who, +as has been before noted, had received unworthy treatment from Captain +Swan on shore, which, they knew, he only wanted an opportunity to +resent. Teat left nothing unsaid to aggravate the failings of his +superior, and to incense the company against him. He represented him as +proud, ignorant, avaricious, cruel, and vindictive, and withal cowardly +and unfit to command upon any bold and manly enterprize; called to their +minds the opposition he made to the attacking the Manilla ship off Guam, +by the conquest of which they would all have been enriched; and which, +he said, Swan did not oppose out of a principle of honesty or gratitude, +but from the fear of engaging a ship so much superior to his own in +weight of metal and in numbers, though he, Teat, would have pawned his +head to have been master of her in a few hours close attack. Men whose +expectations have been raised to an unreasonable pitch, give easy credit +to unfavourable suggestions against the authors of their disappointment. +The crew took fire, and instantly bound themselves by an oath to deprive +Captain Swan of the command, without naming any officer to substitute in +his room; nay, so precipitate was their resolution, that the majority +were for setting sail immediately, and leaving all that were on shore +behind: and this hasty resolve would certainly have taken place, had +either of the surgeons been on board; but, as their cry was for war, it +was judged too desperate to go to sea without one skilful person on +board to assist the wounded. + +As all this passed in the night, it was agreed to stay till morning, and +then to send a trusty messenger on shore, speedily to request the +surgeons to come to the assistance of a man who had broken his leg. The +chief surgeon said he should see the man the next day, and in the mean +time sent his mate, Mr. Herman Coppinger, to his immediate relief. This +man, a few days before, was sleeping at his mistress’s, when a snake +twisted itself round his neck, but quietly went away upon his waking +without hurting him. Coppinger, supposing the accident real, made haste +to pack up his moveables to go on board; and, as the Captain was to have +his general rendezvous the next day, Dampier took the opportunity of +going with him. They scarce had mounted the ship’s side before they +discovered the trick. But when the mutineers were thus in possession of +the surgeon, they presently dispatched the canoe to shore again to +invite all the men who chose it to come on board, but with a strict +caution not to tell the reason, lest their design should reach the ears +of their captain. + +The 13th in the morning they weighed, and fired a gun. The Captain, much +alarmed, immediately dispatched Mr. Nelly, his mate, to know the cause. +To him they told their grievances, and shewed the journal; he persuaded +them to stay till next day to hear what the Captain and merchants had to +say. They did so, and Mr. Harthop came on board in the morning. He +advised them to a reconciliation, and to take more rice on board. They +were deaf to his persuasion; yet at his entreaty they staid till two in +the afternoon to wait for the Captain and such gentlemen or seamen as +chose to accompany them, but suffered none to go ashore, except Mr. +Harthop and a man with a wooden leg. Dampier remarks, that, if Captain +Swan had then come on board, as a man of sense and spirit ought to have +done, he might at the very last have crusht their designs, and reduced +the mutineers to order and discipline; but being of a sullen, +suspicious, vindictive temper himself, he dreaded the resentment of +those he had marked for vengeance; and therefore suffered the time to +elapse, and was with 36 others left behind in the town. Besides these, +six or eight had deserted and were up the country; and sixteen had died +of poison, given them, as was supposed, by the husbands of those women +whom they had seduced; and there were others on board, who had received +the poison, and died of it some months after. In this manner their +numbers were considerably diminished, and of 150 who sailed from Cape +Corientes, not above 80 were now on board. + +It has been more than once hinted, that Captain Swan sailed from London +with no design of privateering, but of carrying on trade with the +Spaniards on the western coasts of America. He had therefore a great +quantity of heavy goods, such as iron and lead, not yet disposed of, +some of which he had sold to Raja Laut, and no doubt was willing to have +received the payment before he departed. This may, in some measure, +account for his delay. His crew was composed of men, who, most of them, +had forced themselves upon him for purposes which he abhorred; and, +perhaps, he wanted to have rid himself of the greatest part of them, if +he could have found a proper opportunity. Those marked in his journal +were, no doubt, the men most obnoxious to him, and the most averse to +trade, which he was determined to follow in his way home, having already +5000l. of his owners money, which he had received for the goods put up +by auction at his first commencing buccaneer; with this he purposed to +have purchased a cargo to take with him from the East-Indies. Hence +arose his mysterious conduct, and his want of resolution. The loss of +his bark was his embarrassment. Could that have been rendered +serviceable, his design could more easily have been carried into +execution. The suspicious part of the crew might have been shipped on +board the bark; and by giving them a wrong track, they might have been +deserted in the night, and left to their own course. But a discovery +being made before the Captain’s designs were ripe for execution, he was +entangled in his own net. + +But to return: On the 14th of January, 1687, at three o’clock in the +afternoon, they set sail from the river Mindanao, and next day came +a-breast of Chambango, where formerly the Spaniards had a settlement, +and where, it is said, there were plenty of swine and buffaloes. On the +17th, they anchored in a good bay on the west side of a small island, +where they chose their Officers, constituting John Read the Jamaica-man +Captain, Thomas Teat Master, and Henry More Quarter-master; and, having +cut some curious short-jointed canes, and plentifully supplied the ship +with water from a clear spring, they pursued their course; but on their +passage they struck on a rock, where after lying two hours, they were +heaved off by the rising of the tide, and escaped with the loss only of +a large piece of their rudder, though in more danger than ever they had +experienced in the whole voyage. + +On the 18th, they anchored at the north-west end of the island of +Mindera, in 10 fathom water. While they lay there a canoe with four +Indians from Manilla came along side, who informed them, that at Manilla +there was seldom less than 20 or 30 sail of ships of different nations, +who came to traffic with the Spanish merchants; and that, if they meant +to trade, they might for a trifle have a letter of recommendation from a +friar to whom they were carrying dispatches, and would in a few days +return with his answer. Trade, however, was no part of their employment; +and the Indians were suffered to pass without molestation. + +On the 23d, they reached Luconia, the island so ardently wished for by +this piratical crew, and presently descried a sail, which they instantly +pursued and took. She proved a Spanish bark from Pangassanam, laden with +rice and cotton-cloth, and bound for Manilla. The master of this prize +was boatswain to the Acapulco ship that passed by Guam; this man gave +Dampier an account of all that happened on that occasion. The time of +the year being too far spent to effect any thing of consequence on this +coast, they concluded to sail for Pulo Condore, and there wait till the +latter end of May, about which time the Acapulco ship generally arrives +at Manilla. With this resolution they quitted Luconia on the 26th of +February; and, on the 14th of March, cast anchor at the island of +Condore, on the coast of Cambodia. Among the productions of these +islands (for there is a cluster of them), there is a lofty tree, the +body of which is in diameter three or four feet, from which the +inhabitants extract a clammy juice, which being boiled becomes a perfect +tar, and answers all the purposes of that balsam. On the 16th, they +entered a convenient harbour, and employed themselves in careening their +ships, in which they were assisted by the natives of the island, who +brought them hogs and turtle in exchange for rice, of which they had now +great plenty. + +While they lay in this harbour, two of the men died who had been +poisoned in Mindanao; they were opened by the surgeon, and their livers +were found black, light, and dry, like pieces of cork. + +Before they departed, they engaged an old native who could speak the +Malayan language, to pilot them to Siam, where they expected to purchase +dried fish, having nothing now but rice to eat at sea. + +On the 21st of April they sailed from Condore, and, on the 24th, +anchored in the bay of Siam, where, however, they could get no fish. On +the 21st of May they left Siam and, in their return to Pulo Condore, +overtook a Chinese junk, laden with pepper, who told them that the +English were settled on the island of Sumatra, at a place called +Sillebar, which was the first intelligence they received of that +factory. This junk accompanied them to Pulo Condore, where Captain Read, +observing a Malayan vessel at anchor within shore, sent a canoe to learn +from whence they came; but, knowing the Malayans to be desperate +fellows, cautioned his men not to trust themselves on board, but to hail +them from the boat: but the men, not regarding the Captain’s +instructions, went on board armed; which the Malayans observing, fell +upon them unawares with their short daggers, and stabbed five or six of +them dead upon the spot; the rest jumped into the sea, and saved +themselves by swimming, among whom was one Daniel Wallis, who never +could swim before or since, but in his fright made shift to reach the +boat, and made his escape with the rest. Here Herman Coppinger, the +surgeon, went on shore, on purpose to leave this diabolical company; but +Read sent an armed force, and pressed him on board again. Dampier +intended following his example, but waited a more convenient place. + +They were now confined at this island by stormy weather till the 4th of +June; and in the mean time a Malayan Portuguese from the junk entered on +board, whom they entertained as an interpreter, to facilitate an +intercourse with the natives. When they weighed anchor, the wind was +contrary; yet they kept plying to the westward in hopes of its shifting +to carry them to Manilla, before their much longed-for prize should +arrive. In this hope they continued labouring incessantly for 10 days; +when, being almost worn out with fatigue, and finding no probability of +accomplishing their desires, they relinquished that project in despair, +and, instead of it, stood away for Prata, in lat. 20 deg. 40 min. N. +where they flattered themselves with fishing up much treasure from the +China ships that had been cast away on that island, some of which were +said to contain immense riches. But in this too they were disappointed +by adverse winds; and, notwithstanding the utmost exertion of their +skill in seamanship, they were driven by the violence of the gale to the +island of St. John, on the coast of China. While they lay at this island +they visited the shore every day, and purchased hogs, fowls, and +buffaloes. Some of the men visited the continent, but found nothing +there that answered their purpose. + +On the 3d of July they weighed anchor with a gentle breeze, but on the +4th there came on a violent gale from the north-east, which increased +till the dead of the night, when the rain began to pour down in such +torrents that the fountains of heaven seemed to be opened, and a second +deluge threatened; at the same time the thunder began to crack, and the +flashes of lightning that pierced through the torrents of rain, appeared +upon the face of the deep as if the sea was overspread with a blue +flame. The darkness that succeeded between the flashes presented the +most horrid gloom that ever covered the deep. The sea was raised to an +astonishing height, and the waves broke short upon the ship with such +violence, that it was thought every succeeding billow must have dashed +her to the bottom. One sea struck away the rails of the head, and at the +same time dislodged the sheet-anchor that was lashed with its fluke over +the bend of the ship in the strongest manner, and it was every moment +expected to beat a hole through the ship, by striking against her bows. +It then became necessary to steer right before the wind, to endeavour to +secure the anchor; and it was impossible afterwards to change the course +till the storm abated. The fury of the storm abated about four in the +morning, about which time they observed what the sailors call a _Corpus +Sant_ at the mast-head. This meteor is seen at sea, sometimes at the +mast-head, sometimes at the yard-arm, and sometimes upon the deck. When +it appears aloft it is like a star, and is taken for a good omen; but +when below, it resembles a glow-worm, and always dreaded as a bad sign. +The crew was overjoyed on seeing it at the very pinnacle of the ship’s +fane. + +From two in the morning till seven they kept scudding before the wind; +but the wind gradually dying away, and the sea subsiding, they set their +mizzen, brought the ship up upon a wind, and lay to under their mizzen +till eleven, when for two hours there ensued a perfect calm, yet the sky +looked black and lowring. About one the wind shifted to the south-west, +and began again to blow hard, with violent rain. They furled up their +mizzen, wore ship, and suffered her to scud before the wind, as before, +till ten at night, when the wind ceased, and before morning the sea was +calm, and the sky perfectly serene. This storm, however, dispirited the +crew, who were now driven out of their knowledge, and were anxious for +nothing but a place of shelter to preserve them from the fury of a +second hurricane, which they had reason to expect towards the full of +the moon. + +They consulted their sea-charts, and concluded to steer for the +Piscadores, islands situated in lat. 23 deg. N. of which, however, they +knew nothing but the name. On the 20th of July they came in sight of +them; and when they arrived were astonished to see so many junks passing +and re-passing as were continually in sight. They followed some of the +largest into a spacious harbour, which brought them to a considerable +town, such as they did not expect to have found among islands so little +known. On their attempting to land, they were met by a Tartarian +Officer, who demanded, whence they came, of what nation they were, and +whither they were bound? And being told they were English, and driven +there in distress, they were kindly entertained; but were told, they +must not come on shore; but whatever necessaries they wanted should be +sent them on board without delay. Mutual civilities were exchanged. The +ship was supplied with the best provisions they had ever tasted and the +Captain in return sent a curious Spanish silver-hilted rapier, an +English carbine, and a gold chain, as a present to the Governor. They +staid till the 29th, and then directed their course to a cluster of +islands that lie between Formosa and Luconia, the place they still set +their hearts upon. On the 6th of August they came in sight of the +islands they were in pursuit of, and, contrary to expectation, found +them well inhabited. + +On these islands were plenty of goats and swine, but very few birds or +poultry. It is an observation of Dampier, founded on reason and +confirmed by experience, that, in countries abounding in corn and maize, +birds and all manner of fowls are bred in abundance; but in those +islands where the inhabitants subsist chiefly on fruits, roots, and +fish, birds wild and tame are more rare. + +As these islands were without names in the sea-charts, Captain Read +called them all by one general name of Bashee Islands. The situation of +their towns was remarkable. They were built on precipices inaccessible +on every side, except by ladders placed at the ends of the streets, +which all ran in lines parallel to each other, and on which the houses +rise in ranges one above another, till they terminate in a single row. +The inhabitants of these islands were acquainted with the use of iron, +and they had amongst them a yellow metal that very much resembled gold, +for some of which Captain Read exchanged iron; and Dampier laments that +he could purchase none of it, because he had nothing to bestow in +return. They were very ingenious, had large fishing-boats, and lived in +a peculiar manner different from any people they had yet visited. They +were not very delicate in their food; for they would gather up the +goats-skins and goats-paunches which the men threw away; and would +singe, broil, and eat the former; the latter they would stew (not over +nicely cleansed), and, mincing raw fish very small, would mix the mess +together, and with a little salt over it, make a very savoury meal. The +paunches of the swine they never touched. They appeared to be very +cleanly in their persons, and withal so honest and good natured, that +they would take nothing but what was given them; nor were they ever out +of humour with the strangers, though they had often cause enough, nor +with one another. No provocation could incense them to anger; nor any +opportunity induce them to theft. They brought constantly every morning +goats, hogs, potatoes, and fruits, to the ship, which they exchanged for +iron, nails, old hoops, or bullets. Thus the crew of the ship fared +sumptuously every day, and salted 70 or 80 hogs for future use. These +islands lie in lat. 20 deg. 21 min. N. + +Being now sufficiently stored with provisions, and having filled their +casks with water, after staying from the 13th of August till the 24th of +September, and after having mended their sails, and scrubbed the ships +bottom, they were preparing to sail, when a violent storm came on, which +forced them to cut their cables and put to sea, leaving six of their +best men on shore. + +They put before the wind with their bare poles; but it was the 1st of +October before they could recover to their former station. On the +following day their six men were brought on board by the natives, whom +they rewarded with three bars of iron, a present to them more valuable +than so many bars of solid gold. The men reported, that, as soon as the +ship was out of sight, the natives were more kind to them than ever; +that they endeavoured to prevail upon them to cut their hair short, like +theirs; and that they offered to each the choice of a wife, with a small +hatchet, a set of planter’s tools, and a portion of land for each of +them to cultivate by way of dowry; and, when the ship came in sight +again, they then importuned them for iron, which was the only recompense +they required. + +This second storm quite disconcerted all their measures. They began to +think that the winds and the waves were employed against them, and were +terrified with the thoughts of their unhappy situation. Most of them +were heartily weary of being tost to and fro to no manner of purpose, +and were very desirous of getting home: only Read and Teat were +determined to make their fortunes at whatever risque; they therefore, +finding the crew resolute to leave this dangerous coast, persuaded them +to accompany them to Cape Comorin, where, if they disapproved of their +proceedings, every one should be at liberty to follow his own course. To +this they all agreed; but these freebooters, fearing to meet English or +Dutch ships in the direct road, proposed to coast along the east side of +the Philippines, and so, keeping south towards the spice islands, to +pass into the Indian ocean near the island of Timor. With this view they +let sail on the 3d of October, 1687; and leaving the island of Luconia +on the west, “with all our golden projects,” says Dampier, “along with +it, we stood to the southward till we came in sight of the island St. +John on the coast of Mindanao, and on the 16th came to an anchor on the +south-east side of that island.” While they lay in this bay, the young +prince of Meangis, formerly mentioned, came on board, and importuned +Captain Read to transport him and his men back to his own island, +promising to reward him handsomely for his trouble. He said, that a few +days before he had seen Captain Swan and some of his people all well at +the city of Mindanao; that they had accompanied Raja Laut in a military +expedition against his enemies, and had acquired great honour and were +in high favour with the Sultan; that Captain Swan was preparing to leave +the island; and that he had offered 40 ounces of gold for a ship to +carry him off, but did not think the Raja would suffer him to depart. +Captain Read promised to stay for the prince three days, and in that +time he engaged to return with his men. In the mean time Dampier took +occasion to sound how the crew stood affected towards their old Captain, +and found one party, who happened to be filling water ashore, very well +inclined; and he desired them to be silent till he had consulted the +other party whose turn it was next day to fill water at the same place; +but one of the company, who appeared to be the most zealous in Swan’s +favour, as soon as he got aboard discovered the secret; on which Read +and Teat ordered all hands on board and weighed directly. + +Dampier says he was afterwards informed, that Captain Swan and his men +continued long at Mindanao; that Messieurs Harthop and Smith, merchants, +both died there; that Rofy and Nelly, his mates, got passage in a Dutch +ship to Batavia, and from thence, after various adventures, to Europe; +and that Swan himself, with his surgeon, endeavouring to get on board +another Dutch ship, were run down and drowned by the natives by order of +Raja Laut, who seized their gold. Among other reasons assigned for this +treachery, Dampier mentions Swan’s threatening, on some provocation, to +raise a band of men to destroy the town, and seize upon the country. Be +this as it may, the poor Captain lost his life, and the Raja kept his +money. Part of his journal, as far as Cape Corientes, was recovered and +preserved by a Mr. Moody, of whom mention will be made hereafter. + +On November the 2d, the day the prince was to have come on board, +Captain Read set sail, and stood to the west, till on the 9th, the wind +changing, they came up with the north-east end of the island of Celebes, +in lat. 3 deg. N. 30 leagues to the southward of Gilolo, on the western +side of which lie the clove islands of Tidore and Ternate, the finest in +the world. At the southermost end of Celebes the town of Macasser is +seated, the chief place of trade in those parts belonging to the Dutch. + +They anchored in a sandy bay on the south-east side of Celebes, where +they found a creeping kind of vine, the leaves of which pounded and +boiled with hog’s-lard is an infallible cure for old ulcers. The men, +knowing its virtues, crammed their chests with it; and one man, whose +legs were ulcerated, was perfectly cured by the use of it. + +Here they cut down a tree 18 feet in circumference, and 44 feet in clean +body. It proved unsound, and therefore unfit for the purpose they +intended it, which was that of a canoe; they therefore left it, and set +sail. + +On the 30th, they sailed south; and in the afternoon they had a violent +tornado, and saw a spout. This phenomenon appears at first like a small +ragged cloud, hanging sloping from a black heavy cloud above, small at +the bottom, seemingly no bigger than a man’s arm. Underneath this the +sea begins to be in gentle agitation, and gradually proceeds to foam and +froth till a violent whirling ensues, and then it flies upwards in a +pillar, the base of which may be about one hundred paces in compass, but +lessening gradually till it decreases to the size of the spout, with +which it meets, and through which the rising sea-water seems to be +conveyed to increase the cloud. As soon as the water reaches the spout, +you then see the cloud, that was at rest before, drive along with +incredible swiftness, sucking up the water in its course, and causing a +furious wind to fly before it. Thus it will continue sometimes half an +hour, sometimes longer, till breaking off, all the water that remains +below the spout falls down again into the sea, with a dreadful noise and +violent agitation of the waves. Dampier relates, that one Captain +Records, of London, being on the coast of Guinea, in the year 1674, in a +ship of 300 tons, was overtaken by one of these spouts, which broke +before he could well furl his sails to receive it. On its breaking, it +made the same kind of noise as if a castle or some immense building had +been plunged from a great height into the sea, and raised the billows in +proportion to its height. The fury of the wind, at the same time, took +the ship on the starboard bow, and snapt off the boltsprit and foremast +both at once like rotten sticks, and drove the ship along ready to +overset her; but the ship presently righting, and the wind whirling +round, took her again on the opposite quarter, and snapt the mizzen-mast +as the fore-mast and boltsprit had been snapt before. Three men were in +the fore-top when the fore-mast broke, and one on the boltsprit, when +they fell into the sea; but all were saved, and the ship with difficulty +carried into port. + +December 1st, they continued to move slowly along, and on the 4th they +came up with the north-west end of the island of Bouton, where their +strikers killed some turtle, and brought with them an Indian who +conducted them to a harbour, where they had an interview with the +Sultan, and where they were permitted to purchase whatever they wanted, +and where Captain Read was presented by the Sovereign with a little boy +who had a double set of teeth, one set within another, on each jaw. + +On the 12th, they took leave of the Sultan, and were about weighing +anchor; but when they expected it to rise, being hooked to a rock, the +cable came home without it. As soon as they were loose, finding the +anchor irrecoverable, they steered to the south-east, and fell in with +some islands five or six leagues from Callasusung harbour. They appeared +very green; and as they passed them in the night they heard drums +beating, but whether for mirth, or spreading an alarm, they knew not. + +On the 20th, they passed the island of Omba, and saw in it many smoaks +by day, and fires by night, but observed no inhabitants. From Omba they +passed by Timor, where, meeting with tornados and strong gales of wind, +they endeavoured to get clear of the shoals, and stood off south, +intending to touch at New Holland to try what that country would afford. + +On the 4th of January, 1688, they fell in with the coast of New Holland +in lat. 16 deg. 50 min. S. and, steering close in, came to a point from +whence the land trends east and southerly for 10 or 12 leagues, but how +far southerly Dampier says he does not know. That able navigator, +however, pronounced, that, if it was not a continent, it neither joined +to Asia, Africa, nor America. They fell in upon the west side, and +examined but a small part of this vast tract of land, of which Captain +Cook, in his late voyage round the world in the Endeavour, traversed the +eastern coast for near 2000 miles, and has left it still doubtful +whether it is island or continent. There is a remarkable difference +between Dampier’s description of the part he visited on the west, and +that described by Captain Cook in the same latitude on the east side. +“The land,” says Dampier, “is of a dry sandy soil, destitute of water, +except you make wells. There are divers sorts of trees; but the woods +are not thick, nor the trees large. Most of them were dragon-trees, of +the size of apple-trees--we compared the gum with the gum-dragon we had +aboard, and found it the same--we saw no trees that bore fruit. We saw +no animal, nor any track of animal but one, and that was of a beast of +the size of a mastiff-dog--few land-birds, and none bigger than a +blackbird--few sea-fowls--few fish, turtle and manatee excepted. The +inhabitants are the most miserable people in the world--without +houses--without cloathing--without conveniences of any kind--and, +setting aside their human shape, very little different from brutes. They +are tall, straight bodied, thin, and small limbs; they have great heads, +round fore-heads, and large brows. Their eyelids are always half-closed; +they have great bottle-noses, full lips, wide mouths, and the two +fore-teeth in the upper jaw wanting in all of them; but whether they +draw them out or not, I know not. [Captain Cook says, those on the +opposite side have their teeth entire.] They are long-visaged--without +beards--of an unpleasing aspect, with no one graceful feature in their +faces--their hair black, short, and curled like negroes--and their +colour coal-black. They live in companies, 20 or 30 men, women, and +children, together--their food is fish, and their manner of catching +them is in weirs across little inlets of the sea, in which every tide +leaves some--they have no instruments to take great fish--in other +places they fish for cockles, muscles, periwinkles, but of these there +are but few--of what they catch all partake alike--all watch the +tides--for all depend upon the sea for their support; the earth +producing neither herb, root, pulse, or any sort of grain. These poor +creatures, adds Dampier, have a sort of weapons, consisting of a piece +of wood shaped somewhat like a cutlass, and a long straight pole with a +sharp end hardened in the fire: with these they made a shew of +frightening us; but on firing one gun, they all ran away frighted.” + +Such is the description given by Dampier of the people of the north part +of New Holland; and it is not a little astonishing, that a man, by once +touching upon their coast, could so minutely describe a people with whom +he could no otherwise converse but by signs and gestures. The crew made +an acquaintance with some of them, and gave them meat, which they +readily devoured, but paid no regard to the ship, nor did they seem to +admire any thing that was shewn or offered to them. While the ship +remained here, where nothing was to be gotten, Dampier endeavoured to +persuade the men to carry her to some English factory; but that too +being told the Commanders, he was threatened to be set ashore, and left +among these miserable beings. + +On the 12th of March they quitted New Holland, with a view to sail to +the isle of Cocos, in lat. 12 deg. 12 min. S. but the wind being +contrary, they chose to bear away to the islands on the west of Sumatra, +with which Dampier says he was well pleased, as he then might have an +opportunity of making his escape from them. They met with nothing worth +notice till the 28th, when they fell in with a woody island, where they +killed boobies and men-of-war birds as many as the ship’s company could +eat, and where they found a land animal resembling a large crab without +its great claws, such as Sir Francis Drake met with in the island of +Ternate, and which being dressed was excellent meat. These creatures +burrow in the ground like rabbits, and two of them were as much as a man +could eat. + +They made but a short stay at this island; and, proceeding on their +course, on the 7th of April they came in sight of the high land of +Sumatra; and on the 13th they came to a small island called Triste, 14 +or 15 leagues to the west of Sumatra, where they loaded their boats with +cocoa-nuts, and struck some turtle to supply their table, having now +nothing but rice to live upon. + +They continued cruising among the islands to the west of Sumatra; and, +on the 29th, they came in sight of a sail, to which they gave chace, and +on the 30th they took her. She proved a proa, with four men belonging to +Achin, laden with cocoa-nuts and cocoa-nut oil. They took out of her as +much as they thought fit, bored a hole in her bottom, and sunk her, +keeping the four men prisoners. All this coast is known to the English +by the name of the West-coast, without adding the name of Sumatra; and +the prisoners shewed the channels and openings to the island of Achin, +where the English had a factory, to which many on board wished to find a +passage. + +The 4th of May they came in sight of one of the Nicobar islands, the +southernmost of which lies about 40 leagues to the N. N. W. of Sumatra. +The inhabitants of these islands are independent of every other people, +and trade with the ships of every nation indifferently that happen to +touch upon their coast. Their chief commodities are ambergrease and +fruits, the former of which they adulterate abominably; and Captain +Welden, who touched at these islands a few weeks before their arrival, +purchased some at a low price that was worth nothing. + +On the 5th of May they anchored at the N. W. end of the island of +Nicobar, properly so called, in lat. 7 deg. 30 min. N. Here Dampier +quitted the free-booters, but not without some difficulty. He knew it +was impossible to do it by stealth; and therefore asked Captain Read, as +soon as he learned that the ship was about to sail, to set him on shore +on this island. He says, he had another motive for staying at this +particular place, besides that of leaving Captain Read, which he always +intended, and that was, that he had here a prospect of commencing a +profitable trade for ambergrease with these people, and of gaining a +considerable fortune to himself; for, by rowing with the natives, and +conforming to their customs and manner of living, he imagined he should +be able to learn how they got their ambergrease, and likewise the whole +secret of preparing it. Captain Read, thinking this as obscure a place +as any, and being willing, no doubt, to be rid of a man who was for ever +exciting the company to oppose him, very readily consented; and Dampier +as readily took him at his word. In an instant he got all his moveables +together, and stowing them in the ship’s canoe, he prevailed upon some +of the people to row him ashore, and to land him on a sandy bay, near to +which were two houses, but without inhabitants. He had not been landed +an hour before Captain Teat and three or four armed men came to fetch +him on board again. He tells us, that if a cabbin-boy had been sent for +him he should have returned; but he no sooner entered the ship than he +found the whole crew in an uproar, several others, encouraged by his +example, insisting to be set ashore likewise, among whom was Herman +Coppinger, the surgeon, who having jumped into the boat with a gun in +his hand, swore he would shoot dead the first man that opposed him; yet +John Oliver, the quarter-master, leapt into the canoe to him, and +wrenched the gun from him: he was presently followed by others, who +forced Coppinger again on board. When this tumult was appeased, and the +surgeon again in their possession, they suffered Dampier, with two other +malcontents (a Mr. Hall, and a sailor named Ambrose), to depart quietly; +and the man who rowed them on shore, having concealed an ax, gave it +them at parting, well knowing what a valuable present it would be to +conciliate them to the Indians. These three Englishmen were soon joined +by the four prisoners taken from the Achinese proa, and the mongrel +Portuguese, formerly taken from the Chinese junk, all of whom Captain +Read set on shore before he departed. They were now eight in number; +and, having concluded to leave the island, and row to Sumatra, at 40 +leagues distance, they purchased a canoe of the natives for an ax; and, +having provided a sufficient quantity of provisions for their +subsistence, they all embarked on the 20th of May, in order to proceed; +but they had no sooner put to sea than the canoe overset, and turned +bottom upwards. Being near the shore they preserved their lives by +swimming; but, though the English recovered their chests and fire-arms, +yet their books and papers were miserably defaced by the sea-water; +their powder escaped without injury, being sealed up. Though this +accident seemed an unfortunate outset, yet it proved the means of their +future safety; for while the English were drying their books, and +cleaning their arms, the Achinese employed themselves in fitting up +their boat with out-leaguers, which are beams placed across the body of +the boat, projecting a yard or two over the sides, and united at the +extremities by transverse boards jointed to the ends; while these remain +entire, the vessel can never over-set. Besides the out-leaguers the +Achinesemen had provided a good stout mast, and had contrived a sail. +And thus fitted out, on the 15th of May they again embarked; but their +provisions being exhausted, it was necessary for them to repair to a +distant part of the island, to procure a supply. Here a misunderstanding +arose between them and the natives, which by the prudent management of +Dampier was soon accommodated. He observes, that there is not a people +upon earth that he should be afraid to approach unarmed and alone, +provided no previous injury had been done them by any of his company +unprovoked. An European has it always in his power to insinuate himself +into the favour of the most savage people by some slight, by shewing +them some toy, by smiles and submission, and even by shewing them the +simple knack of lighting a match with a flint and steel. The only +danger, he adds, is from their first onset, because their way is to +abscond, and kill by surprize; if therefore their first fury can be +avoided, the fiercest of them becomes gentle as a lamb. + +The natives being again brought to good humour, they were presently +furnished with such provisions as they wanted; and they again embarked +on their former project. At their first setting out, the wind was fair, +and the weather hot; and they proceeded rowing and sailing as occasion +required, Mr. Hall and Dampier taking it by turns to manage the helm. +However, after two days labour, they found that they had steered a wrong +course; and, instead of approaching Sumatra, they were but eight leagues +from Nicobar. They then changed their course, but were still so +violently opposed by a contrary current, that on the third day they had +made but little way. + +On the 18th the wind freshened, and the sky began to be clouded. About +nine in the morning they had an alarming presage by a circle round the +sun, which in that climate is an infallible sign of an approaching +storm. They therefore, after some consultation, concluded to stand +before the wind to whatever land was right a-head; and for that purpose +they furled their sail, settled the yard about three feet above the +boat’s sides, and in this manner prepared to receive the storm. About 12 +at noon the gale came on, and the wind continued increasing all the +afternoon. The sea swelled to an incredible height, and often broke over +the little skiff (hardly so big as a below-bridge wherry, only a small +matter deeper, but not so wide), which, had it not been for her +out-leaguers, could not have survived a single moment; but the thinness +of her body, and the firmness of her out-leaguers, were her security; +for the stern being high and narrow, cut the rolling waves like the edge +of a knife, and divided their force; so that what fell in the skiff came +down like a shower, and was easily baled out by the Achinese. The +evening of this day shewed very dreadful. Dampier’s own words will best +describe his feelings: “The sky looked very black, says he, being +covered with dark clouds; the wind blew hard, and the sea was already +roaring in a white foam about us; a dark night coming on, and no land in +sight to shelter us; and our little ark in danger to be swallowed by +every wave; and, what was worst of all, none of us thought ourselves +prepared for another world. I had been in many imminent dangers before +now, but the worst of them all was but a play-game in comparison with +this. I must confess that I was in great conflicts of mind at this time. +Other dangers came not upon me with such a leisurely and dreadful +solemnity; a sudden skirmish or engagement was nothing when the blood +was warm, and pushed forwards with eager expectations; but here I had a +lingering view of approaching death, and little or no hopes of escaping +it; and, I must confess, that my courage, that had hitherto kept up, +failed me here; and I made very sad reflections on my former life, and +looked backward with horror and detestation upon actions which before I +disliked, but now I trembled at the remembrance of them. I had long +before this repented me of that roving course of life, but never with +such concern as now. In this temper of mind, submitting ourselves to +God’s good providence, and taking all the care we could to preserve our +lives, Mr. Hall and I took turns to steer, and the rest took turns to +heave out the water; and thus we provided to spend the most doleful +night I ever was in. About 10 o’clock it began to thunder, lighten, and +rain; but the rain was welcome to us, having drank up all the water we +brought from the island. The wind at first blew harder than before; but +within half an hour it became more moderate, and the sea assuaged of its +fury. And then by a lighted match, of which we kept a piece burning on +purpose, we looked on our compass, to see how we steered, and found, we +varied but little from our intended course: and, finding our vessel +lively enough with that small sail which was abroad, we began to bear up +to the true point to which our views were directed. But about two in the +morning we had another gust of wind, with thunder, lightning, and rain, +which obliged us again to put before the wind. The hard rain soaked us +so thoroughly that we had not one dry thread about us, and the cold rain +chilled us extremely; for any fresh-water is much colder than the +sea-water, and much more unwholesome for man’s body. In this wet, +starving condition, we spent the tedious night. Never did poor mariners +on a lee-shore more earnestly long for the dawning light than we did. At +length the day appeared; but with such dark black clouds near the +horizon, that the first glimpse of the dawn appeared dreadful. We +continued our course before the wind till eight in the morning of the +19th, and then one of our Achinesian friends cried out, _Pulo Way_. We, +thinking the fellow had said _Pull away_, were at a loss to conceive his +reason; but presently observing his motions, we found he pointed to his +companions to shew them land. We, dropping with wet, cold, and hungry, +were overjoyed at this sight. It bore south, and the wind was still at +west, a strong gale; yet with our small sail, no bigger than an apron, +we changed our course, and bore up to it. Here our out-leaguers did us +great service; and, though our boat’s side was pressed down very much, +we could brook it well enough, and next day we ran to the mouth of a +river in the island of Sumatra, called Passange Jonca, where all fell +ill of fevers, of which some died; and I that survived was a whole year +before I recovered my strength.” + + [Illustration: _Dampier & his Companions in their Canoe, overtaken by a + dreadfull Storm._] + +Here they staid ten or twelve days, and were kindly entertained, because +the Achinese told the natives, that they were prisoners on board the +pirate as well as themselves, and that they were all set ashore +together. Hall and Dampier were strongly importuned to stay, to assist +in improving their navigation; but, longing to get home, they chose to +be conveyed to the English factory at Achin: a vessel was therefore +provided for them, and in three days they arrived safe. Three days after +their arrival, the Portuguese died, and Ambrose lived but a short time +after him. Dampier and Mr. Hall, after passing examination, were kindly +entertained by Mr. Driscal, an Irish gentleman, interpreter to the +factory; and the four Achinese were restored to their families and +friends. + +Dampier was so drenched by a Malayan doctor, that he never expected to +survive the effects of the potions he prescribed; yet after more than +sixty evacuations from one dose, he gathered strength daily; and, after +his health was a little restored, both Hall and he undertook to sail +with Captain Bowry to Nicobar. This Captain Bowry was the gentleman who +sent the letter from Sumatra to Mindanao, already spoken of, which +involved a double mistake. Bowry imagined an English factory to subsist +at Mindanao, and the English at Mindanao, from Bowry’s letter, imagined +there had been an English factory at Sumatra. They sailed from +Achin-road the beginning of June; but, a storm coming on, they presently +returned. About this time Captain Welden arrived from Fort St. George; +and Dampier engaged to sail with him to Tonqueen, in China, and +afterwards made a voyage to Malacca. His next ramble was to Fort St. +George, and, after his return from thence, he came to Bencouli, an +English factory on the west coast of Sumatra; from whence, about the +beginning of 1691, he set out on his return to England. + +After his return to Achin from his voyage to Malacca, he found there one +Mr. Morgan, formerly belonging to the Cygnet, who was then mate of a +Danish ship belonging to Tranquebar: and being curious to know the +sequel of the adventures of his old companions, was told by Morgan, +that, when they left Nicobar, they directed their course to Ceylon; but, +not being able to weather that island, they were forced to seek +refreshment on the coast of Coromandel, where they began to form new +projects; but their schemes not succeeding, about half their number left +them, among whom were Morgan and Coppinger, who both were entertained in +the Danish service, and two or three others repaired to Fort St. George +but the main body went up the country, and listed in the army of the +Great Mogul, where a few of them continued orderly for some time; but +Oliver, the quarter-master, and a party with him, soon left the camp, +and rambled about, plundering and robbing the villages, and flying +whenever they were pursued. + +Captain Read, having thus lost the better half of his men, after having +filled his water and got rice, sailed again, still intending for the Red +Sea. He had taken off Ceylon a rich Portuguese ship, and had plundered +her of what he liked; but not being able to bear up against the westerly +winds, he stood for the island of Madagascar. There, after various +adventures, Captain Read, with half a dozen of his followers, slipt away +from the rest of the company, and embarked in a ship for New York. +Captain Teat succeeded Captain Read in the command; and, having joined +Captain Knight, of whom mention has been made before, they sailed some +time in company; but the Cygnet proving leaky, Knight gave her the slip, +on which she returned again to Madagascar, and finally sunk in St. +Augustin bay. + +While Dampier was at Fort St. George, there arrived a ship from +Mindanao, laden with clove-bark, on board of which came Mr. Moody, as +supercargo. This gentleman, while at Mindanao, purchased the Prince of +Meangis, of whose country mention has already been made in the former +part of this relation. This unfortunate Prince, with his mother, and +some attendants, had been driven off their own coast by a storm, and had +been seized at sea by some Mindaneian fishermen, who brought them to +Mindanao, and sold them for slaves; a common practice among savage +islanders. The Prince attracted the notice of Mr. Moody by the curious +manner in which he was painted, and which, by Dampier’s description, +exactly corresponds with that of tataowing among the New Zealanders. His +design was to have brought him over with him to England; but Mr. Moody +speaking the Malayan language, and being otherwise well qualified to +manage the company’s affairs at a new factory, he was persuaded by the +Governor of Fort St. George to accept of the Chiefship of Indrapore, in +the room of Mr. Gibbons, who had just resigned in order to return home. +Upon this unexpected promotion, Mr. Moody importuned Dampier to go with +him to be his gunner, and, in order to encourage him thereto, promised +to purchase a small vessel to carry the Prince and his mother to their +own country, and to send him as Commander, with full power to establish +a commerce with Meangis, which could not fail of turning greatly to the +advantage of all concerned. This was a generous and friendly offer which +Dampier could not refuse; and accordingly he embarked in a company’s +coasting ship, in which there were seven or eight officers passengers, +and about 60 soldiers for the new factories. They had a pleasant passage +till they came upon the west coast of Sumatra, when a storm arose, by +which they were driven from their intended port, and forced to make the +harbour of Bencouli. At Bencouli they were all very kindly received, and +the gunner of that fort being just dead, Dampier was offered the post, +with a more ample salary than Mr. Moody, in a newly-established factory, +could venture to allow. Dampier consented to accept of this appointment, +provided Mr. Moody approved of it; and Mr. Moody, not being certain of +being able to fulfil his engagement, so far as the same related to the +Prince of Meangis, very readily gave Dampier leave to contract with the +Governor of Bencouli; and, at the same time, assigned to him a +half-share in the two slaves, the Prince and his mother, that he might +not be a sufferer by leaving Fort St. George to follow him. + +Matters being thus accommodated, Mr. Moody repaired to his station at +Indrapore, and Dampier with the two slaves continued at Bencouli. They +lived at a house in the town, and Dampier was accommodated in the fort. +All this passed in 1690; but, before the year was expired, Dampier grew +tired of his office, and, wanting to get home, applied to the Governor +and Council for his discharge. The Council thought it highly reasonable +that his request should be granted; and the Governor made no opposition, +there being at that time no ship in readiness to carry him off: but, as +he had foreseen, when the _Defence_, Captain Heath, bound for England, +came into harbour, he then made many excuses, and at length absolutely +refused to permit him to go. In vain did Captain Heath remonstrate; and +in vain also did Mr. Goddard, the chief mate, interest himself in +Dampier’s release,--the Governor was inflexible. The _Defence_ had +touched at Indrapore before she put into Bencouli; and Mr. Moody had +consigned the other half-share of the slaves to Mr. Goddard, on having +been previously acquainted by letter from Dampier of his intention to +sail for England. In consequence of this assignment, the Prince who some +time before had been attacked with an infectious distemper, of which his +mother died, and of which he was but just recovered, was put on board +the _Defence_; and it was privately agreed between Captain Heath and +Dampier, that, if the latter could make his escape, the former would +undertake to carry him safe off. Accordingly, when all the company’s +business was completed, and the letters put on board, notice was given +to Dampier of the precise time when the ship was to sail; “and, says he, +after several assays, I slipt away at midnight; and, creeping through +one of the port-holes of the fort, I got to the shore, where the ship’s +boat waited for me, and carried me on board.” + +On the 25th of January, 1691, they set sail for the Cape of Good Hope; +and, the wind being fair, they proceeded at first very successfully: but +they had not been long at sea before the men began to droop, being +attacked with a distemper that stole insensibly upon them, and before +they thought themselves ill were ready to die. Dampier attributes this +fatal disorder to the badness of their water, which was filled from a +river fed by many noxious streams from the low swampy lands that in the +dry season, as it were, drained their dregs into it, which at times were +as black as ink. Besides, it was stowed among the pepper in the hold, +which heated it to that degree, that every morning when the men went to +take their allowance, it was so hot, they could hardly bear to hold a +bottleful of it in their hands; “a thing scarce to be credited, says +Dampier, that water should be ready to boil in a ship’s hold.” This +distemper was so universal, that not a man in the ship was wholly +unaffected by it; so that when the wind blew a hard gale, there wanted +hands to work the ship. + +Captain Heath, pitying the condition of his men, distributed every day +among them a quantity of tamerinds, some jars of which he had brought +with him from India; and this was a very seasonable relief: but the wind +coming south, and the passage being already protracted to an unusual +length, the Captain called the whole ship’s crew together, to consult +what was best to be done in the present extremity, and desired every +man, from the highest to the lowest, to deliver his opinion freely. Thus +all circumstances being duly considered, it was unanimously agreed at +last, notwithstanding the wind was then contrary, to prosecute their +voyage to the cape. But as that determination would infallibly require a +more than ordinary exertion of labour from those that were well, to +supply the place of those that were sick, the Captain promised a month’s +extra pay to every man who should assist on all occasions that should +require help, whether it was his watch or not and this premium he +engaged to pay at the cape. This offer was first accepted by the +Officers, and then as many men as were capable of duty entered +themselves upon the roll. In a short time, it pleased God, says Dampier, +to favour us with a fair wind, which being improved to the best +advantage by the incessant labour of those new-listed men, wafted us in +a short time to the cape; and, being brought safe to an anchor by the +assistance of 100 Dutch sailors, who unbent the sails, and did every +thing for us they were required to do, the sick were presently sent on +shore, where they remained about six weeks, and all but three or four +recovered. + +On the 23d of May they sailed from the cape in company with the James +and Mary, and the Josiah Indiamen. They directed their course towards +the island of St. Helena, and met with nothing remarkable, except a +swelling sea, which taking them on the broad side, rolled every thing +about that was loose between the decks and in the hold. This great +tumbling sea took them soon after doubling the cape; “an eminent token, +says Dampier, that the south-west winds were now violent in the higher +latitudes towards the South Pole, we having fine clear weather all the +while.” + +On the 20th of June they arrived at Santa Helena, where they staid four +or five days, and afterwards continued their voyage to England without +any remarkable incident; and arrived safe in the Downs, Sept. 16, 1691. + +What advantage Dampier and his partner Mr. Goddard made of their painted +prince is not related; but they certainly sold him to be carried about +the country to be shewn for money. He was painted all down his breast, +between his shoulders, on his thighs, and round his legs and arms like +bracelets. “I cannot, says Dampier, liken the drawings to any figure of +animals, or the like; but they were very curious, full of great variety +of lines, flourishes, chequered work, and innumerable convolutions, +keeping a very graceful proportion, and appearing very artificial, even +to the wonder of all that beheld him.” It has already been remembered, +that the mother of the Prince died in India of the infectious disorder +of which he was but just recovered when he embarked for Europe. On that +occasion Dampier did what he could to comfort Jeoly, for that was the +name they gave him; but he took on extremely, insomuch that it was +feared he could not have long survived; on which account a grave was +immediately dug to hide the dead body out of his sight; and being +shrouded decently with a piece of fine new calico, the corpse was about +to be interred; but Jeoly was not satisfied till he wrapped all his +mother’s cloaths about her, and two new pieces of chintz that Mr. Moody +gave her, saying they were her’s, and she must have them. After this he +suffered her to be interred, which was done with great solemnity; but he +continued to pine after her during the whole time he continued in India. + +In the printed relation that was given of him when he was shewn for a +sight, the showmen heightened their account with a romantic story of a +beautiful sister of his being a slave with him at Mindanao, and of the +Sultan’s falling in love with her, and taking her to his bed; but these +were stories indeed! They reported also, that the paint with which he +was ornamented was of such virtue, that serpents and all venomous +creatures would fly from him: but poor Jeoly was as much afraid of +serpents, scorpions, and centipedes, as a little child, for he was +exceedingly timorous. He died at Oxford, but Dampier does not tell the +year. + +The publication of the above voyage round the world having recommended +Dampier to the notice of persons of the first eminence, he was +afterwards employed by government in discoveries, both in the Eastern +and Southern Seas. His first expedition was to the coast of New Holland, +which could have no other object but discovery in view. He sailed from +the Downs, on Jan. 14, 1698, in his Majesty’s ship the Roebuck, carrying +only 12 guns, and 50 men, and having 20 months provisions on board. On +the 1st of August they fell in with the western coast of New Holland, in +lat. 26 deg. S. where, however, they found nothing very different from +what Dampier had before described. The only land animals they saw, were +a small sort of racoons, different from those of the West-Indies chiefly +in their legs, which are short before, and on which they run jumping; +and a sort of guano’s, or lizards, peculiar to the country, which appear +to have two heads, but in reality have but one, and no tail; and, what +is no less remarkable, their four legs seem to be all forelegs, so +formed as that the creature may walk either way. To these may now be +added the kanguroo, a quadrupede of a particular shape, as large as a +sheep, and a creature of the oppossum kind, discovered by Mr. Banks; +with dogs and wolves seen by the Endeavour’s crew; of the latter sort +some were seen by Dampier’s men, but so lean that they were nothing but +skin and bone. In latitude 23 deg. S. they saw dolphins, and small +whales, and abundance of scuttle-shells, swimming in the sea. + +Captain Cook found plenty of water on the east side of this island; but +Dampier was much distressed for want of it on the west side. Being +ashore employed in digging a well, he was assaulted by ten or twelve of +the natives, with whom he had a skirmish, and was forced to shoot one of +them dead, to disengage a young man who was surrounded by three of them, +and wounded in the check with a lance. On a gun’s being fired over the +heads of the assailants, though it startled them at first, they soon +recovered their surprize, and continued their hostilities; but as soon +as they saw a man fall, they were terribly frightened, and fled with +precipitation. Dampier very humanely adds, that he attempted the natives +no farther, being very sorry for what had happened. + +Among the natives engaged on this occasion, there was one who by his +appearance and carriage seemed to be the chief of them. He was a young +brisk man, not very tall, nor so personable as some of the rest, though +more active and courageous. He was painted with a circle of white +pigment about his eyes, and a white streak down his nose from his +forehead to the tip of it; his breast and some part of his arms were +also made white with the same paint; not for beauty or ornament as it +should seem, but, as some wild Indian warriors are said to do, to make +themselves look more terrible in war. He was indeed a very frightful +being; for the manner in which he was painted, adding to his natural +deformity, gave him more the appearance of a monster of the woods, than +of a man born of a woman. Dampier in this second voyage to New Holland, +confirms what he said of the natives in his first, that they are the +worst-featured savages he ever beheld. Captain Cook, on the contrary, or +his editor, assures us, that their features are not disagreeable, their +noses are not flat, nor are their lips thick; their teeth are white and +even, and their hair naturally long and black, but universally cropt +short: in general it is straight, but sometimes has a small curl; their +beards are of the same colour with their hair, bushy and thick, which +they shorten by singeing: they are of the middle stature, in general +well made, clean limbed, remarkably vigorous, active, and nimble; their +countenances not altogether void of expression, and their voices +remarkably soft and effeminate. Such are the different descriptions +given by voyagers of the same people; or, to speak more precisely of +people on the east and west side of the same continent; for which it is +not easy to account. + +Our voyager, however, not being able either to find fresh water, or a +harbour to careen his ship, set sail from this miserable country about +the beginning of September, 1699; and, directing his course to the +island of Timor, arrived there September 15, and received a supply of +water and provisions from the Chief of the Dutch factory there. He was +likewise hospitably entertained by the gentlemen of the Portuguese +factory on the same island. From thence he sailed to the coast of New +Guinea, traded with the inhabitants, and ranging along the coast, found +the main land divided into two parts. To the easternmost division he +gave the name of New Britain. + +In his return back he touched again at Timor, and from thence sailed to +Batavia; where having careened his ship, and supplied himself with +necessaries of every kind, on the 17th of October, 1700, he set sail for +the Cape of Good Hope; from thence continuing his voyage to St. Helena, +he arrived at that island January 31, 1701; but in his course home his +ship sprung a leak at sea, and, after endeavouring in vain to stop it, +he was obliged to run her a-ground on the island of Ascension; where +having landed his men, and taken from on board all necessary provisions, +they in a short time discovered a fine spring of water, and lived +tolerably, till they were at last relieved by some English men-of-war, +who were convoying home the Canterbury Indiaman, and brought them all +safe to England. + +In 1703, notwithstanding the bad success of the voyage just mentioned, +Dampier was again employed in an expedition to the South Sea, in +conjunction with Captain Pulling, who had each a ship of 26 guns, and +120 men under his command. That commanded by Captain Dampier was called +the St. George; and that by Captain Pulling, the Fame. They were +victualled for nine months, and had commissions from his Royal Highness +Prince George of Denmark, then Lord High Admiral, to proceed in a +warlike manner against the French and Spaniards; and both were upon the +same terms of _No purchase no pay_. But while they were in the Downs, +some difference having arisen between the two Captains, Captain Pulling +set sail alone, and left Dampier to take his own course; who, stopping +some time in Ireland, was joined by the Cinque Ports galley of 90 tons, +16 guns, and 63 men, Captain Charles Pickering Commander. In this +expedition, Dampier had three grand objects in view: the _first_ was, to +sail to Buenos Ayres, in order to surprize the Spanish galleons that +usually take in their lading at that port; the _second_ depended on +missing the first, in which case they were to pass through the straits +of Magellan to cruise upon the coasts of Peru, for the Baldivia ships +that carry gold to Lima; and the _third_ was only to take place, if both +the former miscarried; and was, to proceed to the coast of Mexico, to +intercept the Manilla ship that annually arrives at Acapulco, and is +said to be worth eight or nine millions of pieces of eight, equal to a +million and a half of our money. + +Full of these projects, they set sail from Kinsale, in Ireland, on the +11th of September, 1703, and on the 25th arrived off Madeira, where they +learned that the galleons were sailed from Buenos Ayres, and then lay at +Teneriff. The first project being thus defeated, they proceeded to put +the second in execution with all possible dispatch. On the 24th of +November they anchored on the island Le Grand, on the coast of Brazil, +where they buried Captain Pickering, and chose Lieutenant Stradling in +his room. + +From this island they sailed the 8th of December; and, doubling Cape +Horn on the 20th of January, they changed their direction, sailed to the +northward, and on the 10th of February came to an anchor in the great +bay of Juan Fernandez, where they met their consort Captain Stradling, +with whom they had parted in passing Cape Horn in a violent storm, which +happened on the 26th of January. + +At Juan Fernandez they continued refitting their ships till the 29th, +when seeing a sail, they slipt their cables, and put to sea. She proved +to be a French ship of 400 tons, 30 guns, and full of men. The St. +George fought her about seven hours, when a gale springing up, she +sheered off. On this occasion, the Cinque Ports behaved but +indifferently, firing only a few guns, and lying by. + +Next day, in returning to Juan Fernandez, they fell in with two French +men-of-war of 36 guns each; from whom they narrowly escaped, leaving +their cables, anchors, and five or six of their men belonging to the +Cinque Ports on that island, with a new suit of sails, and several other +necessaries which they could ill spare. + +They now proceeded upon their second enterprize; but they were equally +unfortunate in that as in the former. The Baldivian ships were sailed, +and the gold secured. They then meditated a surprize against the town of +Santa Maria, in the gulph of Panama, where the Spaniards getting +intelligence of their designs, laid ambuscades, and after killing and +wounding several of them, put the rest to flight. + +In this manner, disappointments succeeding disappointments, differences +began to arise between the Commanders and they concluded to part +company. But about this time, a large ship, fortunately for them, coming +to an anchor in the night close by them, they instantly boarded and made +prize of her. She was deeply laden with flour, sugar, brandy, wine, +about thirty tons of malmalade of quinces, a considerable quantity of +salt, with some tons of linnen and woolen-cloth. This proved a +seasonable supply; and provisions that were before so scarce, that only +five green plantains were the daily allowance for six men, were now so +abundant on board the prize, that they might have laid in a stock for +several years; yet in less than six months we find them starving. + +After rummaging the prize and dividing the spoil, the Captains parted; +and in two or three days, Dampier fell in with a Spanish man-of-war, +fitted out on purpose to take him. The two ships had a smart engagement, +and parted in the night by consent. + +Soon after this engagement, Dampier and Clippinton, his first +Lieutenant, having some difference, Clippinton seized upon the ship’s +tender, in which were the stores and ammunition, and with 21 of the best +men weighed anchor, and set sail. When he had cleared the islands, he +sent to invite all those who were willing to sail with him to come on +board; but Dampier’s last project being now on the point of being +carried into execution, the men who remained with him resolved to abide +the issue. Clippinton, though he had quarrelled with the Captain, had no +mind to distress the men; he therefore thought fit to restore the powder +and ammunition, reserving only enough for his own use. In the bay of +Tacames, Dampier had taken a small bark of 60 tons, laden with +plantains. This bark they intended to keep as a tender. She had two +masts, with two square sails; and they named her the Dragon. + +The Master of this bark, Christian Martin by name, was a Spaniard by +birth, but taken prisoner while he was a boy, and bred up in England. +This man they kept prisoner on board and now proceeded to intercept the +Manilla ship. + +On the 6th of December in the morning, they saw a sail, and soon came up +with her. She proved their last hope, the great Manilla ship, from the +East-Indies. They instantly bore down upon her, and before she could +bring her guns to bear gave her several broadsides; and, taking her +unprepared, put the company on board in the utmost disorder. Captain +Martin, though a Spaniard, advised to lay her aboard immediately, before +the Spaniards had recovered their surprize; but that advice was +disregarded till it was too late; for while two parties were quarrelling +on board the St. George, the one for laying the enemy aboard, the other +not, the Spaniards got out a tier of 24-pounders, every one of which +that took place was ready to send the St. George to the bottom. The +assailants were therefore soon beaten off with disgrace, after having +received a shot between wind and water in the powder-room, by which two +feet of planking was driven in on each side the stern. And now, being +disappointed of this their last expectation, all the men grew +discontented, and impatient to return home. However, they were prevailed +upon to cruise a few weeks longer on the coast of Mexico; and with that +view passed the ports of Acapulco, Port Angels, Port Guatulco, and +several others; but without meeting with any prize worth waiting for. + +Ill success is generally succeeded by discontent; the men who were +before impatient of fatigue without reward, grew now ungovernable. A +party, therefore, formed the design of returning home by way of the +East-Indies; and these were encouraged by Mr. Funnel, the chief mate, +who, having the command of the small Spanish prize already mentioned, +determined to hazard every thing to regain his native country, rather +than continue under the direction of a man with whom there was no +keeping terms. He therefore embraced the first opportunity to reach the +gulph of Amapalla, to new-water his bark, and prepare for his voyage +home. + +It should seem, that this voyage of Dampier, though countenanced with a +government commission, was notwithstanding fitted out by private +adventurers; for, on this occasion, the owners agent is said to have +divided the provisions and stores between those who chose to remain with +Dampier, and those who determined to follow the fortune of Mr. Funnel. +Their whole number was already reduced to 60 effective men, 33 of whom +chose to accompany Funnel, and 27 only remained with Dampier, but upon +what terms they engaged, or what course they pursued afterwards, we are +not told; for Dampier, though he returned home, never published any +account of this voyage. What we have related concerning it, in order to +complete his adventures, as far as our materials extend, we have +extracted from the account published by Funnel; who, having left Dampier +in the gulph of Amapalla, on the 1st of February, 1705, takes no farther +notice of his Captain; but goes on with the story of his own voyage, +which was indeed unfortunate enough; for his ship was seized by the +Dutch at Amboyna, the goods on board confiscated, and most of the men +cruelly used, being confined and half-starved by our good friends the +Dutch, who were jealous lest they should make discoveries prejudicial to +their commerce. Funnel himself, however, soon got released; and, having +made strong representations against the authors of his sufferings at +Amboyna, he at length obtained some shew of redress; with which, though +not a compensation for his losses, he was forced to be contented. On the +2d of Nov. he, with two of his company, got passage to Europe in the +Dutch East-India fleet; and, on the 15th of July following, arrived safe +in the Texel, from whence, after visiting the principal towns in +Holland, he came to England, and published the account just mentioned, +in which he followed the example of Dampier, by giving a description of +the natural productions of the islands at which he touched, their +inhabitants, arts, and commerce. + +We can find no traces of the latter part of the life of Dampier, who +seems to have been an able navigator, but of a restless turbulent +spirit, like the ocean on which he was bred. He certainly possessed the +art of sailing in a very eminent degree; but he wanted that happier art +of conciliating the wavering discordant passions of his followers and +associates. He seems, too, to have been more cautious than brave, more +subtle than wise, and more enterprizing than fortunate. In all his +engagements, both as an inferior officer and as a commander, he seems +neither to have braved danger nor to have feared it. It is not easy to +determine, whether his thirst for gold, or desire of knowledge, was the +governing principle that led him to range the world for new discoveries. +If the former, he seems totally to have failed in the pursuit; if the +latter, he was more successful. At Mindanao, we find him poor; at the +Bashee islands he laments the want of every article that could purchase +from the natives a small specimen of the yellow metal that bore the +resemblance of gold; but withal so honest, that he would neither take +the iron belonging to the owners of the ship to give in exchange, nor +would he take the metal from the inhabitants without an equivalent. In +short, I think, we may conclude, from what he himself has written, that +Dampier was a man of strong natural parts, of blunt manners, of quick +discernment, inflexible in his resolutions, but deficient in natural +qualities to command respect, and in acquired abilities to maintain it. + + + + + THE + VOYAGE + OF + MASTER COWLEY + ROUND THE WORLD. + + +Of Master Cowley we can find no other account than what is contained in +the voyage written by himself; therefore, we shall, in his own words, +preserve such parts of that voyage as have not already been related in +the voyage of Dampier; premising only, that his first setting out among +the buccaneers was in the same prize, in which Dampier set sail from +Virginia, under the command of Captain Cook; that he continued to serve +that Commander, as Master, during his life; and that, after sailing +sometime in consort with Captain Eaton in the South Seas, he chose +rather to serve that gentleman than to continue with his own Captain’s +successor. One remark more, and then to proceed. We find him, in every +collection of voyages in which he is introduced, distinguished by the +appellation of CAPTAIN Cowley, though the highest employment to which he +ever seems to have arrived, was Master on board the buccaneers +before-mentioned; who, during the time they were suffered to commit +their ravages, traversed the globe as wolves the forest, merely for the +sake of whom they might devour. We find, however, but few of them +successful; by far the greatest part, like other robbers, died +miserably; and such of them as escaped with life, were, at certain +times, exposed to sufferings not less shocking to human nature, than the +distresses to which they reduced innocent people by their cruelty and +lust for gold. But now to proceed: + +In August, 1683, I departed, says Cowley, from Cape Charles in Virginia, +lying in latitude 36 deg. N. and in longitude 305 deg. in the good ship +called the Revenge, Captain John Cook Commander, pretending to me, that +I should navigate the ship to Petitguavaz, where a Frenchman was the +Governor, and to which port I began to shape my course; but was told, as +soon as we had left the shore, that they were now bound for the coast of +Guinea, to provide a better ship; and that then their design was to sail +to the Great South Sea. I was thereupon obliged to alter my course, and +to steer E. S. E. for the Cape de Verd islands in lat. 16 deg. N. + +In the month of September, we made the island of Salt, where we came to +an anchor, careened our ship, and afterwards sailed to St. Nicholas, +where was held a consultation of officers, whether to sail directly for +the South Seas in their present ship, or pursue their former resolution +and proceed to the coast of Guinea to seek a better. After much debate, +it was at length concluded to try St. Jago, another of the Cape de Verd +islands, and, if any ship was found in that road fit for their purpose, +to lay her on board, and make her their prize. + +On our approach to this island on the eastern side, we descried a large +ship from the mast-head, which proved to be a Dutch East Indiaman of 50 +guns, and, as we afterwards learnt, of 400 men, most of whom were on +shore; but on seeing us stand towards the road, they instantly repaired +to their posts, clapt a spring upon their cable, heaved their broad side +to us, struck out their ports below, and running out their lower tier of +guns, made themselves ready to receive us. We had now advanced too near; +but marking their force, and that it was in vain to attempt a conquest, +we put before the wind, and steered directly to the coast of Guinea, +where we had no sooner arrived, than we fell in with a new ship of 40 +guns, which we boarded, and carried away. Upon examination, we found her +well stored with brandy, water, and provisions; and in order to furnish +her with other necessaries from our old ship, we put into Sherborough, +resolving to touch at no other port till we should come to Juan +Fernandez, in lat. 33 deg. 40. min. S. + +About the beginning of December, we sailed from latitude 8 deg. N. +steering S. W. till we arrived in 12 deg. S. when we steered away S. W. +by W. till we came into soundings on the coast of Brazil; and finding 80 +fathom water in a sandy bank, we altered our course to the S. W. and +about the latitude of 40 deg. S. found the sea as red as blood, +occasioned by great shoals of shrimps, which coloured the ocean, for +many leagues together. We found also a multitude of seals, and such +abundance of small whales as to exceed the number found in the North +Seas in the proportion of one hundred to ten. We held, on our course +till we came into lat. 47 deg. where we saw land, never before +discovered. It proved an uninhabited island, to which I gave the name of +Pepy’s island, and at which ships may conveniently wood and water, +having a harbour where 1000 sail may ride in safety. In this island we +saw plenty of fowls, and round it there is no doubt abundance of fish; +but, it blowing a storm, we could neither dare to approach it, nor to +examine its coasts. We therefore stood to the southward, shaping our +course S. S. W. till we came into the latitude of 50 deg. S. and then +steering S. W. by W. resolving not to attempt the straits of Magellan, +but to make the land of Ter del Fuego; and there, finding great +riplings, and apprehending danger, we resolved to attempt the passage +discovered by Bartholomew Sharpe, in 1681, and to sail round all, +leaving Staten land to the N. With this view, hauling away S. W. we came +a-breast of Cape Horn on the 14th of February, where, chusing +valentines, and discoursing of the witchcraft of women, there arose a +prodigious storm, which continued till the last day of the month, +driving us into latitude 60 deg. 30 min. which is farther than any ship +ever yet sailed to the south; so that we concluded that talking of the +wiles of women at sea was very unlucky discourse. + +About the beginning of March, the wind coming to the south, we were soon +wafted into a warmer climate; for in the 60th deg. the weather was so +extremely cold, that we could bear drinking three quarts of burnt brandy +a man in four-and-twenty hours, without being the least intoxicated. We +steered north-by-east till we came into lat. 40 deg. S. where we fell in +with the Nicholas of London, Captain John Eaton Commander; and, being +glad of each others company, we sailed in consortship to the island of +Juan Fernandez, where we found plenty of good fat goats, good fish, +wood, and water. [Here Cowley relates the story of the Moskito-man, the +account of which has already been given by Dampier.] This island is +naturally fortified; so that with 100 men, and at 100 l. expence, it may +be defended from the attacks of 2000 men, in case of an invasion. +[Accordingly the Spaniards have taken the hint; for when the last ships +sailed upon discoveries, they found it fortified.] It lies 110 leagues +due west from the port of Valparayso. + + [Illustration: _Cowley & his Men taking in Provisions at the Island of + Iuan Fernandez._] + +We steered from this island north-north-east, till we made the high land +of Arica, in latitude 18 deg. S. Being before the bay, the officers of +both ships held a consultation whether best to go into Arica-bay, or +proceed farther on the coast; when it was resolved to sail as low down +at Cape Blanco, and there wait for the Spanish plate-fleet coming to the +bay of Panama. This was an unfortunate resolution; for in Arica-bay rode +at that time a ship with 300 tons of silver on board, which we missed, +and in the room of her took a timber-ship bound to Lima, with 30 hands +on board, which at that time stockt us with more mouths than we could +well spare meat to fill. With this ship we sailed away north to the +island of Lobos, in lat. 7 deg. S. where we set our sick men on shore, +though we could neither find wood or water upon it. Here having heeled +our ships, at a general council it was resolved, to attack the town of +Truxillo, in lat. 8 deg. N. ten miles within land; and with this view +just as we were weighing anchor to proceed, some of our people from the +mast-head espied three sail of ships passing by, which we instantly ran +out and took. These ships were all laden with flour, fruit, and +sweet-meats; but having had intelligence that we were upon the coast, +they had left all their silver (their silver-service plate not excepted) +on shore. Their provisions, however, were very acceptable; and we now +thought only of seeking a proper place to lay up our stores in security, +and where we might conceal ourselves for five or six months, to make the +enemy believe that we had forsaken their seas, and that they had nothing +to fear from fresh attacks. On this occasion, the islands called by the +Spaniards Gallapagoes, or Enchanted Islands, were proposed, and the only +objection made was, the uncertainty of finding them; but that being +overcome, we weighed anchor, and after three weeks sail came in sight of +them, being seventeen in number, to all which I gave distinct names. We +came to an anchor in a very good harbour, lying towards the northernmost +end of a fine island under the Equinoctial Line, in which we found +plenty of fish, sea and land-tortoises, fowls of various sorts, among +which were turtle-doves, so tame at first that they would often light +upon the hats and shoulders of our men as they walked abroad; but not +being able to satisfy their hungry appetite by catching them alive, the +sailors so scared them at last, by frequently firing upon them, that +they became, like other birds, very shy. + +This island I called the Duke of York’s Island, near to which lies a +small island, which being viewed in several directions, always assumed a +different shape. This I called Cowley’s Enchanted Island. I examined +several others; but upon none of them found fresh-water, save only upon +the Duke of York’s Island. The bay in which we anchored I called +Albany-bay, and the harbour York-road; and, after having laid up 1500 +bags of flour, with a quantity of sweet-meats, and other provisions, in +a convenient store-room, we sailed to the northward, to try for fresh +water a second time; lest, being distressed, we should be forced, upon +some future occasion, to seek relief in other harbours, when it might +not be possible for us to reach the present; but we found good water in +none of them; and, to our great surprize, we met with such a violent +current, that when we would have returned to the Duke of York’s Island, +we could not stem it; and we were obliged to bear away N. N. E. when the +first land we made upon the main was Cape Trespontas, upon the +easternmost shore of which we watered our ship. The first day after our +arrival, we buried our Captain; the second day, three Spanish Indians +came down, whom our men brought on board. Being strictly examined +concerning the strength and opulence of the town of Ria Lexa, they gave +very satisfactory answers: but, while they were under examination, our +long-boat being sent on shore to get beef, a party of Spanish Indians +came down, and set their boat on fire, and drove the crew for shelter +upon a rock, where they were forced to remain till we sent another boat +with 20 men to rescue them. + +We retained the three Indians, and led them with ropes about their necks +as guides to conduct us afterwards to Rio Lexa; but one of them having +got his neck out of the collar, made his escape, and alarmed the town; +so that our men returned very much discouraged at this second +disappointment. We now found it necessary to turn all our prisoners away +to shift for themselves; and then directed our course to the gulph of +St. Miguel, where we took two islands, one inhabited by Indians, the +other plentifully stocked with cattle; but for gold and silver, we got +but little. Here we staid and careened our ships; and here Captain +Cook’s ship and Captain Eaton’s broke consortship; and, both ships being +refitted, I got on board Captain Eaton, where I was entertained as his +master, to navigate his ship to any place or port where he should +direct. + +[It is now that the voyage of Master Cowley may be said to commence. +Hitherto he has gone hand-in-hand with Dampier; but now Cowley pursues +one course with Captain Eaton, and Dampier another with Captain Davis, +the successor of Captain Cook.] + +We in our ship, continues Cowley, towards the middle of August, set sail +from the gulph of Miguel [in the bay of Amapalla], steering for Cape St. +Francisco, where we chaced a ship that escaped from us; and then we bore +up to latitude 7 deg. S. where finding the country alarmed, we stood for +Payta, in lat. 5 deg. S. where we took two ships lying at anchor; which +the Spaniards refusing to ransom, we, by way of farewel, set them on +fire. From hence we sailed to Gorgona, at which island we watered our +ship for the East-Indies. + +This island lies in lat. 3 deg. 15 min. N. and in long. 305 deg. E. and +as soon as we had supplied ourselves with wood and water, we took our +departure, steering W. N. W. till we came as low almost as the rocks of +St. Bartholomew, in long. 240 deg. then we sailed into lat. 15 deg. N. +till we judged we were past those rocks; and then returned into 13 deg. +N. which latitude we held till we made the island of Guam, in lat. 13 +deg. N. and in long. 150 deg. E. according to our reckoning; at which +island, when we arrived, we had a very sickly ship, no man being free +from the scurvy, and most of us in a consuming condition. It was on the +14th of March about seven in the morning that we saw land. At 12 o’clock +we were in lat. 13 deg. 2 min. N. by observation, having made out on our +sailing, by judgment, 7646 miles, that is to say, departed so many miles +from Gorgona by loss made out in longitude, which is about 2549 leagues. +The next day we sailed about the south-west part of the island, and came +to an anchor in a fair bay, from whence we sent a boat on shore, with a +flag of truce; but, on landing, our people found that the natives had +burnt their houses, and had fled; however, our men felled some cocoa-nut +trees, and brought a hundred or two of them on board to refresh the +crew. In the mean time a party of Indians rushed from behind the bushes, +and in a hostile manner threatened to attack us; but we made signs of +friendship, and one of the Indians returned to the wood, and having +peeled a stick so as to make it appear white, he came forward, when one +of his companions perceiving that he had no cap to compliment our +people, called him back, and presented him with one for that purpose. + +From Sunday the 15th till Tuesday the 17th, we continued a free trade +with the Indians; but on that day our men going over to a small island +on the west side of Guam, the Indians fell upon them with stones and +lances, which occasioned a fray, in which some of the Indians were +killed upon the spot. + +Two days after, the Governor, who happened to be a Spaniard, came to a +point of land near the ship, and sent a letter written in Spanish, +French, and Dutch, demanding in the name of the King his Master, who we +were, whither we were bound, and from whence we came? Our answer was +written in French, that we were employed by some gentlemen in France +upon the discovery of the unknown parts of the world. On the return of +the messenger, the Governor sent a letter of invitation to the Captain +to come on shore, with which he instantly complied, and was received +under a triple discharge of cannon from the fort, which was answered by +the same number of guns from the ship. They soon came to a good +understanding. Our Captain made an apology for killing some of the +Indians in his own defence; and the Governor gave for answer, that, if +he had killed them all, he should have esteemed the favour the greater. +We were afterwards told, that the Indians on the small island were in +rebellion. + +On Wednesday, about 12 o’clock, a Spanish Captain came on board, and +continued with us till 12 the next day. He brought as a present from the +Governor 10 hogs, a large quantity of potatoes, plantains, oranges, +papas, and red pepper; in return for which our Commander sent the +Governor a diamond-ring, and presented the Officer with a rich sword. + +The next day the Governor sent on board a captain, a jesuit, and a +friar, with a request to our Commander to spare him some powder, of +which he was in want. This request was readily complied with; we sent +him four barrels, and offered him four great guns. The first he +thankfully received, and sent a box in which were 1600 pieces of eight +in gold and silver for the Captain to pay himself for the powder; but +the guns he politely declined accepting. Our Captain returned the box +with the money untouched, and afterwards received from the Governor a +valuable present. + +While mutual civilities were passing between the Governor and our +Captain, our people went out every day chasing the Indians, whom they +had full license to kill and destroy wherever they met with them; but +they, finding us not to be Spaniards, became very tractable, and offered +to assist in supplying us with fish and fruit, which they exchanged with +us for old nails and old iron. After having tarried here sometime, and a +free intercourse had been established between the Indians on shore and +our people on board the ship, the Indians made signs for as many of our +men as chose it, to come and see them haul the seine. Our men, not +suspecting any design, manned the boat, and went to look at them; but, +while the men were amusing themselves with the sport, the Indians had +very artfully brought their seine round the boat, with a design to draw +it on shore, and thereby entangle both boat and crew; but the sailors, +discovering the plot, gave the Indians no time to carry it into +execution; for, being provided with fire-arms, which they never went +ashore without, they fired amongst the thickest of them, killed a great +many, and drove the rest away. + +These Indians are large in stature, some of them being seven feet and a +half high; they go stark-naked; never bury their dead, but let them lie +in the sun to rot. They have no arms but slings and lances; the sharp +ends of the latter are pointed with dead mens bones, which, being cut +like scoops, and jagged at the edges like unto saws, if a man happens to +be wounded by them, and is not cured in nine days, he certainly dies. +Our people took four of these treacherous savages prisoners, bound them, +and brought them on board; but they had not been long among us, before +three of them leapt into the sea, and with their hands tied behind them +swam away like fishes. However, we sent the boat after them, and found +that a strong man at the first blow could not penetrate their skins with +a cutlass. One of them, in my judgment, had received 40 bullets in his +body before he died; and the last of the three that was killed, swam a +good English mile, not only with his hands tied behind him, but with his +arms pinioned, before he expired. + +The Spanish Governor’s kindness increased in proportion to the mischief +done to the Indians. He sent us, the succeeding day, by one of his +captains, thirty hogs, some melons, pumpkins, potatoes, fruits, and +rice; and received in return six small patararoes. + +Having now new rigged our ship, and supplied ourselves with wood and +water, we began to prepare for our departure. On the first of April, we +weighed anchor, and next day came a-breast of the fort, which we saluted +with three guns, and were complimented with the same number; and on the +3d the Governor sent his last present to our Captain. On the 4th we set +sail, and steered W. by S. till we arrived at the height of St. +Bartholomew, when we shaped our course W. N. W. till we came into the +latitude of 20 deg. 30 min. N. where we fell in with a cluster of +islands lying to the north of Luconia, distant from Guam 560 leagues. +They seemed to be uninhabited; but the men who went ashore in the boat, +found abundance of nutmegs on one of them, and saw some goats. + +From these islands we steered S. W. for the island of Luconia, and on +the 26th of April Cape Bajadore bore from us east; after which we came +up with Cape Mindato, where the S. W. monsoon overtaking us, we were +obliged to bear away for Canton, in China, where we lay and refitted our +ship, and where we might have laden ourselves with plunder from thirteen +Tartar ships, who came thither full of the richest goods of China: but +our men, being under no government, refused to attack them; saying, They +came for gold and silver, not to be made pedlars to carry packs. But, +alas! had reason prevailed, we might have all made our fortunes, without +injuring any prince or subject in christendom; for these goods the +Tartars had taken from the Chinese about two years before, and had +stored them at Macao, an island near Canton, to be taken away when they +judged it convenient. + +From Canton we sailed for Manilla, to wait for the Tartar ship that +annually goes thither, and which, we were informed, was laden one half +with silver; but, though we were fortunate enough to come in sight of +her, yet she out-sailed us, and escaped. We then bore away for an island +that lies to the north of Luconia, intending there to stay till the wind +came fair to carry us to Bantam, not then knowing that Bantam had been +taken from the English by the Dutch. + +At this island we stored ourselves with fruit, goats, and guanos; which +last are here good meat: and here we found an Indian who directed us to +an island, where there was plenty of great cattle; but the wind soon +coming fair, we made sail to the southward, steering our course S. S. W. +till we came into lat. 10 deg. N. where we were so entangled among the +islands of Paragoa, that none of us ever expected to escape with life. +After three days, however, we very providentially got clear; and stood +in for an island at the north end of Borneo, where we hauled our ship +ashore, and erected a tent, planting a battery of ten guns for our +defence, in case of an attack from the natives. Here we unloaded our +ship, and, having provided sufficiently for our security, we ranged the +country for natives to trade with us; but they, having never seen any +white men before, were very shy; and when, by chance, our men fell in +with one of their canoes that was full of women, (among whom was the +queen of the country and her retinue) on the approach of our ship’s +boat, they all leapt over-board; but, after taking them up, and treating +them kindly, they laid aside their fears, and grew familiar; and, upon +our offering them civility, instead of avoiding, they soon became fond +of us. They brought us fish in great plenty, with oranges, lemons, +mangoes, plantains, and pine-apples; and, besides these, we exchanged +some trifles for bezoar, musk, and civet, with which the island is well +stored. + +The year was now drawing to a close, when we set sail from this little +island, directing our course for Timor, where, finding the ship’s +company begin to grow mutinous, and not under command of their Captain, +myself, Mr. Hill, and eighteen more, joined our forces together, and +purchased a large boat, in which we sailed to the island of Java, +distant from Timor 300 leagues. The wind being contrary to carry us to +Batavia, we bore away for Cheribon, a factory belonging to the Dutch, +lying eastward of Batavia, where we were kindly received by the +Governor. There we heard that King Charles was dead, and that his +brother James was proclaimed king; we heard also that Bantam had been +taken from the English; and that the Dutch had erected a new factory in +that island. + +After refreshing at Cheribon, we agreed to divide our twenty men into +three parties; two of which chose to sail for the bay of Bengal, and the +third to stay with me; but knowing that Batavia was the Hollander’s +magazine for India, we proposed first to sail thither, and there to +provide for ourselves as well as we could. Being all arrived, we were +courteously received by the General; and I, with Mr. Hill and another +friend, who were all my party, were promised our passage to Europe in +their East-India fleet. About this time the General was sending four or +five ships of war, with soldiers, to procure satisfaction from the King +of the island for an outrage that had been committed on a party of +Hollanders, who, to the number of 80, had been slaughtered by the +Javanese. These ships, it seems, were originally designed against +Sillebar, an English settlement on the west coast of Sumatra; but this +act of hostility happening to intervene, it had diverted their purpose, +and saved the factory for this time. There were now in Batavia twenty of +us, who, on hearing this news, would willingly have repaired to +Sillebar; but the Dutch would by no means permit us, though we had +bought a sloop for that purpose. When we were just ready to sail, the +General ordered our sloop to be seized; and when we remonstrated against +this incivility, they produced an old law, by which the subjects of the +republic in India are forbidden to sell any vessel to any foreigner; and +they even went so far as to imprison those who had transgressed it. To +us, indeed, they gave the prime cost of the sloop, but paid us nothing +for fitting her up. + +This project failing, Mr. Hill, another friend, and I, embarked on board +the _Solida_ Indiaman, bound to Holland; and, as we were putting out of +the road, we saw our ship Captain John Eaton coming in; however, we held +our course; but, finding the wind unfavourable, we turned down to Bantam +to take in provisions, and from thence steered to Prince’s Island, where +we lay for a fair wind three weeks. About the end of March, we set sail +from thence, with the wind at N. W. and shaped our course to the Cape of +Good Hope. On the 11th of May, after a pleasant passage, we made the +land called Point Primicra, bearing from us N. W. distant 12 leagues. We +had the wind at N. E. being distant from the cape 560 miles, the land +trending away S. W. by W. The fish which came about the ship near the +island of Mona, the 30th of March, left us now, when we judged ourselves +in latitude 32 deg. 47 min. S. From the 15th of May to the 29th we had +sailed only 96 miles; but observing next day, we found by our latitude +that we had a very strong current, that had driven our ship to the +southward 34 miles farther than we judged ourselves to be; for we +thought we had been in the latitude of 33 deg. 41 min. S. whereas we +found ourselves in lat. 34 deg. 15 min. S. our course having been S. W. +40 miles. I argued the reason with the chief mate of the ship, and he +told me it once happened in this place, that they lay a-trie with three +main-sails, and the wind at W. S. W. three days; and when they took +their observation, they found the ship driven to windward 200 English +miles; and likewise in lat. 36 deg. 37 min. they say, they often find +the like. + +From hence to the 27th nothing remarkable happened; but on that day we +had the wind very furious, blowing a storm from W. S. W. We lay a-trie +with our main-sails, and found we were in lat. 30 deg. 2 min. S. coming +in with the land; and now the current went to the eastward, and we began +to fear lest we should lose our passage by the cape. Our Captain, who +had long been sick, was now judged to be past recovery, and in the +middle of the night died: this occasioned a great deal of confusion; +and, to add to our difficulties, our water began to fail, and we were +reduced to a pint a day per man. Next day we heaved our Dutch Captain’s +corpse overboard, when a council-of-war was called, wherein it was +resolved, that Captain Tominall, Commander of the Critsman, should +command the Solida, and that Captain Tominall’s chief-mate should +command the Critsman. The pilot also of the Solida, whose name was +Houdin, was ordered on board the Critsman; but he refused to go, and the +men assembled tumultuously, and declared, they would not part with him. +The Lord Van Heldine was in a great rage with the steersman; but the +crew were resolute, and he was obliged to yield. + +On the 1st of June we again came in sight of land. It appeared like a +round hill flat at top, and bore from us N. N. E. with a smaller hill to +the eastward of it. Next day we were before the harbour of the cape, +with the wind at north, and fine fair weather. On the 3d, at night, we +came to an anchor in the bay before the castle, in nine fathom water. +Three days before we lost sight of the Critsman in the hard gale; but +this day we saw a sail at sea, and concluded that it must be the +Critsman. Here we heard, that the Francis Maria was lost, with 400 men +on board; and here likewise we were told, that the King of England had +taken the Duke of Monmouth, and that he was beheaded. Another piece of +news we learned was, that a Portuguese carrack was cast away upon the +reef, having on board four millions of guelders in gold, sent as a +present from the King of Siam to the King of Portugal; and that four +Dutch ships had likewise struck upon the same reef, but that they had +fortunately escaped with very little damage. + +This day four of the natives came down to the city, dancing naked, and +offering their wives to the Hollanders for little bits of tobacco. They +were the filthiest men I ever saw. Next day my two friends and I walked +about the town, in which are about 100 houses, built very low to save +them from the boisterous gales of wind that blow here in the months of +December, January, and February: but the Dutch have here a strong +castle, with 80 guns well mounted, and a spacious garden with pleasant +walks, and planted with almost every kind of fruit, flowers, and herbs. +This is the greatest rarity that we saw at the cape. We walked, +moreover, without the town to the village inhabited by the Hodmandods +(so called by the Hollanders), who are the natives of the country. These +people are said to be born white, but make themselves black by anointing +their bodies, and exposing their infants to the sun and smoke. Their +houses, or huts, are built round, like the cabbins in Ireland of the +wild Irish, with the fire-place in the middle, round which they all lie +in common, covered only with the skins of some beast, and without any +other bed than the ashes of the wood on which they dress their meat. +They eat any thing that is foul, and will gather from the dunghills the +offal that is thrown out by the Dutch to feed their dogs. Their men are +not at all jealous of foreigners; but will beat their wives unmercifully +for lying with their neighbours. When the women marry, they cut off a +joint of the middle-finger; and if the husband dies, and the widow +marries again, she cuts off another joint; and so many men as they +marry, so many joints of their fingers they lose. They are supposed to +worship the moon, because at the full and change they assemble in great +numbers, dancing and rejoicing when she shines, but howling and +lamenting when they are deprived of her light. + +It happened while we were at the cape, that one of the Hodmandods drank +himself dead at the fort; of which his countrymen getting intelligence, +they assembled about him, and with oil and milk endeavoured to recover +him; but, finding all their efforts vain, and that they could perceive +no spark of life remaining, they began to make preparations for his +funeral, which they performed in the following manner. They first +brought knives, and shaved him from head to foot; then, digging a hole +in the ground, they carefully placed him in a sitting posture, with his +body and head erect, and his legs and thighs stretched out horizontally, +and pressed down streight; this being performed, they propt him up in +this attitude with stones and then came a company of their women to howl +over him, who accompanied their lamentations with a hideous shrieking, +as if death appeared before them in the shape of a monster, and was +ready to devour them. After their time of mourning was over, they filled +up the hole with earth, and covered it over with the green turf. + +During the time of our stay at the cape, our people were chiefly +employed in cleansing and scouring the ship, in fishing her masts, and +in fitting and trimming her rigging. We also took in wood and water, +supplied ourselves with fresh provisions; and, on the 15th of June, when +the wind came fair, we were ready to sail. + +We were now three ships in company, the Solida and Critsman, who came +together from Batavia, and the Emeland who came from Bengal. On Tuesday +the 16th, we pursued our course to the N. W. and N. W. by W. till +Tuesday the 29th, without any material incident intervening. We had no +observation; but I judged we were in lat. 19 deg. 54 min. S. This day it +was that I spoke with an Englishman on board the Emeland, that had been +some time in the Dutch service, who told me, that they came out in +company with two English ships, one named the Resolution, the other the +Defence, with both of whom they had parted in a storm on the coast of +Coromandel; that the Resolution was leaky, and that there were little +hopes of her crew’s being able to keep her above water. He told me +likewise, that there were several Englishmen in the King of Siam’s +service; that the English East-India Company was but little regarded by +the Moors; but that the interlopers were very much encouraged; and that +one Mr. Deane, being their Chief, lived in great splendor, never going +out without 70 or 80 Moors to attend him. + +We had, moreover, this day great feasting on board us, the Commanders of +the other ships being invited to an entertainment. But while the men +were loading the guns to pay the usual salute, they were alarmed by a +strange voice from the sea, crying out, _Come help, come help, a man +over-board!_ on which they forthwith brought the ship to, thinking to +take him up; but they neither saw, nor heard any more of him. Enquiry +was then made through all the ships, if any of them had lost a man; but +upon the strictest examination, it appeared that every ship had her +proper complement; so that they concluded it was the spirit of some man +that had been drowned in that latitude by accident. + +On the 11th of July another very wonderful incident very much astonished +our company. When we left Batavia we took a she-goat on board, which had +then two young kids about three weeks old. This creature was observed to +grow bigger every day; and all that our people could conjecture was, +that it proceeded from the unwholesomness of the water that made her +swell; but, to the astonishment of all of us, she now brought forth four +young ones, although no male had been on board. + +On the 4th of July we threw one man overboard who died the night before, +though no one knew of his being ill. He was an old Dane, who, having no +body on board to take care of his effects, those who first perceived he +was dead fell to rummaging his chest, to secure to themselves what he +had saved; but, as in like cases, they could not agree about dividing +the plunder, the matter came to the knowledge of the Captain, who made +the thieves give up all they had stolen, which he took under his own +care for the benefit of his family. + +On the 12th of July we came up with the Island of Ascension, and next +day took a new departure from thence. On the 20th we found we were in +lat. 15 deg. N. And now a council-of-war was called upon our Captain. +His accusation was, that he had formed a conspiracy with five men more, +to murder a person of quality and his lady, with some other passengers +on board, and that, when the murders were accomplished, they were to +seize upon their riches, and run away with the ship. The purser was the +chief accuser; but, upon examination, the whole charge seemed so +improbable, and the man who broached the story denying upon the trial +what he had confidently affirmed before to the purser, the Captain was +honourably acquitted, and the villain punished. + +Wednesday the 22d, we made out in longitude from the cape 11 deg. 56 +min. judging ourselves to be in long. 355 deg. 56 min. And no wit was +that I cut the same Line which I did when I departed from Virginia in +the year 1683, having encompassed the globe; and cannot but note, that I +have been farther southward than any man that I ever heard or read of +before me in this voyage, having, as I have already said, reached as far +as lat. 60 deg. 30 min. S. and so it happened, that, being bound to go +north about Scotland to make Holland, I passed about 60 deg. north, +though I mention this as no extraordinary thing. + +We met with no extraordinary occurrence till the 2d of August, when our +Captain, after three days illness, died of a pain in his bowels. His +chief steersman was made Commander in his room; but, though his cause +was warmly espoused by the men on a former occasion, yet it was not till +after much opposition that they acquiesced in his present advancement. + +On the 5th of September, about 10 at night, we had a violent storm, and +we had like to have been on board the Critsman; and, by endeavouring to +avoid it, had well-nigh overset our own ship. + +On Sunday the 19th, when the weather began to clear up, I saw land, as +did also two men more. I supposed it to be the island of Shetland; but +our Captain would not believe it; however, about six in the evening, the +Critsman’s people saw land also, and let go the flag, which nettled our +Captain, who blamed his own incredulity. + +We came up with the Isle of Farley by the 22d, steered on, and on the +25th had the wind all round the compass. About this time we came up with +a Scotch ship, who steered so that we ran her on board on her quarter; +and, had we not slackened sail, should certainly have sunk her. Two +passengers leapt into our ship to save their lives; but they happened to +be more afraid than hurt. The ship was called the Lion of Leith; and the +crew told us, that the Turks lay at Plymouth and Dartmouth, where they +had victualled and careened, and from whence they had occasionally slipt +out, and had taken 100 sail of Hollanders, and among them a Dutch +frigate of 36 guns, which gave occasion to many hard speeches against +the English nation; though we found afterwards that the whole was an +idle story, framed only to amuse the Dutchmen, and to flatter their +humour by belying the English. + +On sailing next day with the wind at E. S. E. we found ourselves in +latitude 53 deg. 35 min. N. and I judged us to be on the West-bank. At +the same time we came up with two ships, one a Dane, the other an +Englishman from London, with whom I sent my quadrant, and with whom +myself and my two friends would willingly have gone, if our Dutch lord +would have given us leave; but he told us, he could not answer the +letting us go, to his Masters the States-General. + +On Tuesday the 28th, we came before the Maes, with the wind at E. N. E. +When it was day we saw the Brill Church, and came to an anchor in 10 +fathom water. On the 30th we got bread and beer on board. Next day we +entered the harbour at Helvoetsluys, after we had been seven months in +our passage from Batavia. Three days after our arrival, one of my two +mates died, and I made no great stay here but went to Rotterdam, where I +found the Anne yacht. In her I came passenger for England, and, through +the infinite mercy of God, arrived at London, October 12 following. + +Of Cowley’s history, as we can know nothing but from this relation of +his voyage, so it is not easy either to form a judgment of his capacity +or of his acquirements. He seems to have been an excellent navigator, as +we do not find, in the whole course of his pursuits, either that he was +ever at a loss in finding the ports he sought, or that the ships of +which he had the direction were ever in danger of being cast away. The +nature of his employment in a subordinate station, led him rather to a +habit of obedience than of opposition; and therefore his quitting the +ship in which it was his choice to sail, is more to be wondered at, than +that he should steal away from his company at Batavia with only two +friends. Perhaps his conduct on this occasion might be owing to +principle; for of the enormities committed by the buccaneers, with whom +he was engaged, Cowley must be acquitted, because he was drawn into +their service by stratagem; and a strong proof of his honesty is, his +embracing the first fair opportunity of deserting them. + +We know there are writers, and those of no mean credit, who have taken +pains to justify the practices of the buccaneers, and who have +attributed to their discoveries and to their exploits the advancement of +the art of navigation, and the emolument of their country: but it +neither appears to us, that their discoveries were of any consequence in +a national sense, or that the riches they brought home were a +counter-balance for the lives that were sacrificed in the acquisition. + +Their discoveries were chiefly of lurking-places to which they were +forced to retire to escape the pursuit of the enemy; and, as to the +treasures they acquired, they were generally purchased with the lives of +many brave men, who, had they been employed in honest commerce, would +have gained profit to themselves and honour to their country. + +It is not from the temporary excursions of a banditti that a nation can +hope to become rich; nor is it by a hasty race round the world that the +art of navigation is to be improved. The improvements of art are slow in +their progress; and the acquisition of national wealth can only be +obtained by a steady perseverance in industry and commerce. It is, +therefore, the true interest of every commercial nation to +discountenance plunderers, and to applaud those only who are employed in +cultivating the arts of peace. + + + + + *** Though the following relations may seem foreign to our design of + giving an account only of the discoveries of our English navigators, + yet we have judged them too curious to be here omitted. + + _Extract from a_ Dutch _Relation of_ ROGGEWEIGN’_s_ _Discovery of_ + Easter Island. + + +“Upon the 6th day of April, being in lat. 27 deg. S. and long. 268 deg. +we discovered an island, hitherto unknown to any European; for which +reason, according to the usual custom on the first discovery of any +unknown land, we christened it by the name of EASTER ISLAND, it being +the anniversary of our Saviour’s Resurrection on that very day that we +arrived there. As soon as the anchors were ready to drop, we observed at +a distance a neat boat, of a very remarkable construction, the whole +patched together out of pieces of wood, which could hardly make up the +largeness of half a foot. This boat was managed by a single man, a giant +of twelve feet high, who exerted all his strength to escape us, but in +vain, because he was surrounded and taken. His body was painted with a +dark-brown colour. We tried with such signs and words as are used here +and there among the islands in the South Sea, to get some intelligence +from him, but could not perceive that he understood any thing, wherefore +we permitted him to go into his boat again and depart. Two days +afterwards the whole sea was covered with the savage inhabitants of this +island, who came swimming round the ship in such multitudes, that we +neither could, nor did we think it adviseable to land. They clambered +like cats up the ship’s sides with the utmost assurance, and came +aboard, where they did not appear to be in the least afraid of us, but +they seemed very much surprized at the largeness and extent of our ships +and rigging, and could not conceive the meaning of all that they saw; +but their curiosity was chiefly engaged by the great guns, which they +could not enough admire, and which they frequently struck their hands +upon, to try if they could not lift them up, and carry them off; but +when they saw that such logs by such an attempt were too heavy for them, +and could not be moved, these overgrown fellows stood abashed, and were, +in appearance, very much out of humour. They no sooner came aboard, than +we immediately found that they were naturally as thievish and +nimble-fingered as the inhabitants of those islands to which voyagers +have affixed the name of the Islands of Thieves, from the great +propensity of the people to rob and steal, if they were not beaten from +it. Rusty nails, old iron, and whatever they could catch or lay hold on, +was equal to them, with which they jumped overboard immediately. They +attempted with their nails to scratch the bolts out of the ship, but +these were too fast for them. These huge fellows came at last aboard in +such numbers, that we were hardly capable to keep them in order, or keep +a watchful eye upon their motions, and the quickness of their hands; so +that fearing they would become too many for us, we used our best +endeavours to get rid of them in a friendly way; but they not seeming +inclinable to leave us, we were obliged to use harsher methods, and +drive these savages out of the ships by force. + +“On the 10th of April we made for the island in our boats, well armed, +in order to land, and take a view of this country, where an innumerable +company of savages stood on the sea side to guard the shore, and +obstruct our landing; they threatened us mightily by their gestures, and +shewed an inclination to await us, and turn us out of their country; but +as soon as we, through necessity, gave them a discharge of our muskets, +and here and there brought one of them to the ground, they lost their +courage. They made the most surprizing motions and gestures in the +world, and viewed their fallen companions with the utmost astonishment, +wondering at the wounds which the bullets had made in their bodies; +whereupon they hastily fled with a dreadful howling, dragging the dead +bodies along with them; so the shore was cleared, and we landed in +safety. + +“These people do not go naked, as many other savages do; every person is +cloathed in different colours of cotton and worsted, curiously woven, or +stitched; but nothing misbecomes them more than their ears, which are +abominably long, and in most of them hang upon the shoulders; so that, +though they themselves look upon this as the greatest ornament, they +appeared very uncouth to us, who were not accustomed to such; the more +so, as there were in them such extravagantly large holes and openings, +that we could easily put our hands through them. + +“Thus far my narrative will gain credit, because it contains nothing +uncommon, yet I must declare, that all these savages are of a more than +gigantic size, for the men are twice as tall and thick as the largest of +our people; they measured, one with another, the height of twelve feet, +so that we could easily, (who will not wonder at it!) without stooping, +have passed betwixt the legs of these sons of Goliah. According to their +height, so is their thickness, and are all, one with another, very well +proportioned, so that each could have passed for a Hercules; but none of +their wives came up to the height of the men, being commonly not above +ten or eleven feet. The men had their bodies painted with a red or dark +brown, and the women with a scarlet colour. + +“I doubt not but most people who read this voyage will give no credit to +what I now relate, and that this account of the height of these giants +will probably pass with them for a mere fable or fiction; but this I +declare, I have put down nothing but the real truth, and that this +people, upon the nicest inspection, were in fact of such a surpassing +height as I have here described. + +“After the inhabitants of Easter Island had made trial of the strength +of our weapons, as we have before related, they began to use us in a +more civil manner, and brought us from their huts all kinds of +vegetables, sugar canes, with yams, plantains, and a great quantity of +fowls, which came very a-propos, and tended to refresh us greatly. + +“What I have seen of the worship and idols of these savages is very +wonderful. Two stones, of a largeness almost beyond belief, served them +for gods; the one was broad beyond measure, and lay upon the ground; +upon this stood the other stone, which was of such extent and height +that seven of our people with outstretched arms would hardly have been +able to encircle it; so that it appeared to me, and all others, +impossible that this stone could have been lifted up and placed upon the +other by the inhabitants of these islands, how large and strong soever +they might be; for, besides the thickness, it was fully as high as three +men. About the top of this stone there was cut or carved the shape of a +man’s head, adorned with a garland, which was set together in the manner +of inlaid work, made of small stones, in a manner not very improper. The +name of the largest idol was called Taurico, and the other Dago; at +least these were the words they called to them by, and wherewith they +worshipped them. + +“These savages had great respect for the two idols Taurico and Dago, and +approached them with great reverence, namely, with dancing, shouting, +jumping, and clapping of hands, in the same manner as we read in holy +writ, that the children of Israel worshipped the golden-calf which Aaron +set up; and when the cannon (of which they seemed to be in great terror) +were discharged, and the heavy shot sounded in their ears, they made +surprizing and wonderful gestures and leaps, and pointed with their +finger, first to our people, and then to their gods, whom they appeared +to supplicate for help against us, and to call upon with a frightful +shout, and howling of Dago! Dago! + +“While we lay before this Easter Island, a heavy tempest surprized us, +which pressed so much on the ships, that I had no thought but that they +would drive from their anchors, and we with them come to a miserable end +on this coast, which God prevented, the storm being at last appeased, +without having done any damage to the ships. + +“On the 12th of April, leaving this island, we put to sea again, and +shaped our course to the westward. + +“On the 20th of May we came into the latitude of 14 deg. 41 min. S. +where we fell in with a great number of sunken rocks, rocks above water, +and small islands, all entangled together; so that we were of opinion, +they had been joined together in former times, and composed one solid +piece of land, but separated from one another afterwards by a pressure +of the waters. Among these an island appeared above the rest, the most +stately and eminent, intersected by many rivers and springs of water, +which therefore was christened Water Island by Schouten and Le Maire, +who discovered it in 1616, on their voyage to the Terra Australis. In +this labyrinth of islands and rocks, we had the woeful misfortune to +lose one of our ships, the African Galley, which struck upon the rocks, +and beat to pieces. It may be accounted, however, a happy circumstance, +that all the people aboard were saved and brought off; and being divided +among the two remaining ships, were a reinforcement to their crews. It +was impossible for the ships to approach very near the land, where no +anchoring ground was to be found. It is a low, sandy, and rocky island, +being in the inland parts almost all drowned land; but upon the borders +it is full of trees, among which neither palmetto or cocoa-nut trees +were to be found; which I believe is the reason of its not being +inhabited; nevertheless, five of our men who went ashore willingly +remained on the island, and would not return again to the ships, being +wearied out with the hardships they had already suffered, and fearing +many more unforeseen disasters were still awaiting them. The loss of the +above-mentioned ship would be a happy circumstance for them, since from +the wreck, and what would be drove ashore, they might be supplied with +arms, and all other necessaries. + +“On the 25th of May we passed by the island of Flies, also discovered by +the foresaid Schouten in his above-mentioned voyage. The inland parts of +it are likewise full of salt-water, and it abounds in great plenty of +wild green trees. It is inhabited by savages of a large stature, armed +with bows and arrows. The island was very properly named, from the +incredible quantity of nasty flies wherewith it is covered, which also +come aboard, and fall so thick on the face, and other parts of the body, +that one is at a loss to conceal himself from them, and every thing one +eats or drinks is full of them; they put us to great trouble for two or +three days, when these uninvited guests departed. + +“On the 29th of May we passed among a number of rocks, and islands, from +whence we sometimes saw a smoak ascend, a sign that they were inhabited; +but we had no opportunity of going ashore. This day we found ourselves +in lat. 15 deg. 17 min. S. and long. 224 deg. + +“On the 1st of June, in 15 deg. 47 min. and long. 224 deg. we came in +sight of an island hitherto unknown to, and unlooked for by, any +European. Thither we went in our boats, in order to take a view of it, +and to procure refreshments; when the inhabitants, who saw us approach +from afar, came down upon the shore to make us return back, and to +prevent our landing. They are people of an excellent shape, well +proportioned, and comely in person; and what is surprizing, their skin +is as _clear and white as that of a native of Holland_. They seemed to +shew a resolution to stay for us; for, as soon as we came near, they +jumped like madmen into the water to meet us, and pushed with great +cruelty with their weapons, which consisted of spears and lances, whose +points were armed with a very sharp wood as hard as iron: wherefore, +being obliged to free ourselves, and preserve our lives from this +hostile attack, we fired upon them with our muskets, which made these +savage warriors immediately take to their heels, and obliged them to +look out for a place of safety; for as soon as they had tasted the +deadly effects of these weapons, they turned their backs upon us, and +fled to a high steep rock, which they scrambled up like monkies, with +incredible swiftness. + +“From thence, being convinced of our superior force, they gave us to +understand, that all hostilities should cease on their part, and they +would treat with us as friends; and on our side we used every means to +allure them to us, being in the utmost want of all manner of +refreshments. Every thing succeeded according to our wishes; they +brought us their commodities, consisting of cocoa-nuts, and a certain +bitter herb of the taste of Dutch cresses, which is found here in great +plenty. For these we gave them in exchange several trifles and trinkets; +such as small looking-glasses, glass beads of all colours, combs, bells, +and a number of such toys of little value, with which they were as well, +and even better pleased, than we were with the cocoa-nuts and bitter +herbs, which, however, were much more agreeable and useful to us in our +present condition than gold and silver, as we thereby enjoyed a +remarkable benefit and amazing relief against the scurvy, which had +already brought us into a most deplorable situation. + +“Although it appeared by these mutual exchanges that these savages were +got into good understanding and friendship with us, we soon discovered +that this was no more than a feigned reconciliation, serving only to +deceive us and make us the more easily fall into their snares, with +which villainous inclination almost all the inhabitants of the islands +lying in those seas are infected; for as some of our people, ordered to +view and make a further discovery of the country, were passing betwixt +the rocks and cliffs, along a strait and narrow path, to see the form +and condition of the place, they were met by an old grey-headed man, +who, although he neither understood them or they him, endeavoured by +many signs and motions to make them sensible that they were not in +safety, and that it would be best for them to return back; he pointed to +the road that brought them thither; and the better to make them +understand the secret ambush and the approaching danger, he took up a +stone from the ground and threw it down before him. How well soever our +people ought to have understood from this, that those barbarians would +attack them from the tops of the rocks with stones, yet they paid no +regard to the signs and admonitions of the good old savage, but marched +forward, trusting to their arms. They had not gone far before a dreadful +shower of stones came pouring upon them from all quarters, when they +least thought of it, in such large quantities and with such violence, +that many of our people were thereby lamed and wounded, without being +able to make resistance in defending themselves or driving the savages +from above them, who had made their assault from too secure a place; so +that our people were constrained to slacken their pace, contrary to +their inclinations, and return back with their wounded heads, being very +well pleased however that they had escaped so well. + +“What further regards these villains and traitors, I have already +observed that they are comely and well-proportioned in their persons, +and wear as an ornament pearls of a large size in their ears. About +their necks and bodies they wear, as a singular ornament, the shells of +pearl oysters. As we received great benefit and relief from our sickness +by means of the bitter herb which is found here in great plenty, and was +given us by the savages in exchange for our toys, so this new-discovered +island was by us christened by the name of the Verkwikking’s island. + +“After this adventure with these roguish savages no delay was made +there, but we got again under sail; and because the provisions lessened +gradually from day to day, and the disorders, notwithstanding the relief +from the bitter herbs, continued to increase, to the great grief of us +all, it was resolved, in a council of the principal officers, to return +home by the East-Indies. We then lay up to lat. 15 deg. 47 min. S. and +according to our reckoning 224 deg. 18 min. long. being then about 1200 +leagues from the coast of Peru. + +“On the 12th of June we found ourselves in latitude 15 deg. 16 min. S. +and longitude 205 deg. 8 min. + +“On the 14th we discovered two islands, which we could not approach near +enough to take a proper view of, by reason of the rough and stormy sea; +but, on the other hand, we had this satisfaction, that the inhabitants +came to take a view of us, and kept hovering about the ships in a number +of boats of such neat and exquisite workmanship as is almost incredible +that any thing of the kind should have been found among such savages, +they being of such an artful construction, the furniture so pretty, and +the form so neat, adorned with a number of the most curious carved +figures, that it is impossible for the imagination to conceive any thing +more elegant; and really their carved image work (which was the greatest +ornament of these boats) was so exquisite, that I much doubt if there +are many engravers in Europe capable of producing more curious +workmanship. The people in these fine boats were armed with darts, and +had their heads adorned with green leaves, and their bodies cloathed +with reeds. This island got the name of Bowman’s island from a captain +of that name. It was very pleasant and delightful to behold, fruitful, +and surrounded with trees, among which the palmetto shewed itself. + +“On the 15th we came in sight of an island about seven miles in length, +lying in lat. 13 deg. 41 min. S. and 250 deg. long. Many of us felt a +longing desire to touch at this island, in hopes of procuring some +refreshment; but it was deferred, and we pursued our voyage without +landing, in order to save time, because our miseries and inconveniences +daily increased, and the disorders from many causes increased also. + +“On the 18th of July we perceived many different islands, and among +others New Zealand, computed to be in extent about 300 leagues, lying +under 6 deg. of S. lat. and 166 deg. long.” + + +This relation is copied verbatim from Mr. Dalrymple’s valuable +Collection of Spanish and Dutch Discoveries in the South Seas, as is +likewise the following Relation of the Discovery of Davis’s Land; but +neither the one nor the other of these discoveries have since been fully +confirmed. + + + + + _An Account of the_ DISCOVERY _of the Land called_ DAVIS’S LAND. + + +“We went from Gallapagoes under the Line, for the southward; intending +to touch nowhere till we came to the island of Juan Fernandez. + +“In our way thither, about four o’clock in the morning, when we were in +the latitude of 12 deg. 30 min. S. and about 150 leagues from the main +of America, our ship and bark felt a terrible shock, which put our men +into such a consternation, that they could hardly tell where they were, +or what to think, but every one began to prepare for death. And, indeed, +the shock was so sudden and violent, that we took it for granted the +ship had struck upon a rock: but, when the amazement was a little over, +we cast the lead, and sounded, but found no ground; so that, after +consultation, we concluded it must certainly be some earthquake. The +suddenness of this shock made the guns of the ship leap in their +carriages, and several of the men were shaken out of their hammocks. +Captain Davis, who lay with his head over a gun, was thrown out of his +cabin. The sea, which ordinarily looks green, seemed then of a whitish +colour; and the water which we took up in our buckets for the ship’s +use, we found to be a little mixed with sand. This at first made us +think there was some spit of land; but when we had sounded, it confirmed +our opinion of the earthquake. Some time after, we heard news, that at +that very time there was an earthquake at Callao, which is the road for +Lima, and that the sea ebbed so far from the shore, that on a sudden +there was no water to be seen; and that after it had been away a +considerable time, it returned in rolling mountains of water, which +carried the ships in the road of Callao a league up into the country, +overflowed the city of Callao, though it stood upon a hill, together +with the fort, and drowned man and beast for 50 leagues along the shore, +doing mischief even at Lima, though six miles within land from the town +of Callao. + +Having recovered our fright, we kept on to the southward. We steered S. +and by E. half easterly, until we came to lat. of 27 deg. 20 min. S. +when, about two hours before day, we fell in with a small, low, sandy +island, and heard a great roaring noise, like that of the sea beating +upon the shore, right-a-head of the ship: whereupon the sailors, fearing +to fall foul upon the shore before day, desired the captain to put the +ship about, and to stand off till day appeared; to which the captain +gave his consent. So we plyed off till day, and then stood in again with +the land; which proved to be a small flat island, without the guard of +any rocks. We stood in within a quarter of a mile of the shore, and +could see it plainly, for it was a clear morning, not foggy nor hazy. To +the westward, about twelve leagues, by judgment, we saw a range of high +land, which we took to be islands, for there were several partitions in +the prospect. This land seemed to reach about fourteen or sixteen +leagues in a range; and there came hence great flocks of fowls. I, and +many more of our men, would have made this land, and have gone ashore at +it, but the captain would not permit us. The small island bears from +Copayapo almost due east 500 leagues, and from the Gallapagoes, under +the Line, 600 leagues. + +Dampier says, “Captain Davis told me lately, that after his departure +from Ria Lexa, he went, after several traverses, to the Gallapagoes; and +that standing thence southward for wind, to bring him about Terra del +Fuego, in the latitude of 27 deg. S. about 500 leagues from Copayapo, on +the coast of Chili, he saw a small sandy island just by him; and that +they saw to the westward of it a long track of pretty high land, +trending away to the N. W. out of sight.” + + + END OF THE FIRST VOLUME. + + + + + Transcriber’s notes + + +New original cover art included with this eBook is granted to the public +domain. + +The illustrations have been moved to appropriate paragraph breaks. + +The original text used the long s. This has been changed to the regular +s. + +Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. + +Archaic and inconsistent spelling and hyphenation have been retained. + +The opening square bracket on page 237 appears in the original, there is +no matching closing bracket. + +Marking of quotations in the original is inconsistent: where quotation +marks appear at the start of each line only those at the start of +paragraphs have been retained; in other cases quotation marks follow the +original even when they seem irregular. + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 *** diff --git a/77886-h/77886-h.htm b/77886-h/77886-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ff29e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/77886-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,19624 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> +<meta charset="UTF-8"> +<title>An historical account of all the voyages round the world, performed by English navigators. (Volume 1 of 4) | Project Gutenberg</title> +<link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> +<style> +body { margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; position: relative;} +figure {margin: 1ex auto;} +figcaption {text-align: center;} +h1 {page-break-before: always; font-weight: normal; font-size: 1em; margin-bottom: 0; margin-top: 0} +p {text-align: justify; text-indent: 1.4em; margin-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0;} +table {border-spacing: 0} +th {font-weight: normal; padding: 0;} +td {padding: 0;} +h2 {text-align: center; font-weight: normal; font-size: 1em;} +p.drop-cap {text-indent: 0;} +p.drop-cap:first-letter {float: left; font-size: 300%; line-height:0.68em; margin: 0.12em 0.1em 0em 0em;} +.pagenum { position: absolute; right: -3.5em; font-size: small; text-indent: 0; text-align: right; border: 1px solid silver; margin-top: 0.3em; padding: 0 0.2em; color: silver;} +.v_align_b { vertical-align: bottom;} +.w100 {width: 100%;} +.max100 {max-width: 100%;} +.align_c { text-align: center; text-indent: 0;} +.mtop4 {margin-top: 4em;} +.lspp {letter-spacing: 0.2em; margin-right: -0.2em;} +.lspa { letter-spacing: 0.11em; margin-right: -0.11em;} +.l13 { font-size: 1.3em; } +.l15 {font-size: 1.5em;} +.small-caps { font-variant: small-caps;} +.l75 {font-size: 0.75em; } +.top_space { margin-top: 1em;} +.fontp9 { font-size: 0.9em;} +.center { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} +.lh1p1 {line-height: 1.1;} +.margetb {margin-top: 1ex; margin-bottom: 1ex;} +.lspz { letter-spacing: 0.05em; margin-right: -0.05em;} +.hang_indent {text-align: justify; padding-left: 1.2em; text-indent: -1.2em;} +.lined {border-top: 2px solid black; border-bottom: 9px double black; margin-top: .3em; margin-bottom: .3em; padding: .2em;} +.lspb { letter-spacing: 0.7em; margin-right: -0.7em;} +.one_space { margin-top: 1.3ex; margin-bottom: 1.3ex;} +.topline {border-top: 1px solid black;} +.chapter {padding-top: 4em; page-break-before: always;} +.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} +.lspd { letter-spacing: 1em; margin-right: -1em;} +.font2p { font-size: 2em; } +.two_space { margin-top: 1em;} +.toupper {text-transform: uppercase;} +.ip2 {margin-left: -0.2em;} +.x-ebookmaker p.drop-cap:first-letter {float: none; margin: 0; font-size: 100%;} +.lspc { letter-spacing: 0.4em; margin-right: -0.4em;} +.imw_5 {width: 5em;} +.margtb_1 {margin: 1ex 0;} +.icenter { text-align: center;} +.lspe { letter-spacing: 2em; margin-right: -2em;} +.verse {padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;} +.poetry_container {display: flex; justify-content: center;} +.poetry {} +.stanza {margin-top: 1ex; margin-bottom: 1ex;} +.mt1x5 {margin-top: 1.5ex;} +.break_before {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} +.l12 { font-size: 1.2em; } +.fn_anchor {font-size: 0.8em; vertical-align: super;} +.footnote { font-size: small; margin: 2ex 0;} +.ip5 {margin-left: -0.5em;} +.lower {vertical-align: -0.5em; line-height: 0;} +.large { font-size: large;} +.lh1p7 {line-height: 1.7;} +.tnote {font-size: 0.9em; margin-top: 2em; padding: 0.5em;} +.space_after { margin-bottom: 1.3ex;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspa {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspb {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspc {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspd {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspe {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspp {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .lspz {letter-spacing: 0; margin-right: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .toupper {text-transform: none;} +.x-ebookmaker .ip2 {margin-left: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .ip5 {margin-left: 0;} +.x-ebookmaker .chapter {padding-top: 0; page-break-before: always;} +td.al {text-align: left;} +td.ar {text-align: right;} +td.ph {padding-left: 1em; text-indent: -1em;} +td.pr {padding-right: 0.5em;} +td.vt {vertical-align: top;} +td.vb {vertical-align: bottom;} +th.ac {text-align: center;} +th.pu {padding-top: 1ex;} +th.pb {padding-bottom: 0.5ex;} +h2 {line-height: 2;} +</style> +</head> +<body> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 ***</div> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 80em;'> +<img src="images/001.png" class="w100 v_align_b" alt="Map of Mexico and South America"> +</figure> +<div class='section'> +<h1 class="align_c mtop4"> +<span class='lspp'>AN</span><br> +<span class='l13'><span class='lspa'>HISTORICAL ACCOUNT</span></span><br> +<span class='lspp'>OF ALL THE</span><br> +<span class='l15'><span class='lspa'>VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD</span>,</span><br> +<span class='lspp'>PERFORMED BY</span><br> +<span class='l13'><span class='lspp'>ENGLISH NAVIGATORS</span>;</span> +</h1> +<p class="align_c"> +<span class='l75'><span class='lspa'>INCLUDING THOSE LATELY UNDERTAKEN</span></span><br> +<span class='l13'>By <span class="small-caps"><span class='lspp'>Order</span></span> of his <span class="small-caps"><span class='lspp'>Present </span></span><span class='lspp'>MAJESTY</span>.</span> +</p> +<p class="align_c top_space"> +<span class='l75'><span class='lspp'>THE WHOLE</span></span><br> +Faithfully Extracted from the <span class="small-caps"><span class='lspa'>Journals</span></span> of the<br> +<span class='l13'><span class='lspp'>VOYAGERS</span>.</span> +</p> +<table class='fontp9 center lh1p1 margetb'> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Drake</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">undertaken in 1577-80</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Cavendish</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1586-88</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Cowley</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1683-86</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Dampier</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1689-96</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Cooke</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1708-11</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Rogers</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1708-11</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Clipperton</span></span> and <span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Shelvocke</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1719-22</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Anson</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1740-44</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Byron</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1764-66</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Wallis</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1766-68</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Carteret</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1766-69</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph"><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspz'>Cook</span></span>,</td> +<td class="ar">1768-71</td> +</tr> +</table> +<p class='align_c'> +<span class='l75'><span class='lspp'>TOGETHER WITH</span></span></p> +<p class='hang_indent'> +That of <span class="small-caps">Sydney Parkinson</span>, Draftsman to <span class="small-caps">Joseph Banks</span>, Esq; who circumnavigated the Globe with +Capt. <span class="small-caps">Cook</span>, in his Majesty’s Ship the <span class="small-caps">Endeavour</span>.</p> +<p class="align_c"> +<span class='l75'><span class='lspp'>AND</span></span> +</p> +<p class='align_c'> +The Voyage of Mons. <span class="small-caps">Bougainville</span> round the World, +Performed by Order of the French King.</p> +<p class="align_c top_space"> +Illustrated with Maps, Charts, and Historical Prints. +</p> +<p class="align_c top_space"> +<span class="small-caps"><span class='lspp'>In Four Volumes</span></span>. +</p> +<p class="l75 top_space align_c"> +To which is added, +</p> +<p class='hang_indent'> +An <span class='lspp'>APPENDIX</span>. Containing the <span class="small-caps">Journal</span> of +a <span class="small-caps">Voyage</span> to the <span class="small-caps">North Pole</span>, by the Hon. Commodore +PHIPPS, and Captain LUTWIDGE.</p> +<p class="align_c lined"> +<span class='lspb'>VOLUME THE FIRST</span>. +</p> +<p class="align_c"> +<span class='lspb'>LONDON</span>: +</p> +<p class="align_c fontp9"> +Printed for <span class="small-caps">F. <span class='lspp'>Newbery</span></span>, the Corner of St. Paul’s Church-Yard. +</p> +<p class='align_c one_space'> +<span class="topline">M DCC LXXIV.</span></p> +</div> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='font2p'><span class='lspd'>PREFACE</span>.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +P<span class='toupper lspz ip2'>erhaps</span> there never was brought together, in +so small a compass, in any language, a more copious +collection of rational entertainment, than will +be met with in the following sheets. To trace the +progress of the discoveries that have successively been +made, in passing round the globe, must fill the reader’s +mind with such a variety of new objects, as cannot +fail to raise his wonder, and entertain him with infinite +delight. +</p> +<p> +He will, in this work, be safely conducted through +regions that were once thought inaccessible, and be +made acquainted with countries altogether different +from that in which he dwells. Every page he reads +will furnish him with novelties, and every Voyage will +bring him nearer to that unknown country, in search +of which so many able commanders have been sent in +vain. +</p> +<p> +The discovery of the western continent by Columbus, +gave geographers reason to believe, that a like continent +existed somewhere in the south. Without such +an equipoise they could not conceive how the globe +could preserve its balance. +</p> +<p> +Magellhaens, a Portuguese mariner, was the first +who attempted to immortalize his name by the discovery. +He passed the Streights, that to this day bear +his name, and entered the Pacific Ocean, where no European +vessel had ever sailed before. He discovered the +Ladrone and Phillippine Isles, and returned by the Cape +of Good Hope, having surrounded the whole earth, +and proved, to demonstration, the spherical figure of +the globe. +</p> +<p> +He was followed by navigators of different nations, +who, emulous of his glory, sought to pursue the track, +which he had pointed out, with better success; but the +dangers they encountered, and the disasters they met +with, rendered the difficulties that attended the prosecution +insurmountable; many perished, and those who +survived were glad to return home after a fruitless search. +</p> +<p> +The ill success which attended these first attempts +threw a damp upon the enterprize, and it remained +long unnoticed, except in the writings of the learned. +<span class='pagenum'>iv</span>Some French geographers, fully persuaded of the reality +of such a continent, endeavoured, a few years +ago, to revive in their countrymen the spirit of enterprize, +with a view to derive honour to their country, +by compleating the discovery; but the taste for great +navigations among the French seemed entirely extinct, +and it was not till the Dolphin and Tamar had sailed +from England that they thought of renewing it. +</p> +<p> +We have been told that his Majesty, our most gracious +Sovereign, very early in life, formed the design +of distinguishing himself by patronizing the prosecution +of new discoveries in the unknown regions of the +southern hemisphere; and that he declared his intention, +soon after he came to the crown, of appropriating +a part of his revenue for that particular purpose. +Nothing can more endear a British monarch to his maritime +people, than a steady perseverance in this laudable +resolution. +</p> +<p> +The love of glory is a passion natural to Kings; the +conquerors of the world are placed before them as patterns, +and they are encouraged by example to seek occasions +for war to acquire a name. But how much +more glorious is it to enlarge the earth with a new region, +than to triumph in the conquest of some rival +state!⁠—to extend protection to a remote, and it may +be, a defenceless people, than to boast of levelling fortresses, +and, by a general carnage of friends and foes, +become master of a few desolated towns, purchased at +an expence, a thousand times greater than what is necessary +to insure the success of new discoveries. +</p> +<p> +Can there be any comparison between the glory of +a successful enterprize, founded on the laudable motives +of diffusing happiness through regions, whose inhabitants, +for ought we know, are yet immersed in savage +darkness; and that of engaging in a hazardous +war, by which millions of treasure must be expended, +and thousands of lives sacrificed? Is not the chance of +succeeding in the first case much more probable than +that of conquering in the other? And does not success +in the discovery of the long sought region of the +south, promise much greater advantages to a trading nation, +than the conquest of any part of the earth on this +<span class='pagenum'>v</span>side the globe? Did not the little Phœnician state reap +a more glorious harvest from the discoveries of its merchants, +than Alexander could boast from all his conquests? +Was it not the perseverance of the Princes Henry, +John, and Emanuel, in supporting the charges of prosecuting +new discoveries in the fifteenth century, that +laid the foundation of the Portuguese greatness, whose +territories in Europe are of no considerable extent? +</p> +<p> +If the glory of aggrandizing a state, and perpetuating +a name to posterity be the first object of human +ambition, where, among all the tyrants who have depopulated +the earth, can be produced a conqueror, +whose name will be remembered, when that of Christopher +Columbus is forgotten? Or where shall we look +for a monarch, who, after having spread murder and +desolation throughout the world, descended to the grave +with that heart-felt satisfaction that attended the Florentine +merchant Americus Vespucius, when he saw +all Europe agreeing, with one consent, to transfer his +name to more than a third part of the terrestrial globe? +</p> +<p> +The success which has attended our gracious Monarch’s +first essays in the Voyages we are now about to +relate, though it has yet produced no solid advantages +to compensate the sums expended in the prosecution of +them, yet it has been such as to open the way to new +islands, from whose inhabitants new arts may be learnt, +and from whose productions new acquisitions may be +made, both to the vegetable and fossil kingdoms, by +which the regions of science may be enlarged, and the +gardens of the curious enriched and beautified. +</p> +<p> +It is no small satisfaction to an inquisitive mind +(were there no other advantage to be gained from these +Voyages) to be made acquainted with the genius, the +arts, the various pursuits, the customs, the manners, +the religious notions, the distinctions of rank, and the +subordination that is to be met with among the people +of various islands and countries, distinct from each +other, and from us, in language, habits, learning, and +ways of living. Who is it that can read of the poverty +and misery of the wretched inhabitants of <i>Terra +del Fuego</i>, who have nothing but the skins of beasts +loosely thrown over them, to defend them from the severity +<span class='pagenum'>vi</span>of the cold, in a climate so dreadful, that two +out of twelve of the attendants of Mr. Banks and Dr. +Solander, being overtaken in a storm, in a clear evening, +in the middle of summer, perished at the foot of +a mountain, though they had but two miles to go to +receive succour? Nor are they, in any respect, better +provided with food than with raiment. The woods +that are three parts in four of the year impenetrable on +account of the snow, and the sea-coast and rivers that +are equally inaccessible, are their only resources. Who +then, I say, can read the story of these forlorn creatures, +without lamenting the condition of human beings, +destitute, as these appear to be, of every comfort +and convenience, and exposed every moment to the +piercing rigour of the climate, and the still severer +cravings of unsatisfied hunger! +</p> +<p> +On the contrary, who can think of these, while, +at the same time, he is told of the pleasurable lives of +the happy islanders in the new-discovered countries, +who abound in flesh, fish, and fruits, even to profusion! +without admiring the ways of Providence, that, +for purposes unknown to us, has so unequally bestowed +its dispensations. +</p> +<p> +When we read in these Voyages of men that eat +men, not for hunger, but from savage ferocity, we +shudder to think of the depravity of our nature, and +are convinced of the necessity of bounding our passions +by wholesome laws, and of correcting the irregularities +of our appetites by the restraints of religion. +</p> +<p> +But what can we think of those civilized Barbarians, +of those polished monsters, who, with all the advantages +of religion and enlightened education, could yet +be so wantonly cruel, as to introduce a disease among +a happy people, odious in its nature, and, to them, +more pernicious than a pestilence in its effects; who +could carry the venereal taint between the tropics, and +entail it as a curse upon those by whom they were most +highly favoured? +</p> +<p> +Who but must regret the friendly hospitality of these +honest, unsuspecting islanders to strangers, the very +best of whom but ill-deserved their favours? But who +can with-hold his indignation at the ingratitude of the +<span class='pagenum'>vii</span>meaner sort, with which their benefactors were requited? +</p> +<p> +The variety of incidents that happened in the course +of these Voyages, when they come to be historically +recited, unencumbered with the jargon of sea-phrases, +will afford a fund of entertainment, seldom to be met +with in the productions of the press. The many singular +adventures, unforeseen dangers, and providential +escapes, that every ship experienced in passing round the +globe, can only be conceived by those who read, and believed +by those who have seen the wonders of the deep. +</p> +<p> +Nothing can excite or gratify curiosity more than relations +of marvellous events that happen in succession, +and in circumstances equally critical and important. +The moment a ship launches into the ocean to proceed +on new discoveries, every man on board demands his +share of attention as well as the commanding officer. +The story of the black, who, with his two companions, +perished on the mountains of <i>Terra del Fuego</i>, +is no less affecting than that of the murder of the poor +Indians, who set the Endeavour at defiance, and bravely +opposed the landing of the crew. +</p> +<p> +There is not an object that presents itself either by +sea or land, but affords some degree of use or speculation. +The fish that swarm about the ship, and the +fowls that present themselves in the ocean, are indications +by which the skilful mariner avails himself, either +to guard against the storm, or to prepare for land; +and the reader, as circumstances arise, either shares his +danger, or partakes of his refreshment. +</p> +<p> +When the Endeavour is encircled in the wide ocean +with rocks of coral, her sheathing beaten off, and her +false keel floating by her side, a hole in her bottom, +and the men alternately fainting at the pumps, what +heart is so callous, as not to sympathize with the despairing +crew, and, anxious for their safety, drop a +tear for their deliverance? +</p> +<p> +And what must be the joy of every feeling heart, +when, after sailing many hundred leagues, and arriving +safe at Batavia, it was found that two of her planks +next the keel, and part of a third in the ship’s bottom, +were, for six feet together, rubbed thinner, by her +<span class='pagenum'>viii</span>friction against the rocks, than the ordinary sole of a +man’s shoe! +</p> +<p> +Who that shall interest himself in the fate of Toobaiah, +an Indian priest, who voluntarily offered himself +as a guide against the attacks of the neighbouring +islanders, and of the Indian youth Tayota, who accompanied +him, but must regret the death of the last, +and admire the more than Christian friendship of the +former, who could not long survive the loss of his +companion? +</p> +<p> +It is to bring together a vast variety of interesting +events, and to relate them in a narrow compass, that +the present work is undertaken. The Writers of Voyages, +having a more important object in view than +mere amusement, are under the necessity of interrupting +the thread of their narrations by the workings of +the ship, the bearings and distances of the capes and +bays, the latitudes and longitudes of the various stations +in which their ships cast anchor, the variations of +the needle, and the soundings of the shores; matters, +though of infinite concern to future navigators, and +without which the Voyages themselves would be useless, +yet are of no moment to the generality of readers, who +are curious only to know what dangers were encountered, +what adventures were met with, what lands discovered, +what people possessed them, what novelties +were seen, what new arts were practised, what wars +were carried on, what weapons and utensils were in use, +and, above all, by what laws, religion, and forms of +government, the various nations were distinguished that +lie scattered round the globe. +</p> +<p> +These subjects of entertainment the reader will find +amply reported in the course of the Volumes now presented +to his view. And as the relations are authenticated +by gentlemen of known veracity, who were eye-witnesses, +and bear testimony to the truth of the facts, +the reader will find uncommon pleasure in the perusal. +</p> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='fontp9'><span class='lspb'>THE</span></span><br> +<span class='l15'><span class='lspc'>INTRODUCTION</span>.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +P<span class='toupper lspz ip2'>revious</span> to our entering upon the detail +of the discoveries and adventures of the +English navigators who have surrounded the +globe, it may, perhaps, afford some entertainment +to the curious reader, to be made acquainted +with the first steps that led to so bold +an undertaking, and with the characters of +those happy geniuses, who not only conceived +the plan, but contributed not a little by their +example to facilitate the execution. +</p> +<p> +We are told that the shadow seen in the +moon in the time of her eclipse, first pointed +out to the early navigators the true figure of +the earth; and that, from this simple observation, +Columbus, by revolving it in his mind, +deduced the possibility of passing round its surface, +or, to speak with more precision, of sailing +from one side of the continent to the other; +for as yet one great continent, and one great +ocean, with their appendages, were thought to +compose the whole material world. +</p> +<p> +Full of this idea, he was naturally led to conclude, +that, by sailing in a direct course from +any given point of land on one side, he must of +necessity arrive at another point of land in the +same parallel on the opposite side, provided his +<span class='pagenum'>ii</span>provisions were proportioned to the voyage, and +no accident from tempests or shipwreck intervened +to interrupt his progress. It was on this +obvious principle that Columbus founded the +certainty of his discovery, the infallibility of +which served to support his hopes, when absolute +despair had seized the greatest part of his +followers. +</p> +<p> +It is true, that, though the figure of the earth +was in effect conceived, yet its dimensions were +wholly unknown: but as the road over-land +to the eastern coasts of the continent was no +secret, Columbus was persuaded that a passage +by sea by a western course, if no intermediate +lands prevented, would assuredly bring him to +the same coasts. From his knowledge, therefore, +of the position of those countries, from +whence the rich productions of the East were +circulated thro’ all the kingdoms of the West, +he was led to steer, first, a south-west, and then +a direct west course, which brought him among +those broken fragments of the western continent, +which he at first mistook for the islands of the +Indian Ocean, and to the richest of which he +imagined another voyage would certainly open +a passage. +</p> +<p> +The discovery being once made, the principle +upon which it was grounded could no longer be +concealed. Those belonging to the naval department +about the Court of Spain, who had +been most violent in opposing the undertaking, +as appearing to them in no better light than as +<span class='pagenum'>iii</span>the visionary conceit of some crack-brained projector, +now assumed another tone, and affected +to speak of it as a discovery that required no +extraordinary talents to accomplish; that it was +not the result of science, but a thing that must +follow of course to the first adventurer; and +that it was fortunate for Columbus that he could +prevail upon their Majesties to furnish the means +to undertake it, as with such encouragement +there were not wanting officers in the royal navy +much better qualified to have conducted the +enterprize, tho’ by his unparallelled assurance +he had obtained the preference. In this slight +and contemptuous manner it was the humour +at Court to speak of the new discovery; and +though Columbus, after his return, was for a +while caressed by the Royal Family, yet the +frequent repetition of these indignities could +not fail in time to lessen the idea of the merit +of a man who had no advocate to support his +credit but the evidence of his own superior abilities. +At a court-entertainment, however, to +which he was invited, an incident happened that +contributed not a little to heighten his character, +and mortify his enemies. The conversation at +table turned, as was usual, upon the importance +of the new discoveries; and though all seemed +to agree that the advantages would be immense +that must inevitably result to Spain, yet little +they thought was due to the first discoverer, +because any ordinary seaman, by keeping his +ship’s head to the westward, must have fallen in +<span class='pagenum'>iv</span>with the same countries. Columbus, without +seeming to regard their discourse, when dinner +was over, and the table uncovered, called for an +egg, and twirling it about with his hand, as if by +way of amusement, asked if any of the company +could make that egg stand upon its little end +without additional support. The company, +after trying their skill, pronounced <em>the thing impossible</em>; +when Columbus, taking it again in his +hand, and bruising the shell a little at bottom +with his nail, produced it upon the table standing +upright. The company all fell a-laughing, +and one cried out, that any fool could do as +much as that. I doubt not, replied Columbus, +but any of you may do it, now you have seen it +done; and so may any miserable pilot in the +navy sail to the Indies, now that I have pointed +out the track; but till the issue had shewn it +practicable, addressing himself to the naval gentlemen, +that, too, you pronounced an <em>impossible +thing</em>. The King and his Royal Consort, particularly +the latter, were highly pleased when they +were told this story, admiring the promptness of +a mind which, ever collected, neither malice nor +envy could disconcert. +</p> +<p> +Other navigators, equally enterprizing, tho’ +less sagacious, were now inflamed with the desire +of immortalizing their names by new undertakings; +so that it is no wonder that the business +of discovery went rapidly on for a succeeding +century. +</p> +<p> +It was in 1492 that Columbus made his first +<span class='pagenum'>v</span>expedition to the Bahama Islands; and in 1496, +John Cabbot, in the service of England, discovered +the continent of North America. +</p> +<p> +Columbus, in his first voyage, had not yet +conceived the idea of a double continent, but +believed, as we have already noted, that he had +discovered a passage by sea to those islands in the +East that were already known by the name of +the East Indies; in conformity to which he gave +to the islands that he discovered the appellation +of the <i>West Indies</i>, which they retain to this day. +</p> +<p> +In 1493, having made a second voyage, and +carried his discoveries considerably farther to the +South, it is said, he received some faint notions +of a sea beyond a great land, by which the +islands he had first discovered were bounded; +but it was not till after his third voyage in 1497, +that he attained a sight of that continent which +Cabbot had discovered the year before. +</p> +<p> +It may seem, from what has just been said, +that the eastern passage to the Indian Ocean had +been discovered by the Portuguese; and that +the East Indies were known to that people before +this western discovery by Columbus: but, +though several journies by land had been made, +with a view to the opening an advantageous +commerce with the eastern countries, by Portuguese +Ambassadors well instructed in the Arabian +language, by whose address some progress +had been made in that business, yet it was not +till 1495 that Bartholomew Diaz doubled the +Cape of Good Hope, nor till the year 1497 +<span class='pagenum'>vi</span>(the same year that the American continent was +discovered by Cabbot), that Don Vasquez de +Gama, by steering the nearest course, passed the +Cape which Diaz had discovered, and sailed +into the Indian Ocean, where he afterwards +made considerable conquests, and by his prudent +management very suddenly diverted the +current of Indian commerce into an entire new +channel. The notion, therefore, that Columbus +borrowed his idea of a western passage from the +discoveries made by the Portuguese towards the +East, is ill founded. These last had, indeed, +made a considerable progress in their discoveries +by land; but the passages to the Eastern and Western +Indies by sea were discovered about the same +time, without the least connection or intelligence +between the respective discoverers. And here +we cannot help entering our protest against the +honour ascribed to Columbus by Mr. Campbell, +and other judicious naval historians, as being +the first circumnavigator, because, as Mr. Campbell +observes, “it was his [Columbus’s] opinion, +that there was a passage from the North Sea +into the South, and from thence it might be +very possible to sail to the East Indies.”⁠⸺That +it was the opinion of Columbus, that there +was a western passage to the East Indies is readily +granted; it was his original idea: but that +there was a passage from the East Indies to Europe, +without returning the same way he went, +he could have no conception of, till after the +passage by the Cape of Good Hope was discovered +<span class='pagenum'>vii</span>by the Portuguese. Had he dreamt of +an eastern passage <em>by sea</em> to the East Indies, he +would most certainly have preferred it to a western +passage, because it might have been performed +without losing sight of land; and therefore, +with much less risque than by launching +into an immense unknown ocean, of which no one +could tell the extent. But his notion was, that +the earth, like a bowl, inclosed the sea, and that +it could only be traversed from side to side by +water, and then from shore to shore by land. +Many irrefragable proofs of his having no conception +of <em>sailing</em> round the globe might be adduced; +but that of his returning the same way +back a second time, without his <em>knowing</em> for certainty, +or <em>believing</em> there was any other sea to sail +upon, or having even determined the extent of +that sea on which he had already ventured so far, +may serve without farther proof to convince the +intelligent reader, that Columbus had never +thought of but one sea when he undertook +his discovery, and that that sea was only to be +crossed from West to East, and <i>vice versâ</i>. +</p> +<p> +But to proceed:⁠—Soon after the eastern passage +to the Indies was laid open, the coast of +Brazil, opposite to the Cape of Good Hope, +was discovered by Cabral, a Portuguese pilot, +who was driven out of his course by stress of +weather. The same coast was likewise discovered +the same year by Yannez Pinçon, who +commanded a carvel that accompanied Columbus +in his first expedition to the West Indies. +This man contested the honour of the first discovery +<span class='pagenum'>viii</span>with Columbus, and insisted that it was +through his perseverance alone that land was descried, +the crew of Columbus having absolutely +determined to steer back before the discovery +took place. Be that as it may, this able mariner +afterwards examined the coast from the Bay of +Mexico to the Equinoctial Line, and, in the +year 1500, discovered the great river of Amazons, +which it was thought would have opened +a passage to the South Sea. +</p> +<p> +In 1502, Columbus made his fourth and last +expedition, when he fully satisfied himself that +the islands he had discovered were totally disconnected +from those he went in quest of, and +that another continent existed besides that which +was known to Europeans. He was still, however, +of opinion, that a western passage to the +old continent from the new would be practicable, +whenever a way was found to the Great +Sea by which it was surrounded: and now it is +not at all improbable but that he might foretel +what afterwards came to pass, that one day or +other the whole globe might be circumnavigated, +though he did not live to see it executed. +</p> +<p> +In 1509, the Portuguese first found the way to +Sumatra, and from thence extended their discoveries +to the Moluccas. +</p> +<p> +About this time a contest arose between the +Spaniards and Portuguese, concerning the right +of possessing countries, to which neither of them +had any other claim than that of being the first +Europeans who happened to land upon their +coasts: a claim of the same kind his Otaheitean +<span class='pagenum'>ix</span>Majesty may pretend to the western part of Europe, +his subject Aotourou being incontestibly +the first Tropical inhabitant that ever set foot +on that continent. This contest, however, the +Pope took upon him to decide; and, to prevent +the bloody consequences that might ensue between +two such powerful competitors, he published +a bull, which, at that time of blind obedience, +was held decisive, decreeing, that whatever +discoveries were made to the westward +should belong to Spain, and such as were made +to the eastward, to Portugal. This seemed for +a while to content both parties; but, in 1520, +Ferdinand Magellan, or Magellhanes, as Mr. +Dalrymple affects to call him, having made his +famous discovery to the Molucca Islands by a +new passage, the contest was again revived, and +the competitors claimed a second time the Pope’s +interposition to settle the limits of their respective +claims by more precise and determinate +boundaries. The claims of the Spaniards were +now extended to near three parts of the globe; +and those of the Portuguese, which by a false +representation had been much diminished, were +now to be restored, or rather regulated by a +more exact standard. The two contending +powers were to divide the globe between them, +by what was then stiled a line of demarkacion. +This <em>line</em> was to cut the globe into two hemispheres, +and was to be acknowledged a <em>first</em> meridian: +all the discoveries in the western hemisphere +were to belong to Spain; and all in the +<span class='pagenum'>x</span>eastern to Portugal. But still there arose a dispute +about the precise spot where this meridian +line should be fixed. By the Pope’s bull it had +been placed 100 leagues to the westward of St. +Antonio, one of the islands of Cape Verde; +but, by this new regulation, it was removed +270 leagues farther to the west. This alteration +was intended to deprive Portugal of the +possession of the Moluccas; but the Portuguese +pilots were not to be thus deceived: they suffered +the line of demarkacion to be fixed; but, +when it was finally determined, they insisted on +their right to the Moluccas, as still within their +limits, and future observations have since confirmed +their claims. But, notwithstanding the +justice of their claims (if justice can at all be +admitted to exist in cases of usurpation), the +Spaniards held the Moluccas till 1529, when +the Portuguese purchased an exclusive right of +trading to them by a loan of 350,000 ducats.⁠⸺But +to return from this digression: +</p> +<p> +We have already observed, that the coast of +Brazil, and the river of Amazons, was first discovered +by Yannez Pinçon, in 1500; but it was +not till twelve years afterwards that John de +Solis discovered the river Plate. +</p> +<p> +In 1513, Vasco Nunez de Bilboa got sight of +the Great South Sea, from the mountains of +Pancas in the province of Panama and from +that time Ferdinand Magellan, a Portuguese +officer, conceived the design of surrounding the +globe, by finding a passage by which he might +<span class='pagenum'>xi</span>enter that sea. He now began to consider the +earth as divided into two continents, with their +concomitant seas; and, as a promontory was +found, by the doubling of which one continent +might be visited on both sides, he made +no doubt but that another promontory existed, +by which the other might be visited in like manner. +Perhaps the idea of a strait might not at +first strike his mind, till the opening at Cape +Virgin suggested it. His original thought +was to coast along to the southward, as the +land trended; and by perseverance, he persuaded +himself, that a boundary would be found, by +which the land of the new continent would be +terminated, though he did not, nor could not +then ascertain to what height it might reach. +He had in view a nearer way to the Moluccas +than that by the Cape of Good Hope; and he +at first imparted his views to the Ministers of +his Court, who, probably suspecting that by +such a passage the right to the Moluccas might +be brought in question by Spain, treated his +project with a contemptuous neglect. To a +man full of the importance of such a discovery, +nothing could be more mortifying. He determined, +since he was so coolly received at home, +to try his fortune abroad. For this purpose he +repaired to the Court of Spain, where, after +making himself known to the leading Minister, +he undertook to prove the Moluccas, and other +rich islands then reputed in the East, to be +within the Spanish line of demarkacion to the +<span class='pagenum'>xii</span>West, and by a new passage to them he engaged +to confirm the truth of what he advanced +incontestibly. +</p> +<p> +These propositions, after being properly examined, +and approved by the ablest astronomers +and geographers at that time in Spain, was eagerly +embraced by the Emperor Charles the +Fifth, an enterprizing Prince, who then held +the kingdom, and who gave him audience in +the council-chamber at Saragossa, and conferred +upon him, and his companion Ruy Falero, the +order of St. Jago, both of whom, his Imperial +Majesty honoured with the title of <em>his Captains</em>. +</p> +<p> +This encouragement, and these honours, +could not fail to alarm the Court of Portugal; +but all the interest and opposition which Alvaro +de Acasio, the Portuguese Ambassador, could +make, had no effect; the preparations for the +voyage were prosecuted with more than ordinary +diligence, and five ships were soon got in +readiness to put to sea. +</p> +<p> +But, previous to their setting sail, a difference +arose concerning the necessary forms of command, +which had well nigh ruined the voyage +before it was undertaken; the honour of carrying +the royal standard was contested by Ruy +Falero, and some other indignities were offered +to Magellan on account of his country. These, +however, were redressed by the interposition of +the imperial authority; Ruy Falero was persuaded +to suspend his departure on account of +his health, and Magellan was declared General +<span class='pagenum'>xiii</span>of the squadron, which was now committed to +his sole direction. +</p> +<p> +On the 10th of August, 1519, this little fleet, +consisting of the Admiral’s ship; the St. Antonio, +Capt. Juan de Cartagena, Vice-Admiral; +the Victoria, Capt. Luys de Mendoça, Rear-Admiral; +the St. Jago, Capt. Juan Rodriguez +Serrano; and the Conception, of which Gasper +de Quezada was Master; left Cadiz, and proceeded +to Teneriff, from whence they took +their departure, on the 2d of September, and +on the 13th of December arrived at Rio de +Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, where they staid +till the 27th; and, after being plentifully supplied +with all necessary refreshments at a very +moderate price, they weighed anchor, and continued +their voyage, in the course of which +much discontent arose concerning the track +they were to steer; but on Easter evening they +entered St. Julian river, and were next day ordered +on shore by the General to hear mass. +Three of the Captains refused to obey; namely, +Luys de Mendoça, Gasper de Quezado, and +Juan de Cartagena, this last being already in +arrest for disrespect to his General. +</p> +<p> +Their disobedience put Magellan on his +guard. He perceived that the majority both +of officers and men were averse to the undertaking, +and that a general murmuring prevailed +throughout the whole squadron. Only a few +trusty friends were ready to support their General, +and willing to follow wherever he should +<span class='pagenum'>xiv</span>lead. The weather was now set in very severe, +and the Spaniards, unused to the rigour of such +a climate, were hardly to be restrained. They +represented the inutility of proceeding, as they +were already in a climate too boisterous and +inclement to be navigated by Spaniards; that +it could never be the Emperor’s intention to sacrifice +the lives of his subjects, without the least +prospect of advantage to the State; and that +now it was manifest, though the discovery were +certain, the navigation would be impracticable, +and therefore useless. To these representations, +and others more full of asperity, Magellan +coolly made answer, “that he was determined +to die rather than return back; that he should +pass the winter where he then was; and that +neither provisions nor wine should be wanting +to those who would be contented with a +moderate allowance; but that if any persisted +in spreading discontents, and encouraging disobedience, +he knew how to punish as well as +to reward.” +</p> +<p> +Barros says, that the three Captains <i>Cartagena</i>, +<i>Quezada</i>, and <i>Mendoça</i>, conspired together +to kill Magellan, and to return and make their +report of the usage they had met with, and the +hardships they had endured in the voyage; but +Magellan, considering the danger, and that in +certain circumstances <em>temerity</em> is better than <em>caution</em>, +ordered the people of his own ship to arms; +and, manning his boat with thirty trusty friends, +he clapt the Victoria aboard; and while Mendoça +<span class='pagenum'>xv</span>was reading a letter directed to him from +the General, the messenger that delivered it +stabbed him to the heart.⁠—The moment the +order was executed, the thirty men entered to +the assistance of the assassin, and quietly took +possession of the ship. This done a council of +war was called, and a conspiracy was detected, +in which more than forty of the principal people +on board the several ships were found to be +deeply concerned; but Magellan, that he might +not appear too sanguinary or vindictive, sentenced +<i>Quezada</i> only to be executed, and <i>Cartagena</i> +to be left on shore, accompanied by a +French Priest; a punishment that probably was +worse than immediate death, as it subjected the +criminals to hardships which instant execution +would have prevented. Mendoça and Quezada, +he ordered to be quartered as traitors, to strike +the disaffected with the greater terror. This +put an end to all opposition for the present. +</p> +<p> +When the winter months drew towards a conclusion, +Magellan was vigilant to hasten the +departure of his fleet; and, as soon as the cold +abated, he dispatched Serrano to coast along the +shore to make observations. Serrano, at about +twenty leagues distance, found a river a league +broad at the entrance, which he named St. Cruz, +because he fell in with it on that Saint’s day. In +examining this river, and in fishing for seals, he +spent six days, at the end of which a furious +storm arose, which split his sails, and drove his +ship on shore, where she bulged, and was beaten +<span class='pagenum'>xvi</span>to pieces. The crew, however, were saved, but +reduced to the last extremity for want of food. +Two of the company undertook to travel over +land, to give the General notice of the miserable +situation of their fellow-sufferers; and, after 11 +days fatigue, they at length surmounted every +difficulty, and accomplished their purpose. +Magellan, pitying their distresses, sent a vessel +with provisions, which came seasonably to their +relief. +</p> +<p> +The time for sailing being now come, and +the ships in readiness, they left the bay of St. +Julian on the 24th of August, 1520, after setting +Juan de Cartagena, and Pedro Sanchez de Revora, +the Priest, who was also found deep in the +plot, ashore on that desolate coast. They supplied +them plentifully with bread and wine; but +as they were never afterwards heard of, there +can be no doubt of their perishing miserably. +</p> +<p> +The squadron, consisting now of four ships, +kept coasting along to the southward, with imminent +danger of shipwreck, till towards the latter +end of October, when they fell in with a promontory, +which the General named Cape Virgin, +because it was discovered on St. Ursula’s-day. +This Cape opened an inlet, which Magellan +judged favourable to his design. He +cast anchor at the entrance of the inlet, and ordered +two ships to examine its course. In five +days these ships returned, and one of them +affirmed it was a strait, because the flood was +greater than the ebb; the other reported that +<span class='pagenum'>xvii</span>they saw nothing but inlets and breakers. The +General, on these different relations, determined +to sail into the opening, in order to be more +precisely informed. He accordingly weighed, +and came to an anchor in a commodious bay, +where he first sent his skiff with 10 men to reconnoitre +the shore, and then the St. Antonio +to trace out the inlet to a certain distance. +When the men returned from the shore, they +said, they had found a burying-place with more +than 200 graves, and had seen the skeleton of a +whale in a cove upon the beach, but had seen +neither house nor inhabitant. The Captain of +the St. Antonio on his return gave a more flattering +account. He said, he had followed the +inlet for more than 50 leagues; that its course +was due east and west; and that he made not +the least doubt but that it was the passage so +much desired. This news was received with +repeated acclamations. A council was called +of the chief officers and pilots, in which a very +warm debate arose, whether, in the circumstances +the ships were then in, it were better to return +to Spain, having obtained the main object of +the voyage, or to proceed to complete what +the General had undertaken to perform, namely, +to trace out a western passage to the Molucca +Islands. Estevan Gomez, the pilot of the St. +Antonio, a man of excellent parts and sound +judgment, insisted on returning back, and +bringing another squadron to complete the discovery, +alledging, that they had still a great +<span class='pagenum'>xviii</span>and unknown sea to pass, and that, if either +tempests or calms intervened to retard their +passage over it, the whole fleet must inevitably +perish. His opinion was supported by the +whole council, Magellan only excepted, who +declared, that, if he were sure to be reduced to +the necessity of eating the hides that covered +the yards, he would persevere in the discovery. +He accordingly gave orders for weighing anchor +immediately; and, proceeding down the +strait, sent the Antonio to examine some inlets +that promised a nearer passage to the main +ocean than that they were pursuing; but the +pilot Gomez, and the purser Guerra, seized and +stabbed Alvara de Mesquita, the Commander, +and carried home the ship. In the mean time, +Magellan supposing some disaster had befallen +her, went himself in pursuit of her; but after +six days fruitless search, he determined to continue +his voyage; “and it pleased God, says my +author, that, at the end of twenty days, he +entered into the Great South Sea, and was +the first who had found the passage so much +sought after, whereby the memory of this excellent +Captain shall be eternally celebrated.” +</p> +<p> +Finding that the land trended northwards, +Magellan directed his course accordingly, that +he might as soon as possible clear those cold +and dreary coasts that had caused so much murmuring +among the mariners, and so much caballing +among the officers; but before he +reached the Tropic he met with most tempestuous +<span class='pagenum'>xix</span>weather, by which the three remaining +ships were very much shattered in their sails and +rigging. In this passage they discovered two +uninhabited islands, St. Pedro and Tiburon, +about the situation of which mariners are still +divided; and it has been questioned, whether +either of them have since been seen. +</p> +<p> +As they approached the Line, they found the +wind to stand fair. Magellan then ordered the +ships to change their course, and steer N. W. +and W. N. W. till he reached the Line. +</p> +<p> +Harris takes notice that it was on the 28th of +December when Magellan entered the Great +South Sea, and that in this wide ocean the +ships that accompanied him sailed three months +and twenty days without seeing any other land +than the two islands just mentioned, which afforded +them no refreshment. At length, when +they had undergone all the miseries that human +nature is capable of sustaining, from hunger, +thirst, and sickness, they fell in with the Ladrone +islands, where they landed; but where the inhabitants +were such thieves that they were in +fear lest their ships should be pulled to pieces +and carried away before their faces, the crews +not having strength enough left to defend either +their lives or their properties. They therefore +shortened their stay among these plunderers; and +were more fortunate in their next attempt. +</p> +<p> +On the 10th of March, landing on the island +of Zamal, they found springs of delicate water, +which to them were more precious than fountains +<span class='pagenum'>xx</span>of the choicest wines; fruit in abundance, +that surpassed any they had till then tasted; and +inhabitants humane and civil, who, pitying their +distresses, brought their richest productions to +relieve them. From this island they continued +to steer between the west and south-west, till +they arrived at Buthuan, or, as it has since been +called, Buton, the King of which gave them +honourable entertainment. They visited several +other isles, and in all of them were well received; +till at length coming to the Isle of Mathan, they +were attacked by an army of Indians, against +whom the General himself being engaged was +shot with a poisoned arrow, and afterwards +pierced in the head with a lance; and thus +ended the life and actions of this gallant Commander, +whose name will be perpetuated with +honour to latest posterity. After his death, a +company of his followers being invited to an +entertainment on shore, were treacherously murdered +by a pretended friendly King, and only +Don Juan Serrano, of all who landed, was reserved +alive, in order to procure a large supply +of fire-arms and ammunition by way of ransom; +but those who remained on board, fearful of +being trepanned, would have no farther intercourse +with the perfidious infidels so that poor +Serrano was left to their mercy. Those on +board the ships, 80 in number, directed their +course towards the Moluccas, and arrived at +Teridore, one of the principal of those islands, +on the 8th of November, 1521. Here they +<span class='pagenum'>xxi</span>were hospitably received, and here they staid +till the middle of January, 1522; and, being +now come into well known seas, we shall accompany +them no farther; only remarking, +that, of the whole squadron only one ship, +namely the Victoria, had the good fortune to +return to Spain; and of 234 officers and seamen, +the complement at first setting out, if we +except those who returned in the St. Antonio, +of whom we have no account, only 13 Spaniards +survived to return to Seville. Their +Commander John Sebastian Cano was received +with extraordinary marks of favour by the Emperor, +who gave him for arms the Terrestrial +Globe, with this motto, <i>Primus me circumdedistis</i>, +and otherwise liberally rewarded him. The +voyage he lived to make took up three years +and thirty-seven days, and is, perhaps, the most +remarkable that ever was performed. +</p> +<p> +This voyage opened a new field for discovery; +the Spaniards, who were already settled +on the western coasts of America, were very +curious to examine what countries might be +situated along that vast space which divided the +new continent from the old; and accordingly +Cortez, the celebrated conqueror of Peru, fitted +out two ships for the purpose, the command of +one of which he gave to Ferdinand Grijalva, +the other to Don Alvarado. +</p> +<p> +Grijalva departed from Pageta, in 6 deg. N. +lat. about the beginning of April, 1537, and +steered W. and S. W. into 29 deg. S. lat. where +<span class='pagenum'>xxii</span>his ship springing her mast, he stood again to the +Line, in which tract a mutiny happening among +the crew, Grijalva and his nephew were both assassinated; +and the ship, after a passage of four +months, was carried to Papua, where falling to +pieces, the crew, reduced by famine and fatigue +to seven men, took to their boat and coasted +along the shore, till being boarded by a number +of Indians, it was sunk. The Spaniards, +however, were saved by the humanity of the +captors, and sold for slaves. This ship, it is +affirmed, sailed 1000 leagues on both sides the +Line without seeing land. Among the islands, +however, which they afterwards fell in with +before they came to Papua, was that called Isla +de los Pescadores, called in the late voyages +<span class="small-caps">Byron’s Island</span>, and supposed to be a new discovery. +</p> +<p> +Alvarado was instructed to pursue his discoveries +along the Line, without deviating either +to the right or left, farther than the most advantageous +method of navigating his ship required; +and in that direction he discovered the +islands of Papua. He also discovered other +islands, named the Guelles, in 1 deg. N. lat. east +and west from Teronate, and 125 leagues from +that of Moro, with Hamei, 170 leagues from +Tidore, and many others that have since been +thought new discoveries. After his return, he +was again employed upon services of the like +kind, and was instrumental in establishing the +trade of Manilla. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>xxiii</span>But of all the Spanish discoveries that have +been made, or pretended to have been made, in +the South Seas, that of Juan Fernandez, who +first pointed out the way from Lima to Chili +by sailing to the westward, <em>if real</em>, is by far the +most important. This pilot, (the same who +discovered the island which still bears his name) +in the latitude of 40 deg. S. was brought, as it +is said, in courses between west and south-west, +upon the coast of a continent, from what he +could judge, very fertile and delightful, inhabited +by white people, hospitable, and well-disposed, +of a middle stature, dressed in very +fine cloaths, and so peaceable and civil, that, in +every way they could express, they endeavoured +to gratify the strangers, and to accommodate +them with the best things their country afforded, +the fruits whereof were excellent and abounding +in the greatest profusion. It is added, that, +being over-joyed with having discovered the +coast of that great continent so much talked of, +and so ardently sought after, he returned to Chili +intending to make a second voyage properly fitted +out to improve this fortunate discovery to +his own and his country’s enrichment; but before +he could persuade his friends to give entire +credit to his report, he died, and the secret of +the precise situation of his new continent perished +with him, for it has never since been found; +though Mr. Alexander Dalrymple, author of an +Historical Collection of Voyages to the South +Pacific Ocean, whose opinion is of no small +<span class='pagenum'>xxiv</span>weight, is persuaded that Fernandez did discover +the <span class="small-caps">Southern Continent</span>, and that, whenever +it is again visited, it will be no new discovery, +but a confirmation of the existence of that +land which has already been found. +</p> +<p> +But, besides this dubious discovery, there is +still another, which has not yet been clearly ascertained, +and about which geographers are +much divided. This discovery is attributed to +Alvaro Mendana, who, in 1567, is said to have +fallen in with a cluster of islands abounding with +gold and pearl, which were named by him the +Isles of Salomon; and for the settling of which +an unsuccessful attempt was made by Mendana +himself; and a second strongly solicited by +Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, the chief pilot who +accompanied that General, and who afterwards +made a voyage thither on his own account, in +which he made many discoveries. +</p> +<p> +It was in April, 1595, that Mendana left +Callao, in Peru, to settle the Salomon Isles. He +had with him two large ships, a galleasta, and a +frigate, on board of which were embarked from +Lima 400 followers, including women and +children. Of this embarkation Lope de la +Vega, his brother-in-law, was Admiral; Pedro +Fernandez de Quiros, chief pilot; and Pedro +Merino Manriquez, Maitre de Campo. According +to Figueroa, who wrote an account of +this voyage, the Admiral’s ship was named the +St. Isabella; Mendana’s ship, the St. Jerome; +the galleasta, St. Philippe; and the frigate, St. +<span class='pagenum'>xxv</span>Catalina: of the two last the Commanders were +Capt. Philip Corço, and Lieut. Alonzo de +Leyla. In this expedition Mendana was accompanied +by his Lady Donna Isabella Barretos, +with her three brothers; and, after parting +company with the Admiral’s ship the very night +they came in sight of the island on which they +settled, Mendana cast anchor in a bay which he +called <i>la Graciosa</i>, and the island he named Santa +Cruz. Here on the 8th of October, the Maitre +de Campo, and Thomas de Ampuero, were +hanged, and Ensign Jean de Buy beheaded, for +mutinous behaviour; and here Mendana himself +died the 18th of the same month. Don +Lorenzo, brother to Donna Isabella, who, by the +loss of the Admiral, had succeeded as Captain-General, +died also on the 2d of November; and, +in less than seven days after, Father Antonio de +Serra, Chief Priest, and Juan de Espinosa, his +Vicar. In short, from change of climate, food, +and customs; from labour, going in the sun, +being wet without having wherewithal to shift +themselves, sleeping on the ground, and from +other disorders and sufferings, dangerous diseases +attacked the whole company; they began +to die a-pace, it being lamentable to see them in +their distress creeping into huts, some delirious, +and others at the last gasp; some going to the +ships to seek health; others shifting from the ships +to the shore; but no remedy, nor any physician +to apply to for relief. In this calamitous state +things were, when Donna Isabella, on the 18th +<span class='pagenum'>xxvi</span>of October, broke up the settlement; and embarking +the few people that remained alive, on +board the St. Jerome, the frigate, and the galleasta, +they set sail, intending to pursue their +course to Manilla: but the frigate soon lost company, +and, it is said, was afterwards found on a +desart coast with all her sails set, and the people +on board dead and rotten and the galleasta put +into an island near the coast of Mindanao. The +St. Jerome, however, after suffering unspeakable +hardships, got to Manilla, where Donna Isabella +married Don Ferdinando de Castro, and +returned in his ship to New Spain the very next +year. The Admiral’s ship was never heard of.⁠—Thus +ended this unfortunate expedition. +</p> +<p> +The island of Santa Cruz, in which this +settlement was attempted, is said to be 100 +leagues in circumference, and to lie E. S. E. +and W. N. W. in lat. 10 deg. 20 min. S. distant +from Lima 1800 leagues. They cast anchor +on the north side of it, in a harbour, to the +north of which is a volcano, or burning mountain, +that from its top frequently casts forth fire, +and from the inside of which proceeds a noise +sometimes louder than thunder. To the west of +it the harbour is a small island about four leagues +in compass, separated from the great island by +sunken rocks and banks of sand. The port is +formed at the bottom of the bay by a great river, +and the country round it is fine and plentiful. +A more exact description than this, one +would think, could not have been given. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>xxvii</span>Quiros, who navigated Donna Isabella, first +to Manilla, and afterwards accompanied her to +New Spain, was so charmed with the beautiful +appearance of these enchanting islands, that he +continued for the space of ten years incessantly +to weary the Court of Spain with memorial after +memorial to renew the settlement of them; +and at length he prevailed.⁠⸺Previous to +his voyage, he spent several months in building +two ships and a zebra, the stoutest and best +equipped with men, provisions, and warlike +stores, of any that had ever been fitted out in +New Spain. He was accompanied by six Franciscan +Fathers, with whom he took his departure +on the 21st of December, 1605; and sailing +without any material incident till the 26th +of January 1606, he on that day fell in with an +island to the south-west, just 1000 leagues from +the coast of Peru, in lat. 25 deg. S. which island +he unluckily found uninhabited. From this +island he sailed on different courses, passing several +inaccessible islands, till the 10th of February, +on which day a sailor joyfully cried out, <em>Land +a-head!</em> Here, on their landing, they surprized +a woman, but so old in appearance, that it was +matter of astonishment that she could stand upright. +In her youthful days it was easy to perceive +that she had been of a graceful mien, and +she still retained a dignity about her that shewed +she was of quality. Being asked by signs to +go on board, she complied without hesitation; +and when there, she eat of whatever was given +<span class='pagenum'>xxviii</span>her, and received presents with a becoming ease. +After cloathing this lady very fine, they set her +on shore; and, on her landing, the people flocked +about her, and among them a tall, stout, +well-made man, who had on his head a plume +of feathers, and by his deportment appeared to +be a Chief. Him they endeavoured to entice on +board; but, when he came to the ship’s side, +fearing treachery, he refused to enter. Quiros +directed that no force might be used, made him +some presents, and dismissed him. This island +by observation was in 17 deg. 40 min S. and +was named by Quiros Sagitaria. They left it +on the 12th, after some skirmishes with the inhabitants, +and, passing by several other islands, +in which they could procure no refreshment, +on the 2d of March they fell in with an island +which promised fair to supply their wants. +Here on their attempting to land they were accosted +by about 100 Indians, the tallest, genteelest, +whitest, and strongest-made people they +had ever yet seen; but, though they shewed +fair in countenance, they were in fact the cruelest +enemies they had to encounter in the whole +voyage. One of them in a swift canoe approached +the ship singly, and, brandishing his +lance, made those kind of contortions with his +face, arms, and legs, by which Parkinson has remarked +the South-Sea Indians provoke their enemies +to battle; he even mounted the balcony of +the Admiral’s ship, and with his lance made a +thrust at one of the officers on the quarter-deck, +<span class='pagenum'>xxix</span>with an intent to kill him, and instantly +leaping into his canoe rowed off at a great rate. +He repeated his visits and his insolence; but it +was not long before they shot him dead. While +this was passing on board the Admiral, the zebra, +that had cast anchor near the shore, was still +in a worse situation, surrounded by a multitude +of fierce barbarians, who, having fastened a rope +to her head, were endeavouring to drag her on +shore; but perceiving that the people on board +were preparing to cut the rope, they pushed a +little off, and were fastening it to the cable, +when a volley of small arms was discharged +among them, by which some were killed, some +wounded, and all terribly frightened: this, +however, failed of the desired effect; for neither +kindness nor chastisement could prevail +upon them to furnish the ships with water or +provisions; so that they were obliged to set sail +without a supply of either. This island lies +north and south, and was called by Quiros the +Island of Handsome People. +</p> +<p> +They now pursued their course for the island +of Santa Cruz without interruption till the 7th +of April, when they discovered land bearing +W. N. W. high, and black like a volcano; but +night coming on, they stood off till next morning, +and then sent the zebra to look out for a +safe harbour for the ships to cast anchor. On +the 9th she returned, having succeeded; and +about noon the same day the ships were moored +in 25 fathom water, to the great joy of the +<span class='pagenum'>xxx</span>desponding crew. The boats were instantly +dispatched to make peace with the natives; and +before night, they returned with water, plantains, +cocoa-nuts, potatoes, palmetos, and sugar-canes, +than which the riches of Potosi could not +have been more welcome. They next day discovered +a fort, constructed by art, the materials +of coral stone, in which were about 70 houses +surrounded by the sea, and designed as a refuge +from enemies, whenever an invasion was threatened +by the warlike inhabitants of the adjoining +country. To this fort they made their next approach, +and, lest they should meet with opposition, +they took care to be properly armed; but +the inhabitants were desirous of nothing so much +as peace, and received them hospitably: so different +are the dispositions of people inhabiting +the same climate, and separated only by a portion +of the sea. Here they were supplied at an +easy rate with wood and water, in the shipping +of which they were assisted by the friendly natives; +and here they had plenty of the fruits and +provisions which the country produced; in return +for which, the grateful Spaniards seized +four of the natives, with a view to carry them +off; but in spite of their vigilance three made +their escape, and only one continued with them, +who, being a slave where he was, cared but little +what master he served in that capacity. +</p> +<p> +At the end of seven days, the people being +pretty well refreshed, Quiros again set sail, and +on the 21st of April passed an island in lat. 12 +<span class='pagenum'>xxxi</span>degrees S. which the Indians called Tucopia. +They now approached the islands of which they +were in quest; and on the 25th a consultation +was held on board the Admiral, to consider +which of the lands in sight they would chuse to +settle, when it was concluded not to return to +Santa Cruz, but to stand to the southward in +search of that great land, of which they had +heard so much. This they did, passing many +islands, some of considerable extent, some small +but very populous, and all of them exhibiting +a most delightful prospect of woods, lawns, inclosures, +and water-falls, till at length in lat. +14 deg. 50 min. S. they came to a land stretching +from east to west, to the extent of which +they could see no end. On the zebra’s approaching +this land, the people on board were +not a little surprized to see an Indian come +down from the mountains, and without invitation +throw himself into the sea, and make towards +the ship. A boat was immediately hoisted +out, in order to take him up; but as he appeared +spirited and strong, and made the usual +contortions by way of defiance, it was judged +proper to confine him, by clapping a chain +upon his legs to prevent mischief. In this manner +they purposed to have carried him on board +the Admiral, who wanted to get some native +in his power to use with kindness, in order to +facilitate a peace; but, perceiving their intent, +and concluding that his imprisonment was a +prelude to his death, he seized in his passage a +<span class='pagenum'>xxxii</span>favourable opportunity, and snapping his chains +with his hands, leapt suddenly into the sea. +Night coming on, it was in vain to pursue him, +and accordingly they continued their course to +acquaint the Admiral with what had happened. +They had scarce been an hour on board, when +the watch on the forecastle called out, <em>A voice!</em> +and knowing it to be that of a native, they instantly +handed him up, when, to the great surprize +of the boat’s crew, who had just come on +board, they perceived, by the remains of the +chain about his leg, that it was the man who +had made his escape. He was quite exhausted +with swimming, and chose rather to surrender +to the strangers than perish in the sea. He was +kindly received, had wine and sweet-meats given +him, put to bed, and in the morning was richly +cloathed in taffety, and sent on shore: in return +for which civilities, he caused a number of hogs +to be sent on board, with plantains and other +fruits; but at the same time he gave his benefactors +to understand, that he was not to be diverted +from the defence of his country by the dissembled +kindness of pretended friends. When, +therefore, the Spaniards attempted to land, a few +Indians, headed by this gallant Chief, appeared +upon the shore, and, feigning to conduct them to +an open beach, led them along the skirts of a +wood, where a numerous body of natives lay concealed, +who watching their opportunity, let fly a +volley of poisoned arrows, by which, however, +one Spaniard only was wounded in the face. +<span class='pagenum'>xxxiii</span>The Spaniards returned the compliment, by a +discharge of musquetry; but the opposition they +expected from these <em>uncivilized barbarians</em> (for +so they are called for defending their country) +deterred them from prosecuting their design. +They returned to their ships without setting +foot on shore; and on their return, finding +themselves mistaken, it was thought proper +again to put to sea, in search of that great +country and that friendly people, of whole happy +situation they had heard so much. +</p> +<p> +On the 30th of April, about three in the +afternoon, steering south-west, they discovered +land right a-head, and before night came up +with it. In the morning the zebra was sent +along shore to examine the soundings, and after +twelve hours absence returned, and made report, +that they had found a spacious bay, and had exchanged +some trifles with a people of an enormous +size, who, nevertheless, appeared to be +good natured, and desirous of peace. This +news gave universal satisfaction. The ships followed +their pilot; and it being the day of St. +Philip and St. James when they arrived, they +called the bay by that name. Here they found a +most delightful port, situated between two noble +rivers (the one they named the Jordan, and the +other Salvador); the people numerous and +friendly; the climate mild and serene; and the +air so wholesome that in a few days all the sick +recovered. The soil they afterwards found +fruitful to a degree of luxuriance; the woods +<span class='pagenum'>xxxiv</span>and plains abounding with herds and beasts of +various kinds, and the seas well stored with +fish. In short, nothing was wanting to complete +their wishes, but a more numerous company +to secure possession. On their first landing +the Spaniards were hospitably received; +but when it was perceived, by their overtures +for peace, that they intended to prolong their +stay, a jealousy arose that they came with no +good design; and they were treated afterwards +as enemies and invaders. All friendly intercourse +very soon ceased; the market for provisions +was stopt; and nothing was to be obtained +to subsist upon but by force or stratagem. +While they were on these terms, an incident +happened that it was thought would at once +have put an end to their fears and their hopes. +Among the vegetables which grew wild, and on +which they were obliged chiefly to live, they +had gathered some poisonous plants, of which +the people in general had eaten, and all who +had eaten soon began to feel the direful effects. +The symptoms were the more alarming, as all +parts of the flesh seemed to partake of the noxious +quality of the plants. The ships were like +the hospitals of a city infested with the plague, +where the numbers of the healthy were not sufficient +to administer to the infirmities of the sick. +Nothing, in short, was to be heard but lamentations +and supplications; all expected to die +without remedy. But their fears, as it fell out, +were greater than their danger; for, after a certain +<span class='pagenum'>xxxv</span>time, the violence of the poison abated, and +the sick were restored to a more vigorous state +of health than they enjoyed before. But they +were scarce relieved from this misfortune, when +another succeeded. Despairing of ever being +able to reconcile themselves to the natives at +this port, they set sail, after having founded a +city between the <i>Jordan</i> and the <i>Salvador</i>, to +which they had given the name of <i>New Jerusalem</i>. +Coasting towards the south with a view to +find a more fortunate settlement, they were +overtaken by a most dreadful storm, in which +the ships were separated. The Admiral was +driven off the coast, and never again returned; +but the other ship, and the zebra, with difficulty +returned to port. What afterwards became of +them we are not told. Quiros, after attempting +in vain to rejoin them, made the best of his way +to New Spain and on his arrival undertook a +voyage to Old Spain, where he continued to +solicit the Court for a new embarkation; but +he died before he could obtain it. +</p> +<p> +From this time the Spaniards seem to have +given over all thoughts of a settlement in those +islands, to the true situation of which they appear +at this day to be strangers. Neither have other +nations been more successful in their attempts +to discover them; for unless (as Mr. Alexander +Dalrymple has endeavoured to prove in his +Historical Collection of Voyages to the South +Pacific Ocean) they are the same with those +which Dampier has dignified with the name of +<span class='pagenum'>xxxvi</span>New Britain, no others have yet been found +that answer to their description. To Mr. Dalrymple’s +data there can be only one objection, +and that is this: Quiros, in his memorial to the +Court of Spain, reporting the voyage of Mendana, +says, that, in prosecuting his discoveries, +he fell in with four islands [the Marquessas], +inhabited by so good a people, that there is no +account of any other having ever been found +equal to them; and that these islands were 1000 +leagues from Lima, 650 from the nearest coast +of New Spain, and 1000 leagues from New +Guinea. Here the distance from Lima to New +Guinea is precisely fixed by Quiros; but at the +same time it is to be noted, that the distance +from Lima to the isles in question are as precisely +fixed; and in the same memorial they are +said to be between the 7th and 12th degrees of +south latitude, 1500 leagues from the city of +Lima. Thus they are placed by Quiros, precisely +in the midway between the Marquessas +and New Guinea; whereas the isles called New +Britain are divided by Dampier from New +Guinea to the eastward only by a strait. +</p> +<p> +But this by the bye.⁠—We shall now proceed +to relate what other material discoveries have +been made by other nations in the southern +hemisphere, particularly by the Dutch:⁠—Le +Maire and Schouten left the Texel on June the +14th, 1615; and passing Strait Le Maire January +25, 1616, on the 10th of April the same +year fell in with an island in latitude 15 deg. +<span class='pagenum'>xxxvii</span>12 min. S. 3700 miles from the coast of Peru, +to which they gave the name of <span class="small-caps">Dog Island</span>. +Pursuing their course to the isles of Salomon, +on the 16th they came to another island, in lat. +14 deg. 46 min. S. to which they gave the name +of <span class="small-caps">Waterland</span>, because in this island, tho’ uninhabited, +they found a supply of fresh water, and +some herbs, of which they gathered sackfuls to +make pottage to refresh the men, who were now +much afflicted with the scurvy. +</p> +<p> +On the 3d of May they saw many dolphins, +the first they had seen in the South Seas. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th, after passing several uninhabited +islots, they discovered an island in lat. 16 deg. +10 min. S. where they had an engagement with +the natives, whom they found to be great thieves; +they were, however, very handsome; their limbs +well-proportioned, of large stature, quite naked, +excellent swimmers, and very active. This island +they called Cocos Island, because they were here +plentifully supplied with that fruit. A league +from it lay another, which they named Traitors +Island, because the inhabitants had formed a design +to cut them off. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th, having sailed near 5000 miles +from the coast of Peru, without discovering the +least appearance of a southern land, or falling +in with the so much celebrated isles of Salomon, +and being in lat. 16 deg. 5 min. S. it was there considered +in full council what course to steer next; +when it was determined to return home by the well +known track to the northward of New Guinea. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>xxxviii</span>In pursuit of this resolution they changed their +course to the N. N. W. and on the 22d, being +in lat. 14 deg. 56 min. S. they fell in with an +island which, by its beautiful appearance, promised +fair to afford refreshment. Sending the +shallop to sound, they found 50 fathom, sand +and shells, in a kind of bason over-against a +small river issuing from a valley edged with +trees. This gave unspeakable pleasure to the +whole company. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/048.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Horn-Island.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +On the 23d they moored the ship; and, while +they were yet busy, they were visited by whole +troops of the natives, who expressed their admiration +a thousand different ways. At length, a +venerable old man approached the ship, and +with great gravity made an oration, at the conclusion +of which, the people who surrounded +him expressed their approbation by general acclamations. +A traffic for provisions now commenced; +and, after a pretty sharp skirmish, in +which half a dozen natives were killed by the +musquetry, the same was continued till their +departure with great civility and honesty. The +Chiefs of the island, after an exchange of hostages, +came on board, and were magnificently +entertained. They were given to understand, +that the ships were in want of water, and they +made their people assist in supplying their wants. +They caused hogs, dogs, fowls, and fruits, to be +sent in plenty, which were exchanged for nails, +beads, dolls, and looking-glasses. As a present, +when the Chiefs returned to shore, they sent to +<span class='pagenum'>xxxix</span>the Commander two hogs ready drest; they had +taken out the entrails, and put in the place of them +burning stones, to roast them in the inside, and +sweet herbs to make them savoury. In short, +their manners, their desires, their behaviour, +their customs, their habitations, and their arts, +so exactly correspond with what has lately been +reported of the inhabitants of the supposed newly +discovered islands in the South Seas, that there +does not remain a doubt, but that this island +which the Dutch named Hoorne Island, together +with the adjoining island which they called +the Island of Good Hope, are two of those that +lie between the 10th and 17th degrees of south +latitude, of which our late voyagers have given +so flattering an account. One particular reported +by the Dutch is strikingly characteristic: +The men, say they, were valiant, and large in +stature, the tallest among them surpassing very much +in height the tallest of ours; <em>their women +were not handsome, but so totally destitute of +shame, that what modesty requires to be done in privacy, +they performed with their men in public, by +way of entertainment, before their Kings</em>. In the +new map accompanying Hawkesworth’s Voyages, +King George’s Island is placed in the latitude of +14 deg. 29 min. S. long. 148 deg. 50 min. W. +In the Dutch maps Hoorne Island is placed in lat. +14 deg. 56 min. S. long. 83 deg. 30 min. W. +from Arica, on the coast of Peru, which answers +to long. 153 deg. 30 min. W. from London, being +only 2 deg. 40 min. more to the west, and +<span class='pagenum'>xl</span>27 min. more to the south than King George’s +Island; a difference very inconsiderable indeed! +allowing for the difference of time from 1616 +to 1765, and for the improvement that has been +made in the instruments of navigation during +that period, particularly in those for ascertaining +longitude. +</p> +<p> +On the 1st of June, as has been already +observed, they took their departure from +Hoorne Island, highly pleased with their kind +reception, and on the 25th came in sight of +the coast of New Guinea. +</p> +<p> +We should have mentioned, that Schouten +was of opinion, that Hoorne Island was one of +the Salomon Isles, mentioned by Quiros, none +other they had met with having answered so +well to the Spanish description of them. +</p> +<p> +The next remarkable voyage, undertaken +professedly with a view to discovery in the +southern hemisphere, is that of Abel Jansan +Tasman, who, in 1642, sailed from Batavia in +the East Indies, and touched at the Isles of +Mauritius, in latitude 20 deg. 20 min. South; +long. 78 deg. 47 min. East. On the 8th of +October, the same year, he left the Mauritius, +and, keeping a southerly course, on the 24th of +September fell in with the land, to which he +gave the name of Anthony Van Diemen’s land, +in 42 deg. 25 min. S. long. 163 deg. 50 min. E. +Here they met with much bad weather, which +obliged them to steer eastward; and on the 1st +of December they anchored in lat. 43 deg. +<span class='pagenum'>xli</span>10 min. S. long. 167 deg. 55 min. E. in a bay +to which they gave the name of Frederic Henry’s +bay. Their whole force consisted only of +a small ship about 300 tons, named the Hemskirk, +and the Zee Haan pink for examining the +coast. Here they landed, but could discover +no human being, though they had reason to +believe the country was inhabited. They gathered +plenty of good pot-herbs that grew +wild, and saw trees full two fathom and an half +in the girt, and from 60 to 75 feet high, in +which steps had been cut for the purpose of +climbing them, five feet distant from each other, +and from this circumstance they concluded +that the inhabitants must be men of gigantic +stature. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th of December, Tasman pursued +his course in search of the Salomon Isles, and +on the 13th had sight of a very high and +mountainous country, now well known by the +name of New Zealand. By its lofty appearance, +he judged it to be the southern continent +and coasted it along to the north eastward, till +on the 18th of December, he came to a spacious +bay, three or four miles in breadth, in +lat. 40 deg. 49 min. S. long. 191 deg. 41 min. +from whence he could discern on the shore men +of a strong robust make, partly clothed, and +partly naked, to whom he made signals, inviting +them on board, but none of them would venture +to approach within the reach of a peteraro. +It was therefore resolved to go to them; +<span class='pagenum'>xlii</span>but before that resolution could be carried into +execution, the barbarians made an attack upon +the Zee Haan’s boat, and murdered most of +the crew, in the manner related in the course +of the work. +</p> +<p> +Not caring to sacrifice any more of his people +against a barbarous race of manslayers, he +weighed anchor, and pursued his voyage along +the coast till he came to an island in latitude +34 deg. 25 min. S. which he named <span class="small-caps">Three +Kings Island</span>, where some of his people +landed, and where they saw at a distance about +40 men of an uncommon stature, who called to +them in a very gruff tone of voice, and approached +them hastily with prodigious strides. +The Dutchmen, being few in number, thought +fit to retreat. Their business being that of discovery, +not of war, the Captain thought fit to +quit that inhospitable coast, and direct his +course to the islands of Cocos or Hoorne, +where he was sure of refreshing his men, and +supplying their wants without danger of bloodshed, +happy that he could find a passage into +an open sea. On this coast, however, he observed +many fair plantations, handsomely laid +out, and to all appearance well cultivated. +</p> +<p> +On the 19th of January, 1643, he discovered +three islands, to which he gave names. +The southernmost he called Pylstaart’s Island, +the middlemost Amsterdam, and the most +northerly Middleburgh. This last lay in lat. +21 deg. 20 min. S. long. 205 deg. 20 minutes. +<span class='pagenum'>xliii</span>At these islands, which seemed remote from any +other land, they trafficked for provisions; and +the inhabitants, who were of a tawney complexion, +and somewhat above the common size, +behaved very civilly, and shewed no signs of a +hostile disposition. Among the natives of these +islands came a lusty man with a St. Thomas’s +arm, and a woman with a natural beard. A +venerable old man came also among the rest, +and made an oration; after which a croud of +men and women, young and old, came on +board with all kinds of provisions. It is remarkable, +that, among all the islands in the +South Seas, the only tame four-footed animals +are hogs and dogs, and of these the inhabitants +here had plenty. They found another island at +no great distance, equally abounding in the +usual productions, besides being plentifully +supplied with water. It appears strange to us, +that the people in those hot climates can subsist +without fresh water; yet nature seems in +part to have supplied that defect by furnishing +a fruit that both allays thirst and assuages +hunger, and that too without either art or labour. +By vegetables suited to their subsistence, +it should seem that the animals, indigenous +to the climate, are nourished and made fat. +Indeed, where springs, brooks, and lakes are +wanting, the forests have few, if any, inhabitants; +but if we may credit the relations of +voyagers, the people have hogs and dogs, +where they have neither river, well, or lake; +<span class='pagenum'>xliv</span>for though in Amsterdam Island, the strangers +might have purchased 100 hogs a day for a few +baubles, yet a can of fresh water was not to be +procured at any rate. In an island, called by +the natives Annamokka, but by the Dutch +Rotterdam, water was found in plenty, yet it +was no better inhabited than the islands before +mentioned, which seemed to be wholly without. +Rotterdam Island is placed in lat. 20 deg. 15 min. +S. long. 206 deg. 19 min. To this island they +repaired to take in water, and there they compleated +their stock of fresh provisions, finding +the people courteous and civil, though somewhat +inclined to be thievish. Being now fully +refreshed and provided, without making any +further discoveries worth relating, they returned +to Java, by the way of New Guinea. +</p> +<p> +Jacob Roggewein was the next Dutchman +who sailed professedly on the business of discovery. +He was furnished by their East-India +Company with three ships, namely, the Eagle, +the Tienhoven, and the African Galley: with +these he set sail from Amsterdam, July the 16th, +1721, and towards the latter end of November +came in sight of the coast of Brazil. After a +few days stay in the neighbourhood of Rio de +Janeiro, he weighed, and went in quest of +Hawkins’s Maidenland, which is said to lie in +30 deg. S. but not being able to find it, he +pursued his course towards the straits, till on +the 21st of December, in lat. 40 deg S. the +ships met with a violent storm, in which the +<span class='pagenum'>xlv</span>Tienhoven lost company. About the beginning +of January, Roggewein discovered a large +island 200 leagues in circuit, in lat. 52 deg. S. +long. 95 deg. W. about 80 leagues from the +coast of America. He named this island <span class="small-caps">Belgia +Australis</span>, and it is the same now known +by the name of Falkland’s Island. Leaving +this island to windward, he passed the strait of +Le Maire, and on the 24th of February came +in sight of Juan Fernandez, where he fortunately +found the Tienhoven, that island having +been the place appointed to rendezvous in case +of separation. +</p> +<p> +There the ship continued three weeks, and +sailed from thence about the middle of March, +steering W. N. W. in search of Davis’s Land, +which, however, they could not find. Neither +has that or Hawkins’s Maiden Land ever been +seen by any other navigator, except the first discoverers. +Being in lat. 28 deg. S. long. 268 deg. +they saw many birds and other tokens of high +land, but to the astonishment of the Admiral +came in sight of none till they had sailed 12 +leagues farther west. They then discovered an +island, which they called <span class="small-caps">Easter-Island</span>, because +they came in sight of it on Easter-day. +They found this island well inhabited. The +first man that came on board was painted with +various kinds of figures, was of a brown complexion, +with large ears, so long that they +hung down to his shoulders. He was tall, robust, +active, of an agreeable countenance, and +<span class='pagenum'>xlvi</span>lively disposition. They offered him wine, +but he threw it in his eyes. They gave him +meat, cloathed him, and sent him on shore, +but afterwards killed him in a skirmish with his +countrymen. On this island they observed +many idols, and saw one man quite white, +whom they took to be a priest. He had pendents +in his ears a pound weight each. On +landing 150 in number, the natives crouded +so close upon them, that they were forced to +fire upon them to keep them off. By this discharge +several were killed, and many wounded. +These poor people, seeing their friends bleed, +and fall dead, filled the air with doleful cries +and lamentations; and brought offerings of +fruits, roots, and fowls, to appease the wrath +of the invaders. To implore the bodies of +their murdered friends, they cast themselves on +the earth, and made other signs of supplication. +They were indulged in their timidity, and it +was held a crime to approach a Dutchman +without reverence; when they brought them +presents, they laid them at their feet. +</p> +<p> +This country was full of inclosures, and seemed +neatly cultivated. The people had coverings +of a manufacture that felt soft like silk. The +women in general were painted with a rouge +far surpassing in brightness any thing of that +colour known in Europe; they were very +obliging, and enticed the strangers to every +kind of familiarity both by their looks and +gestures. Their idols were chiefly of stone, +<span class='pagenum'>xlvii</span>well-proportioned, and wrought with exquisite +workmanship. While they lay at anchor at +this delightful island, a storm arose, which prevented +the Admiral’s design of extending his researches +to the remoter parts of it, as it appeared +diversified with woods, forests, lawns, gardens, +and cultivated fields; and in every respect +well supplied with necessaries for the refreshment +of ships bound to the southern lands; +but the fury of the storm increased so fast, that +those on shore were glad to recover their ships. +They were scarce embarked when the billows +rose to such a height as to make it dangerous to +hazzard their security to the anchors with which +they were moored; they, therefore, instantly +weighed and put to sea, and, as the wind blew +fair, they proceeded at a great rate towards the +bad sea of Schouten, to which they were bound. +After a run of 800 leagues from <i>Easter-Island</i>, +they got sight of an island in latitude 15 deg. +45 min. S. which they took to be <i>Dog-Island</i>, +discovered by Schouten, and therefore did not +stay to examine it. +</p> +<p> +The trade-wind began now to shift, and to veer +about to the south-west, by which the ships in +the night were driven among a cluster of islands, +and the African galley being a-head was jammed +between the rocks, of which a more particular +account will be found in the course of the +Work. +</p> +<p> +These islands were situated between the 15th +and 16th degrees of south latitude; and Roggewein’s +<span class='pagenum'>xlviii</span><i>Pernicious Island</i> is no doubt the same +with that where Commodore Byron found the +carved head of a rudder that had belonged to a +Dutch long-boat, and where he also found a +piece of hammered iron, a piece of brass, and +some small iron tools, which the ancestors of +the present race of inhabitants had obtained +from this ship after her shipwreck. +</p> +<p> +Here the crews of the remaining ships grew +troublesome and unruly. They had already +been out ten months, and had experienced nothing +but hardships, without the least prospect +of advantage, either to themselves or country. +A council was therefore called, and it was determined +to return home by way of the East +Indies. On quitting Pernicious Island they fell +in with a small island, which they called Aurora, +because it was discovered at break of day and +soon after with another small island, which they +called Vesper, because they came in sight of it +in the evening. About twenty-five leagues to +the westward of Pernicious Island, they found +themselves entangled among a cluster of islands, +which they called the Labyrinth, because it was +some time before they could disengage the ships +from the rocks and shoals with which they were +surrounded. Having providentially escaped this +imminent danger, they continued their course +to the westward; and, after some days sail, fell +in with an island, which by its beautiful appearance +promised some refreshment. They saw +many natives with lances and long pikes passing +<span class='pagenum'>xlix</span>and repassing along the shore, and they sent +two boats well manned to speak with them, and +to encourage them to trade. Their endeavours, +however, were ineffectual, till, by killing some +and dispersing the rest, they made good their +landing. When they had gained the shore, the +savages seemed more tractable; they even assisted +them in gathering herbs, and bringing them +water; the women, in particular, appeared enamoured +with them, and by many alluring ways +endeavoured to gain their confidence; but they +were to the last degree deceitful. Being decoyed +into an ambuscade the savages surrounded +them on all sides and, notwithstanding a +brisk fire was kept up, which killed many, and +wounded more, not a Dutchman that fell into +the snare escaped unwounded. After this misfortune +it was with reluctance that any one +ventured ashore to look for refreshments. This +island they called Recreation, on account of its +salutary herbs, and it is placed in lat. 16 deg. S. +and in long. 285 deg. The natives were of the +middle size, but strong and well-made, lively, +and of a bold undaunted spirit. Their bodies +were painted, and covered with a kind of net, +which they wrapt about them decently enough; +The women were covered from head to foot +with a very pretty stuff that felt soft like silk; +their complexion was dark, with shining black +hair, very white teeth, and brilliant eyes; and to +sailors who had long been at sea they were not +a little inviting. The third day after they left +this island, they fell in with several islands at +<span class='pagenum'>l</span>once, to which they gave the name of Bauman’s +Islands, where the inhabitants were altogether as +courteous and civil as those they had left had +been treacherous and cruel. They came and +trafficked with great good-nature and honesty, +and were to appearance as fair and beautiful as +those in the most celebrated parts of Europe. +They now thought themselves near the islands +which Dampier has named New Britain; but +it was many days sail before they came in sight +of them, in which interval the scurvy made +dreadful havock. The sailors were very desirous +of staying in these islands to refresh, and to +recover their strength; but the Commander, +who had other views, pursued his course to the +East Indies with all imaginable dispatch. +</p> +<p> +Thus, all this grand expedition, by which the +expectations of the Commander in Chief and +his employers had been raised to a very high +pitch, came to nothing. The men were dissatisfied +with their officers for going so far, and +the officers with their Commander for not going +farther. The existence of a southern continent +still remained as doubtful as ever; and +so it continues at this period, June 22, 1774. +</p> +<p> +Since the above was written, the Adventure, +who accompanied Capt. Cook in the Resolution +on a new voyage, is arrived, and reports, +that they had sailed between the 55th and 67th +degrees of south latitude, but had found no +land; so that if any land lies farther to the +southward, it must be uninhabitable. +</p> +<div class="icenter margtb_1"> +<img src="images/061.jpg" class="imw_5" alt="Decorative Image."> +</div> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='l15'><span class='lspe'>LIST</span></span><br> +<span class='fontp9'><span class='lspb'>OF</span></span><br> +<span class='l15'><span class='lspc'>SUBSCRIBERS</span>.</span> +</h2></div> +<div class='poetry_container fontp9'> +<div class='poetry'> +<p class='align_c two_space'>A.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Adams, Tower</p> +<p class='verse'>Ralph Adye, Esq; Swallow-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Roger Ap-Williams, Esq; ditto</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Luke Adlington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Michael Angelo</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Ainsworth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Aldwinckle</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Anderson</p> +<p class='verse'>John Ayscough, Esq;</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Francis Armstrong, Bow</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Matth. Akenside, Kensington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Ambler</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jeremiah Alcock</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Ralph Andrews, Holborn</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Christopher Appleby</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Atkinson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Allen</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>B.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Sir George Booth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Bristow, Lewes</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Bruckshaw, Royal Exchange</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Blackburn, ditto</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Benson, Teddington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Denham Berry, Victualling-office</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Barwick</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Banks</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Buchanan</p> +<p class='verse'>William Blackwell, Esq;</p> +<p class='verse'>Thomas Broxholm, Esq;</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Brooke, St. John’s lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Butler</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Barnes, Nightingale-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Bicknell, Hackney</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Andrew Brocklesby</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Philip Bristow</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Bennet, West Smithfield</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Nicholas Bond, Lambeth Marsh</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Robert Birchall</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>C.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Cobby, Lewes</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Cox, Chelsea</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edw. Chandler, Knightsbridge</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Coulston, Cavendish-squ.</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Cadell</p> +<p class='verse'>Capt. Cookson, Crown-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Coventry, Red Cross-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Collinson, Gravel-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Coleman, Clare-market</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Curtis, Hogsdon</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Anth. Clarke, Shoreditch</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Ezekiel Clements</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Cameron</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Cooke</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Collyer</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Cockshute</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>D.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Bon. Dobree, East Cheap</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thos. Draper, Westmin.</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jos. Dowglass, Long-Acre</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edw. Dobson, Old-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Davis, John-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Davis, Castle-court</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Day, Castle lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. David Davies</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Josias Dugdale, Little-Britain</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Dobson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Dobson, Oxford-road</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Drinkwater, ditto</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Dupont</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Dyson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. De Jersey</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>E.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Evans</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Evans</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Edwards, Friday-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Elston, Wapping</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Michael Eglington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jarvis Erwas</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Emery</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stukely Emerson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Entick</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Eversham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edwards</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Ellis</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>F.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Fog, Moorfields</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Fog</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edward Fly</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Foreman</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Fenwick</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Freeman</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Featherstone</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Flint, Swallow-street</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>G.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Gadge, North Pickenham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Greenwell, Red-lion-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Gamidge</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Timothy Green</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John George Giles</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Francis Greatree</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Abraham Gunston</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Gwin, Long-Acre</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Geo. Gilson, New-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Isaac Greenway</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Daniel Greaves</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Caleb Glover</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Griffiths</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Goring</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Groombridge</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Goodwin</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>H.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Capt. Rich. Hinchcliffe, York</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Howes, jun. Northleech</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Howe, Wycombe</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Hawkins, Crane-court</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Haxby, at the Archbishop of Canterbury’s</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Hart, Cecil-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Hughes, Fleet-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Haggard</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Haynes</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Harvest</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Harsh, Temple</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thos. Harrison, St. John’s street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Hatton, Salisbury-court</p> +<p class='verse'>Capt. Robert Hinde, Bruton-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thos. Hatford, Wapping</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Hemsted</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Hutton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Horne</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Hincks</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>I.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jones, Silver-street, Golden-square</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Innes, Cheney-row, Chelsea</p> +<p class='verse'>Judah Jacobs, Esq;</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Jackson, Shoe-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. David Jefferies</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Jenkinson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Arthur Jameson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Jones</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Isaacs</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>K.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Kennedy, at Litcham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Christopher Kay, Silver-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Kingman, New-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Kent, Charles-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Kenworthy</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Kirkman</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Kempson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Kirkland</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>L.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Manvel Lima, Abchurch-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Lewis, jun. Wrexham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Lewis, Bow</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Sampson Luker, Newington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Geoffrey Larkworthy, Clerkenwell</p> +<p class='verse'>Theophilus Lane, Esq;</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Lancaster</p> +<p class='verse'>Rev. Mr. Long, Spixworth, Norfolk</p> +<p class='verse'>Mrs. Eliz. Levi, Portsmouth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Lewellin, Dartmouth-str.</p> +<p class='verse'>Capt. Lawson, Temple</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Isaac Lamb</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Lumley</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Miles Largess</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Laughton, Wapping</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Leviston</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Lambert</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Leach</p> +<p class='verse'>Dr. Lowther</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>M.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Robert Main, Swaffham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. George Mytton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Milner</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Martyn</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Merryman</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Miers</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jonas Moxon</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Andrew M‘Ewer</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jonathan Manning</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Markham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Mackintosh</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Moody</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Malie</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Molineux</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Maude</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Mayne</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>N.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>John Norton, Esq; Golden-square</p> +<p class='verse'>──── Nicol, Esq; Argyle-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Marmaduke Newby, Southmolton-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Nevill Noble</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Nicholas Nugent</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Philip Noble</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Norris</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Newbolt</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Newcome</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>O.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Ogilvie, Swallow-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Overton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Oxenford, Stratford</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Jones Owen</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Ogilvie</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Humphry Orton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Oxlade</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>P.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Rich. Privat, Petty-France</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Perrot, Purser of the Culloden</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Penn</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Perkins</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Benjamin Pell</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Robert Preston</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Primrose</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Paget</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Samuel Pickering</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Phillips, Rose-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Pullon, Broad-court</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Proper, Long-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Robert Price, Belton-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Pinegar</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Price</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Piggot</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>R.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Richards, Lambeth-marsh</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Sa. Ravensworth, Chelsea</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Peter Rooker, Islington</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Robinson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Samuel Richardson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richard Rowe</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Roper, Bow</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Robertson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Isaac Robley</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Stephen Rivers</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Rickards</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Alexander Reid</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Reid</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Richards</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>S.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Schutz, Rose-street</p> +<p class='verse'>James Spencer, Esq; Warwick-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Lieut. John Staunton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Severn</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Sparks, Maddox-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Simmonds</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Stewart</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Arthur Smith, Victualling-office</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William St. John</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles William Stevenson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Stanhope</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edward Spoor, Bow</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wm. Suxspeck, Radcliffe</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Barker Simson, jun. Salisbury-court</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Senhouse, Piccadilly</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Sovard, Oxford-road</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Jeremiah Smith</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Henry Sibthorpe</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Samuel Parker Southwell</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Stockham, Wardour-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edward Stone</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Simpson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Frederick Stark</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Philip Sergeant</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Moses Strickland</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edmund Smith, Swallow-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Smith</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Smith, Swan-lane</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Strahan</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>T.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Rev. Mr. Trancker</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edward Terry, Victualling-office</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thomas Thrilwind</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Francis Thomson</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Timbrel</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Thistlethwayte</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Henry Thoroughgood</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Philip Turton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Thatcher, Wapping</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Thompson, Plumtree-str.</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>U.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. James Thomas Upton, Wapping</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Francis Unwin, ditto</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>W.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Edward Warner, Royal-Exchange</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Wilson</p> +<p class='verse'>──── Walters, Esq; Curzon-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mrs. Williams, Fleet-street</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Warburton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Whitworth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Isaac Wentworth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Walker</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Welch, Oldford</p> +<p class='verse'>John Wood, Esq; Old Belton-street</p> +<p class='verse'>James Wall, Esq; Stratford</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Robert Wight</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Charles Williams</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Michael Wentworth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Wenman</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Alexander Wareham</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Temple Wharton</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. West</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Westgarth</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Weale</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Woodward</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Wells</p> +</div> +<p class='align_c mt1x5'>Y.</p> +<div class='stanza'> +<p class='verse'>Mr. Joseph Young</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. William Yeraway</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. John Yeats</p> +<p class='verse'>Mr. George York</p> +</div> +</div></div> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +Directions <i>to the</i> Bookbinder <i>for placing the</i> Plates: +</h2></div> +<table class='fontp9 center one_space margetb'> +<tr> +<th colspan=3 class="ac pu pb">In <span class="small-caps">Vol.</span> I.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph">Map of Mexico and South America to be placed at the beginning.</td> +<td class="ar"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph vt">Horn Island ──── (<i>Introduction</i>)</td> +<td class="ar pr vb"><i>to face page</i></td> +<td class="ar vb">xxxviii</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Head of Sir Francis Drake</td> +<td class="ar vb">1</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Drake going off to sea on a raft</td> +<td class="ar vb">41</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Beheading of Capt. Doughty</td> +<td class="ar vb">88</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich Spanish ship</td> +<td class="ar vb">113</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Drake conveying away the Spanish Judges and criminal savages</td> +<td class="ar vb">118</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh of New Albion</td> +<td class="ar vb">123</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Cavendish plundering and burning Paita</td> +<td class="ar vb">191</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">The King of Java’s Wives destroying themselves</td> +<td class="ar vb">226</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Cavendish’s crew in great distress, &c.</td> +<td class="ar vb">250</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Capt. Davis’s men taken off a rock</td> +<td class="ar vb">304</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Dampier’s men seizing oxen, mules, &c. at a farm-house</td> +<td class="ar vb">340</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Capt. Swan entertained by Rajah Laut</td> +<td class="ar vb">370</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Dampier and his companions overtaken by a storm</td> +<td class="ar vb">412</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Cowley and his men taking in provisions at Juan Fernandez</td> +<td class="ar vb">440</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan=3 class="ac pu pb vt">In <span class="small-caps">Vol.</span> II.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Alexander Selkirk making his cats and kids dance</td> +<td class="ar vb">24</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Miscellaneous Plate of fish, trees, &c.</td> +<td class="ar vb">48</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Mr. Hatley and crew whipped</td> +<td class="ar vb">89</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Distressed situation of the Success</td> +<td class="ar vb">120</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Sea-lion, sea-lioness, and seals</td> +<td class="ar vb">181</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Californian Woman habited in a deer’s skin</td> +<td class="ar vb">229</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Californian Man returned from fishing, and another in his bark-log</td> +<td class="ar vb">230</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Lawn where Commodore Anson pitched his tent at Juan Fernandez</td> +<td class="ar vb">289</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan=3 class="ac pu pb vt">In <span class="small-caps">Vol.</span> III.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph vt">The three Charts of the tracks of the Dolphin, Tamar, Swallow, Endeavour, and M. Bougainville, to be accurately joined, and placed at the beginning</td> +<td class="ar vb"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="al ph vt">Comm. Byron conversing with a Patagonian woman</td> +<td class="ar pr vb"><i>to face page</i></td> +<td class="ar vb">11</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">The wolf-fox of Falkland’s Islands</td> +<td class="ar vb">18</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Straits of Magellan</td> +<td class="ar vb">22</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">The Queen of Otaheite taking leave of Capt. Wallis</td> +<td class="ar vb">99</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">View of a town in the island of Terra del Fuego</td> +<td class="ar vb">196</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Musical youth in the new-discovered islands</td> +<td class="ar vb">218</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Mr. Banks receiving a visit from the King of the D. of York’s Island</td> +<td class="ar vb">238</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">A Morai, or burial-place</td> +<td class="ar vb">257</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">A woman and a boy of the new-discovered islands</td> +<td class="ar vb">270</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">A Priest of the new-discovered islands in the habit of his order</td> +<td class="ar vb">287</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Representation of a dance in the island of Ulietea</td> +<td class="ar vb">299</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">View of a perforated rock in Tolaga-bay</td> +<td class="ar vb">326</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Head of a New Zealand Chief curiously tattooed</td> +<td class="ar vb">327</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">View of an arched rock on the coast of New Zealand</td> +<td class="ar vb">371</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">War-canoe, and a branch of the bread fruit tree</td> +<td class="ar vb">396</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">New Zealand warrior in the dress of his country</td> +<td class="ar vb">398</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Warriors of Otaheite and New Zealand defying their enemies</td> +<td class="ar vb">399</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan=3 class="ac pu pb vt">In <span class="small-caps">Vol.</span> IV.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">The hooded serpent, and an ape of Java</td> +<td class="ar vb">85</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">M. Bougainville crossing St. Lucia river in a canoe drawn by horses</td> +<td class="ar vb">126</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Bougainville hoisting the French colours in the straits of Magellan</td> +<td class="ar vb">194</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Prospective view of the great cascade in Cascade-bay</td> +<td class="ar vb">201</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan=3 class="ac pu pb vt">In the <span class="small-caps">Voyage</span> to the <span class="small-caps">North Pole</span>.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Map of the Icy Sea ──── (<i>Introduction</i>)</td> +<td class="ar vb">i.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">Chart of Spitzbergen, or New Greenland</td> +<td class="ar vb">33</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan=2 class="al ph pr vt">View of the Whale Fishery</td> +<td class="ar vb">40</td> +</tr> +</table> +<div class='section'> +<figure class='break_before max100' style='width: 25em;'> +<img src="images/069.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><span class="small-caps"><i>S<sup>r</sup>. Francis Drake.</i></span> <span class='fontp9'><i>J. June Sculp.</i></span></figcaption> +</figure> +</div> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='l12'><span class="small-caps"><span class='lspc'>Sir FRANCIS DRAKE</span>’s</span></span><br> +<span class='font2p'><span class='lspd'>VOYAGES</span>,</span><br> +<span class='fontp9'><span class='lspa'>PARTICULARLY THAT</span></span><br> +<span class='lspc'>ROUND THE WORLD</span>,<br> +In 1577, 1578, 1579, and 1580. +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +B<span class='toupper lspz ip2'>efore</span> we proceed to the relation of the +particular Voyages that characterize the +navigators who first surrounded the globe, and +who immortalized their names by their skill +and their courage, it may be expected that we +should give some account of their families and +first setting out, the distinguishing marks of +genius that led them to prefer the fatigues and +dangers of a sea-faring life to learned ease, or +the calm pursuit of less hazardous employments; +and that we should trace the steps by which +they rose to eminence by their bravery and +their conduct. +</p> +<p> +The bare narration of the incidents recorded +in a single voyage, however memorable, would +convey but a very imperfect knowledge of the +general character of those renowned heroes, +who carried the glory of their country to the +remotest regions of the earth. We shall, +therefore, endeavour to follow them as they +advance to fame, and accompany them from +their highest elevation to that period when all +distinctions are levelled. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>2</span>The celebrated mariner, of whom we are now +to give an account, was son to Edmund Drake, +a gentleman of Tavistoke, in Devonshire, who, +being inclined to the doctrine of the Protestants, +at that time much opposed by Q. Mary, was +obliged to quit his place of residence, and +retire to Medway, in Kent; where, after that +Queen’s death, he was first appointed Chaplain +in the royal navy, and afterwards Vicar of +Upnor. In these employments, his appointments +being small, and his family large, he +owed the education of several of his children +to the kindness of his relations, and that, in +particular, of Francis, the eldest of twelve, to +Sir John Hawkins; under whom, as it appears, +he very early distinguished himself, and laid +the foundation both of his fame and his +fortune. +</p> +<p> +The learned Camden, indeed, informs us, +that he was put apprentice to the master of a +small trading vessel, in whose service he behaved +so well, that his master, dying a batchelor, left +him his vessel as a reward for his diligence: +but Stowe, who seems better informed, represents +him in a superior light; tells us, that +Francis Russel, afterwards Duke of Bedford, +was his godfather; and that Sir John Hawkins +was his near relation. What Camden relates of +Francis may, however, be true of his brother; +for there were no less than four who were bred +to the sea. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>3</span>Be this as it may, the first enterprize of +consequence, in which we find him engaged, +was in a voyage to the West-Indies, as Captain +of the Judith, under his relation already mentioned. +Those islands, having but lately been +discovered, and very little frequented by the +English, were thought so much to abound in +wealth, that no voyager thither could fail of +being recompensed with great advantages. Nothing +was talked of among the mercantile or +adventurous part of mankind but the beauty +and riches of the new world. Fresh discoveries +were frequently made; new countries and nations, +never heard of before, were daily described; +and it may easily be concluded, that the relators +did not lessen the merit of their discoveries, +by suppressing or diminishing any circumstance +that might produce wonder, or excite curiosity. +</p> +<p> +This was the age of enterprize and discovery; +and her Majesty encouraged the ardour of her +subjects by furnishing ships and commissions to +such officers of distinction in her royal navy +as were willing to engage in hazardous pursuits. +</p> +<p> +The projects, however, that were formed, +were not always successfully carried into execution; +they were frequently defeated by the ignorance +of the adventurers, but more often by +the malice of the Spaniards, who, from the first +discovery of America, considered every other +nation that attempted to follow them, as invaders +of their rights, and incroachers on <em>their</em> +territories. At that time, however, as now, it +<span class='pagenum'>4</span>was no uncommon thing for those who went in +search of new discoveries, to carry on a kind of +contraband trade with the new settlers; which, +though prohibited by the Crown of Spain, was +yet countenanced by the Viceroys and Governors: +but even these would sometimes take advantage +of the power lodged in their hands, and make +prize of the profits of the voyage, under pretence +of an illicit trade. +</p> +<p> +Among those who suffered most by the injustice +of the Viceroys, was Sir John Hawkins; +who, having struck out a new trade, highly advantageous +to the parties concerned, though +disgraceful to humanity, supplied the Mexican +Spaniards with slaves from Africa, and received +from them, in return, large remittances in gold +and silver. This was connived at, though we +do not find that it was absolutely tolerated, by +the Spanish court. +</p> +<p> +It was, however, after one of those successful +voyages, in which we find two of the Queen’s +ships engaged (namely, the Jesus, commanded +by Hawkins, as Admiral; and the Minion, of +which Captain John Hampton was Commander; +with four other armed trading ships, among +which was the Judith, Captain Drake), that, +being driven by stress of weather into the port +of St. John d’Ulloa, in the bay of Mexico, +they were there waiting for a supply of provisions, +when the Spanish fleet from Europe +arrived, consisting of 12 sail, richly laden with +European merchandize, and on board of which +was a new Viceroy. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>5</span>As the port was then absolutely in the power +of the English, it was debated, among the +principal officers, whether the Spanish fleet +should be suffered to enter; as their Admiral +suspected, that, if they were admitted, they +would contrive some means of distressing him; +and if they were not, they must perish at sea; +an event that would certainly bring on a war,⁠—a +consequence he could by no means justify. +</p> +<p> +Upon mature deliberation, it was, therefore, +judged safest to propose an agreement with the +Viceroy, to which he consented, and by which +it was stipulated, that the English should hold +one side of the harbour, and the Spaniards the +other; and that hostages should be given on +both sides, that no injury should be done to +either. But it was soon discovered, that, though +on the part of the English, six gentlemen were +sent, yet, on that of the Spaniards, the hostages +were only common men, finely dressed. This +gave cause of distrust; yet the English, naturally +honest, were not sufficiently on their guard. +</p> +<p> +The Spaniards for some weeks behaved with +seeming cordiality; mutual civilities passed between +the officers of both nations; and the +English, having supplied their wants, were preparing +to depart, when, all of a sudden, at a +signal given, the Spaniards assaulted their ships +as the officers were at dinner, boarded the Minion +by a concealed ambuscade, which, however, was +repulsed with loss, and then a general massacre +ensued. The English who were on shore were +<span class='pagenum'>6</span>all put to death; three of the four trading ships +were presently sunk; and the Minion and Jesus +were so embarrassed by their moorings, that it +was almost a whole hour before they could be +placed in a posture of defence; which, however, +was at last effected. They then returned the attack +with so much fury, that the Spanish Vice-Admiral +was soon blown up, and in her perished 300 +men; and not long after the Spanish Admiral +himself was sunk. The Spaniards, in revenge, set +two of their ships on fire to burn the Minion and +Jesus, the first of which set sail and escaped; but +the Jesus, after shifting her crew on board the +Judith, fell a victim with the rest to Spanish +treachery. +</p> +<p> +In the night, the Judith having made her +escape, endeavoured, but in vain, to join the +Minion; and being only a bark of 50 tons, +alone, on a hostile coast, crouded with men, and +having only provisions on board for her own +slender crew, a mutiny arose among the mariners, +and by far the greatest number insisted on +being put on shore, chusing rather to take their +chance among the savages, than to remain on +board to starve at sea, or again to fall into the +power of the merciless Spaniards. +</p> +<p> +Accordingly, Captain Hawkins, gave every +man his choice, either to land on the continent, +or sail with him, and share his fate. About 100 +of the stoutest seamen chose the former; of +whom five only lived to return to England. +These gave an account, that, on their landing, the +<span class='pagenum'>7</span>natives, mistaking them for Spaniards, fell upon +them suddenly, and killed eight of their number; +that, after they were known to be enemies to the +Spaniards, they were used with kindness; that, +however, being tired of living among savages, +they agreed to part, and seek the means of returning +home; some directed their course to the +northward, and watched the opportunity of seizing +a small vessel, and, crossing the Gulph, traversed +an immense tract of land, till they arrived +at a French settlement in the North; of those +who travelled westward, which was by far the +greatest part, sixty-five fell into the hands of the +Spaniards, and suffered various torments from +the Inquisition, three were burnt alive, and two +only survived to reach their own country. Of +those who followed the other course, five found +means, after enduring incredible hardships, to +get to Nova Scotia, of whom three were brought +safe to England in French merchants ships. +</p> +<p> +It was in the above engagement that Capt. Drake +first distinguished himself; and to his judicious +conduct, that those who escaped from the Jesus +owed their preservation. The Judith had the +good fortune to arrive safe in England, having +purchased some provisions on the Island of Cuba; +but what became of the Minion we have not +been able to learn. +</p> +<p> +In this expedition Sir John Hawkins lost an +immense sum. It was in vain to make complaint +to his sovereign of the infraction of the peace. +The Spanish minister vindicated the injustice of +<span class='pagenum'>8</span>the Viceroy and the Queen, tho’ she secretly resented +the loss of her ships, could not openly +abett the illicit trade carried on by her servants. +</p> +<p> +Drake, who shared in the misfortune of his +relation, possessed both his spirit and his industry. +He did not sit down to lament the loss he had +sustained; but, having acquired some degree of +credit by his gallant behaviour, and some +knowledge of the weakness and wealth of his +enemies, he determined to profit by his losses, +and to make reprisals whenever a fair opportunity +should offer. +</p> +<p> +It was no difficult matter to engage new adventurers +in new projects in those early days of +Mexican commerce, and Drake was not long +before he raised a fund to begin trade on a new +footing. In 1570 he made his first expedition, +chiefly on his own account, with two ships, the +Dragon and the Swan; and the next year in the +Swan alone; in both which voyages he enlarged +his experience, but it does not appear that he +repaired his loss. +</p> +<p> +In 1572 he found means, however, to fit out +a much greater force, in order to carry into +execution an enterprise which he had meditated, +not only to reinstate his fortune, but to revenge +the treachery of his enemies. +</p> +<p> +About this time war was agitating between +England and Spain, to which it must be confessed +the illicit trade carried on to the Spanish +settlements not a little contributed. He, therefore, +set sail from Plymouth in the Pascha, a +<span class='pagenum'>9</span>letter of marque ship, of 70 tons, accompanied +by the Swan, of 50 tons, the command of +which he entrusted to his brother John; in both +which ships he had embarked 73 choice men, +with a year’s provisions and such warlike stores +and ammunition as he judged necessary for the +enterprize he had in view. He had, likewise, +the precaution to take with him the frames of +two or three small pinnaces, that, if any accident +should befal either of his larger ships, he +might have it in his power to preserve the crew +without being driven to the necessity of leaving +any of them behind; a precaution which experience +had taught him in the unfortunate +voyage of his kinsman Sir John. But this was +not the only use for which he foresaw these small +vessels would be wanted, as will appear in the +sequel. +</p> +<p> +With this warlike force, inconsiderable as it +may now appear, he cleared the land of England +on the 12th of May, 1572; and, the weather continuing +fair, and the wind favourable, on +the 29th of June he passed between Dominica +and Guadaloupe, and on the 6th of July came +in sight of the high land of Santa Martha; +then continuing his course to the southward, +on the 15th of the same month both ships arrived +at Port Pheasant, which lay at a convenient +distance from Nombre de Dios, the place of +their destination. +</p> +<p> +Here he proposed to build his pinnaces, and +was going a-shore with a few men unarmed; +<span class='pagenum'>10</span>when, discovering a smoke at a distance, he +made the signal for another boat to follow him +with an armed force. Being joined by this reinforcement, +he marched towards the fire, +where he found a plate of lead nailed to a tree, +with an inscription engraven upon it by one +Garret, an Englishman, who had left that place +a day or two before, and had taken that method +of informing him that the Spaniards had been +advertised of his intended visit, and of his rendezvous +at that port; and that, therefore, it +would be prudent for him to make but a very +short stay. +</p> +<p> +Drake, surprized, no doubt, at the news, but +at the same time knowing how convenient this +place was for his designs, and considering that +the hazard, and waste of time, which could not +be avoided in seeking another station, was +equivalent to any other danger which was to be +apprehended from the Spaniards, determined to +follow his first resolution; only, for his greater +security, he ordered a kind of palissade or fortification +to be made, by felling a number of +large trees, and laying the trunks and branches +one across another, on an elevated spot that +commanded the river. This done, he set the +carpenters to work; and while they were employed +in putting the frames of the pinnaces +together, one Captain Rause happened to touch +at the same port, with a bark of 50 men. To +Rause Drake imparted his design; and, when +the pinnaces were ready, both set sail together, +<span class='pagenum'>11</span>shaping their course to Nombre de Dios. They +touched at the Island of Pines, where they were +informed, by the negroes they found there, +that the inhabitants of that place were in daily +expectation of some soldiers, which the Governor +of Panama had promised to send, to defend them +from the Symerons, or fugitive negroes, who, +having escaped from the tyranny of their masters, +had settled themselves under two kings, or leaders, +on each side of the passage between Nombre +de Dios and Panama; and not only asserted +their natural right to liberty and independance, +but endeavoured to revenge the cruelties they +had suffered, and had lately put the inhabitants +of Nombre de Dios into the utmost consternation. +These negroes the Captain set on shore +on the main land, so that they might, by joining +the Symerons, recover their liberty, or at +least might not have it in their power to give +the people of Nombre de Dios any speedy information +of his intention to invade them. +Then, selecting 53 men from his own company, +and 20 from the crew of his new associate +Captain Rause, he embarked with them in his +new pinnaces, and set sail for Nombre de Dios. +</p> +<p> +On July the 28th, at night, he approached +the town undiscovered, and dropt his anchors +under the shore, intending, after his men were +refreshed, to begin the attack; but, finding +that they were terrifying each other with formidable +accounts of the strength of the place, +and the multitude of the inhabitants, he determined +<span class='pagenum'>12</span>to hinder the panic from spreading farther, +by leading them immediately to action; +and, therefore, ordering them to their oars, he +landed without any opposition, there being only +one gunner upon the key, though it was fortified +by six brass cannon of the largest size. +But the gunner, while they were employed in +throwing the cannon from their carriages, +alarmed the town, as they soon discovered by +the bells, the drums, and the noise of the +people. +</p> +<p> +Drake, leaving twelve men to guard the pinnaces, +marched into the town with little or no +opposition. After a short skirmish, the forces +that the alarm had hastily drawn together were +soon dispersed, except a few whom he detained +as prisoners, in order to shew him the Governor’s +house, and also the store-house, where the mules +that bring the silver from Panama were unloaded. +</p> +<p> +Being now in full possession of the town, he +posted the main of his small body, under the +command of his brother, in the market-place; +and then followed the guides, with the rest, to +the store-house; where, forcing the door, and +entering the room where the silver was deposited, +they found it heaped up in bars, in such quantities +as almost exceed belief, the pile being, +as they conjectured, seventy feet in length, ten +in breadth, and twelve in height, each bar +weighing between thirty and forty-five pounds. +It is easy to imagine, that, at the sight of this +<span class='pagenum'>13</span>treasure, nothing was thought of, by the +English sailors, but by what means it might best +be conveyed to their boats, and, doubtless, it +was not easy for Drake (who, considering their +distance from the shore, and the number of their +enemies, was afraid of being intercepted in their +retreat) to hinder his men from encumbering +themselves with so much silver as might have +retarded their march, and obstructed the use of +their weapons: however, by promising to lead +them to the King’s treasury, where there were +gold and jewels to a far greater value, and where +the plunder was not only more portable, but +nearer the shore, he persuaded them to follow +him (not, however, without every man his bar), +and rejoin the main body in the market-place. +Here he found his little troop much discouraged +by the apprehension that, if they stayed any +longer, the enemy might gain possession of their +pinnaces, and that they should then, without +any means of safety, be left to stand alone +against the whole force of that country. Drake, +not indeed easily terrified, but sufficiently cautious, +sent to the harbour to examine the ground +of their fears, and to learn if the same panic +had taken possession of the men whom he had +left to guard his boats; but, finding no foundation +for these dreadful apprehensions, he persisted +in his first design, and led the troop forward +to the royal treasury. In their way there +fell a violent shower of rain, which wet some +of their bow-strings, and extinguished many of +<span class='pagenum'>14</span>their matches (spring-locks for muskets not being +then invented); a misfortune which might +soon have been repaired, and which, perhaps, +the enemy might suffer in common with them; +but which, however, on this occasion, very +much embarrassed them, as the delay produced +by it repressed that ardour which, sometimes, is +only to be kept up by continued action. +</p> +<p> +It was in vain for Drake to expostulate, or to +represent the disgrace of returning in rags, after +having the chief treasure of the world within +their power; he therefore reproached their cowardice, +set before their eyes the imminent danger +to which they would inevitably be exposed, +if they failed to behave like men anxious for +glory, and zealous for the honour of their +country. Animated by these incentives, they +resumed their former spirit, and, pushing briskly +forward, the whole company followed till they +arrived at the treasury, which they instantly +forced. Having thus far succeeded, Drake +committed the care of the riches to his brother, +and Oxenham, of Plymouth<a href='#fn_1' id='fnb_1' class='fn_anchor'>[1]</a>, (a man known +<span class='pagenum'>15</span>afterwards for his bold adventures in the same +parts) while he, with the main body, should +again return and reconnoitre the market-place, +and disperse any parties of the Spaniards that +might be forming into a body to oppose their +progress. With this view, as he was advancing, +his strength suddenly failed him, and he fell +down speechless. +</p> +<div class='footnote' id='fn_1'> +<p> +<a href='#fnb_1'>[1]</a> This man made himself remarkable by one of the +boldest undertakings that ever was devised. As soon as he +arrived in England, with the prize-money acquired in this +expedition, he purchased a bark of 140 tons, and manned +it with 70 brave seamen; with these he sailed to the Isthmus +of Darien, and, laying his bark up in a creek, marched +cross the neck of land which separates the North Sea from +the great Pacific Ocean, where he arrived, with his companions, +without being discovered; and, having there seized +a ship for their purpose, they ranged the coast, and made +themselves masters of an immense treasure; but, falling out +among themselves, they separated; and, thus weakened, +they became an easy prey to the Spaniards, who recovered +their treasure; and Oxenham being taken, with those that +continued with him, and having no commission to produce, +both he and his companions were executed as pirates. +When they parted, they had in their possession two ships +laden with gold, to the amount of half a million sterling. +</p> +</div> +<p> +Then it was that his companions perceived a +wound in his leg, that he received in the first +encounter, but hitherto concealed, lest his men, +easily discouraged, should make their concern +for his life a pretence for returning to their +boats. Such, however, had been his loss of +blood, as was discovered upon nearer observation, +that it had filled the prints of his foot-steps; +and it appeared scarce credible, that, +after such an effusion, life should remain. The +bravest were now willing to retire; neither desire +of honour, or of riches, was thought to +prevail in any man over his regard for his +leader. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>16</span>Drake, whom cordials soon restored to his +senses, was the only man who could not be +prevailed on to leave the enterprize unfinished. +It was to no purpose that they advised him to +submit to go on board to have his wound dressed, +and promised to return with him to compleat +their design. He well knew how impracticable +it was to regain the opportunity when it was +once lost, and could easily foresee that a respite +of but a few hours would enable the Spaniards +to recover from their consternation, to assemble +their forces, refit their batteries, and remove +their treasure. What he had undergone so +much danger to obtain, was now in his hands, +and the thoughts of leaving it untouched was +too mortifying to be patiently borne; however, +as there was little time for consultation, and +the same danger attended their stay in that +perplexity and confusion, as their return, they +bound up his wound with his scarf, and, partly +by force, partly by intreaty, they carried him +back to the boats, in which, with what treasure +they were able to bring off, they all embarked +by break of day. Then taking with them, +out of the harbour, a sloop laden with wines, +they went to the Bastimento’s, an island about a +league from the town, where they staid two +days, to recover the wounded men who had +been hurt in the first rencounter, and to regale +themselves with the wines they had taken, and +with the fruits that grew in great plenty in the +gardens of that island. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>17</span>During their stay here, there came over to +that island a Spanish gentleman, sent by the +Governor with instructions to inquire whether +the Captain was that Drake who had before +been on their coast; whether the arrows with +which many of their men were wounded were +not poisoned; and whether they wanted provisions +or other necessaries? The messenger, likewise, +extolled their courage with the highest +encomiums, and expressed his admiration of +their daring undertaking. Drake, though he +knew the civilities of an enemy are always to +be suspected, and that the messenger, amidst all +his professions of regard, was no other than a +spy, yet knowing that he had nothing to apprehend, +treated him with the highest honours that +his condition admitted of. In answer to his inquiries, +he assured him, that he was the same +Drake with whose character they were before +acquainted; that he was a rigid observer of the +laws of war, and that he never permitted the +arrows discharged by his followers to be poisoned. +He dismissed him with considerable presents +and told him, that, though he had in +part failed in this attempt, he would never desist +from his design of revenging the treachery +of the Viceroy of Mexico, till he had shared +with Spain the treasures of America. +</p> +<p> +He then resolved to return to the Isle of +Pines, where they had left their ships, and to +consult about the measures they were now to +take; and, having arrived on the 1st of August +<span class='pagenum'>18</span>at their former station, they dismissed Captain +Rause, who, judging it unsafe to stay any longer +on the coast, desired to be no farther engaged +in their designs. But Drake, not to be diverted +from his purpose, after being cured of his +wound, inquired of a negroe, whom he took +on board at Nombre de Dios, the most wealthy +settlements, and weakest parts of the coast, +who advised the attack of Carthagena. This the +Admiral seemed to approve; and, setting sail +without loss of time, came to anchor, Aug. 13, +between Charecha and St. Barnard’s, two islands +at a little distance from the harbour of Carthagena. +Then passing with his boats round the +island, he entered the harbour, and in the mouth +of it found a frigate with only an old man in it, +who voluntarily informed him, that, about an +hour before a pinnace had passed by, with sails +and oars, and all the appearance of expedition +and importance; that, as she passed, the crew +on board her bid him take care of himself; +and that, as soon as she touched the shore, he +heard the noise of cannon, fired as a warning, +and saw the shipping of the port drawn up under +the guns of the castle. The Captain, who +had himself heard the discharge of the artillery, +was soon convinced that he was discovered; +and that, therefore, nothing could be attempted +there with any probability of success. He therefore +contented himself with taking a ship of Seville, +of 240 tons (which the relator of this voyage +mentions as a very large ship), and two small +<span class='pagenum'>19</span>frigates, in which he found letters of advice +from Nombre de Dios, intended to alarm that +part of the coast. +</p> +<p> +Drake, now finding his pinnaces of great use, +and not having a sufficient number of sailors +for all his vessels, was desirous of destroying +the Swan, the ship commanded by his brother, +that the others might be better manned. This, +necessary as it was, could not easily be done +without disgusting his company; who, having +made several prosperous voyages in that vessel, +would naturally be averse to her destruction. +</p> +<p> +Drake knew that nothing but the love of +their leaders could animate his followers to encounter +such hardships as he was about to expose +them to; and, therefore, rather chose to +bring his designs to pass by artifice than by authority. +He sent for the carpenter of the Swan, +took him into his cabin, and, having first engaged +him to secrecy, ordered him in the middle +of the night, to go down into the well, and +bore three holes through the bottom, laying +something against them that might hinder the +bubbling of the water from being heard. To +this the carpenter, after some expostulation, +consented, and the next night performed his +promise. In the morning, August the 15th, +Drake, going out with his pinnace a-fishing, +rowed up to the Swan; and, having invited his +brother to partake of his diversion, inquired, +with a negligent air, why the Swan was so deep +in the water? Upon which, his brother, being +<span class='pagenum'>20</span>alarmed, sent down his steward to learn the +cause, who returned immediately, with an account +that the ship was leaky, and in danger of +sinking in a very little time. They had instantly +recourse to the pump; but, having laboured +for five hours, and gained very little upon the +water, they willingly, according to Drake’s advice, +set the vessel on fire, and went on board +the Pascha. +</p> +<p> +Finding it now necessary to lie concealed for +some time, till the Spaniards should forget their +danger, and remit their vigilance, they set sail +for the Sound of Darien, and, without approaching +the coast, that their course might not +be observed, they arrived there in six days. +</p> +<p> +This being a convenient place for their reception, +both on account of privacy, it being +out of the road of all trade, and as it was well +supplied with wood, water, wild-fowl, hogs, +deer, and all kind of provisions, he stayed here +fifteen days, to careen his vessels, and refresh +his men, who worked interchangeably, on one +day the one half, and on the next day the other +half. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th of September, Drake left his +brother with the ship at Darien, and set out +with two small vessels towards the Rio Grand, +which they reached in three days, and on the +9th of the same month were discovered by a +Spaniard from the land, who, believing them +to be his countrymen, made a signal for them +to come on shore, with which they very readily +<span class='pagenum'>21</span>complied; but he, soon finding his mistake +abandoned his plantation, where they found +great plenty of provisions, with which having +laden their vessels, they departed. +</p> +<p> +In the mean time, his brother, Captain John +Drake, went, according to the directions that +had been left him, in search of the Symerons, +or fugitive negroes, from whose assistance they +now entertained hopes of completing the success +of their voyage: and, touching upon the +main land, by means of the negroes whom they +had taken from Nombre de Dios, engaged two +of the Symerons to come on board his ship, +leaving two of his own men as hostages for their +safe return. Those men, having assured him of +the affection of their nation, appointed an interview +between Drake and their leaders. With +this appointment Drake being made acquainted, +he immediately quitted Port Plenty, so +named by the English from the great store of +provisions they had amassed at that place, and +came, by the direction of the Symerons, into a +secret bay, among beautiful islands covered +with trees, which concealed their ships from +observation, and where the channel was so narrow +and rocky that it was impossible to enter it +by night; so that there was no danger of a +sudden surprize. Here they met, and entered +into engagements, which common enemies and +common dangers preserved from violation. +But the first conversation informed the English +that their expectations were not immediately to +<span class='pagenum'>22</span>be gratified: for, upon their enquiries after the +most probable means of acquiring gold and +silver, the Symerons told them, that, had they +known sooner the chief end of their expedition, +they could easily have gratified them; but that +during the rainy season, which was now begun, +they could not recover the treasure, which they +had taken from the Spaniards, out of the rivers +in which they had concealed it. Drake, therefore, +proposing to wait in this place till the rains +were passed, built with the assistance of the +Symerons, a fort of earth and timber; and, +leaving his brother and part of his company +with the Symerons, set out with three pinnaces +towards Rio de la Hacha, being of a spirit too +active to lie still patiently, even in a state of +plenty and security, and with the most probable +expectations of immense riches. +</p> +<p> +In their way thither, they anchored within +sight of Carthagena without landing, and on +the 17th of October took a Spanish bark, with +which they entered the harbour in disguise; +but were soon accosted by a Spanish gentleman +whom they had sometime before taken +and set at liberty; who coming to them in a +boat, as he pretended, without the knowledge +of the Governor, made them great promises of +friendship, and professions of esteem. But +Drake, having waited till next morning without +receiving the information he had been encouraged +to expect, found that all this pretended +kindness was no more than a stratagem to amuse +<span class='pagenum'>23</span>him, while the Governor was raising forces for +his destruction. +</p> +<p> +This appeared more clearly on the 20th, +when two frigates, well armed and manned, +came out in the night with a view to surprize +the pinnaces, and make prisoner of Drake: +but these being discovered, and their design +frustrated, Drake, when day-light approached, +leapt intrepidly ashore single, in defiance of +their troops, which hovered at a distance in the +woods and on the hills, without ever venturing +to advance within reach of the shot from the +pinnaces. To leap, however, upon an enemy’s +coast, in sight of a superior force, only to shew +how little they were feared, was an act that in +these times would meet with little applause: +but motives of policy might influence the conduct +of Drake, and make that necessary then +which now appears a ridiculous bravado. Finding +the whole country advertised of his attempts, +and in arms to oppose him, he might make a +feint only of landing to increase their fears, and +encourage their alarms, that they might keep +together till he should assault them in their deserted +posts; a stratagem which there is reason +to think he put in practice, as he continued +upon the coast till one of his vessels had only +a gammon of bacon and a small quantity of +bread on board for seventeen men, and till +there was on board his own vessel even a greater +scarcity. But resolution and success reciprocally +produce each other. They had not sailed +<span class='pagenum'>24</span>more than three leagues on their return to their +ships before they fell in with and attacked a +coasting vessel, which after some resistance they +took, and happily found it laden with excellent +provisions. He now determined to return +to the Symerons, with whom, as has been said, +he left his brother, and part of his force; and +to attempt, by their assistance and direction, to +make his way over, and invade the Spaniards in +the inland parts, where they would probably +never dream of an enemy. +</p> +<p> +When they arrived at Port Diego, so named +from the negroe who had procured them their +intercourse with the Symerons, they found Captain +John Drake and one of his company dead, +being killed in attempting, almost unarmed, to +board a frigate well provided with all things +necessary for its defence. The Captain was unwilling +to make the attack, and represented to +his company the madness of their proposal; +but, being over-borne by their clamours and importunities, +to avoid the imputation of cowardice, +complied to his destruction. +</p> +<p> +But this was not the only misfortune that +befel this little company; for soon after many +of them fell ill of the calenture, a malignant +fever, very frequent in the hot climates, which +carried off, among several others, Joseph Drake, +another brother of the Commander. +</p> +<p> +While Drake was employed in the recovery of +the sick, the Symerons, who ranged the country +for intelligence, brought him an account that +<span class='pagenum'>25</span>the Spanish fleet was arrived at Nombre de Dios, +the truth of which was confirmed by a pinnace +which he sent out to make observations. This, +therefore, was the time for their journey, when +the treasures of the American mines were to be +transported from Panama, over land, to Nombre +de Dios. He, therefore, by the direction of the +Symerons, furnished himself with all things necessary; +and, on the third of February in the +following year, set out from Port Diego. Having +lost already twenty eight of his company, +and being under the necessity of leaving some +to guard his ship, he took with him only 18 +English and 30 Symerons, who not only served +as guards to shew the way, but as purveyors to +procure provisions. +</p> +<p> +They carried with them arrows for war, and +arrows for hunting and fowling, the heads of +which are proportioned in size to the game they +are pursuing. For oxen, stags, or wild boars, +they have arrows or javelins with heads weighing +a pound and half, which they discharge near +hand, and which scarcely ever fail of being +mortal. Their second sort are about half as +heavy as the other, and are generally shot from +their bows; these are intended for smaller +beasts. With the third sort, of which the +heads are an ounce in weight, they kill birds. +As this nation is in a state which does not set +them above continual cares for the immediate +necessaries of life, he that can temper iron +best is among them most esteemed; and, perhaps, +<span class='pagenum'>26</span>it would be happy for every nation, if honours +and applauses were as justly distributed, +and he were most distinguished whose talents +were most useful to society. +</p> +<p> +Every day by sun-rising they began to march, +and having travelled till ten, rested near some +river till twelve; then travelling again till four, +they reposed all night in huts, or wigwams, +which the Symerons had either left standing in +their former marches, or very readily erected for +them, by setting up three or four posts in the +ground, and laying poles from one to another, +in the form of a roof, which they covered with +palmetto boughs and plantain leaves. In the vallies, +where they were sheltered from the winds, +they left three or four feet next the ground open; +but, on the hills, where they were more exposed +to the chill blasts of the night, they thatched +them close to the ground, leaving only a door +for entrance, and a vent a-top in the middle for +the smoke of the fire to escape. +</p> +<p> +In their march, they met not only with plenty +of fruits upon the banks of the rivers, but with +wild swine in abundance, of which the Symerons +without difficulty killed, for the most part, as +many as were wanted. One day, however, they +found only an otter, and were about to dress it; +at which Drake expressing his wonder, was asked +by Pedro, the chief Symeron, “Are you a +man of war, and in want, and yet doubt whether +this be meat that hath blood in it?” For +which Drake in private rebuked him, says the +<span class='pagenum'>27</span>relator; whether justly or not, it is not very +important to determine; only it shews the genius +of the times when superstition prevailed, +and when the greatest men were not wholly exempt +from its influences. +</p> +<p> +On the third day of their march, and the 6th +of February, they came to a town of the Symerons, +situated on the side of a hill, and encompassed +with a ditch and a mud wall, to secure it +from any sudden surprize. Here they lived with +great neatness, and in plenty; and with some +observation of religion, paying great reverence +to the cross; a practice which, the relator says, +Drake prevailed upon them to change for the +use of the Lord’s Prayer; which, however, in so +short a stay, is very unlikely. Indeed, it is added, +that here they strongly importuned Drake +to prolong his abode, promising to double his +force; but he, either thinking greater numbers +unnecessary, or fearing, that, if any difference +should arise between them and his own men, he +should be overborne by numbers, he prudently +declined their invitation, and their offer of additional +assistance, and that in such terms as expressed +his eagerness to engage, and his confidence +of success from the bravery of his followers. +</p> +<p> +The Symerons continued to conduct him on +his journey, and led him through rural shades +and lofty woods, which sheltered his people so +effectually from the sun, that their march was +less toilsome than if they had travelled in England +during the heat of summer. Four of the +<span class='pagenum'>28</span>Symerons that were acquainted with the way, +went about a mile before the main body, and +cut off branches as marks to direct them, for +there was no beaten track; then followed +twelve Symerons, after whom came the English, +with the two leaders; and the other Symerons +closed the rear. In this order, on the 11th +of February, they arrived at the top of a very +high hill, on the summit of which grew a tree +of a wonderful height and magnitude, in which +they had cut steps for the more easy ascent to +the top, where there was a kind of alcove, to +which they invited Drake, and from thence +shewed him not only the North Sea, from +whence they came, but the great Pacific Ocean, +on which no English vessel had ever yet sailed. +This prospect exciting his natural curiosity and +ardour for adventures and discoveries, he lifted +up his hands to God, and implored his blessing +upon the resolution which he that instant formed +of sailing in an English ship on that immense +sea. +</p> +<p> +From this stupendous mountain they descended, +after having feasted their eyes with the +grandest prospect the earth can furnish; and in +two days came into an open level country, +where their march was incommoded with the +grass, which is of a peculiar kind, consisting of +a stalk like that of a bull-rush, and a blade on +which the oxen and other cattle feed till it +grows too high for them to reach: then it is +that the natives set the whole on fire; and it is +<span class='pagenum'>29</span>no uncommon thing to behold vallies of immense +extent in a blaze at once; from whence +the cattle fly in the utmost terror, and many +perish by the sudden conflagration. It might +be supposed, that this burning of the soil, would, +in a hot climate, check the powers of vegetation, +and that it would be years before the earth +could recover its fertility; but it is just the contrary; +the ashes of the reeds are hardly extinguished +before a new verdure begins to appear; +and before a month is elapsed, the whole valley, +beheld at a distance, looks as green as ever; so +astonishingly wonderful are the powers of Nature +on this happy soil! +</p> +<p> +When they had arrived within a convenient +distance of the road from Panama, they posted +themselves in a grove or wood, near which the +treasure was to be conveyed from thence to +Nombre de Dios. They then dispatched a +trusty Symeron, in the habit of a slave, properly +instructed, to learn on what day the mules, on +whose backs the treasure is carried, were to set +out. The man was so well qualified for the +service, and so industrious in the prosecution of +it, that he soon returned with an account, that +the treasurer of Lima, intending to embark for +Europe, would pass the night following with +eight mules laden with gold, and one with jewels; +that it was their custom to travel by night, +and to rest in the day, to avoid the heat; and +that Venta Cruz was to be their first stage. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>30</span>On this intelligence, they changed their situation, +and immediately directed their march +towards Venta Cruz, sending, for security, two +Symerons, habited as before, to examine the +way, who, as they passed along, perceived, by the +scent of a match, that some Spaniard was before +them and creeping silently forward, surprized +a soldier asleep upon the ground. They bound +him, without offering any other violence, and +brought him to Drake, who, upon enquiry, +found that their spy had not deceived them in +his intelligence. The soldier, having informed +himself of the Captain’s name, conceived such a +confidence in his well-known clemency, that, +after having made an ample discovery of the +treasure that was now at hand, cautioned them +likewise against being deceived by the recoes, +or carriers, from Nombre de Dios, who met the +others by the way, and who were hourly expected, +with merchandize and provisions, but +without any gold. He closed his examination +with an humble petition to Drake, that, when the +expected treasure should fall into his hands, he +would be graciously pleased to allow him as much +of it as would maintain himself and his children +during the remainder of their lives, since there +would abundantly more arrive than he and his +company could carry away. Drake agreed to +his request, upon condition that he led him to +a place of secrecy, where he could conceal his +men till the time of action, and where there was +no danger of the mules passing by without being +<span class='pagenum'>31</span>perceived. This the man did; and Drake +placed his ambush accordingly. +</p> +<p> +Before the time expected, the men were properly +refreshed and instructed. Oxenham was +appointed to head the Symerons, assisted by +Pedro their leader; and Drake was to command +the English. The parties were then divided; +the English took the right of the way in front, +and the Symerons the left at a small distance +in the rear. In this manner they were posted, +that one company might be in readiness to seize +the hindmost mule at the same time that the +other had seized the foremost; for the mules, it +seems, being tied together, travel in a line, and +are all guided by leading the first. +</p> +<p> +Every thing being now as well concerted as +human prudence could direct, and the critical +moment of action soon expected, they lay down +and covered themselves in the grass, at about +eighty or ninety paces distance from the road, +that the noise of their breathing might not be +heard by the guard that conveyed the treasure. +</p> +<p> +They had not been more than an hour in this +situation, when the bells of the mules on the left, +coming from Venta Cruz, began to be heard: +but previous orders having been given to meddle +only with those from Panama, those from Venta +Cruz were suffered to pass unmolested. Unfortunately, +however, it happened, that one +Robert Pike, being heated with liquor, prevailed +upon the man that was next him to +creep forward with him, in order to be in readiness +<span class='pagenum'>32</span>to signalize themselves, by being the first +to seize the mules from Panama. At that instant, +an officer, who accompanied the recoes +from Venta Cruz, perceiving something white +moving in the grass (for Drake had ordered +all his company to put their shirts over their +clothes, to distinguish them in the night), took +the alarm, and, from a walk, was observed to +push his horse forward on a smart trot; and, +before he had passed the hindmost ambuscade, +he was heard to ride along in a full gallop; but +neither Drake, who commanded the English, +nor Oxenham, who headed the Symerons, being +apprized of the reason, had any thought of taking +measures to intercept his journey. +</p> +<p> +It was not, however, long before the recoes +from Panama came up, and were eagerly seized +by the English in front, and secured by the +Symerons, as had been agreed upon, in the +rear but, to their great mortification, they +found two of them only loaded with silver, and +the rest with provisions, six of those from Panama, +which carried the valuable burdens of +gold and jewels, being ordered back, and the like +number that came from Venta Cruz sent forward +in their room. The drivers were brought +immediately to the Captain, and examined, who +informed him, that a horseman who met them +riding in haste had talked with the treasurer, +and advised him to send back his gold and +jewels, and suffer those only to proceed that +were now in his [Drake’s] power, that he might, +<span class='pagenum'>33</span>by that cheap experiment, discover whether there +was any ambush in the way. +</p> +<p> +That Drake was not less enraged than his +followers at this disappointment cannot be +doubted; but there was now no time to be spent +in complaints. The whole country, he knew, +would soon be alarmed, and all the force of the +Spaniards assembled to overwhelm him; he had +no fortress to retire to; every man was his enemy; +and every road better known to the Spaniards +than to himself. This was an occasion +that demanded all the qualities of an hero, an +intrepidity never to be shaken, and a judgment +never to be perplexed. He immediately considered +all the circumstances of his present situation, +and found that it afforded him only the +choice of marching back by the same way +through which he came, or forcing his passage +through Venta Cruz. He foresaw many difficulties +in marching back, besides the hazard of +having his ships seized before his return; he, +therefore, determined to pass forwards to Venta +Cruz, before the enemy could be prepared to +oppose him. He asked Pedro, the leader of the +Symerons, whether he was resolved to follow +him? and, having received from him the +strongest assurance that nothing should separate +them, commanded his men to refresh themselves, +and prepare to set forwards. When they +came to the gates of the town, they dismissed +the mules they had made use of to carry their +prize, and continued their march with as little +<span class='pagenum'>34</span>noise as possible; yet they discovered that the +alarm had been spread, and the forces of the +town hastily drawn together, to oppose their +entrance. Drake, who was not unacquainted +with the behaviour of that kind of military, received +their first onset, and then breaking in +upon them, drove them before him without +farther opposition, and was seconded by the +Symerons, who could not be restrained from +making plunder of the town: but Drake hastened +in person to the Spanish ladies, and assured +them that no injuries should be offered to +them; so inseparable is humanity from true +courage. +</p> +<p> +Having thus broken the spirits, and scattered +the forces of the Spaniards, he continued his +march to the ships without any apprehension of +danger, yet with great speed, being very solicitous +about the state of the crew; so that he allowed +his men, harrassed as they were, but little +time for sleep or refreshment; but by kind exhortations, +gentle authority, and a chearful participation +of all their hardships, prevailed upon +them to bear without murmur, not only the +toil of travelling, but, on some days, the pain of +hunger. In this march, he owed much of his +expedition to the assistance of the Symerons, +who, being accustomed to the climate, and naturally +robust, when any of the English fainted +by the way, two of them would carry him between +them for miles together. Nor was their +valour less than their humanity, after they had +<span class='pagenum'>35</span>learned from their English companions to dispise +the fire-arms of the Spaniards. +</p> +<p> +When they were within five leagues of the +ships, they found a town built in their absence +by the Symerons, at which Drake consented to +halt, sending a Symeron to the ships with his +gold toothpick as a token, which, though the +master knew it, was not sufficient to gain the +messenger credit, till, upon examination, he +found that the Captain, having ordered him to +regard no message without his hand-writing, +had engraven his name upon it with the point +of his knife; he then sent the pinnace up the +river, which they met, and afterwards sent to +the town for those whose weariness had made +them unable to march farther. +</p> +<p> +On February the 23d, the whole company +was re-united and Drake, whose good or ill +success never prevailed over his piety, celebrated +their meeting with thanks to God. +</p> +<p> +Drake, not yet discouraged, soon turned his +thoughts to new projects; and, without languishing +in melancholy reflections upon past +miscarriages, employed himself in forming +schemes for repairing them. Eager of action, +and acquainted with man’s nature, he never +suffered idleness to infect his followers with +cowardice; but kept them from sinking under +any disappointment, by directing their attention +to some new enterprize. +</p> +<p> +Upon consultation with his own men, and the +Symerons, he found them divided in their opinions; +<span class='pagenum'>36</span>some declaring, that, before they engaged +in any new attempt, it was necessary to increase +their stores of provisions; and others +urging that the ships, in which the Spanish treasure +was embarked, should be immediately attempted. +The Symerons proposed a third plan, +and advised them to undertake another journey +over-land, to the house of one Pezoro, near Veragua, +whose slaves brought him every day +more than 200 pounds sterling from the mines, +which he heaped together in a strong stone +house, that might, by the help of the English, +be easily forced. But Drake, being unwilling +to fatigue his followers with another journey +over land, determined to steer a middle course +between these variable opinions; and, manning +his two pinnaces, the Bear and the Minion, he +sent John Oxenham in the Bear towards Tolu, +to seek provisions; and went himself in the +Minion to the Cabezes, to endeavour to intercept +the treasure that was to be transported +from Veragua and that coast, to the fleet at +Nombre de Dios; first dismissing with presents +those Symerons who desired to return to their +wives, and ordering those that chose to remain +with him to be kindly entertained. Drake +took at the Cabezes a frigate of Veragua, the +pilot of which informed him, that there was in +the harbour of Veragua a ship freighted with +more than a million of gold; to which he offered +to conduct him, being well acquainted +with the soundings, if he might be allowed his +<span class='pagenum'>37</span>share of the prize; so much was his avarice superior +to his honesty. +</p> +<p> +Drake, after some deliberation, complying +with the pilot’s conditions, sailed towards the +harbour; but had no sooner entered the mouth +of it than he heard the report of artillery, which +was answered by others at a greater distance; +upon which the pilot told them that they were +discovered, this being the signal appointed by +the Governor to alarm the coast. +</p> +<p> +Drake now thought it convenient to return +to the ships, that he might enquire the success +of the other pinnace, which he found with a +frigate that she had taken with twenty-eight fat +hogs, 200 hens, and a great store of maize or +Indian corn. The vessel itself was so strong and +well-built, that he fitted it for war, determining +to make a second attempt on Nombre de Dios. +</p> +<p> +On March the 21st, he set sail with the new +frigate and the Bear towards the Cabezes, at +which he arrived in little more than two days, +and found there one Totu, a Frenchman, with a +ship of war. Having supplied his ship with water, +and other articles of which he was in want, the +Captain desired to join the Admiral in his new +attempt, to which Drake consented, and admitted +him to accompany him with 20 of his men, +stipulating to allow them a proportionable share +of whatever booty they should acquire: yet they +were not without some suspicions of danger from +this new ally, he having eighty men, and they +being now reduced to thirty-one. Manning, +<span class='pagenum'>38</span>however, the pinnaces, they set sail for Rio +Francisco, at which place they arrived on the +29th of March. Here they landed; and, having +dismissed their pinnaces for fear of discovery, +and ordered them to repair to the same +place on the 4th day following, they began their +march through the woods towards Nombre de +Dios, and continued it with such silence and regularity +as surprized the French, who did not +imagine the Symerons so discreet and obedient +to command as they appeared to be, and were +therefore in perpetual anxiety about the fidelity +of their guides: nor did the Symerons treat the +Frenchmen with that submission and regard +which they paid to the English, whose bravery +and conduct they had already tried. At length, +after a laborious march of more than seven +leagues, they began to hear the hammers of the +carpenters in the bay, it being the custom in +that hot season to work in the night, and to rest +in the day; and, in a short time, they perceived +the approach of the recoes, or droves of mules, +from Panama. They now no longer doubted +that their labour would be rewarded, and every +man imagined himself secure from poverty +for the remaining part of his life; they, +therefore, when the mules came up, rushed out, +and seized them with an alacrity proportioned +to their expectations. The three droves consisted +of one hundred and nine mules, each of +which carried 300 pounds weight of silver. It +was to little purpose that the soldiers, ordered +<span class='pagenum'>39</span>to convoy the treasure, attempted resistance. +After a short combat, in which the French Captain +and one of the Symerons were wounded, it +appeared with how much greater ardour men +are animated by interest than fidelity. +</p> +<p> +As it was possible for them to carry away but +a small part of this treasure, after having wearied +themselves with hiding it in the thickets, they +determined to return by the same way they +came; and, without being pursued, they traversed +the woods, where the French Captain, +being disabled by his wound, was obliged to +stay, two of his company continuing with him. +When they had gone forward about two +leagues, the Frenchmen missed another of their +company, who, upon enquiry, was known to be +intoxicated with wine, and supposed to have +lost himself in the woods by neglecting to observe +the guides; but common prudence not +allowing them to hazard the whole company by +too much solicitude for a single life, they travelled +on towards Rio Francisco, at which they +arrived on the 3d of April; and, looking out +for their pinnaces, were surprized with the sight +of seven Spanish sloops, and immediately concluded +that some intelligence of their motions +had been carried to Nombre de Dios, and that +these vessels had been fitted out to pursue +them, which might undoubtedly have overpowered +the pinnaces and their feeble crews. +Nor did their suspicions stop here; but immediately +it occurred to them, that their men +<span class='pagenum'>40</span>might be compelled by torture to discover +where their frigate and ship were stationed, +which being weakly manned, and without the +presence of the chief Commander, would fall +into their hands almost without resistance, and +all possibility of escaping be entirely cut off. +These reflections sunk the whole company into +despair; and every one, instead of endeavouring +to break through the difficulties that surrounded +him, resigned himself up to his ill fortune; +when Drake, whose intrepidity was never to be +shaken, and whole reason was never to be surprized +or embarrassed, represented to them, +that, though the Spaniards should have made +themselves masters of the pinnaces, they might +yet be hindered from discovering the ships. +He put them in mind, that the pinnaces could +not be taken, the men examined, their examinations +compared, their resolutions formed, +their vessels sent out, and the ships taken, in an +instant. Some time must necessarily be spent +before the last blow could be struck; and, if +that time were not neglectfully lost, it might be +possible for some of them to reach the ships before +the enemy, and direct them to change their +station. +</p> +<p> +They were animated with this discourse, by +which they observed that their leader was not +without hope; but, when they came to look +more narrowly into their situation, they were +unable to conceive upon what it was founded. +To pass by land was impossible, as the way lay +<span class='pagenum'>41</span>over high mountains, thick woods, and deep +rivers; they had not a single boat in their +power, so that passage by water seemed equally +impracticable. But Drake determined upon +the only means of success which their condition +afforded them; and, ordering his men to make +a raft out of the trees that were then floating in +the river, offered himself to put out to sea upon +it, and chearfully asked who would accompany +him. John Owen, John Smith, and two +Frenchmen, who were willing to share his fortune, +embarked with him on the raft, which +was fitted out with a sail made of the biscuit +sacks in which they had carried their provisions, +and formed a kind of oar to direct its course +instead of a rudder. Then, having comforted +the rest with assurances of his regard for them, +and resolution to leave nothing unattempted for +their deliverance, he put off; and, after having +with much difficulty sailed three leagues, descried +two pinnaces hasting towards him, which, +upon a nearer approach, he discovered to be his +own; and, hailing them, proposed that they +should anchor behind a point that jutted out +into the sea, while he put to shore; and, crossing +the land on foot, was received by his company +with that satisfaction which is only known +to those who have been acquainted with dangers +and distresses. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/111.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Cap<sup>t</sup>. Drake, going off to Sea on a Raft in Quest of his two Pinnaces.</i> <span class='fontp9'><i>J. June. Sc.</i></span></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +The same night they rowed silently to Rio +Francisco, where they embarked the whole +company, with what treasure they had been +<span class='pagenum'>42</span>able to bring with them through the woods; +then sailing back with the utmost expedition, +they returned to their frigate, and soon after to +their ship, where Drake divided the gold and +silver equitably between the French and English. +</p> +<p> +Here they spent fourteen days in fitting out +their frigate more completely; during which +time, the Frenchmen, with their ship, lay +among the Cabezes, while twelve English and +sixteen Symerons travelled once more into the +country, as well to recover the French Captain, +whom they had left wounded, as to bring away +the treasure which they had hid in the woods. +Drake, whom his company would not suffer to +hazard his person in another land expedition, +went with them to Rio Francisco, where he +found one of the Frenchmen who had staid to +attend their Captain, and was informed by him, +upon his enquiries after his fortune, that, half an +hour after their separation, the Spaniards came +upon them, and easily seized upon the wounded +Captain; but that his companion might have +escaped with him, had he not preferred money +to life; for seeing him throw down a box of +jewels that retarded him, he could not forbear +taking it up, and, with that and the gold which +he had already, was so loaded that he could not +escape. With regard to the bars of gold and silver +which they had concealed in the ground, he +informed them that 200 men had been employed +in searching for them. The people, however, +either mistrusting the informer’s veracity, or +<span class='pagenum'>43</span>confident that what they had hidden could not +be found, pursued their journey; but, upon their +arrival at the place, found the ground turned +up for two miles round, and were able to recover +no more than 13 bars of silver, and a small +quantity of gold. They discovered afterwards, +that the Frenchman who was left drunk in the +woods, falling into the hands of the Spaniards, +was tortured by them till he confessed where +Drake and his company had concealed their +plunder; so fatal to Drake’s expedition was the +drunkenness of his followers. +</p> +<p> +Then, dismissing the French, they passed by +Carthagena with their colours flying, and soon +after took a frigate laden with provisions and +honey, which they valued as a great restorative, +and then sailed away to the Cabezes. Here +they staid about a week to careen their vessels, +and fit them for a long voyage, determining to +set sail for England; and that the faithful Symerons +might not go away unrewarded, broke +up their pinnaces, and gave them the iron, +the most valuable present in the world to a nation +whose only employments were war and +hunting, and amongst whom show and luxury +had no place. Pedro, their Captain, being desired +by Drake to go through the ships, and to +chuse what he most desired, fixed his eye upon +a scymetar set with jewels, which the French +Captain had presented to Drake for the provisions +with which he had supplied him, and, being +unwilling to ask for so valuable a present, +<span class='pagenum'>44</span>offered for it four large quoits, or thick plates +of gold, which he had formerly concealed in the +waters; but Drake, desirous to shew him, that +fidelity seldom is without a recompence, gave it +him with the highest professions of satisfaction +and esteem. Pedro, receiving it with the utmost +gratitude, informed him, that by bestowing +it he had conferred greatness and honour +upon him; for, by presenting it to his King, he +doubted not of obtaining the highest rank +among the Symerons. He then persisted in his +resolution of giving him the gold, which was +generously thrown by Drake into the common +stock; for he said, that those at whose expences +he had been sent out, ought to share in all the +gain of the expedition, whatever pretence cavil +and chicanery might supply for the appropriation +of any part of it. Thus was Drake’s character +consistent with itself; he was equally superior +to avarice and fear; and, through whatever +danger he might go in quest of gold, he +thought it not valuable enough to be obtained +by artifice or dishonesty. +</p> +<p> +They now forsook the coast of America, +which for many months they had kept in perpetual +alarms, having taken more than 100 +vessels of all sizes between Carthagena and +Nombre de Dios, of which they never destroyed +any, unless they were fitted out against them, +nor ever detained the prisoners longer than was +necessary for their own security or concealment, +providing for them in the same manner as for +<span class='pagenum'>45</span>themselves, and protecting them from the malice +of the Symerons; a behaviour which humanity +dictates, and which, perhaps, even policy +cannot disapprove. He must, certainly, meet +with obstinate opposition who makes it equally +dangerous to yield as to resist, and who leaves +his enemies no hopes but from victory. +</p> +<p> +What riches they acquired is not particularly +related; but, it is not to be doubted, that the +plunder of so many vessels, together with the +silver seized at Nombre de Dios, must amount +to a very great sum, though the share that was +allotted to Drake was not sufficient to lull him +into effeminacy, or to repress his natural inclination +to adventures. They arrived at Plymouth +on the 9th of August, 1573, on Sunday in the +afternoon; and so much were the people delighted +with the news of their arrival, that they +left the preacher, and ran in crouds to the key +with shouts and congratulations. +</p> +<p> +Drake having, in the voyage just mentioned, +had a view of the South Sea, as has already been +related, and formed a resolution to sail upon it, +did not suffer himself to be diverted from his +design by the prospect of any difficulties that +might obstruct the attempt, nor any danger +that might attend the execution. His reputation +was sufficiently established to remove all +obstacles (for obstacles he met with), and to +obviate the motives that produced them; but it +was not till the year 1577, that he was able to +assemble a force proportioned to his design, and +<span class='pagenum'>46</span>to obtain a commission from the Queen, by +which he was constituted Captain-General of a +squadron, consisting of five vessels, of which the +Pelican, of 100 tons, was commanded by himself +as Admiral; the Elizabeth, of 80 tons, Vice-Admiral, +commanded by John Winter; the +Marygold, of 30 tons, by John Thomas; the +Swan, of 50 tons, by John Chester and the +Christopher, of 15 tons, by Thomas Moon, the +honest carpenter, who, on the former voyage, +destroyed the Swan by Drake’s direction. +</p> +<p> +These ships, equipped partly by himself, and +partly by other private adventurers, he manned +with 164 stout sailors, and furnished with such +provisions as he thought necessary for so long +and hazardous a voyage: nor did he confine his +concern to the ordinary equipment of his ships +with naval stores and military preparations, but +carried with him whatever he thought might +contribute to raise, in those nations with which +he should have intercourse, the highest ideas of +the arts and grandeur of his native country. +He, therefore, not only procured a complete +service of silver-plate for his own table, and +furnished the cook-room with many vessels of +the same metal, but engaged several musicians +to accompany him; rightly judging, that nothing +would more excite the admiration of savages, +or uncivilized people, than the powers +of music. On this occasion, however, it must +not be concealed, that he engaged his men on +the false pretence of sailing to Alexandria; and +<span class='pagenum'>47</span>that it was not till after he arrived on the coast +of Brazil, that he acquainted them with his +design of passing the Straits, and entering the +South Seas. +</p> +<p> +On the 15th of Nov. 1577, about three in +the afternoon, he sailed from Plymouth; but a +heavy storm (such as no man on board had +ever seen the like), taking him almost as soon +as out of port, forced him into Falmouth, where +he staid till the 13th of December to refit. He +then took his departure, and on the 25th of the +same month fell in with the coast of Barbary, +and on the 27th cast anchor at the island of +Mogadore, about one mile distant from the +main, between which and the isle they found +a very convenient harbour. Here he began to +build the pinnaces, the frames of which he +brought ready from Plymouth to be put together, +as in his former voyage. While the carpenters +were employed in this service, they +were discovered by the Moors that inhabit those +coasts, who sent two of their Chiefs on board +Drake’s ship, receiving at the same time two of +his company as hostages. These men he not +only treated in the most hospitable manner, but +presented them with such things as they appeared +most to admire; it being with him an established +maxim to endeavour to secure in every +country a kind reception to such Englishmen as +should come after him, by treating the inhabitants +with kindness and generosity. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>48</span>But this friendly intercourse was in appearance +soon broken; for, on the next day, observing +the Moors making signals from the +land, they sent out their boat, as before, to +fetch them to the ship; and one John Frye +leapt ashore, intending to become an hostage, as +on the former day, when immediately he was +seized by the Moors; and the crew, observing +great numbers start from behind a rock with +weapons in their hands, thought it next to madness +to attempt his rescue, and, therefore, provided +for their own security by returning to the +ship. Frye was mounted on horseback, and +immediately carried up into the country to their +King, who being then in continual expectation +of an invasion from Portugal, suspected that +these ships were sent only to reconnoitre the +coast, and discover a proper harbour for a more +formidable fleet; but, being informed who they +were, and whither they were bound, not only +dismissed his captive, but made large offers of +friendship and assistance; which Drake, however, +did not stay to receive; but being disgusted +at this breach of the laws of commerce, +and apprehending further treachery, he quitted +the coast on December 31, and on the 17th of +January arrived at Cape Blanco, having in their +passage taken several Spanish vessels, and found +one in the harbour with no men. +</p> +<p> +Here, while Drake was employing his men +in catching fish, and training them for land as +well as sea service, the natives came down to +<span class='pagenum'>49</span>the sea-side with ambergrease and other gums, +to traffic for such commodities as they then stood +most in need of, and with which Drake very +generously supplied them. +</p> +<p> +Having rifled and discharged the Spanish +ships which they had taken, they sailed on the +22d of January towards the isles of Cape Verd, +and on the 27th came to anchor before Mayo, +hoping to furnish themselves with fresh water; +but, having landed, they found the chief town +deserted; and, marching farther up the country, +saw the vallies extremely fruitful, and abounding +with ripe figs, cocoes, and plantains, but +could by no means prevail upon the inhabitants +to converse or traffic with them. However, +they were suffered by them to range the country +without molestation, but found no water, +except at such a distance from the sea, that the +labour of carrying it to their ships was greater +than it was at that time necessary for them to +undergo. Salt, had they wanted it, might have +been obtained with less trouble, being left by +the sea upon the sands, and hardened by the sun, +during the ebb, in such quantities, that the +chief traffic of this island is carried on by +means of it. Thus, though the island abounded +with goats, poultry, and delicious fruits of +various kinds, they could procure none of any +consequence, because the Portuguese, who were +then in possession of it, were prohibited all commerce +with strangers on very severe penalties. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>50</span>On the 31st of January they made St. Iago, an +island at that time divided between the natives +and the Portuguese, who, first entering these +islands under the shew of traffic, by degrees +established themselves, claimed a superiority +over the natives, and harrassed them with such +cruelty, that they obliged them either to fly to +the woods and mountains, where many of them +perished with hunger, or to take arms against +their oppressors, and, under the insuperable disadvantages +with which they contended, to die +almost without a battle. Such treatment had +the natives of St. Iago received, which had +driven them into the rocky parts of the island, +from whence they made incursions into the +plantations of the Portuguese, sometimes with +loss, but generally with that success which desperation +produces; so that the Portuguese were +in continual alarms, and lived with the natural +consequences of guilt, terror, and anxiety. +They were wealthy but not happy, and possessed +the island, but did not enjoy it. +</p> +<p> +In passing this island, the garrison of the fort +discharged three pieces of cannon at them, but +without effect. For this insult they took a Portuguese +ship laden with wines, the pilot of which +they retained, but set the rest of the crew on +shore. This man, Nuno da Silva by name, was +very useful to them in traversing the coast of +Brazil, being acquainted with the bays and harbours +where fresh water and provisions were to +be obtained. Him they continued to detain +<span class='pagenum'>51</span>captive, though they broke up his ship before +they entered the Straits, till they were about to +leave the coasts of Peru, when finding him no +longer serviceable, they set him on shore in the +Spanish settlements, from whence he afterwards +returned home, and wrote an account of the +voyage as far as he went, which is thought by +many to be very authentic. +</p> +<p> +It was soon after the capture of this ship that +a difference arose between Drake and his friend, +Mr. Thomas Doughty, which, gradually increasing, +grew into inveteracy, and terminated at last +in the death of the latter. Doughty was a gentleman +and a scholar, whom Drake had persuaded +to embark in this expedition to better his fortune +and to whom, till the incident happened +which we are about to relate, he had shewn particular +marks of favour and friendship; but trivial +beginnings are often productive of the most +important events. +</p> +<p> +The ground of the malevolence with which +Drake pursued Doughty, under the colour of +justice, has hitherto lain concealed from the +public eye; but we shall now trace it, step by +step, till the fatal period when the unhappy +victim was brought to the block, and when +Drake, by suffering revenge to triumph over +virtue, left an indelible blot upon his character, +which no panegyric can wipe away. +</p> +<p> +Among the Harleian manuscripts there is a +written account of this voyage, in which the +author has particularly had his eye on this transaction. +<span class='pagenum'>52</span>As he was an eye-witness of all that +passed, his relation will best appear in his own +words: “Captain Drake, says he, having +boarded the ship of Nuno da Sylva, and +feasted his eyes with the view of the commodities, +he committed the custody and well-ordering +of this prize unto Master Thomas +Doughty, as his good and esteemed friend, +praying him in any case to see good order +kept, and whoso should be the breaker thereof, +to give him to understand of any such +without exception of any. +</p> +<p> +“It thus chanced that General Drake had a +brother (not the wisest man in christendom), +whom he put into this said prize, as also divers +others. This Thomas Drake, as one +more greedy of prey than covetous of honesty +or credit, offered himself the first and only +man to break the General his brother’s commandment; +for he, contrary to his strict prohibition, +did not only break open a chest, but +did dive suddenly into the same, that Master +Doughty knew not how to discharge himself +against the General but by revealing it unto +him; yet first Master Doughty called Thomas +Drake unto him, and shewed him his +great folly in this behalf, who, yielding unto +his fault, prayed Master Doughty to be good +unto him, and keep it from the General; +but he briefly told him he could not keep it, +but he would deliver it with what favour he +might. So at the General’s next coming on +<span class='pagenum'>53</span>board the prize, Master Doughty opened the +same unto him, who presently falling into a +rage, not without some great oaths, seemed +to wonder what Thomas Doughty should +mean to touch his brother; and did, as it +were, assure himself that he had some farther +meaning in this, and that he meant to strike +at his credit, and he would not, or could not, +by God’s life (as he phrased it), suffer it. +From this time forth grudges did seem to +grow between them from day to day, to the +no small admiration of the rest of the company, +although some envying his former favour +and friendship with the General, and +some, I think, doubting that his capacity +would reach too far to the aggrandizing his +credit in the country, talked variously of the +matter; however, Master Doughty was put +again into the Pelican. Thus grudges, although +they had not long rested, yet were +they grown to great extremities, such and so +great as a man of any judgment would verily +think that his love towards him in England +was more in brave words than hearty good +will or friendly love.” So writes our author. +</p> +<p> +In proceeding on their voyage, they came +within sight of Fogo, an island so called from a +mountain about the middle of it continually +burning, and like the rest inhabited by the Portuguese. +Two leagues to the south of Fogo +lies Brava, which has received its name from its +fertility, abounding with all kinds of fruits, +<span class='pagenum'>54</span>and watered with great numbers of springs and +brooks, but, having neither harbour nor anchorage, +was at that time uninhabited. +</p> +<p> +Drake, having sent out his boats with plummets +to sound, was not able to find any ground +about it; and it is reported, that many experiments +of the like kind have been made without +success. However, he took in water sufficient; +and on the 2d of Feb. set sail for the coast of Brazil. +</p> +<p> +On February the 17th, he passed the equator, +after being becalmed near three weeks, during +which time they had dreadful storms of thunder +with lightning, but without any memorable accident, +till, continuing their voyage, on March 28, +one of their vessels with 28 men, and the greatest +part of the fresh water on board, was, to their +great discouragement, separated from them; +but their perplexity lasted not long, for on the +next day they discovered her, and she again +joined her associates. In their long course, +which gave them opportunities of observing +several animals, both in the air and water, at +that time very little known, nothing entertained +or surprized them more than the flying-fish, +which is nearly of the same size with a +herring, and has fins of the length of his whole +body, by the help of which, when he is pursued +by the benito (a large kind of mackarel), +as soon as he finds himself upon the point of +being taken, he springs up into the air, and flies +forward as long as his wings continue wet, moisture +being, as it seems, necessary to make them +<span class='pagenum'>55</span>pliant and moveable; and, when they become +dry and stiff, he falls down into the water, unless +some vessel intercepts him, and dips them +again for a second flight. This unhappy animal +is not only pursued by fishes in his natural +element, but attacked in the air, where he hopes +for security, by the don or spar kite, a great +bird that preys upon fish; and their species must +certainly be destroyed, were not their increase so +great, that the young fry, in one part of the +year, covers that part of the sea. +</p> +<p> +There is another fish, named the cuttle, of +which whole shoals will sometimes rise at once +out of the water, and of which a great multitude +fell into their ship. +</p> +<p> +At length, having sailed without sight of land +for 54 days, they arrived April the 5th on the +coast of Brazil. “In the mean while, you shall +hear, says our author, what befel: Master +Drake, never leaving to seek and force upon +Master Doughty, found, in the end, this opportunity +to degrade him. Whether of purpose, +or his own voluntary, it chanced John +Brown the trumpet to go aboard the Pelican, +where, for that he had been long absent, the +company offered him a hobbey, among the +which, Master Doughty putting in his hand, +said, Fellow John, you shall have in my hand, +although it be but light amongst the rest; +and so laying his hand on his buttock, which +perceived of John Trumpet, he began to swear +wounds and blood to the company to let him +<span class='pagenum'>56</span>loose, for they are not all (said he) the General’s +friends that be here; and with that turned +him to Master Doughty, and said unto +him, (as himself presently after told me in the +prize) God’s wounds, Doughty, what dost +thou mean to use this familiarity with me, +considering thou art not the General’s friend; +who answered him, What, fellow John! +what moves you to this, and to use these +words to me, that am as good and as sure a +friend to my good General as any in this +place, and I defy him that shall say the contrary. +But is the matter thus? why yet, fellow +John, I pray thee let me live until I come +into England. Thus, John Brown coming +again presently aboard the prize, had not +talked any long time with the General, but +the boat went aboard and rested not, but +presently brought Master Doughty to the +prize’s side, General Drake sitting in the +midst of his men, who hearing the boat at +the ship’s side stood up, and Master Doughty +offering to take hold of the ship to have entered, +said the General, Stay there, Thomas +Doughty, for I must send you to another +place, and with that commanded the mariners +to row him on board the fly-boat, saying +unto him, it was a place more fit for him +than that from whence he came: but Master +Doughty, although he craved to speak with +the General, could not be permitted, neither +would he hear him.” Soon after this, the +<span class='pagenum'>57</span>fly-boat here mentioned, (called the Swan,) +was separated from them by a violent storm, +“in all whose absence, says our author, the +General never ceased to inveigh against Master +Doughty, terming him a conjurer and +a witch; and, at any time when we had foul +weather, he would say that Tom. Doughty +was the occasion thereof, and that it came +out of Tom. Doughty’s capcase, and would +avouch the same with oaths.” +</p> +<p> +After the storm above-mentioned, they steered +near the land to the southward; and on the 14th +anchored under a cape, which they afterwards +called Cape Joy, because in two days the vessel +that was missing returned to them. Here they +refreshed their weary crews, and took in fresh +water; but, finding the country, though pleasant, +without inhabitants, they weighed anchor, +and, by running a little farther to the southward, +found a small harbour between a rock and the +main, where the rock breaking the force of the +sea, the ships rode at anchor with the greatest +security. On this rock they killed several seals, +keeping them for food, and found them wholesome, +though not palatable. +</p> +<p> +Their next course was directed to the great +river of Plate, in 36 deg. of south latitude; but, +not finding anchorage in that river, they sailed in +quest of a more convenient harbour, when they +were surprized by a sudden storm, in which they +again lost sight of the fly-boat. This accident +determined Drake to contract the number of his +<span class='pagenum'>58</span>ships, that he might not only avoid the inconvenience +of such frequent separations, but ease +the labour of his men, by having more hands +in each vessel. For this purpose he sailed along +the coast and on May the 13th discovered a +bay, which, though it promised fair, he durst +not enter before it was examined: he, therefore, +ordered his boat to be hoisted out, and, taking +the line into his own hand, went on sounding +the passage till he was three leagues from his +ship, when on a sudden the weather changed, +the skies blackened, the wind rose, and all the +usual forerunners of a storm began to threaten +them. Nothing was now thought of but the +means of returning to the ship; but the thickness +of the fog intercepting it from their sight, +made the attempt almost impracticable. In this +perplexity, which Drake was not more sensible +of than those whom he had left in the ships, +nothing was to be omitted, however dangerous, +that might tend to extricate them from it. Captain +Thomas, therefore, having the lightest vessel, +steered boldly into the bay, and, taking the Admiral +on board, dropt anchor, and lay out of +danger; while the rest that were in the open +sea suffered much from the tempest, and the +Mary (the Portugueze prize) was driven before +the wind. The others, as soon as the tempest +was over, discovering by the fires that were +made on shore where Drake was, repaired to +him. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>59</span>Here they met with no inhabitants, though +there were several wigwams or huts standing, +in which they found some dried fowls, and +among them ostriches, of which the thighs +were as large as those of a sheep. These birds +are too unwieldy to rise from the ground; but +with the help of their wings, or rather stumps, +they run so swiftly, that the English could never +come near enough to shoot any of them. +</p> +<p> +Not finding this harbour convenient, or well +stored with wood and water, they left it on the +15th of May, and on the 18th entered another +much safer and more commodious, which they +no sooner arrived at, than Drake sent Winter to +the southward in search of those ships that were +absent, and immediately after sailed himself to +the northward, and happily meeting with the +Swan, conducted her to the rest of the fleet; +after which, in pursuance of his former resolution, +he ordered her to be broken up, preserving +the iron work for a future supply. The +other vessel which was separated in the late +storm, could not be discovered. While they +were thus employed upon an island about a +mile from the main land, to which, at low water, +there was a passage on foot, they were discovered +by the natives, who appeared upon a +hill at a distance, dancing, and holding up their +hands, as beckoning to the English to come to +them, which Drake observing, sent out a boat +with knives, bells, and bugles, and such things +as by their usefulness or novelty he imagined +<span class='pagenum'>60</span>would be agreeable. As soon as the English +landed, they observed two men running towards +them as deputed by the company, who came +within a little distance, and then standing still, +could not be prevailed upon to come nearer. +The English, therefore, tied their presents to a +pole, which they fixed in the ground, and then +retiring, saw the Indians advance, who taking +what they found upon the pole, left in return +such feathers as they wore upon their heads, +with a small bone about six inches in length, +carved round the top and burnished. Drake +observing their inclination to friendship and +traffic, advanced with some of his company towards +the hill, upon sight of whom the Indians +ranged themselves in a line from east to west, +and one of them running from one end of the +rank to the other, backwards and forwards, +bowed himself towards the rising and setting of +the sun, holding his hands over his head, and, +frequently stopping in the middle of the rank, +leaped up towards the moon, which then shone +directly over their heads thus calling the sun +and moon, the deities they worship, to witness +to the sincerity of their professions of peace +and friendship. While this ceremony was performing, +Drake and his company ascended the +hill, to the apparent terror of the Indians, whose +apprehensions when the English perceived, they +peaceably retired, which gave the natives so +much encouragement, that they came forward +immediately, and exchanged their arrows, feathers, +<span class='pagenum'>61</span>and bones, for such trifles as were offered +them. Thus they traded for some time but +by frequent intercourse, finding that no violence +was intended, they became familiar, and mingled +with the English without the least distrust. +They go quite naked, except the skin of some +animals, which they throw over their shoulders +when they walk or lie in the open air. They +roll up their hair, which is very long, with a +plume of ostrich’s feathers, and usually stick +their arrows in it, that they may not encumber +them, they being made with reeds headed with +flint, and therefore not heavy. Their bows are +about an ell long. Their chief ornament is +paint, which they use of several kinds, delineating +generally upon their bodies the figures of +the sun and moon in honour of their deities. +</p> +<p> +It is observable, that the inhabitants of most +nations amongst whom the use of cloaths is unknown, +paint their bodies. Such was the +practice of the inhabitants of our own country. +To this custom did our earliest enemies, the +Picts, owe their denomination. As it is not +probable that caprice or fancy should be uniform, +there must be doubtless some reason for a +practice so general, and prevailing in distant +parts of the world which have no communication +with each other. The original end of +painting their bodies was probably to exclude +the cold; an end, which, if we believe some relations, +is so effectually produced by it, that the +men thus painted never shiver at the most piercing +<span class='pagenum'>62</span>blasts: but, doubtless, any people so hardened +by continual severities, would, even without +paint, be less sensible of the cold than the civilized +inhabitants of the same climate. However, +this practice may contribute in some degree +to defend them from the injuries of winter, +and, in those climates where little evaporates +by the pores, may be used with no great inconvenience: +but in hot countries, where perspiration +in a greater degree is necessary, the natives +only use unction to preserve them from the +other extreme of weather, or, more probably, +from the inconvenience of the flies, which, were +it not for that or some such defence, would be +intolerable. +</p> +<p> +These savages had no canoes, like the other +Indians, nor any method of crossing the water; +which was probably the reason why the birds in +the adjacent islands were so tame that they +might be taken with the hand, having never +been before frighted or molested. The birds +here spoken of are, without doubt, the penguins +of which so ample a description is given in the +Voyages of Byron and Wallis. The great plenty +of these fowls, and of the seals that were found +every-where on the shores of this coast, contributed +much to the refreshment of the English, +who named the bay where they then lay, Seal-bay, +from the number they there killed of those +animals. +</p> +<p> +These seals seem to be the chief food of the +natives; for the English often found raw pieces +<span class='pagenum'>63</span>of their flesh half eaten, and left, as they supposed, +after a full meal, by the savages, whom +they never knew to make use of fire, or any art +in dressing or preparing their victuals. Nor were +their other customs less wild or uncouth than +their way of feeding. One of them, having received +a cap off the General’s head, and being +extremely pleased as well with the honour as +the gift, to express his gratitude, retired to a +little distance, and thrusting an arrow into his +leg, let the blood run upon the ground, testifying, +as it is probable, that he was ready to shed +his blood in his defence. +</p> +<p> +When the Swan fly-boat was separated from +the fleet in the storm off the coast of Brazil, the +crew, despairing of ever being able to rejoin it, +began to be in fear for provisions. They were +on a desart coast, had no place of rendezvous, +and were ignorant even of their place of destination. +In this untoward situation a dispute +arose among the officers, of which the author of +the manuscript before cited, gives the following +relation:⁠—He had already taken notice that +Master Thomas Doughty had been sent on +board this vessel as a kind of punishment, and +in truth so it proved; for the master of the vessel, +who seems also to have been the purser, +knowing upon what terms he stood with Drake, +took every occasion to insult, or, as our author’s +phrase is, to discredit him; for those were always +ranked among Drake’s friends who were +enemies to Master Doughty. “This man, +<span class='pagenum'>64</span>foreseeing that provisions might run short, +put himself from the mess of Master Doughty, +Captain Chester, and the rest of the gentlemen, +and did set himself amongst the sailors, +nothing at all sparing, but rather augmenting +his own diet; but how scantily those gentlemen +did fare, there be some come home, that, +except they will deny their own words, can +make relation thereof. +</p> +<p> +“Master Doughty, with Master Chester, whom +the General had made Captain of the fly-boat, +found themselves so ill used, that Master +Doughty accosted his friend one day in these +words: I marvel, Master Chester, that you +will take it at his hands to be thus used, considering +that you were here authorized by the +General to be our Commander. And, at the +same time, he spoke to the Master, and told +him, that he used so much partiality in the +distribution of his provisions, that the same +could not be borne, considering the extremity +they were like to fall into for want of victuals; +and that it was against reason that he and his +messmates should be so plentifully fed, while +others were at the point to starve. The Master +hereat putting himself in a rage, swore that +such rascals as he was should be glad to eat +the shoals (husks) when he would have them. +Master Doughty answered him again, that +reason would will that he should be used as +well as other men, considering his advantages. +Thou any advantage here! replied the Master, +<span class='pagenum'>65</span>I would not give a point for thee nor +thy advantages; and if ever thou comest home +to enjoy any advantages, I will be trussed up. +Then in multiplying words, and as I heard +a blow or two passing between them, the Master, +in the spleen of his heart, looking at him +with an evil eye, Thou! will thou have victuals! +thou shalt be glad, if we do not meet +with the General, the rather to eat that falls +from my tail on the anchor-fluke ere thou +gettest home again. Then Master Doughty, +turning to Master Chester, said unto him, +Master Chester, let us not be thus used at +this knave’s hands. Lose nothing of that authority +that the General committed unto you. +If you will, we will put the sword into your +hands again, and you shall have the government. +This case I will aver to be true, for +there were two or three witnesses sworn to +these articles, as some of the special matter +that he had to lose his head for.” +</p> +<p> +It was not many days after this quarrel before +the Swan fell in again with the fleet; when +Drake, as has been said, caused her to be hauled +on shore, set on fire, and burnt; or, as others +say, broke up and converted into fire-wood for +the use of the fleet. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Doughty, being here delivered from the +fly-boat, was again restored to the Pelican, where +the master with whom he had the dispute appears +to have preferred a complaint against him, +and with such aggravations as he thought proper +<span class='pagenum'>66</span>to add; all which were favourably heard, +and credit given to the whole relation by the +General, who wanted only a pretence to persevere +in his severity to the man who, being +once his favourite, was now become the object +of his most inveterate hatred. Doughty, provoked, +no doubt, by the misrepresentations of +the master, and the partiality with which they +were heard, gave the General some opprobrious, +language, adding, “that the lightest word that +came out of his (Doughty’s) mouth was to be +believed as soon as the General’s oath. +Whereupon the General did not only strike +him, but commanded him to be bound to the +mast; for the accomplishment of which, the +master of the fly-boat took no little pains. +This happened as the two ships (the Pelican +and the Canter) lay together; and as soon as +Doughty was released, he was put into the +Canter, although greatly against his will, for +that he said he knew them to be there that +sought his life, as namely the master of the +fly-boat, and some other desperate and unhonest +people; but would he or no, thither +he must, or else the General swore he would +lift him out with the tackle, and for that +purpose commanded the tackle to be loosed. +Thus aboard the Canter he went, and his +brother John Doughty with him.” The +Canter was a vessel taken from the Spaniards +on the coast of Africa. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>67</span>While they lay in this harbour, there is one +remarkable incident related by this author that +deserves particular notice, as it tends to illustrate +the previous steps that were pursued to accomplish +the ruin of this unfortunate gentleman. +</p> +<p> +“On board the fly-boat, says he, was one, +Thomas Cuttle, who some time had been +Captain of the Pelican under Drake, with +whom the General had been tampering. +This man came out from him in great wrath, +and offering to go over to the main, between +the which, and the island where they then lay, +was (as has been said) but a shallow water. +He, standing well nigh up to the middle in +the water with his piece, uttered these words, +Well, my Masters, quoth he, I find I am +heavily borne with here, because I will not +accuse this gentleman (meaning Doughty) of +that, as I take God to witness, I know not by +him; and, therefore, I declare before you all, +that, whatsoever becomes of me, I never knew +any thing by him but to be the General’s +friend; and, rather than I will bide this hard +countenance at the General’s hands, I will +yield myself into cannibal’s hands; and so I +pray you all to pray for me.” +</p> +<p> +After this public declaration the man departed; +and, having reached the opposite shore, he +went up into the country, where firing his piece +to bring the natives to him, Drake taking it for +a signal that he wanted to return, sent a boat +over to the main, and brought him back. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>68</span>Just before their departure from this harbour, +which lay in a bay a little to the southward of +Cape Hope, “Captain Drake himself came on +board the Elizabeth, and calling all the company +together, told them, that he was to send +thither a couple of men, the which he did +not know how to carry along with him this +voyage, and go through therewithal, as namely, +quoth he, Thomas Doughty, who is a commotioner +and a seditious fellow, and a very bad +and lewd fellow, and one that I have made that +reckoning of as of my left hand; and his brother +the young Doughty, a witch, a poisoner, +and such a one as the world cannot judge +of, having his knowledge from the devil; +and so warning the company that none should +speak to them, nor use any conference with +them; if they did, he would hold them as +his enemies, and enemies to the voyage. +And he willed that great care should be taken +that they should neither write nor read; and +then he declared what wealth the worst boy +in the fleet should get by this voyage, and +how the worst boy should never need to go +again to sea, but should be able to live in +England with a right good gentleman; for, +quoth he, you shall see that we will have +gold come as plentiful as wood into the ships. +Having finished his speech, he departed, and +shortly after sent the said Thomas Doughty +and his brother aboard the Elizabeth, commanding +them, as they would answer it with +<span class='pagenum'>69</span>their lives, not to set pen to paper, nor yet to +read but what every man might understand +and see. And sure, adds our author, their +entertainment there was accordingly; for +men durst not speak to them, although willingly +perhaps they would; and as their fare +was with the simplest in the ship, so was their +lodging. But he, Thomas Doughty, having +agreed with the boatswain of the ship for a +cabin which stood, God knows, in an uncomfortable +room, yet must he pay 3 l. for the +same in England. But what came of this to +the poor fellow! he was fain for his friendly +using him to lose his office, and continue in +heavy displeasure.” +</p> +<p> +Having staid fifteen days in the harbour, +during which time they continued their friendly +intercourse with the savages, on June the 3d +they set sail towards the South Sea, and six days +afterwards stopt at a little bay to break up the +Christopher, which from the smallness of its +size was found incapable of living in those boisterous +seas, of which, before they entered them, +they had conceived no adequate idea. Then +passing on, they found it necessary to call anchor +in another bay, with a view to recover the Portuguese +prize, which was separated from them in +the storm of the 27th of April, and had not yet +rejoined them. To return in search of it was +sufficiently mortifying; to proceed without it, +was not only to deprive themselves of a considerable +part of their force, but to expose their +<span class='pagenum'>70</span>friends and companions, who had voluntarily +embarked on board her, to certain death or +certain captivity. This consideration prevailed; +and, therefore, on the 18th, after prayers +to God, with which Drake (for example’s sake) +never forgot to begin an enterprize, he put to +sea, and the next day near Port Julian discovered +their associates, whose ship was now grown leaky, +having suffered much in the first storm by which +they were separated, and afterwards in the fruitless +attempts to regain the fleet. Drake, therefore, +being desirous to relieve their fatigues, entered +Port Julian. They no sooner landed than +they were accosted by two of the natives, of +whom Magellan left a very terrible account, +having described them as a nation of giants and +monsters: nor did they find his narrative entirely +without foundation; for the least of those they +saw was larger and taller than the largest of +their company. The two who accosted the +English appeared much pleased with their new +guests, received willingly whatever was given +them, and very exactly observed every thing +that passed, seeming more particularly delighted +with seeing Oliver, the master-gunner, shoot an +English arrow. They shot themselves likewise +in emulation, but their arrows always fell to the +ground far short of his. +</p> +<p> +Soon after this friendly contest came another, +who, observing the familiarity of his countrymen +with the strangers, appeared much displeased; +and, as the Englishmen perceived, endeavoured +<span class='pagenum'>71</span>to persuade them from such an intercourse. +What effect his arguments had was +soon after apparent; for another of Drake’s +companions, being desirous to shew the third +Indian a specimen of the English valour and +dexterity, attempted likewise to shoot an arrow; +but, drawing it with his full force, burst the +bow-string: upon which, the Indians, who were +unacquainted with their other weapons, imagining +them disarmed, followed the company as they +were walking negligently down towards their +boat, and let fly their arrows, aiming particularly +at Winter, who had the bow in his hand. He, +finding himself wounded in the shoulder, endeavoured +to refit his bow; and, turning about, +was pierced with a second arrow in the breast. +Oliver, the gunner, immediately presented his +piece at the insidious assailants, which failing to +take fire, gave them time to level another flight +of arrows, by which he was killed; nor, perhaps, +had any of them escaped, surprized and +perplexed as they were, had not Drake animated +their courage, and directed their motions, ordering +them, by perpetually changing their +places, to elude as much as might be the aim +of their enemies, and to defend their bodies with +their targets; and instructing them by his own +example to pick up and break the arrows as +they fell, which they did with so much diligence +that the Indians were soon in danger of being +disarmed. Then Drake himself taking the gun, +which Oliver had so unsuccessfully attempted +<span class='pagenum'>72</span>to make use of, discharged it at the Indian that +first began the fray and had killed the gunner, +aiming it so happily that the hail-shot, with +which it was loaded, tore open his belly, and +forced him to such terrible outcries, that the +Indians, though their numbers increased, and +many of them shewed themselves from different +parts of an adjoining wood, were too much terrified +to renew the assault; and suffered Drake +without molestation to withdraw his wounded +friend, who, being hurt in his lungs, languished +two days, and then dying, was interred with his +companion with the usual ceremony of a military +funeral. +</p> +<p> +They staid here two months after this quarrel, +without receiving any other injuries from +the natives, in which time they discovered the +gibbet on which Magellan had formerly executed +some of his mutinous company, and where +“Drake, according to the writers of the Biographia +Britannica, did the least commendable +action of his life, in executing Mr. <i>John</i> +Doughty, a man next in authority to himself; +in which, however, he preserved a great +appearance of justice.” +</p> +<p> +To clear this matter fully, it will be necessary +to bring together the substance of what these +authors have said on the subject, and then to +add the plain relation from the manuscript already +quoted. +</p> +<p> +‘Here it was (at Port St. Julian), say these +writers, that on a sudden, having carried the +<span class='pagenum'>73</span>principal persons engaged in the service to a +desart island lying in the bay, he called a kind +of council of war, or rather court martial, where +he exposed his commission, by which the Queen +granted him the power of life and death, which +was delivered him with this remarkable expression +from her own mouth; <em>We do account, +that he, Drake, who strikes at thee, does strike at +us.</em> He then laid open, with great eloquence, +(for, though his education was but indifferent, +he had a wonderful power of speech) the cause +of this assembly. He proceeded next to charge +Mr. John Doughty, <em>who had been second in command, +during the whole voyage</em>, when Drake was +present, and first in his absence, with plotting +the destruction of the undertaking, and the +murder of his person. He said he had the first +notice of this gentleman’s bad intentions before +he left England; but that he was in hopes his +behaviour towards him would have extinguished +such disposition, if there had been any +truth in the information. He then appealed +for his behaviour to the whole assembly, and +to the gentleman accused. He next exposed his +practices from the time that he left England, +while he lived towards him with all the kindness +and cordiality of a brother; which charge +he supported by producing papers under his +own hand, to which Mr. Doughty added a full +and free confession. After this, the Captain, +or, as in the language of those times he is called, +the General, quitted the place, telling the +<span class='pagenum'>74</span>assembly he expected that they should pass a +verdict upon him, for he would be no judge +in his own cause. Camden, as the reader will +see, says, that he tried him by a jury; but, +other accounts affirm, that the whole forty +persons of which the court was composed, had +judged him to death, and gave this in writing +under their hands and seals, leaving the time +and manner of it to the General. Mr. Doughty +himself said, that he desired rather to die by +the hands of justice than to be his own executioner. +Upon this, Captain Drake having +maturely weighed the whole matter, presented +three points to Mr. Doughty’s choice: first, +to be executed upon the island where they +were; next, to be set on shore on the main +land; or, lastly, to be sent home to abide the +justice of his country. He desired he might +have till the next day to consider of these, +which was allowed him, and then, giving his +reasons for rejecting the two last, he declared +that he made the first his choice; and, having +received the sacrament with the General, from +the hands of Mr. Francis Fletcher, Chaplain +to the fleet, and made a full confession, his head +was cut off with an axe by the Provost-Marshal, +July the 2d, 1578. +</p> +<p> +‘As to the imputation which this matter +brought upon Drake, we will first cite what +Camden says of this transaction: “On the +26th of April, entering into the mouth of the +river of Plate, he saw an infinite number of +<span class='pagenum'>75</span>sea-calves; from thence sailing into the haven +of St. Julian he found a gibbet, set up, as it +was thought, by Magellan for the punishment +of certain mutineers. In this very place John +Doughty, an industrious and stout man, and +the next unto Drake, was called to his trial +for raising a mutiny in the fleet, found guilty +by twelve men after the English manner, and +condemned to death, which he suffered undauntedly, +being beheaded, having first received +the holy communion with Drake. +And, indeed, the most impartial persons in the +fleet were of opinion, that he had acted seditiously, +and that Drake cut him off as an +emulator of his glory, and one that regarded +not so much who he himself excelled in commendation +for sea matters, as who he thought +might equal him; yet wanted there not some +who, pretending to understand things better +than others, gave out that Drake had in +charge from Leicester to take off Doughty +upon any pretence whatever, because he had +reported that the Earl of Essex was made +away by the cunning practices of that Earl.” +</p> +<p> +‘We find this matter, add the writers just +cited, touched in several other books, and +particularly in two, which were written on +purpose to expose the Earl of Leicester, and, +perhaps, deserving the less credit for that reason. +</p> +<p> +‘It may be offered in defence of Sir Francis +Drake, that this man was openly put to death, +after as fair a trial as the circumstances of time +<span class='pagenum'>76</span>and place would permit; that he submitted +patiently to his sentence, and received the sacrament +with Drake, whom he embraced immediately +before his execution. Besides these, +there are two points that deserve particular +consideration: first, that, in such expeditions, +strict discipline, and legal severity, are often +absolutely necessary; secondly, that, as to +the Earl of Essex, for whose death Doughty +had expressed concern, he was Drake’s first +patron, and it is, therefore, very improbable +he should destroy a man for endeavouring +to detect his murderer. We may add to all +this, if liberty may be indulged to conjectures, +that this man, presuming upon the Earl of Leicester’s +favour (who very probably imposed +him upon Drake to be rid of him), was from +thence encouraged to form designs against +Drake; and this might also be the reason +which hindered him from inclining to an absolute +pardon, as doubting whether it was +possible to trust one who had so far abused his +confidence already, and whose known interest +with so great a man might always enable him +to find instruments, in case he was wicked +enough to enter upon fresh intrigues.’ +</p> +<p> +We shall just remark upon, what is above +quoted, that the authors do not seem to have +been well informed for they have all along +imputed to John Doughty what related to his +brother Thomas; and, if credit may be given to +the author of the manuscript (John Cook by +<span class='pagenum'>77</span>name), this unfortunate Thomas fell a sacrifice +to Drake’s resentment. “On this island in Port +St. Julian, says he, passed many matters, which, +I think, God would not have to be concealed, +especially for that they tended to murder; +for he (Drake) spewed out against Thomas +Doughty his venom. Here he ended all his +conceived hatred, not by courtesy and friendly +reconcilement, but by most tyrannical blood-spilling; +for he was never quiet while he lived, +who in wisdom and honest government as far +surpassed him, as he in tyranny surpassed all +men. The world never committed a fact like +unto this; for here he murdered him that, if +he had well looked unto himself, had been a +more sure and stedfast friend unto him than +ever was Pythias to his friend Damon, as I +think the sequel of this case will shew. +</p> +<p> +“The last day of June, the General himself, +being set in place of judgment, and having +the whole company brought on shore, and +having Captain John Thomas set close by +him, who opened a bundle of papers that were +rolled up together, wherein was written divers +and sundry articles, the which, before they +were read, the General spoke unto the purport +of them, and turning himself to Thomas +Doughty, who was there present, being before +brought thither more like a thief than a gentleman +of honest conversation, he began his +charge thus: Thomas Doughty, you have +here sought by divers means, in as much as +<span class='pagenum'>78</span>you may, to discredit me, to the great hinderance +and overthrow of this voyage; besides +other great matters with which I have +to charge you, the which, if you can clear +yourself of, you and I shall be very good +friends; whereof if you cannot, you have +deserved death. Master Doughty answered, +It should never be approved that he had merited +ill by undertaking any villainy towards +him. By whom, quoth the General, will you +be tried? Why, good General, said he, let +me live to come unto my country, and I will +there be tried by her Majesty’s laws. Nay, +Thomas Doughty, said he, I will here impannel +a jury on you to enquire into those +matters that I have to charge you withal. +Why, General, replied Doughty, I hope you +will see your Commission be good. I’ll warrant +you, answered the General, my Commission +is good enough. I pray you then let +us see it, said Master Doughty; it is necessary +that it should be here shewn. Well, quoth +he, you shall <em>not</em> see it. Then, addressing +himself to the company, You see, my Masters, +how this fellow is full of prating, bind me his +arms, for I will be safe of my life. My Masters, +you that be my good friends, Thomas +Good, Gregory ⁠⸺, you there, my friends, bind +him; so they took and bound his arms behind +him. Then he uttered divers furious words +unto Thomas Doughty, as charging him to +be the man that poisoned my Lord of Essex; +<span class='pagenum'>79</span>whereas Master Doughty avouched it to his +face, that he was the man that brought the +General first to the presence of my Lord in +England. Thou bring ME, quoth the General, +to my Lord! See, my Masters, see here +how he goeth about to discredit me. This +fellow with my Lord was never of any estimation. +I think he never came about him as +a gentleman; for I that was daily with my +Lord never saw him there above once, and +that was long after my entertainment with +my Lord. +</p> +<p> +“Then, in fine, was there a jury called, +whereof Master John Winter was foreman. +Then by John Thomas were the articles read +unto them, <em>even once over for a last farewel</em>, +for fear that men should have carried them +away by memory; all which appeared to +consist of words of unkindness, and to proceed +of some choler when the prisoner was +provoked, all which Doughty did not greatly +deny; until at length came in one Edward +Bright, whose honesty of life I have nothing +to do with, who said, Nay, Thomas Doughty, +we have other matter for you yet, that will a +little nearer touch you. It will i’ faith bite +you to the girskin. I pray thee, Ned Bright, +said the prisoner, charge me with nothing but +truth, and spare me not. Then John Thomas +read further for his last article to conclude +the whole withal, That Thomas Doughty +should say to Edward Bright, in Master +<span class='pagenum'>80</span>Drake’s garden, that the Queen’s Majesty +and Council would be corrupted. So Bright +holding up his finger, said, How like ye this +gare, sirrah? Why, Ned Bright, said Master +Doughty, what should induce thee thus to +belye me? thou knowest that such familiarity +was never between thee and me: but it may +be, that I have said, if we brought home gold, +we should be the better welcome; but yet +this is more than I do remember. Then it +came out, on farther evidence, that Master +Doughty should say, that my Lord Treasurer +had a plot of the present voyage. No, that +he hath not, quoth General Drake. The +other replied, that he had, and had it of him. +See, my Masters, said Drake, what this fellow +hath done. God will have his treachery all +known; for her Majesty gave me special +commandment, that of all men my Lord +Treasurer should not know it; but you see +his own mouth hath bewrayed him: so this +was a special article against him to hurt his +throat, and greatly he seemed to rejoice at +this advantage. +</p> +<p> +“Then Master Doughty offered him, if he +would permit him to live, and to answer +these objections in England, he would set his +hand to whatso was there written, or to any +thing else that he would set down. Well, +once let these men, quoth the General, first +find whether you are guilty in this or no, +and then we will talk further of the matter. +<span class='pagenum'>81</span>And then he delivered (after they had all +taken their oaths given by John Thomas) +the bills of indictment, as I may term them, +unto Mr. John Winter, who was foreman of +this inquest. Then Master Leonard Vicary, +a very assured friend of Master Thomas +Doughty’s, said unto him, General, this is +not law, nor agreeable to justice, that you +offer. I have not to do with you crafty lawyers, +neither do I care for the law; but I know +what I will do. Why, quoth Master Vicary, +who was one of his jury, I know not how we +may answer his life. Well, Master Vicary, +quoth he, you shall not have to do with his +life; let me alone with that; you are but to +find whether he be guilty in these articles that +here are objected against him, or no. Why, +very well, said Master Vicary, then there is, +I trust, no matter of death. No, no, Master +Vicary, quoth he; so with this the jury went +together, finding all to be true, without any +doubt or stop made, but only to that article +that Edward Bright had objected against +him; for it was doubted of some whether +Bright were sufficient with his only word to +cast away the life of a man. And truly it did +argue small honesty in a man to conceal +such a matter if it had been spoken in England, +and to utter it in this place where will +was law, and reason put in exile; for, an honest +subject would not have concealed such +matter, which made some doubt of an honest +<span class='pagenum'>82</span>dealing. But, to be brief, answer was made, +that Bright was a very honest man; and so +the verdict being given in, it was told to the +General, that there was doubt made of +Bright’s honesty. Why, quoth Master +Drake, I dare to swear that what Ned Bright +has said is very true (yet within a fortnight +after, the same Bright was in such disliking +with him, as he seemed to doubt his life; and +having displaced him of the Pelican, and put +him into the Marygold, he gave for reason, +that himself would be safe, and he would +put him far enough from him). Thus having +received in the verdict, he rose off the +place, and departed towards the water-side, +where, calling all the company with him, except +Master Thomas Doughty and his brother, +he there opened a certain bundle of +letters and bills, and, looking on them, said, +God’s will! I have left in my cabin that I +should especially have had (as if he had there +forgotten his Commission): but, whether he +forgot his Commission or no, he much forgot +himself, to sit as Judge without shewing that +he had any; but, truly, I think he shewed to +the uttermost what he had: for here he +shewed forth, first, letters that were written, +as he said, by Master Hankins to my Lord +of Essex for his entertainment; secondly, he +shewed letters of thanks from my Lord +of Essex unto Master Hankins, for preferring +so good a servitor unto him, and how much +<span class='pagenum'>83</span>he had pleasured him; then read he letters +that past from my Lord of Essex unto +Secretary Walsingham in his great commendation +then shewed he letters of Master +Hatton’s unto himself, tending for the acceptance +of his men John Thomas and John +Brewer, for their well usage in this voyage; +and, lastly, he read a bill of her Majesty’s +adventure of a thousand crowns (but I most +marvelled that so many noblemen and gentlemen +did leave their letters in his hands, except +it were to shew in this place for his credit). +So when he had all done, he said, Now, +my Masters, you may see whether this fellow +hath sought my discredit or no, and what +should hereby be meant but the very overthrow +of the voyage; as, first, by taking away +of my good name, and altogether discrediting +me, and then my life, which I being bereaved +of, what then will you do? You will fain +one to drink another’s blood, and so to return +again unto your own country; you will never +be able to find the way thither. And now, +my Masters, consider what a great voyage we +are like to make, the like was never made out +of England; for by the same the worst in this +fleet shall become a gentleman; and, if this +voyage go not forward, which I cannot see +how possibly it should, if this man live, what +a reproach it will be, not only unto our +country, but especially unto us, the very +simplest here may consider of. Therefore, +<span class='pagenum'>84</span>my Masters, they that think this man worthy +to die, let them with me hold up their hands; +and, they that think him not worthy to die, +hold down their hands; at the which, divers +that envied his former felicity, held up their +hands; some others, again, for fear of his favouritry, +sticked not to lift their hands, although +against their hearts; but some, again, +lifted up their hands and very hearts unto the +Lord, to deliver us of this tyrannous and cruel +tyrant; who upon the same, coming to his former +judgment-seat, pronounced him the child +of death, and persuaded him withal, that he +would by this means make him the servant of +God: and said farther, if any man could, between +this and next meeting, devise any way +that might save his life, he would hear it; and +wished himself to devise some way for his +own safeguard. Well, General, quoth he, seeing +it is come to this pass, <em>that I see you would +have me made away</em>, I pray you carry me with +you to Peru, and there set me ashore. No, +truly, Master Doughty, I cannot answer it to +her Majesty, if I should so do; but, how say +you, Thomas Doughty, if any man will warrant +me to be safe from your hands, and will +undertake to keep you sure, you shall see +what I will say unto you. Master Doughty +then calling on Master Winter, said unto him, +Master Winter, will you be so good as to undertake +this for me? Then Master Winter said +unto Master Drake, that he should be safe of +<span class='pagenum'>85</span>his person, and he would warrant him, if he +did commit him to his custody. Then Drake, +a little pausing, said, See then, my Masters, +we must thus do; we must nail him close under +the hatches, and return home again without +making any voyage, and if you will do +so, then speak your minds. Then a company +of desperate bankrupts that could not live in +their own country without the spoil of that +as others had got by the sweat of their brows, +cried, God forbid, good General! which voice +was no less attentively heard, for there needed +no spur to a willing horse. Thus, telling +Master Doughty to prepare for his death, and +having given him one whole day’s respite to +set all things in order, he rose and departed, +promising that his continual prayers to God +should not cease, that it would please God to +put it into his head how he might do him good: +but he had so often before sworn that he +would hang him, that I think at this present +he meant to do him little good. Thus Master +Doughty continuing all this night, the +next day, and the second night in his prayers, +except some small time that he used in setting +his worldly business in some way, and distributing +to such as he thought good, such things +as he then had with him, was the 2d day of +July commanded to prepare himself, and to +make ready to die. Then Master Doughty, +with a more chearful countenance than ever +he had in all his life, to the show, as one that +<span class='pagenum'>86</span>did altogether contemn life, prayed him, that, +ere he died, he might receive the sacrament; +which was not only granted, but Drake himself +offered to accompany him to the Lord’s +Table, for the which Master Doughty gave +him hearty thanks, never worse terming him +than my good Captain. Master Drake offered +him withal to make choice of his own +death, and for that he said he was a gentleman +he should but lose his head, the which +kind of death was most agreeable to his mind, +in as much as he must needs die. And, truly, +I heard say, that Master Drake offered him, +if he would, that he should be shotten to +death with a piece, and that he himself would +do that exploit, and so he should die by the +hands of a gentleman. But, in fine, they together +received the Lord’s Supper; the which, +I do ever assure myself, that he did take with +as uncorrupted a mind as ever did any innocent +of the world; for he, sure, shewed himself +to have all his affiance and only trust in +God; he shewed himself so valiant in this +extremity as the world might wonder it; he +seemed to have conquered death itself, and +it was not seen, that of all this day before his +death, that ever he altered one jot of his +countenance, but kept it as staid and firm as +if he had some message to deliver to some +nobleman. They having thus received the +sacrament, there was a banquet made, such as +the place might yield, and there they dined +<span class='pagenum'>87</span>together, in which time, the place of execution +being made ready, after dinner, as one +not willing any longer to delay the time, he +told the General, that he was ready as soon +as pleased him; but prayed him, that he +might speak alone with him a few words, +with the which they talked a-part the space +of half a quarter of an hour, and then with +bills and staves he was brought to the place +of execution, where he shewed himself no less +valiant than all the time before; for, first, +here kneeling on his knees, he first prayed +for the Queen’s Majesty of England his Sovereign +lady and mistress; he then prayed +to God for the happy success of this voyage, +and prayed to God to turn it to the profit of +his country: he remembered also therein divers +his good friends, and especially Sir +William Winter, praying Master John Winter +to commend him to that good Knight; +all which he did with so chearful a countenance, +as if he had gone to some great prepared +banquet, the which, I sure think, that he was +fully resolved that God had provided for +him; so, at the last, turning to the General, +he prayed him that he might make water ere +he died, for, quoth he, the flesh is frail, and +withal turned him about and did so; and +coming again, said, Now, truly, I may say as +said Sir Thomas More, that he that cuts off +my head shall have little honesty, my neck is +so short: So turning him, and looking about +<span class='pagenum'>88</span>on the whole company, he desired them all +to forgive him, and especially some that he +did perceive to have displeasure borne them +for his sake, whereof Thomas Cuttle was +one, Hugh Smith was another, and divers +others: whereupon, Smith prayed him to say +before the General then, whether ever they +had any conference together that might redound +to his (the General’s) prejudice or detriment. +He declared it at his death, that +neither he, nor any man else, ever practised +any treachery towards the General with him; +neither did he himself ever think any villainous +thought against him. Then he prayed +the General to be good unto the same Hugh +Smith, and to forgive him for his sake. So +the General said, Well, Smith, for Master +Doughty’s sake, and at his request, I forgive +thee; but become an honest man hereafter. +So then, Master Doughty embracing the General, +naming him his good Captain, bid him +farewel; and so bidding the whole company +farewel, he laid his head to the block, the +which being stricken off, Drake most despitefully +made the head to be taken up +and shewed to the whole company, himself +saying, See, this is the end of traitors! So +he being buried, and those things finished, +the whole company being together, Master +Drake protested before God, that whosoever +he was who should offend but the eighth part +that Thomas Doughty had done, should die +<span class='pagenum'>89</span>for it. He also protested, and swore by the +life of God, and the blessed sacrament which +he that day had received, that whosoever he +were within the fleet that did give another a +blow, should lose his hand, without exception +of any; and yet, the next day, it fortuned +that Master Doughty’s younger brother, +walking both silently and mournfully, as +well for remembrance of his brother’s late +death, as also weighing the imminent peril +over his own head, (as what has been already +said and the present consequence may purport), +there comes unto him this Edward +Bright, the chief instrument of his brother’s +death, saying unto him, God’s wounds! thou +villain, what knowest thou by my wife? and +withal struck at him with his ruler, as of purpose +to pick a quarrel, to hasten his end also. +Why, Ned Bright, quoth he, thou seest in +what case I am, I pray thee let me alone; +and withal bore off the blow with his arm, +wherewith the ruler broke: but Bright, seeming +very furious, thrust him in the face with +the piece that remained in his hand, the splinters +whereof entered an inch into his face; +presently upon the which, he went unto the +General to complain of Bright. Why, John +Doughty, quoth he, without having any regard +of his oath the day before made, Ned +Bright will be open to your revenge in England; +for, I dare say, thy brother did belye +her, when he said that she had an ill name in +<span class='pagenum'>90</span>Cambridge. Then might every man perceive +the little-meant honesty.” +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/153.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>The beheading of Capt<sup>n</sup>. Doughty by Drake.</i> <span class='fontp9'><i>J. June Sc.</i></span></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +From this plain narrative of the trial and execution +of Doughty, of the genuineness of which +there cannot be the least doubt, as the concomitant +little circumstances all concur to confirm +the author both an eye and ear witness of what +he has related, there is reason to believe, that +the success of the voyage covered the iniquity +of the undertaker; and that the immense booty +which Drake brought to England, enabled him +to stifle the complaints of individuals; and, by +a proper address, to convert the acts of oppression, +murder, and pyracy, of which he was +guilty, into so many deeds of necessary duty, in +order to the accomplishment of the main object, +the acquisition of wealth at the expence of honesty. +</p> +<p> +That Drake never had a Commission from the +Queen, as his friends would suggest, appears not +only from his not producing it at the trial of +Doughty (which can hardly be justified, in contempt +to the prisoner), but from his not producing +it upon another occasion, when, as shall +be shewn immediately, he vauntingly produced +other credentials of far less moment, in order to +justify his conduct, and give him credit with his +company. The story, then, of the remarkable +words foisted into the mouth of his Sovereign, +and recited by his biographer, is as false as inconsistent +with the character of that wise Princess, +who, though there is reason from her after-conduct +<span class='pagenum'>91</span>to conclude that she was privy to the +voyage, yet never openly countenanced it, till +after it was completed, and the issue of it determined; +as appears from the account of the +conversation which Drake himself gave to his +followers, a few days before he left Port St. Julian +to seek a passage into the South Seas. +</p> +<p> +“On the 6th of August, says our author, he +commanded his whole company to be ashore, +and, placing himself in a tent, one side of +which was open, and calling Master Winter +on one side of him, and John Thomas on the +other side, his man laid before him a great +paper book, and withal Master Fletcher offered +himself to make a sermon. Nay soft, +Master Fletcher, said he, I must preach this +day myself, although I have small skill in +preaching. Well, all ye the company, here +are ye, or not? Answer was made, that they +were all here. Then commanded he every +ship’s company severally to stand together; +which was also done. Then, said he, My +Masters, I am a very bad orator, for my +bringing up hath not been in learning; but +whatso I shall here speak, let every man take +good notice of, and let him write it down, for +I will speak nothing but what I will answer it +in England, yea, and before her Majesty, as +I have it here already set down [but whether +it were in his book or not, that I know not, +but this was the effect of it, and very near the +words]: Thus it is, my Masters, that we’re +<span class='pagenum'>92</span>very far from our country and friends; we +are compassed in on every side with our enemies; +wherefore we are not to make small +reckoning of a man, for we cannot have a man +if we would give for him ten thousand pounds; +wherefore we must have these mutinies and +discontents that are grown amongst us redressed; +for, by the life of God, it doth even take +my wits from me to think on it. Here is +such controversy between the sailors and the +gentlemen, and such stomaching between the +gentlemen and sailors, that it doth even make +me mad to hear it. But, my Masters, I must +have it cease; for I must have the gentlemen +to haul and draw with the mariners, and +the mariners with the gentlemen: and let us +shew ourselves to be all of a company; and +let us not give occasion to the enemy to rejoice +at our decay and overthrow. I would +know him that would refuse to set his hand +to a rope; but I trust there is not any such +here; and, as gentlemen are very necessary +for government sake on the voyage, so have +I shipt them for that purpose, and to some +further intent; and yet, though I know sailors +to be the most envious people of the world, +and so unruly without government, yet may +not I be without them. Also, if there be any +here willing to return home, let me understand +of them; and here is the Marygold, +a ship that I can very well spare, I will furnish +her to such as will return with the most +<span class='pagenum'>93</span>credit that I can give them, either by my letters +or any way else; but let them take care that +they go homeward; for, if I find them in my +way, I will surely sink them; therefore, you +shall have time to consider hereof until to-morrow, +for, by my troth, I must needs be +plain with you; <em>I have taken that in hand that +I know not in the world how to go through withal</em>; +it passeth my capacity; it hath even bereaved +me of my wits to think on it. [Well, yet the +voice was, that none would return; they +would all take such part as he did.] Well +then, my Masters, quoth he, came ye all forth +with your own good wills, or no? They answered, +All, willingly. At whose hands, my +Masters, take ye to receive your wages? At +yours, answered the company. Then, said +he, how say you, will you take wages, or stand +to my courtesy? To your courtesy, good +Captain, was the reply. Then he commanded +the steward to the Elizabeth to bring him +the key of the stores, the which he did; then, +turning him unto Master Winter, he said, +Master Winter, I do here discharge you of +your Captainship; and so in brief he said to +all the Officers. Then Master Winter and +John Thomas asked him what should move +him to displace them? He asked in return, +whether they could make any reason why he +should not do so? So willing them to content +themselves, he willed silence in those matters, +saying, Ye see here the great disorders we are +<span class='pagenum'>94</span>entangled into; and, although some have already +received condign punishment, as by +death, who, I take God to witness, as you +all know, was to me as my other hand, yet +you see, over and besides the rest, his own +mouth did bewray his treacherous dealings: +and see, how, trusting to the singularity of +his own wit, he over-reacht himself at unawares. +But see what God would have +to be done; for her Majesty commanded, +that of all men my Lord Treasurer should +have no knowledge of this voyage, and to see +that his own mouth hath declared that he +had given him a plot thereof. But, truly, +my Masters, and as I am a gentleman, there +shall no more die; I will lay my hand on no +more, although there be here who have deserved +as much as he; and so charging one +Worrall that was present, that his case was +worse than Doughty’s, who, in Master +Doughty’s extremities, was one of Drake’s +chief confellows, who, humbling himself to +Drake, even upon his knees, prayed him to +be good unto him, Well, well, Worrall, +said he, you and I shall talk well enough of +this matter hereafter. Then he charged one +John Audley with some ill dealings towards +him, but opened no matter, but said, he +would talk with him alone after dinner. +Here is some again, my Masters, not knowing +how else to discredit me, say and affirm, +that I was set forth on this voyage by Master +<span class='pagenum'>95</span>Hatton; some by Sir William Winter; and +some by Master Hankins; but these are a +company of idle heads that have nothing else +to talk of. And, my Masters, I must tell +you, I do know them as my very good friends; +but, to say that they were the fitters forth of +this voyage, or that it was by their means, I tell +you it was nothing so. But, indeed, thus it +was, My Lord of Essex wrote in my commendation +unto Secretary Walsingham more than I +was worthy; but by like I had deserved somewhat +at his hands, and he thought me in his letters +a fit man to serve against the Spaniards for +my practice and experience that I had in that +trade; whereupon, indeed, Secretary Walsingham +did come to consult with his Lordship, +and declared unto him, that for that her Majesty +had received divers injuries of the King +of Spain, for the which, she desired to have +some revenge; and withal, he shewed me a +plot, willing me to set my hand, and to write +down where I thought he might most be annoyed; +but I told him some part of my mind, +but refused to set my hand to any thing, affirming, +that her Majesty was mortal, and that, if it +should please God to take her Majesty away, it +might so be that some person might reign that +might be in league with the King of Spain, and +then will mine own hand be a witness against +myself. Then was I very shortly after, and on +an evening, sent for unto her Majesty by Secretary +Walsingham; and, the next day, coming +<span class='pagenum'>96</span>to her Majesty, these, or the like words, +she said, Drake, so it is that I would gladly +be revenged on the King of Spain for divers +injuries that I have received: and said further, +that he was the only man that might do +this exploit, and withal craved his advice +therein, who told her Majesty of the small +good that was to be done in Spain, but the +only way was to annoy him by his Indies. +Then, with many more words, he shewed +forth a bill of her Majesty’s adventure of +1000 crowns, which, however, he said at some +time before, that her Majesty did give him +towards his charges. He shewed also a bill +of Master Hatton’s adventure, and divers letters +of credit that had passed in his behalf; +but he never let them come out of his own +hands. He said also, that her Majesty did +swear by her crown, <em>That, if any within her +realm did give the King of Spain hereof to understand +(as she suspected but two), they should +lose their heads therefore</em>. And now, Masters, +said he, let us consider what we have done: +<em>We have now set together by the ears three +mighty Princes, namely, her Majesty, the Kings of +Spain and Portugal; and, if this voyage should +not have good success, we should not only be a +scorning, or a reproachful scoffing-stock unto our +enemies, but also a great</em> <span class="small-caps">blot</span> <em>to our whole country +for ever; and, what triumph would it be to +Spain and Portugal; and, again, the like would +never be attempted</em>. And now, restoring every +<span class='pagenum'>97</span>man again to his former office, he ended: +thus shewing the company that he would +satisfy every man, or else he would sell all +that he ever had even unto his plate; for, +quoth he, I have good reason to promise, and +am best able to perform it; for, I have somewhat +of mine own in England; and, besides +that, I have as much adventure in this voyage +as three of the best whatsoever; and, if it so +be, that I never come home, yet will her Majesty +pay every man his wages, whom indeed +you and I all came to serve; and, for to say +you came to serve me, I will not give you +thanks; for it is only her Majesty that you +serve; and this voyage is only her fitting +forth: so willing all men to be friends, he +willed them to depart about their business. +The 8th of August, they weighed anchor and +departed; but, the day before, he came on +board the Elizabeth, and swore very vehemently, +I know not upon what occasion, +that he would hang to the number of 30 in +the fleet that had deserved it: and then +again charged Worrall that his case was +worse than Doughty’s, and that by God’s +wounds he had deserved to be hanged. And, +Master Winter, said he, where is your man +Ulysses? By God’s life, if he were my man, I +would cut off his ears: nay, by God’s wounds, +I would hang him; but wherefore truly I do +not know.” +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>98</span>Nothing can be a clearer proof that Drake +had no Government Commission than the above +account. In his speech, which the writer says +is nearly in his own words, he does not so much +as pretend to have received any Commission, only +a private intimation from the Queen and Walsingham, +that her Majesty wanted to be revenged +of divers injuries received from the King of +Spain. But was countenancing four or five +piratical plunderers to rob innocent people, a +princely way for one Sovereign to take revenge +of another, in times of profound peace? It was, +indeed, a pitiful connivance in Queen Elizabeth +to engage 1000 crowns in a piratical adventure +of this kind, and what could never have been +credited of that magnanimous Princess, had she +not afterwards approved of his piracy, by going +aboard his ship, and openly approving what, +it was even then said, least became a trading +nation to encourage, the breach of treaties, and +piratical practices. But, it is remarkable, that +five months elapsed after his return to England +before her Majesty’s pleasure was publicly +known; during which time men talked variously +of the expedition, and the fate of Drake +seemed to hang in suspence; so true proved +Doughty’s prediction, that “the Queen’s Majesty +and Council might be corrupted.” +</p> +<p> +That Drake bore no naval Commission appears +still more clearly, from his displacing the +Captains and Officers of all his ships without demanding +from them their Commissions; from his +<span class='pagenum'>99</span>lifting his men, not for any hostile expedition, +but for a trading voyage to Alexandria; and +from his asking them, before his setting sail from +the Port of St. Julian to enter the South Seas, +from whom they expected their wages. From +these circumstances it follows incontestibly, that, +if he had a naval Commission, he was the only +Officer in the fleet possessed of one;⁠—Doughty, +whom he beheaded, and who, before their falling +out, was second in command, bore no naval +Commission; and, it is more than probable, that +this gentleman’s questioning the Commission of +Drake was the real cause of his death, as Drake +more than once charges him with the overthrow +of the voyage, which he could no otherwise effect +than by discrediting a Commission, on the authority +of which both Officers and men were to +be persuaded to plunder a people at peace with +their nation, and without which every man was +liable to be executed for piracy, whenever he +should be overpowered. +</p> +<p> +It were needless for us to enlarge our remarks; +every reader has now the subject before him, and +every reader will form a judgment for himself. +</p> +<p> +What we have said, in consequence of having +traced this transaction from beginning to end, +may seem to clash with the opinion we previously +entertained of Drake’s humanity, courage, +and kindness to his followers, but will not seem +strange to those who are acquainted with the +nature of periodical writings, where one part of +the work is necessarily printed off before the +<span class='pagenum'>100</span>other is written. In pursuing the course of this +voyage, new authors have been consulted, and +new lights collected, which have enabled us to +detect not only the errors of other writers, but +also to correct our own; and, from the sequel +of this voyage, we may venture to foretel, that +the reader will concur in sentiment with us, +that, though Drake was bold, he was not honest; +that, though he did not kill those he plundered +and had no motive to destroy, he spared +none who opposed his designs, or who did not +pay implicit obedience to his arbitrary will; that, +though he was an able seaman, he was a jealous +rival; and that, though he was a gallant leader, +he was a most tyrannical Commander. We shall +now accompany him to the South Seas, where +the Spaniards, not suspecting an enemy, were in +no condition to defend themselves against his +attacks. +</p> +<p> +Drake having reduced the number of his +ships to three, they left the port, and on August +the 20th entered the Straits of Magellan, in +which they struggled with contrary winds, and +the various dangers which the intricacy of that +winding passage exposed them to, till night, when +they had passed the first narrow, and had entered +a wider sea, where they discovered an island, to +which they gave the name of Elizabeth, in honour +of their Sovereign. On the 24th they came +to an island, in which they found such an infinite +number of birds, since called penguins, that they +killed 3000 of them in one day. This bird, of +<span class='pagenum'>101</span>which they then knew not the name, they describe +as somewhat less than a wild goose, without +feathers, and covered with a kind of down, +unable to fly or rise from the ground, but capable +of running and swimming with amazing +celerity. They feed on fishes in the sea, and +come to land only to rest in the day, and lay +their eggs, which, according to later voyagers, +they deposit in holes, as regularly dispersed and +as numerous as the cells in a beehive. +</p> +<p> +From these islands to the South Sea the strait +becomes very crooked and narrow; so that +sometimes by the interposition of head-lands the +passage seems entirely shut up. To double these +capes they found it very difficult, on account of +the frequent variations to be made in the course. +Here are, indeed, as Magellan observes, many +harbours; but in most of them no bottom is to +be found, which, however, does not seem verified +by experience; the harbours being in general +good, though the tides and blasts continually +rushing in from various directions create +the danger. The land on both sides rises into +innumerable mountains; the tops of them were +encircled with clouds and vapours, which, being +congealed, fall down in snow, and increase their +height by hardening into ice; an observation +which might naturally occur to Drake, who +passed the strait in their winter before the snows +were dissolved. However, even at that season, +which answers to our February, they found +the vallies, in some places, green, fruitful, and +<span class='pagenum'>102</span>pleasant. Anchoring in a bay near Cape Forward, +Drake, imagining the strait quite shut +up, went in his boat to endeavour to find some +other passage out; and, having found an inlet +towards the North, was returning to his ships; +but curiosity soon prevailed upon him to stop +for the sake of observing a canoe or boat with +several natives of the country in it. He could +not at a distance help admiring the form of this +little vessel, which seemed inclining to a semi-circle, +the stern and prow standing up, and the +body sinking inward; but much greater was +his wonder, when, upon a nearer inspection, he +found it made only with the barks of trees, +sewed together with thongs of seal-skin, so artificially, +that scarcely any water entered the +seams. +</p> +<p> +The people were well shaped, and painted +like those who have been already described. +On the land they had a hut built with poles, +and covered with skins, in which they had water-vessels +and other utensils, made likewise +with the barks of trees. Among these people +they had an opportunity of remarking, what is +frequently observable in savage countries, how +natural sagacity and unwearied industry may +supply the want of such manufactures or natural +productions as appear to us absolutely necessary +for the support of life. Though the inhabitants +were wholly strangers to iron and to the +use we make of it, yet, instead of it, they +substituted the shell of a muscle, of prodigious +<span class='pagenum'>103</span>size, found upon their coasts. This +they ground upon a stone to an edge, which +was so firm and solid, that neither wood nor +stone were able to resist it. With instruments +made of shells, these simple people were able to +perform all their mechanic operations; nor do +they seem so deformed and ugly as our late +voyagers represent them, who being, perhaps, +more refined than those who sailed with Captain +Drake, might fancy a greater difference between +themselves and these savages than in nature +there really is. +</p> +<p> +On this occasion we cannot forbear remarking, +that, though Drake entered the strait in +what is accounted the most unfavourable season, +yet he passed it in sixteen days, though, +at that time, wholly unknown; a passage the +more extraordinary, as none of our later voyagers +made it in less than thirty six days in the middle +of summer, and Captain Wallis was at least +four months in making it. +</p> +<p> +Drake, as has been said, having taken a survey +of the country from Cape Forward, continued +his course to the North-west-ward, and, on +the sixth of September, entered the great South +Sea, on which no English vessel had ever been +navigated before; and proposed to have directed +his course towards the Line, that his men, +who had suffered by the severity of the climate, +might recover their strength in a warmer latitude. +But his design was scarce formed, before +it was frustrated; for on September the seventh, +<span class='pagenum'>104</span>after an eclipse of the moon, a storm arose so +violent that it left them little hopes of surviving +it: nor was its fury so dreadful as its continuance; +for it lasted, with little intermission, +thirty-two days, in which time they were +driven more than 200 leagues out of their +course, without being able either to avail themselves +of their sails, or make use of their +anchors. +</p> +<p> +In this storm, on the 30th of September, the +Marigold, Captain Thomas, was separated from +them; and on the 7th of October, having entered +a harbour, where they hoped for some intermission +of their fatigues, they were in a few +hours forced out to sea again by a violent gust, +at which time they lost sight of the Elizabeth, +Captain Winter, whose crew, as was afterwards +discovered, wearied with labour, and discouraged +with the prospect of future dangers, recovered +the straits the day following, and, returning +by the same passage through which they +came, sailed along the coast of Brazil, and, in +the year following, arrived in England. +</p> +<p> +They were now driven Southward 55 degrees, +where they discovered a cluster of islands, in +one of which they anchored and staid two days, +to the great refreshment of the crew, having +met with excellent water, and plenty of greens. +Not far distant from this bay they entered another, +where they beheld some naked inhabitants +ranging along the coast in their canoes in search +of provisions. With these they exchanged +<span class='pagenum'>105</span>some toys for such refreshments as they had to +supply. +</p> +<p> +And now, being furnished with wood and water, +they again set sail, and were, by a new +storm, driven to the latitude of 57 degrees, +when they beheld the extremities of the American +coast, and the confluence of the Atlantic +and Southern oceans. Here they arrived on +the 28th of October, and at last were blest with +the sight of a calm sea, having, for almost two +months, endured such a storm, as no voyager +has given an account of, and such as in that +part of the world, though accustomed to hurricanes, +the inhabitants were unacquainted with. +</p> +<p> +On the 30th of October, they steered towards +the place appointed for the rendezvous of the +fleet, in case of separation, which was in 30 +degrees South; and, on the next day, discovered +two islands, so well stocked with fowls, +that they victualled their ships with them. After +this supply, they sailed northward, along +the coast of Peru, till they came to 30 degrees, +where, finding neither ships, nor any convenient +port, they came to anchor Nov. the 29th, at +Mucho, an island inhabited by such Indians as +the cruelty of their Spanish conquerors had +driven from the continent, to whom they applied +for water and provisions, offering them in +return such things as they imagined most likely +to please them. The Indians seemed willing +to traffic; and, having presented them with +<span class='pagenum'>106</span>fruits and two fat sheep, shewed them a place +where they might come for water. +</p> +<p> +Next morning, according to agreement, the +English landed with their water-vessels, and sent +two men forward towards the place appointed, +who, about the middle of the way, were suddenly +attacked by the Indians and immediately +slain. Nor were the rest of the company out +of danger; for behind the rocks was lodged an +ambush of 500 men, who, starting up from +their retreat, discharged their arrows into the +boat with such dexterity, that every one of the +crew was wounded by them. The sea being +then high, and hindering them from either retiring +or making use of their weapons, Drake +himself received an arrow under his eye, which +pierced him almost to the brain; and another +in his breast. The danger of these wounds was +much increased by the absence of their surgeon, +who was in the Elizabeth, so that they had +none to assist them but a boy, whose age did +not admit of much experience or skill; yet so +much were they favoured by Providence, that +they all recovered. No reason could be assigned +for which the Indians should attack +them with so furious a spirit of malignity, but +that they mistook them for Spaniards, whose +cruelties might very reasonably incite those to +revenge, whom they had driven, by incessant +persecution, from their country, wasting immense +tracts of land by massacre and devastation. +Nuno da Sylva adds, that none of +<span class='pagenum'>107</span>the Indians were hurt by the English, though +they came so near the boat, as to seize and +carry off four of the oars. +</p> +<p> +On the afternoon of the same day they set +sail, and on the 30th of November dropt +anchor in Phillip’s bay, where their boat, having +been sent out to discover the country, returned +with an Indian in his canoe whom they had intercepted. +He was of a graceful stature, drest in +a white coat or gown, reaching almost to his +knees; very mild, humble, and docile; such +as perhaps were all the Indians, till the Spaniards +taught them revenge, treachery, and +cruelty. This Indian, having been kindly +treated, was dismissed with presents; and informed, +as far as the English could make him +understand, what they chiefly wanted, and +what they were willing to give in return; +Drake ordered his boat to attend him, and set +him safe on shore. +</p> +<p> +When he was landed, he made signs for the +boat to wait till his return, and meeting some +of his countrymen, gave them such an account +of his reception, that, within a few hours, several +of them repaired with him to the boat, +with fowls, eggs, and a hog; and with them +one of their captains, who willingly came into +the boat, and desired to be conveyed by the +English to their ship. +</p> +<p> +By this man Drake was informed that no +supplies were to be expected here; but that +Southward, in a place to which he offered to be +<span class='pagenum'>108</span>his pilate, there was great plenty. This proposal +was accepted, and on the 5th of December, +under the direction of the good-natured +Indian, they came to anchor in the harbour +called by the Spaniards Val Parizo, in 33 deg. +40 min. S. latitude, near the little town of St. +Jago, where they met not only with sufficient +stores of provisions, and with storehouses full of +the wines of Chili, but with a ship called the +Captain of Morial, richly laden, having, together +with large quantities of the same wine, +some of the fine gold of Baldivia to the amount +of threescore thousand pezoes, each pezo of the +value of eight shillings, and a great cross of +gold set with emeralds. The Spaniards at first, +mistaking the English for friends, invited them +to feast with them; but soon being undeceived, +one of the crew jumped overboard, and alarmed +the town; but the inhabitants, instead of +making opposition, fled hastily, and left whatever +was in the town a prize to the enemy. In +the chapel Drake and his men found the most +valuable booty. +</p> +<p> +Having spent three days here in storing their +ships, and loading the money and effects, they +departed, and landed their Indian pilot where +they first received him, after having rewarded him +much above his expectations or desires. They +had now little other anxiety than for their +friends, who had been separated from them, +and whom they now determined to seek. But +considering that, by entering every creek and +<span class='pagenum'>109</span>harbour with their ships, they exposed themselves +to unnecessary dangers, and that their +boat could not contain such a number as might +defend themselves against the Spaniards, they +determined to station their ship at some place +where they might commodiously build a pinnace, +which, being of light burden, might safely +sail where the ship would be in danger of +being stranded; and, at the same time, carry a +sufficient force to resist the enemy, and afford +better accommodation than it was possible to +obtain in the boat. To this end, on the 19th +of December, they entered a bay near Coquimbo, +a town inhabited by the Spaniards, +who, discovering them immediately, issued out +to the number of 100 horsemen, with about +200 naked Indians running by their sides. The +English, observing their approach, retired to +their boat without any loss, except of one +man, whom no persuasions or intreaties could +move to retire with the rest, and who was +therefore overtaken by the Spaniards, who +thought to have taken him prisoner, but, having +an halbert in his hand, he manfully defended +himself, till, being overpowered by numbers, +he was run through the body with a lance. The +Spaniards, exulting at the victory, ordered the +Indians to draw the dead carcase from the rock +on which he fell, and in the sight of the English +beheaded it, and then cut off the right hand, +and tore out the heart, which they carried +away in triumph. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>110</span>Leaving this place, they soon found a harbour +more secure and convenient, where they built +their pinnace, in which Drake went to seek his +companions; but, finding the wind contrary, he +was obliged to return in two days. +</p> +<p> +From hence they came to a port called Sarcipaxa, +where, being landed, they found a Spaniard +asleep with silver bars lying by him to the +value of 4000 Spanish ducats: notwithstanding the +insults which they had received from his countrymen, +they did not think fit to disturb this harmless +man’s repose, but, taking the silver, left him +quietly to sleep out his nap. +</p> +<p> +Coasting along the shore, they observed a +Spaniard driving eight Peruvian sheep, which +on landing they found to be laden with silver, +each sheep having 100lb. weight in two leather +bags across his back. They delivered the poor +animals of their heavy burdens, and lodged +the bags in their own ships. +</p> +<p> +Farther on lay some Indian towns, from +which the inhabitants repaired to the ship on +floats made of seal-skin blown full of wind, two +of which they fasten together, and, sitting between +them, row with great swiftness, and carry +considerable burdens. They very readily +traded for glass and such trifles, with which +the old and the young seemed equally delighted. +</p> +<p> +Arriving at Marmarena on the 26th of January, +Drake invited the Spaniards to traffic +with him, which they accepted; and supplied +him with necessaries, selling to him, among +<span class='pagenum'>111</span>other provisions, some of those sheep which +have been mentioned, whose bulk is equal to +that of a cow, and whose strength is such, that +one of them can carry three tall men upon his +back; their necks are like a camel’s, and their +heads like those of our sheep. They are the most +useful animals of this country, not only affording +excellent fleeces and wholesome flesh, but serving +as carriers over rocks and mountains, where +no other beast can travel for their foot is of +a particular form, which enables them to tread +firm on the steepest and most slippery places. +</p> +<p> +On all this coast, it is said, the mountains are +so impregnated with silver, that from one hundred +weight of common earth five ounces of +fine silver may be separated. +</p> +<p> +They continued their course towards the +North, and on the 7th of February arrived +at Arica, in 8 deg. 30 min. S. latitude, and in +this port found three small barks, in which they +found 57 slabs of silver, each of the size and shape +of an ordinary brick, and weighing about 20lb. +They took no prisoners; for the crews, fearing no +interlopers, were all on shore carousing with one +another. At this port the Spaniards were wont to +land their merchandize, and to embark the silver, +which was transported from thence to Panama; but, +since Drake’s incursion, they carry their silver over +land to Lima, and load no more treasure here, +except what they pay for the purchase of such +merchandize as is brought from Europe to supply +their market. Wanting numbers to assault +<span class='pagenum'>112</span>the town, they proceeded in their course, and +falling in with a small coasting-vessel, laden with +linen and other cloaths, Drake supplied his +crew with what quantity of those articles they +stood in need of, and dismissed the Spaniards +with the remainder. +</p> +<p> +From hence they sailed to Chuli; in which +port there was a ship that had 300,000 pezoes of +silver in bars; but the Spaniards had sent an express +from Arica, to acquaint the Governor that +Drake was upon the coast. This express arrived +at Chuli, just two hours before Drake entered +the port; in which time the master of the +ship had thrown his treasure overboard, and +had secured himself and crew on shore, leaving +only one Indian on board to make the report. +Drake, fearing the alarm would spread faster +than he could sail, lost no time in hazardous +searches, but instantly departed, and steered +for Lima, where they arrived on the 15th of +February, and entered the harbour without +resistance, in which, according to some writers, +there were thirty sail of ships; others say, +twelve; but all agree, that several of them were +of considerable force: so that Drake’s security +consisted not in his strength, but in his reputation, +which had so intimidated the Spaniards, +that the sight of their own superiority could not +rouse them to opposition. Instances of such +panic terrors are to be met with in other relations; +but as they are, for the most part, quickly +dissipated by reason and resolution, a wise +<span class='pagenum'>113</span>Commander will rarely ground his hopes of success +on them; and, perhaps, on this occasion, +the Spaniards scarcely deserve a severer censure +for their cowardice, than Drake for his temerity. +A writer of good authority, to reconcile the +matter, tells us, that Drake took them at unawares, +and that the crews, as is usual in times +of perfect security, were with their families on +shore; and many of those who were ready to +sail, were taking leave of their friends. Be this +as it may, all seem to agree, that Drake made +here a considerable booty, having taken from +one ship a chest full of rials of plate, which he +found concealed under the steerage, and, from +other ships, silks and linen cloth to a considerable +value. He did not, however, remain long +in this harbour, but hastened in pursuit of the +Cacafuego, which ship had sailed but three days +before, and which, they were here informed, was +bound to Paita. In the pursuit, they fell in +with another ship, out of which they took a +large quantity of gold, together with a crucifix +of the same metal, richly adorned with emeralds. +They continued the pursuit; but, having gained +intelligence, that, instead of Paita, she was gone +to Panama, Drake crouded all the sail he could, +and, to encourage the pursuers, promised, that +whoever first descried the prize should have his +gold chain as a reward; which fell to the lot of +his brother John. On the 1st of March they +came up with her, and, after exchanging a few +shot, they boarded her, and found not only a +<span class='pagenum'>114</span>quantity of jewels, and thirteen chests of money, +but eighty pounds weight of gold, and twenty-six +tons of uncoined silver, with services of +wrought plate to a great value. In unlading +this prize they spent six days; and then dismissing +the Spaniards, stood off again to sea. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/187.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Sir Francis Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich Spanish ship.</i> <span class='fontp9'><i>J. June Sculp.</i></span></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, tells us, that, +in less than 24 hours after their departure +from Lima in pursuit of the Cacafuego, news +was brought that Drake was upon the coast, +but that the Governor had already assembled +the force of the country to oppose his landing; +and that, finding he had left the harbour, he +ordered three ships with six pieces of cannon +(being all he could collect), and 250 men, to +pursue him: but, the equipment of these vessels +necessarily requiring time, Drake had gained the +advantage of them: and, coming within sight +of the prize off Cape Francisco, the Captain of +which, Juan de Anton, a Biscayan, seeing at a +distance a ship crouded with sails, and imagining +the Viceroy of Peru had dispatched her on some +message to him, struck his sails, and lay to till +Drake approaching nearer, he discovered his +mistake. He would then have made his escape, +but Drake nearing him fast with his great ordnance, +against which the Captain could make +no defence, he was constrained to yield. “There +was in this ship, adds the Spaniard, eight +hundred and fifty thousand pezoes of silver, +and forty thousand pezoes of gold, all which +silver and gold was customed: but what treasure +<span class='pagenum'>115</span>they had uncustomed, I know not; for +many times they carry almost as much more +as they pay custom for; otherwise the King +would take it from them, if they should be +known to have any great sum; wherefore +every ship carries a bill of custom, that the +King may see it. All the treasure which +Drake took was merchants and other mens +goods, saving 180,000 pezoes of the King’s. +He had also out of this ship good store of +victuals, with other necessaries, which were +to be carried from Panama, and was five days +in taking out such things as he needed. +</p> +<p> +“This done, he sailed to the coast of New +Spain, without going to Panama. The ships +that were sent by the Viceroy of Peru from +Lima, arrived off Cape St. Francisco 20 days +after Drake had taken the Cacafuego, and +had intelligence by a ship coming from Panama, +which they met at the said Cape, that +Francis Drake had taken the ship with silver, +and was not gone for Panama; whereupon the +Commander of the three ships, thinking that +Captain Drake had been gone for the Straits +of Magellan, directed his course that way to +seek him.” +</p> +<p> +Thus Drake, changing his course to the west, +escaped his enemies, and fell in with a ship from +the East Indies laden with silks, China ware, +and cotton. The owner, a Spaniard, was on +board, who presented Drake with a falcon +wrought in massy gold, with an emerald set in +<span class='pagenum'>116</span>the breast of it, the largest he had ever beheld. +With this present, and a golden cup from the +pilot, Drake was contented, and dismissed the +ship, taking only four chests of China ware, +which at that time was of great value in Europe. +</p> +<p> +On the 13th of March they came in sight of +land, which happened to be a small island about +two leagues from the main continent. There +they found a harbour, and anchored in five +fathom water, where they staid till the 20th, on +which day, a little coasting frigate passing by, +was pursued by the pinnace, boarded, and taken. +Being laden with sasaparilla, honey, butter, and +other country goods, Drake unloaded the sasaparilla, +and in the room of it put the gold and +silver from his own ship, in order to heave her +up, to new caulk her sides, and stop her leaks; +in which service the crew were employed till the +26th of the same month, when having reloaded +the cargo, and taken in a sufficient quantity of +wood and water, they continued their course +westward along the coast, taking the Spanish +frigate with them to bear them company. +</p> +<p> +On April 6, a little before sun-set, they discovered +a ship, that held on her course about two +leagues to seaward from the main land. To this +ship they gave chace, and before morning they +neared her, and suddenly boarded her while the +men slept. Being masters of this prize without +resistance, they ordered the prisoners on board +their own ship, among whom was one Don +Francisco Xarate, who meant to sail to Panama, +<span class='pagenum'>117</span>and from thence to China, with the letters and +patents that were found in his possession (among +which were the letters of the King of Spain to +the Governor of the Philippines); as also the sea +charts wherewith they were to be directed in their +voyage, which were of admirable use to Drake +in his return home. From this ship they took +great quantities of bale-goods, and other valuable +merchandize, and then dismissed her. They +also took a young negroe girl, whom Drake or +some of his companions having got with child, +they afterwards inhumanly set her on shore +on an island in their way home, just as she was +ready to lie in; of which notice will be taken +in its proper place. Having retained a Spanish +pilot from this ship, they obliged him to direct +them to a safe harbour, where they might supply +themselves with provisions for their intended +voyage. This man brought them to the harbour +of Anguatulco, or, as others write, Guatalco, +where arriving on the 13th of April, they staid +till the 26th of the same month, and then set +sail, having first dismissed all their Spanish prisoners, +together with Nuno da Sylva, the Portugueze +pilot, whom they brought from the +Canaries, and who had served them faithfully in +all their trials and dangers; in reward for which +he was now abandoned by Drake to the mercy +of the enemy. This man, when he landed on the +continent, was first carried to Mexico, and there +put to the torture to make discoveries. He was +afterwards sent prisoner into Old Spain, and +<span class='pagenum'>118</span>there examined; and, having given a faithful +relation of all he knew, was released, and returned +home to his own country, where he published, +as has already been said, an account of +the voyage as far as he went, which was afterwards +translated into all the European languages, +and universally read. +</p> +<p> +On their arrival at Anguatulco, they had no +sooner landed than Drake with part of his men +marched up to the town, where they found the +chief magistrate sitting in judgment upon a parcel +of poor savages, and ready to pass sentence +of death upon almost all of them, they being +charged with a conspiracy to kill their masters, +and set fire to the town. Drake changed the +scene, and made judges and criminals without +distinction, his prisoners, conducting them all in +procession to his ship. Here he made the Judge +write an order to the Commanding Officer to +deliver up the town, in which they found a +great pot, says my author, as big as a bushel, +full of rials of plate, a gold chain, and a few +jewels. The gold chain was taken from a gentleman +who was making his escape from the +town, but was intercepted by an English sailor, +who rifled him of all the valuables he had about +him, of which the gold chain was thought to be +of the least value. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/194.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Drake Conveying the Spanish Judges and Criminal Savages of Anguatulco; in Procession on Board his own Ship.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +Being now sufficiently enriched, and having +given over all hopes of finding their associates, +and, perhaps, beginning to be infected with that +desire of ease and pleasure which is the natural +<span class='pagenum'>119</span>consequence of wealth obtained by successful +villainy, or, what is still more probable, being +in fear of a surprize before they had secured their +booty, they began to consult about their return +home; and, in pursuance of Drake’s advice, resolved +first to find out some convenient harbour +where they might more safely lie and equip +themselves for the voyage, and then endeavour +to discover a nearer passage from the South Seas +into the Atlantic Ocean; a passage that would not +only enable them to return home with full security, +and in a shorter time, but would much facilitate +the navigation into those parts, and of +course immortalize their names. +</p> +<p> +For this purpose they had recourse to a port +in the island of Canes, where they met with fish, +wood, and fresh water; and, being sufficiently +stored with other provisions, with which they +had supplied themselves from their prizes and +at Anguatulco, they set sail first with a resolution +of seeking a passage by the north-west, and, if +that failed, by the Moluccas, and thence, following +the course of the Portugueze, to return by +the Cape of Good Hope. +</p> +<p> +In pursuance of the first resolution, they sailed +about 600 leagues, till coming into the latitude +of 43 deg. north, they found the air so excessive +cold, that the men could no longer bear to +handle the ropes to navigate the ship: they, +therefore, changed their course till they came +into the latitude of 38 deg. and 30 min. under +which height they discovered a very good harbour, +<span class='pagenum'>120</span>and, fortunately, had a favourable wind +to enable them to enter it. +</p> +<p> +Here, on the 17th of June, they cast anchor, +and, in a short time, had opportunities of observing +that the natives of that country were not less +sensible than themselves; for, the next day, there +came a man rowing in his canoe towards the ship, +and, at a distance from it, made a long oration +with very extraordinary gesticulations, and great +appearance of vehemence; and, a little time afterwards, +made a second visit in the same manner; +and then returning a third time, he presented +them, after his harangue was finished, with a kind +of crown of black feathers, such as their kings +wear upon their heads, and a basket of rushes +filled with a particular herb, both which he fastened +to a short stick, and threw into the boat: +nor could he be prevailed upon to receive any +thing in return, though pushed towards him upon +a board, only he took up a hat that was flung in +the water. +</p> +<p> +Three days afterwards, the ship, having received +some damage at sea, was brought nearer +to land, that her lading might be taken out; +in order to which, the English, who had now +learned not to commit their lives too negligently +to the mercy of savage nations, raised a kind of +fortification with earth and palissades, and erected +their tents within it. All this was not beheld +by the inhabitants without the utmost astonishment, +which incited them to come down +in crouds to the coast, with no other view, as it +<span class='pagenum'>121</span>afterwards appeared, but to compliment the +beautiful strangers that had condescended to +touch upon their country. +</p> +<p> +Drake, neither confiding too much in appearances, +nor wholly distrusting the friendly disposition +of the inhabitants, directed them to lay +aside their bows and arrows, and, on their approach, +presented them with linen and other +necessaries, of which he shewed them the use. +They then returned to their habitations, about +three quarters of a mile from the English camp, +where they made such loud and violent noises, +that they were heard by the English, who had +vanity enough to believe that they were paying +them a kind of melancholy adoration. +</p> +<p> +Two days afterwards, they perceived the approach +of a far more numerous company, who +stopt at the top of a hill which over-looked the +English settlement, while one of them made a +long oration, at the end of which all the assembly +bowed their bodies, and pronounced the +syllable <i>Ob</i> with a solemn tone, as by way of +confirmation of what had been said by the orator. +Then the men laying down their bows, +and leaving their women and children on the +top of the hill, came down towards the tents, +and seemed transported in the highest degree at +the kindness of Drake, who received their gifts, +and admitted them to his presence. The women +at a distance appeared seized with a kind +of phrenzy, such as that of old among the Pagans +in some of their religious ceremonies, and, +<span class='pagenum'>122</span>in honour as it seemed of their guests, tore their +cheeks and bosoms with their nails, and threw +themselves upon the stones with their naked +bodies. +</p> +<p> +Three days after this, on June 25, 1579, +Drake received two Ambassadors from the +Hioh, or King, of the country, who, intending +to visit the camp, required that some token +might be sent him of friendship and peace. +This request was readily complied with; and +soon after came the King, attended by a guard +of about an hundred tall men, and preceded by +an Officer of State, who carried a sceptre made +of black wood, adorned with chains made of +a kind of bone or horn, which are marks of the +highest honour among them. Behind him was +the King himself, dressed in a coat of beasts +skins, with a crown woven with feathers upon +his head. His attendants followed, dressed +nearly in the same manner all but the crown; +and after them came the common-people, with +baskets platted so artificially that they held water, +in which, by way of present, they brought +roots and fish. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/201.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh, or King of New Albion.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +Drake, not lulled into security, ranged his +men in order of battle, and waited their approach, +who coming nearer, stood still, while the +scepter-bearer made an oration; at the conclusion +of which, they came again forward at the +foot of the hill, and then the scepter-bearer began +a song, which he accompanied with a dance, +in both which the men joined, but the women +<span class='pagenum'>123</span>danced without singing. Drake now distrusting +them no longer, admitted them into his fortification, +where they continued their song and +dance a short time; and then both the King +and some others of the company made a long +harangue, in which it appeared, by the rest of +their behaviour, that they entreated them to accept +of the government of their country; and +the King, with the concurrence of the rest, placed +the crown upon Drake’s head, graced him with +the chains and other signs of authority, and saluted +him with the title of <i>Hioh</i>. The kingdom +thus offered, though of no farther value to him +than that it furnished him with present necessaries, +Drake thought it not prudent for him to +refuse; and, therefore, took possession of it in +the name of Queen Elizabeth, not without ardent +wishes that this acquisition might be of +use to his native country. The kingdom being +thus consigned, and the grand affair at an end, +the common people left their King and his +Nobles with Drake, and dispersed themselves +over the camp; and when they saw any one +that pleased them more than the rest, they tore +their flesh and vented their outcries, as before, +in token of reverence and respect. They then +proceeded to shew them their wounds and diseases, +in hopes, perhaps, of a miraculous cure; +to which the English, to benefit and undeceive +them at the same time, applied such remedies as +they used on like occasions. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>124</span>They were now grown confident and familiar, +and came down to the camp every day, repeating +their ceremonies, till they were more fully +informed how disagreeable they were to those +whose favour they were so studious of obtaining. +They then visited them without ceremony, indeed, +but with a curiosity so ardent, that it left +them no leisure to provide the necessaries of life, +with which the English were, therefore, obliged +to supply them. They had, then, sufficient opportunity +to remark the custom and disposition +of these new allies, whom they found tractable +and benevolent, strong of body far beyond the +English, yet unfurnished with weapons either +for assault or defence, their bows being too +weak for any thing but sport. Their dexterity +in taking fish was such, that, if they saw them +so near the shore that they could come to them +without swimming, they never missed them. +</p> +<p> +The same curiosity that had brought them in +such crouds to the shore, now induced Drake and +some of his companions to travel up into their +country, which they found at some distance from +the coast very fruitful, filled with large deer, +and abounding with a peculiar kind of cunnies +smaller than ours, with tails like rats, paws such +as those of a mole, and bags under their chins, in +which they carry provisions to their young. +</p> +<p> +The houses of the inhabitants were round +holes dug in the ground, from the brink of +which they raise rafters, or poles, shelving towards +the middle, where they all meet in a +<span class='pagenum'>125</span>ridge, and are crampt together; the people lie +upon rushes, and make the fire in the middle +of the house, letting the smoke fly out at the +door. The men are generally naked; but the +women make a kind of petticoat of bulrushes, +which they comb like hemp, and throw the skin +of a deer over their shoulders. They are very +modest, tractable, and obedient to their husbands. +The soil is but badly cultivated; but +contentment seems to prevail in a very eminent +degree among all ranks of this happy people. +</p> +<p> +The land was named by Drake New Albion, +from its white cliffs, in which it bore some resemblance +to his native country, and the whole +history of the resignation of it to the English +was engraven on a piece of brass, then nailed on +a post, and fixed up before their departure, +which being now discovered by the people to +be near at hand, they could not forbear perpetual +lamentations. +</p> +<p> +When the English on the 23d of July weighed +anchor, they saw them climbing to the tops of +hills, that they might keep them in sight, and +observed fires lighted up in many parts of the +country, on which, as they supposed, sacrifices +were offered. +</p> +<p> +Near to this harbour, they touched at some +islands where they found abundance of seals; +and, despairing now to find any passage through +the northern regions, they, after a general consultation, +determined to steer away to the Moluccas; +and, setting sail July 25, they held a +<span class='pagenum'>126</span>western course for 68 days without sight of land; +and, on September 30, arrived within view of +some islands, about 20 deg. northward from the +Line, from whence the inhabitants resorted to +them in canoes hollowed in the middle, and +raised at both ends so high above the water, that +they seemed almost a semi-circle; they were +burnished in such a manner that they shone like +ebony, and were kept steady by a piece of timber +fixed on each side of them. The first company +that came brought fruits, bananas, and +other things of no great value, with an appearance +of traffic, and exchanged their lading for +other commodities with great show of honesty +and friendship. But having, as they imagined, +laid all suspicion asleep, they sent another fleet +of canoes, of which the crews behaved with all +the insolence of savages, and all the rapacity of +thieves; for, whatever was suffered to come +into their hands, they seemed to consider as their +own, and would neither pay for it nor restore it: +and, at length, finding the English resolved to +admit them no longer, they discharged a shower +of stones from their boats, which insult Drake +prudently and generously returned, by firing his +great guns without hurting them; at which they +were so terrified, that they leaped into the water, +and hid themselves under their canoes. +</p> +<p> +Here we cannot help remarking how nearly +this description agrees with the accounts given +by the late navigators, of the temper and disposition +of the inhabitants of the islands lately discovered +<span class='pagenum'>127</span>between the Tropics. Drake, indeed, +found the firing of his guns without hurting +them, sufficient to intimidate these ignorant +people; but our later voyagers have thought +their vengeance not complete for any slight insult, +without murdering them by wholesale to +strike them with terror. The writer of the late +voyages says, “Our men shewed as much impatience +to destroy them as a sportsman to +kill his game.” +</p> +<p> +Having for some time but little wind, they +did not arrive at the Moluccas till the 3d of +November; and then, designing to touch at +Tidore, as they coasted along the island Mutua, +belonging to the King of Ternate, they were +visited by his Viceroy, who informed them that +it would be more advantageous for them to have +recourse to his master for supplies, than to the +Portuguese, with whom he was at enmity. +Drake was, by the arguments of the Viceroy, +prevailed upon to alter his resolution; and, on +November the 5th, cast anchor before Ternate. +Scarce was he arrived, before the Viceroy, with +others of the chief nobility, came out in three large +barges rowed by forty men on each side, to conduct +the ship into a safe harbour; and, soon after, +the King himself, having received a velvet +cloak by a messenger from Drake, as a token of +peace, came with such a retinue and dignity of +appearance, as was not expected in those remote +parts of the world. He was received with discharges +of cannon, and every kind of music, +<span class='pagenum'>128</span>with which he was so much delighted, that he +invited the performers on board his barge. +</p> +<p> +The King was of a graceful stature and royal +carriage, of a mild aspect and low voice. His +attendants were dressed in white cotton or callico, +of whom some, whose age gave them a venerable +appearance, seemed as councilors, and +the rest officers or nobles. His guards were not +ignorant of fire-arms, but had not many among +them, being equipped for the most part with +bows and darts. The King, having spent some +time in admiring the new objects that presented +themselves, retired as soon as the ship was +brought to anchor, and promised to return on +the day following and in the mean time the +inhabitants, having leave to traffic, brought down +provisions in great abundance. The King came +not aboard, according to his promise, but sent +his brother to excuse him, and withal to invite +Drake ashore, proposing to stay himself as an +hostage for his return. Drake declined going +himself, but sent some gentlemen of his retinue +in company with the King’s brother, and kept +the Viceroy till their return. +</p> +<p> +These gentlemen were received by another of +the king’s brothers, and conduced in great +state to the castle, where there was a court of, +at least, 1000 persons, among whom were threescore +ancient men, privy counsellors to the +king; and on each side of the gate without, +stood four old men of foreign countries, who +served as interpreters in commerce. In a short +<span class='pagenum'>129</span>time appeared the King himself, drest in cloth +of gold, with his hair woven into gold ringlets, a +chain of gold upon his neck, and on his fingers +rings very artificially set with diamonds and jewels +of great value. Over his head was borne a rich +canopy and by his chair of state stood a page +with a fan set with sapphires, to moderate the +excess of the heat. Here he received the compliments +of the English, and then honourably +dismissed them. The castle, which they had +some opportunity of observing, seemed of no +great force. It was built by the Portuguese, +who, attempting to reduce this kingdom into +absolute subjection, murdered the King, and +intended to pursue their plot by the destruction +of all his sons. But the general abhorrence +which cruelty and perfidy naturally excite, +armed the whole nation against them, and procured +their total expulsion from all the dominions +of Ternate, which, from that time, +increasing in power, continued to make new +conquests, and to deprive them of other acquisitions. +</p> +<p> +Here they shipt between four and five tons +of cloves, intending to bring them to Europe. +While they lay before Ternate, a gentleman +came on board attended by his Portuguese interpreter. +He was dressed somewhat in the European +manner, and soon distinguished himself +from the natives of Ternate, or any country they +had ever yet seen, by his civility and quick +comprehension. Such a visitant may easily be +<span class='pagenum'>130</span>imagined to excite their curiosity, which he +gratified by informing them that he was a native +of China, of the family of the King then +upon the throne; and that being accused of a +capital crime, of which, though he was innocent, +he had not sufficient evidence to clear +himself, he had petitioned the Emperor that he +might not be exposed to a trial; but that his +cause might be referred to Divine Providence; +and that he might be allowed to leave his +country, with a prohibition against returning, +unless heaven, in attestation of his innocence, +should enable him to bring back to the King +some intelligence that might be to the honour +and advantage of the Empire of China. In +search of such information he had now spent +three years, and left Tidore for the sake of +conversing with the English General, from +whom he hoped to receive such accounts as would +enable him to return with honour and safety. +Drake, whether he credited or disbelieved his +story, caused a recital to be made by one of the +company, who talked the language of the interpreter, +of such adventures and observations +as he judged would be most pleasing to his visitor, +to all which the Chinese Exile gave the utmost +attention; and, having caused them to be +repeated a second time, to impress them in his +mind, thanked the Creator of the World for +the knowledge he had gained, he then proposed +to the General to sail to his country, to +which he willingly undertook to be his pilot; +<span class='pagenum'>131</span>but Drake could not be induced to prolong his +voyage. +</p> +<p> +He therefore set sail, on Nov. the 9th, in quest +of a more convenient harbour, where he might +clean and refit his ship, which, by the length +of the voyage, and the heat of the climate, was +now become foul and leaky. Directing his +course southward, he soon fell in with an uninhabited +island, which, by its appearance, promised +fair to answer his purpose. At a distance +it looked like a beautiful grove; the trees were +large, straight, and lofty; but, what was more +extraordinary, they were interspersed with such +an astonishing number of shining flies, that the +whole island in the night seemed to glow with +fire. Here they found a convenient haven, and +here they landed and continued 26 days. They +found upon this island tortoise, but of a monstrous +size, and various sorts of fruits of a delicious +flavour. +</p> +<p> +Leaving this place on the 12th of December, +they cruelly deserted the unhappy mulatto +girl whom they had taken for their pleasure +from a ship that fell into their hands on the +coast of New Spain. They had, at the same +time, taken on board a negroe youth, who +they thought might be serviceable to them in +conversing with his nation in their way home; +but, finding him of little or no use on board, +and provisions beginning to fail, they pretended +to send this simple couple far into the country +to gather fruits, and, in the mean time, unmoored +<span class='pagenum'>132</span>the ship, and hoisted sail; and, before +the return of the victims, were out of sight of +their tears, and out of hearing of their cries: a +melancholy instance this of the depravity of +man’s heart, and of the relentless cruelty of +minds addicted to rapine and lust. The poor +girl, not yet fifteen, was ready to be delivered +of an innocent babe; and the youth, not twenty, +was the only resource in the midst of her +distress. What befel them cannot be known; +but Providence seemed to punish the perfidy of the +crew by a severe trial of their fortitude soon after. +</p> +<p> +Having a wind not very favourable, they happened +to be intangled among a multitude of +islands, interspersed with dangerous shallows, +till January the 9th, 1580. When they thought +themselves clear, and were sailing along with +a brisk gale, they were, at the beginning of the +night, suddenly surprized in their course by a +sudden shock, the cause of which was instantly +discovered, for they were thrown upon a concealed +rock, and, by the speed of their course, +fixed too fast for any hope of escaping. +</p> +<p> +Here the intrepidity of Drake was shaken, and +his dexterity baffled: here all the horrors of +mind, attendant on conscious guilt, concurred to +aggravate the distress of those who were instrumental +in abandoning the harmless slaves. Those +who were innocent reproached the guilty with +being the authors of their present distress; and, +among the rest, Mr. Fletcher, the chaplain, +exclaimed against the Captain, as one whose +crimes of murder and lust had brought down +<span class='pagenum'>133</span>divine vengeance on all the company. Drake, +who knew well how to dissemble his resentment, +judging this an improper time to encourage +disputes, endeavoured, by every means in his +power, to appease the increasing animosity. To +preserve, therefore, the minds of the company +at rest, he found it necessary to keep their hands +employed, and, for that purpose, ordered the +pumps to be constantly plied. Convinced by +this experiment that the water did not gain +upon them in the hold, he conceived hopes, +that, by lightening the ship, they might possibly +be able to heave her off. He knew it +would be in vain to persuade them to part with +their treasure, and, therefore, he first caused +the guns to be thrown overboard, and then the +spices; and, afterwards, the water-casks to be +bulged, being in hopes, that, if they could be +released, water might again be supplied from +the neighbouring islands, some of which were at +no great distance. His next attempt was to discover +about the shallows some place where they +might fix an anchor, in order to bring their ship +to, and, by that means, clear her from the rock: +but, upon examination, it was found that the +rock on which they had struck, rose, as many +others in those seas do, almost perpendicular, and +that there was no anchorage, nor any bottom to +be fathomed a boat’s length from the ship. But +this discovery was by Drake wisely concealed from +the common sailors, lest they should abandon +themselves to despair, for which there was, indeed, +much cause, there being no prospect left, +<span class='pagenum'>134</span>but that they must there sink along with the +ship. +</p> +<p> +In this deplorable situation they had remained +for four and twenty hours, when +Drake, finding all human efforts vain, addressed +himself to his companions in distress, and exhorted +them to lay aside all animosities, and +prepare themselves, by forgiving each other, for +obtaining that mercy through Christ, which +they could not hope to receive on any other +terms. “On this occasion,” says my author, +“every thief reconciled himself to his fellow-thief, +and Fletcher administered the sacrament +to them all.” At length, when their +hopes had forsaken them, and no new struggles +could be made, they were, on a sudden, relieved +by the wind’s shifting, and a fresh breeze +springing up, which taking the ship on the leeward +quarter, she reeled off the rock, without +receiving any very dangerous hurt, to the unspeakable +joy of every soul on board. +</p> +<p> +This was the greatest and most inextricable +distress which they had suffered, and made such +an impression upon their minds, that for some +time afterwards they durst not adventure to +spread their sails, but went slowly forward with +the utmost circumspection, till, arriving at the +fruitful island of Baretene, they entered the +port to repair what damage the ship had received +upon the rock. They found the people +of this island of an amiable and obliging disposition, +courteous in their manners, and honest +<span class='pagenum'>135</span>in their dealings. They are finely proportioned, +tall of stature, and of comely features. The +men, in general, go naked; but the women +cover themselves from the waist downwards, +are modest, yet not insensible of love and pleasure. +They found the island abounding with +every necessary, and not as few of the comforts +of life. +</p> +<p> +Having repaired the ship and refreshed the +men, they continued their course without any +material occurrence till the 11th of March, +when they came to anchor before the island of +Java, and sending to the King a present of +cloth and silks, received from him in return a +present supply of refreshments; and on the day +following Drake went himself on shore, and +entertained the King with music, and obtained +leave to store his ship with provisions. This +island was governed by a great number of +petty Kings or Rayas, subordinate to one Chief. +Of these princes three came on board together a +few days after their arrival, and having, upon +their return, recounted the wonders they had +seen, and the civilities with which they had been +treated, incited others to satisfy their curiosity +in the same manner; and Raya Denan, the +chief King, came himself to view the ship, with +the warlike armaments and instruments of navigation. +This intercourse of civilities somewhat +retarded the business for which they came; +but, at length, they not only victualled their +ship, but payed the bottom, which was the +<span class='pagenum'>136</span>more necessary frequently to be repeated, as, at +that time, sheathing of ships was not in practice. +</p> +<p> +The Javans were at this time a warlike people, +well armed, with swords, targets, and daggers, +forged by themselves, and exquisitely +wrought. They were sociable, full of vivacity, +and beyond description happy. They were +likewise hospitable to strangers, and not at all +addicted to thievery, the general characteristic +of the islanders in the Pacific Sea. +</p> +<p> +From Java Drake intended to have visited the +Malaccas, but his company became troublesome, +being desirous of returning home. On +this occasion he called to mind the speech of +Master Fletcher, while they remained hopeless +upon the rock, and, under pretence of his spiriting +up the people to oppose him, he caused +him, says my author, “to be made fast by +one of his legs with a chain, and a staple +knocked fast into the hatches, in the forecastle +of the ship. He called all the company +together, and then put a lock about one +of his legs; and Drake, sitting cross-legged +on a chest, and a pair of pantofles in his +hand, he said, Francis Fletcher, I do here +excommunicate thee out of the Church of +God, and from all the benefits and graces +thereof, and I renounce thee to the devil and +all his angels; and then he charged him, +upon pain of death, not once to come before +the mast; for, if he did, he swore he should +<span class='pagenum'>137</span>be hanged, and Drake caused a posey to be +written, and bound about Fletcher’s arm, +with charge, that if he took it off he should +then be hanged; the posey was, <span class="small-caps">Francis +Fletcher, the falsest knave that liveth</span>.” +It does not, however, appear how +long he was obliged to wear this posey as it is +called. But Drake was obliged to alter his +resolution, and comply with the company’s +desires. +</p> +<p> +On the 25th of March, 1580, he, therefore, +took his departure, and, on the 15th of June, +they doubled the Cape of Good Hope, having +then on board his ship fifty-seven men, and but +three casks of water. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th of July they passed the Line, +reached the coast of Guinea on the 16th, and +on July the 22d arrived at Sierra Leona, after a +most delightful passage, in which they discovered +how much the Portuguese had abused +the world in their false representations of the +horrors and dangers that attended the navigation +round the Cape. At Sierra Leona they +staid two days to refresh the men, and, having +furnished themselves with wood and water for +the remainder of the voyage, they set sail for +England in high expectation of enriching their +country with the spoils of the Spaniards. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th of September they made the +island of Ferara, and, on the third of November, +they entered the harbour of Plymouth. +In this voyage Drake surrounded the world, +<span class='pagenum'>138</span>which no Commander in Chief had ever done +before; and what, at that time appeared a thing +extraordinary, by steering a western course they +had lost a day in their account. +</p> +<p> +Their success in this voyage, and the immense +wealth<a href='#fn_2' id='fnb_2' class='fn_anchor'>[2]</a> they brought home, raised much discourse +throughout the kingdom; some highly +commending, and some as loudly decrying the +principles upon which it was acquired. The +former alledged, that this enterprize was not +only honourable to the Commander who conducted, +and the crew who assisted in the performance +of it, but to their country; that it would +establish our reputation for maritime skill in foreign +nations, and raise a laudable spirit of emulation +at home; and that, as to the money, our +merchants having suffered deeply by the treachery +<span class='pagenum'>139</span>and villainy of the Spaniards in the new discovered +country, there was nothing more just than +that the nation should receive an equivalent by +the reprisals which Drake and his company, at +the hazard of their lives, had bravely extorted. +</p> +<div class='footnote' id='fn_2'> +<p> +<a href='#fnb_2'>[2]</a> Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, says, that Drake carried +from the coast of Peru, 866,000 pezoes of silver, equal to +866 quintals, equal to 100 pound weight each quintal, +amounting to 1,139,200 ducats. He also carried away +100,000 pezoes of gold, equal to 10 quintals, each quintal +valued at 1500 Spanish ducats; and all this over and above +the treasure in the ship, which was not entered, consisting +of gold, silver, pearls, precious stones, coined money, and +other things of great value. He also rifled the ships from +the Philippines, laden with spices, silks, velvets, and other +rich merchandize, the value not known.⁠—By the above +account, the silver only, at 5s. per oz. amounts to 259,800l. +and the gold to 48,000l. sterl. But we have seen a manuscript +that makes the value of the whole cargo brought home by the +Golden Hind (for that was the name that Drake chose his +ship, the Pelican, should be known by) amount to 800,000l. +though that which was divided among the crew was only +80,000l. Is it not reasonable then to conclude, that the Queen +and Council had a considerable share of the remainder? +</p> +</div> +<p> +The other party argued, that Drake, in fact, +was no better than a pirate; that, of all others, +it least became a trading nation to countenance +such depredations; that the expedition was not +only a breach of all our treaties with Spain, but +likewise of our old leagues with the House of +Burgundy; and that the consequences would +infallibly involve the Queen in a war, by which +the nation would suffer infinitely more than the +riches acquired by a single ship could counterbalance. +</p> +<p> +These were the sentiments, and these the speculations +with which the different parties amused +themselves for some time after the arrival of +Drake in his native country. At length, the approbation +of the Queen determined the dispute; for +all acquiesced in the wisdom of their Sovereign. +</p> +<p> +On the 4th of April, 1581, her Majesty went +to Deptford, and dined on board the ship in +which so many Kings had been entertained before; +and, after dinner, she conferred the honour +of knighthood on her Commander; an honour +not to be obtained in those days on trivial +occasions, but as a reward for signal services. +This mark of distinction was a full declaration of +her Majesty’s approbation, silenced Drake’s enemies, +and gave joy to his friends. She likewise gave +<span class='pagenum'>140</span>directions for the preservation of the ship, that +it might remain a monument of his own and his +country’s glory. +</p> +<p> +What contributed the more to render the +fame of Drake illustrious, was the frequent +attempts that had been made by navigators, +the most renowned in their time, to atchieve +the fame; but without success. In 1527 +the Spaniards sent Gracca de Loaisa, a Knight +of Malta, with a squadron of seven ships to follow +the rout of Magellan, who, though his ship +returned to Spain, yet he himself lost his life, +before he arrived at the Malaccas, the promised +islands. Loaisa passed the straits, indeed, lost +some of his ships in the South Seas, others put +into the ports of New Spain, and only his own +vessel and one more reached the East Indies, +where himself and all his people perished. +</p> +<p> +In 1526, the Genoese sent two ships to pass +the straits, of which one was cast away, and the +other returned home without effecting any thing. +</p> +<p> +Sebastian Cabot, in the service of the crown of +Portugal, made the like trial; but, not being +able to find the straits, returned into the river +of Plate. +</p> +<p> +Americus Vespusius, a Florentine, from whom +the new world received its name, undertook to +perform, in the service of the crown of Portugal, +what Cabot had promised without effect; but +that vain man was still more unfortunate; for +he could neither find the straits, nor the river of +Plate. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>141</span>Some years after this, the Spaniards equipped +a stout squadron, under the command of Simon +de Alcasara; but, before they reached the height +of the straits, the crews mutinied, and obliged +their Commander to return. +</p> +<p> +Such repeated miscarriages discouraged even +the ablest and boldest seamen; so that from this +time both Spaniards and others dropped all +thoughts of emulating Magellan, till Drake +conceiving his design, as has already been said, +concealed it in his breast till ripe for execution. +</p> +<p> +Being now advanced to eminence, in 1585 he +was employed in the Queen’s service, and sent +on an expedition to the West Indies as Commander +in Chief; and having under him Captain +Martin Forbisher, Captain Knollys, and +other experienced Officers of the royal navy, he +took St. Jago, St. Domingo, Carthagena, and +St. Augustin. He returned elated with his success; +but, as my author says, not much enriched +by the plunder. +</p> +<p> +In 1587, he was again employed in an expedition +to Lisbon, in which Captain Forbisher +also bore a part. Here they gained intelligence +that a considerable fleet was assembled in the +bay of Cadiz, with a view to the forming an armament +for the invasion of England; he immediately +repaired to their place of rendezvous, +and fell upon them at unawares; and, as it is +said, burnt 10,000 tons of shipping, with all the +stores which they were amassing for the intended +invasion. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>142</span>In their return they fell in with a carrack +from the East Indies, richly laden, of which +they likewise got intelligence in the port of Lisbon. +This was the St. Philip, of which Linschoten +gives the following account, when this +Dutchman was at Goa, the chief settlement of +the Portuguese in the East Indies: “There +came in, he says, from the island of Japan, +certain Jesuits, and with them three Princes, +being the children of so many Kings of that +country, wholly apparelled like Jesuits, not +one of them above the age of 15 years, being +minded by the persuasion of the Jesuits to +visit Portingall, and from thence to go to +Rome to see the Pope, thereby to procure +great profit, privileges, and liberties for the +missionaries in that island. +</p> +<p> +“In 1584, they set sail for Portingallo, and +from thence travelled into Spain, where, by +the King and all the Spanish nobility, they +were with honour received, and presented +with many gifts, which the Jesuits kept for +themselves. +</p> +<p> +“Out of Spain, they rode to see the Pope; +that done, they travelled throughout Italy, +where they were much honoured, and presented +with many rich presents, by means of +the great report the Jesuits made of them. +</p> +<p> +“To conclude, they returned to Madrid, +where with great honour they took their leave +of the King, who furnished them with letters +of recommendation to the Viceroy, and all +<span class='pagenum'>143</span>the Portingall Governors of India; so they +went to Lisbon, and there took shipping in +1586, and came to Goa in the ship called +St. Philip, which ship, in her return to Portingall, +was taken by Captain Drake, being +the first that was taken coming from the East +Indies; which the Portuguese took for an +evil sign, because the ship bore the King’s +own name;” both Spain and Portugal being +at that time governed by the same Sovereign. +</p> +<p> +“When the Princes and Jesuits of Japan arrived +at Goa on their return from Europe, +they were received, adds Linschoten, with +great rejoicings; for it was verily thought +they had all been dead. On their landing +they were all three apparelled in cloth of gold +and silver after the Italian manner, being the +same the Italian noblemen and gentlemen had +given them. They came to Goa very lively +and in high spirits; and the Jesuits were not +a little proud, that through their means the +voyage had been successfully performed. In +Goa they staid till the monsoon or time of the +wind’s setting in to sail for China, and thence +to Japan, where, with great triumph and +wondering of all the people, they were received +and welcomed home, to the great furtherance +of the Jesuits.” +</p> +<p> +The St. Philip, in her voyage to Goa, had been +driven by stress of weather into Masambique, +where she met with the St. Laurence, homeward +bound, that had likewise been driven into the +<span class='pagenum'>144</span>same port disabled, having lost her masts, and +received other considerable damage, by which +she was rendered unserviceable. The St. Philip, +therefore, as soon as she had landed her passengers +at Goa, returned to Masambique, and took +in the lading of the St. Laurence, which enabled +her to make her voyage to Europe about the usual +time; a circumstance fortunate for Drake, as it +increased both his fame and his fortune. +</p> +<p> +In 1588, Drake was appointed Vice-Admiral, +under Charles Lord Effingham Howard, High-Admiral +of England, to oppose the formidable +armada that had for three years before been secretly +preparing in Spain for the invasion of +England. In Drake’s letter to Lord Treasurer +Burleigh, acquainting him with the approach +of the Spaniards, he concludes with this elegant +compliment to his superior: “That, though the +strength of the enemy out-went report, yet +the chearfulness and courage which the Lord +Admiral expressed gave all who had the honour +to serve under him assurance of victory;” +a compliment which was the more admired in +Drake, as in a former letter to the same Minister, +in which he tells him of his gallant atchievement +in the port of Cadiz, “Not resting, said he, at +Lisbon, we sailed so close to the Spanish King, +<em>that we singed his beard</em>;” a course metaphor, +it must be owned, but strongly characteristic. +</p> +<p> +Drake’s good fortune still accompanied him; +for in the engagement which afterwards happened +on the arrival of the armada, though he committed +<span class='pagenum'>145</span>the greatest error that ever Commander +was guilty of, by pursuing some hulks belonging +to the Hans Towns for plunder, when +he was entrusted to carry lights in the night for +the direction of the English fleet, he misled the +Admiral; yet he was the only Commander who +profited most by the destruction of the enemy. +Lord Howard, supposing the lights of the Spanish +Admiral to be the lights which Drake was +ordered to carry, was entangled in the very +centre of the Spanish fleet, before he found +his mistake; but, fortunately, night favouring +his escape, he disengaged himself before he was +discovered. This blunder was afterwards effaced +by the gallant behaviour of Drake, than +whom no man was ever bolder, or more determined. +We do not, however, find his name +among the Commanders whom the Lord High +Admiral thought proper to thank for their services +on that occasion. On the 2d of July, says +Strype, Sir Francis, observing a large Spanish +galleon, commanded by Don Pedro de Valdez, +who was the reputed projector of the invasion, +floating at a distance from both fleets, sent his +pinnace to summon the Captain to surrender, +who at first vauntingly set him at defiance; but +being told it was Drake that required him to +yield, he immediately struck his colours, and, +with 46 of his crew, came on board the conqueror. +In this ship he found 50,000 ducats, +with other effects to a much greater amount. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>146</span>The next year he was appointed Admiral of a +squadron sent to place Don Antonio on the throne +of Portugal, to which that Prince pretended to +have a right. “But, says Rapin, (whose account +of this expedition we shall follow) as the Queen +was extremely frugal, and an undertaking +against Spain could not but be very expensive, +she so ordered it, that Drake and Norris took +upon them to be at the charge, in hopes of +making themselves amends by the booty they +should meet with. So she only found them +six ships of war, with a present of 60,000 l. +with leave to raise soldiers and sailors for the +expedition. Drake had already tried the +Spaniards in America and in the Channel, and +was convinced they were more formidable in +common opinion than in reality; wherefore, +joining with Sir John Norris, and some other +private persons, they equipped a fleet, and +embarked 11,000 soldiers and 1500 marines. +The Hollanders having also added +some ships, the fleet consisted, according to +Stow, of 146 sail, transports and victuallers +included. Drake commanded at sea, and +Norris was General of the land forces. They +took with them Don Antonio, who hoped, by the +assistance of the English, to be put in possession +of his kingdom, where he pretended to have +many friends. +</p> +<p> +“They sailed from Plymouth on the 18th of +April, and soon after arrived at the Groyne, +where landing their troops, they assaulted the +<span class='pagenum'>147</span>lower town, and carried it by storm. Then +they besieged the upper town. But Norris, +having advice that the Conde di Andrada was +approaching with a body of troops to relieve +the place, suddenly raised the siege to march +against him; and, overtaking him, slew 3000 +of his men. This done, he burnt several +villages; and, without returning to the siege, +re-embarked his troops, their principal design +being against Portugal. +</p> +<p> +“Whilst they were sailing towards the coasts +of that kingdom, they were joined by the Earl +of Essex, with some ships he had armed at his +own charge, unknown to the Queen. Some +days after, they arrived at Panicha, a little +town in Portugal, and, taking it, restored it +to Don Antonio; from thence Norris marched +by land to Lisbon, Drake promising to follow +with the fleet up the Tagus. The army +marched 40 miles without opposition; and +encamping before Lisbon, took the suburbs +of St. Catharine: but, as Drake performed +not his promise, and the army wanted cannon +and ammunition, it was resolved in a council of +war to retire. This resolution was taken, because +there was no appearance that the Portuguese +were inclined to revolt, as Don Antonio +had expected; and also, because there was no +news of the succours he had boasted of from +the King of Morocco. The army marching +towards the mouth of the Tagus, met Drake, +who had taken the town of Cascaes, and excused +<span class='pagenum'>148</span>himself upon the impossibility of performing +his promise. Some days after, the +castle of Cascaes surrendering, it was blown +up; and, to make themselves amends for the +charges of the expedition, the English seized +sixty vessels laden with corn, and all manner +of naval stores to equip a new fleet against +England, belonging to the Hans Towns. +Then they went and took Vigo, which was +abandoned by the inhabitants; and, firing +the town, returned to England. This expedition +did some damage to the King of Spain, +but was of no benefit to Elizabeth; and the +booty was not sufficient to pay for equipping +the fleet, though Camden says, they brought +home 150 pieces of heavy cannon, and a great +booty. Above six thousand men perished in +this expedition by sickness.” +</p> +<p> +The writers of Drake’s life say, that Norris +grievously reproached Drake with breach of his +promise, and charged the miscarriage of the expedition +to his timidity. Indeed, Drake’s good +genius seems now to have forsaken him; and +happy, say the same writers, if, having received +this first check at play, he had withdrawn his +stake. +</p> +<p> +As the war with Spain continued, Hawkins +and Drake, who, as it should seem, wanted to +continue their old game, where the profits were +more, and the danger less, united their interest +to persuade the Queen and Council to undertake +an effectual expedition to the West Indies, by +<span class='pagenum'>149</span>which the nation might be enriched, and the +enemy deprived of those resources by which +they were enabled to carry on the war. +</p> +<p> +For this purpose they procured, according to +Rapin, twenty-six of the Queen’s ships, the +equipment of which, like the former, seems to +have been supplied by private adventure; a practice +at that time very common, where plunder +was to be the reward. The preparations for +this expedition, however, as it far exceeded all +former enterprizes to the American Indies, could +not be made so privately, or conducted so secretly, +but that the Spaniards found means to +discover both its strength and destination, and +prepared themselves accordingly. +</p> +<p> +As the places that were to be attacked lay at +a great distance, it was necessary to gain time, in +order to fortify them. It was, therefore, found +necessary to devise some expedient to prevent +the sailing of that formidable armament, till +every thing was in readiness to oppose it. Accordingly, +it was given out, that a second invasion +was intended against England; and when +the Spanish fleet was ready to sail for America, +that had been equipping under pretence of an +invasion, a sham attack was made upon Cornwall, +in order to spread an alarm, and give it +countenance. +</p> +<p> +This had the desired effect. It was thought +improper to part with so many stout ships while +the nation was threatened; and the expedition +was therefore retarded, till the panic had subsided. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>150</span>It was therefore the 28th of August, in 1695, +before the Commanders obtained permission to +sail; and in the mean time the Queen having +received advice that the plate fleet was safe arrived +in Europe, and that only one ship, which +had sprung her mast, remained behind, her Majesty +acquainted them with the intelligence, and +advised them to attack Porto Rico, before +they pursued their grand enterprize, by which +they might make themselves masters of the galleon +without losing much time in the conquest. +</p> +<p> +Sir Francis Drake, who was not formed to +act in conjunct expeditions, had not been long +at sea before he differed in opinion from his fellow +Commander, and pursued a project totally +different from the first object of the voyage, in +which, however, he was seconded by Sir Thomas +Baskerville, Commander of the land forces. This +scheme was to attack the Canaries in the way to +America; in which, however, they failed; and +spending necessarily much time in the island of +Dominica in landing and refreshing the men, +who, being unused to long voyages in hot climates, +were many of them unfit to proceed, +the Spaniards had so effectually prepared themselves, +that, when the Generals came to action, +they found an opposition very different from what +they expected; and were soon sensible, that +what they had formerly effected by surprize +with a handful of sailors, was not now to be +accomplished with a whole army of disciplined +troops. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>151</span>In their course to Porto Rico, one of the +sternmost ships of the English fleet fell into the +hands of five Spanish frigates that had been +sent from Spain to convoy home the galleon +from that port. From this ship they gained the +intelligence of the intended attack, the consequences +of which being foreseen by Sir John +Hawkins, it threw him into a sudden disorder, +of which in a few days he died⁠—some say, of +a broken heart. +</p> +<p> +They were now, Nov. 12, 1595, before +Porto Rico, and the same evening that Sir John +Hawkins died, as the principal officers were at +supper, a cannon-shot from the fort pierced the +cabin, killed Sir Nicholas Clifford, wounded +Captain Stratford, mortally wounded Sir Brute +Browne, and struck the stool from under Sir +Francis Drake, as he was drinking success to +the attack. +</p> +<p> +The next day, pursuant to a resolution of a council +of war, a general attack was made upon the +shipping in the harbour, but without effect. The +Spaniards suffered much, but the English more; +who, finding it impossible to make an impression +upon the fortifications of the town, weighed +anchor, and steered to Rio de la Hacha, set +fire to the town and burned it to the ground: +they likewise performed some other exploits +of the like kind; but having landed the troops +destined to cross the isthmus to attack Panama, +after a fatiguing march in which they were great +sufferers, they returned, without being able to +<span class='pagenum'>152</span>reach the place. This disappointment materially +affected Drake, who having, as he thought, +provided a sufficient force to carry into execution +the enterprize which he had well-nigh effected +with a few sailors and Symerons some +years before, could not bear the thought of surviving +his disgrace. “Now, says Fuller, began +the discontent of Sir Francis Drake to feed +upon him. He conceived, that expectation, +a merciless usurer, computing each day since +his departure, exacted an interest and return +of honour and profit proportionable to his +great preparations, and transcending his former +atchievements. He saw that all the good +which he had done in his voyage, consisted +in the evil he had done the Spaniards afar off, +whereof he could present but small visible +fruits in England. These apprehensions accompanying, +if not causing, the disease of +the flux, wrought his sudden death; and sickness +did not so much untie his cloaths, as +sorrow did rend at once the robe of his mortality +asunder. He lived by the sea, died on +it, and was buried in it.” +</p> +<p> +This account of the manner of Sir Francis +Drake’s death seems to be authentic, though +some have not scrupled to insinuate, that sickness +had no part in that catastrophe. Be that +as it may, Fuller’s reflections upon it deserve to +be remembered. “Thus, says he, we see how +great spirits, having mounted to the highest +pitch of performance, afterwards strain and +<span class='pagenum'>153</span>break their credit in striving to go beyond it; +Or, it may be, God oftentimes leaves the +brightest men in an eclipse, to shew that +they do but borrow their lustre from his +reflection.” +</p> +<p> +Thus we have endeavoured to trace the actions +of this celebrated navigator from beginning +to end. If we have withdrawn the veil, +which has hitherto covered his infirmities, it has +been in the pursuit of truth; not with a design +to detract from his real merit, but to shew his +character in the true light. In the current of +success, even crimes of the deepest die are sometimes +patronised even by the public. The actions +which gave rise to Drake’s popularity, are such +as a courageous leader, with an hundred armed +followers, might in these peaceable times easily +perform, by entering the cities or towns on the +coast of Britain, in the dead of night, cutting +the throats of the watch, and all who happen to +be awake in the streets, breaking open and +plundering houses, and churches, seizing every +thing valuable that should fall into their hands, +and before the people could recover from their +consternation, making their escape with their +booty. Were such a company masters of an +armed vessel, if there were no ship of force to +oppose them, what should hinder their sailing +from place to place, and, <em>provided they could +out-run report</em>, performing the like exploits in +every town they came to? Would there be anything +truly great in this? Or would the man +<span class='pagenum'>154</span>who should undertake and execute an enterprize +of such a horrid nature, be justly entitled +to the name of Hero? If not, what shall we +say of Drake’s nocturnal enterprize on Nombre +de Dios; of his way-laying the treasure in the +road from Panama; of his ranging the unarmed +coasts of Chili and Peru; and of his plundering +villages, towns, and ships belonging to a +peaceable unsuspecting people, with whom his +nation was at peace, and from whom opposition +was not to be dreaded? What, indeed, did the +people at that time say? Those who were the +sufferers cried out loudly against the plunderer; +and Bernardine de Mendoza, the Spanish +Ambassador at the court of Queen Elizabeth, +insisted that he should be punished for his robberies, +and that all the money and effects he +had seized should be restored; but, if the Queen +was a private adventurer, as, from Drake’s declaration +to his followers, and from other instances +of the womanish littlenesses of that +Princess, there is reason to suspect, What hope +was there of justice or restitution from remonstrance? +Indeed, it served that avaricious Queen +for a pretence to sequester the treasure which +Drake brought home, and to convert, it is probable, +the greatest part of it to her own use; +for, as we have already shewn from good authority +in a note, though the whole booty was valued +at 800,000l. yet only 80,000l. was divided +among the plunderers; and Rapin tells us, that +some part of the treasure was afterwards repaid +<span class='pagenum'>155</span>by the Queen to Spain. If she had not retained +enough in her hands, no one will suppose, that +the Sovereign, who could cause the goods of her +favourite Leicester to be set to public sale after +his death, for the payment of money she had +lent him, would have repaid to Spain from her +own coffers the plunder that had been unjustly +taken by one of her meaner subjects. +</p> +<p> +To dignify actions, therefore, of the most infamous +piracy with the name of great, is to exalt +vice, and to substitute successful villainy in +the place of substantial virtue. If we view Drake +in the light of a courageous plunderer, he may +vie with the De la Poles, the Blackbeards, or +any of those daring disturbers of the times in +which they lived, who struck a panic wherever +they roved to commit their ravages: but, consider +him as a Commander, employed in the defence +of his country, and we shall see nothing +to admire, except his courage. In the first enterprize +in which he was engaged, he was indeed +successful. The Queen, suspecting an intention +in Philip of Spain to revenge the injuries his +subjects had received, pitched upon Drake, who +had given the offence, as the fittest man to prevent +the consequences. He, therefore, as he had +done before, attacked the enemy by surprize, +and set fire to a defenceless number of transports +assembled in the harbour of Cadiz, without a +ship of war to protect them, or a gun fired by +way of opposition. The accident which afterwards +threw the rich India ship in his way, on +<span class='pagenum'>156</span>his return home, did him no honour as a Commander, +though it gave him credit as a fortunate +adventurer: nor did his behaviour in the +Channel, when, instead of maintaining his post, +he pursued the Hans merchant ships, add at all +to his reputation as a Vice-Admiral. His American +enterprize with Lord Carlisle was attended +with no laurels; and the only two enterprizes +in which he was employed in a joint command, +he ruined by his perfidy and self-conceit. +</p> +<p> +It may, indeed, be urged in Drake’s defence, +that it was the policy of the Queen his Sovereign, +to countenance her subjects in distressing +Spain, and in mortifying the haughty monarch +who sat upon the throne; and that almost all +the heroes of her active reign, acquired their +glory by practices founded on the same prevailing +principle. +</p> +<p> +This argument in his favour cannot be denied +its due wright. The expeditions of Sir John +Hawkins; of Sir Walter Raleigh; of Lord +Carlisle; of Sir John Norris; of the Earl of Essex; +of Cavendish; and, indeed, of most others +undertaken against Spain; were professedly +with a view to plunder; and the charges of fitting +them out were chiefly borne by those who +were to be sharers in the booty: yet, surely, +there is a material difference between the glory +that is purchased by valour in the field, and +fame that is acquired by compacts to surprize +the innocent, and invade the property of the +peaceable. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>157</span>Having now seen Drake in two distinct points +of view, as a leader of a company of plunderers, +and as a Commander in the royal navy, let us do +justice to his character by viewing him as a mariner, +and in that light he will hardly have his equal. +To project a voyage round the globe, and to +conduct it without the assistance of a single mariner +on board who had ever crossed the Line, +Nuno da Silva, the Portuguese pilot, excepted, +was, perhaps, one of the boldest exploits that +ever man performed. His navigating his ships +along the coast of Brazil; his carrying them +through the straits of Magellan in a shorter +time than any mariner has ever done since; his +keeping the sea in a storm for thirty days together; +his skill in navigating the coasts of Chili, +Peru, and New Spain, where no English ship +had ever sailed; his accuracy in discovering the +track of the Spanish ship from the East Indies, +and his consummate sagacity in pursuing a new +course home to avoid pursuers; cannot be enough +admired or applauded. His knowledge of the +globe is manifest from the first attempt he made +to return home by a northern passage; a passage +which he knew would not only secure him from +the danger of pursuers, but, were it practicable, +would open a free intercourse between his nation +and the rich inhabitants of that opulent +country in which he was then situated. Finding +himself, however, disappointed in this design, +how great was his sagacity in the discovery +of an unknown country, wherein to repair his +<span class='pagenum'>158</span>ship, refresh his followers, take in wood and +water, and to supply himself with every necessary +for the vast voyage by sea he was to encounter; +and yet, such was his knowledge in +making provision against every contingency that +might happen, that he lost but one man by sickness +during the long run from the coast of New +Spain to the Ladrones, in which Commodore +Anson lost near half his crew. Nor is his skill +less to be admired in his return from the Ladrones, +the most dangerous navigation of any +part of the known world; for, except the accident +upon the rock, as has already been related, +he sailed from the Ladrones to Java unembarrassed; +from Java to Sierra Leona, on the coast +of Africa, without touching at any port, or +encountering any difficulty, save from a scarcity +of water; a thing hardly to be credited, and +which was never performed by any mariner +before his time, or since. +</p> +<div class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'>159</span> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='lspc'>THE</span><br> +<span class='font2p'><span class='lspd'>VOYAGES</span></span><br> +<span class='lspc'>OF</span><br> +<span class='l12'><span class='lspa'><span class="small-caps">Capt. THOMAS CAVENDISH</span></span>,</span><br> +<span class='fontp9'>THE SECOND ENGLISH NAVIGATOR WHO SAILED ROUND THE WORLD.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +T<span class='toupper lspz ip2'>his</span> Gentleman was descended from an +antient family in Suffolk, whose ancestors +came into England with William the Conqueror. +His father, William Cavendish, of Trimley St. +Martin, near Ipswich, dying young, left his son +Thomas a minor, and heir to the manors of +Trimley, Stratton, and Grimston, with other +lands of inheritance to a very considerable +amount: but this youth, whose atchievements +we are about to relate, being of a high-spirited +disposition, and, as soon as he came of age, +subject to no controul, fell early into the fashionable +gallantries and vices of the times, and +dissipated the best part of his ample fortune before +he entertained any thoughts of applying to +business, or, perhaps, was sensible how deeply +his affairs were embarrassed. +</p> +<p> +But he no sooner began to reflect, and to perceive, +that, without application to some kind of +employment, he must be undone, than he made +choice of a sea-faring life, not only as most suitable +to his unsettled turn of mind, but also as +the most likely means of restoring his fortune, +and establishing his credit. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>160</span>The kingdom was now involved in war with +the Spaniards, the then most powerful, and consequently +the haughtiest and most formidable +people in Europe, who, drawing immense riches +from their new acquisitions in America, not only +raised the envy but the enmity of other powers, +by their pride and their perfidy. +</p> +<p> +Gentlemen of fortune, and gentlemen of no +fortune, were about this time equally encouraged +to distress the enemy. The war laid open +an immense field for enterprize; and every one +was at liberty to share the harvest, who was willing +to bestow the pains of gathering the produce +and bringing it home. +</p> +<p> +Among the most active and the most indefatigable +was Sir Walter Raleigh, who not only +was the most experienced, but the most successful +leader of his time. With him our adventurer +first determined to embark; and, as Sir Walter +had just projected a new voyage to America at +his own charge, he was ready enough to admit +associates, who were able and willing to bear a +part of the expence. Unfortunately for our +new adventurer, all the advantage he derived +from this project was only in the knowledge he +obtained of sea affairs, and of the temper and +genius of the people with whom he had to deal; +for the profits that accrued from the voyage by +no means answered the sums employed in pursuing +it. He observed, that, by means of their +great riches, the Spaniards could command intelligence +of all that was in agitation against +<span class='pagenum'>161</span>them on this side the globe; but that, if they +were to be taken off their guard, the southern +hemisphere must be the place of action. He +had already an example, in Sir Francis Drake, +of the immense wealth that was to be acquired +on the coast of Peru, if secrecy could be preserved, +and he determined to be upon his guard, +and to keep his design solely within his own +breast. +</p> +<p> +With this view he sold a part of the remains +of his estate, and set about building two ships +proper for his enterprize at Harwich, at that +time an obscure port, namely, one called the +<i>Desire</i>, of 120 tons; and another of 60, called the +<i>Content</i>; to these he added the <i>Hugh Gallant</i>, a +bark of 40 tons. In the equipment of this little +squadron, he purchased many articles of commerce +to cover his design, and then privately +laid in guns, ammunition and stores, with a +moderate quantity of provisions, intending to +purchase the rest at some other convenient port, +when he was just ready to depart. +</p> +<p> +He likewise enlisted but half his complement +of men; and when he arrived at Plymouth he +supplied the rest. In the whole conduct of +what has been already related, he was his own sole +director, and none of those who sailed with him +knew whither he was bound, till after their +embarkation at Plymouth. It is even uncertain +whether Lord Hounsdon, who procured his +commission, knew the place of his destination. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>162</span>An enterprize so well concerted cannot fail +to excite curiosity; and as it was excellently +written by Mr. Pretty, brother to Sir William, +who accompanied Cavendish throughout the +voyage, it will best appear in its ancient +dress. +</p> +<p> +“We departed, says Mr. Pretty, out of +Plymouth on Thursday the 21st of July, 1586, +with three sails (to wit, the Desire a ship of +120 tons, the Content of 60 tons, and the +Hugh Gallant a bark of 40 tons); in which +small fleet were 123 persons of all sorts, with +all kind of furniture, and victuals sufficient for +the space of two years. On Tuesday the 26th +of the same month, we were forty-five leagues +from Cape Finis Terræ, where we met with five +sails of Biscayers, coming from the Grand Bay +in Newfoundland, as we supposed, which our +Admiral shot at, and fought with them three +hours; but we took none of them, by reason +the night grew on. +</p> +<p> +The 1st of August we came in sight of Fort +Ventura, one of the isles of the Canaries, about +ten o’clock in the morning. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday, being the 7th of August, we +were gotten as high as Rio del Oro, on the coast +of Barbary. +</p> +<p> +On Monday the 19th, we fell in with Cape +Blanco, but the wind blew so much at the +North, that we could not get up where the +Canters do use to ride and fish: therefore we +lay off six hours west-south-west, because of the +<span class='pagenum'>163</span>sand which lieth off the Cape south-west and +by south. +</p> +<p> +The 15th day of the same month we were +in the height of Cape Verd, by estimation +fifty leagues off the same. The 18th, Sierra +Leona did bear east of us, being forty leagues +from us; and the same day the wind shifted to +the north-west; so that, by the 20th day of +the said month, we were in six degrees thirty +minutes to the northward of the Equinoctial +Line. +</p> +<p> +The 23d, we set sail for Sierra Leona, and +on the 25th day we fell in with the point on +the south-side of Sierra Leona, which Mr. +Brewer knew very well, and went in before with +the Content, which was Vice-admiral: and we +had no less than five fathoms water when we +had least, and had, for fourteen leagues in south-west, +all the way running into the harbour of +Sierra Leona, sixteen, fourteen, twelve, ten, +and eight fathoms of water. +</p> +<p> +The 26th of the said month, we put into the +harbour; and, in going in, we had by the +southmost point at least five fathoms water by +the rock, which lieth at the said point: and +after we came within two or three cables length +of the said rock, we never had less than ten +fathoms water until we came up to the road, +which is about a league from the point, bordering +always on the south-side until you come +up to the watering-place, in which bay is the +best road: but you must ride far into the bay, +<span class='pagenum'>164</span>because there runs prodigious great tides in the +offing, and it commonly floweth into the road +at a south-east and by east moon. +</p> +<p> +It is from England to this place 930 leagues; +which we ran from the 21st of July to the 26th +of this month of August. On Saturday, being +the 27th day, there came two negroes +from the shore aboard our Admiral, and made +signs unto our General that there was a Portuguese +ship within the harbour; so the Hugh +Gallant, being the Rear-admiral, went up three +or four leagues, but, for want of a pilot, they +went no farther; for the harbour runneth up +three or four leagues more, and is of a prodigious +breadth, and very dangerous, as we +were afterwards informed by a Portuguese. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday the 28th, the General sent some +of his company on shore, and there, as they +played and danced all the forenoon among the +negroes, to the end that they might hear some +good news of the Portuguese ship, and as they +were returning to go on board, they spied a +Portuguese, which lay hid among the bushes, +whom we took and brought away with us the +same night: and he told us it was very dangerous +going up with our boats in search of the +ship that was at the town. Whereupon we +went not to seek her, because we knew he told +us the truth for we bound him and made him +fast, and so examined him. He told us also, +that his ship was there cast away, and that there +were two more of his company among the negroes. +<span class='pagenum'>165</span>The Portuguese’s name was Emmanuel, +and was by his occupation a chalker, belonging +to the port of Portugal. +</p> +<p> +On Monday morning, being the 29th day, our +General landed with 70 men, or thereabouts, and +went up to their town, where we burnt two or +three houses, and took what spoil we could, +which was but little; but all the people fled: +and, in our retiring on board, in a very little +plain, at their town’s end, they shot their arrows +at us out of the woods, and hurt three or four of +our men. Their arrows were poisoned; but yet +none of our men miscarried at that time. Their +town is very artificially built with mud walls; +their houses built round, with their yards paled +in, and kept very clean, as are their streets. +These negroes used great obedience to their +King, as one of our men said, which was an hostage +for the negroes which came first. There +were in their town, by estimation, about one +hundred houses. +</p> +<p> +The first of September, there went many of +our men on shore at the watering-place, and +did wash shirts very quietly all the day. And +the second day they went again, and the negroes +were in ambush round about the place; and +the carpenter of the Admiral going into the +wood, to do some special business, espied them +by good fortune. But the negroes rushed out +upon our men so suddenly, that, in retiring to +our boats, many of them were hurt; among +whom Wm. Pickman, a soldier, was shot in the +thigh; who, plucking the arrow out, broke it, +<span class='pagenum'>166</span>and left the head behind; and he told the chirurgeons +that he plucked out all the arrow, because +he would not have them lance his thigh: +whereupon the poison wrought so that night, that +he was prodigiously swolen, and the next morning +he died; the piece of the arrow with the +poison being afterwards plucked out of his thigh. +</p> +<p> +The 3d day of the said month, divers of our +fleet went up four miles within the harbour with +our boat, and caught great store of fish, and +went on shore, and took lemons from the trees; +and, coming on board again, saw two buffaloes. +</p> +<p> +The 6th day we departed from Sierra Leona, +and went out of the harbour, and staid one tide +three leagues from the point of the mouth of +the harbour, in six fathoms, and it flowed south-south-west. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday, being the 7th of the same +month, we departed for one of the isles of +Cape Verd, which is ten leagues distant from +the point of Sierra Leona and about five o’clock +the same night we anchored about two miles off +the island, in six fathoms water, and landed the +same night, and found plantains only upon the +island. +</p> +<p> +The 8th day, one of our boats went out, and +sounded about the island, and they passed +through a Sound at the west end of the island, +where they found five fathoms water round +about the island, until they came to the very +gut of the Sound, and then for a cast or two +they had but two fathoms water, and presently +after six fathoms, and so deeper and deeper. +<span class='pagenum'>167</span>And, at the east end of the island, there was a +town where negroes resorted at some times, as +we perceived by their provision. +</p> +<p> +There is no fresh water on all the south-side +that we could perceive; but, on the north-side, +three or four very good places of fresh water: +and all the whole island is a wood, save certain +little places where the houses stand, which are +environed round about with plantain trees, +whereof the fruit is excellent meat. This place +is subject very much to thunder, rain, and lightning, +in this month: I think the reason is, because +the sun is near the Line Equinoctial. On +Saturday the 10th, we departed from the said +island about three o’clock in the afternoon, the +wind being at the south-west. +</p> +<p> +The last of October, running west-south-west, +about twenty-four leagues from Cape Frio in +Brazil, we fell in with a great mountain, which +had an high round knob on the top of it, standing +like a tower. +</p> +<p> +The first of November, we went in between +the island of St. Sebastian and the main land, +carried several things on shore, set up a forge, +and had our casks on shore; our cooper made +hoops: and so we remained there until the +23d day of the same month in which time we +fitted our things, built our pinnace, and filled +our fresh water. And while our pinnace was +building, there came a canoe from the river of +Janeiro, meaning to go to St. Vincent, wherein +were six naked slaves of the country, which did +row the canoe, and one Portuguese; and the +<span class='pagenum'>168</span>Portuguese knew Christopher Hare, Master of +the Admiral; for that Mr. Hare had been at St. +Vincent, in the Minion of London, in the year +1581: and, thinking to have John Whithal, +the Englishman, which dwelleth at St. Vincent, +come unto us, which is twenty leagues from +this harbour, with some others, thereby to have +had some fresh victuals, we suffered the Portuguese +to go with a letter unto him, who promised +to return or send some answer within ten days, +for that we told him we were merchants, and +would traffic with them; but we never received +any answer from him and seeing that he came +not according to appointment, our business being +dispatched, we weighed anchor, and set sail +from St. Sebastian on the 23d of November. +</p> +<p> +The 16th day of December we fell in with +the coast of America, in 47 deg. and 20 min. +the land bearing west from us about six leagues +off; from which place we ran along the shore +until we came into 48 deg. It is a steep beach +all along. +</p> +<p> +The 17th of December, in the afternoon, we +entered into an harbour, where our Admiral +went in first; wherefore our General named the +said harbour Port Desire; in which harbour is an +island or two, where there is a wonderful great +store of seals, and another island of birds, called +grey gulls. These seals are of a wonderful bigness, +huge and monstrous of shape; and, for the +fore-part of their bodies, cannot be compared to +any thing better than to a lion: their head, neck, +<span class='pagenum'>169</span>and fore-part of their bodies, are full of rough +hair; their feet are in the manner of a fin, and +in form like unto a man’s hand; they breed and +cast every month, giving their young milk, yet +continually get they their living in the sea, and +live altogether upon fish: their young are extraordinary +good meat; and being boiled or roasted, +are hardly to be known from lamb or mutton. +The old ones are of such bigness and force, +that it is as much as four men are able to do to +kill one of them with great staves; and he must +be beaten down with striking on the head of +him; for his body is of that bigness, that four +men could never kill him, but only on the head; +for being shot through the body with an harquebuss, +or a musket, yet he will go his way into +the sea, and never care for it at the present. +Also the fowls that were there were very good +meat, and great plenty of them: they have burrows +in the ground like conies, for they cannot +fly; they have nothing but down upon their +pinions; they also fish and feed in the sea for +their living, and breed on shore. +</p> +<p> +This harbour is a very good place to trim +ships in, and to bring them on ground and grave +them in, for there ebbeth and floweth much water; +therefore we graved and trimmed all our +ships there. +</p> +<p> +The 24th of December, being Christmas-eve, +a man and a boy of the Rear-admiral went +some forty scores from our ships, unto a very +fair green valley at the foot of a mountain, +<span class='pagenum'>170</span>where was a little pit or well which our men +had digged and made some two or three days +before, to get fresh water; for there was none in +all the harbour; and this was but brackish; +therefore this man and boy went thither to wash +their linen: and being in washing at the said +well, there were great numbers of Indians +which were come down, and found the said +man and boy in washing. These Indians being +divided on each side of the rocks, shot at them +with their arrows, and hurt them both; but they +fled presently, being about fifty or threescore, +though our General followed them but with +sixteen or twenty men. The man was shot quite +through the knee, the boy into the shoulder; +either of them having very sore wounds. Their +arrows are made of little canes, and their heads +are of a flint stone, set into the cane very artificially. +They are as wild as ever was a buck, +or any other wild beast; for we followed them, +and they ran from us as we had been the wildest +things in the world. We took the measure of +one of their feet, and it was eighteen inches +long. Their custom is, when any of them die, +to bring him or them to the cliffs by the sea-side, +and upon the top of them they bury them; +and in their graves are buried with them their +bows and arrows, and all their jewels which they +had in their life-time, which are fine shells that +they find by the sea-side, which they cut and +square after an artificial manner; and all are +laid under their heads. The grave is made +<span class='pagenum'>171</span>with large stones of great length and bigness, +being set all along full of the dead man’s darts, +which he used when he was living. And they +colour both their darts and their graves of a +red colour, which they use in colouring themselves. +</p> +<p> +The 28th of December, we departed out +of the port of Desire, and went to an island +which lieth three leagues to the southward of it; +where we trimmed our saved penguins with +salt, for victuals, all that and the next day, and +departed along the coast south-west and by-south. +</p> +<p> +The 31st we fell in with a rock, which lieth +about five leagues from the land, much like unto +Edistone, which lieth off the sound of Plymouth; +and we sounded, and had eight fathoms +rocky ground, within a mile thereof; the rock +bearing west-south-west. We went coasting along +south-south-west, and found great store of +seals. This rock standeth in 48 deg. 30 min. to +the southward of the Line. +</p> +<p> +The 2d day of January, we fell in with a very +fair white cape, which standeth in 51 degrees, +and had seven fathoms water a league off the +land. +</p> +<p> +The 3d, we fell in with another great white +cape, which standeth in 52 deg. 45 min. from +which cape there runneth a low beach about a +league to the southward; and this beach reacheth +to the opening of the dangerous strait of Magellan, +which is in divers places five or six +<span class='pagenum'>172</span>leagues wide, and in two several places more +narrow. Under this cape we anchored, and lost +an anchor; for it was a great storm, and lasted +three days very dangerous. +</p> +<p> +The 6th day we put in for the straits. +</p> +<p> +The 7th day, between the mouth of the +straits and the narrowest place thereof, we took +a Spaniard, whose name was Hernando, who +was there with 23 Spaniards more, which were +all that remained of four hundred left there three +years before, all the rest being dead with famine. +And the same day we passed through the +narrowest of the straits, where the aforesaid +Spaniard shewed us the hull of a small bark, +which we judged to be a bark called the John +Thomas, one of Drake’s fleet. It is from the +mouth of the straits unto the narrowest of the +straits fourteen leagues, and the course lieth +west and by-north. The mouth of the straits +lieth in 52 degrees. +</p> +<p> +From the narrowest of the straits unto Penguin +island is ten leagues, and lieth west-south-west, +somewhat to the southward, where we +anchored the 8th day, and killed and salted +plenty of penguins for victuals. +</p> +<p> +The 9th day we departed from Penguin +island, and ran south-south-west to King Philip’s +city, which the Spaniards had built; +which town or city had four forts, and every +fort had in it one cast piece, which pieces were +buried in the ground; the carriages were standing +in their places unburied: we digged for +<span class='pagenum'>173</span>them and had them all. They had contrived +their city very well, and seated it in the best +place of the straits for wood and water: they +had built up their churches by themselves: they +had laws very severe among them, for they had +erected a gibbet, whereon they had done execution +on some of their company. It seemed +unto us, that their whole living for a great +space was altogether upon muscles and limpets; +for there was not any thing else to be had, except +some deer which came out of the mountains +down to the fresh rivers to drink. These +Spaniards came to fortify the straits, to the end +that no nation should have passage through into +the South Sea, saving their own only: but, as it +appeared, it was not God’s will so to have it; +for during the time that they were there, which +was two years at the least, they could never have +any thing to grow, or in any ways prosper; +and, on the other side, the Indians often preyed +upon them, until their victuals grew so short, +(their store being spent which they had brought +with them out of Spain, and having no means +to renew the same) that they died like dogs in +their houses, and in their clothes, wherein we +found some of them still at our coming, until +that in the end the town being wonderfully +tainted with the smell and savour of the dead +people, the rest which remained alive were +driven to bury such things as they had there in +their town, and so to forsake the town, and to +go along the sea-side to seek their victuals to +<span class='pagenum'>174</span>preserve them from starving, taking nothing +with them, but every man his harquebuss, and +his furniture, that was able to do it (for some +of them were not able to carry them for weakness), +and so lived, for the space of a year and +more, on roots, leaves, and sometimes a fowl +which they might kill with their piece. To conclude, +they set forward, determined to travel +towards the river of Plate, there being only +twenty-three persons left alive, whereof two +were women, which were the remainder of four +hundred. In this place we watered and wooded +well and quietly. Our General named this +town Port Famine: it standeth in 53 degrees +by observation to the southward. +</p> +<p> +The 14th day we departed from this place, +and ran south-south-west, and from thence +south-west unto Cape Froward, five leagues +west-south-west, which cape is the southermost +part of all the straits, and standeth in the latitude +of 54 degrees. From which cape we ran +west and by-north five leagues, and put into a +bay or cove on the south side, which we called +Muscle-cove, because there was great plenty of +them: we rode therein six days, the wind being +still westerly. +</p> +<p> +The 21st day of January we departed from +Muscle-cove, and went north-west and by-west +ten leagues, to a very fair sandy bay on the +north-side, which our General called Elizabeth-bay: +and, as we rode there that night, one of +our men died which went in the Hugh Gallant, +<span class='pagenum'>175</span>whose name was Grey, a carpenter by his occupation, +and was buried there in that bay. +</p> +<p> +The 22d we departed from Elizabeth-bay in +the afternoon, and went about two leagues +from that place, where there was a fresh water +river, up which our General went with the ship’s +boat about three miles; which river hath very +good and pleasant ground about it. It is low +and champaign soil, and we saw no other ground +in all the straits, but what was craggy rocks, +and monstrous high hills and mountains. In +this river are a great many savages, which we +saw, and had conference with them. They +were men-eaters, and fed altogether upon raw +flesh, and other filthy food: which people had +lately preyed upon some of the Spaniards before +spoken of; for they had gotten knives, and +some pieces of rapiers to make darts of. They +used all the means they could possibly to have +enticed us farther up the river, on purpose to +have betrayed us; which being perceived by our +General, he caused us to shoot at them with +our harquebusses, whereby we killed many of +them. So we sailed from this river, to the +channel of St. Jerome, which is two leagues +off. +</p> +<p> +From the river of St. Jerome, about three or +four leagues, we ran west into a cape which is +on the north-side; and from that cape unto the +mouth of the straits the course lieth north-west +and by-west, and north-west; between which +place and the mouth of the straits, to the southward, +<span class='pagenum'>176</span>we lay in harbour until the 23d of February, +by reason of contrary winds, and most +vile and foul weather, with such rain and violent +stormy winds which came down from the mountains +and high hills, that they hazarded the best +cables and anchors that we had for to hold; +which, if they had failed, we had been in great +danger to have been cast away, or at least to have +been famished: for, during this time, which was +a full month, we fed almost altogether on muscles, +limpets, and birds, or such as we could get +on shore, seeking every day for them, as the +fowls of the air do where they can find food in +continual rainy weather. +</p> +<p> +There is, at every one or two miles end, an +harbour on both sides of the land. And there +are, between the river of St. Jerome and the +mouth of the straits, going into the South Sea, +about 34 leagues, by estimation; so that the +whole length of the straits is about 90 leagues: +and the mouth of the said straits standeth nearly +in the same height that the entrance standeth in +when we pass out of the North Sea, which is +about 52 deg. and 40 min. to the southward of +the Line. +</p> +<p> +The 24th day of February, we entered into +the South Sea; and on the south side in going +out of the straits is a fair high cape, with a low +point adjoining to it; and on the north-side are +four or five islands which lie six leagues off the +main, and much broken and sunken ground about +them. By noon, the same day, we had brought +<span class='pagenum'>177</span>these islands east of us five leagues off; the wind +being southerly. +</p> +<p> +The first of March, a storm took us at north, +which night the ships lost the company of the +Hugh Gallant, being in 49 degrees 30 min. +and 45 leagues from land. This storm continued +three or four days and for that time we +in the Hugh Gallant, being separated from the +other two ships, looked every hour to sink, our +bark was so leaky, and ourselves so fatigued +and weakened with freeing it of water, that we +slept not during three days and three nights. +</p> +<p> +The 15th of March, in the morning, the +Hugh Gallant came in between the island of +St. Mary and the main, where she met with the +Admiral and the Content, who had rid at the +island of La Mocha two days, which island +standeth in south latitude 38 deg. at which +place some of our men went on shore with the +Vice-Admiral’s boat, where the Indians fought +with them with their bows and arrows, and +were very wary of their calivers. These Indians +were enemies to the Spaniards, and belonged to +a great place called Arauco, and took us for +Spaniards, as we afterwards learned. +</p> +<p> +The above-mentioned place, Arauco, is very +rich, and full of gold mines; and yet could it +not be subdued at any time by the Spaniards; +but they always returned with the greatest loss +of men: for these Indians are quite desperate, +and careless of their lives, living at their own +liberty and freedom. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>178</span>The 15th day aforesaid, in the afternoon, we +weighed anchor, and ran under the west side +of St. Mary’s island, where we rid very well in +six fathoms water, and very fair ground, all that +night. +</p> +<p> +The 16th day, our General went on shore +himself, with 70 or 80 men, every one with his +furniture. There came down to us certain Indians, +with two which were the Chiefs of the +island, to welcome us on shore, thinking we had +been Spaniards, for it is subdued by them; who +brought us up to a place where the Spaniards +had erected a church, with crosses and altars in +it; and there were about this church two or +three store-houses, which were full of wheat and +barley ready threshed, and made up in cades of +straw, to the quantity of a bushel of corn in +every cade. The wheat and barley was as fair, +as clear, and every way as good as any we have +in England. There were also the like cades full +of potatoe-roots, which were very good to eat, +ready made up in the store-houses, for the Spaniards +when they should come for their tribute. +This island also yielded many sorts of fruits, hogs, +and hens. These Indians are held in such slavery +by their masters, that they dare not eat a hen or +hog themselves: but the Spaniards have made +them all in that island christians. Thus we filled +ourselves here with corn as much as we would +have, and as many hogs as we had salt to salt +them with, and great plenty of hens, with a +number of bags of potatoe-roots, and about 500 +<span class='pagenum'>179</span>dried dog-fishes, and Guinea wheat, which is +called maiz. And having taken as much as we +would, yet we left a prodigious great store behind +us. Our General had the two Chiefs of +the island on board our ship, and provided great +cheer for them, and made them merry with wine: +and they, in the end, perceiving that we were +not Spaniards, made signs, as near as our General +could perceive, that, if we would go over +unto the main land to Arauco, there was much +gold; making us signs, that we should have +great store of riches. But, because we could +not understand them, our General made haste, +and within two or three days we furnished ourselves, +and departed. +</p> +<p> +The 18th day, in the morning, we departed +from this place; and ran all that day north-north-east +about ten leagues, and at night lay +with a short sail off and on the coast. +</p> +<p> +The 19th, we ran in east-north-east with the +land, and bore in with a place called the Conception, +where we anchored under an island, +and departed the next morning without going +on land. +</p> +<p> +The 20th, we departed from the Conception, +and went into a little bay, which was sandy, +where we saw fresh water and cattle; but we +staid not there. +</p> +<p> +The 30th day, we came into the bay of +Quintero, which standeth in 33 deg. and 50 min. +</p> +<p> +The said day, presently after we were come +to an anchor in the bay, there was a herdsman, +<span class='pagenum'>180</span>that kept cattle, lying upon the point of the hill +asleep; who, when he awaked, and had espied +three ships which were come into the bay, before +we could get on shore, he had mounted a +horse which was feeding by, and rode his way +as fast as ever he was able; and our General, +with thirty shot with him, went on shore. He +had not been on land an hour when there came +three horsemen with bright swords towards us, +so hard as they could ride, till within a quarter +of a mile of us, and then stopt, and would come +no nearer unto us: so our General sent unto +them a couple of our men with their shot, and +Hernando, who was the Spaniard that we had +taken up at the mouth of the straits. But the +Spaniards would not suffer our men to come +near with their shot, but made signs that one of +our men should come alone unto them: so the +said Hernando, the Spaniard, went unto them, +and our two men stood not far from them. +They had some conference; and, in the end, +Hernando came back from them, and told our +General that he had parlied with them for some +victuals, and they had promised as much as we +would have. Our General sent him back again +with another message, and another shot with +him; and being come near unto them, they +would not suffer any more than one to approach +them: whereupon our men let the Spaniard go +unto them alone; who being at some good +distance from them, they staid but a small time +together, before the said Hernando leaped +<span class='pagenum'>181</span>up behind one of them, and rode away with +them, notwithstanding the damnable oaths which +he had made continually to our General, never +to forsake him, but to die on his side before he +would be false. Our General, seeing how he +was dealt with, filled water all that day with +good watch, and carried it on board: and night +being come, he determined next day to send +into the country to find their town, and to have +taken the spoil of it, and to have fired it, if they +could have found it. +</p> +<p> +The last of March, Captain Havers went up +into the country, with 50 or 60 men, with their +shot and furniture with them, and we travelled +seven or eight miles into the land: and, as we +were marching along, we espied a number of +herds of cattle, of kine and bullocks, which were +wonderfully wild: we saw also great plenty of +horses, mares, and colts, which were very wild +and unhandled: there is also great store of hares +and conies, and plenty of partridges, and other +wild fowls. The country is very fruitful, with +fair fresh rivers all along, full of wild-fowl of +all sorts. Having travelled so far, that we could +go no farther for the monstrous high mountains, +we rested ourselves at a very fair fresh river, +running in and along fair low meadows, at the +foot of the mountains, where every man drank +of the river, and refreshed himself. Having so +done, we returned to our ships, the likeliest way +we thought their town would be; so we travelled +all the day long, not seeing any man, but we +<span class='pagenum'>182</span>met with many wild dogs; yet there were two +hundred horsemen abroad that same day, by +means of the Spaniard which they had taken +from us the day before, who had told them that +our force was but small, and that we were wonderfully +weak; and, though they did espy us +that day, yet durst they not give the onset upon +us; for we marched along in array, and observed +good order, whereby we seemed a greater +number than we were, until we came unto our +ships that night again. +</p> +<p> +The next day, being the first of April, 1587, +our men went on shore to fill water at a pit +which was a quarter of a mile from the water-side; +and, being early hard at their business, +were in no readiness: mean while, there came +pouring down from the hills almost two hundred +horsemen, and before our people could return +to the rocks from the watering-place, twelve of +them were cut off, part killed, and part taken +prisoners; the rest were rescued by our soldiers +who came from the rocks to meet with them; +for though only fifteen of us had any weapons +on shore, yet we made the enemy retire +in the end, with the loss of twenty-four of their +men, after we had skirmished with them an hour. +</p> +<p> +After the loss of these men, we rode at anchor, +and watered in despite of them, with good watch +and ward, until the 5th of the said month. +</p> +<p> +The 5th day, we departed out of this bay of +Quintero; and off from the bay there lieth a +little island, about a league distant, whereon there +<span class='pagenum'>183</span>are great store of penguins, and other fowls, +whereof we took to serve our turns, and sailed +away north, and north-by-west; for so lieth the +coast along this place. +</p> +<p> +The 15th, we came thwart of a place, +which is called Morro-Moreno, which standeth +in twenty-three degrees thirty minutes, and is +an excellent good harbour: and there is an +island which maketh it an harbour; for a ship +may go in at either end of the island. Here we +went with our General on shore, to the number +of thirty men; and as soon as we had effected +our landing, the Indians of the place came down +from the rocks to meet us, with fresh-water and +wood on their backs. They are in great awe +of the Spaniards, and very simple people, living +most savagely: for they brought us to their +dwellings, about two miles from the harbour, +where we saw their women and bedding, which +is nothing but the skin of some beast laid upon the +ground; and over them, instead of houses, is +nothing but five or six sticks laid across, which +stand upon forked sticks stuck in the ground, +and a few boughs laid over them. Their diet is +raw fish, which stinketh most vilely: and when +any of them die, they bury their bows and arrows +with them, and all that they have; for we +opened one of their graves, and saw the order +of them. Their canoes or boats are very artificially +made of two skins resembling bladders, +and are blown full at one end with quills: they +have two of these bladders blown full, which are +<span class='pagenum'>184</span>sewed together, and made fast with a sinew of +some wild beast; which, when they are in the +water, swell, so that they are as tight as may be. +They go to sea in these boats, and catch plenty +of fish, but they use it in a beastly manner. +</p> +<p> +On the 23d, in the morning, we took +a small bark, which came out of Arica road, +which we kept and called the George. The +men forsook it, and went hastily away with their +boat. Our Admiral’s pinnace followed the boat, +and the Hugh Gallant’s boat took the bark: +our Admiral’s pinnace could not recover the +boat before it got on shore, but went along +into the road of Arica, and laid aboard a great +ship of one hundred tons, riding in the road +right before the town, but all the men and +goods were gone out of her, only the bare ship +was left alone. They made three or four very +fair shots at the pinnace as she was coming in, +but missed her very narrowly with a minion-shot +which they had in the fort. Whereupon +we came into the road with the Admiral and +the Hugh Gallant: but the Content, which was +the Vice-admiral, was behind out of sight; +by means whereof, and for want of her boat to +land men withal, we landed not: otherwise, if +we had been together, our General with the +company would resolutely have landed to +take the town, whatsoever should have come +of it. The cause why the Content staid +behind, was, that she had found, about fourteen +<span class='pagenum'>185</span>leagues to the southward of Arica, in a place +where the Spaniards had landed a whole ship’s +lading of botigas of wine of Castile, whereof the +said Content took into her as many as she could +conveniently carry, and came after us into the +road of Arica the same day. By this time we +perceived that the town had gathered all their +power together, and also conveyed all their +treasure away, and buried it, for they had heard +of us. Now, because it was very populous with +the aid of one or two neighbouring places, our +General saw there was no landing without loss +of many men; wherefore he gave over that enterprise. +While we rode at anchor they shot at +us, and our ships shot at them again for every +shot two. Moreover, our pinnace went in close +almost to the shore, and fetched out another +bark which rode there, in despite of all their +forts, though they shot still at the pinnace, +which they could never hit. After these things +our General sent a boat on shore with a flag of +truce, to know if they would redeem their great +ship or no: but they would not; for they had +received special commandment from the Viceroy +at Lima, not to buy any ship, or ransom +any man, upon pain of death. Our General did +this, in hopes to have redeemed some of our +men, which were taken prisoners on shore by +the horsemen at Quintero, otherwise he would +have made them no offer of parley. +</p> +<p> +The 25th, riding still in the road, we spied +a sail coming from the southward, and our General +<span class='pagenum'>186</span>sent out his pinnace to meet her, with all +our boats; but the town made such signs from +the hill with fires and tokens out of the watch-house, +that before our pinnace could get to +them, they ran the bark on shore two miles to +the southward of the town; but they had little +leisure to carry any thing with them, but all the +men escaped, among whom there were certain +friars, for we saw them in their friar’s weeds as +they ran on shore. Many horsemen came from +the town to rescue them and to carry them away, +otherwise we had landed and taken or killed +them: so we went on board the bark as she lay +sunk, and fetched out the pillage; but there +was nothing in it of any value: and we came on +board our ships again the same night, and the next +morning we set the great ship on fire in the +road, and sunk one of the barks, carrying the +other along with us, and so departed from +thence and went away north-west. +</p> +<p> +The 27th, we took a small bark which came +from St. Jago, near unto Quintero, where we lost +our men first. In this bark was one George, +a Greek, an intelligent pilot for all the coast of +Chili. They were sent to the city of Lima +with letters of advice of us, and of the loss of +our men: there were also in the said bark one +Fleming and three Spaniards, and they were all +sworn, and received the sacrament, before they +came to sea, by three or four friars, that, if we +should chance to meet them they should throw +those letters overboard; which as we were giving +<span class='pagenum'>187</span>them chace with our pinnace, before we +could reach them, they had accordingly thrown +away. Yet our General wrought so with them, +that they did confess their errand; but he was +fain to cause them to be tormented with their +thumbs in a winch, and to repeat it several +times with extreme pain: also he made the old +Fleming believe that he would hang him, and +the rope being about his neck, he was pulled up +a little from the hatches; and yet he would not +confess, chusing rather to die than he would be +perjured. +</p> +<p> +The 3d of May, we came into a bay where +are three little towns, which are called Paracca, +Chincha, and Pisca; where some of us landed, +and took certain houses wherein was bread, +wine, figs, and hens: but the sea went so high +that we could not land at the best of the towns, +without sinking of our boats, and great hazard +of us all. This place standeth in thirteen degrees +and forty minutes to the southward of the Line. +</p> +<p> +The 5th of May, we departed from this harbour, +leaving the Content, our Vice-admiral, at +the island of Seals, by which means at that time +we lost her company. +</p> +<p> +The 9th, we gave chace to a sail, but we +could not reach it. +</p> +<p> +The 10th day, the Hugh Gallant, in which +bark I Francis Pretie was, lost company of our +Admiral. +</p> +<p> +The 11th, we who were in the Hugh Gallant +put into a bay which standeth in twelve degrees +<span class='pagenum'>188</span>forty minutes, in which bay we found +a river of fresh water about eight o’clock at +night; and though we were but of small force, +no more than one bark and eighteen men in it, +yet we went on shore to fill water; where, having +filled one boat’s lading, while our crew were +going on board, two or three of our company +which were on shore, as they were going a +little from the watering-place with their furniture +about them, spied where there were four +or five hundred bags of meal on an heap covered +with a few reeds; so that night we filled +water, and took as much meal as we thought +good, which fell out well for us who were then +lost, and stood in need of victuals: and, by +break of day in the morning, we came on board, +and there staid and rode until the afternoon; in +which time the town, seeing us ride there still, +brought down much cattle to the sea-side to +have enticed us to come on shore; but we saw +their intent, and weighed anchor, and departed +the 12th day. +</p> +<p> +The 13th day at night, we put into a bay +which standeth in nine degrees twenty minutes, +where we saw horsemen. And that night we +landed, namely, Mr. Bruer, captain; myself; +Arthur Warford; John Way, preacher; John +Newman; Andrew Wight; William Gargefield; +and Henry Hilliard; and we eight only, +having every man his harquebuss and his furniture +about him, marched three quarters of a +mile along the sea side, where we found a boat +<span class='pagenum'>189</span>of five or six tons hauled up dry on the shore +about a cable’s length from the water; and with +extreme labour we launched the bark. When it +was on float, Captain Bruer and I went in, while +the rest were fetching their things; but suddenly +it was ready to sink, and the Captain and I +stood up to the knees, laving out the water with +our targets; but it sunk down faster than we +were able to free it, insomuch that in the end +we had much ado to save ourselves from drowning. +When we were out, we stood in great fear +that our own boat, wherein we came on shore, +was sunk; for we could no where see it. Howbeit, +the Captain commanded them to keep it off +for fear of the great surge that went by the +shore, yet in the end we spied it, and went on +board by two and two, and were forced to wade +up to the arm-pits sixty paces into the sea, before +we could get into the boat, by reason of +the shoalness; and then departed the fourteenth +day in the morning. +</p> +<p> +The 16th, we took with the Hugh Gallant, +being but sixteen men of us in it, a large ship +which came from Guaianil, which was called +the Lewis, and was of the burthen of three +hundred tons, having twenty-four men in it, +wherein was a pilot, one Gonsalvo de Ribas, +whom we carried along with us, and a negroe +called Emmanuel. The ship was laden with +nothing but timber and victuals, wherefore we +left her seven or eight leagues from the land very +<span class='pagenum'>190</span>leaky and ready to sink: we sunk her boat, and +took away her foresail and some provisions. +</p> +<p> +The 17th of May, we met with our Admiral +again, and all the rest of our fleet: they had +taken two ships, the one laden with sugar, melasses, +maize, skins, many packs of pintadoes, +some marmalade, and a thousand hens. The +other ship was laden with wheat-meal, and boxes +of marmalade. One of these ships, which had +the chief merchandize in it, was worth twenty +thousand pounds, if it had been in England, or +in any other part of Christendom, where we +might have sold it. We filled all our ships +with as much as we could of these goods; the +rest we burnt and the ships also, and set the men +and women that were not killed on shore. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/271.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Cavendish plunders & burns Paita.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +The 20th day in the morning, we came into +the road of Paita; and, being at an anchor, our +General landed with sixty or seventy men, skirmished +with some of the town, and drove them +all to flight to the top of the hill which is over +the town; except a few slaves and some others +who were of the meaner sort, who were commanded +by the Governor to stay below in the +town at a place which was building for a fort, +having with them a bloody ensign, being in +number about an hundred men. Now, as we +were rowing between the ships and the shore, +our gunner shot off a great piece out of one of +the barks, and the shot fell among them, and +made them to fly from the fort, as fast as they +could run; but, having got up upon the hill, +<span class='pagenum'>191</span>they in their turn, shot among us with their +small-shot. After we were landed, and had +taken the town, we ran upon them and chaced +them so fiercely for the space of an hour, that +we drove them in the end away by force; and, +being got up the hills, we found where they +had hid what they had brought out of the +town. We also found the quantity of twenty-five +pounds weight of silver in pieces of eight, and +abundance of houshold stuff, and storehouses full +of all kinds of wares. But our General would +not suffer the men to carry much cloth or apparel +away, because they should not cloy themselves +with burdens; for he knew not whether +our enemies were provided with fire-arms according +to the number of their men, for they +were five men to one of us, and we had an +English mile and an half to our ships. Being +come down in safety to the town, which was +very well built, and kept very clean in every +street, with a town-house or guildhall in the +midst of it, and had to the number of two or three +hundred houses at least in it; we set it on fire, +and burnt it to the ground, and goods to the value +of five or six thousand pounds. There was also +a bark riding at anchor in the road, which we +set on fire and departed, directing our course to +the island of Puna. +</p> +<p> +The 25th of May, we arrived at the island +of Puna, where is a very good harbour. There +we found a great ship of 250 tons riding at anchor +with all her furniture, which was ready to +<span class='pagenum'>192</span>be hauled on ground, for there is a special +good place for that purpose. We sunk it and +went on shore, where the Lord of the island +dwelt, who had a sumptuous dwelling, which +was by the water-side, exceedingly well contrived, +with many very singular good rooms and chambers +in it, and out of every chamber was framed +a gallery, with a stately prospect towards the +sea on one side, and into the island on the other +side, with a magnificent hall below, and a very +great storehouse at one end of the hall, which +was filled with botigas of pitch and bast to make +cables with; for the most part of the cables in +the South Sea are made upon that island. This +great Casique obliged all the Indians on the +island to work and trudge for him: he is an Indian +born, but is married to a beautiful woman +who is a Spaniard, by reason of his pleasant habitation +and his great wealth. +</p> +<p> +This Spanish woman, his wife, is honoured as +a Queen in the island, and never walketh upon +the ground on foot, but accounteth it too base a +thing for her; but when her pleasure is to take +the air, or to go abroad, she is always carried in a +sedan upon four mens shoulders, with a veil or +canopy over her, to shade her from the sun or +the wind, having her gentlewoman still attending +about her, with a great troop of the best men +in the island with her. But both she and the +lord of the island, with all the Indians in the +town, were nearly fled out of the island before +we get could get to an anchor, by reason we +<span class='pagenum'>193</span>were becalmed before we could get in, and were +gone over unto the main land, having carried +with them 100,000 crowns, which we knew by +a Captain of the island, an Indian, whom we had +taken at sea as we were coming into the road, +being in a balsa or a canoe for a spy to see what +we were. +</p> +<p> +The 27th, our General himself, with certain +shot and some targetliers, went over to the main +unto the place where this Indian Captain told +us the Casique, who was Lord of all the island, +was gone unto, and had carried all his treasure +with him: but, at our coming to the place +where we went to land, we found newly arrived +there four or five great balsas laden with plantains, +bags of meal, and many other kinds of +victuals. Our General marvelled what they +were, and what they meant, asking the Indian +guide, and commanding him to speak the truth +upon his life. Being then bound fast, he answered, +being very much abashed, as well as +our company were, that he neither knew from +whence they should come, nor who they +should be, for never a man was in either of +the balsas; yet he had told our General before, +that it was an easy matter to take the said Casique +and all his treasure; and that, there were +but three or four houses standing in a desart +place, and no resistance; and that if he found +it not so, he might hang him. Again being demanded +to speak upon his life what he thought +these balsas should be? he answered, that he +<span class='pagenum'>194</span>could not say what they were, nor from whence +they should come, except it was to carry sixty +soldiers, who he did hear were to go to a place +called Guaiaquil, which was about six leagues +from the said island, where two or three of the +King’s ships were on the stocks in building, and +where there were continually an hundred soldiers +in garrison, who had heard of us, and had sent +for sixty more, for fear of burning of the ships +and town. Our General, not any whit discouraged, +either at the sight of the balsas unlooked +for, or at hearing of the sixty soldiers not until +then spoken of, bravely animating his company +to the exploit, went presently forward, being in +the night in a most desart path through the +woods, until he came to the place; where, as +it seemed, they had kept watch either at the +water-side, or at the houses, or at both, and were +newly gone out of the houses, having so short +warning that they left the meat both boiling and +roasting at the fire, and were fled with their treasure +with them, or else buried it where it could +not be found. Our company took hens, and such +things as we thought good, and came away. +</p> +<p> +The 29th, our General went in the ship’s +boat unto a little island adjoining, whither the +Casique, who was Lord of Rena, had caused all +the hangings of his chambers, which were Cordovan +leather, all gilded over, and painted very +fair and rich, with all his houshold stuff, and all +the ships tackling which were riding in the road +at our coming in, with great store of nails, spikes +<span class='pagenum'>195</span>of iron, and very many other things, to be conveyed; +all which we found, and brought away +what our General thought requisite for the ships. +</p> +<p> +This island is very pleasant for all the delights +of life, and fruitful; but there are no +mines of gold or silver in it. There are, at least, +200 houses in the town about the Casique’s palace, +and as many in one or two towns more +upon the island, which is almost as big as the +Isle of Wight, in England. There is planted, on +the one side of the Casique’s house, a fair garden +with all herbs growing in it, and at the lower +end a well of fresh water, and round about it +are trees set, whereon bombazine cotton groweth +after this manner: The tops of the trees +grow full of cods, out of which the cotton +groweth, and in the cotton is a seed of the bigness +of a pea, and in every cod there are seven +or eight of these seeds; and if the cotton be not +gathered when it is ripe, then these seeds fall +from it and spring again. +</p> +<p> +There are also in this garden fig-trees, which +bear continually; also pompions, melons, cucumbers, +raddishes, rosemary, and thyme, with +many other herbs and roots. At the other end +of the house there is also another orchard, where +grow oranges, sweet and sour lemons, pomegranates, +and limes, with divers other fruits. There +is very good pasture-ground in this island and +there are many horses, oxen, bullocks, sheep very +fat and fair, a great many goats, which are very +tame, and are used continually to be milked. +<span class='pagenum'>196</span>They have also abundance of pigeons, turkies, +and ducks of prodigious bigness. +</p> +<p> +There was also a very large and great church +near to the Casique’s house, whither he caused +all the Indians in the island to come and hear +mass, for he himself was made a christian when +married to the Spanish woman before spoken of; +and upon his conversion he caused the rest of his +subjects to be christened. In this church was +an high altar, with a crucifix, and five bells hanging +in one end thereof. We burnt the church, +and brought the bells away. +</p> +<p> +By this time we had hauled on ground our +Admiral, and made her clean, burnt her keel, +pitched and tarred her, and had hauled her on +float again; and, in the mean time, kept watch +in the great house both night and day. +</p> +<p> +The 2d of June, in the morning, by day-break, +every one of the watch having gone +abroad to seek provisions, some one way and +some another, some for hens, some for sheep, +some for goats; upon a sudden there came +down upon us an hundred soldiers, with musquets, +and an ensign, which were landed on the +other side of the island that night, and all the +Indians of the island along with them, everyone +with weapons, and their baggage after them; +which happened by means of a negroe, whose +name was Emmanuel, who fled from us at our +first landing there. Thus, being taken at a disadvantage, +we had the worst, for our company +did not exceed sixteen or twenty, whereof they +<span class='pagenum'>197</span>had slain one or two before they were come to +the houses; yet we skirmished with them an +hour and a half. At last, being greatly over-charged +with multitudes, we were driven down +from the hill to the water side, and there we +kept them in play a while, until in the end our +halberdier, who had kept the way of the hill, +and had slain a couple of them as he breathed +himself, had an honourable death, for a shot +struck him to the heart; who, feeling himself +mortally wounded, cried to God for mercy, and +fell down dead. But, soon after, the enemy was +driven back from the bank side to the green; +and, in the end, our boat came, and carried as +many of our men as could go in her without +hazard of sinking; but one of our men was shot +through the head with his own piece, being a +snap-hand, as he was getting into the boat. Four +of us were left behind, which the boat could not +carry, of whom myself was one, who had our +shot ready, and retired into a cliff until the boat +came again, which was presently after they had +carried the rest on board. There were forty-six +of the enemy slain by us, whereof they dragged +some into bushes, and some into old houses, +which we found afterwards. We lost only 12 +of our men. +</p> +<p> +The same day we went on shore again with +70 men, and had a fresh skirmish with the enemy, +and made them retire. This done, we set +fire to the town, and burnt it to the ground; +and, shortly after, made havock of their fields, +<span class='pagenum'>198</span>orchards, and gardens, and burnt four great +ships more, which were building on the stocks. +</p> +<p> +The 3d of June, the Content, which was our +Vice-Admiral, was hauled on ground to grave +at the same place, in spite of the Spaniards; and +also our pinnace was new trimmed. +</p> +<p> +The 5th, we departed out of the road of +Puna, where we remained eleven days, and +turned up to a place which is called Rio Dolce, +where we watered; at which place also we sunk +our Rear-Admiral, called the Hugh Gallant, +for want of men, being a bark of 40 tons. +</p> +<p> +The 10th, we set the Indians on shore, which +we had taken before as we were coming into the +road of Puna. +</p> +<p> +The 11th, we departed from Rio Dolce. +</p> +<p> +The 12th, we doubled the Equinoctial Line, +and continued our course northwards all that +month. +</p> +<p> +The 1st of July, we had sight of the coast of +Nueva Espanna, being four leagues distant from +land, in the latitude of 10 degrees to the northward +of the Line. +</p> +<p> +The 9th, we took a new ship of 120 tons +burthen, wherein was one Michael Sancius, +whom our General took to serve his turn to +water along the coast; for he was one of the +best coasters in the South Sea. This Michael +Sancius was a provincial born in Marseilles, and +was the first man that told us news of the great +ship called the Santa Anna, which we afterwards +took coming from the Philippines. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>199</span>There were six men more in this new ship. +We took her sails, ropes, and fire-wood, to serve +our turns, set her on fire, and kept the men. +</p> +<p> +The 10th, we took another bark, which was +going with advice of us and our ships all along +the coast, as Michael Sancius told us; but all +company that were in the bark were fled on +shore. Neither of these ships had any goods in +them; for they came both from Sonsonate, in +the province of Guatimala; the new ship, for +fear we should have taken her in the road; and +the bark, to carry news along the coast, which +bark we also set on fire. +</p> +<p> +The 26th, we came to anchor in ten fathoms, +in the river of Copalita, where we intended to +water; and that same night we departed with +thirty-two men in the pinnace, and rowed to +Aguatulco, which is but two leagues from the +aforesaid river, and standeth in 15 deg. 40 min. +to the northward of the Equinoctial Line. +</p> +<p> +The 27th day, in the morning, by break of +day, we came into the road of Aguatulco, where +we found a bark of 50 tons, which was come +from Sonsonate, laden with cocoas and anil, +which they had there landed; and the men were +all fled on shore. We landed there, and burnt +the town, with the church and custom-house, +which was very fair and large, in which house +were 600 bags of anil to dye cloth, every bag +whereof was worth 40 crowns; and 400 bags of +cocoas, every bag whereof is worth 10 crowns. +These cocoas go among them for meat and +<span class='pagenum'>200</span>money; for 150 of them are in value one rial of +plate in ready payment. They are very like +an almond, but are not so pleasant in taste. +They eat them, and make drink of them: this +the owner of the ship told us. I found in this +town, before we burnt it, a flasket full of boxes +of balm. After we had spoiled and burned the +town, wherein there were some hundred houses, +the owner of the ship came down out of the +hills with a flag of truce unto us, who before +with all the rest of the townsmen run away, and +at length came on board our pinnace upon +Captain Havers’ word of safe return. We carried +him to the river of Copalita, where our +ships rode. When we came to our General, he +caused him to be set on shore in safety the +same night, because he came upon the Captain’s +word. +</p> +<p> +The 28th, we set sail from Copalita, because +the sea was so great that we could not fill water, +and ran the same night into the road of +Aguatulco. +</p> +<p> +The 29th, our General landed, and took +with him thirty men two miles into the woods, +were we took a Mestizo, whose name was Michael +de Truxillo, who was customer of that +town, and we found with him two chambers +full of his stuff; we brought him and his stuff +on board: and whereas I say he was a Mestizo, +it is to be understood, that a Mestizo is one +who hath a Spaniard to his father, and an Indian +to his mother. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>201</span>The 2d day of August, having watered, and +examined the said Mestizo and set him on shore +again, we departed from the port of Aguatulco +the same night; which standeth, as I said before, +in 15 deg. and 40 min. to the northward +of the Line. Here we overslipped the haven +of Acapulco, from whence the ships are fitted +out for the Philippines. +</p> +<p> +The 24th, our General with thirty of us +went with the pinnace to an haven called Puerto +de Natividad, where we had intelligence by Michael +Sancius that there should be a pinnace; +but, before we could get thither, the said pinnace +was gone to fish for pearls twelve leagues +farther, as we were informed by certain Indians +whom we found there. We took a mullatto in +this place in his bed, who was sent with letters +of advice concerning us along the coast of +Nueva Galicia, whose horse we killed. We +took his letters, left him behind, set fire to +the houses, and burnt two new ships of 200 +tons each which were building there on the +stocks, and came on board of our ships again. +</p> +<p> +The 26th, we came into the bay of St. Jago, +where we watered at a fresh river, along +which river many plantains were growing. Here +is abundance of fresh fish; here also some of our +company dragged for pearls, and caught some +quantity. +</p> +<p> +The 2d of September, we departed from St. +Jago, at four o’clock in the evening. The +bay of St. Jago standeth in nineteen degrees +<span class='pagenum'>202</span>and eighteen minutes to the northward of the +Line. +</p> +<p> +The 3d, we arrived in a little bay a league to +the westward of Port de Natividad, called Malacca, +which is a very good place to ride in; +and this day, about twelve o’clock, our General +landed with thirty men, and went up to a +town of Indians which was two leagues from the +road, which town is called Acatlan: there were +in it about 20 or 30 houses, and a church which +we defaced, and came on board the same night. +All the people fled out of the town at the sight +of us. +</p> +<p> +The 4th, we departed from the road of Malacca, +and sailed along the coast. The 8th we +came to the road of Chacalla, in which bay +there are two little houses by the water-side. +This bay is 18 leagues from the Cape de los +Corientes. +</p> +<p> +The 9th, in the morning, our General sent +up Captain Havers with forty men of us before +day, and, Michael Sancius being our guide, we +went unto a place about two leagues up into the +country, in a most obscure desart path, through +the woods and wilderness, and in the end we +came to a place where we took three housholders +with their wives and children, and some Indians, +one carpenter (who was a Spaniard), and a Portuguese. +We bound them all, and made them +come to the sea-side with us: our General made +their wives fetch us plantains, lemons, oranges, +pine-apples, and other fruits, whereof they had +<span class='pagenum'>203</span>abundance, and so let their husbands depart, except +Sembrano, the Spanish carpenter, and Diego, +the Portuguese, and the tenth day we departed +from the road. +</p> +<p> +The 12th, we arrived at a little island called +the isle of St. Andrew, on which there is great +store of fowl and wood; where we dried and +salted as many of the fowls as we thought good. +We also killed there abundance of seals and +oguanos, which are a kind of serpents with four +feet, and a long sharp tail, strange to them who +have not seen them, but they are very good +meat. We rode here until the 17th, at which +time we departed. +</p> +<p> +The 24th, we arrived in the road of Massatlan, +in twenty-three degrees thirty minutes, +just under the Tropic of Cancer. It is a very +great river within, but is barred at the mouth; +and upon the north side of the bar without is +good fresh water, but there is much difficulty in +filling it, because at low water it is shoal half a +mile off the shore. There is great store of fresh +fish in this bay, and good fruits up in the country, +whereof we had some, though not without +danger. +</p> +<p> +The 27th, we departed from the road of Massatlan, +and ran to an island which is a league to +the northward of the said Massatlan, where we +trimmed our ships, and new built our pinnace. +There is a little island a quarter of a league +from it, on which are seals; where a Spanish prisoner, +whose name was Domingo, being sent to +<span class='pagenum'>204</span>wash shirts, with one of our men to keep him, +made his escape and swam to the main, which +was an English mile distant; at which place +we had seen thirty or forty Spaniards and Indians, +who were horsemen and kept watch there, +and came from a town called Chiametla, which +was eleven leagues up into the country, as Michael +Sancius told us. We found upon the +island where we trimmed our pinnace, fresh water, +by digging two or three feet deep into +the sand, where no water nor sign of water was +before to be perceived; otherwise we must have +gone back 20 or 30 leagues to water, which might +have occasioned our missing the prey we had +long waited for: but one Flores, a Spaniard, +who was also a prisoner with us, made a motion +to dig in the sands. Now, our General, having +had experience before of the like, commanded +to put his motion in practice, and, digging three +feet deep, we found very good and fresh water: +so we watered our ships, and might have filled a +thousand tons more if we had pleased. +</p> +<p> +We staid in this island until the ninth day of +October, and then departed at night for the +Cape of St. Lucar, which is on the west side of +the point of California. +</p> +<p> +The 14th, we fell in with the Cape of St. Lucar, +which cape is very like the Needles at the +isle of Wight, and within the said cape is a +great bay, called by the Spaniards Aguada Segura, +into which bay falleth a fair fresh river, +about which many Indians use to keep. We +<span class='pagenum'>205</span>watered in the river, and lay off and on with +the said cape of St. Lucar, until the 4th of November, +and had the winds hanging still westerly. +</p> +<p> +The 4th of November, beating up and down +upon the head-land of California, in 23 degrees +40 minutes to the northward, between seven +and eight o’clock in the morning, one of the +company of our Admiral, who was the trumpeter +of the ship, going up unto the top, espied +a sail bearing in from the sea with the cape; +whereupon he cried, with no small joy to himself +and all the company, A sail! a sail! With +which chearful word, the Master of the ship, +and divers others of the company, went also up +to the main-top, who, perceiving his speech to +be very true, gave information unto our General +of this happy news, who was no less glad +than the cause required: whereupon he gave +in charge presently unto the whole company, to +put all things in readiness; which being performed, +he gave them chace for three or four +hours, standing with our best advantage, and +working for the wind. In the afternoon we got +up to them, giving them a broadside with our +great ordnance, and a volley of small shot, and +presently laid the ship aboard, whereof the King +of Spain was owner, which was Admiral of the +South Sea, called St. Anna, and thought to be +seven hundred tons in burthen. Now, as we +were ready on the ship’s side to enter her, there +not being above fifty or sixty men at most in +<span class='pagenum'>206</span>our ship, we perceived that the Captain of the +Santa Anna had made sights fore and aft, and +hid their sails close on their poop, their midship, +with their forecastle, and not one man to +be seen, they standing so close under their sights, +with lances, javelins, rapiers, targets, and an innumerable +quantity of large stones, which they +threw overboard upon our heads, and into our +ships so fast, and being so many of them, that +they put us off the ship again, with the loss of +two of our men, who were slain, and four or +five wounded. But for all this, we new trimmed +our sails, and fitted every man his furniture, +and gave them a fresh encounter with our great +ordnance, and also with our small shot, raking +them through and through, to the killing and +wounding of many of their men. Their Captain, +still like a valiant man, with his company, +stood very stoutly unto his close sights, not +yielding as yet. Our General encouraging his +men afresh, with the whole noise of trumpets, +gave them the other encounter with our great +ordnance, and all our small shot, to the great +discouragement of our enemies, raking them +through in divers places, killing and wounding +many of their men. They being thus discouraged +and spoiled, and their ship being in hazard +of sinking, by reason of the great shot +which were made, whereof some were under +water, after five or six hours fight, set out a flag +of truce, and parlied for mercy, desiring our +General to save their lives, and to take their +<span class='pagenum'>207</span>goods, and that they would presently yield. Our +General promised them mercy, and willed them +to strike their sails, and to hoist out their boat, +and to come on board: which news they were +full glad to hear, and presently struck their +sails, hoisted out their boat, and one of their +chief merchants came on board unto our General, +and, falling down upon his knees, offered to +have kissed our General’s feet, and craved mercy. +Our General pardoned both him and the +rest, upon promise of their true dealing with +him and his company, concerning such riches as +were in the ship; and sent for their Captain and +pilot, who, at their coming, used the like duty +and reverence as the former did. Our General +promised their lives, and good usage. The said +Captain and pilot presently certified the General +what goods they had on board, viz. 122,000 +pezoes of gold; and the rest of the riches that +the ship was laden with, were silks, sattins, damasks, +with musk, and divers other merchandize, +and great plenty of all manner of provisions, +with the choice of many conserves, and +several sorts of very good wines. These things +being made known to the General by the aforesaid +Captain and pilot, they were commanded +to stay on board the Desire; and on the 6th day +of November following we went into an harbour, +which is called by the Spaniards Aguada +Segura, or Puerto Seguro. +</p> +<p> +Here the whole company of Spaniards, both +men and women, to the number of 190 persons, +<span class='pagenum'>208</span>were set on shore; where they had a fair river +of fresh water, with great plenty of fresh fish, +fowl, and wood, and also many hares and conies +upon the main land. Our General also gave +them plenty of provisions, garvances, peason, and +some wine. Also they had all the sails of their +ship to make them tents on shore, with licence +to take such store of planks as should be sufficient +to make them a bark. Then we fell to +heaving in of our goods, sharing of the treasure, +and allotting to every man his portion; in division +whereof, the 8th of this month, many of +the company fell into a mutiny against our General, +especially those who were in the Content, +which were nevertheless pacified for the time. +</p> +<p> +On the 17th day of November, which is the +day of the happy coronation of her Majesty, +our General commanded all his ordnance to be +shot off, with the small shot, both in his own +ship, and in the Content, which was our Vice-Admiral. +This being done, the same night we +had many fire-works, and more ordnance discharged, +to the great admiration of all the Spaniards +who were there, for the most of them had +never seen the like before. +</p> +<p> +This ended, our General discharged the Captain, +and gave him a royal reward, with provision +for his own and company’s defence against the +Indians, both of swords, targets, pieces, shot, and +powder, to his great contentment. But before +his departure, he took out of this great ship two +young lads born in Japan, who could both read +<span class='pagenum'>209</span>and write their own language; the eldest, being +about twenty years old, was named Christopher; +the other was called Cosmus, about seventeen +years of age; both of very good capacity. He +took also with him, out of their ship, three boys +born in the isles of Manilla; the one about fifteen, +the other about thirteen, the youngest +about nine years of age: the name of the eldest +was Alphonso, the second Anthony de Dasi, the +third remaineth with the Right Honourable the +Countess of Essex. He also took from them +one Nicholas Roderigo, a Portuguese, who had +not only been in Canton, and other parts of +China, but had also been in the islands of Japan, +being a country most rich in silver mines, and +had also been in the Philippines. He took also +from them a Spaniard, whose name was Thomas +de Ersola, who was a very good pilot from Acapulco, +and the coast of Nueva Espanna, unto the +islands of Ladrones, where the Spaniards put in +to water, sailing between Acapulco and the +Philippines; in which isles of Ladrones they +found fresh-water plantains, and potatoe-roots: +howbeit, the people are very rude, and heathens. +</p> +<p> +The 19th day of November aforesaid, about +three o’clock in the afternoon, our General +caused the King’s ship to be set on fire, which, +having to the quantity of 500 tons of goods in +her, we saw burnt unto the water, and then gave +them a piece of ordnance, and set sail joyfully +homewards towards England, with a fair wind, +<span class='pagenum'>210</span>which by this time was come about to east-north-east; +and, night growing near, we left the +Content a-stern of us, which was not as yet come +out of the road: and here, thinking she would +have overtaken us, we lost her company, and +never saw her after. +</p> +<p> +We were sailing from this haven of Aguada +Segura, in California, unto the isles of Ladrones, +the rest of November, and all December, and +so forth until the 3d of January, 1588, with a +fair wind, for the space of forty-five days; and +we esteemed it to be between seventeen and +eighteen hundred leagues. +</p> +<p> +The 3d of January, by six o’clock in the +morning, we had sight of one of the islands of +Ladrones, called the island of Guarsa, standing +in 13 deg. 40 min. towards the north; and, sailing +with a gentle gale before the wind, by one +or two o’clock in the afternoon we were come +within two leagues of the island, where we met +with sixty or seventy sail of canoes, full of savages, +who came off to sea unto us, and brought +with them in their canoes, plantains, cocoas, +potatoe-roots, and fresh fish, which they had +caught at sea, and held them up unto us for to +truck, or exchange with us; which, when we +perceived, we made fast little pieces of old iron +upon small cords and fishing lines, and so veered +the iron into their canoes; and they caught hold +of them, and took off the iron, and in exchange +of it they would make fast unto the line, either +a potatoe-root, or a bundle of plantains, which +<span class='pagenum'>211</span>we hauled in: and thus our company exchanged +with them, until they had satisfied themselves +with as much as did content them; yet we could +not be rid of them; for, afterwards, they were so +thick about the ship, that it stemmed and broke +one or two of their canoes; but the men saved +themselves, being in every canoe four, six, or +eight persons, all naked, and excellent swimmers +and divers. They are of a tawny colour, marvellously +fat, and ordinarily bigger of stature than +the most of our men in England, wearing their +hair very long, yet some of them have it made +up and tied with a knot on the crown, and some +with two knots, much like unto their images, +which we saw them have carved in wood, and +standing in the head of their boats, like unto the +images of the devil. Their canoes were as artificially +made as any that ever we had seen, considering +they were made and contrived without +any edged tool: they are not above half a fathom +in breadth, and in length some seven or +eight fathoms, and their heads and sterns are +both alike: they are made out with rafts of +canes and reeds on the starboard-side, with mast +and sail: their sail is made of mats of sedges +square or triangle ways; and they sail as well +right against the wind as before it. These savages +followed us so long that we could not be +rid of them until in the end our General commanded +our harquebusses to be made ready, and +he himself fired one of them, and the rest shot at +them; but they were so nimble, that we could +<span class='pagenum'>212</span>not discern whether they were killed or not, because +they could fall backward into the sea and +prevent us by diving. +</p> +<p> +The 14th, by break of day, we fell in with +an head-land of the Philippines, which is called +Cabo del Spirito Santo, which is of very great +bigness and length; high land in the midst of it, +and very low land, as the cape lieth east and west, +trending far into the sea to the westward. This +cape or island is distant from the isle of Guana +310 leagues. We were in sailing of this course +eleven days, with scant winds and foul weather, +bearing no sail two or three nights. This island +standeth in thirteen degrees, and is inhabited for +the most part by heathens, and very woody +through the whole island. It is short of the +chiefest island of the Philippines, called Manilla, +about sixty leagues. Manilla is well planted, and +inhabited by Spaniards to the number of six or +seven hundred persons, who dwell in a town +unwalled, which hath three or four small block-houses, +part made of wood and part of stone, +being indeed of no great strength. They have +one or two small gallies belonging to the town. +It is a very rich place in gold and many other +commodities; and they have yearly traffic from +Acapulco, in Nueva Espanna, and also twenty or +thirty ships from China, and from the Sanguelos, +which bringeth them many sorts of merchandize. +The merchants of China and the +Sanguelos are part Moors and part heathens; +they bring great quantities of gold with them, +<span class='pagenum'>213</span>which they traffic and exchange for silver, and +give weight for weight. These Sanguelos are +men of great genius for inventing and making +all manner of things, especially in all handicrafts +and sciences; and every one is so expert, +perfect, and skilful in his faculty, that few or +no Christians are able to go beyond them in that +which they take in hand. For drawing and embroidering +upon sattin, silk, or lawn, either +beast, fowl, fish, or worm, for liveliness and +perfectness both in silk, silver, gold, and pearl, +they excel. +</p> +<p> +The 14th, at night, we entered the straits +between the island of Lucon and the island of +Camlaia. +</p> +<p> +The 15th day, we fell in with an island called +Capul, and had, betwixt that and another island, +a very narrow passage, occasioned by a ledge of +rocks, lying off the point of the island of Capul, +and no danger, but water enough a good +way off. Within the point there is a fine bay, +and a very good harbour in four fathoms water, +within a cable’s length of the shore. Our +ship was no sooner come to an anchor, than +presently there came a canoe rowing on board us, +in which was one of the chief Casiques of the +island, whereof there are seven, who, supposing +that we were Spaniards, brought us potatoe +roots, which they call camotas, and green cocoas, +in exchange for which we gave his company +linnen to the quantity of a yard for four +cocoas, and as much linnen for a basket of potatoe +<span class='pagenum'>214</span>roots, of a quart in quantity, which roots +are very good eating, and very sweet either +roasted or boiled. +</p> +<p> +This Casique’s skin was carved and cut with +various coloured strakes and devices all over his +body; we kept him still on board, and caused +him to send those men who brought him on +board back to the island, to invite the rest of the +principal men to come on board: who were no +sooner gone on shore, than presently the people +of the island came down with their cocoas and +potatoe roots, and the rest of the Casiques likewise +came on board, and brought with them hens +and hogs. They used the same order with us +which they do with the Spaniards; for they took +for every hog, which they call balboye, eight +rials of plate, and for every hen or cock one +rial of plate. Thus we rode at anchor all that +day, doing nothing but buying roots, cocoas, +hens, hogs, and such things as they brought, +refreshing ourselves very much. +</p> +<p> +The same day, at night, Nicholas Roderigo, +the Portuguese whom we had taken out of the +great Santa Anna, at the Cape of California, +desired to speak with our General in secret; +which, when our General understood, he sent for +him, and asked him what he had to say to him. +The Portuguese made him answer, That, although +he had offended his worship heretofore, yet now +he had vowed his faith and true service to him; +and, in respect whereof, he neither could nor +would conceal such treason as was plotting +<span class='pagenum'>215</span>against him and his company; which was this, +that the Spaniard who was taken out of the +great Santa Anna for a pilot, whose name was +Thomas de Ersola, had written a letter secretly, +sealed it, and locked it up in his chest, meaning +to convey it, by the inhabitants of this +island, to Manilla; the contents whereof were, +that there had been two English ships along +the coast of Chili, Peru, Nueva Espanna, and +Nueva Galicia, and that they had taken many +ships and merchandize in them, and burnt divers +towns, and spoiled all that ever they could +come unto; and that they had taken the king’s +ship which came from Manilla, and all his treasure, +and all the merchandize that was therein, +and had set all the people on shore, taking himself +away by force; therefore he willed them +that they should make strong their bulwarks, +with their two galleys, and all such provision as +they could possibly make. He further signified, +that we were riding at an island called Capul, +which was at the end of the island of Manilla; +being but one ship with small force in it; and +that the other ship, as he supposed, was gone +for the north-west passage, standing in fifty-five +degrees; and that, if they could use any means +to surprize us, being there at anchor, they +should dispatch it, for our force was but small, +and our men but weak; and that the place +where we rode was but fifty leagues from them: +otherwise, if they let us escape, within a few +years they must make account to have their +<span class='pagenum'>216</span>town besieged and sacked by an army of English. +This information being given, our General +called for him, and charged him with these +things, which, at the first, he utterly denied; +but, in the end, the matter being +made manifest and known of certainty by special +trial and proofs, the next morning, our General +gave orders that he should be hanged, +which was accordingly performed the 16th of +January. +</p> +<p> +We rode for the space of nine days about this +island of Capul, where we had divers kinds of +fresh victuals, with excellent fresh water in every +bay, and great plenty of wood. The people of +this island go almost naked, and are of a tawny +colour. The men wear only a girdle about +their waists, of a kind of linnen of their own +weaving, which is made of plantain leaves, +and an apron, which, coming from their back +and covering their nakedness, is made fast to +their girdles at their navels. +</p> +<p> +These people use a strange kind of order +among them, which is this: every man and man-child +among them hath a little peg-nail thrust +through the head of his privy parts, being split +in the lower end, and rivetted, and on the head +of the nail is as it were a crown; which they +take out and in as they have occasion: and for +the truth thereof we ourselves have taken one +of these nails from a son of one of their kings, +who was of the age of ten years. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>217</span>On the 23d of January, our General, Mr. +Thomas Cavendish, caused all the chiefs of +this island and of an hundred islands more, +whom he had made to pay tribute to him, which +tribute was in hogs, hens, potatoes and cocoas, +to appear before him, and made himself and his +company known unto them, that they were Englishmen, +and enemies to the Spaniards; and +thereupon spread his ensign, sounded his trumpets, +and beat his drums; which they much +wondered at. To conclude, they promised +both themselves and all the islands thereabout, +to aid him whensoever he should come again to +overcome the Spaniards. Also our General +gave them, in token that we were enemies to the +Spaniards, money back again for all their tribute +which they had paid, which they took +very friendly, and rowed about our ship to give +us pleasure. At last our General ordered a +sacre to be shot off, whereat they wondered, and, +with great contentment, took their leave of us. +</p> +<p> +The next day, being the 26th of January, we set +sail, about six o’clock in the morning, and ran +along the coast of the island of Manilla, shaping +our course north-west, between Manilla +and the isle of Masbat. +</p> +<p> +The 28th in the morning, about seven o’clock, +riding at an anchor between two islands, we spied +a frigate under her courses, coming out between +two other islands, which, as we imagined, came +from Manilla, sailing close by the shore along +the main island of Panama. We chaced this frigate +along the shore, and gained fast upon her, +<span class='pagenum'>218</span>until in the end we came so near that she stood +in for the shore, close by a wind, and being becalmed, +banked up with her oars; whereupon +we came to an anchor with our ship a league +and a half from the place where the frigate +rowed in, and manned our boat with half a +dozen shot, and as many men with swords, who +did row the boat. Thus we made after the frigate, +which had run into a river where we could +not reach her; but as we rowed along the shore, +our boat came into very shallow water, where +many marks were set up in divers places in the +sea, from whence two or three canoes came +forth, whereof one made somewhat near unto +us with three or four Indians in it. We called +unto them, but they would not come nearer +unto us, but rowed from us, whom we durst +not follow too far, for fear of bringing ourselves +too much to the leeward of our ship. Here, as we +looked about us, we spied another balsa or canoe +of a great bigness, which they who were in +her did set along, as we usually set a barge, with +long staves or poles, which was builded up with +great canes, and below near the water made +to row with oars, wherein were about five or six +Indians and one Spaniard. Now, as we were +come almost at the balsa, we ran aground with +our boat, but one or two of our men leapt overboard +and freed it again presently, and keeping +thwart her head, we laid her aboard, and took +into us the Spaniard, but the Indians leaped into +the sea, and dived and rose again far off from us. +Presently, upon the taking of this canoe, there +<span class='pagenum'>219</span>appeared upon the sands a band of soldiers, +marching with an ensign having a red cross like +the flag of England, who were about fifty or +sixty Spaniards, lately come from Manilla to +that town, which is called Reguan, in a bark to +fetch a new ship of the king’s, which was +building in a river within the bay, and staid there +only for certain irons to serve for the rudder of +the said ship, which they looked for every day. +</p> +<p> +This band of men shot at us from the shore +with their musquets, but hit none of us, and +we shot at them again. They also manned a +frigate, and sent it out after our boat to have +taken us, but we with our oars went from +them; and whether they perceived they could +not overtake us, but that they must come within +danger of the ordnance of our ship, they +stood in with the shore again, and landed their +men; and presently sent their frigate about the +point, but whither we knew not: so we came on +board with this one Spaniard, who was neither +soldier nor sailor, but one who was come among +the rest from Manilla, and had been in the hospital +there a long time before, and was a very +simple fellow, and such a one as could answer +to very little that was enquired of him concerning +the state of the country. Here we +rode at anchor all that night, and perceived +that the Spaniards had dispersed their band +into two or three parties, and kept great watch +in several places with fires and shooting-off of +their pieces. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>220</span>This island hath much plain ground in it +in many places, and many fair and straight trees +grow upon it, fit to make excellent masts for all +sorts of ships. There are also mines of very fine +gold in it, which are in the custody of the Indians. +And, to the southward of this place, +there is another very great island, which is not +subdued by the Spaniards, nor any other nation. +The people who inhabit it are all negroes; and +the island is called the Island of Negroes. It is +almost as big as England, standing in nine degrees. +The most part of it seemeth to be very +low land, and, by all likelihood, is very fruitful. +</p> +<p> +The 29th day of January, about six o’clock +in the morning, we set sail, sending our boat before, +until it was two o’clock in the afternoon, +passing all this time as it were through a strait, +betwixt the said two islands of Panama and the +island of Negroes; and, about 16 leagues off, +we espied a fair opening, trending south-west +and by-south; at which time our boat came on +board, and our General sent commendations +to the Spanish Captain, whom we came from +the evening before, by the Spaniard we had +taken, and desired him to provide good store of +gold, for he intended to see him with his company +at Manilla within a few years, and that he +did but want a bigger boat to have landed his +men, or else he would have seen him then; and +so caused him to be set on shore. +</p> +<p> +The 8th day of February, by eight o’clock +in the morning, we espied an island near Gilolo, +<span class='pagenum'>221</span>called Batochina, which standeth in one degree +from the Equinoctial Line, northward. +</p> +<p> +The 14th day of February, we fell in with +eleven or twelve very small islands, lying very +low and flat, full of trees; and passed by some +islands which are sunk, and have the dry sands +lying in the main sea. These islands, near the +Moluccas, stand in three degrees ten minutes to +the southward of the Line. +</p> +<p> +On the 17th day, one John Gameford, a cooper, +died, who had been sick of an old disease a +long time. +</p> +<p> +The 20th day, we fell in with certain other +islands, which had many small islands among +them, standing four degrees to the southward +of the Line. +</p> +<p> +On the 21st day of February, being Ash-Wednesday, +Captain Havers died, of a most violent +and pestilent ague, which held him furiously +for seven or eight days, to the no small grief of +our General, and of all the rest of the company, +who caused two falcons and one sacre to be shot +off, with all the small shot in the ship; who, +after he was shrouded in a sheet, was thrown +over-board, with great lamentation of us all. +Moreover, presently after his death, myself, with +divers others in the ship, fell very sick, and so +continued in very great pain for the space of +three weeks, or a month, by reason of the extreme +heat and intemperateness of the climate. +</p> +<p> +The 1st day of March, having passed through +the straits of Java Minor and Java Major, we +<span class='pagenum'>222</span>came to an anchor, under the south-west parts +of Java Major; where we espied certain of the +inhabitants, who were fishing by the sea side in +a bay which was under the island. Then our +General taking into the ship-boat certain of his +company, and a negroe who could speak the +Morisco tongue, whom he had taken out of the +Santa Anna, made towards those fishers; who, +having espied our boat, ran on shore into the +woods, for fear of our men. But our General +caused his negroe to call unto them; who had +no sooner heard him call, than presently one of +them came to the shore side, and made answer. +Our General, by the negroe, enquired of him +for fresh water; which they found; and caused +the fisher to go to the King, and to acquaint +him of a ship that was come to have traffic for +victuals, and for diamonds, pearls, or any other +rich jewels that he had for which, he should +have either gold, or other merchandize in exchange. +The fisher answered, that we should +have all manner of victuals that we would request. +Thus our boat came on board again. +Within a while after, we went about to furnish +our ship thoroughly with wood and water. +</p> +<p> +About the 8th of March, two or three canoes +came from the town unto us, with eggs, hens, +fresh fish, oranges, and limes, and brought word +we should have had victuals more plentifully, +but that they were so far to be brought to us +where we rode. Which when our General +heard, he weighed anchor, and stood in nearer +<span class='pagenum'>223</span>for the town; and, as we were under sail, we +met with one of the King’s canoes coming towards +us: whereupon we dropt some of our +sails, and staid for the canoe until it came +aboard us, then stood into the bay, which was +hard by, and came to an anchor. In this canoe +was the King’s Secretary, who had on his head +a piece of died linnen, folded up like unto a +Turkish turban. He was all naked, except +about his waist; his breast was carved with the +broad arrow upon it; he went bare-footed. He +had an interpreter with him, who was a Mestizo, +that is, half an Indian and half a Portuguese, +who could speak very good Portuguese. This +Secretary signified unto our General, that he +had brought him an hog, hens, eggs, fresh fish, +sugar canes, and wine, which wine was as strong +as aqua-vitæ, and as clear as any rock-water. +He told him farther, that he would bring victuals +so sufficiently for him as he and his company +would request, and that within the space of four +days. Our General used him singularly well, +banquetted him most royally with the choice of +many and sundry conserves, wines both sweet +and otherwise; and caused his musicians to +make him music. This done, our General told +him, that he and his company were Englishmen; +that we had been at China, and had trafficked in +that country; that we were come thither to make +enquiries, and purposed to go to Molucca. The +people told our General, that there were certain +Portuguese in the island, who staid there as factors +<span class='pagenum'>224</span>continually, to traffic with them, to buy +negroes, cloves, pepper, sugar, and many other +commodities. This Secretary of the King, with +his interpreter, lay one night on board our ship. +The same night, because they lay on board, in +the evening at the setting of the watch, our General +commanded every man in the ship to provide +his harquebuss, and his shot; and so with +shooting off forty or fifty small shot, and a sacre, +himself set the watch. This was no small wonder +to these heathen people, who had not commonly +seen any ship so furnished with men and +ordnance. The next morning we dismissed the +Secretary and his interpreter, with all humanity. +</p> +<p> +The fourth day after, which was the 12th of +March, according to their appointment, came +the King’s canoes: but the wind being somewhat +scant, they could not get on board that +night, but put into a bay under the island until +the next day; and, presently after the break of +day, there came to the number of nine or ten of +the King’s canoes, so deeply laden with provisions +as they could swim, with two live oxen, +half a score of large fat hogs, a number of live +hens, ducks, and geese, with eggs, plantains, sugar-canes, +sugar in plates, cocoas, sweet oranges, +and bitter limes, great store of wine and aqua-vitæ, +salt to season meat with, and almost all +manner of provisions besides, accompanied with +divers of the King’s Officers who were there. +Among all the rest of the people, in one of these +canoes, came two Portuguese, who were men of +<span class='pagenum'>225</span>middle stature, and very proper personage: they +were each of them in a loose jerkin and hose, +which came down from the waist to the ancle, +according to the fashion of the country, and +partly because it was Lent, and a time for doing +of their penance. They account it as a thing of +great dishonour among these heathens, to wear +either hose or shoes on their feet. The Portuguese +had on each of them a very fair and a white +lawn shirt, with falling bands on the same, very +decent, their bare legs excepted. These Portuguese +were no small joy unto our General, and +all the rest of our company; for we had not seen +any christian that was our friend for a year and +an half before. Our General used and treated +them singularly well with banquets and music. +They told us, that they were no less glad to see +us than we were to see them, and enquired into +the estate of their country, and what was become +of Don Antonio, their King, and whether he +were living or not; for that they had not been +in Portugal for a long time, and that the Spaniards +had always brought them word that he +was dead? Then our General satisfied them in +every demand, assuring them that their King +was alive and in England, and had honourable +allowance from our Queen; and that there was +war betwixt Spain and England, and that we +were come under the King of Portugal into the +South Sea, and had warred upon the Spaniards +there, and had fired, spoiled, and sunk all the +ships along the coast that we could meet with, +<span class='pagenum'>226</span>to the number of eighteen or twenty sail. With +this report they were abundantly satisfied. +</p> +<p> +On the other side, they declared unto us the +state of the island of Java: First, the plentifulness, +great choice, and store of provisions of all +sorts, and of all manner of fruits, as before set +down; then the great and rich merchandizes +which are there to be had. Then they described +the nature and properties of the people, as followeth: +The name of the King of that part of +the island was Raya Bolamboam, who was a man +had in great majesty and fear among them. The +common people may not bargain, sell, or exchange +any thing with any other nation, without +special licence from their King; and, if any so +do, it is present death for him. The King himself +is a man of great years, and hath an hundred +wives; his son hath fifty. The custom of the +country is, that, whensoever the King doth die, +they take the dead body and burn it, and preserve +the ashes of him; and, within five days +next after, the wives of the said King so dead, +according to the custom and use of their country, +every one of them go together to a place +appointed; and, the chief of the women, who +was nearest to him in account, hath a ball in her +hand, and throweth it from her; and to the place +where the ball resteth, thither they go all, and +turn their faces to the eastward, and every one, +with a dagger in her hand (which dagger they +call a crise, and is as sharp as a razor), stab themselves +to the heart, and, with their own hands, +<span class='pagenum'>227</span>bathe themselves in their blood, and falling flat +on their faces, so end their days. This thing is +as true as it may seem to any hearer to be +strange. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/308.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>The</i> <span class="small-caps">King</span> <i>of</i> <span class="small-caps">Java’</span><i>s Wives destroying themselves at his Death</i>.</figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +The men of themselves are very politic and +subtle, and singularly valiant (being naked men) +in any action they undertake, and very submissive +and obedient to their king: for example, +if their king command them to undertake any +exploit, be it ever so dangerous or desperate, +they dare not nor will not refuse, though they +should die every man of them in executing the +same; for he will cut off the heads of every +one of them who return alive, without bringing +their purpose to pass; which is such a thing +amongst them as maketh them the most valiant +people in all the south-east parts of the world; +for they never fear any death; for being in fight +with any nation, if any of them feeleth himself +hurt with lance or sword, he will willingly run +himself upon the weapon quite through the +body to procure his death the more speedily, +and in this desperate manner end his days, or +overcome his enemy. Moreover, although +the men be tawny of colour, and go continually +naked, yet their women are fair of complexion, +and go more apparelled. +</p> +<p> +After they had thus described the state of the +island and the order and fashion of the people, +they told us further, that, if their king, Don +Antonio, would come unto them, they would +warrant him to have all the Moluccas at command, +<span class='pagenum'>228</span>besides China-Sanglos and the isles of the +Philippines; and that he might be assured to +have all the Indians on his side that were in the +country. After we had fully contented these +Portuguese, and the people of Java who had +brought us provisions in their canoes, they took +their leave of us with promise of all good entertainment +at our return; and our General gave +them three great pieces of ordnance at their +departing. +</p> +<p> +Thus, the next day, being the 16th of +March, we set sail towards the Cape of Good +Hope, called by the Portuguese Cabo de +Buena Esperanca, on the most southern coast of +Africa. +</p> +<p> +The rest of March, and all the month of +April, we spent in traversing that mighty and +vast sea, between the island of Java and the +main of Africa, observing the heavens, the +Crosiers, or the South-pole, the other stars, the +fowls which are marks unto seamen of fair +weather and foul weather, approaching of lands +or islands, the winds, the tempests, the rains +and thunder, with the alterations of tides and +currents. +</p> +<p> +The 10th day of May, we had a storm from +the west, and it blew so hard that it was as +much as the ship could steer close by under the +wind; and the storm continued all that day and +all that night. +</p> +<p> +The next day, being the 11th of May, in the +morning, one of the company went up to the +<span class='pagenum'>229</span>top, and espied land bearing north and north-by-west +of us; and about noon we espied land to +bear west of us, which we imagined to be the +Cape of Buena Esperanca, whereof indeed we +were short about forty or fifty leagues; and, +by reason of the scantness of the wind, we +stood along to the south-east until midnight, at +which time the wind came fair, and we hauled +along westward. +</p> +<p> +The 12th and 13th days we were becalmed, +and the sky was very hazy and thick until the +14th day at three o’clock in the afternoon, at +which time the sky cleared, and we spied land +again, which was that called Cabo Falso, +which is short of Cabo de Buena Esperanca +forty or fifty leagues. +</p> +<p> +This cape is very easy to be known, for there +are right over it three very high hills, standing +but a small way one off another, and the highest +standeth in the midst, and the ground is much +lower by the sea-side. The Cape of Good Hope +beareth west and by-south from the said Cabo +Falso. +</p> +<p> +The 16th day of May, about four o’clock +in the afternoon, the wind came up at east a +very brisk gale, which continued till Saturday +with as much wind as ever the ship could go before. +At which time, by six o’clock in the +morning, we espied the promontory or head-land +called the Cabo de Buena Esperanca, which +is a pretty high-land; and at the westernmost +point, a little off the main, appear two hummocks, +<span class='pagenum'>230</span>the one upon the other, and three other +hummocks lying further off into the sea, +yet low land between and adjoining unto the sea. +</p> +<p> +This Cape of Buena Esperanca is set down +and accounted 2000 leagues from the island of +Java in the Portuguese sea charts, but it is not +so much by almost 150 leagues, as we found +by the running of our ship. We were in +running of these 1850 leagues just nine +weeks. +</p> +<p> +The 8th day of June, by break of day, we +fell in sight of the island of St. Helena, seven or +eight leagues short of it, having but a small +gale of wind, or almost none at all, insomuch +as we could not get into it that day, but stood +off and on all that night. +</p> +<p> +The next day, being the ninth of June, having +a pretty easy gale of wind, we stood in with +the shore, our boat being sent away before to +make the harbour; and, about one o’clock in +the afternoon, we came to an anchor in twelve +fathoms water, two or three cables length from +the shore, in a very fair and smooth bay under +the north-west side of the island. +</p> +<p> +This island is very high land, and lieth in the +main sea; standing, as it were, in the midst of +the sea, between the main land of Africa, the +main of Brazilia, and the coast of Guinea; and +is in fifteen degrees forty-eight minutes to the +southward of the Equinoctial Line, and is distant +from the Cape of Buena Esperanca between +five and six hundred leagues. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>231</span>The same day, about two or three o’clock in +the afternoon, we went on shore, where we +found an exceeding fair and pleasant valley, +wherein divers handsome buildings and houses +were set up; and one particularly, which was a +church, was tiled and whitened on the outside +very fair, and made with a porch; and within +the church, at the upper end, was set an altar, +whereon stood a very large table, set in a frame, +having in it the picture of our Saviour Christ +upon the cross, and the image of our Lady +praying, with divers other histories curiously +painted in the same. The sides of the church +were hung round with stained cloths, having +many devices drawn on them. +</p> +<p> +There are two houses adjoining to the church, +on each side one, which serve for kitchens to +dress meat in, with necessary rooms and houses +of office. The coverings of the said houses are +made flat, where is planted a very fair vine, and +through both the said houses runneth a very +good and wholesome stream of fresh water. +</p> +<p> +There is also over against the church a very fair +causeway, made up with stones reaching unto +a valley by the sea side, in which valley is planted +a garden, wherein grow great store of pompions +and melons; and upon the said causeway +is a frame erected, whereon hang two bells, +wherewith they ring to mass; and near to it a +cross is set up, which is squared, framed, and +made very artificially of free-stone, whereon is +<span class='pagenum'>232</span>carved in cyphers what time it was built, which +was in the year of our Lord 1571. +</p> +<p> +This valley is the fairest and largest low plot +in all the island, and is exceeding sweet and pleasant, +and planted in every place, either with +fruit or with herbs. +</p> +<p> +There are fig-trees which bear fruit continually +and very plentifully; for on every tree you +may see blossoms, green figs, and ripe figs all +at once, and it is so all the year long. The reason +is, that the island standeth so near the sun. +There is also great store of lemon-trees, orange-trees, +pomegranate-trees, pomecitron-trees, and +date-trees, which bear fruit as the fig-trees do, +and are planted carefully and very artificially, +with pleasant walks under and between them; +and the said walks are overshadowed with the +leaves of the trees; and in every void place is +planted parsley, sorrel, basil, fennel, anniseed, +mustard-seed, radishes, and many very good +herbs. The fresh-water brook runneth through +divers places in this orchard, and may, with +very small pains, be made to water any one tree +in the valley. +</p> +<p> +This fresh-water stream cometh from the tops +of the mountains, and falleth from the cliff into +the valley the height of a cable; and hath +many arms issuing out of it, that refresh the whole +island, and almost every tree in it. The island +is altogether high mountains and steep vallies, +except it be on the tops of some hills, and down +below in some of the vallies, where great plenty +<span class='pagenum'>233</span>of all those fruits before spoken of do grow. +There are much more growing on the tops of +the mountains than below in the vallies; but +it is very toilsome and dangerous travelling up +unto them and down again, by reason of the +height and steepness of the hills. +</p> +<p> +There are also upon this island great store of +partridges, which are very tame, not making +any great haste to fly away, though one come +very near them, but only to run away and get +up into the steep cliffs; we killed some of them +with a fowling-piece; they differ very much +from our partridges which are in England both +in bigness and also in colour, for they are almost +as big as hens, and are of an ash colour, and +live in covies, twelve, sixteen, and twenty together; +you cannot go ten or twelve score paces +but you shall see or spring one or two covies at +the least. +</p> +<p> +There are likewise no less plenty of pheasants +in the island, which are also very big and fat, +surpassing those which are in our country in bigness +and in numbers in a company; they differ not +very much in colour from the partridges before +spoken of. We found, moreover, on this island, +plenty of Guinea-cocks, which we call turkies, +of colour black and white, with red heads; they +are much the same in bigness with ours in England; +their eggs are white, and as big as a turkey’s +egg. +</p> +<p> +There are in this island thousands of goats, +which the Spaniards call cabritos, which are very +<span class='pagenum'>234</span>wild; you shall see one or two hundred of them +together, and sometimes you may see them go +in a flock almost a mile long; some of them +(whether it be the nature of the breed of them +or of the country I know not) are as big as an +ass, with a mane like a horse, and a beard hanging +down to the very ground; they will climb +up the cliffs, which are so steep that a man +would think it a thing impossible that any living +creature could go there. We took and killed +many of them for all their swiftness, for there +are thousands of them upon the mountains. +</p> +<p> +Here are in like manner great store of swine, +which are very wild and fat, and of great bigness; +they keep altogether upon the mountains, +and will very seldom abide any man to come +near them, except it be by mere chance, when +they are found asleep, or otherwise, according +to their kind, are taken lying in the mire. +</p> +<p> +We found in the houses, at our coming, three +slaves who were negroes, and one who was born +in the island of Java, who told us, that the +East-Indian fleet, which were in number five +sail, the least whereof was in burden eight or +nine hundred tons, all laden with spices and Calicut +cloth, with store of treasure, and very rich +stones and pearls, were gone from the said +island, St. Helena, but twenty days before we +came thither. +</p> +<p> +This island hath been found long ago by the +Portuguese, and hath been altogether planted +by them for their refreshment, as they come +<span class='pagenum'>235</span>from the East-Indies; and, when they come, +they have all things in plenty for their relief, +by reason that they suffer none to inhabit there, +that might eat up the produce of the island, except +some very few sick persons of their company, +whom they suspect will not live until they +come home; these they leave there to refresh +themselves, and take them away the year following, +with the other fleet, if they live so long. +They touch here rather in their coming home +from the East Indies, than at their going thither, +because they are thoroughly furnished with corn +when they set out of Portugal; but are meanly +victualled at their coming from the Indies, where +there groweth but little corn. +</p> +<p> +The 20th day of June, having taken in wood +and water, and refreshed ourselves with such +things as we found there, and made clean our +ship, we set sail about eight o’clock at night towards +England. At our setting sail we had the +wind at south-east, and we hauled north-west +and by-west. The wind is commonly off the +shore at this island of St. Helena. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday the 3d day of July, we went +away north-west, the wind being still at south-east; +at which time we were in one degree and +forty-eight minutes to the southward of the +Equinoctial Line. +</p> +<p> +The 12th day of the said month of July there +was very little wind; and, towards night, it was +calm, and blew no wind at all, and so continued +till Monday, being the 15th day of July. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>236</span>On Wednesday the 17th day of the said +month, we had a small gale at west-north-west. +We found the wind continually to blow at east +and north-east, and east-north-east, after we were +in three or four degrees to the northward; and +it altered not until we came between thirty and +forty degrees to the northward of the Equinoctial +Line. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday the 21st day of August, the +wind came up at south-west a fair gale; by which +day at noon we were in thirty-eight degrees of +north latitude. +</p> +<p> +On Friday in the morning, being the 23d of +August, at four o’clock we hauled east and east-by-south, +for the most northern islands of the +Azores. +</p> +<p> +On Saturday the 24th day of the said month, +by five o’clock in the morning, we fell in sight of +the two islands of Flores and Corvo, standing +thirty-nine degrees thirty minutes; and sailed +away north-east. +</p> +<p> +The 3d of September, we met with a Flemish +hulk that came from Lisbon, and declared unto +us the overthrowing of the Spanish fleet, to the +singular rejoicing and comfort of us all. +</p> +<p> +The 9th of September, after a terrible tempest, +which carried away most part of our sails, +by the merciful favour of the Almighty, we recovered +our long-wished-for port of Plymouth, +in England, from whence we set forth at the +beginning of our voyage.” +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>237</span><a href='#tgb_b237' id='tg_b237'>[</a>The wealth acquired in this voyage, though +very considerable, was soon dissipated; and, in less +than three years, Cavendish again found himself +under the necessity of preparing for a second, in +which, however, he was very unfortunate. He +had, indeed, increased his preparations; and, it +is not to be doubted, but that the certainty he +had conceived of acquiring a more ample fortune +by a second enterprize, made him the more +careless in the management of the treasure he had +acquired by the first. +</p> +<p> +The ships fitted out on this occasion were the +Leicester, commanded by himself as Admiral; +the Roebuck, Captain Cocke, Vice-Admiral; +the Desire, Captain Davis, Rear-Admiral; the +<i>Dainty</i>, Captain Coffen; and the <i>Black Pinnace</i>, +whose Commander’s name is not mentioned. The +Commanders in this expedition were some of +the ablest navigators the nation produced, and +the highest expectations were formed from their +fortitude and approved experience. +</p> +<p> +Of the accounts that have been given of this +expedition, that published by John Jane, a gentleman +who accompanied Captain Davis in the +Desire, is the most complete; for which reason, +we shall give it in the writer’s own words, as it +is but in few hands, and full of interesting +events: +</p> +<p> +“The 26th of Aug. 1591, we departed from +Plymouth, says Mr. Jane, with three large ships +and two barks. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>238</span>The 29th of November, we fell in with the +bay of Salvador, upon the coast of Brasil, twelve +leagues on this side Cape Frio, where we were +becalmed until the 2d of December: at which +time we took a small bark bound for the river +of Plate, with sugar, haberdash-wares, and negroes. +The master of this bark brought us to +an isle called Placentia, thirty leagues west from +Cape Frio, where we arrived the 5th of December, +and rifled six or seven houses inhabited by +the Portuguese. The 11th, we departed from +this place, and, the 14th, arrived at the island of +St. Sebastian; from whence Mr. Cocke and +Captain Davis presently departed with the Desire +and Black Pinnace, for taking the town of +Santos. The 15th, at evening, we anchored at +the bar of Santos, from whence we departed, +with our boats, to the town; by which expedition, +we took all the people at mass, both men +and women, whom we kept all that day in the +church as prisoners. The cause why Mr. Cavendish +desired to take this town, was to supply +his great wants; and, having it now in quiet +possession, we stood in assurance of having provisions +in great abundance. But such was the +negligence of Captain Cocke, that the Indians +were suffered to carry out whatsoever they would +in open view, and no man did controul them: +and the next day, after we had won the town, +our prisoners were all set at liberty; only four +poor old men were kept as pledges to supply +our wants. Thus, in three days, the town, which +<span class='pagenum'>239</span>was able to furnish such another fleet with all +kinds of necessaries, was left unto us nakedly +bare, without people and provisions. +</p> +<p> +Eight or ten days after, Mr. Cavendish himself +came hither, where he remained until the 22d +of January, seeking by entreaty to have that +whereof we were once possessed. But, in conclusion, +we departed worse furnished from the +town, than when we came unto it. The 22d, +we burnt St. Vincent’s to the ground. The 24th, +we set sail, shaping our course for the straits of +Magellan. +</p> +<p> +The 7th of February, we had a very great +storm; and, the 8th, our fleet was separated by +the fury of the tempest. Then our Captain +called unto him the master of our ship, a very +honest and sufficient man; and, conferring with +him, he concluded to go for Port Desire, hoping +that the General would come thither, because +that in his first voyage he had found great relief +there; for our Captain could never get any direction +what course to take in any such extremities, +though many times he had entreated for +it, as often I have heard him with grief report. +In sailing to this port, by good chance, +we met with the Roebuck, wherein Mr. Cocke +had endured great extremities, and lost his boat, +and therefore desired our Captain to keep him +company, for he was in a very desperate situation. +Our Captain hoisted out his boat, and went on +board him to know his estate, and, returning, +told us the hardness thereof, and desired the +<span class='pagenum'>240</span>Master and all the company to be careful in all +their watches not to lose the Roebuck, and so +we both arrived at Port Desire the sixth of +March. +</p> +<p> +The 16th of March, the Black Pinnace came +to us; but the Dainty came not, but returned +back to England, leaving their captain on board +the Roebuck, without any provision more than +the apparel that he wore. The 18th the Leicester +came into the road, and Mr. Cavendish +came into the harbour in a boat which he had +made at sea; for his long boat and pinnace +were lost at sea: and being on board the Desire, +he told our captain of all his extremities, and +spoke most hardly of his company, and of divers +gentlemen that were with him, purposing +no more to go on board his own ship, but to +stay in the Desire. We all sorrowed to hear +such hard speeches of our good friends; but +having spoken with the gentlemen of the Leicester, +we found them faithful, honest, and resolute +in proceeding, although it pleased our +General otherwise to conceive of them. +</p> +<p> +The 20th of March, we departed from Port +Desire, Mr. Cavendish being in the Desire with +us. The 8th of April, we fell in with the straits of +Magellan, enduring many furious storms between +Port Desire and the strait. The 14th, we passed +through the first strait. The 16th, we passed the +second strait, being ten leagues distant from the +first. The 18th, we doubled Cape Froward, +which cape lieth in 53 degrees 30 minutes. +<span class='pagenum'>241</span>The 21st we were forced, through the fury of +the weather, to put into a small cove with our +ships, four leagues from the said cape, upon the +south shore, where we remained until the 15th +of May. In the which time we endured extreme +storms, with perpetual snow, where many +of our men died with cursed famine, and +miserable cold, not having wherewith to cover +their bodies, nor to fill their bellies, but living +by muscles, water, and weeds of the sea, with a +small relief, from the ship’s store, in meal, +sometimes. And all the sick men in the Leicester +were most uncharitably put on shore into +the woods, in the snow, rain, and cold, when +men of good health could scarcely endure it, +where they ended their lives in the highest degree +of misery, Mr. Cavendish all the while being +on board the Desire. In these great extremities +of snow and cold, doubting what the end +would be, he asked our captain’s opinion, because +he was a man that had good experience +of the north-west parts, in his three several discoveries +that way, employed by the merchants +of London. Our captain told him, that this +snow was a matter of no long continuance, and +gave him sufficient reason for it, and that thereby +he could not much be prejudiced or hindered +in his proceeding. Notwithstanding, he called +together all the company, and told them, that +he purposed not to stay in the straits, but to depart +upon some other voyage, or else to return +again for Brazil: but his resolution was to go +<span class='pagenum'>242</span>for the Cape of Good Hope. The company +answered, that, if it pleased him, they did desire +to stay God’s favour for a wind, and to endure +all hardness whatsoever, rather than to give over +the voyage, considering they had been here but +a small time, and because they were within forty +leagues of the South Sea, it grieved them +now to return: notwithstanding, whatever he +ordered, that they would perform. So he concluded +to go for the Cape of Good Hope, and +to give over this voyage. Then our captain, +after Mr. Cavendish was come on board the +Desire from talking with the company, told +him, that, if it pleased him to consider the great +extremity of his situation, the slenderness of his +provisions, with the weakness of his men, it +was no course for him to proceed in that new +enterprize: for if the rest of your ships (said he) +be furnished answerable to this, it is impossible +to perform your determination; for we have no +more sails than masts, no victuals, no ground-tackling, +no cordage more than is over-head, +and, among seventy-five persons, there is but the +master alone that can order the ship, and but +fourteen sailors: the rest are gentlemen, serving-men, +and artificers. Therefore it will be a desperate +case to take so hard an enterprize in hand. +These persuasions did our captain not only use +to Mr. Cavendish, but also to Mr. Cocke. +In fine, upon a petition delivered in writing by +the chief of the whole company, the General +determined to depart out of the straits of Magellan, +<span class='pagenum'>243</span>and to return again for Santos in Brazil. +</p> +<p> +So the 15th of May, we set sail, our General +being then in the Leicester. The 18th, we were +free of the straits, but at Cape Froward it was +our hard hap to have our boat sunk at our +stern in the night, and to lose all our oars. +</p> +<p> +On the 20th, being thwart of Port Desire, in +the night the General altered his course, as we +suppose, by which occasion we lost him: for, +in the evening, he stood close by a wind to seaward, +having the wind at north-north-east, and +we standing the same way, the wind not altering, +could not the next day see him: so that +we then persuaded ourselves, that he was gone +for Port Desire to relieve himself, or that he +had sustained some mischance at sea, and was +gone thither to remedy it. Whereupon our +captain called the General’s men unto him, +with the rest, and asked their opinion what was +to be done. Every one conjectured that the +General was gone for Port Desire. Then the +Master, being the General’s man, and careful of +his master’s service, as also of good judgment in +sea-matters, told the company how dangerous it +was to go for Port Desire, if we should there miss +the General: for (said he) we have no boat to +land ourselves, nor any anchors or cables that I +dare trust in so quick streams as are there: yet, +in all likelihood concluding that the General +was gone thither, we steered our course for Port +Desire, and by chance met with the Black Pinnace, +<span class='pagenum'>244</span>which had likewise lost the fleet, being in +a very miserable case: so we both concluded to +seek the General at Port Desire. +</p> +<p> +The 26th day of May, we came to Port Desire, +where not finding our General as we hoped, +being most slenderly victualled, without +sails, boat, oars, nails, cordage, and all other +necessaries for our relief, we were struck into a +deadly sorrow. But, referring all to Providence, +we entered the harbour, and found a +place of quiet road, which before we knew not. +Having moored our ship with the pinnace’s +boat, we landed upon the south shore, where we +found a standing pool of fresh-water, which by +estimation might hold about ten tons, whereby +we were greatly comforted. From this pool +we fetched more than forty tons of water, and +yet we left the pool as full as we found it. And, +because at our first being at this harbour we were +at this place and found no water, we persuaded +ourselves that God had sent it for our relief. +Also there were such extraordinary low ebbs as +we had never seen, whereby we got muscles in +plenty and great abundance of smelts, so that, +with hooks made of pins, every man caught as +many as he could eat: by which means we preserved +our ship’s victuals, and spent not any +during the time of our abode here. +</p> +<p> +Our Captain and Master, considering our ability +to go to the General, found our wants so +great, as that in a month we could not fit our +ship to set sail; for we must needs set up a +<span class='pagenum'>245</span>smith’s forge to make bolts, spikes, and nails, +besides the repairing of our other wants. Whereupon +they concluded it to be their best course, +to take the pinnace, and to furnish her, and to +go to the General with all expedition, leaving +the ship and the rest of the company until the +General’s return; for he had vowed to our +Captain, that he would return again to the +straits, as he had told us. The Captain and +Master of the pinnace, being the General’s +men, were well contented with the motion. +</p> +<p> +But the General having in our ship two most +pestilent fellows, when they heard of this determination, +they utterly misliked it, and, in secret, +dealt with the company of both ships, vehemently +persuading them that our Captain and +Master would leave them in the country to be +devoured by the cannibals, and that they were +merciless and without charity: whereupon the +whole company joined in secret with them, in a +night, to murder our Captain and Master, with +myself and all those they thought were their +friends. There were marks taken in his cabbin, +how to kill him with musquets through the +ship’s side, and bullets made of silver for the +execution, if their other purposes should fail. +All agreed hereunto except the boatswain of our +ship, who, when he knew the matter, revealed +it to the Master, and so to the Captain. Then the +matter being called in question, those two murderous +fellows were found out, whose names +were Charles Parker and Edward Smith. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>246</span>The Captain, being thus hardly beset, in peril +of famine, and in danger of being murdered, +was constrained to use lenity, and by courteous +means to pacify this fury: shewing, that, to +do the General service, unto whom he had vowed +faith in this action, was the cause why he +purposed to go unto him in the pinnace, considering +that the pinnace was so necessary a thing +for him, as that he could not be without her, +because he was fearful of the shore in so great +ships. Whereupon all cried, with cursing and +swearing, that the pinnace should not go unless +the ship went. Then the Captain desired them +to shew themselves christians, and not so blasphemously +to behave themselves, without regard +and thanksgiving to God for their great deliverance. +By which gentle speeches, the matter was +pacified, and the Captain and Master, at the +request of the company, were content to forgive +this great treachery of Parker and Smith, who, +after many admonitions, concluded in these +words: “The Lord judge between you and +me:” which after came to a most sharp revenge, +even by the punishment of the Almighty. +Thus, by a general consent, it was concluded +not to depart, but to stay there for the +General’s return. Then our captain and Master, +seeing that they could not do the General +that service which they desired, made a motion +to the company, that they would lay down under +their hands the losing of the General, with +the extremities wherein we then stood: whereunto +<span class='pagenum'>247</span>they consented, and wrote under their +hands what followeth: +</p> +<p class='hang_indent top_space'> +<i>The Testimonial of the Company of the</i> Desire, +<i>touching the losing of their General, which appeareth +to have been utterly against their meanings.</i></p> +<p> +“<span class='toupper lspa'>The</span> 26th of August 1591, we whose +names are here underwritten, with divers others, +departed from Plymouth, under Mr. Thomas +Cavendish our General, with four ships of his, +viz. the Leicester, the Roebuck, the Desire, +and the Black Pinnace, for the performance of +a voyage into the South Sea. The 19th of November, +we fell in with the bay of Salvador, in +Brazil. The 16th of December we took the +town of Santos, hoping there to revictual ourselves, +but it fell not out to our contentment. +The 24th of January we set sail from Santos, +shaping our course for the straits of Magellan. +The 8th of February, by violent storms, +the said fleet being parted, the Roebuck +and the Desire arrived at Port Desire the +sixth of March. The sixteenth of March, +the Black Pinnace arrived there also: and +the 18th of the same, our Admiral came +into the road, with whom we departed the 20th +of March in poor and weak estate. The 8th +of April 1592, we entered the straits of Magellan. +The 21st of April we anchored beyond +Cape Froward, within 40 leagues of the South +Sea, where we rode until the 15th of May. In +<span class='pagenum'>248</span>which time we had great store of snow, with +some gusty weather, the wind continuing still +west-north-west against us. In this time we +were inforced, for the preserving of our victuals, +to live the most part upon muscles, our +provision was so slender; so that many of our +men died in this hard extremity. Then our General +returned for Brazil, there to winter, and +to procure victuals for this voyage against the +next year. So we departed the straits, the 15th +of May. The 21st, being thwart of Port Desire, +36 leagues off the shore, the wind then at north-east +and by-north; at five of the clock at night, +lying north-east, we suddenly cast about, lying +south-east and by-south, and sometimes south-east: +the whole fleet following the Admiral, our +ship coming under his lee, shot a-head of +him, and so framed sail fit to keep company. +This night we were severed, by what occasion +we protest we know not, whether we lost them +or they us. In the morning we only saw the +Black Pinnace, then supposing the Admiral had +overshot us. All this day we stood to the eastwards, +hoping to find him; because it was not +likely that he would stand to the shore again so +suddenly. But missing him towards night, we stood +to the shoreward, hoping by that course to find +him. The 22d of May, at night, we had a violent +storm, with the wind at north-west, and we were +inforced to hull, not being able to bear sail; and +this night we perished our main tressle-trees, so +that we could no more use our main-top-sail, lying +<span class='pagenum'>249</span>most dangerously in the sea. The pinnace +likewise received a great leak, so that we were +inforced to seek the next shore for our relief. +And, because famine was like to be the best end, +we desired to go for Port Desire, hoping, with +seals and penguins, to relieve ourselves, and so +to make shift to follow the General, or there to +stay his coming from Brasil. The 24th of May +we had much wind at north. The 25th was +calm, and the sea very lofty, so that our ship had +dangerous foul weather. The 26th, our fore-shrouds +broke, so that, if we had not been near +the shore, it had been impossible for us to get +out of the sea. And now, being here moored in +Port Desire, our shrouds are all rotten, not having +a running rope whereto we may trust, and +being provided only of one shift of sails, all worn, +our top-sails not able to abide any stress of weather; +neither have we any pitch, tar, or nails, +nor any store for the supplying of these wants; +and we live only upon seals and muscles, having +but five hogsheads of pork within board, and +meal three ounces for a man a day, with water +for to drink. And for as much as it hath pleased +God to separate our fleet, and to bring us into +such hard extremities, that only now by his mere +mercy we expect relief, though otherwise we are +hopeless of comfort; yet, because the wonderful +works of God, in his exceeding great favour towards +us his creatures, are far beyond the scope +of man’s capacity, therefore by him we hope to +have deliverance in this our deep distress. Also, +<span class='pagenum'>250</span>for as much as those upon whom God will bestow +the favour of life, with return home to their +country, may not only remain blameless, but also +manifest the truth of our actions, we have thought +good, in christian charity, to lay down under our +hands the truth of all our proceedings, even till +the time of this our distress. +</p> +<p> +Given in Port Desire, the 2d of June, 1592,” &c. +</p> +<p> +After they had delivered this under their +hands, then we began to labour to preserve our +lives; and we built up a smith’s forge, and made +nails, bolts, and spikes; others made ropes of a +piece of our cable; and the rest gathered muscles, +and took smelts, for the whole company. Three +leagues from this harbour there is an isle with +four small isles about it, where there are abundance +of seals; and, at that time of the year, +the penguins came thither, in great plenty, to +breed. We concluded with the pinnace, that she +should sometimes go thither to catch seals for +us; upon which condition we would share victuals +with her man for man; whereunto the +whole company agreed. So we parted our poor +store, and she laboured to fetch us seals to eat, +wherewith we lived when smelts and muscles +failed; for in the nep-tides we could get no +muscles. Thus, in the most miserable calamity, +we remained until the 6th of August, still keeping +watch upon the hills to look for our General +and so great was our vexation and anguish +of soul, as I think never flesh and blood endured +more. Our misery daily increasing, time passing, +<span class='pagenum'>251</span>and our hope of the General being very +cold, our Captain and Master were fully persuaded +that the General might, perhaps, go directly +for the straits, and not come to this harbour: +whereupon, they thought no course more +convenient, than to go presently for the straits, +and there to stay his coming; for, in that place +he could not pass, but of force we must see him: +Whereunto the company most willingly consented, +as also the Captain and Master of the pinnace; +so that upon this determination we made all possible +speed to depart. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/334.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption>Cavendishes Crew <i>in Great distress at Port desire, Setup a Forge & repair their shatterd Vessels</i>.</figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +The 6th of August we set sail, and went to +Penguin Isle; and, the next day, we salted 20 +hogsheads of seals, which was as much as our +salt could do. The 7th, towards night, we departed +from Penguin Isle. The 9th, we had a +sore storm, so that we were constrained to hull, +for our sails were not fit to endure any force. +The 14th, we were driven in among certain isles +never before discovered by any known relation, +lying fifty leagues, or better, off the shore, east +and northerly from the straits; in which place, +had not the wind ceased, we must of necessity +have perished. But, the wind shifting, we directed +our course for the straits; and, the 18th +of August, we fell in with the Cape in a very +thick fog; and, the same night, we anchored ten +leagues within the Cape. The 19th, we passed +the first and second straits. The 21st, we doubled +Cape Froward. The 22d, we anchored in +Salvage Cove, so called because we saw many savages +<span class='pagenum'>252</span>there. Notwithstanding the extreme cold +of this place, yet do all these people go naked, +and live in the woods like satyrs, painted and disguised, +and flee from you like wild deer. They +are very strong, and threw stones at us of three +or four pounds weight, an incredible distance. +The 24th, in the morning, we departed from this +cove, and the same day we came into the north-west +reach, which is the last reach of the straits. +The 25th, we anchored in a good cove, within +14 leagues of the South Sea: in this place we +purposed to stay for the General; for the strait +at this place, is scarce three miles broad, so that +he could not pass but we must see him. After +we had staid here a fortnight in the depth of +winter, our victuals consuming (for our seals +stunk most vilely, and our men died pitifully +through cold and famine, for the greatest part of +them had not cloaths to defend them from the +extremity of the winter’s cold) being in this +heavy distress, our Captain and Master thought +it the best course to depart from the straits into +the South Sea, and to go for the isle of Santa Maria, +which is to the northward of Baldivia, in 37 deg. +15 min. where we might have relief, and be in a +temperate clime, and there stay for the General, +for of necessity he must come by that isle. So we +departed the 13th of September, and came in sight +of the South Sea. On the 14th, we were forced +back again, and recovered a cove, three leagues +within the straits from the South Sea. Again +we put forth, and being eight or ten leagues free +<span class='pagenum'>253</span>of the land, the wind rising furiously at west-north-west, +we were forced back again into the +straits for want of sails; for we never durst bear +sail in any stress of weather, they were so weak: +so again we recovered the cove three leagues +within the straits, where we endured most furious +weather; so that one of our two cables brake, +whereby we were hopeless of life: yet it pleased +God to calm the storm, and we unreeved our sheets, +tacks, halliards, and other ropes, and moored +our ship to the trees, close by the rocks. We +laboured to recover our anchor again, but could +not, it lay so deep in the water, and, as we think, +covered with oaze. Now had we but one anchor, +which had but one whole fluke, a cable spliced +in two places, and a piece of an old one. In +the midst of these our troubles, the wind came +fair the first of October; whereupon, with all +expedition, we loosed our moorings, and weighed +our anchor, and so towed off into the channel; +for we had mended our boat in Port Desire, and +had five oars of the pinnace. When we had +weighed our anchor, we found our cable broken; +only one strand held. Being in the channel, we +reeved our ropes, and again rigged our ship; +no man’s hand was idle, but all laboured even +for the last gasp of life. Here our company was +divided; some desired to go again for Port Desire, +and there to be set on shore, where they +might travel for their lives; and some stood with +the Captain and Master to proceed. Whereupon +the Captain said to the Master, “Master, you +<span class='pagenum'>254</span>see the wonderful extremity of our estate, and +the great doubts among our company of the +truth of your reports, as touching relief to be +had in the South Sea. Now, good Master, for +as much as you have been in this voyage once +before with your Master the General, satisfy the +company of such truths as are to you best +known; and, you the rest of the General’s men, +who likewise have been with him in his first +voyage, if you hear any thing contrary to the +truth, spare not to reprove it, I pray you.” +Then the Master said, “If you think good to +return, I will not gainsay it: but this I think, +if life may be preserved by any means, it is in +proceeding; for at the isle of Santa Maria I do +assure you of wheat, pork, and roots enough. +Also, I will bring you to an isle where pelicans +be in great abundance, and we shall have meal +in great plenty, besides a possibility of intercepting +some ships upon the coast of Chili and Peru. +But, if we return, there is nothing but death to +be hoped for: therefore, do as you like, I am +ready; but my desire is to proceed.” These his +speeches, being confirmed by others that were in +the former voyage, there was a general consent +for proceeding; and so, the 2d of October, we +put into the South Sea, and were free of all land. +This night the wind began to blow very much +at west-north-west, and still increased in fury, so +that we were in great doubt what course to take. +To put into the straits we durst not, for lack of +ground-tackle: to bear sail we doubted, the +<span class='pagenum'>255</span>tempest was so furious, and our sails so bad. The +pinnace came round with us, and told us that +she had received many grievous seas, and that +her ropes did every hour fail her, so as they could +not tell what shift to make. We, being unable +in any sort to help her, stood under our courses +in view of the lee-shore, still expediting our ruinous +end. +</p> +<p> +The 4th of October, the storm growing beyond +measure furious, the pinnace, being in the +wind of us, struck suddenly a hull, so that we +thought she had received some grievous sea, or +sprung a leak, or that her sails failed her, because +she came not with us; but we durst not hull in +that unmerciful storm, but sometimes tried under +our main course, sometimes with a haddock +of our sail, for our ship was very leeward, and +most laboursome in the sea. This night we lost +the pinnace, and never saw her again. +</p> +<p> +The 5th, our fore-sail was split and all torn: +then our Master took the mizzen, and brought +it to the fore-mast, to make our ship work, and +with our sprit-sail we mended our fore-sail, the +storm continuing beyond all description in fury, +with hail, snow, rain, and wind, such and so +mighty, as that in nature it could not possibly be +more, the sea such and so lofty, with continual +breach, that many times we were doubtful whether +our ship did sink or swim. +</p> +<p> +The 10th of October, being, by the account of +our Captain and Master, very near the shore, the +weather dark, the storm furious, and most of our +<span class='pagenum'>256</span>men having given over to labour, we yielded +ourselves to death without further hope of succour. +Our Captain sitting in the gallery very +pensive, I came and brought him some <i>rosa solis</i>, +to comfort him; for he was so cold, that he was +scarce able to move a joint. After he had drank, +and was comforted in heart, he began, for the +ease of his conscience, to make a large repetition +of his forepassed time, and, with many grievous +sighs, he concluded with a short prayer for our +preservation. Having ended, he desired me not +to make known to any of the company his intolerable +grief and anguish of mind, because they +should not thereby be dismaid. And so suddenly, +before I went from him, the sun shined clear; so +that he and the Master both observed the true +elevation of the Pole, whereby they knew by +what course to recover the straits. Wherewithal +our Captain and Master were so revived, and +gave such comfortable speeches to the company, +that every man rejoiced, as though we had received +a present deliverance. The next day, +being the 11th of October, we saw Cape Deseado, +being the cape on the south shore (the +north shore being nothing but a company of +dangerous rocks, isles, and shoals). This cape +being within two leagues to the leeward of us, +our Master greatly doubted that we could not +double the same: nevertheless, being a man of +good spirit, he resolutely made quick dispatch, +and set sail. Our sails had not been half an hour +on board, but the foot-rope of our fore-sail +<span class='pagenum'>257</span>brake, so that nothing held but the oylet-holes. +The seas continually brake over the ship’s poop, +and flew into the sails with such violence, that +we still expected the tearing of our sails, or over-setting +of the ship; and, besides, to our utter discomfort, +we perceived that we fell still more and +more to lee-ward, so that we could not double +the cape. We were now come within half a +mile of the cape, and so near the shore, that the +counter-surf of the sea would rebound against +the ship’s side, so that we were much dismaid +with the horror of our present end. Being thus +at the very point of our death, the wind and the +seas raging beyond measure, our Master veered +some of the main sheet; and whether it was by +that occasion, or by some current, or by the +wonderful power of God, as we verily think it +was, the ship quickened her way, and shot past +that rock, where we thought she would have +shored. Then between the cape and the point +there was a little bay; so that we were somewhat +farther from the shore: and, when we came +so far as the cape, we yielded to death; yet the +Father of all mercies delivered us, and we +doubled the cape about the length of our ship, +or very little more. Being shot past the cape, +we presently took in our sails, which only God +had preserved unto us; and when we were shot +in between the high lands, the wind blowing +trade, without an inch of sail, we spooned before +the sea, three men being not able to guide +the helm, and in six hours we were put twenty-five +<span class='pagenum'>258</span>leagues within the straits, where we found a +sea answerable to the ocean. +</p> +<p> +In this time we freed our ship from water, and +after we had rested a little, our men were not +able to move; their sinews were stiff, and their +flesh dead, and many of them (which is most lamentable +to be reported) were so eaten with lice, +as that in their flesh did lie clusters of them, as big +as pease, yea and some as big as beans. Being in +this misery, we were constrained to put into a +cove, for the refreshing of our men. Our Master +knowing the shore, and every cove very perfectly, +put in with the shore, and moored to the trees, as +before time we had done, laying our anchor to the +sea-ward. Here we continued until the 20th of +October; but not being able any longer to stay, +through extremity of famine, the 21st we put off +into the channel, the weather being reasonably +calm: but before night it blew most extremely +at west-north-west. The storm growing outrageous, +our men could scarcely stand by their labour; +and, the straits being full of turning +reaches, we were constrained by the discretion +of the Captain and Master in their accounts, to +guide the ship in the hell-dark night, when we +could not see any shore, the channel being in +some places scarce three miles broad. But our +Captain, as we first passed through the straits, +drew such an exquisite plan of the same, as I am +assured it cannot in any sort be bettered: which +plan he and the Master so often perused, and so +carefully regarded, as that in memory they had +<span class='pagenum'>259</span>every turn and creek, and in the deep-dark night, +without any doubting, they conveyed the ship +through that crooked channel: so that I conclude, +the world hath not any so skilful pilots +for that place, as they are; for otherwise we +could never have passed in such sort as we did. +</p> +<p> +The 25th, we came to an island in the straits, +named Penguin Isle, whither we sent our boat +to seek relief, for there were great abundance of +birds, and the weather was very calm; so we +came to an anchor by the island in seven fathoms. +While our boat was on shore, and we +had great store of penguins, there arose a sudden +storm, so that our ship did drive over a +breach, and our boat sunk at the shore. Captain +Cotton and the Lieutenant, being on shore, +leapt into the boat and freed the same, and threw +away all the birds, and with great difficulty recovered +the ship: myself also was in the boat at +the same time, where for my life I laboured to +the best of my power. The ship, all this while, +driving upon the lee-shore, when we came on +board we helped to set sail, and weighed the +anchor; for before our coming they could scarce +hoist up their yards, yet with much ado they +set their fore-course. Thus in a mighty fret of +weather, the 27th day of October we were free +of the straits, and the 30th of October we came +to Penguin Isle, being three leagues from Port +Desire, the place where we purposed to seek for +our relief. +</p> +<p> +When we were come to this isle we sent our +boat on shore, which returned laden with birds +<span class='pagenum'>260</span>and eggs; and our men said the penguins were +so thick upon the isle, that ships might be laden +with them; for they could not go without +trampling upon the birds, whereat we greatly +rejoiced. Then the captain appointed Charles +Parker and Edward Smith, with twenty others, +to go on shore, and to stay upon the isle, for +the killing and drying of these penguins, and +promised, after the ship was in harbour, to send +the rest, not only for expedition, but also to +save the small store of victuals in the ship. But +Parker, Smith, and the rest of their faction, +suspected that this was a device of the captain’s +to leave his men on shore, that, by these means, +there might be victuals for the rest to recover +their country: and when they remembered that +this was the place where they would have slain +their captain and master, surely (thought they) +for revenge hereof will they leave us on shore. +Which, when our captain understood, he called +God to witness, that revenge was no part of +his thoughts; they gave him thanks, desiring to +go into the harbour with the ship, which he +granted. So there were only ten left upon the +isle, and the last of October we entered the harbour. +Our master, at our last being here, having +taken careful notice of every creek in the +river, in a very convenient place, upon sandy +oaze, ran the ship a-ground, laying our anchor +to sea-ward, and with our running ropes moored +her to stakes upon the shore, which he had +fastened for that purpose; where the ship remained +till our departure. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>261</span>The 3d of November, our boat with water, +wood, and as many as she could carry, went +for the isle of Penguins; but being deep she +durst not proceed, but returned again the same +night. Then Parker, Smith, Townshend, Purpet, +with five others, desired that they might +go by land, and that the boat might fetch them +when they were against the isle, it being scarce +a mile from the shore. The captain bade them +do what they thought best, advising them to +take weapons with them: “For, (saith he) although +we have not at any time seen people +in this place, yet in the country there may be +savages.” They answered: “That here were +great store of deer, and ostriches: but if +there were savages, they would devour them.” +Notwithstanding, the captain caused them to take +weapons with them, carlivers, swords, and targets: +so the 6th of November, they departed +by land, and the boat by sea; but from that +day to this day we never heard of our men. +The 11th, while most of our men were at the +isle, only the captain and master, with six others, +being left in the ship, there came a great multitude +of savages to the ship, throwing dust in the +air, leaping and running like brute beasts, having +vizards on their faces like dogs faces, or else +their faces are dogs faces indeed. We greatly +feared lest they would set our ship on fire, for +they would suddenly make fire, whereat we +much marvelled: they came to windward of our +ship, and set the bushes on fire, so that we were +<span class='pagenum'>262</span>in a very stinking smoak; but as soon as they +came within our shot, we shot at them, and +striking one of them in the thigh, they all presently +fled; so that we never saw more of them. +Hereby we judged, that these cannibals had slain +our nine men. When we considered who they +were that were thus murdered, and found that +they were the principal men who would have +murdered the captain and master, with their +friends, we saw the just judgment of God, and +made supplication to his Divine Majesty to be +merciful unto us. While we were in this harbour, +our captain and master went with the +boat to discover how far this river did run, that, +if need should enforce us to leave our ship, we +might know how far we might go by water: so +they found, that, farther than twenty miles, +they could not go with the boat. At their return +they sent the boat to the isle of penguins: +whereby we understood that the penguins dried +to our hearts content, and that the multitude +of them was infinite. All the time that we were +in this place, we fared passing well with eggs, +penguins, young seals, young gulls, and other +birds, such as I know not, of all which we had +abundance. In this place we found an herb +called Scurvy-grass, which we fried with eggs, +using train-oil instead of butter. This herb did +so purge the blood, that it took away all kinds +of swellings, of which many had died, and restored +us to perfect health of body; so that we +were in as good case as when we came first out +<span class='pagenum'>263</span>of England. We staid in this harbour until +the 22d of December, in which time we had +dried 20,000 penguins; and the captain, the +master, and myself, had made some salt, by laying +salt-water upon the rocks in holes, which, +in six days would be kerned. Thus God did +feed us, even as it were with manna from heaven. +</p> +<p> +The 22d of December, we departed with our +ship for the isle, where, with great difficulty, +by the skilful industry of our master, we got +14,000 of our birds, and had almost lost our +captain in labouring to bring the birds on +board: and, had not our master been very expert +in the set of those tides, which run after many +fashions, we had also lost our ship in the same +place. The 22d at night we departed with +14,000 dried penguins, not being able to fetch +the rest, and shaped our course for Brazil. Now, +our captain rated our victuals, and brought us +to such allowance, as that our victuals might +last six months for our hope was, that within +six months we might recover our country, +though our sails were very bad. So our allowance +was two ounces and an half of meal for a +man a-day, and to have so twice a-week; so +that five ounces did serve for a week. Three +days a week, we had oil, three spoonfuls for a +man a-day; and two days in a week pease, a +pint among four men a-day, and every day five +penguins for four men, and six quarts of water +for four men a-day. This was our allowance; +<span class='pagenum'>264</span>wherewith we lived, though weakly, and +very feeble. The 30th of January, we arrived at +the isle of Placentia in Brazil, the first place that, +outward-bound, we were at: and having made +the shoal, our ship lying off at sea, the captain, +with twenty-four of the company, went with the +boat on shore, being a whole night before they +could recover it. The last of January, at sun-rising, +they suddenly landed, hoping to take the +Portuguese in their houses, and by that means +to recover some Casavi meal, or other victuals +for our relief; but when they looked for the +houses, they were all razed and burnt to the +ground, so that we thought no man had remained +on the island. Then the captain went to the +gardens, and brought from thence fruits and +roots for the company, and came on board the +ship, and brought her into a fine creek which +we had found out, where we might moor her by +the trees, and where there was water, and hoops +to trim our casks. Our case being very desperate, +we presently laboured for dispatch away; some +cut hoops, which the coopers made, others laboured +upon the sails and ship, every man travailing +for his life; and still a guard was kept +on shore to defend those that laboured, every +man having likewise his weapon by him. The +3d of February, our men, with twenty-three +shot, went again to the gardens, being three +miles from us upon the north shore, and fetched +Casavi-roots out of the ground, to relieve our +company, instead of bread; for we spent not of +<span class='pagenum'>265</span>our meal while we staid here. The 5th of February, +being Monday, our captain and master +hastened the company to their labour; so some +went with the coopers to gather hoops, and the +rest laboured on board. This night many of our +men in the ship dreamed of murder and slaughter: +in the morning they reported their dreams: +one saying to another, “This night I dreamed +that thou wert slain.” Another answered, +“And I dreamed that thou wert slain.” And +this was general through the ship. The captain +hearing this, who likewise had dreamed very +strangely himself, gave very strict charge, that +those who went on shore should take weapons +with them, and saw them himself delivered into +the boat, and sent some of purpose to guard +the labourers. All the forenoon they laboured +in quietness, and when it was ten o’clock, the +heat being extreme, they came to a rock near +the wood’s side (for all this country is nothing +but thick woods), and there they boiled Casavi-roots, +and dined. After dinner some slept, +others washed themselves in the sea, all being +stripped to their shirts, and no man keeping +watch, no match lighted, and not a piece +charged. Suddenly, as they were thus sleeping +and sporting, having got themselves into a corner, +out of sight of the ship, there came a multitude +of Indians and Portuguese upon them, +and slew them sleeping: only two escaped, one +very sore hurt, the other not touched, by +whom we understood of this miserable massacre. +<span class='pagenum'>266</span>With all speed we manned our boat, and +landed to succour our men; but we found them +slain, and laid naked in rank one by another, with +their faces upward, and a cross set by them: and +withal we saw two very great pinnaces come from +the river of Janeiro very full of men; who we +suspected came from thence to take us; because +there came from Janeiro soldiers to Santos, when +the General had taken the town, and was strong +in it. Of seventy-six persons who departed in +our ship out of England, we were now left but +twenty-seven, having lost thirteen in this place, +with their chief furniture, as muskets, calivers, +powder, and shot. Our casks were all in decay, +so that we could not take in more water than was +in our ship, for want of casks, and that which we +had was marvellous ill-conditioned. And being +there moored by trees, for want of cables and +anchors, we still expected the cutting of our +moorings, to be beaten from our decks with our +own furniture, and to be assailed by them of +Janeiro. What distress we were now driven +into, I am not able to express. To depart with +eight tons of water in such bad casks, was to +starve at sea, and in staying our case was ruinous. +These were hard choices; but, being thus +perplexed, we made choice rather to fall into +the hands of the Lord than into the hands of +men. So, concluding to depart, the 6th of +February we were off in the channel, with our +ordnance, and small shot, in readiness for any +assault that should come; and, having a small +<span class='pagenum'>267</span>gale of wind, we recovered the sea in most deep +distress. Then bemoaning our estate one to another, +and recounting over all our extremities, nothing +grieved us more than the loss of our men +twice, first being slaughtered by the cannibals at +Port Desire, and at this isle of Placentia by the +Indians and Portuguese. And considering what +they were who were lost, we found that all those +who conspired the murdering of our Captain and +Master were now slain by savages, the gunner +only excepted. Being thus at sea, when we +came to Cape Frio the wind was contrary; so +that three weeks we were grievously vexed with +cross winds; and, our water consuming, our +hope of life was very small. Some desired to +go to Baya, and to submit themselves to the +Portuguese, rather than to die for thirst: but +the Captain, with fair persuasions altered their +purpose of yielding to the Portuguese. In this +distress it pleased God to send us rain in such +plenty, as that we were well watered, and in +good comfort to return. But after we came +near unto the sun, our dried penguins began to +corrupt, and there bred in them a most loathsome +and ugly worm, of an inch long. This +worm did so mightily increase, and devour our +victuals, that there was in reason no hope how +we should avoid famine, but be devoured of these +wicked creatures; there was nothing that they +did not devour, iron only excepted; our cloaths, +hats, boots, shoes, shirts, and stockings: and for +the ship, they did so eat the timbers, as that we +<span class='pagenum'>268</span>greatly feared they would undo us, by gnawing +through the ship’s side. Great was the care of +our Captain, Master, and company, to consume +these vermin, but the more we laboured to kill +them, the more they increased; so that at the +last we could not sleep for them, but they would +eat our flesh, and bite like musquetos. In this +woeful case, after we had passed the Equinoctial +Line towards the north, our men began to fall +sick of such a monstrous disease, as I think the +like was never heard of: for in their ancles it +began to swell; from thence in two days it +would be in their breasts, so that they could not +draw their breath; and then fell into their lower +parts, and there did swell most grievously, and +most dreadful to behold, so that they could neither +stand, lie, nor go: whereupon our men +grew big with grief. Our Captain, with extreme +anguish of his soul, was in such woeful +distress, that he desired only a speedy end; for +divers grew raging mad, and some died in most +loathsome and furious pain. It were incredible +to write our misery as it was. There was no +man in perfect health, but the Captain and one +boy; the Master being a man of good spirit, +with extreme labour, bore out his grief, so that +it grew not upon him. To be short, all our +men died, except sixteen, of which there were +but five able to move. The Captain was in +good health, the Master indifferent, Captain +Cotton and myself swolen and short-winded, +yet better than the rest who were sick, and one +<span class='pagenum'>269</span>boy in health: upon us five only the labour of +the ship did stand: The Captain and Master as +occasion served, would take in and heave out the +top-sails; the Master only attended on the sprit-sail; +and all of us at the capstan without sheets +and tacks. In fine, our misery and weakness +was so great, that we could not take in or heave +out a sail: so our top-sail and sprit-sail were torn +all in pieces by the weather. The Master and +Captain taking their turns at the helm, were +mightily distressed, and monstrously grieved with +the woeful lamentation of our sick men. Thus, +as lost wanderers upon the sea, the 11th of June +1593, it pleased God that we arrived at Bear +Haven in Ireland, and there ran the ship on +shore; where the Irishmen helped us to take in +our sails, and to moor our ship for floating; +which slender pains of theirs cost our Captain +ten pounds, before he could have the ship in +safety. Thus, without victuals, sails, men, or +any furniture, God only guided us into Ireland, +where the Captain left the Master and three or +four of the company to keep the ship; and, +within five days after, he and certain others had +passage in an English fisher-boat to Padstow, in +Cornwall. In this manner our small remnant, +by God’s mercy only, were preserved and restored +to our country, to whom be all honour +and glory world without end.” +</p> +<p class='two_space'> +We have already observed, that the above relation +is the only complete account of this voyage +<span class='pagenum'>270</span>which has hitherto appeared; by which we would +be understood to mean, that it is the only complete +account of the proceedings of any one of +the ships engaged in this second expedition of +Cavendish, from her first setting out till her return +home. There are other accounts of the +distresses attending this voyage, but they refer +to parts only, and do not contain a regular series +of events from beginning to end, as we shall endeavour +to shew, in pursuance of our plan of +tracing the great out-lines of the lives of our +celebrated circum-navigators, from their first entering +upon action till the period of their retreat.</p> +<p> +When the impartial reader revolves in his +mind the effects of distresses like those already +described in the foregoing account, upon a company +of ungovernable sailors, not under that +subordination which regular discipline always +establishes to Officers properly commissioned, he +will then be prepared to determine, whether Cavendish +complains with reason against Davis, as +being the death of him, and to use his own words, +“the decay of the whole action;” or, whether +the miscarriage did not arise partly from unavoidable +accidents, and partly from the impetuosity +of his own temper, and his own misconduct. +</p> +<p> +The misfortunes that attended the progress of +this most distressful voyage, appear to us to +have taken their rise from the accident of being +becalmed for seven-and-twenty days under the +Line; during which time they not only consumed +a considerable proportion of their provisions, +<span class='pagenum'>271</span>but the men became sick; and the scurvy, which +seldom makes its approaches on this side the +Equator, had already infected near half the +crews. +</p> +<p> +This reduced them to the necessity, not only +of seeking land where fresh provisions might be +procured, but of wasting more time with a view +to the recovery of the sick, than was consistent +with the navigation of those boisterous seas +through which they were to pass. +</p> +<p> +We have already seen that when they were +masters of Santos, they were in the utmost distress +for want of provisions, and yet the opportunity +was suffered to pass without obtaining any +effectual relief; and that this distress is not aggravated +by the writer of the above voyage, appears +from the testimony of Knivet, in Purchas’s +Pilgrams, who says, “that here they had such +disorders among themselves, that if the Portuguese +had been of any courage, they might +have destroyed the whole fleet; for our men, +says he, would fight for their victuals, as if +they had been no Christians but Jews”, (which +by the way shews the strange notions which +the multitude in those days entertained of the +uncharitable disposition of the Jews to one +another; a characteristic not at all applicable +to that people); “and they that got the best +would get them into some hole, or into the +wilderness under some tree, and there they +would remain as long as they had meat.” +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>272</span>From this early beginning of distress, very +little hope could be reasonably entertained of the +issue. The season was advancing fast, when the +severity of the weather would render their proceeding +into the South Seas by the straits of Magellan +very dangerous; and, being already in +want of provisions, they could have no means +of an effectual supply till they could reach the +fertile countries on the opposite side of those +straits; the General’s prolonging his stay therefore +on the eastermost coasts of Brazil till the +22d of January, was not only an imprudent but +a fatal delay; and, as it was foreseen, proved the +actual ruin of the voyage. +</p> +<p> +At the time when they should have passed +the straits of Magellan, they were in consultation, +if not worse employed, at Santos; and +after they set sail they were attacked by a storm, +of which Cavendish himself says, “a <em>worser</em> might +not be endured. Such was the fury of the +west-south-west winds, as we were driven +from the shore four hundred leagues, and +constrained to beat from 50 deg. to the southward +into 40 degrees to the northward again, +before we could come near the shore; in +which time we had a new shift of sails clean +blown away, and our ship in danger to sink +in the sea three times; which with extremity +of men’s labour we recovered.” Here the reason +that prevented Cavendish’s arrival at Port +Desire till the 18th of March, 12 days after the +Desire and Roebuck, is fully explained. And +<span class='pagenum'>273</span>after he had refitted his ship and refreshed +his men, and was ready to sail, he goes on in +the same letter, which is directed to Sir Tristriam +Gorges, “And now,” says he, “we were +almost four months beating between the coast +of Brazil and the straits, being in distance not +above 600 leagues, which is commonly run in +twenty or thirty days; but such was the adverseness +of our fortune, that in coming thither +we spent the summer, and found in the +straits the beginning of a most extreme winter, +not durable for Christians.” +</p> +<p> +After this concession, compared with what +the writer of Davis’s voyage has related of the +sufferings of his people, let the reader determine +with what justice Cavendish arraigns Davis, +when he attributes to the villainy of that officer +his own death, and the ruin of the voyage. +</p> +<p> +But to pursue the narrative of the General’s +proceedings from the time of his parting with +the Desire and Black Pinnace in the night of the +20th of May, as already related in the preceding +voyage. It appears indeed, that he continued his +course to the coast of Brazil accompanied by the +Roebuck, which, however, was parted from +him in lat. 36° S. in one of the most grievous +storms, as he himself confesses, that any Christians +ever endured upon the seas to live, in +which the Roebuck sprung her masts, and was +otherwise so much damaged as to arrive in the +bay of St. Vincent in the greatest distress, being +little better than a mere wreck. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>274</span>The General himself suffered considerably, +and was forced to take shelter likewise in the +same bay, though the little town of St. Vincent +they had burnt on their leaving Santos the summer +before. Here twenty-five of his men, getting +drunk on shore, were suddenly set upon by the +Portuguese, in revenge for their former treatment, +and every man of them slaughtered. To +revenge this treachery, as it is called, Cavendish +determined to attack Santos, and to level it with +the ground; and now, being joined by the crew +of the Roebuck, he landed above the town, but +was most shamefully repulsed, after having plundered +a few farm-houses, and, as it should +seem the custom was, set them on fire. +</p> +<p> +Here being disappointed of his revenge, he +departed with a view to attack a small inhabited +island about twenty leagues to the westward; +from whence, when he had provided himself +with such necessaries as the island could afford, +he intended, according to his promise, and agreeable +to the expectations of Davis, to have returned +to the straits of Magellan, and to have +proceeded to the South Seas in prosecution of +his first design. But there seemed a fatality attending +every measure he devised. +</p> +<p> +He was diverted from the prosecution of this +enterprize by the persuasions of a Portuguese +pilot on board, who advised the attack of Spirito +Santo, as the only place that could supply +his wants, and enable him to refit his ships. In +this undertaking he lost fourscore of his men +<span class='pagenum'>275</span>killed, and forty wounded. And now, having +no alternative, but either to return home, or to +burn one of his ships for want of hands, and +proceed with the other to the straits; the crew +of the Roebuck, fearing, as they well might, that +theirs was the ship destined for the flames, watched +their opportunity when their Captain was sick +on board the General, to make their escape in +the night, taking with them both the surgeons, +and, as Cavendish says, double the proportion +of provisions for their number of men, “having +with them at their departure but six and forty +men, and carrying away with them the proportion +for six months victual of 120 men at +large.” Yet it is not easy to reconcile the +truth of this assertion with the distresses for want +of provisions which are all along complained of +from their first arrival on the coast of Brazil in +the summer to the present time. In the straits +of Magellan, it is asserted, that, to save their victuals, +they were forced in a great measure to +live upon sea-weeds, muscles, periwincles, and the +fruits of the country; for, says Knivet, the allowance +from the ship was but little.⁠—But to +proceed: +</p> +<p> +Cavendish, finding himself thus forsaken, +every-where disappointed, betrayed, as he complains, +and distressed to the last extremity, his +ship full of sick and wounded, and himself with +a wounded spirit, directed his course to the island +of St. Sebastian, 200 leagues to the westward of +Spirito Santo, where he arrived when he had +<span class='pagenum'>276</span>but just one cask of water left. Here he set 20 +of his sick men ashore; and, having refitted +his ship, and refreshed his people, he wanted very +much to have sailed back to the straits: “But, +says his biographer, his mutinous crew obliged +him to sail for England;” and he died before +his return. +</p> +<p> +In his letter to Sir Tristriam Gorges, which +appears to have been written a little before his +death, he discovers the utmost perturbation of +mind. “And now, says he, what with grief +for the loss of my most dear cousin [John +Lock], and the continual trouble I endured +among such hell-hounds [his ship’s crew], +wishing myself upon any desart place in the +world, there to die, rather than thus basely to +return home again; which course I had put +in execution, had I found an island which the +charts make to be in eight degrees to the +southward of the Line. I swear to you I +sought it with all diligence, meaning (if I had +found it) there to have ended my unfortunate +life. But God suffered not such happiness +to light upon me; for I could by no +means find it; so was forced to come towards +England.” +</p> +<p> +The bitterness which he expresses against his +crew might, and did, probably, arise from their +determined resolution not to expose themselves +to the like hardships they had already undergone, +and in which the major part of their +companions were suffered to perish without pity, +<span class='pagenum'>277</span>and to languish without relief: for, if we may believe +Jane, the sick men on board the General were +most uncharitably put on shore into the woods +in the straits of Magellan; where, according to +Cavendish’s own account, “there was nothing but +such flights of snow, and extremities of frosts, as +in his life he had never beheld or felt the like. +The men, adds he, were well in the morning, +and by night frozen to death.” In this miserable +manner, in seven or eight days, 40 of his +crew actually perished, and 70 more sickened. +</p> +<p> +Of the ships that sailed in this expedition, +consisting of five sail, we can trace only three +that returned to England, namely, the Galleon, +otherwise named the Leicester, of which the +General was Commander; the Dainty, commanded +by Captain Cotton, who went a volunteer, +and whose ship, having parted company +on her first arrival on the coast of Brazil, instead +of pursuing her voyage to the South Seas, returned +back to England with very little damage. +</p> +<p> +The Roebuck, in which sailed from Plymouth +170 brave seamen, after stealing away +from the General in the night, as already related, +was never more heard of; the Black Pinnace +foundered in a violent storm in the South +Sea, and in her about 70 men. Of the crews +of the Desire, only 26 out of 150 lived to +see their native country; and, of the General’s +ship, though the number that perished cannot +be exactly ascertained, yet there could not more +than 50 at most survive their General. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>278</span>Now, if the gallant actions and glorious exploits +that entitle men to fame and immortality, +involve in their atchievement so many of their +fellow-creatures in misery, let the benevolent +and humane unite with us in depreciating such +murderous practices; and, instead of holding +forth a Drake, or a Cavendish, as examples worthy +of imitation, let us hold in detestation all +those false worthies, whose actions have their +rise in “a ravenous appetite for robbery, and in +an insatiable desire of acquiring wealth without +industry, and greatness without virtue.” +</p> +<div class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'>279</span> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='lspc'>THE</span><br> +<span class='font2p'><span class='lspd'>VOYAGES</span></span><br> +<span class='lspc'>OF</span><br> +<span class='l12'><span class='lspa'><span class="small-caps">Capt. WILLIAM DAMPIER</span></span>.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +A<span class='toupper lspz ip5'>mong</span> the Navigators who first surrounded +the globe, Captain William +Dampier, considered as a Mariner and Naturalist, +will ever be held in the foremost rank. +From his Voyages the world received the +earliest and best information of remote countries, +and their genuine productions; and it +is on his plan that future navigators have +thought fit to proceed in giving an account +of new discoveries. His history will afford a +notable instance of the power of genius and application +unassisted by learning, when the mind +is wholly bent upon the pursuit and improvement +of one art. +</p> +<p> +He was the son of parents who lived in the +parish of East Coker, in Somersetshire, reputable, +but not rich. While they lived they gave +him an education very ill suited to a sea-faring +life; but they both dying when he was yet +young, those to whose care he was entrusted removed +him from the grammar-school, and put +him to an English school to learn writing and +accompts. Here he did not remain long before +<span class='pagenum'>280</span>an opportunity offered of placing him with the +master of a ship at Weymouth, agreeable to the +inclinations which he had very early discovered +of going to sea; a lesson to parents and guardians +to consult the genius of children, if they +would wish them to rise to eminence in the profession +to which they are bred. +</p> +<p> +With this master he made a short voyage to +France, and was highly gratified: but, his next +voyage being to Newfoundland, where he was +employed a whole summer in the fishery, the rigour +of the climate and the nature of the service +so cooled his ardour for sea-adventures, that +he determined to relinquish the employment, +and return to his friends. +</p> +<p> +He was now eighteen years of age; and, after +leading for some time an idle life, finding his +friends begin to look cool upon him, he formed +a resolution to leave the country, and to try his +fortune in town. His course of life, and the +natural bent of his inclination, led him to seek +the company of sea-faring companions, who, being +pleased with his jovial humour, encouraged +him to resume his old employment, to which, +having an opportunity to enter on board an +Indiaman, he was easily persuaded. +</p> +<p> +In this ship, the John and Martha, Captain +Earning, he sailed to Bantam, in quality of a +foremastman; and in little more than a year +returned to England, perfectly reconciled to the +business of a mariner, which, by the severity of +<span class='pagenum'>281</span>the service he was first employed in, he had determined +never to follow. +</p> +<p> +In this voyage, by favour of the master of the +ship, he learned the rudiments of the art of navigation, +in which he afterwards became a great +proficient; but he had not yet learned to keep +a journal. It should seem that he employed the +following year, after his Indian voyage, in improving +those hints which he received from the +master, and in qualifying himself for an easier +and more advantageous birth, than that of going +before the mast for the future. With this view +he retired again into the country, and spent the +summer with his brother. But, tired of a studious +life, he embraced the occasion of the Dutch +war, to enter on board the Royal Prince, commanded +by Sir Edward Sprague, but in what +station does not appear. He tells us, indeed, +that he was in two engagements; but that, falling +sick, he was put on board the hospital ship, +and saw the third only at a distance, in which +his Commander was unfortunately killed: so +that he does not seem to have risen higher at +this period than the ordinary rank of an able +seaman. +</p> +<p> +Being soon after removed to Harwich among +the rest of the sick and wounded, he there languished +till the conclusion of the Dutch war, +when he received his discharge; and then returned +again to Somersetshire for the recovery of +his health; which was no sooner restored than +he prepared again to go to sea. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>282</span>But Colonel Hellier, a neighbouring Gentleman, +having a large plantation in Jamaica, being +acquainted with his resolution, made him an offer +of going there as a superintendant, with a handsome +appointment; which he very readily accepted; +and, about the beginning of the year +1674, embarked for Jamaica. But he soon grew +tired of land service; his roving disposition still +inclining him to seek the sea. The road, he says, +to take possession of his new office, when he arrived +at Jamaica, was formerly a great way +round: but Mr. Hellier, the Colonel’s brother, +being desirous of shortening the way, coasted +along the river with some companions, till they +found it run between rocks that rose perpendicular +on both sides: they endeavoured to climb +that which intercepted the way to the plantation: +but, while they with the utmost danger and difficulty +were surmounting the rock, a dog they +had with them found a more convenient passage +through a hole. This suggested to Mr. Hellier +a new track: so by blowing up some fragments +of the rock in one part, and levelling some hollows +in others, a passage was obtained wide +enough for a loaded horse. By this accidental +discovery the road was shortened near one half. +</p> +<p> +He was now in his 22d year. In six months +after his arrival at Jamaica he was tired of his +superintendency, and quitted it; and soon after +engaged in a trade with the logwood-cutters in +Campeachy bay; which trade he followed near +three years, and then commenced logwood-cutter +<span class='pagenum'>283</span>himself. Unsettled in his mind, and still eager +in pursuit of new adventures, in less than a year +he quitted the logwood-cutters; and about the +beginning of 1678, returned to England. +</p> +<p> +In 1679, we find him again returned to Jamaica, +with a cargo of merchandize, which being +sold at Port Royal, he furnished himself with +other goods, such as he knew he could carry to +a good market at Campeachy; and by this advantageous +traffic, he so enriched himself, as to +be able to purchase an estate in his own country, +of one whom he knew had a good title to it. +And now, sufficiently happy, he was preparing +to return home; when one Mr. Hobby invited +him to make a short trading voyage to the Moskito-shore, +a part of the world he had not yet seen. +This invitation to embark in a new adventure he +could not resist and, therefore, sent home the +writings of his late purchase to his brother, with +the same friends whom he purposed to have accompanied +to England himself, and then went +on board with Mr. Hobby. +</p> +<p> +The Moskitos, he says, are Indians that inhabit +the main, between the Honduras and Nicaragua. +They are tall, well-made, raw-boned, +lusty, strong, and nimble of foot, long visaged, +have lank black hair, look stern, are hard favoured, +and of a dark copper-coloured complexion. +They are but a small nation; the same, +perhaps, that Drake calls Symerons. They are +very dexterous at throwing the lance, fisgig, harpoon, +or any manner of dart, being bred to it +<span class='pagenum'>284</span>from their infancy; for, the children, imitating +their parents, never go abroad without a lance, +which they throw indifferently at almost every +object that falls in their way, till by constant +practice they become masters of the art. They +next learn to parry a lance, arrow, or dart; and +the training of them to this exercise is in this +manner: Two boys place themselves at a small +distance, and throw light blunt lances at each +other; one throws the lance, and the other parries, +alternately. He that parries holds a small +stick in his right hand, with which he turns +aside the lance that is darted at him: and, by +constantly practising in this manner, they at last +become so dexterous, that they will shoot arrows +at each other, and parry them as fast as they are +shot. This they will do with a small stick no +bigger than the rammer of an ordinary fowling-piece. +</p> +<p> +Before they arrive at manhood, they become +so dexterous, that they disregard the arrows of +their enemies; and, unless they are poured +thick upon them, and come more than one at +a time, they will suffer not one in a thousand to +hit them. +</p> +<p> +They are no less expert at striking of fish; +and two or three of them will in those seas maintain +a ship’s company of 100 men. Turtle and +manatee are their principal pursuit: the former +will commonly weigh 600 weight; and two +Moskito-men will strike two of them a-day, +while the season lasts, for many days together. +<span class='pagenum'>285</span>The manatee is known also by the name of the +sea-cow, and is struck with a harpoon, so contrived +by the Moskito-men as to be thrown +with a long stick; but they are very cautious of +discovering their art even to the English⁠—the +Spaniards they hate mortally. The turtle they +strike with a different instrument, of which our +author has given a cut. +</p> +<p> +About this time the æra of buccaneering commences. +The buccaneers were a set of low +men, who, in humble imitation of their betters, +first began with fitting out small vessels in some +of the islands in the West Indies, and then +cruising in them till they were able to make +themselves masters of better ships. This being +accomplished, they went in formidable companies +as occasion offered, and declared open war +against all the Spanish settlements. These freebooters +had generally two or three Moskito-men +on board each of their vessels, whom they +found serviceable in many other respects besides +supplying them with fish. By their situation +they had opportunities of being well acquainted +with the strength and riches of the Spanish settlements, +and by their inclination they were +their avowed enemies. They therefore served +the buccaneers for guides, and at the same time +assisted in their most hazardous attacks. +</p> +<p> +This being premised, let us now return to +Dampier, who, as has just been said, had agreed +to make a voyage with Captain Hobby; +and having set sail from Port Royal, either by +<span class='pagenum'>286</span>accident or design, they fell in with Coxen, +Sawkings, Sharp, and other buccaneers, who +were riding at anchor on the west side of the +island of Jamaica, and were then meditating an +enterprize over the isthmus of Darien, in order +to fall suddenly upon the Spaniards in the South +Seas. This expedition, it was given out, would +enrich the undertakers; and as all who engaged +in it, according to the law of buccaneers, were +to be proportionable sharers, all Captain Hobby’s +men deserted him to join the buccaneers, +Dampier only excepted, who, after three or +four days consideration, was easily persuaded to +make one among the rest. +</p> +<p> +Shortly after Christmas, 1680, they all set sail, +and steering to Porto Bello, on the 5th of April, +they landed near Golden Island, to the number +of between three and four hundred men, +and began their march guided by chiefs of the +Muskito Indians, and headed by Captain Sawkings, +who, by general consent, was chosen +their leader. +</p> +<p> +After a fatiguing journey of nine days, in +which many of them suffered great hardships, +they arrived at Santa Martha, a Spanish settlement +on a river of that name that empties itself +into the Southern ocean; which after some +opposition they took. They were made to believe, +before they approached it, that it was a +place of considerable strength, abounding in +riches, and inhabited by merchants of considerable +property; but upon entering it, they were +<span class='pagenum'>287</span>greatly disappointed, and therefore, as might be +expected from such a lawless crew, they were as +ready to fall upon those who had projected the +enterprise, as upon those whom they accounted +the enemy. +</p> +<p> +They now, much discontented with one another, +parted company. One party, continuing their march +to the Southern ocean, and there embarking, +some in canoes, some in periagos, and some in +small barks which they found in the river, continued +their course to the bay of Panama, and +in their way attempted the little town of Puebla +Novo, before which their commander in chief +Captain Sawkins was killed, and his followers +defeated. In what manner this undisciplined +crew procured ships, guns, and ammunition, we +are not told; yet ships, guns, and ammunition +to pursue their ravages they did procure as appears +by the sequel. +</p> +<p> +Captain Coxen, with his company, foreseeing +many difficulties in this Southern project, after +the taking of Santa Martha returned to the +North Seas, where he continued his piracies +with various success. +</p> +<p> +Dampier, however, followed the views of +those who persevered in their first resolution +of prosecuting their fortune in the South Seas; +and he continued to accompany them during +the year 1680; but, after the death of Sawkings, +Captain Sharpe being chosen commander +in chief in his room, Dampier with many +of his companions, suspecting both the courage +<span class='pagenum'>288</span>honesty of their new leader, entered into a confederacy +to displace him, and to choose Captain +Watling in his room, which they soon found +means to accomplish by general consent. Under +Captain Sharpe the only enterprize of consequence +was the taking of Ylo, a small island on +the Peruvian coast, from whence they sailed to +Juan Fernandez, where, as has been said, Captain +Sharpe was displaced. +</p> +<p> +It happened, however, that Captain Watling, +soon after his advancement, having planned an +attack upon Arica, fell a victim to his own project; +for he was killed in the first onset, and his +party defeated. The confederates, after this +misfortune, remaining some time without a +leader, fell again into party divisions; one party +declaring themselves in favour of their former +Commander, the other opposing his re-election. +To put an end to these dissentions, it was at last +agreed to part companies, and to cast lots which +company should keep possession of the ship. It +happened that the party in opposition to Dampier +proved the fortunate party; so that Dampier +and his companions were reduced to the necessity +of returning either to the N. Sea over the +same isthmus by which they came into the South, +or submitting themselves to the mercy of the +Spaniards. Nor does it appear that any of them +carried more riches back than they brought with +them, notwithstanding the vast promises with +which they had been flattered at their first setting +out: for it has been generally observed, +<span class='pagenum'>289</span>that the confederacies of the wicked are defeated +by their own deceit; and that they themselves +are, for the most part, the instruments of +their own misfortunes. +</p> +<p> +The company with which Dampier chose to +associate, consisted of 44 men who bore arms, +a Spanish Indian who bore arms also, two Moskito +Indians, already described, with five slaves +taken in the South Seas, whom they kept to +carry their luggage. The vessels they had to +carry this company were, the long-boat belonging +to the ship, and two canoes, one of which +had been sawn asunder, and joined again; and +these were furnished for their defence with two +patararoes, the companies small arms, and +very scanty proportion of provisions and ammunition: +and, thus equipped, they had to sail +more than 200 leagues before they reached the +river of Santa Martha, from whence they were +to set out on their march by land for the North +Sea. Such an enterprize, one would imagine, +could hardly have been undertaken with any +hope of succeeding by reasonable men. +</p> +<p> +On April the 17th, 1681, they parted with +Captain Sharpe, 12 leagues to the north-west of +the island of Plate; and, on May the 1st, they +landed, after many strange adventures, in the +bay of Panama, in order to pursue their journey. +Here they found the river Santa Martha, of +which they meant to avail themselves, blocked +up by a ship of considerable force, that had been +stationed there for more than six months to intercept +<span class='pagenum'>290</span>their passage. This obliged them to +seek a new tract, through which, however, the +greatest part of the company, with incredible difficulty, +passed safe to the opposite shore, among +whom was Dampier, whose hardiness enabled him +to undergo the severest trials, and whose well-judged +precautions exempted him from many +unnecessary sufferings to which others by their +imprudence frequently exposed themselves. +</p> +<p> +On the 1st of May, about three in the afternoon, +they began their march; and, on the 23d, +they completed their journey; in which time +they travelled 110 miles, crossing some lofty +mountains, but chiefly keeping along the vallies +among deep and dangerous rivers, some of +which they forded, some they passed by felling +large trees upon the banks, and some they were +obliged to swim over in their cloaths and accoutrements. +Those who could not swim were +dragged through by means of ropes. Their +first landing-place upon the south coast was +very disadvantageous to them, and forced them +to a circuit of 50 miles more than was necessary, +could they have landed in the bay of Santa Martha, +or navigated the river Chepoa, by either of +which the Indians pass from one shore to the +other in three days, and sometimes in less. +</p> +<p> +Those who arrived on the north coast first, +among whom was Dampier, embarked immediately +on board a French buccaneer, Captain +Tristrian, Commander, who, in two days after +they arrived, joined eight sail of buccaneers more, +<span class='pagenum'>291</span>who were planning another expedition over-land +to Panama: but, when they were told of the ill +success of the first, the fatigues they must undergo, +the risques they must run, and at length +the uncertainty of the event, they unanimously +concurred in relinquishing that design, and held +a consultation what other enterprize was fit for +such a formidable body of them to undertake. At +length, they concluded to attack a Spanish town +up Carpenter’s river, and for that purpose set +sail one after another, in order to preserve secresy, +having previously appointed a place of +rendezvous. When the ship in which our navigator +sailed arrived at the place appointed, they +found Captain Wright there before them, who +had taken a Spanish Tartan with 30 men, well +furnished with small arms, and four patararoes, +who with 12 armadillos had been fitted out to +seek the buccaneers, and to sink them. This, +they that came over-land, who were heartily +tired with living among the French, thought a +good opportunity to set up for themselves; +they, therefore applied to Captain Wright, requesting +him to fit up the Tartan for them; to +which, after some hesitation, he consented, on +condition that they should be under his command +as one and the same ship; to which they +made no objection. +</p> +<p> +The rest of the fleet not arriving at the general +rendezvous, according to agreement, it was +soon discovered, that the Spanish armadillos [or +small men of war] had fallen in with and dispersed +<span class='pagenum'>292</span>them. Every one, therefore, was at liberty +to pursue his own enterprise; and Captain +Wright with his new associates chose the +coast of Carthagena to try their fortune. Here +they were joined by Captain Yankey; and, falling +in with a stout ship, they fought and took +her. She proved to be a prize of 14 guns and +40 men, laden with sugar and tobacco, and had +eight or ten tons of marmalet on board. The +Captains differed about the right to the ship. +Yankey, however, took possession by vote of the +crews; and Captain Wright took Yankey’s ship, +which was better than his own. The cargo, +after a great deal of difficulty, they disposed of +at a Dutch settlement for less than one-fourth +of its value. +</p> +<p> +However, the goods being now converted into +ready money, the produce was shared, and the +Captains parted. Captain Wright stood for the +Caracca coast, with his men drunk, and quarrelling +every day; and Captain Yankey pursued a +quite different course. On the coast of the Caraccas, +Captain Wright took three barks, one laden +with hides, one with European commodities, +and a third with earthen-wares and brandy. +With these barks he went to the island Rocu; +and, having divided the cargoes into three equal +parts, he gave to every 20 men (for they were +60 in all) one part and a bark, and so dismissed +them. That in which our navigator had an +interest was brought to Virginia on July 16, +<span class='pagenum'>293</span>1682, where we shall leave both him and the +ship, to give some account of Captain Yankey. +</p> +<p> +On board of Yankey sailed one Mr. Cook, as +quarter-master, the second in command, according +to buccaneer law; and, they having taken a +prize from the Spaniards, the command of the +prize was claimed by Mr. Cook, on board of +which all who chose to sail under the new Captain +had liberty so to do: among others there +were several who came over land with him from +the South Seas (for he too had left Captain +Sharpe, and had followed the example of Dampier). +All these chose to follow the fortune of +their old acquaintance: but the Frenchmen +grudging the English the possession of so fine a +vessel, together with their share of the goods on +board her, combined together; and, after plundering +them of ship, goods, arms, and money, +turned them all a-drift on the island of Vacca. +In this destitute condition, Captain Tristrian, +of whom mention has already been made, shewed +some compassion, by taking on board about eight +or nine of them, among whom were Captain Cook +and Captain Davis, formerly masters of buccaneers, +who, being carried into Petit Guavres, +found means, when the French crews were carousing +on shore, to make themselves masters of +their benefactor’s ship, to slip her cable, and to +steer with all the sail they could spread to Vacca +to the relief of their starving countrymen, who, +overjoyed to be released, instantly came on +board; and, soon after they set sail, had the +<span class='pagenum'>294</span>good fortune to make prize of a ship laden with +wine, which was newly come from France. They +afterwards fell in with a ship of good force, of +which they likewise made prize; and in her they +came to the resolution of sailing into the South +Seas, and ranging the coasts of Chili and Peru. +But, first, it was necessary for them to sail to +Virginia to dispose of their spare ships and cargoes, +and to fit their capital prize for war. +This they did by mounting her with 28 guns, +and furnishing her with stores, provisions, and +other necessaries for the prosecution of so long a +voyage. When these ships arrived at Virginia, +Dampier, and all those who came over-land with +him, happened to be there; and, being made +acquainted, with Captain Cook’s intention, they +very readily agreed to join in his adventure. +</p> +<p> +And now, having followed Dampier through +all the busy scenes of action in which he was engaged, +till his 30th year, we come at length to +that period, at which the more notable adventures +of his life commence. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th of August, 1683, he set sail from +Achamack river, in Virginia, in the prize under +the command of Captain Cook; and, on the +23d, they met with a violent tempest, which +lasted without intermission till the 28th, during +which time they shipt some of the heaviest seas +that ever ship endured. But as soon as the storm +abated, they had fine weather, and a brisk gale, +till they arrived at the islands of Cape Verd, +where they staid to careen their ship, to refresh +<span class='pagenum'>295</span>themselves, and to take in fresh water. This +they did at the little island of Sal: but, being +told that the island of Mayo abounded most with +cattle, they left Sal, and went to Mayo to purchase +provisions. Here they met with a cold +reception; the inhabitants absolutely refusing to +have any traffic with them, or to suffer them to +land: the reason was, that about a week before, +an English ship pretending friendship had cast +anchor, and by a shew of kindness had invited +the Governor with his train on board; but, as +soon as they had them in their power, they caused +them to write for cattle and other provisions, +by way of ransom, to regain their liberty; and, +what was still more base, after they were furnished +with what they required, they carried off their +prisoners, who had not then been heard of. Dampier +afterwards learnt, that the Englishman who +was guilty of this treachery was Captain Bond, +who afterwards surrendering himself to the Spaniards, +entered into their service, and taught them +to fit out fire-ships, of which they were before totally +ignorant in the South Seas. +</p> +<p> +From Mayo they sailed to Sherboro, on the coast +of Africa, where they staid a few days, and purchased +rice, palm-wines, sugar, honey, and fowls, +and then made sail for the straits of Magellan. +On the 6th of February, 1684, they came in +sight of the straits mouth; but the wind being +contrary, they continued their course to the +south, and doubled Cape Horn. In latitude 57, +when they thought themselves clear of the cape, +<span class='pagenum'>296</span>they encountered a storm on the 14th of February, +which lasted without abatement till the +3d of March, during which time the rain poured +down immoderately for many days; by which, +however, they were plentifully supplied with fresh +water. +</p> +<p> +When the storm abated, the wind changed to +the south, and proved very favourable; for at +this time they found themselves in lat. 60 deg. S. +But, the gale continuing brisk, by the 17th of +March they had run to the height of Baldivia, +in 48 deg. S. On the 19th, in the morning, +they saw a ship to the southward coming after +them with all the sail she could croud. Supposing +her to be a Spanish ship from Baldivia and +Lima, they lay by for her; but, on her nearer +approach, they saw she was an English ship; +and, upon hailing her, was told that her Captain’s +name was Eaton, that she came from +London, and was bound for a cruise in the +South Seas. +</p> +<p> +Rogues are always good friends till they come +to share their booty; so these free-booters agreed +to sail together; and accordingly kept company +to the island of Juan Fernandez, where they both +prepared to refresh and refit. +</p> +<p> +March 22, 1684, they anchored in the south +bay, in 25 fathoms water, not a cable’s length +from the shore; and as soon as Captain Cook’s +ship was moored, Dampier was eager to go ashore +to look for a <i>Moskito-man</i>, whom they had left in +this island, when they were driven from it in the +<span class='pagenum'>297</span>year 1681, by three Spanish men of war, Dampier +being at that time in the ship commanded +by Captain Watling, just after Captain Sharpe +was displaced. This man, when Captain Watling +drew off his crew, happened to be in the +woods hunting for goats; and the ship was under +sail before he came back. Dampier was +curious to know whether this Moskito-man was +yet alive; and, if he was, how it had fared with +him and it seemed that the Indian was no less +anxious to enquire after his friends, when he saw +that the ships that were approaching were English +ships. The poor fellow had observed them +the day before, when first they came in sight, +and, judging about what time they would come +to an anchor, he had killed three goats, and gathered +greens, ready to dress as soon as the company +should be at liberty to come on shore. He +was already upon the beach before the ships +could be well secured, and was first seen by one +of his countrymen who happened to be on board; +and it was no small pleasure to mark the excessive +joy of these two Indians at their meeting. +The Moskito-man belonging to the ship was +named <i>Robin</i>: he on the island <i>Will</i>. Robin +was the first who leapt on shore; and, running +to Will, threw himself flat on his face at his +feet, who, helping him up, and embracing him, +fell flat in like manner with his face at Robin’s +feet, and was by him taken up and embraced +as before. The surprize, the tenderness, the +solemnity of the interview, which was exceedingly +<span class='pagenum'>298</span>affectionate on both sides, was admired even +by the crews of buccaneers, who were spectators +from the ships of what passed on shore. When +Dampier, who was his old friend, came up, <i>Will</i> +was no less transported with joy to see him than +to meet his countryman, but he expressed it in +quite another manner: other friends too he met +with among the crew who knew him, and they +were all over-joyed at meeting so unexpectedly; +for these men are very much beloved on board +the ships wherever they sail, for their readiness +to assist in whatever service they are put upon. +When the ceremonies of congratulation were +over, and they had time to make enquiries, he +told them, that he was several times sought after +by the Spaniards, who knew that he was left +upon the island; because when the ship set sail +he was in sight of the shore, and was seen by +them before he could secret himself: but as he +was continually upon the watch, and had discovered +a secret retreat, they never had been able +to find him. He had with him, he said, his +gun and his knife, a small horn of powder, +and a few shot. These being soon spent, he +contrived a way, by notching his knife, to saw +the barrel of his gun in small pieces, with which +he made harpoons, lance-heads, hooks, and a +long knife; heating the pieces first in the fire, +which he lighted after the English manner, by +striking his gun-flint against the back of his +knife. The iron when it was hot he hammered +with stones, and formed it into the various shapes +he had occasion to apply it. By continued labour +<span class='pagenum'>299</span>and perseverance, he had worked himself +such a complete set of instruments, for killing +and catching his provisions by land and water, as +surprized the people when they were brought out +for their inspection. But, says Dampier, it is no +more than these Moskito-men are accustomed to +do in their own country, where they make their +own fishing and striking instruments, without +either forge or anvil: and other Indians are still +more ingenious; for they make hatchets of a +very hard stone, with which they cut down trees, +make canoes, and frame their houses. +</p> +<p> +Poor Will had built himself a little house +about half a mile from the shore, which he had +made warm and convenient, by lining it with +goat-skins. He had likewise raised himself a +couch about two feet above the ground, which +he had also made soft with the fur of the +animals he caught, and with the down of the +young birds (for he could catch no other) which +he occasionally met with and pluckt. Cloaths +he had none; for he had worn them to rags +among the bushes and brambles through which +he was often obliged to pursue his prey. He +had been on the island about three years; and +in all that time had never conversed with any +human being. He had seen Spaniards; but he +always took care, after the first, that none of +them should ever see him. +</p> +<p> +At this island these free-booters staid sixteen +days; and, on the 8th of April, the two ships +set sail together, and pursued their course northwards +<span class='pagenum'>300</span>towards the Line, at the distance of 12 +or 14 leagues from the shore, for fear of being +seen. The land from 24 deg. to 10 deg. S. is +of a most prodigious height, with ridges of such +lofty mountains from one end of Peru and Chili +to the other, that their summits seem to rise +above the clouds; and from the sea they appear +for ever blue. Dampier attributes to the excessive +height of these mountains, the want of +great rivers in all this tract; and says, there +seldom falls any rain from 30 deg. to 4 deg. S. +He adds, that the limits of the Pacific Ocean +ought to be confined within that space extended +westward indefinitely; for, in all this tract of +water, says he, there are no dark rainy clouds, +nor any winds, but trade winds, no tempests, no +tornadoes, or hurricanes, though north of the +Line, they are met with in this Ocean as well as +the Atlantic. There is, however, often a thick +horizon, so as to hinder an observation of the sun +with the quadrant; and, sometimes, hazy mornings, +and thick mists, but not such as will wet +one. The rivers in all this tract, he says, run +small; sometimes they run at one season of the +year, and at others are quite dry. These observations, +if just, are truly wonderful. +</p> +<p> +They coasted along the Pacific Ocean from +Juan Fernandez to lat. 90 deg. 40 min. S. +without meeting with any thing worthy of note; +but, on the 3d of May, they fell in with a ship +laden with timber, which they instantly took +without resistance. From this ship they learnt, +<span class='pagenum'>301</span>that the Spaniards were apprized of their being +upon their coasts, and that the Viceroy had sent +expresses to all the sea-ports to put the inhabitants +upon their guard against any sudden attack. +</p> +<p> +On this intelligence they immediately altered +their course, and steered for Lobos de la Mer, +in lat. 6 deg. 24 min. S. Here they cleared +their ships bottoms; and strictly questioned their +prisoners concerning the state of the country, +and which were the towns of greatest note. Several +towns were mentioned; but Truxillo appeared +to be that which, if conquered, would +yield the most profit: Truxillo was therefore +the place agreed upon to make a descent. In +their passage they descried three sail: Eaton +pursued two of those to seaward; and Cook +presently made prize of that which was nearest +the land. They were ships laden with flour +for Panama; in one of which was found a letter +from the Viceroy of Lima to the President of +Panama, acquainting him with enemies being +upon the coast, and with the supposed strength +of their forces. They also found an image of +the Blessed Virgin in wood, and a stately mule, +being a present to the President, with seven or +eight tons of marmalate of quinces, which is +eaten as a great delicacy in that country. From +the prisoners taken in these prizes they learned, +that the Spaniards were fortifying Truxillo, and +that a garrison was already established. The attack +of that town was therefore judged impracticable; +and it was resolved to retire to the Gallapagos +<span class='pagenum'>302</span>with the prizes, and there to consult what next +was best to be undertaken. The Gallapagos are +a cluster of islands lying on the Equator, very +little known or frequented, till the buccaneers +found their way into the South Seas; the nearest +of them lies 110 leagues to the westward of the +main, in long. 70 deg. W. from England. For +these islands they set sail on the 29th of May, and +reached them on the 31st. Here they found +plenty of turtle, which they feasted upon fresh +every day. They staid about ten or twelve days; +and laid up about 5000 packs of meal from their +prizes to serve as a future supply in case of necessity. +</p> +<p> +Being told by an Indian prisoner that was born +at Rio Lexa, that there were great riches in his +city, and that he would shew them the way to +the place, they concluded to set sail, and to trust +to the fidelity of their Indian guide; intending, +however, to anchor by the way at the island of +Cocos, in lat. 5 deg. 40 min. S. to lodge some +of their meal, as more convenient to have recourse +to on ordinary occasions than the islands +of Gallapagos. With this intent their stoutest +meal-ship was taken with them; but, not being +able to make the island, they steered to the continent. +</p> +<p> +It happened, however, in the course of this +short run, that Captain Cook, who had been +taken ill at Juan Fernandez, as soon as he came +within a few leagues of Cape Blanco, in latitude +9 deg. 56 min. S. suddenly died, “though in +the morning, says Dampier, he was as likely +<span class='pagenum'>303</span>to live as he had been for a long time before;” +but, he adds, “it is usual for sick men coming +from the sea, to die off as soon as they come +within sight of land.” The death of Captain +Cook occasioned a general consultation, when it +was agreed to come to an anchor in Caldera-bay, +within a league of Cape Blanco, and there to +give him christian burial. While the men were +employed in digging the grave, three Indians +came up to see what they were about, and entered +into conversation with the diggers, at the +same time appearing very shy; but, notwithstanding +their caution, as soon as the corps +was decently interred, they were all three seized +at once by the company, and very strictly examined. +They at first pretended to know nothing +of the Spaniards; but at length they acknowledged +that they were sent from Nicoya, a town +about 12 leagues off, to learn what they could +concerning any strangers that should touch upon +the coast, the people of that town having advice +that enemies were in the adjoining seas, and that +therefore it behoved them to be upon their +guard. They learnt likewise from these Indians, +that the inhabitants in that neighbourhood were +chiefly husbandmen, and bred cattle; that they +traded in hides, corn, and other provisions, for +which they received in return, shoes, hats, linnen, +and other cloth; and that, at no great distance, +there were some very large cattle-pens, where +they might furnish themselves with as many buffaloes +as would fill their ships. This was welcome +<span class='pagenum'>304</span>news to sailors, none of whom had tasted +any fresh meat for many weeks; and a company +of 24 of them set out immediately with an Indian +for their guide, to look for the cattle-pens. +</p> +<p> +After a short march of between three and +four miles, they came in sight of a savannah +where a great number of cattle were grazing; of +which, some were for instantly killing as many +as they could carry away, while others were for +staying all night, and driving them into the pens +to supply the ships at once, before the owners +were apprized of their design. This resolution +prevailed; but Dampier, who was of the party, +and who never chose to run unnecessary hazards, +returned to the ships with about half the company, +together with the Indian guide, while the +rest chose to stay where they were. In the morning, +when these voluntary drovers were expected +to return with their cattle, none came: it +was therefore feared that some disaster had befallen +them; and boats were manned, and sent +out to look for them. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/390.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Capt<sup>n</sup> Davis’s Men taken off the Rock by their Comrades.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +As the boats were rowing along, some of the +company happened to spy a number of people +upon a rock up to their middles in water; and, +upon nearing them, they soon saw that they were +the very people they were in search of; and, +therefore, hastened to take them on board. +Lucky it was, that the boatmen happened to spy +them just as they did, for in an hour more they +had been all swallowed up by the tide. They +had been suffered to sleep all night unmolested; +<span class='pagenum'>305</span>and in the morning when they were scattered +about among the cattle, and driving them into +the pens, they were surprized by the sudden appearance +of about 60 Spanish soldiers well armed, +who placed themselves in a convenient situation +to cut off their retreat. Alarmed at this +unexpected discovery, they hastened to join in a +body, resolving to sell their lives dear, if they +found it impossible to make their escape. Accordingly, +they looked well round them in order +to discover an opening to some other part of the +shore, than that against which their ships rode, +marching at the same time in as good order as +their situation would admit, and giving the Spaniards +now-and-then a volley of shot, to keep +them at a proper distance. The Spaniards, who +are not over eager to come to a close engagement, +kept themselves sheltered behind the +bushes, whistling some random shot at the fugitives, +by way of return; which, however, did +them no harm. In this cautious manner they +advanced slowly towards the beach where Captain +Cook was buried; and, looking for their +boat, saw her in flames by the water-side, near +the spot where they had grounded her the night +before. All hope of retreat being now cut off; +and the Spaniards, to make sure of their surrender, +having posted themselves in such a manner +as to prevent all communication with the ships, +they were at length reduced to the last extremity; +when, fortunately, spying a rock just +above water, about 100 yards from the shore, +<span class='pagenum'>306</span>they all determined to commit themselves to the +mercy of the ocean, rather than fall into the +hands of the Spaniards. With this resolution +they rushed together into the tide, holding fast +by one another, and determining that if one perished +all should perish. In this manner they +made good their landing upon the rock, where +they had continued seven hours when they happened +to be discovered by their comrades, who +were suffered by the Spaniards to release them +without firing a gun. +</p> +<p> +After this disappointment it was thought adviseable +not to hazard a second attempt; they +therefore weighed anchor, and continued their +course to Ria Lexa, having first chosen Mr. Edward +Davis, the next in command to Captain +Cook, Commander in his room. On the 20th +of July they set sail, and in three days they +were a-breast of their intended port. +</p> +<p> +Ria Lexa is known by a high-peaked volcano, +which smokes all the day, and in the night +sometimes sends forth flames of fire. It lies a +considerable distance from the main, and before +you approach the town there is a small island +on which the Spaniards had placed a guard. +This guard the buccaneers surprized; but from +them they learnt, that the town was strongly +fortified; that the Governor was informed of +their being upon the coast, and that the garrison +was well provided for defence. This news +discouraged the adventurers, who did not come +to fight but to plunder: they therefore instantly +<span class='pagenum'>307</span>withdrew from Ria Lexa, and steering for the +gulph of Amapalla, they there careened their +ships, and parted company. This gulph is a large +arm of the sea running ten leagues up into the +country. On the south point lies Cape Cawina, +and on the N. W. St. Michael’s Mount, in lat. +12 deg. 40 min. N. But before they came to +the gulph, it was agreed that Captain Davis +should go before with two canoes well-manned, +in order, by surprising some of the natives, to +gain intelligence. Accordingly, as soon as they +approached the gulph, the canoes departed, +and Captain Davis, the first night, arrived at a +small island on which there was a town called +Mangera, which, for want of a guide, he could +not find. In the morning he found it; but the +Indian inhabitants had all fled, and left the +place deserted; only the padre, with two boys +to attend him, were left to take their fate. As all +that Captain Davis wanted was a prisoner for the +sake of information, one more intelligent than +the friar could not have fallen into his hands. +From him they learnt, that there were several +Indian villages in the gulph; but that there +were only three towns that had churches; that +he served all the three; that there was only another +white man, besides himself, in the whole +gulph, who was a kind of secretary to the Spanish +government, and who collected the revenues +and kept the accompts. +</p> +<p> +Captain Davis, upon receiving this intelligence, +taking with him the friar and his two +<span class='pagenum'>308</span>boys, ventured to approach Amapalla, which +stands upon an eminence. As Davis with his +men gained the ascent, the Secretary, attended +by the Casique or Indian Chief, demanding, +in Spanish, who they were, and from +whence they came, was answered by Davis, +that they were Biscayers, and that they were +sent thither by the King of Spain to clear the +seas from enemies; that their ships were foul, +and were coming there to clean; and that he +was come before to prepare a convenient station, +and to demand assistance from his Majesty’s Indian +subjects. The Secretary bid him welcome; +said he loved an Old Spain man; and gave him +and his followers a kind invitation to come and +take their residence in the town. Captain Davis +ascended the hill, placing the friar in the front. +They were received with every possible mark +of respect both by the Secretary and the Indian +inhabitants, and after the first salutations were +past, they were conducted to the church, where +all business of a public nature is transacted. Accordingly, +the friar entered first and was followed +by Captain Davis and most of the by-standers; +but one or two of the Indians loitering +behind were pushed in by Davis’s men, who +then, suspecting some mischief, sprung back +again, and all the rest of the Indians taking the +alarm, followed their example, leaving Davis +and the friar, looking at one another in high +confirmation, ignorant as posts of the cause that +had occasioned the desertion, while, at the same +<span class='pagenum'>309</span>time, the brutes who had caused the rout were +firing upon the poor Indians for flying, and in +the skirmish the Secretary was killed upon the +spot, the only person in all the gulph that could +speak Spanish, the friar and his two boys excepted. +</p> +<p> +Davis’s design was, when they were all in the +church, to have shut them in, and made his +own terms with them: but, poor wretches! +there was no need to practice farther treachery +with them; for, notwithstanding the brutality +of these pretended Biscayers, the Indians shewed +them every kind of civility, helped them to +repair their ships, hewed down timber for them, +and brought it to the docks; furnished them +with cattle and fresh provisions from the main; +and assisted them in filling water, and carrying +wood aboard. All this while the friar with his +two lads were kept prisoners, and it was feared, +when they were ready to sail, that they would +have carried them off; for the Indians had a +great veneration for their priest. He had +learned their language, and was very useful to +them both by his kind offices and admonitions. +</p> +<p> +They remained here from the latter end of +July till the 3d of September, when they set the +friar and his youths on shore; and, the two +Captains, or more properly the two crews, +having quarrelled, each of them pursued a different +course. Davis steered along the main of +Peru, till having ranged the whole coast of +South America, they came to the island of Plata, +<span class='pagenum'>310</span>in lat. 1 deg. 10 min. S. so called by the Spaniards, +after Drake had shared the plunder of +the Cacafuego upon it. Here the two ships met +again, when Captain Eaton’s men reported that +they had met in their course with dreadful tornadoes, +with thunder and lightning frightful to +the last degree; that the air smelt of sulphur, +and they every moment expected to be involved +in smoke and flame. Captain Eaton proposed a +reconciliation but, his terms being rejected, he +staid but one night, and the day following +Davis left the island, and attempted the little +town of Manta, about seven or eight leagues +from Plata. They found the place deserted, and +brought away one old woman, the only living +creature they found in the place. She informed +them, that a great many enemies were come +over-land from the north seas; that they were +yet in canoes and periagoes; and that the Viceroy +had commanded all the Spanish trading ships +on the coast to be burnt, to prevent their falling +into the enemies hands. On this news, Davis +retired again to the island of Plata, to wait the +event, where soon after an English ship arrived, +called the Cygnet, commanded by Captain Swan. +This ship had been fitted out by some merchants +of London, with a view to trade; but all +trade being effectually at a stop, Swan was easily +persuaded to put his goods up to auction among +the adventurers with whom he accidentally fell +in, to man his ship with them, and to turn +buccaneer himself. The new comers were +<span class='pagenum'>311</span>headed by a Captain Harris, who contented +himself for the present to command a small +bark under Captain Swan. There was great +joy at this meeting; and Captain Davis and +Captain Swan were, like other rogues, very fond +of each other for their own villainous purposes. +They now wished for Captain Eaton again, that +having men enough they might all unite, and +undertake some place of consequence. With +this view they fitted up a small bark, and dispatched +her in pursuit of him, appointing a +place of rendezvous, if the bark should be fortunate +enough to meet with him. In the mean +time they set sail, directing their course to Payta, +a small town in lat. 5 deg. 15 min. S. built under +a rock near the sea-side. In their way they +fell in with a large ship of 400 tons, laden with +timber, by whom they received intelligence that +the Viceroy had ordered 10 frigates to be fitted +up with all expedition, in order to drive them +out of those seas. “Captain Davis’s unsettled +crew, says Dampier, began now heartily to +repent their not accepting of Captain Eaton’s +terms.” However, they pursued their course, +and on the 3d of November landed in the road +of Payta, and next morning attempted the town, +which they found deserted, and not so much as +one day’s provisions left in the whole place. +Here they got intelligence, that Captain Eaton +had burnt a ship in that road the week before, +and was sailed to the westward; by which they +judged that he had taken his departure for the +<span class='pagenum'>312</span>East Indies, by which course it was always his +intention to return home. They, therefore, began +to prepare for their defence, in case of being +attacked by the Spanish frigates. They burnt +Captain Harris’s bark, because she was a heavy +sailor, and fitted up another small bark for a +fire-ship; and, having examined their powder +and ammunition, and overhauled their rigging, +and put every thing in the best order they could, +they made sail for the isles of Lobos. At Lobos +they found a letter left by the bark that was sent +in quest of Captain Eaton, acquainting them that +he had been there, but had sailed some days +before the arrival of the bark; and that the bark +was gone to Plata, the place of rendezvous. +Here it was concerted to attempt the town of +Guaiaquil, before they returned to Plata. Accordingly, +on the 29th in the morning, they +set sail from Labos, steering directly for the +bay of Guaiaquil. This bay runs in between +Cape Blanco on the south side, and Point Shanday +on the north, 25 leagues from Cape Blanco. +In the bottom of this bay lies the island of Santa +Clara, in the form of a corpse laid out in a +shroud, of which the east end represents the +head, and the west end the feet. Ships that +are bound to the port of Guaiaquil keep to the +southward of this isle, to avoid the shoals on +the north side, where, it is reported, a very rich +wreck lies sunk, and that a person, who came +from the King of Spain with a patent to fish for +wrecks, had taken up some of the plate, but +<span class='pagenum'>313</span>he dying, the patent expired without much effect. +The Indians, however, have taken some +by stealth, and would probably have got much +more but for the swarms of cat-fish that hover +round this island, the prick of whose fins is so +poisonous that whenever they draw blood the +wound proves mortal. From Santa Clara to +Puna Arona is about seven leagues, on which +island the inhabitants, who are all seamen or +fishermen, are obliged to keep constant watch, +and to give notice to the Governor of Guiaquil +of the approach of all shipping, whether friends +or foes. The houses in the town of Puna stand +upon posts 10 or 12 feet high, with ladders on +the outsides to ascend the rooms. Dampier +says, he never saw any such in any other part +of the world, except among the Malayans in +the East Indies. They are thatched with palmeto-leaves, +and their chambers well boarded, +in which they exceed the Malayans. From +Puna to Guiaquil is seven leagues, and at the +distance of one league from the entrance of the +river, which rises about two miles on the other +side Guiaquil, it is divided into two streams, one +stream leading to Leon, the other to Guiaquil. +Guiaquil, according to Dampier, is one of the +principal sea-ports in the South Seas. The commodities +exported from that city are cocoa, +hides, tallow, sarsaparilla and other drugs, and +woolen-cloth, commonly called Quito cloth. +This cloth, which is made at the rich inland +town of Quito, is worn by all the common +<span class='pagenum'>314</span>people throughout the kingdom of Peru. But, +besides cloth, Quito abounds with gold, washed +down from the mountains that surround it, which +the Indians make a trade of gathering in the adjacent +brooks, where it is sometimes found in +solid lumps, but generally in small dust mixed +with sand. +</p> +<p> +As soon as the ships entered the bay they cast +anchor off Cape Blanco; and the crews manned +their boats and small barks to advance with the +more secrecy towards the town. In their way +they made prize of a small vessel, laden with +Quito-cloth, the master of which told them of +the watch at Puna; and at the same time acquainted +them that three ships were expected to +sail from Guiaquil next tide with 1000 negro +slaves. They had not rowed far before they fell +in with one of the ships laden with negroes, and +took her. They cut her main-mast down, and +left her at anchor. The next day they made +prize of the other two; but in taking them they +alarmed the town: and, there being no discipline +observed, no Commander in Chief to lead them +on in a body, one party counteracted the other +party; so that none of their attacks took place. +Captain Davis advanced with a party of his men +till they were quite exhausted in marching +through swamps and mangroves. Captain Swan +and most of his men were for retreating, seeing +the town alarmed; but, being upbraided with +cowardice, agreed to proceed. They had two +Indian guides; and one of them undertook to +<span class='pagenum'>315</span>lead the way into the town, and was followed +by a Davis’s man, who was fastened to him by a +rope, to prevent his making his escape. But, a +little before they came within musket-shot, Davis’s +man, who had boasted of his courage, and +sought the post of honour, to be next man to the +guide, cut the string, and let the guide loose; +who, finding himself at liberty, took to his heels, +and made his escape. The other, when he saw +him out of reach, cried out, that somebody had +cut the string, and that the guide was gone. +This spread a general panic; so the design was +all at once defeated; for, after that, not a man +would advance a step farther, but all retired to +their boats and embarked without either firing +a gun, or having a gun fired at them. After +looking at the town for half an hour, they departed: +and, having drest a cow, and filled +their bellies, they fell down the bay with the +tide, rifled the negro-ships, and took about 40 +of the stoutest men along with them, and turned +the rest adrift. Dampier remarks upon this miscarriage, +that there never was a fairer opportunity +for men to enrich themselves than they had: +but all their golden dreams vanished at once; +and they returned as they went, directing their +course to Plata, to meet the bark sent in search +of Captain Eaton. +</p> +<p> +When they arrived, they found her with her +crew almost famished; for having sought the +ships at Lobos, and from Lobos to Plata, and +from Plata to Lobos again, without finding +<span class='pagenum'>316</span>them, and having scarce 14 days provisions on +board when they set out, they were constrained +to make a descent upon the village of Santa +Helena, where they succeeded, and got a small +quantity of maize, with which and the turtle they +happened to strike, and some boobies and penguins +they killed, they had made shift to subsist, +though with the utmost difficulty. Such was +the regard these plunderers bore for each other, +when projects of robbery were in view. Here +the cargo of the cloth-bark, the only booty they +had made, was shared by lots, and Captain Swan +had the bark to serve him as a tender. Here also, +according to custom, they quarrelled; Captain +Davis’s men placing the miscarriage to the cowardice +of Captain Swan’s; and Captain Swan’s +to the over-forwardness of Captain Davis’s. At +length the matter was compromised by the mediation +of the two Commanders; and they agreed +in the next place to attack Lavelia, a pretty large +town in the bay of Panama, about seven leagues +from the sea-side, on the banks of a river on the +north-side of the bay. +</p> +<p> +On this expedition they set sail the 23d of December, +1684. On the 28th, they arrived at a +small village called Tomaco, which they surprized +and took, and in it a Spanish Knight, +Don Diego de Pinas, who came in a ship from +Lima to load timber, in which ship there were only +eight Spaniards, and twelve or thirteen jars of +good old wine. The wine they seized, but let +the ship go. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>317</span>On the 1st of January, 1685, in passing from +Tomaco to Gallo they took a packet-boat from +Panama to Lima with letters. The Spaniards +threw the letters over-board; but there being a +string and a small buoy to the box in which they +were inclosed, the box was seen and taken up. +The contents of the public dispatches were, that +the armada from Old Spain were arrived at Porto +Bello, and that the President of Panama had +received orders to hasten the Plate fleet from +Lima. +</p> +<p> +This was joyful news for the buccaneers, who +now thought of nothing but sharing the treasures +of Peru. They laid aside their pitiful +project upon Lavelia, and concluded to careen +their ships at the King’s Isles, near the entrance +of the gulph of Panama, to which gulph no +ships could sail without being seen from these +isles. There were now two ships and three barks +in company, a fire-ship, and two small tenders. +They all changed their course, and steered for +the isles, in their way to which they took a ship +of 90 tons, laden with flour. On the 23d of January +they arrived at the place appointed; and +on the 25th, they cast anchor in the harbour of +Galleria, setting all hands to work to clean the +barks, in order to cruise in the channel till the +next spring-tide, when the large ships might be +laid up to be cleaned also. +</p> +<p> +On the 27th, the barks, being finished, were +sent to cruise in the entrance of the gulph; and +on the 4th day after, they brought in a prize +<span class='pagenum'>318</span>laden with corn, salt-beef, and fowls. The beef +and fowls came in good time. The 14th of February, +they made an end of careening their large +ships, took in wood and water, and, on the +15th, sailed into the channel, to cruise for the +plate-fleet. When they came a-breast of Old +Panama, they sent their Knight upon his parole +with a letter to the President, to treat for the exchange +of prisoners; but by some accident, says +Dampier, he was killed. The next day they sent +another letter to the President by a <i>Mestiso</i> (a mixed +breed, half Indian half Spaniard). This letter +produced the desired effect. The English +prisoners were released, and about 40 Spaniards +were returned in their room. +</p> +<p> +Leaving Panama, they cast anchor before Tobago; +and, while they lay in that road, a stratagem +was played upon them that was near +proving fatal to men and ships. A pretended +merchant from Panama came by stealth to trade +with them for such merchandize as they might +have on board (a thing not uncommon on those +coasts), and was well received. It was agreed, +that in the night he should send his bark out +with such commodities as they wanted, and take +back such as they had to return. Accordingly +the bargain was made, and the bark came out as +was expected, hailing the ships with the watchword +that was to be her security. Being cautious, +however, lest some mischief should be intended, +they called to the people on board the +bark to cast anchor; which they not regarding, +<span class='pagenum'>319</span>were instantly fired at; upon which the crew +took to their canoes, and set fire to the pretended +smuggling ship, which had been prepared as +a fireship by that Capt. Bond who carried off the +officers from Mayo, as has been already related +in the beginning of the voyage. This was aimed +chiefly at Captain Davis’s ship; but at the +same time, Captain Swan’s people observed a +small float on the water with something like a +man in it, making towards their ship; the man, +seeing he was discovered, dived, and the float +disappeared: this, they apprehended, when +they saw the fireship blow up, was some combustible +matter intended to be stuck to the +rudder of Swan’s ship, as was formerly attempted +upon that of Captain Sharpe’s in the harbour +of Coquimbo. Both ships, however, were glad +to cut their cables, and it was with difficulty +that Davis’s escaped. The fireship drove burning, +towards Tobago, but after the first explosion +she did not burn clear, only made a +smother, not being properly contrived. +</p> +<p> +This Bond, who instructed the Spaniards +in making her, after he left the Cape de +Verd isles, as has already been related, steered +for the South Seas, and in his passage meeting +with Captain Eaton, Bond’s pilot, Richard +Morton by name, persuaded him to join with +Eaton and to make the voyage conjointly; but +after they had sailed in company two days, +Morton took an opportunity to slip on board +Eaton, and persuaded him to drop Bond, which +<span class='pagenum'>320</span>he did in the night, Morton still continuing on +board with Eaton. Bond being thus deserted, +and having no navigator with him who had ever +been in the South Seas, and having been scouted +for mal-practices in the North Seas, had no +other resource but that of betraying his countrymen’s +designs to ingratiate himself with the +Spaniards. With this view he steered directly +for Porto Bello, surrendered himself and crew +to the Governor, informing him of the buccaneer’s +designs in the South Seas, and offering +to remain himself as surety for the truth of +what he said. The Governor, not doubting the +fact, entertained him, and sent him over to the +Viceroy of Lima to be employed by him as he +should think fit; and he proved a very useful +instrument in defeating the enterprizes of his +old companions. +</p> +<p> +But to proceed. In the morning when it was +light, the ships returned to their buoys to fish +up their anchors; and while they were thus employed, +they were alarmed by a multitude of +canoes and periagoes that were in motion all +round the island. They seemed to make directly +towards the ships, and when they came within +call, the people on board learnt that they +were a new company of English and French invaders +just arrived from the North Seas to try +their fortune along with the old, and were +headed by two captains, one Grenet, the other +Lequie; that they consisted of 200 French and +the rest English; and that 180 English more +<span class='pagenum'>321</span>were still on the isthmus, under the command of +Captain Townley, and were daily expected to +arrive in order to join the rest. All the Englishmen +were immediately taken on board Captain +Davis and Captain Swan; and the French +were accommodated with the flour prizes, of +which mention has already been made, and Captain +Grenet, as the eldest officer, was made +choice of to command his countrymen. In a +few days, Captain Townley arrived, having already +made himself master of two ships, one +laden with flour, the other with wine, brandy, +and oil: the prisoners they took in these ships +declared, that the fleet from Lima was ready +to sail. Soon after the arrival of Capt. Townley, +there came a canoe out of the river of Santa +Martha, who said there were 300 men more +on the isthmus of Darien in their way to these +seas. On the 15th, they fell in with a bark +with five or six Englishmen in her that belonged +to Captain Knight, who had been six months +in the South Seas, and was now upon the coast +of Mexico, where he came in sight of this +bark, but not being able to come up with her +in his ship, had sent the men that were found +in her in a canoe to make prize of her; who, +having succeeded, had lost company in the +night, and could not recover their ship again. +This bark Captain Swan took under his care, +on pretence that the men had run away and left +their commander, and gave her to Captain +Harris, who presently manned her. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>322</span>The time approached when the Lima fleet +was expected, and some letters were intercepted +that contained the instructions to the commanders +which course to steer. In consequence +whereof the captains of the buccaneers held a +consultation in what manner to steer in order to +intercept them; but, while they were yet undetermined, +word was brought that the Spanish +fleet was advancing, and, as it should seem, +to give them battle. This news was by no +means agreeable. Such a motley crew of common +plunderers were but ill suited to stand a +regular engagement. However, there was now +no alternative, either they must fight or run away; +in which case, being taken singly, they +probably would all be destroyed; but by fighting +some might chance to escape. The Spaniards +were 14 in number; of which the Admiral +carried 40 guns and 540 men; the Vice-admiral +40 guns, 400 men; the Rear-admiral +36 guns, 360 men; one ship of 24 guns, 300 +men; one of 18 guns, 250 men; and one of +eight guns, 200 men; two fireships; six ships +with only small arms, some periagoes and tenders, +having eight hundred men among them +all. +</p> +<p> +The English, who were to engage this formidable +squadron, consisted of ten sail; Captain +Davis’s ship of 36 guns, 156 men, mostly English; +Captain Swan, 16 guns, 140 men, all +English; these were the only ships of force; +the others being furnished with none but small +<span class='pagenum'>323</span>arms; Captain Townley had 110 men, all English; +Captain Grenet 308 men, all French; +Captain Harris 100 men, most English; Captain +Branley 36 men, some English, some +French; Davis’s tender, eight men; Swan’s +tender, eight men; Townley’s bark, eighty +men; and a small bark of thirty tons made +into a fireship, with a canoe’s crew in her; in +all 960 men. The English, notwithstanding the +superiority of the enemy, resolved to begin the +attack, having the advantage of the weather gage, +which gave them the choice either to fight or +run. Accordingly, about three in the afternoon, +they bore down right before the wind on +the enemy, who kept close upon a wind to meet +them; but night came on without any thing +material being done on either side. +</p> +<p> +When it grew dark, the Spanish Admiral +put forth a light as a signal for the fleet to cast +anchor, and presently hoisted a light on his top, +which after continuing there an hour was taken +down, and in a little time hoisted again. The +English, being still to windward, were not aware +of this stratagem; for the Spaniard, knowing +of what consequence it was to gain the weather +gage, hoisted the second light upon the topmast +of one of his barks, and edged away silently +himself, followed by his capital ships, and, as +soon as it was day-light, appeared to windward +of the English. This was an unexpected +stroke, and left them no other course to take +but to fly. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>324</span>Captain Townley being hard pressed by the +enemy, made a bold push through a narrow gut +that parted the isles, and was followed by several +of the smaller ships, by which they escaped. +Captain Harris was chaced to the westward, and +returned no more. And Captain Davis maintained +a running fight all day round the bay of +Panama, with the loss only of a single man. At +night the Spaniards gave over the pursuit, and +suffered the English to rendezvous at the same +islands from whence they sailed the day before +to begin the attack. +</p> +<p> +The 30th, the Spaniards, without pursuing +their victory, continued their course to Panama; +and the English having lost Captain Harris in +the engagement, as has just now been mentioned, +set sail to the keys of Quibo in search of him, +that being the place appointed to rendezvous in +case of being dispersed. Here they cashiered +their cowardly French Captain, who never came +into the engagement at all; and, having found +Captain Harris, they held a consultation about +their future operations. +</p> +<p> +All their hopes being now frustrated of effecting +any thing considerable by sea, they turned +their thoughts on making their fortunes by land; +and for that purpose their prisoners were all +strictly examined, with regard to the strength +and riches of the principal cities along the sea-coast, +and within 20 or 30 miles within land. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th of July they were joined by +Captain Knight, of whom mention has already +<span class='pagenum'>325</span>been made. He had been cruising more than +six months, and had got nothing except a good +ship. He expected to have found the fleet at +King’s Islands enriched with the treasures of the +Spanish fleet: but when he came there, he was +informed by the master of a bark-log which he +took, that they were worsted, and had fled to +the westward, where he had now come to join +them. +</p> +<p> +In order more effectually to pursue their inland +enterprizes, they set about providing canoes for +navigating the rivers that led to the chief cities, +against which they had formed designs, +and on the 20th of July they sailed from Quibo, +bending their course for Ria Lexa, the +nearest port to Leon, the city they determined +first to attack. Their whole force consisted of +640 men in eight ships, commanded by the +Captains Davis, Swan, Townley, and Knight, +with a fireship and three tenders. +</p> +<p> +Being arrived within eight leagues of the +shore, they quitted their ships and embarked to +the number of 520 men in 31 canoes; and after +a dangerous passage, in which they met with +two dreadful tornados, and in which the large +canoes were very near sinking; they arrived at +length at the creek that leads to Leon, and advancing +within five miles of the city without +the loss of a man, they landed to the number +of 470, leaving the remainder under the command +of Dampier to guard the canoes. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>326</span>They marched from the boats in three divisions. +Captain Townley with 80 of the briskest +men led the van; Captain Swan with 100 men +followed next, to support him; Captain Davis +headed the main body, consisting of 170 men, +and Captain Knight with the remainder, composed +the rear. Captain Townley, who had advanced +more than two miles a head of the rest, met a +party of Spanish horsemen, and defeated them. +Encouraged by this success, his men pushed +briskly on, and entered the town, driving all before +them. When they had gained the high-street +they were opposed by the main body of +the Spaniards, drawn up on the parade in order +of battle; but, on two or three of their +principal Officers being killed, they were soon +dispersed; and Captain Townley had made himself +master of the city before the foremost division +that was to support him had entered the +suburbs. About six in the evening the rearguard +came straggling in; many of the men who +composed it, being tired and unable to keep +pace with the rest, came dropping in all night; +and one old man was killed next morning by the +Spaniards, from whom he refused to accept of +quarter. He fired his piece among them, reserving +his pistols to defend himself when he +should come to close engagement; but they returned +his fire, and shot him dead at a distance. +He was a stout grey-headed old man, aged about +84, and had served under Oliver in the time of +the Irish Rebellion; after which, he entered on +<span class='pagenum'>327</span>board a ship, and sailed to Jamaica, where he +had followed buccaneering for many years. He +could not be prevailed on to tarry with the canoes, +but said he would venture as far as the +boldest man among them. He was much regretted, +being a cheerful old man, and never +dispirited. +</p> +<p> +The Spaniards likewise picked up another +straggler, one Mr. Smith, a merchant, who had +accompanied Capt. Swan with an intent to trade, +when that gentleman took in his cargo at London +for the South Seas. This gentleman was carried +before the Governor of Leon, who was encamped +at some distance from the town, and was +examined by him concerning the number of the +invaders. Being known to a Mulatto servant +that attended the Governor, he was the more +easily credited; when he told him, that they were +1000 strong in the town, and that 500 were left +to guard the canoes. This information had its +effect; for the Governor, who was assembling +the force of the country to fall upon the assailants, +sent next day a flag of truce, with an offer +to ransom the city. They demanded 300,000 +pieces of eight, and provisions for 1000 men +for four months. The demand, it is probable, +exceeded the Governor’s abilities; so that he +was obliged to suffer the city to be set on fire, +because he could not comply with their exorbitant +demands. In the mean time, Mr. Smith +being exchanged for a lady that had fallen into +the hands of the invaders, and a Spanish gentleman +<span class='pagenum'>328</span>released, upon promise of sending them +150 oxen to Ria Lexa, the next town they intended +to assault, they left Leon in flames, and +returned to their canoes. It does not appear +that the plunder of Leon answered the expectations +of the assailants. Be that as it may, they +prowled down the river, stealing cattle, or any +thing that fell in their way; and, on the 16th +of June, reached Ria Lexa, in the harbour of +which the ships were already arrived. The +Spaniards, for their better defence, had thrown +up an intrenchment at the mouth of a narrow +creek leading to the town, and had placed 110 +soldiers to defend it; they had besides thrown a +boom across the river, to prevent either ships or +boats from advancing up the channel: so that +these men might have maintained their posts +against an army of 500 regulars. But when the +English came in sight of the breast-work, they +fired but two guns before the Spaniards run +away. They were about half an hour in cutting +the boom; and, the channel being now +clear, they entered the town without farther opposition. +Here they found nothing but empty +houses, except such things as the inhabitants +could not, or would not carry away; these were +about 500 sacks of flour, some pitch, tar, and +cordage, all which, though things of little value +to the Spaniards, were notwithstanding of great +use to them. They therefore conveyed them +aboard the ships; and having here received the +150 beeves (the ransom of the gentleman released +<span class='pagenum'>329</span>on his parole at Leon), some were employed +in killing and salting, while others made +excursions to the neighbouring farms and sugar-works, +from whence they rarely returned empty +handed. +</p> +<p> +They staid here from the 17th to the 24th, +“when some of our destructive crew (to use +Dampier’s own words) set fire to the houses, +I know not by whose order, but we marched +away, and left them burning.” +</p> +<p> +The 25th, the Captains Davis and Swan agreed +to part company. They had hitherto been unsuccessful +in concert; they therefore determined +to try their fortunes separately. Knight and +Harris accompanied Davis; and Townley with +his two barks followed Captain Swan. +</p> +<p> +In a few days Davis set sail for the coasts of +Peru; but Capt. Swan, after staying to take in +wood and water, and to recover his men, pursued +his course to the westward, intending first to examine +the country of Mexico towards the north, +and then to steer for the East-Indies, and by that +course to return home. This was a very flattering +voyage for Dampier, who was no less earnest +to store his mind with the knowledge of new +countries, than to enlarge his fortune by the +riches they contained: he therefore quitted Davis, +and entered on board with Captain Swan. +</p> +<p> +On the 3d of September they set their prisoners +and pilots on shore; the latter being of no +farther use, and the former only an incumbrance. +A malignant fever continued to rage on board, +<span class='pagenum'>330</span>which carried off many of their men. As the +same distemper broke out in the fleet of Captain +Davis, it was concluded that they had taken the +infection at Ria Lexa, where, a few months before +their arrival, the inhabitants had been visited +by a kind of plague, which had almost depopulated +the town. They had still, however, +about 340 men in tolerable health in four ships. +</p> +<p> +In their course to the north-westward, they met +with most tempestuous weather, violent tornadoes +from the north-east almost every day, with +such flashes of lightning and claps of thunder, +as no man on board had ever heard. +</p> +<p> +On the 14th they came in sight of the well-known +volcano of Guatimala, which appears at +first with a double peak. Between these peaks +fire and smoke with dreadful roarings frequently +break forth, and spread the alarm far +and wide; yet the inhabitants of Guatimala continue +to reside near the foot of the mountain, +and are not so much intimidated upon those occasions +as those who live at a greater distance. +This city is famous for many rich commodities, +the produce of the neighbouring hills and savannas +among which it is situated. It lies about +eight leagues from the South Sea, and by report +not above 40 or 50 leagues from the North, to +which it sends annually great quantities of indico, +anatta, silvester, and cochineal. The indico +plant grows wild about Guatimala, and has +lately been introduced and cultivated in Georgia +and Carolina. The anatta is a red dye, and is +<span class='pagenum'>331</span>made from the flowers of a shrub which grows +in many of the southern provinces of America. +Silvester is the seeds of a fruit not unlike the +prickly pear of England; and cochineal is a collection +of insects bred in fruit of the same shape +and size. Both the trees grow wild about Guatimala; +and both the silvester and cochineal +yield the same kind of dye, and are sometimes +substituted one for the other, though the cochineal +is generally accounted the most valuable. +</p> +<p> +The volcano of Guatimala is seen at 75 miles distance; +and the sea, as they approached it, was full +of floating pumice-stones, washed by the rains from +the adjacent hills, and precipitated by the floods +into the main ocean, where, by a constant accumulation, +they cover an immense space. Driftwood +they likewise observed in great abundance; +and the trees were large and not much rotted. +</p> +<p> +When they had reached the latitude of Toguantapeque, +in 14 deg. 30 min. N. Captain Townley, +with 106 men in nine canoes, attempted to +land; but found the country defended by huge +sandy hills, against which the waves beat high +with incredible fury. The wind being fair, he +coasted along the shore for several days, and the +ships continued to follow him with an easy sail: +at length, grown desperate, he rushed upon a +sandy beach, but the canoes overset before they +could reach the land. In this attempt one or +two men perished; some had a leg or an arm +broke, and others were very much hurt. However, +the majority having made good their landing, +<span class='pagenum'>332</span>dragged afterwards their boats on shore; but +what gave them the greatest concern was, that +all but those who had been provident enough to +seal up their cartouch-boxes, had wetted their +powder, and rendered their fire-arms useless. +This gave a damp to their enterprize; yet they +prepared to penetrate the country, and to get +sight of the town of which they were in search: +but either there was no such place, or their fears +prevented their discovering it; for all that were +alive returned on board the ships without procuring +a meal’s provisions to refresh the sick. +</p> +<p> +After this fruitless expedition, they still continued +coasting to the westward, with the wind +at east-north-east, till they came to Tangola, a +small island where there was good anchorage; +from thence they sailed to Guatulco, a sea-port +in lat. 15 deg. 30 min. N. the best in Mexico. +On one side of the entrance into this harbour +there is a small island, and on the other a hollow +rock, through which the billows as they pass +produce a horrible roaring, and, being compressed +against the sides, are forced through a +hole at the top, and rise like the waters of an artificial +fountain to an incredible height. In this +harbour there is good anchorage. It is about +three miles in depth and one in breadth, runs in +north-west, and on the west side small ships may +ride land-locked secure from wind, or weather. +At the bottom of this harbour, Drake found a +fine rivulet of water, near a village, of which +hardly any traces remained, except the ruins of +<span class='pagenum'>333</span>a small chapel enclosed in a fine grove of trees +that gave it a very venerable appearance. Here +the sick on board the ships were brought ashore; +and here a project was formed to traverse the +country, and plunder the inland towns; but, +after travelling 14 miles, and seizing two or three +Indian guides, they could only find a little village, +where some vanellos were drying, the cods +of which are held in great esteem by the Spaniards. +They grow upon vines that creep like +ivy about trees of greater magnitude, and flourish +in the bay of Campeachy, as well as in the +country of Guatulco; but the Indians keep the +method of curing them a secret to themselves. +The Indians of this village could speak but little +Spanish, appeared to be a poor harmless people, +had neither gold nor silver among them, nor +could they tell where those precious metals were +to be obtained. It was therefore to no purpose +to pursue their march through a country, rich, +indeed, in natural productions, but destitute +of cultivation, and almost without inhabitants; +they therefore returned to their ships; +and, while the sick were endeavouring to regain +their strength, the healthy employed themselves +in providing necessaries to continue the voyage. +</p> +<p> +On the 8th, four canoes well manned set forwards +to the port of Angels, with orders to wait +there till the arrival of the ships. In the mean +time their instructions were to take some prisoners. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>334</span>On the 12th, the malignity of the distemper +with which they had been long afflicted being +abated, and the sick in a fair way of recovery, +the ships set sail in order to follow the boats. +The boats, however, had mistaken the harbour, +and two of them, in attempting to land at a place +near which they had observed some cattle feeding, +were overset in the beach, and with difficulty +got out again to sea, with the loss of one +man drowned, and some others hurt. They lost +likewise four of their guns, and spoiled their ammunition; +and, in a very distressed condition, +the next day met the ships. The other two canoes +parted from them in the night of the 9th, +and had not rejoined them since. The harbour +of Port Angels lies in latitude 15 deg. N. and is +open to all winds, except those from the land. +The Spaniards had compared it to that of Guatulco; +but there being no similitude, the boats +had passed it without knowing it; and the two +that were missing had rowed as far as Acapulco +before they discovered their mistake. When +the ships arrived before the harbour, the missing +boats were ready to join them; and there appearing +to be plenty of cattle at no great distance +from the shore, 100 men were landed to +supply the ships with beef. +</p> +<p> +The country round this harbour exhibited a +most delightful prospect; the hills were covered +with large and lofty trees, the plains with a most +beautiful verdure, and the savannas interspersed +with rills and rivers, on the banks of which were +<span class='pagenum'>335</span>innumerable little shrubs, the beauty and variety +of whose flowers surpass description. Here they +made no doubt of being furnished with whatever +their wants required. In less than four miles +march, the party that were landed met with a +grazing seat belonging to Don Diego de la Rosa, +in which they found store of salt, and a considerable +quantity of maize, but no inhabitants, +the family having fled on the first appearance of +a descent. They found also poultry in abundance, +and hogs or cabritos without number. +Here they feasted for two or three days, and +every man brought away as much as he could +carry; but the ruggedness of the road, and the +weakness of the company, debilitated by sickness, +prevented their improving so favourable +an opportunity to the best advantage. They +relinquished with reluctance many good things +which they had in possession, more than sufficient +for present enjoyment, but too cumbersome to +be conveyed to the ships for future use. +</p> +<p> +In the harbour of Port Angels there is good +riding in 13, 20, and 30 fathom water. The +flood rises about five feet, sets to the north-east; +and the ebb at south-west. +</p> +<p> +The 27th in the morning they set sail from +Port Angels, and in the evening came to an anchor +in 16 fathom water, under a small rocky +island six leagues to the westward of their former +station, of which island the Spanish books +give no account. The next day they weighed +and continued their course; and, being a-breast +<span class='pagenum'>336</span>of a small lagune whence the missing boats had +a few days before taken a quantity of fish, they +lay to, and sent in a boat with 12 men to bring +off a more ample supply. The Spaniards, on +marking the trim of the ships, suspected their +intent; and, concealing themselves behind a +rock at the narrow entrance of the lagune, discharged +a volley of small arms at the boat just +as it passed the place of their ambuscade, by +which five of the crew were dangerously wounded. +Alarmed at this sudden attack, and finding +it impossible to retreat, because of the narrowness +of the channel, they pushed forwards into +the lagune, where they could lie out of gunshot +till the enemy dispersed, or till they should +be relieved by the vigilance and valour of their +own people. In this situation, however, they continued +two days and three nights; till at length +Captain Townley, fearing some disaster had befallen +them, manned his canoes, and, beating the +Spaniards from the rocks, opened the sufferers +a free passage to the sea. Their joy was the +greater, as the pains of the wounded men began +to grow intolerable; and, had they not then been +relieved, they must in another day, nay, some of +them, perhaps, in a few hours, have died in the +greatest agonies. This lagune lies in latitude +16 deg. 40 min. N. +</p> +<p> +On the 2d of November they passed by a remarkable +rock, called by the Spaniards the Algatross; +five or six miles to the westward of +which are seven or eight white cliffs that serve +<span class='pagenum'>337</span>to direct mariners to avoid a dangerous shoal +stretching about a league and a half south-by-west. +A little farther to the westward the Spaniards +have erected a breast-work upon a small +island at the mouth of a fair river, which at that +time was defended by 200 men. They manned +their boats, and being determined to land, the +Spaniards, after firing 20 or 30 shot, deserted the +island, and left the channel open. They entered +on the west side, and found plenty of salt laid up +in cabbins for curing the fish which they catch in +the lagunes, but in what manner Dampier could +not conceive, for he neither saw hook, line, net, +boat, or canoe. At the distance of three leagues +from the entrance of the river they came to a +house in which was a Mulatto servant, who informed +them, that at Acapulco there was a stout +ship from Lima; and that a little higher up the +river, there was maize and cattle in abundance, +to which place he offered to be their guide. +</p> +<p> +On this intelligence a contention arose between +the commanders. Captain Townley, who +was in want of a better ship, proposed to sail immediately +to Acapulco to make himself master +of that from Lima; but Captain Swan was first +for procuring provisions to enable them to subsist +while they were pursuing the grand object +they had in view, that of intercepting the Manilla +ship which every year comes constantly +from the East Indies richly laden, and arrives +nearly at a certain season off the southermost +point of California in her course to Acapulco. +<span class='pagenum'>338</span>As questions of this kind are always decided by +numbers among voluntary adventurers, Captain +Townley’s proposal was not only seconded by +his own crew, but also by the greatest part of +Captain Swan’s. They accordingly returned to +the ships with all expedition, and set sail on the +5th, and on the 7th came in sight of the high +land of Acapulco, a port easy to be distinguished +from all others, by means of three hills, the +middlemost of which rises like a sugar loaf, and +the westermost of the other two has on its summit +two hillocks which shew in appearance like +two paps. When the ships came to the distance +of about 12 leagues they brought to, and Captain +Townley with 140 men embarked on board +canoes with a view to seize the Lima ship by +surprize, before his own ships should come in +sight. +</p> +<p> +They had hardly sailed four leagues before +there arose so dreadful a tornado that those on +board the ships thought themselves in the utmost +peril of their lives, and everyone concluded that +the boats must perish. Happily, however, they +weathered the storm; but were driven in great +distress into Port Marquis, a tolerable harbour +about a league to the eastward of Acapulco. +Here they staid to dry their cloaths, and refit +their furniture, and in the night of the following +day they rowed softly into Acapulco harbour; +“and, because they would not be heard,” +says Dampier, “they hauled in their oars, and +paddled as softly as if they had been seeking +<span class='pagenum'>339</span>manatee. They paddled close to the castle; +then struck over to the town, and found the +ship riding between the breastwork and the +fort, about 100 yards from each. When +they had well viewed her, and considered the +danger of the design, they thought it impossible +to accomplish it; therefore they paddled +softly back again till they were out of command +of the forts, and then they attempted +to land, but were opposed by a company of +Spanish soldiers, who fired at them and kept +them at a distance from the shore till day-light; +when, taking a view of the town and +castle, and not liking their appearance, they +returned on board, tired, hungry, and heartily +mortified at their disappointment.” +</p> +<p> +Acapulco lies in 17 deg. N. on the west-side +of the continent of America, famous for its +trade to the East Indies, and to Lima; in which +trade three ships are annually employed; two of +them are so regulated, that each has the advantage +of the trade-winds that blow between the +Tropics, both in going and returning to their +respective ports. The third is employed in supplying +the other two with Spanish goods from +Lima, and in bringing to Lima the Indian +merchandize and money brought from Manilla. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th, the ships sailed from Acapulco, +and continued coasting along the shore to the +westward. Near the sea-side the land is low, +but rises gradually till within land it appears to +<span class='pagenum'>340</span>touch the clouds. Though the ground is clean +and the anchorage good at a mile from land, +yet it is defended by breakers that render the +shore inaccessible, except at the utmost hazard +of men’s lives. In their passage, observing a +cluster of little round hills a little to the westward +of the promontory of Petaplan in 17 deg. +20 min N. they examined the coast narrowly, +and discovered a small river, at the entrance of +which they landed 170 men, who, after marching +about 14 miles up the country, came to a +wretched Indian village, in which a Mulatto +woman and four children were the only living +creatures left. These they brought to the +ships; and, by the intelligence they received +from the old woman, they proceeded to the harbour +of Chequetan, from whence she conducted +them, through a pathless wood, to a farm-house, +where they found a caravan of sixty mules laden +with flour, chocolate, and cheese; all which, +together with some oxen, they brought down +to their canoes. The cargo of the caravan they +instantly conveyed on board the ships; but the +oxen, with eighteen cows which they afterwards +seized without opposition, they first killed and +cured, and, having divided the whole into +lots, every ship’s crew took their own share on +board. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/428.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Dampier’s Comrades seizing the Oxen & Mules laden with Flour, Cheese &c. at a Farm House.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +On the 21st they quitted this fortunate harbour, +leaving the Mulatto and her four children +to their fate. On the 25th they passed a lofty +hill divided into peaks, in lat. 18 deg. 8 min. N. +<span class='pagenum'>341</span>near which the Spanish maps place a town called +Cupan, which however they could not find; after +a short stay in search of it, they proceeded +along the coast, till on the 28th they came in +sight of the volcano of Colima, in lat. 18 deg. +36 min. N. at the foot of which is situated the +rich town of Colima, from whence it takes its +name. Of the valley by which this burning +mountain is surrounded, the Spaniards give a +most luxuriant description; but our navigators +found it absolutely inaccessible from the sea; +for the surf ran so high, and the breakers appeared +so formidable, that the boldest of them +durst not attempt it: they therefore very reluctantly +quitted the neighbourhood, and proceeded +in quest of Sallagua, the bay of which +they discovered in lat. 18 deg. 52 min. N. Here +they landed 200 of their best men, who were opposed +by a body of Spanish foot, supported by a +party of horse; but, on the first charge, the foot +gave way, and the horse soon followed. In the +pursuit the English were led into a broad road, +and followed it, through a woody and rocky country, +to the distance of four or five leagues, without +seeing house or inhabitant. In their way +back they met with two straggling Mulattoes, +who told them the road led to the city of Oarrah +four days journey off, and the soldiers whom +they had defeated were sent from thence to escort +the passengers from India that were expected +to land in Sallagua bay, from on board the +<span class='pagenum'>342</span>Manilla ship that every year touched upon that +coast. +</p> +<p> +Encouraged by this intelligence, they hastened +to embark; and, setting sail on the 6th of December, +steered directly for Cape Corientes, at +the height of which they expected to meet their +prize. In this passage, Dampier, who had hitherto +by temperance preserved his health, was +seized with a fever and ague, which at length +terminated in a dropsical disorder that was very +near carrying him off, and which carried off +many of the men. The dropsy, Dampier says, +is a general disorder on this coast, and the natives +pretend that the stone of the alligator dried +and powdered, and drank in water, is an infallible +remedy. The same receipt he found mentioned +in a Mexican almanac; but could find no +alligator to give it a trial. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th of December they came in sight +of Cape Corientes. It is of a moderate height, +flat and even a-top, cloathed with woods, and +projecting into the sea in steep cliffs. It is laid +down in the Spanish maps in latitude 20 deg. +28 min. N. and longitude 230 deg. 56 min. W. +from Teneriff, or in 121 deg. 41 min. W. from +the Lizard-point in England. +</p> +<p> +They were now four ships in company; Captain +Swan and his tender, and Captain Townley +and his tender. These were all properly stationed +to gain intelligence; but, provisions growing +short, Captain Townley’s bark was dispatched +with 60 men to traverse the coast to the westward +<span class='pagenum'>343</span>of the Cape, in search of some town or +village where their wants might be supplied. +On the 17th the bark returned, being unable to +weather the cape, or make any useful discovery. +She had left, however, four canoes with 46 men, +who determined to double the cape, or perish +in the attempt. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th, all the ships quitted their stations, +and sailed for the island of Chametley, +about 16 or 18 leagues to the eastward of the +cape, to take in wood and water. On these +islands live the fishermen, who, as the Spaniards +say, fish for the inhabitants of the city of Purification. +On the 20th, they anchored between the +islands and the main in five fathom water, clear +sand. Here they caught plenty of rock-fish, but +saw no inhabitants. On the 21st Captain Townley +with about 60 men went to an Indian village +about seven or eight leagues to the westward, to +endeavour to procure provisions; and next day +Captain Swan returned to his station off the cape. +On the 24th, the four canoes who had doubled +the cape, returned to the cruisers, and reported, +that they had rowed to the bay of the valley of +Valderas, or Val d’ Iris, and had landed in the +garden of the world, where they found fruits of +the most delicious flavour growing wild in the +plains, and where the cattle were feeding at large +among the streams of water that flowed meandering +in the savannas, and lost their waters +among the finest groves of trees they ever beheld; +but when they marched in pursuit of the +<span class='pagenum'>344</span>beeves that were every where straying in the +vallies, they were suddenly surrounded by a body +of Spaniards, who briskly attacked them, some on +foot, and some on horseback. They made a +gallant defence, and suddenly retreated into an +adjoining wood, where they were followed by +the Spanish horse. These were armed each with +a case of pistols, and some of them, besides their +pistols, had short guns. The English, being covered +by the trees, made use of their fire-arms with +advantage; and, after killing about 17 of the +assailants, and wounding several others, the rest +being unsupported by the foot, fled with precipitation. +In this skirmish four English were +shot dead, besides two desperately wounded; +and, not daring again to attempt the valley, they +killed a horse, and, having satisfied their hunger, +they returned to their canoes. +</p> +<p> +On the 25th, being Christmas-day, they cruised +close to the cape, and sent in three of their +strikers to kill fish. In the afternoon they returned +with three great jew-fish, which afforded +them all a Christmas-dinner. Captain Townley +on the 28th came to his station, and brought +with him 40 bushels of maize, which he had +seized at an Indian village four or five leagues +up the country, and which his men were obliged +to carry all that way on their backs. +</p> +<p> +They cruised till the 1st of January, 1686, off +Corientes, and then steered towards the valley of +Valderas, in order to furnish themselves with beef; +and before night they anchored in 60 fathom +<span class='pagenum'>345</span>water a mile from the shore. The next day they +landed, dividing themselves into two parties; +one party posted themselves on the hills to +watch the motions of the Spaniards, while the +other party traversed the vallies to kill the cattle. +The Spaniards frequently presented themselves +in companies, but did not dare to come near +enough to engage. They continued here till +the 7th, in which time they had killed and salted +beef enough for two months allowance for +their whole company, and, had not their salt +failed them they might have stored themselves +with much more. +</p> +<p> +They now gave over all farther expectation of +the Manilla ship, it being the general opinion that +she had escaped (as they were afterwards assured +she had) while the ships were employed in seeking +provisions. “So this design failed,” says +Dampier, “through Captain Townley’s eagerness +after the Lima ship, which he attempted +in Acapulco harbour. For though,” adds he, +“we took a little flour hard by, yet the same +guide who told us of the Lima ship, would +have conducted us where we might have had +store of beef and maize; but instead thereof +we lost both our time and the opportunity of +providing ourselves, and so were forced to be +victualling when we should have been cruizing, +to the total ruin of the enterprize.” +</p> +<p> +Being now provided with beef in abundance, +and having taken in wood and water in proportionable +quantities, the two commanders, Swan +<span class='pagenum'>346</span>and Townley, having separate views, though +united in this one grand object of intercepting +the Manilla ship, thought proper to part company, +Captain Swan intending to steer westward, +and Captain Townley to return eastward. Hitherto +a Moskito chief with three of his men +had sailed with Captain Swan, but being now +about to depart never more to return to their +country, he was desirous of recommending them +to the care of Captain Townley, who being +bound to the coast of Peru, might there put +them on shore at some convenient place, from +whence they might travel over land to the North +Sea. This Captain Townley undertook to perform; +and the ships being now under sail, they +saluted each other, and parted. +</p> +<p> +Our navigator continued to sail with Captain +Swan. Before night they passed Point Pontique, +which forms the westernmost point of the +bay, distant from Cape Corientes about twenty +leagues. This point is in lat. 20 deg. 50 min. N. +a league to the westward of which are two barren +islands, called the islands of Pontique. Beyond +these islands the land trends to the northward, +presenting a very rugged unpleasant appearance +as far as the eye can extend the prospect. +On the 14th, they came in sight of a +small white rock in lat. 21 deg. 15 min. N. +which at a distance seemed like a ship under +sail. From this island the land runs full more +northerly, and the sea tumbles in with such violence +upon the shore, that for many leagues together +<span class='pagenum'>347</span>there is no landing; there is, however, +every where good anchoring as far as the islands +of Chametley. These islands are six in number, +and different from those of the same name on +the east of Cape Corientes, being a little within +the Tropic of Cancer, and not above three +leagues from the main. On these islands grows +a fruit called the penguin, of which there are +two sorts, the yellow and the red. The yellow +grows on a thick stem about a foot high, the +leaves narrow and about half the length of the +stem edged with prickles. The fruit grows +out from the top of the stem in two or three +large clusters, 16 or 20 in a cluster. It is round +and in size like a small pullet’s egg; the outer +coat is thick and tough, and the pulp in the inside +is full of little black seeds. The red penguin +is in shape like a little nine-pin; grows +up on stools from the ground in clusters of 60 +or 70 on a stool, standing upright like the +leaves of houseleek, and are smaller than the +yellow: they are surrounded by leaves a foot +and a half long, edged with prickles like the +former. They have a sharp pungent taste, are +very wholesome; but those who eat of them +immoderately find them heating. They grow +wild, and in the bay of Campeachy Dampier +says they are so plentiful, that one can hardly +range the plains for their prickly leaves. +</p> +<p> +From these islands Captain Swan embarked +100 men in canoes, and went himself in search +of Coolican, a river in the province of Cullacan, +<span class='pagenum'>348</span>with a town of considerable trade (probably +that marked Pastla in the Spanish maps) +upon its banks, the inhabitants whereof pass in +boats to the island of California and fish for +pearls. They coasted along the shore as far as +lat. 24 deg. N. but found no river; and after +three or four days absence returned without +making any discovery. +</p> +<p> +A few leagues to the N.N.W. of Chametley is +a narrow entrance into a lake, called by the Spaniards +Rio de Sal, which runs about 12 leagues +easterly, parallel with the shore, forming many +low mangrove islands, and having depth of water +every where for boats to row along its banks. +In this lake Captain Swan entered, accompanied +by 150 of his men in 12 canoes. In his progress +he observed a grazing farm, and landing +some of his men, they found the house deserted, +and the cattle driven away. On proceeding +further along the lake, two Indians were seen +running at some distance, whom they took for +spies, and having discharged a volley of small +arms, one of them was wounded in the thigh, +and not being able to continue his race, was +seized by a party landed for that purpose who +brought him on board. He informed them, +that, about four leagues from the place where +they there were, an Indian town was situated in +a savanna, abounding with cattle. The company +were scarcely landed to go in search of +this town before they were attacked by a body +of Spanish horse, who not being properly armed, +<span class='pagenum'>349</span>made but a faint opposition, and suddenly retired. +While the English were in pursuit, the +enemy played off a stratagem that greatly annoyed +them. We have already mentioned, in +the voyages of Captain Sir Francis Drake, the +nature of the grass that covers the savannas +on the isthmus of Darien between the North +and the South Seas. Such was the grass with +which the pursuers were surrounded, when the +Spaniards set it on fire, and, being dry as stubble, +it burnt with astonishing fury, and spread +with such rapidity, that it was with the utmost +difficulty the whole party escaped being involved +in the flames. This disaster not only made them +more cautious, but occasioned a delay, which +gave the Spaniards time to collect their force +and to make a more formidable opposition. +When the English arrived the next day at the +village of which they had intelligence, they +found it occupied by an armed garrison, whom +it was necessary to overcome before they could +enter; but as the Spaniards were, for the most +part, destitute of fire-arms, and the Indians +wholly unexperienced in their use, the advantage +the English derived from that circumstance +soon decided the contest in their favour. +The enemy fled after the loss of some of their +leaders, and left the conquerors master of the +place, having only one man killed with an arrow, +and their surgeon sorely wounded. +</p> +<p> +They were told by their prisoners, that, about +five leagues from the town of which they were +<span class='pagenum'>350</span>now in possession, two rich gold mines were +wrought by Indian slaves belonging to the Spaniards +of Compostella, the most considerable +Spanish city in that district. It was not now a +time to search for gold, when they were in want +of every kind of food, except the beef they +had cured at Valderas. Their chief search was +now for maize, and having plundered the village +of all they could find, they conveyed it to +their boats with great labour; and next day +quitted the lake, and returned on board the +ships. This lake is laid down in latitude 23 deg. +30 min. N. +</p> +<p> +On the 2d of February, Captain Swan made +another excursion with 80 men in search of the +river Rosario, at the entrance of which they +landed, and marched to an Indian town of the +same name. Here they were told, that the gold +mines were not above two leagues from the +town; but, like the cock in the fable, they rejected +the pearl and chose the barley-corn; +about 90 bushels of maize, and the other provisions +they found in the place, though insufficient +for the purpose of their intended voyage, +were yet of more value in their present necessity +than all the gold of Compostella. +</p> +<p> +On the 3d the ships came to an anchor off +the river’s mouth of Rosario, in seven fathom +water, oozy ground, in lat. 22 deg. 51 min. N. +</p> +<p> +On the 7th, the Captain with his company +came on board. The quantity of provisions +which he had procured was but trifling for so +<span class='pagenum'>351</span>many men; he therefore sent the next day a +party in search of the river Oleta, but they returned +without having found it. The river +St. Jago was next attempted, and on the 11th +they anchored in seven fathom water near the +mouth of it, three leagues E. S. E. of the white +rock of Maxentelbo, the high hill of Zelisco +bearing S. E. This is one of the principal rivers +upon the coast, and lies in latitude 22 deg. +15 min. N. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th, 70 men were sent up the river +to make discoveries; they spent two days in examining +the creeks and inlets, and at length +came to a large field of maize which they had +begun to gather, when they spied an Indian +who had been sent to watch the corn, whom +they seized and carried on board, in hopes of +gaining from him some intelligence, by which +they might obtain a more effectual and speedy +supply. He told them, there was a town called +Santa Pecaque, about four leagues from the +place where he was taken, in which there was +great store of provisions, and to which he undertook +to be their guide. Captain Swan, overjoyed +at the news, ordered 140 men to be instantly +embarked on board the canoes, and to +proceed with the Indian as he should direct. +After rowing five leagues up the river, they +came in sight of the town, when they landed in +the night, and next morning set out on their +march by land. About 10, they had advanced +within musket-shot; and, having dispatched a +<span class='pagenum'>352</span>party to reconnoitre, they found the town deserted, +and entered it without opposition. +</p> +<p> +The town of Santa Pecaque is seated near the +side of a wood in a spacious plain, neatly built, +with a square in the middle, on each side of +which the houses are furnished with balconies, +from whence the inhabitants, in general, are spectators +of the frequent processions exhibited by +the Spanish priests, in order to convert the Indians, +who are now almost all become christians +in the Spanish settlements. The town, though +small, has two churches; and they were told, +that about 70 white families constantly resided +in it, besides those who occasionally came there +as carriers from the mines, and as merchants +from Compostella. These carriers furnish the +adjacent miners with maize, sugar, salt, and salt-fish, +of all which there was great plenty in Santa +Pecaque. +</p> +<p> +Captain Swan being acquainted by an express +with the success of this expedition, and with the +opportunity that now offered to supply his wants, +hastened to the town to give the necessary orders. +When he arrived, he divided his men into two +parties; one party he employed in conveying the +provisions to the boats; the other in plundering +and packing up. These he relieved alternately; +and when both parties were wearied out with +this laborious service, they caught horses, and, +having laden them with maize, dispatched them +under a strong escort down to the canoes. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>353</span>On the 17th, when they arrived, they found +the men who guarded the canoes in high spirits, +though they had been attacked by the Spaniards, +and had one man desperately wounded. +The party that escorted the horses thought it +adviseable, however, to reinforce the canoe-guard, +lest the Spaniards should renew the +attack. Next day they returned to the town, +and the party left therein were preparing to convoy +more maize to the canoes; but, before they +set out, Captain Swan understood by an Indian +whom they had made prisoner, that 1000 men +were in arms in order to attack them, and that +they were already advanced within three leagues +of the place. Upon this intelligence, the Captain +advised all his men to load as much maize +as they could altogether bear away, and instantly +to depart in a body. With this advice they absolutely +refused to comply, being determined not +to leave Santa Pecaque while a load of provisions +remained within it. It was in vain to endeavour +to persuade those whom he could not +punish for disobeying orders; and, therefore, +on the 19th, he suffered 50 of them to depart +with as many loaded horses; exhorting them, +however, to march in a body, that they might +be the better able to defend themselves against +any sudden surprize. They were equally deaf to +advice and instruction; they pursued their old +course, marching in a line, and every one leading +a single horse. The Spaniards had remarked +their manner of marching, and had placed +<span class='pagenum'>354</span>themselves in ambush the preceding night. They +had scarce travelled half a league before they +were suddenly set upon, and every man cut to +pieces before they could assemble to prepare for +their defence. Captain Swan, who had heard +the firing, hastened with his party to the place +of action; but on his approach he was struck +with horror at the sight of such a number of +his followers weltering in their blood, stript of +their arms, and divested of their charge. The +Spaniards, after the slaughter, having possest +themselves of their musquets, &c. seized also +the loaded horses, and instantly fled. Though +the party commanded by Captain Swan did not +exceed the number of those already slain, yet +they were suffered to pass unmolested to the +canoes, on board of which they embarked, and, +with the provisions they had already secured, +returned to the ships. Among the slain on this +occasion was Mr. Ringrose, who wrote that part +of the history of the buccaneers that relates to +Captain Sharpe. +</p> +<p> +The slaughter of this unfortunate party +dampt the spirits of the survivors, and discouraged +them from attempting any farther descents +upon this coast. It was therefore determined +to steer directly for Cape St. Lucas on the +island of California, where they might lie secure +from the attacks of the Spaniards, till the +men were refreshed, and the ships put in a condition +to undertake a new voyage. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>355</span>The lake of California (for so it is called in +the Spanish charts) is either very little known +to the Spaniards, or very carefully concealed. +Though they have mines open already more +than they can work, in Mexico, Chili, and +Peru, yet they are very unwilling to allow other +European powers to share the treasures of those +countries, though they themselves cannot exhaust +them; nor is it at all likely that any considerable +advantages will ever be made by others, +till by some lucky chance a nearer passage into +those seas is discovered. “Were I,” says +Dampier, “to attempt a North-west passage, +I would go first to the South Seas, bend my +course from thence along by California, and +that way seek a passage into the Western +Seas. If I succeeded in my attempt, I should +then be without that dread which others must +have had of passing from a known to an unknown +region; and which, it is not improbable, +obliged them to relinquish the pursuit +just as they were on the point of accomplishing +their designs. In like manner,” he +adds, “were I to be employed in search of a +North-east passage, I would winter about +Japan, Conca, or the North-east part of +China; and taking the spring and summer before me, +I would make my first trial on the coast +of Tartary, wherein if I succeeded I should +come into some known part, and have a +great deal of time before me to reach Archangel +or some other European harbour.” +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>356</span>On the 21st they set sail, directing their +course for California; but, being opposed by contrary +winds, were unable to reach their destined +port, and obliged to put in at the Maria islands, +in latitude 21 deg. 40 min. N. distant about 40 +leagues from Cape St. Lucas, and 20 from +Cape Corientes. These islands are three in +number, and they came to an anchor at the +east end of the middlemost in five fathom water, +clear sand; where, as soon as they moored their +ships, they instantly began to unrig them, in +order to careen. +</p> +<p> +Here Captain Swan proposed to his company +to return home by way of the East Indies, +which was highly approved by some, and as +violently opposed by others, who, being ignorant, +imagined, as Dampier says, that he would +carry them out of the world. At first coming +they lived upon nothing but seal; but in two +or three days their strikers furnished them plentifully +with turtle; and they likewise killed +guanicoes, conies, and large pigeons; so that +they consumed none of their ship provisions +during their stay. While the sailors were working +upon the ships, the officers employed themselves +in surveying the stores and measuring the maize; +which they divided into three parts, and allotted +two parts to the ship, and one part to the bark, +the ship carrying one hundred men, the bark +only fifty. +</p> +<p> +Here Dampier, who had been long ill of the +dropsy, tried a very uncommon remedy. He +<span class='pagenum'>357</span>stripped himself stark naked, laid himself down +upon the hot sand, and caused the surgeon to +cover him all but his head; in this manner he +lay near half an hour; but being unable to +endure it any longer, he was carried to his tent +and put to bed. While he was in the sand he +sweat immoderately, and to that operation he +ascribes the recovery of his health. +</p> +<p> +They staid till the 26th, when their ships +being clean, they sailed to the valley of Valderas, +in order to take in fresh water. Here they +came to an anchor at the mouth of the river +where they had anchored before; but, now that +the dry season prevailed, they found the water +brackish, and unfit for use. They then weighed, +and, coming to a fine fresh-water brook at +the foot of a little round hill about four leagues +from Cape Corientes, they filled on the 29th +32 tons of excellent water, a quantity sufficient +to serve their voyage. +</p> +<p> +Being provided with every thing they had +reason to expect in this country, they now began +seriously to consider of the possibility of performing +their intended voyage. Upon a nice +calculation, they found they had only 60 days +provisions on board, at a little more than half a +pint of maize a-day for each man; they had a +great many rats on board, which they could not +prevent from consuming a part of the maize; +they had, according to the Spanish account, +more than 7000 miles to run from Cape Corientes +to Guam, the nearest land; and, that +<span class='pagenum'>358</span>island being subject to the Spaniards, they had +no certainty of a supply when they came there. +All these discouragements staggered the most +forward of them; and nothing could prevail +with the majority but a promise from Captain +Swan to cruise off Manilla, to intercept the register +ship, as soon as they should arrive in the +proper station. To this condition Captain Swan +was forced to submit, though much against his +inclination; for he had no mind to commence +plunderer at first; and now he was heartily tired +of the trade. +</p> +<p> +On the 31st of March, 1686, they took their +departure from Cape Corientes, the Cygnet, +Captain Swan, with 100 men; and the bark, +Captain Teat, with 50. At first they steered +with a small land breeze at E. N. E. which carried +them three or four leagues; then the sea-wind +came on at W. N. W. and changed their +course S. W. By six o’clock in the evening +they were nine leagues S. W. from the cape. +About 10 the next morning they had the sea-breeze +at N. N. E. so that at noon they were 30 +leagues from the cape. It then blew a fresh +gale, which carried them into the true trade-wind. +At first they had it at N. N. E. and then +northerly. At 250 leagues from the shore it +settled at E. N. E., and there stood till they +came within 40 leagues of Guam. +</p> +<p> +After the second day of their departure, having +fine clear weather, and a fresh trade-wind, +they crouded all the sail they could spread, and +<span class='pagenum'>359</span>had frequently observations of the sun, moon, +and stars; so that they could calculate their +longitudinal distance by way of amusement almost +every day. At their first setting out they +steered into the latitude of 13 deg. N. and it is +remarkable, that in a run of more than 6700 +miles in this latitude they saw none of those +small islands that are so plentifully interspersed +in the same latitude on the opposite side of the +Line; nor did Commodore Anson, who afterwards +pursued the same track from Acapulco, +see land till he arrived at the island of Tinian. +As they run at a great rate, and the wind had +every appearance of continuing, after being at +sea about 20 days, the men began to grow clamorous +to have their allowance enlarged; with +which the Captain was forced to comply, though +he endeavoured to persuade them to patience, +and represented to them the danger of being becalmed, +of missing their intended port, or of being +refused a supply when they arrived. But +none of these could prevail. The cry was for +an augmentation, and an augmentation they had. +Till the 20th of April their allowance was eight +spoonfuls of boiled maize a man; but after that +it was enlarged to ten. Dampier, who, as has +been before noticed, had long been troubled +with a dropsical disorder, gathered strength by +this spare regimen; but those who were in full +health it very much weakened. He says, he +constantly drank three times a-day; but there +were many on board who did not drink once in +<span class='pagenum'>360</span>nine or ten days, and some not in twelve; one in +particular did not drink in 17 days, and then +said he was not a-dry, though he made water +every day. Amidst these hardships one poor +fellow was found guilty of theft, and sentenced +to receive three stripes with a two-inch rope on +his bare back from every man in the ship. Captain +Swan, Dampier says, began first, and struck +with a hearty good will, and his example was followed +by all the rest; a punishment that must +make every feeling mind shudder. +</p> +<p> +Though by the Spanish account the distance +from Cape Corientes to Guam is said to be +2400 leagues, or 7200 English miles, yet Captain +Swan had persuaded his men, that, by the +English account the distance was only 1900 +leagues; and that, as Drake and Cavendish had +run it in less than 50 days each, they with better +built ships might run it even in less than +either of them: when, therefore, they had run +the 1900 leagues, and the 50 days were nearly +expired, they began to grow very mutinous +and those who had declared against the voyage +from the beginning, exclaimed bitterly against +the Captain, and against all those who had persuaded +them to undertake it. They had, during +this long run of 6000 miles, seen neither fish, +fowl, bird, or insect, except once when, at the +distance of 4975 miles from Cape Corientes, +they spied some ruabies, which they apprehended +had come from islands or cliffs at no great +distance, though they never came in sight of +<span class='pagenum'>361</span>any. The Captain in the midst of these tumults +gave them fair words; told them, that it +was probable, the Spanish accounts might be +the best, and encouraged them by giving them +hopes, that, as the breeze continued, a few days +patience would put an end to their troubles. +On the 18th of May they met with some +rain, and the clouds settling in the west foretold +their near approach to land. On the 20th, +the bark being near three leagues a-head, ran +over a rocky shoal, on which there was only +four fathom water. On the shoal they observed +abundance of fish swimming every where about; +and Captain Teat imagining that land was near, +clapt upon a wind with the bark’s head to the +north, and lay by to speak with the ship. When +the ship came up, Captain Teat went on board, +and related what he had seen; on which, being +then in lat. 12 deg. 55 min. N. and Guam being +laid down in 13 deg. N. they clapt on a wind, +and steered to the northward, very doubtful, +however, of being right, as no shoals near Guam +are noticed in the Spanish charts. They pursued +this course, however, till four in the afternoon; +when, to their unspeakable joy, they saw +the island of Guam at eight leagues distance. +“And happy it was, says Dampier, that we got +sight of it before our provisions were gone, +of which we had but enough for three days +more; for, as I was afterwards informed, the +crew had combined first to kill Captain Swan, +and eat him, when the victuals were gone; +<span class='pagenum'>362</span>and, after him, all of us who were accessary +in promoting the voyage.” +</p> +<p> +Nothing can exhibit a more striking indication +of the ferocity of man’s nature, than the +resolution formed by this abandoned crew. After +a long series of enormities, robberies, murders, +burning of houses and towns, exposing +their fellow-creatures to want of food and shelter, +and spreading terror and devastation wherever +they set their feet, they at length, distressed +and half-famished themselves, begin to murmur +against their leaders, and the greater number +combine to murder the lesser number, and to +make food of their flesh. Need we, after reading +this, have recourse to those we call barbarous +nations for instances of the savage nature +of man! The most uncultivated of those eat +only the flesh of enemies killed in war; but +these wretches, who called themselves christians, +exceeded in their intention every horrid example +we read of; they conspired to kill and +eat their own Chiefs! +</p> +<p> +On the 21st of May they came to an anchor +about the middle of the island of Guam on the +west side. This is one of the Ladrone islands. +Dampier places it in 13 deg. 21 min. N. and computes +the meridian distance of Guam from Cape +Corientes to be about 7302 miles; and supposes +the South Sea to be of greater breadth by 25 degrees +than is commonly allowed by hydrographers. +It is about twelve leagues in length and four in +breadth; on it the Spaniards have a small fort +<span class='pagenum'>363</span>of six guns, garrisoned by 20 or 30 soldiers, and +commanded by a Governor, and one or two +subordinate Officers. The climate is healthy, +and the natives active, docile, and ingenious, +and are the best boat-builders throughout the +Indian seas. Dampier believes their boats sail +the best of any in the world. He tried one of +them by the log; and, by the rate she ran in +half a minute, computes her course at 24 miles +within the hour. These Indians are no less dexterous +in navigating than in building their boats. +By report they will pass to other islands at 30 +leagues distance, do business, and return again +in 12 hours. +</p> +<p> +They had no sooner cast anchor than a Spanish +friar came on board, with three Indians: +Captain Swan received the priest with great civility +told him they came with no hostile intention, +but as friends to purchase with their +money provisions to continue their voyage. The +priest replied, that provisions were now scarce +upon the island, but would engage the Governor +to do his utmost to supply their wants. +They thought proper, however, to detain the +padre till his promise was fulfilled. +</p> +<p> +Next day a messenger was sent with letters +and a present to the Governor, and in the mean +time two boats were manned, one to fish, and +another to purchase cocoa-nuts; the former returned +empty, but the latter came back laden. +The Governor, on the receipt of the letters and +present, in token of friendship complimented +<span class='pagenum'>364</span>the Captain with six hogs, 12 musk-melons, and +as many water melons; and at the same time sent +an order to the Indians in the nearest town to +bake every day as much bread-fruit as the ships +should require, and to assist the mariners in gathering +cocoa-nuts and other fruits; with which +order the Indians very readily complied. During +this friendly intercourse the Manilla ship +came in sight; but, being first seen from the +fort, the Governor found means to apprize her +of her danger, and she stood off, and escaped +without being discerned by the ships. But in +steering to the southward to avoid them, she was +very near sharing a worse fate; for she struck +upon the shoal already mentioned, and, after +three days incessant labour, floated off with the +loss of her rudder. During her distress the men +got intelligence of her situation; but Captain +Swan, who had determined no longer to follow +the infamous employment of plundering, found +means to divert them from their purpose of attacking +her. +</p> +<p> +On the 30th of May the Governor sent his +last present to Captain Swan, consisting of some +hogs, a jar of pickled mangoes, a jar of excellent +pickled fish, a jar of rusk or bread made of +fine flour, and six or seven packs of rice. In +return, at his own request, he was furnished +with powder and shot of which he was in want; +but what he coveted most was a fine English +dog which they had on board, with which he +was likewise gratified. The friar’s civility was +<span class='pagenum'>365</span>rewarded with a brass clock, an astrolabe, and +a large telescope; in return for which he sent +the Captain six hogs, some bushels of potatoes, +a roasting pig, and half a hundred weight of +fine Manilla tobacco. The ships were plentifully +supplied, besides, with every thing the +island afforded; cocoa-nuts and bread-fruit as +many as the ships could stow, and upwards of +50 hogs in pickle. Captain Swan was desirous +of the Governor’s letter to the merchants of +Manilla, having a private view to trade, which +he concealed from his villainous crew. +</p> +<p> +On the 2d of June, they departed from +Guam, directing their course to Mindanao, one +of the Philippines; a range of islands extending +in length from the 5th to the 19th degree of +North latitude, and occupying in breadth about +six degrees of longitude. The principal island +in this range is Luconia on the north, where +Magellan, in his voyage round the world, was +slain with a poisoned arrow, and where the Spaniards +made their first settlement, and established +at Manilla a mart of traffic with the richest +kingdoms of the east. +</p> +<p> +On the south, Mindanao is the principal +island. It is in length about 60 leagues, and in +breadth fifty. It is diversified with hills and +vallies. The hills abound with gold, and the +vallies are covered with perpetual verdure. It +is finely watered with rivers and springs; and +the plains and lawns are interspersed with +groves of lofty trees, some of which are +<span class='pagenum'>366</span>formed for shade, and some afford food for the +inhabitants. +</p> +<p> +Of the pith of one they make their bread, and +of the sap of others they make a pleasant drink. +The marshy grounds abound with rice, and on +the dry hilly land they cultivate yams, potatoes, +melons, and a variety of vegetables unknown +to Europeans. Their chief fruits are plantains, +bonanoes, nutmegs, cloves, beetel-nuts, durians, +jaccas, cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, and oranges. +</p> +<p> +The plantain Dampier calls the king of +fruit, and prefers it to every other. The tree +that bears it is between three and four feet in +circumference, and rises about ten or twelve +feet high. When at its height, there springs +from the top a stem about the size of a man’s +arm, round which the fruit grows in clusters, +in shape not unlike the Turkey cucumber, the +coat of which is of a yellow colour when ripe. +The inclosed fruit is of a delicate flavour, and +melts in the mouth like mamalet. It is highly +esteemed by all Europeans, and all their settlements +are furnished with plantain walks, some +families subsisting wholly upon that fruit. +</p> +<p> +The bonanoe differs but little from the plantain, +except in size, being small and less luscious. +</p> +<p> +The nutmeg and clove trees are rare in this +island, but those that grow are large and fine. +The natives discourage their growth for fear of +exciting the jealousy of the Dutch, who have +monopolized the whole trade for spices, and +who keep in pay a company of armed soldiers +<span class='pagenum'>367</span>to cut down the spice-trees in the uninhabited +islands, lest other European nations should avail +themselves of their plenty. Dampier says, that +he has been assured that, in some of the eastern +islands, it is usual to see, at the shedding time, +cloves three or four inches deep under the trees. +</p> +<p> +Of the beetel-nut all the Eastern people are +immoderately fond. It is the fruit of a tree +that grows like the cabbage-tree to the height +of ten or twelve feet, without either leaf or +branch, and then sends forth shoots on every +side, among which the fruit is found in clusters, +on tough stalks about the bigness of a man’s +finger. It is larger than a nutmeg, and rounder; +they cut it, when green, in quarters, wrapping +each quarter up in an arek-leaf, and chewing +both together. It tastes rough, dyes the lips +red, and makes the teeth black. +</p> +<p> +The durian grows on trees like apple-trees, +and are in size as large as pumpkins, covered +with a thick rind, which, when ripe, opens and +sends forth a strong scent, not unlike that of +roasted onions. It divides into chives, each about +the size of a pullet’s egg, the inside of which is +of the consistence of cream, and must be eaten +in its prime, or there is no enduring its rankness. +</p> +<p> +The jacca differs very little from the durian; +only the inside of the former is yellow, and +that of the latter white. +</p> +<p> +The island of Mindanao abounds likewise +with animals of various kinds; and, according +to Dampier, is one of the most plentiful islands +<span class='pagenum'>368</span>in the world; and, though so near the Equator, +being in 7 deg. N. the air is temperate, enjoying +gentle sea breezes in the day, and cooling +land-winds in the night. +</p> +<p> +Though they arrived on this coast about the +middle of June, yet it was the middle of July +before they could come to an anchor. They +were ignorant of the situation of the chief town; +and, arriving first on the opposite side, had been +all that time plying about the island in search +of it. At length they cast anchor near the +river that bears the name of the island, and leads +to the chief city. They fired seven guns, and +were answered from the shore by three. They +were presently after invited by a Raja and one +of the Emperor’s sons, who demanded in Spanish, +who they were, and from whence they +came? They were answered by Mr. Smith (the +gentleman made prisoner at Leon), that they +were English, and had been long from their +country. They were told, they were welcome; +and asked if they were come to settle a factory, +and to open trade? They said, they came only +to purchase provisions. At which the Mindaneians +appeared disconcerted. Captain Swan +was some time at a loss to account for this circumstance; +but he afterwards understood, that +a Captain Goodluck had been there some time +before, with some proposals from the East-India +Company; and that, when he went away, he had +given them some reason shortly to expect an Ambassador +from England, to complete the treaty. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>369</span>The Raja and Prince sat in their canoes; and, +after half an hour’s conversation, took their leave, +having invited Captain Swan ashore, and promised +to assist him in procuring provisions. +</p> +<p> +There are three small islands called Meangis, +within 20 leagues of Mindanao, that abound +with gold and cloves; and, while Captain Swan +was beating along the coast, in his passage from +Guam to the river where the ships now were at +anchor, they were observed by the Princes of that +country, and known to be English. The Prince +of those islands, having heard a good report of +the English, and fearing a visit from the Dutch, +sent secretly his nephew to Captain Swan, to invite +him and his company to come and settle in +his territories, offering every advantage in point +of trade and security that he should require. +Nothing could have been more advantageous, +both to the nation and the settlers than this offer; +but Captain Swan paid no regard to it. +</p> +<p> +As the season was now approaching when the +westerly monsoon was about to set in, which +would necessarily oblige the ships to stay a considerable +time in the port of Mindanao, Captain +Swan judged it his interest to cultivate a good +understanding with the reigning Sultan. With +this view he caused a magnificent present to be +prepared for the Sovereign, consisting of scarlet-cloth, +gold lace, a Turkish scymetar enriched +with jewels, and a case of pistols, together with +presents of less value to his chief Ministers; and, +being in readiness, he sent them on shore by +<span class='pagenum'>370</span>Mr. More, who sailed with him from London +as chief supercargo, when his design was to trade +in the South Seas. These presents were graciously +received. The Sultan made Mr. More sit down +by him, and asked him many questions concerning +England, by means of a Spanish interpreter; +and, after an hour’s conversation, dismissed him +with marks of the highest esteem. Next day +Captain Swan was invited on shore, and admitted +to an audience in form; when the Sultan +shewed him letters from the East-India Company, +and desired to know if he came to settle +in consequence of those letters? He talked with +him much concerning the produce of his country, +and the nature of carrying on commerce; and +seemed highly entertained with the accounts he +gave of it, and of the countries through which he +had passed, and the novelties he had seen. He was +three hours in close conversation; and, when he +was dismissed, was entertained by Raja Laut, the +King’s uncle, with a sumptuous banquet, after +their manner, consisting of boiled rice, fish, and +fowls. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 27em;'> +<img src="images/460.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Captain Swan Entertaind by the Raja Lout; Uncle to the King of Mandanao.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +On this occasion, Captain Swan was given to +understand, that, while Mr. Goodluck resided in +that city, he had been robbed by a servant belonging +to Raja Laut, and that the fellow absconded +till Mr. Goodluck took his leave; but +that he was now returned, and was ready to be +delivered up to be punished, in such manner and +with such severity as crimes of the like nature +are punished by the laws of England. But +<span class='pagenum'>371</span>Captain Swan told him, that in his country none +but the injured party could prosecute the criminal; +and, as the man had committed no offence +against him, he could take no cognisance of his +crime. The Raja heard him with astonishment; +and, to shew that the Princes of Mindanao were +far from countenancing such practices, he caused +the fellow to be stript naked, tied to a post, and +exposed a whole day with his face to the burning +sun; while at the same time the Moskitos continually +tormented him without a possibility of +being able to brush them off; a kind of torture +that few have hardiness enough to survive. This +condescension, in offering to deliver up the criminal +to be punished by the Captain, was followed +by a like offer from the Captain, with respect +to any of his men who should offend against +the laws of the Mindaneians; but the Minister +returned the compliment, and left the punishment +to the Captain himself, who, upon the least +complaint, punished his men with a severity that +shewed more of revenge than of justice, and +which they afterwards look occasion to resent. +Among those who felt the effects of his indignation +was Captain Teat, his chief mate, who commanded +the bark that accompanied him in his +run across the Southern Ocean; and others, who +had offended him on board, he remembered, +now he had the countenance of the court on +shore. +</p> +<p> +Captain Swan was highly caressed by the +Chiefs of Mindanao, and pressed to stay and +<span class='pagenum'>372</span>secure his ships from the approaching tempests, +which always attend the change of the monsoons; +and, as the river before the rainy season +generally runs low, finding it difficult to float +his ship over the bar, fifty or sixty Mindaneian +fishermen were immediately sent with their +canoes, to assist him in lightening his ship, and +floating her up the river. She was no sooner +moored than a free intercourse with the natives +commenced. They expressed their regard for +the English by signs that were easily understood. +When the Dutch were mentioned to them, they +would spread their fore-fingers half a foot apart, +saying <i>Bujeto</i>, they are so far distant in friendship: +when speaking of the Spaniards, they would +spread their fingers still wider; but when the +English were spoken of, they would bring their +fingers quite close, saying <i>Samo</i>, we are all one. +They were very fond of getting the men to their +houses, where they kindly entertained them, after +their manner, with tobacco, and beetel-nut; and +where those who had money, and were decently +dressed, were pressed to connections with the best +families, and courted by the young females to +the most familiar intimacy. To men who have +long been at sea, such inducements are irresistible; +and many of them made themselves poor +by being too easily drawn in by these allurements +to spend their money lavishly. Some who accompanied +Harris from the North Seas had gold +in abundance; and the Mindaneian misses, when +they knew their power, very soon found the way +<span class='pagenum'>373</span>to ease them of it. In Mindanao they had goldsmiths +and other artificers, who charged double +their value for such baubles as these prodigals +were for ever bespeaking to present to their favourites; +besides, some of them bought houses, +and hired servants, and lived as profusely as the +Raja himself, imitating the custom of the country, +and having a pagelly or principal companion, +and half a dozen mistresses. It was not +long before the town’s-people discovered the +true humour of English sailors, and they likewise +took care to make their advantage of it. +As they had no other but gold in lumps, when +they wanted change, they gave them at the rate +of 11 or 12 dollars an ounce. To others the +same gold was exchanged for 18 dollars. The +price of provisions and common necessaries was +in like manner enhanced by those spendthrifts; +and thus, says Dampier, the poor were made to +suffer by the folly of the rich, and a foundation +was laid for imposing upon all Englishmen who +should hereafter have occasion to take up their +residence in that port. +</p> +<p> +Captain Swan himself was seldom seen at any +other house but Raja Laut’s or the royal palace. +At the latter he made frequent visits, and at the +former dined every day, attended by such of his +men as had no money to spend, who had rice +in plenty provided for them, and sometimes the +remains of fowls or pieces of buffalo, drest in +a course, and served in a hoggish manner. The +Mindaneians use neither knives nor forks in eating, +<span class='pagenum'>374</span>and they cram their mouths with lumps as +large as they can take in, those being accounted +the genteelest who can open their mouths the +widest. +</p> +<p> +The religion of Mindanao is the Mahometan, +and when the ships first cast anchor, it +was their <i>Ramadam</i>, which answers to our Lent, +when all sports and pastimes are suspended; on +this account the Raja made an apology for not +entertaining the Captain with the usual diversions +of the country. The wet season too came +on, which caused a general suspension of all +out-door business. +</p> +<p> +During the month of August the weather became +tempestuous, and the rains excessive. The +river swelled and overflowed its banks; and it +was with the utmost difficulty the ships were +prevented from driving on the main land, or +into the open sea; for trees of vast magnitude +came floating down with the torrent, and frequently +pressed against their bows with such +weight, that they were in continual fear lest +their cables should give way. During the time +of these inundations the city stands, as it were, +in a pond, and there is no communication between +house and house till the floods abate. It +was probably this circumstance that suggested to +them the manner of constructing their houses. +They are all built upon posts from 12 to 20 +feet high. These posts are larger or smaller +according to the height or magnitude of the +superstructure. The Sultan’s palace has but +<span class='pagenum'>375</span>one floor, on which, however, there are many +rooms, to which they ascend by stairs from the +street. It stands upon 180 posts, and is twenty +feet above the level of the ground. The ordinary +houses are also of one floor, and ascended +by ladders. The roofs are all covered with palmeto +leaves. The area beneath their houses is +usually fenced in, and there the poorer sort keep +their poultry; and there also is received the +common draught of their sculleries; and, were +it not for the frequent inundations that carry +off the soil, the nastiness of the meaner people +would render living in Mindanao impossible: +but every crevice is scoured clean by the violence +of the currents, which frequently overset +the houses; though the posts on which they +stand are sunk deep in the ground. +</p> +<p> +The inhabitants of Mindanao are, like all the +Eastern people, very clean in their persons; they +constantly bathe every day once, and sometimes +oftener; they wash after every meal: and, if they +happen to touch by accident any unclean thing, +they have their times of purification allotted, +before the expiration of which they are not permitted +to leave their chambers. Swine are held +with them in abomination, and though they run +wild in the woods, yet they are never eaten. The +chief food of the people is rice, sago, plantains, +bread-fruit, cocoa-nuts, and other nutritious +fruits; among the better sort, fowls and beef +are used rather by way of relish, than as solid +<span class='pagenum'>376</span>subsistance; for they are boiled to rags in their +strange messes. +</p> +<p> +The Mindaneians are of low stature, small +limbs, straight bodies, little heads, and are of +a brown copper-colour. The women are fairer +than the men, and their hair is black and long, +and generally well dressed. Their visage too is +rounder, and better featured than that of the +men; only their noses are small, and so flat between +their eyes that the rising is scarce discernible. +At a distance they look tolerable, but +on a nearer approach these imperfections are rather +disgusting. Their dress consists of a petticoat +and a loose jacket. The sleeves of the +jacket are long and wide at the shoulders, but +sloping down to their wrists, where they are so +tight that it is with difficulty they get their +hands through in putting them on. They then +rise in folds about the arm, and in that lies their +pride. The better sort of people wear fine callico +or silks; the meaner sort, an ordinary cloth +made of the plantain-tree, which they call saggen. +The women, in general, (as has been noted) +love the company of strangers, especially of +white men; and Dampier adds, that the men +belonging to the ships could scarce walk the +streets without being pulled into their houses. +</p> +<p> +The chief artists among them are goldsmiths, +ship-builders, carpenters, and smiths; all of +whom are excellent in their way, allowing for +the badness of their tools. Dampier gives a +description of their smith’s bellows, which is +<span class='pagenum'>377</span>simple and ingenious. It is composed of two +hollow cylinders, like the large wooden pipes +used by us for the conveyance of water; they +are cut flat at both ends, in length about four +feet, and placed upright at the distance of two +feet from each other upon a stone hearth before +the fire. Within two inches of the bottom of +each a pipe is placed, projecting like a cock towards +the fire, but bending so as that the pipes +from both cylinders meet and terminate in one +before they reach it. Thus constructed, and fixed +firm, a man with two light brushes made of feathers, +which he works alternately like two pistons, +keeps up a continual blast; and with this simple +contrivance, without either vice or anvil, other +than a large stone or the butt-end of an old cannon, +they fabricate their work to admiration. +Their carpenters have neither saws nor planes, +and yet they split and smooth their boards with +great neatness. This requires time, but their +work is the more durable for it, because the +grain being unbroken the timber remains the +tougher. +</p> +<p> +In Mindanao there is only one mosque, or +place of worship, and that but little frequented +by the meaner people. In this mosque they +have a contrivance for striking the time. A +drum of vast dimensions, shaped in form of a +bell, is placed over a large hollow cavity, the +head of which drum is covered with brass, and +called a gong. A certain number of men are +appointed to attend this gong, who relieve each +<span class='pagenum'>378</span>other alternately night and day, and with a stick +as large as a man’s arm, with a ball at the end of +it, at certain intervals, they strike the gong, the +sound of which is heard from one extremity of +the town to the other, and supplies the place of +a clock. +</p> +<p> +The Mindaneians use circumcision, and that +operation is performed with great ceremony. +The usual time among the common people is +about the age of twelve; but the Princes of the +blood are circumcised, like the Jews, at the end +of eight days. On this occasion, the warriors +all appear in arms, and, like Europeans at a review, +make a sham-fight, for the diversion of the +spectators, in which both the Sultan and his +General are principal performers. +</p> +<p> +When the waters were subsided, and the Ramadam +over, Raja Laut, the Sultan’s brother, and +General of his forces, to entertain Captain Swan, +assembled the dancers, who are women bred from +their infancy, like those in Europe, to that art. +On this occasion, more than 50 of them were +assembled, who, being ranged in a ring, danced +to their own music. In these dances their feet +and legs are but little employed. Having no +other than vocal music, they sing at first solo parts +in slow time; but their chorusses are brisk; and +then their hands, arms, heads, and bodies, are +all employed in such contortions, that one would +think they were made without bones. +</p> +<p> +Dancing and processions were the favourite +diversions among the Chiefs of this island; and, +<span class='pagenum'>379</span>Captain Swan, in conformity to the prevailing +taste, resolving to give an English entertainment, +ordered his music ashore, and such of his men +as could dance were likewise ordered to attend. +Accordingly, having hired a convenient house, +he invited the Sultan, and Chiefs of the place, +with their women, to be spectators of the splendor +of the European dances. He had caused +the house to be hung round with the richest silks, +of which he had store on board and decorated +it with gold and silver-lace, which, when illuminated +with a profusion of wax-candles, made a +most brilliant appearance. When the company +assembled, they were struck with amazement, +and thought all they beheld was the effect of enchantment. +Among the dancers, there was one +Jack Thacker, a common sailor, who at the +music-houses at Wapping had learned to dance +a horn-pipe. This man attracted the notice of +the Mindaneians more than all the rest, because +more in the antic manner to which they were +accustomed. Him, therefore, they fixed their +eyes upon, and considered as a man of consequence. +When they had spent the best part of +the night in feasting their eyes and their appetites +(for Captain Swan had ordered his cook +to prepare a cold collation of sweet-meats, and +other savoury dishes), they were still unwilling +to retire; and it was almost day-break before +the Sultan retired, and, very unwillingly, was +accompanied by his female train. Raja Laut +and his women staid longer; and, it is said, notwithstanding +<span class='pagenum'>380</span>his devotion to his prophet, drank +plentifully of wine. +</p> +<p> +Nothing was talked of so much among the +Mindaneians, during the stay of the ships, as the +comic English dancer, of whom Raja Laut was +willing to know the history; and, having enquired, +was told by one of his companions, that +he was an English nobleman who travelled for +his diversion, and that all those who wore fine +cloaths were gentlemen of inferior quality, who +left their own country out of curiosity to see the +countries abroad. +</p> +<p> +This harmless imposition, being told by the +General to Captain Swan, who was of a morose +unsociable disposition, cost the poor fellow a +hearty drubbing, though he was wholly ignorant +of what had been told. He was first stript of +his fine cloaths, in the presence of the Raja, by +his Captain’s orders, and then stript of his nobility +by flogging his back. It was not long, +however, before the man was revenged. +</p> +<p> +About the middle of November they began to +prepare for their departure, and for that purpose +their first business was to examine the ships bottoms, +the sheathing of which they found eaten +by the worm like a honey-comb; and the bottom +of the bark not being sheathed, was eaten to +the timbers, and the vessel thereby rendered unserviceable: +application was therefore made to +the Raja for planks to new sheathe the ship. +The Raja’s sincerity was never suspected, till this +incident gave reason for jealousy. When he +<span class='pagenum'>381</span>came down to the river, and saw the carpenters +ripping off the sheathing, he shook his head, +and seemed much disconcerted, declaring he +had never before seen a ship with two bottoms. +His hope was, that the ship, like the bark, would +have been eaten through, and that he should +have had all her guns. A like accident had formerly +entitled him to a like advantage, when a +Dutch ship, by anchoring in the same river during +the westerly monsoon, was entirely disabled, +and never again put to sea. He was sensible +enough of the mischief that would infallibly ensue +to the ships by lying so long among those +destructive vermin; for, whenever the natives +disuse their vessels, they haul them up on the +dry beach, burn their bottoms, and there let +them lie, till they want again to use them. +</p> +<p> +While some were employed in ripping off the +old worm-eaten planks, others were busy in preparing +new and, by the beginning of December, +the sheathing was repaired and tallowed. +The latter part of the month was taken up in +putting the ballast, stores, and guns aboard: +this was a work of the greater labour, as it was +first necessary to carry the ship out to sea before +it was undertaken. About the beginning of +January they began to fill water, and to take in +rice; and application was made to Raja Laut to +furnish buffaloes, as he had all along promised +to do. He now began to form excuses, and +pretended to take men out every day a-hunting +(for those creatures always run wild); but always +<span class='pagenum'>382</span>came home empty, and pleaded ill success. +The Captain too began to act very mysteriously. +By the help of the government on shore, he had +got the absolute ascendancy over his men, and +was as implicitly obeyed as if he had been Captain +of a king’s ship. When he was importuned +to declare when he intended to sail, he chose to +be silent; and when the men wanted to know +upon what enterprize they were next to be employed, +he reproached them with their eagerness +for piracy. He had sold Raja Laut some tons +of iron and lead, and was to have had in return +rice and beef; as to the first, the Raja had failed in +furnishing the stipulated quantity, and the latter +he had hitherto in no shape fulfilled. The Raja +had besides borrowed of him 20 ounces of gold; +and, when he required payment, the Raja demanded +a much larger sum for his own board, +and the board of his men. This treatment, and +these disappointments, served to discompose a +mind naturally sour, and to put him out of +humour with every body about him. +</p> +<p> +All this while the westerly monsoon was wasting +that was to carry them on to India. The +men began again to murmur, and grow unruly: +some, weary of rambling about, and who had +formed connections with the natives, were for +staying at Mindanao: some, who had husbanded +their money, of whom indeed there were but +few, were eager to get home; and others, who +were poor (by far the majority), were for continuing +their ravages, and were impatient to be +in action. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>383</span>While matters were in this situation, strong +representations were made to the Captain to +come on board, and to declare himself; and, +after many delays, a day was at length fixed for +a determination. +</p> +<p> +In the mean time, those who were bent on returning +home, foreseeing that continued extravagancies +would necessarily create new wants, +and that new wants would require new means +of supply, took occasion secretly to purchase a +canoe, and formed a design to depart in the +night for Borneo, where, by a letter just received +from thence by a Mindaneian vessel, they +hoped to meet with an English factory, and +from thence find a passage home; but Captain +Swan getting intelligence of their design, seized +their canoe, and threatened to punish for deserters +all those concerned in the plot. +</p> +<p> +Another party about the same time, hearing +that the ship was about to sail, retired into the +country, to conceal themselves till after her +departure. +</p> +<p> +The party on board, who had nothing but the +ship’s allowance to subsist on, became unruly, +and sent ashore to the merchants iron to sell for +arrack and honey, with which they made themselves +drunk, and grew quarrelsome. All these +disorders, Dampier says, might easily have been +redressed, had Captain Swan exerted his authority +in time, and established proper discipline on +board the ship; but he living with his merchants +constantly on shore, and leaving every +<span class='pagenum'>384</span>one to do as he pleased on board, they encouraged +one another in their villainies, and at +length grew mutinous. +</p> +<p> +When these things were come to extremity, +he gave orders that the whole crew should attend +him on board the ship, on the 13th of January +[1687]; but, unluckily for him, two days before +this meeting was to take place, Captain Swan +sent his gunner to fetch something he had occasion +for out of the locker of his cabin. This +man, in rummaging for what he wanted, among +other things happened to take out the Captain’s +journal, which, being laid carelesly by, was +taken up by one John Read, (an ingenious +young man, who likewise kept a journal) out of +mere curiosity to peep in it, to see how nearly +his and the other agreed. +</p> +<p> +At the first opening of the book he cast his +eye on a part in which the Captain had made a +memorandum of the mutinous behaviour of his +men in their passage from Cape Corientes to +Guam, and had particularly noted that of one +John Read, a Jamaica-man, a namesake of +the Read who took the journal, but no relation. +This naturally excited his curiosity to look farther, +and he found means, while the gunner +was busy, to convey the journal away to examine +it at his leisure. As soon as the gunner +was gone ashore, John Read, the artist, shewed +the book to John Read, the Jamaica-man, and +both of them held a consultation with their +comrades on the contents. These men, who +<span class='pagenum'>385</span>were before ripe for mischief, now grew outrageous, +and it was unanimously agreed to consult +Captain Teat, who, as has been before +noted, had received unworthy treatment from +Captain Swan on shore, which, they knew, he +only wanted an opportunity to resent. Teat +left nothing unsaid to aggravate the failings of +his superior, and to incense the company against +him. He represented him as proud, ignorant, +avaricious, cruel, and vindictive, and withal +cowardly and unfit to command upon any bold +and manly enterprize; called to their minds the +opposition he made to the attacking the Manilla +ship off Guam, by the conquest of which they +would all have been enriched; and which, he +said, Swan did not oppose out of a principle of +honesty or gratitude, but from the fear of engaging +a ship so much superior to his own +in weight of metal and in numbers, though he, +Teat, would have pawned his head to have been +master of her in a few hours close attack. Men +whose expectations have been raised to an unreasonable +pitch, give easy credit to unfavourable +suggestions against the authors of their disappointment. +The crew took fire, and instantly +bound themselves by an oath to deprive Captain +Swan of the command, without naming any officer +to substitute in his room; nay, so precipitate +was their resolution, that the majority were for setting +sail immediately, and leaving all that were +on shore behind: and this hasty resolve would +certainly have taken place, had either of the +<span class='pagenum'>386</span>surgeons been on board; but, as their cry was +for war, it was judged too desperate to go to +sea without one skilful person on board to assist +the wounded. +</p> +<p> +As all this passed in the night, it was agreed +to stay till morning, and then to send a trusty +messenger on shore, speedily to request the surgeons +to come to the assistance of a man who +had broken his leg. The chief surgeon said he +should see the man the next day, and in the mean +time sent his mate, Mr. Herman Coppinger, to +his immediate relief. This man, a few days before, +was sleeping at his mistress’s, when a snake +twisted itself round his neck, but quietly went +away upon his waking without hurting him. +Coppinger, supposing the accident real, made +haste to pack up his moveables to go on +board; and, as the Captain was to have his general +rendezvous the next day, Dampier took +the opportunity of going with him. They +scarce had mounted the ship’s side before they +discovered the trick. But when the mutineers were +thus in possession of the surgeon, they presently +dispatched the canoe to shore again to invite all +the men who chose it to come on board, but +with a strict caution not to tell the reason, lest +their design should reach the ears of their captain. +</p> +<p> +The 13th in the morning they weighed, and +fired a gun. The Captain, much alarmed, immediately +dispatched Mr. Nelly, his mate, to +know the cause. To him they told their grievances, +<span class='pagenum'>387</span>and shewed the journal; he persuaded +them to stay till next day to hear what the Captain +and merchants had to say. They did so, +and Mr. Harthop came on board in the morning. +He advised them to a reconciliation, and +to take more rice on board. They were deaf to +his persuasion; yet at his entreaty they staid till +two in the afternoon to wait for the Captain +and such gentlemen or seamen as chose to accompany +them, but suffered none to go ashore, +except Mr. Harthop and a man with a wooden +leg. Dampier remarks, that, if Captain Swan +had then come on board, as a man of sense and +spirit ought to have done, he might at the very +last have crusht their designs, and reduced the +mutineers to order and discipline; but being of +a sullen, suspicious, vindictive temper himself, he +dreaded the resentment of those he had marked +for vengeance; and therefore suffered the time to +elapse, and was with 36 others left behind in +the town. Besides these, six or eight had deserted +and were up the country; and sixteen had +died of poison, given them, as was supposed, +by the husbands of those women whom they had +seduced; and there were others on board, who +had received the poison, and died of it some +months after. In this manner their numbers +were considerably diminished, and of 150 who +sailed from Cape Corientes, not above 80 were +now on board. +</p> +<p> +It has been more than once hinted, that Captain +Swan sailed from London with no design of +<span class='pagenum'>388</span>privateering, but of carrying on trade with the +Spaniards on the western coasts of America. He +had therefore a great quantity of heavy goods, +such as iron and lead, not yet disposed of, some +of which he had sold to Raja Laut, and no doubt +was willing to have received the payment before +he departed. This may, in some measure, account +for his delay. His crew was composed of +men, who, most of them, had forced themselves +upon him for purposes which he abhorred; and, +perhaps, he wanted to have rid himself of the +greatest part of them, if he could have found a +proper opportunity. Those marked in his journal +were, no doubt, the men most obnoxious to +him, and the most averse to trade, which he was +determined to follow in his way home, having +already 5000l. of his owners money, which he +had received for the goods put up by auction +at his first commencing buccaneer; with this he +purposed to have purchased a cargo to take with +him from the East-Indies. Hence arose his mysterious +conduct, and his want of resolution. The +loss of his bark was his embarrassment. Could +that have been rendered serviceable, his design +could more easily have been carried into execution. +The suspicious part of the crew might +have been shipped on board the bark; and by +giving them a wrong track, they might have +been deserted in the night, and left to their own +course. But a discovery being made before the +Captain’s designs were ripe for execution, he +was entangled in his own net. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>389</span>But to return: On the 14th of January, 1687, +at three o’clock in the afternoon, they set sail +from the river Mindanao, and next day came +a-breast of Chambango, where formerly the Spaniards +had a settlement, and where, it is said, +there were plenty of swine and buffaloes. On +the 17th, they anchored in a good bay on the +west side of a small island, where they chose their +Officers, constituting John Read the Jamaica-man +Captain, Thomas Teat Master, and Henry +More Quarter-master; and, having cut some +curious short-jointed canes, and plentifully supplied +the ship with water from a clear spring, they +pursued their course; but on their passage they +struck on a rock, where after lying two hours, +they were heaved off by the rising of the tide, +and escaped with the loss only of a large piece +of their rudder, though in more danger than +ever they had experienced in the whole voyage. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th, they anchored at the north-west +end of the island of Mindera, in 10 fathom water. +While they lay there a canoe with four Indians +from Manilla came along side, who informed +them, that at Manilla there was seldom +less than 20 or 30 sail of ships of different nations, +who came to traffic with the Spanish merchants; +and that, if they meant to trade, they might for a +trifle have a letter of recommendation from a +friar to whom they were carrying dispatches, and +would in a few days return with his answer. +Trade, however, was no part of their employment; +and the Indians were suffered to pass +without molestation. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>390</span>On the 23d, they reached Luconia, the island +so ardently wished for by this piratical crew, and +presently descried a sail, which they instantly pursued +and took. She proved a Spanish bark from +Pangassanam, laden with rice and cotton-cloth, +and bound for Manilla. The master of this prize +was boatswain to the Acapulco ship that passed +by Guam; this man gave Dampier an account of +all that happened on that occasion. The time +of the year being too far spent to effect any thing +of consequence on this coast, they concluded to +sail for Pulo Condore, and there wait till the latter +end of May, about which time the Acapulco +ship generally arrives at Manilla. With this resolution +they quitted Luconia on the 26th of +February; and, on the 14th of March, cast anchor +at the island of Condore, on the coast of +Cambodia. Among the productions of these +islands (for there is a cluster of them), there is a +lofty tree, the body of which is in diameter three +or four feet, from which the inhabitants extract +a clammy juice, which being boiled becomes a +perfect tar, and answers all the purposes of that +balsam. On the 16th, they entered a convenient +harbour, and employed themselves in careening +their ships, in which they were assisted by +the natives of the island, who brought them hogs +and turtle in exchange for rice, of which they +had now great plenty. +</p> +<p> +While they lay in this harbour, two of the +men died who had been poisoned in Mindanao; +they were opened by the surgeon, and their livers +<span class='pagenum'>391</span>were found black, light, and dry, like pieces of +cork. +</p> +<p> +Before they departed, they engaged an old +native who could speak the Malayan language, +to pilot them to Siam, where they expected to +purchase dried fish, having nothing now but rice +to eat at sea. +</p> +<p> +On the 21st of April they sailed from Condore, +and, on the 24th, anchored in the bay of Siam, +where, however, they could get no fish. On the +21st of May they left Siam and, in their return +to Pulo Condore, overtook a Chinese junk, laden +with pepper, who told them that the English +were settled on the island of Sumatra, at a place +called Sillebar, which was the first intelligence +they received of that factory. This junk accompanied +them to Pulo Condore, where Captain +Read, observing a Malayan vessel at anchor +within shore, sent a canoe to learn from whence +they came; but, knowing the Malayans to be +desperate fellows, cautioned his men not to trust +themselves on board, but to hail them from the +boat: but the men, not regarding the Captain’s +instructions, went on board armed; which the +Malayans observing, fell upon them unawares +with their short daggers, and stabbed five or six +of them dead upon the spot; the rest jumped +into the sea, and saved themselves by swimming, +among whom was one Daniel Wallis, who +never could swim before or since, but in his +fright made shift to reach the boat, and made +his escape with the rest. Here Herman Coppinger, +<span class='pagenum'>392</span>the surgeon, went on shore, on purpose to +leave this diabolical company; but Read sent +an armed force, and pressed him on board again. +Dampier intended following his example, but +waited a more convenient place. +</p> +<p> +They were now confined at this island by +stormy weather till the 4th of June; and in the +mean time a Malayan Portuguese from the junk +entered on board, whom they entertained as an +interpreter, to facilitate an intercourse with the natives. +When they weighed anchor, the wind was +contrary; yet they kept plying to the westward in +hopes of its shifting to carry them to Manilla, +before their much longed-for prize should arrive. +In this hope they continued labouring incessantly +for 10 days; when, being almost worn out with +fatigue, and finding no probability of accomplishing +their desires, they relinquished that project +in despair, and, instead of it, stood away for +Prata, in lat. 20 deg. 40 min. N. where they flattered +themselves with fishing up much treasure +from the China ships that had been cast away on +that island, some of which were said to contain +immense riches. But in this too they were disappointed +by adverse winds; and, notwithstanding +the utmost exertion of their skill in seamanship, +they were driven by the violence of the +gale to the island of St. John, on the coast of +China. While they lay at this island they visited +the shore every day, and purchased hogs, +fowls, and buffaloes. Some of the men visited +the continent, but found nothing there that answered +their purpose. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>393</span>On the 3d of July they weighed anchor with +a gentle breeze, but on the 4th there came on a +violent gale from the north-east, which increased +till the dead of the night, when the rain began to +pour down in such torrents that the fountains of +heaven seemed to be opened, and a second deluge +threatened; at the same time the thunder +began to crack, and the flashes of lightning that +pierced through the torrents of rain, appeared +upon the face of the deep as if the sea was overspread +with a blue flame. The darkness that +succeeded between the flashes presented the most +horrid gloom that ever covered the deep. The +sea was raised to an astonishing height, and the +waves broke short upon the ship with such violence, +that it was thought every succeeding billow +must have dashed her to the bottom. One +sea struck away the rails of the head, and at the +same time dislodged the sheet-anchor that was +lashed with its fluke over the bend of the ship +in the strongest manner, and it was every moment +expected to beat a hole through the ship, +by striking against her bows. It then became +necessary to steer right before the wind, to endeavour +to secure the anchor; and it was impossible +afterwards to change the course till the +storm abated. The fury of the storm abated +about four in the morning, about which time +they observed what the sailors call a <i>Corpus Sant</i> +at the mast-head. This meteor is seen at sea, +sometimes at the mast-head, sometimes at the +yard-arm, and sometimes upon the deck. When +<span class='pagenum'>394</span>it appears aloft it is like a star, and is taken for +a good omen; but when below, it resembles a +glow-worm, and always dreaded as a bad sign. +The crew was overjoyed on seeing it at the very +pinnacle of the ship’s fane. +</p> +<p> +From two in the morning till seven they kept +scudding before the wind; but the wind gradually +dying away, and the sea subsiding, they set +their mizzen, brought the ship up upon a wind, +and lay to under their mizzen till eleven, when +for two hours there ensued a perfect calm, yet +the sky looked black and lowring. About one +the wind shifted to the south-west, and began +again to blow hard, with violent rain. They +furled up their mizzen, wore ship, and suffered +her to scud before the wind, as before, till ten at +night, when the wind ceased, and before morning +the sea was calm, and the sky perfectly serene. +This storm, however, dispirited the crew, +who were now driven out of their knowledge, +and were anxious for nothing but a place of shelter +to preserve them from the fury of a second +hurricane, which they had reason to expect towards +the full of the moon. +</p> +<p> +They consulted their sea-charts, and concluded +to steer for the Piscadores, islands situated in +lat. 23 deg. N. of which, however, they knew +nothing but the name. On the 20th of July +they came in sight of them; and when they arrived +were astonished to see so many junks passing +and re-passing as were continually in sight. +They followed some of the largest into a spacious +<span class='pagenum'>395</span>harbour, which brought them to a considerable +town, such as they did not expect to have found +among islands so little known. On their attempting +to land, they were met by a Tartarian +Officer, who demanded, whence they came, of +what nation they were, and whither they were +bound? And being told they were English, and +driven there in distress, they were kindly entertained; +but were told, they must not come on +shore; but whatever necessaries they wanted +should be sent them on board without delay. +Mutual civilities were exchanged. The ship +was supplied with the best provisions they had +ever tasted and the Captain in return sent a +curious Spanish silver-hilted rapier, an English +carbine, and a gold chain, as a present to the +Governor. They staid till the 29th, and then +directed their course to a cluster of islands that +lie between Formosa and Luconia, the place they +still set their hearts upon. On the 6th of August +they came in sight of the islands they were +in pursuit of, and, contrary to expectation, found +them well inhabited. +</p> +<p> +On these islands were plenty of goats and +swine, but very few birds or poultry. It is an +observation of Dampier, founded on reason and +confirmed by experience, that, in countries abounding +in corn and maize, birds and all manner +of fowls are bred in abundance; but in those +islands where the inhabitants subsist chiefly on +fruits, roots, and fish, birds wild and tame are +more rare. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>396</span>As these islands were without names in the +sea-charts, Captain Read called them all by one +general name of Bashee Islands. The situation +of their towns was remarkable. They were built +on precipices inaccessible on every side, except by +ladders placed at the ends of the streets, which +all ran in lines parallel to each other, and on +which the houses rise in ranges one above another, +till they terminate in a single row. The inhabitants +of these islands were acquainted with +the use of iron, and they had amongst them a +yellow metal that very much resembled gold, +for some of which Captain Read exchanged iron; +and Dampier laments that he could purchase +none of it, because he had nothing to bestow in +return. They were very ingenious, had large +fishing-boats, and lived in a peculiar manner +different from any people they had yet visited. +They were not very delicate in their food; for +they would gather up the goats-skins and goats-paunches +which the men threw away; and would +singe, broil, and eat the former; the latter they +would stew (not over nicely cleansed), and, mincing +raw fish very small, would mix the mess together, +and with a little salt over it, make a very +savoury meal. The paunches of the swine they +never touched. They appeared to be very +cleanly in their persons, and withal so honest +and good natured, that they would take nothing +but what was given them; nor were they ever +out of humour with the strangers, though they +had often cause enough, nor with one another. +<span class='pagenum'>397</span>No provocation could incense them to anger; +nor any opportunity induce them to theft. They +brought constantly every morning goats, hogs, +potatoes, and fruits, to the ship, which they exchanged +for iron, nails, old hoops, or bullets. +Thus the crew of the ship fared sumptuously +every day, and salted 70 or 80 hogs for future +use. These islands lie in lat. 20 deg. 21 min. N. +</p> +<p> +Being now sufficiently stored with provisions, +and having filled their casks with water, after +staying from the 13th of August till the 24th of +September, and after having mended their sails, +and scrubbed the ships bottom, they were preparing +to sail, when a violent storm came on, +which forced them to cut their cables and put +to sea, leaving six of their best men on shore. +</p> +<p> +They put before the wind with their bare +poles; but it was the 1st of October before they +could recover to their former station. On the following +day their six men were brought on board +by the natives, whom they rewarded with three +bars of iron, a present to them more valuable +than so many bars of solid gold. The men reported, +that, as soon as the ship was out of sight, +the natives were more kind to them than ever; +that they endeavoured to prevail upon them to +cut their hair short, like theirs; and that they +offered to each the choice of a wife, with a small +hatchet, a set of planter’s tools, and a portion of +land for each of them to cultivate by way of +dowry; and, when the ship came in sight again, +they then importuned them for iron, which was +the only recompense they required. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>398</span>This second storm quite disconcerted all their +measures. They began to think that the winds +and the waves were employed against them, and +were terrified with the thoughts of their unhappy +situation. Most of them were heartily +weary of being tost to and fro to no manner of +purpose, and were very desirous of getting +home: only Read and Teat were determined +to make their fortunes at whatever risque; they +therefore, finding the crew resolute to leave this +dangerous coast, persuaded them to accompany +them to Cape Comorin, where, if they disapproved +of their proceedings, every one should +be at liberty to follow his own course. To this +they all agreed; but these freebooters, fearing +to meet English or Dutch ships in the direct +road, proposed to coast along the east side of the +Philippines, and so, keeping south towards the +spice islands, to pass into the Indian ocean near +the island of Timor. With this view they let sail +on the 3d of October, 1687; and leaving the +island of Luconia on the west, “with all our +golden projects,” says Dampier, “along +with it, we stood to the southward till we +came in sight of the island St. John on the +coast of Mindanao, and on the 16th came to +an anchor on the south-east side of that island.” +While they lay in this bay, the young prince of +Meangis, formerly mentioned, came on board, and +importuned Captain Read to transport him and his +men back to his own island, promising to reward +him handsomely for his trouble. He said, that +<span class='pagenum'>399</span>a few days before he had seen Captain Swan +and some of his people all well at the city of +Mindanao; that they had accompanied Raja +Laut in a military expedition against his enemies, +and had acquired great honour and were +in high favour with the Sultan; that Captain +Swan was preparing to leave the island; and +that he had offered 40 ounces of gold for a +ship to carry him off, but did not think the +Raja would suffer him to depart. Captain Read +promised to stay for the prince three days, and +in that time he engaged to return with his men. +In the mean time Dampier took occasion to +sound how the crew stood affected towards their +old Captain, and found one party, who happened +to be filling water ashore, very well inclined; +and he desired them to be silent till he had consulted +the other party whose turn it was next day +to fill water at the same place; but one of the +company, who appeared to be the most zealous +in Swan’s favour, as soon as he got aboard discovered +the secret; on which Read and Teat +ordered all hands on board and weighed directly. +</p> +<p> +Dampier says he was afterwards informed, +that Captain Swan and his men continued long +at Mindanao; that Messieurs Harthop and +Smith, merchants, both died there; that Rofy +and Nelly, his mates, got passage in a Dutch +ship to Batavia, and from thence, after various +adventures, to Europe; and that Swan +himself, with his surgeon, endeavouring to get on +<span class='pagenum'>400</span>board another Dutch ship, were run down and +drowned by the natives by order of Raja Laut, +who seized their gold. Among other reasons +assigned for this treachery, Dampier mentions +Swan’s threatening, on some provocation, to +raise a band of men to destroy the town, and +seize upon the country. Be this as it may, the +poor Captain lost his life, and the Raja kept his +money. Part of his journal, as far as Cape +Corientes, was recovered and preserved by a Mr. +Moody, of whom mention will be made hereafter. +</p> +<p> +On November the 2d, the day the prince +was to have come on board, Captain Read set +sail, and stood to the west, till on the 9th, the +wind changing, they came up with the north-east +end of the island of Celebes, in lat. 3 deg. N. +30 leagues to the southward of Gilolo, on the +western side of which lie the clove islands of +Tidore and Ternate, the finest in the world. +At the southermost end of Celebes the town of +Macasser is seated, the chief place of trade in +those parts belonging to the Dutch. +</p> +<p> +They anchored in a sandy bay on the south-east +side of Celebes, where they found a creeping +kind of vine, the leaves of which pounded and +boiled with hog’s-lard is an infallible cure for +old ulcers. The men, knowing its virtues, +crammed their chests with it; and one man, +whose legs were ulcerated, was perfectly cured +by the use of it. +</p> +<p> +Here they cut down a tree 18 feet in circumference, +<span class='pagenum'>401</span>and 44 feet in clean body. It proved +unsound, and therefore unfit for the purpose +they intended it, which was that of a canoe; +they therefore left it, and set sail. +</p> +<p> +On the 30th, they sailed south; and in the +afternoon they had a violent tornado, and saw a +spout. This phenomenon appears at first like a +small ragged cloud, hanging sloping from a +black heavy cloud above, small at the bottom, +seemingly no bigger than a man’s arm. Underneath +this the sea begins to be in gentle agitation, +and gradually proceeds to foam and +froth till a violent whirling ensues, and then +it flies upwards in a pillar, the base of which +may be about one hundred paces in compass, +but lessening gradually till it decreases +to the size of the spout, with which it meets, +and through which the rising sea-water seems to +be conveyed to increase the cloud. As soon as +the water reaches the spout, you then see the +cloud, that was at rest before, drive along with +incredible swiftness, sucking up the water in its +course, and causing a furious wind to fly before +it. Thus it will continue sometimes half an +hour, sometimes longer, till breaking off, all the +water that remains below the spout falls down +again into the sea, with a dreadful noise and +violent agitation of the waves. Dampier relates, +that one Captain Records, of London, being on +the coast of Guinea, in the year 1674, in a ship +of 300 tons, was overtaken by one of these +spouts, which broke before he could well furl +his sails to receive it. On its breaking, it made +<span class='pagenum'>402</span>the same kind of noise as if a castle or some immense +building had been plunged from a great +height into the sea, and raised the billows in +proportion to its height. The fury of the wind, +at the same time, took the ship on the starboard +bow, and snapt off the boltsprit and foremast +both at once like rotten sticks, and drove the +ship along ready to overset her; but the ship +presently righting, and the wind whirling +round, took her again on the opposite quarter, +and snapt the mizzen-mast as the fore-mast and +boltsprit had been snapt before. Three men +were in the fore-top when the fore-mast broke, +and one on the boltsprit, when they fell into the +sea; but all were saved, and the ship with difficulty +carried into port. +</p> +<p> +December 1st, they continued to move slowly +along, and on the 4th they came up with +the north-west end of the island of Bouton, +where their strikers killed some turtle, and +brought with them an Indian who conducted +them to a harbour, where they had an interview +with the Sultan, and where they were permitted +to purchase whatever they wanted, and where +Captain Read was presented by the Sovereign +with a little boy who had a double set of teeth, +one set within another, on each jaw. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th, they took leave of the Sultan, +and were about weighing anchor; but when they +expected it to rise, being hooked to a rock, the +cable came home without it. As soon as they +were loose, finding the anchor irrecoverable, +they steered to the south-east, and fell in with +<span class='pagenum'>403</span>some islands five or six leagues from Callasusung +harbour. They appeared very green; and as +they passed them in the night they heard drums +beating, but whether for mirth, or spreading +an alarm, they knew not. +</p> +<p> +On the 20th, they passed the island of Omba, +and saw in it many smoaks by day, and fires by +night, but observed no inhabitants. From Omba +they passed by Timor, where, meeting with +tornados and strong gales of wind, they endeavoured +to get clear of the shoals, and stood off +south, intending to touch at New Holland to +try what that country would afford. +</p> +<p> +On the 4th of January, 1688, they fell in +with the coast of New Holland in lat. 16 deg. +50 min. S. and, steering close in, came to a +point from whence the land trends east and +southerly for 10 or 12 leagues, but how far +southerly Dampier says he does not know. That +able navigator, however, pronounced, that, if it +was not a continent, it neither joined to Asia, +Africa, nor America. They fell in upon the +west side, and examined but a small part of this +vast tract of land, of which Captain Cook, in +his late voyage round the world in the Endeavour, +traversed the eastern coast for near 2000 +miles, and has left it still doubtful whether it is +island or continent. There is a remarkable difference +between Dampier’s description of the +part he visited on the west, and that described +by Captain Cook in the same latitude on the +east side. “The land,” says Dampier, “is of +a dry sandy soil, destitute of water, except +<span class='pagenum'>404</span>you make wells. There are divers sorts of +trees; but the woods are not thick, nor the +trees large. Most of them were dragon-trees, +of the size of apple-trees⁠—we compared the +gum with the gum-dragon we had aboard, +and found it the same⁠—we saw no trees that +bore fruit. We saw no animal, nor any track +of animal but one, and that was of a beast of +the size of a mastiff-dog⁠—few land-birds, and +none bigger than a blackbird⁠—few sea-fowls⁠—few +fish, turtle and manatee excepted. The inhabitants +are the most miserable people in the +world⁠—without houses⁠—without cloathing⁠—without +conveniences of any kind⁠—and, setting +aside their human shape, very little different +from brutes. They are tall, straight bodied, +thin, and small limbs; they have great heads, +round fore-heads, and large brows. Their eyelids +are always half-closed; they have great +bottle-noses, full lips, wide mouths, and the two +fore-teeth in the upper jaw wanting in all of +them; but whether they draw them out or not, +I know not. [Captain Cook says, those on the +opposite side have their teeth entire.] They +are long-visaged⁠—without beards⁠—of an unpleasing +aspect, with no one graceful feature +in their faces⁠—their hair black, short, and +curled like negroes⁠—and their colour coal-black. +They live in companies, 20 or 30 +men, women, and children, together⁠—their +food is fish, and their manner of catching them +is in weirs across little inlets of the sea, in which +every tide leaves some⁠—they have no instruments +<span class='pagenum'>405</span>to take great fish⁠—in other places they +fish for cockles, muscles, periwinkles, but of +these there are but few⁠—of what they catch +all partake alike⁠—all watch the tides⁠—for all +depend upon the sea for their support; the +earth producing neither herb, root, pulse, or +any sort of grain. These poor creatures, adds +Dampier, have a sort of weapons, consisting +of a piece of wood shaped somewhat like a +cutlass, and a long straight pole with a sharp +end hardened in the fire: with these they +made a shew of frightening us; but on firing +one gun, they all ran away frighted.” +</p> +<p> +Such is the description given by Dampier of +the people of the north part of New Holland; +and it is not a little astonishing, that a man, by +once touching upon their coast, could so minutely +describe a people with whom he could no +otherwise converse but by signs and gestures. +The crew made an acquaintance with some of +them, and gave them meat, which they readily +devoured, but paid no regard to the ship, nor +did they seem to admire any thing that was +shewn or offered to them. While the ship remained +here, where nothing was to be gotten, +Dampier endeavoured to persuade the men to +carry her to some English factory; but that +too being told the Commanders, he was threatened +to be set ashore, and left among these miserable +beings. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th of March they quitted New Holland, +with a view to sail to the isle of Cocos, in +<span class='pagenum'>406</span>lat. 12 deg. 12 min. S. but the wind being contrary, +they chose to bear away to the islands on +the west of Sumatra, with which Dampier says +he was well pleased, as he then might have an +opportunity of making his escape from them. +They met with nothing worth notice till the +28th, when they fell in with a woody island, +where they killed boobies and men-of-war birds +as many as the ship’s company could eat, and +where they found a land animal resembling a +large crab without its great claws, such as Sir +Francis Drake met with in the island of Ternate, +and which being dressed was excellent meat. +These creatures burrow in the ground like +rabbits, and two of them were as much as a +man could eat. +</p> +<p> +They made but a short stay at this island; +and, proceeding on their course, on the 7th of +April they came in sight of the high land of +Sumatra; and on the 13th they came to a small +island called Triste, 14 or 15 leagues to the west +of Sumatra, where they loaded their boats with +cocoa-nuts, and struck some turtle to supply their +table, having now nothing but rice to live upon. +</p> +<p> +They continued cruising among the islands +to the west of Sumatra; and, on the 29th, they +came in sight of a sail, to which they gave chace, +and on the 30th they took her. She proved a +proa, with four men belonging to Achin, laden +with cocoa-nuts and cocoa-nut oil. They took +out of her as much as they thought fit, bored a +hole in her bottom, and sunk her, keeping the +<span class='pagenum'>407</span>four men prisoners. All this coast is known to +the English by the name of the West-coast, +without adding the name of Sumatra; and the +prisoners shewed the channels and openings to +the island of Achin, where the English had a +factory, to which many on board wished to find +a passage. +</p> +<p> +The 4th of May they came in sight of one of +the Nicobar islands, the southernmost of which +lies about 40 leagues to the N. N. W. of Sumatra. +The inhabitants of these islands are independent +of every other people, and trade with the ships +of every nation indifferently that happen to +touch upon their coast. Their chief commodities +are ambergrease and fruits, the former of +which they adulterate abominably; and Captain +Welden, who touched at these islands a few +weeks before their arrival, purchased some at a +low price that was worth nothing. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th of May they anchored at the +N. W. end of the island of Nicobar, properly so +called, in lat. 7 deg. 30 min. N. Here Dampier +quitted the free-booters, but not without +some difficulty. He knew it was impossible to +do it by stealth; and therefore asked Captain +Read, as soon as he learned that the ship was +about to sail, to set him on shore on this island. +He says, he had another motive for staying at +this particular place, besides that of leaving Captain +Read, which he always intended, and that +was, that he had here a prospect of commencing a +profitable trade for ambergrease with these people, +<span class='pagenum'>408</span>and of gaining a considerable fortune to himself; +for, by rowing with the natives, and conforming +to their customs and manner of living, he imagined +he should be able to learn how they got +their ambergrease, and likewise the whole secret +of preparing it. Captain Read, thinking this +as obscure a place as any, and being willing, no +doubt, to be rid of a man who was for ever exciting +the company to oppose him, very readily +consented; and Dampier as readily took him at +his word. In an instant he got all his moveables +together, and stowing them in the ship’s canoe, +he prevailed upon some of the people to row him +ashore, and to land him on a sandy bay, near to +which were two houses, but without inhabitants. +He had not been landed an hour before Captain +Teat and three or four armed men came to fetch +him on board again. He tells us, that if a cabbin-boy +had been sent for him he should have returned; +but he no sooner entered the ship than he +found the whole crew in an uproar, several others, +encouraged by his example, insisting to be set +ashore likewise, among whom was Herman Coppinger, +the surgeon, who having jumped into +the boat with a gun in his hand, swore he would +shoot dead the first man that opposed him; yet +John Oliver, the quarter-master, leapt into the +canoe to him, and wrenched the gun from him: +he was presently followed by others, who forced +Coppinger again on board. When this tumult +was appeased, and the surgeon again in their possession, +they suffered Dampier, with two other +<span class='pagenum'>409</span>malcontents (a Mr. Hall, and a sailor named +Ambrose), to depart quietly; and the man who +rowed them on shore, having concealed an ax, +gave it them at parting, well knowing what a +valuable present it would be to conciliate them +to the Indians. These three Englishmen were +soon joined by the four prisoners taken from the +Achinese proa, and the mongrel Portuguese, formerly +taken from the Chinese junk, all of whom +Captain Read set on shore before he departed. +They were now eight in number; and, having +concluded to leave the island, and row to Sumatra, +at 40 leagues distance, they purchased a canoe +of the natives for an ax; and, having provided +a sufficient quantity of provisions for their +subsistence, they all embarked on the 20th of +May, in order to proceed; but they had no +sooner put to sea than the canoe overset, and +turned bottom upwards. Being near the shore +they preserved their lives by swimming; but, +though the English recovered their chests and +fire-arms, yet their books and papers were miserably +defaced by the sea-water; their powder +escaped without injury, being sealed up. Though +this accident seemed an unfortunate outset, yet +it proved the means of their future safety; for +while the English were drying their books, and +cleaning their arms, the Achinese employed +themselves in fitting up their boat with out-leaguers, +which are beams placed across the body +of the boat, projecting a yard or two over the +sides, and united at the extremities by transverse +<span class='pagenum'>410</span>boards jointed to the ends; while these remain +entire, the vessel can never over-set. Besides the +out-leaguers the Achinesemen had provided a +good stout mast, and had contrived a sail. And +thus fitted out, on the 15th of May they again +embarked; but their provisions being exhausted, +it was necessary for them to repair to a distant +part of the island, to procure a supply. Here +a misunderstanding arose between them and the +natives, which by the prudent management of +Dampier was soon accommodated. He observes, +that there is not a people upon earth that he +should be afraid to approach unarmed and alone, +provided no previous injury had been done them +by any of his company unprovoked. An European +has it always in his power to insinuate himself +into the favour of the most savage people +by some slight, by shewing them some toy, by +smiles and submission, and even by shewing them +the simple knack of lighting a match with a flint +and steel. The only danger, he adds, is from +their first onset, because their way is to abscond, +and kill by surprize; if therefore their first fury +can be avoided, the fiercest of them becomes +gentle as a lamb. +</p> +<p> +The natives being again brought to good humour, +they were presently furnished with such +provisions as they wanted; and they again embarked +on their former project. At their first +setting out, the wind was fair, and the weather +hot; and they proceeded rowing and sailing as +occasion required, Mr. Hall and Dampier taking +<span class='pagenum'>411</span>it by turns to manage the helm. However, +after two days labour, they found that they had +steered a wrong course; and, instead of approaching +Sumatra, they were but eight leagues from +Nicobar. They then changed their course, but +were still so violently opposed by a contrary current, +that on the third day they had made but +little way. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th the wind freshened, and the sky +began to be clouded. About nine in the morning +they had an alarming presage by a circle +round the sun, which in that climate is an infallible +sign of an approaching storm. They +therefore, after some consultation, concluded to +stand before the wind to whatever land was right +a-head; and for that purpose they furled their +sail, settled the yard about three feet above the +boat’s sides, and in this manner prepared to receive +the storm. About 12 at noon the gale +came on, and the wind continued increasing all +the afternoon. The sea swelled to an incredible +height, and often broke over the little skiff +(hardly so big as a below-bridge wherry, only a +small matter deeper, but not so wide), which, had +it not been for her out-leaguers, could not have +survived a single moment; but the thinness of +her body, and the firmness of her out-leaguers, +were her security; for the stern being high and +narrow, cut the rolling waves like the edge of a +knife, and divided their force; so that what fell +in the skiff came down like a shower, and was +easily baled out by the Achinese. The evening +<span class='pagenum'>412</span>of this day shewed very dreadful. Dampier’s +own words will best describe his feelings: +“The sky looked very black, says he, being +covered with dark clouds; the wind blew +hard, and the sea was already roaring in a +white foam about us; a dark night coming +on, and no land in sight to shelter us; and +our little ark in danger to be swallowed by +every wave; and, what was worst of all, none +of us thought ourselves prepared for another +world. I had been in many imminent dangers +before now, but the worst of them all +was but a play-game in comparison with this. +I must confess that I was in great conflicts of +mind at this time. Other dangers came not +upon me with such a leisurely and dreadful +solemnity; a sudden skirmish or engagement +was nothing when the blood was warm, and +pushed forwards with eager expectations; but +here I had a lingering view of approaching +death, and little or no hopes of escaping it; +and, I must confess, that my courage, that had +hitherto kept up, failed me here; and I made +very sad reflections on my former life, and looked +backward with horror and detestation upon +actions which before I disliked, but now I +trembled at the remembrance of them. I had +long before this repented me of that roving +course of life, but never with such concern as +now. In this temper of mind, submitting +ourselves to God’s good providence, and taking +all the care we could to preserve our lives, +<span class='pagenum'>413</span>Mr. Hall and I took turns to steer, and the +rest took turns to heave out the water; and +thus we provided to spend the most doleful +night I ever was in. About 10 o’clock it +began to thunder, lighten, and rain; but the +rain was welcome to us, having drank up all +the water we brought from the island. The +wind at first blew harder than before; but within +half an hour it became more moderate, and +the sea assuaged of its fury. And then by a +lighted match, of which we kept a piece +burning on purpose, we looked on our compass, +to see how we steered, and found, we +varied but little from our intended course: +and, finding our vessel lively enough with +that small sail which was abroad, we began to +bear up to the true point to which our views +were directed. But about two in the morning +we had another gust of wind, with thunder, +lightning, and rain, which obliged us again to +put before the wind. The hard rain soaked +us so thoroughly that we had not one dry +thread about us, and the cold rain chilled us +extremely; for any fresh-water is much colder +than the sea-water, and much more unwholesome +for man’s body. In this wet, starving +condition, we spent the tedious night. Never +did poor mariners on a lee-shore more earnestly +long for the dawning light than we did. +At length the day appeared; but with such +dark black clouds near the horizon, that the +first glimpse of the dawn appeared dreadful. +<span class='pagenum'>414</span>We continued our course before the wind till +eight in the morning of the 19th, and then +one of our Achinesian friends cried out, <em>Pulo +Way</em>. We, thinking the fellow had said <em>Pull +away</em>, were at a loss to conceive his reason; +but presently observing his motions, we found +he pointed to his companions to shew them +land. We, dropping with wet, cold, and +hungry, were overjoyed at this sight. It bore +south, and the wind was still at west, a strong +gale; yet with our small sail, no bigger than +an apron, we changed our course, and bore +up to it. Here our out-leaguers did us great +service; and, though our boat’s side was +pressed down very much, we could brook it +well enough, and next day we ran to the +mouth of a river in the island of Sumatra, +called Passange Jonca, where all fell ill of fevers, +of which some died; and I that survived +was a whole year before I recovered my +strength.” +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/504.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Dampier & his Companions in their Canoe, overtaken by a dreadfull Storm.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +Here they staid ten or twelve days, and were +kindly entertained, because the Achinese told the +natives, that they were prisoners on board the +pirate as well as themselves, and that they were +all set ashore together. Hall and Dampier were +strongly importuned to stay, to assist in improving +their navigation; but, longing to get home, +they chose to be conveyed to the English factory +at Achin: a vessel was therefore provided +for them, and in three days they arrived safe. +Three days after their arrival, the Portuguese +<span class='pagenum'>415</span>died, and Ambrose lived but a short time after +him. Dampier and Mr. Hall, after passing examination, +were kindly entertained by Mr. Driscal, +an Irish gentleman, interpreter to the factory; +and the four Achinese were restored to +their families and friends. +</p> +<p> +Dampier was so drenched by a Malayan doctor, +that he never expected to survive the effects +of the potions he prescribed; yet after more than +sixty evacuations from one dose, he gathered +strength daily; and, after his health was a little +restored, both Hall and he undertook to sail with +Captain Bowry to Nicobar. This Captain Bowry +was the gentleman who sent the letter from Sumatra +to Mindanao, already spoken of, which +involved a double mistake. Bowry imagined an +English factory to subsist at Mindanao, and the +English at Mindanao, from Bowry’s letter, imagined +there had been an English factory at Sumatra. +They sailed from Achin-road the beginning +of June; but, a storm coming on, they +presently returned. About this time Captain +Welden arrived from Fort St. George; and +Dampier engaged to sail with him to Tonqueen, +in China, and afterwards made a voyage to Malacca. +His next ramble was to Fort St. George, +and, after his return from thence, he came to +Bencouli, an English factory on the west coast of +Sumatra; from whence, about the beginning +of 1691, he set out on his return to England. +</p> +<p> +After his return to Achin from his voyage to +Malacca, he found there one Mr. Morgan, formerly +<span class='pagenum'>416</span>belonging to the Cygnet, who was then +mate of a Danish ship belonging to Tranquebar: +and being curious to know the sequel of the adventures +of his old companions, was told by +Morgan, that, when they left Nicobar, they directed +their course to Ceylon; but, not being able +to weather that island, they were forced to seek +refreshment on the coast of Coromandel, where +they began to form new projects; but their +schemes not succeeding, about half their number +left them, among whom were Morgan and +Coppinger, who both were entertained in the +Danish service, and two or three others repaired +to Fort St. George but the main body went up +the country, and listed in the army of the Great +Mogul, where a few of them continued orderly +for some time; but Oliver, the quarter-master, +and a party with him, soon left the camp, and +rambled about, plundering and robbing the +villages, and flying whenever they were pursued. +</p> +<p> +Captain Read, having thus lost the better half +of his men, after having filled his water and +got rice, sailed again, still intending for the +Red Sea. He had taken off Ceylon a rich Portuguese +ship, and had plundered her of what he +liked; but not being able to bear up against the +westerly winds, he stood for the island of Madagascar. +There, after various adventures, +Captain Read, with half a dozen of his followers, +slipt away from the rest of the company, +and embarked in a ship for New York. +<span class='pagenum'>417</span>Captain Teat succeeded Captain Read in the +command; and, having joined Captain Knight, +of whom mention has been made before, they +sailed some time in company; but the Cygnet +proving leaky, Knight gave her the slip, on +which she returned again to Madagascar, and +finally sunk in St. Augustin bay. +</p> +<p> +While Dampier was at Fort St. George, there +arrived a ship from Mindanao, laden with clove-bark, +on board of which came Mr. Moody, as +supercargo. This gentleman, while at Mindanao, +purchased the Prince of Meangis, of whose +country mention has already been made in the +former part of this relation. This unfortunate +Prince, with his mother, and some attendants, +had been driven off their own coast by a storm, +and had been seized at sea by some Mindaneian +fishermen, who brought them to Mindanao, and +sold them for slaves; a common practice among +savage islanders. The Prince attracted the notice +of Mr. Moody by the curious manner in +which he was painted, and which, by Dampier’s +description, exactly corresponds with that of tataowing +among the New Zealanders. His design +was to have brought him over with him to England; +but Mr. Moody speaking the Malayan +language, and being otherwise well qualified to +manage the company’s affairs at a new factory, +he was persuaded by the Governor of Fort St. +George to accept of the Chiefship of Indrapore, +in the room of Mr. Gibbons, who had just resigned +in order to return home. Upon this unexpected +<span class='pagenum'>418</span>promotion, Mr. Moody importuned +Dampier to go with him to be his gunner, and, +in order to encourage him thereto, promised to +purchase a small vessel to carry the Prince and +his mother to their own country, and to send +him as Commander, with full power to establish +a commerce with Meangis, which could not fail +of turning greatly to the advantage of all concerned. +This was a generous and friendly offer +which Dampier could not refuse; and accordingly +he embarked in a company’s coasting +ship, in which there were seven or eight officers +passengers, and about 60 soldiers for the new +factories. They had a pleasant passage till they +came upon the west coast of Sumatra, when +a storm arose, by which they were driven from +their intended port, and forced to make the harbour +of Bencouli. At Bencouli they were all +very kindly received, and the gunner of that +fort being just dead, Dampier was offered the +post, with a more ample salary than Mr. Moody, +in a newly-established factory, could venture to +allow. Dampier consented to accept of this +appointment, provided Mr. Moody approved +of it; and Mr. Moody, not being certain of +being able to fulfil his engagement, so far as +the same related to the Prince of Meangis, very +readily gave Dampier leave to contract with the +Governor of Bencouli; and, at the same time, +assigned to him a half-share in the two slaves, +the Prince and his mother, that he might not +<span class='pagenum'>419</span>be a sufferer by leaving Fort St. George to follow +him. +</p> +<p> +Matters being thus accommodated, Mr. +Moody repaired to his station at Indrapore, +and Dampier with the two slaves continued at +Bencouli. They lived at a house in the town, +and Dampier was accommodated in the fort. +All this passed in 1690; but, before the year +was expired, Dampier grew tired of his office, +and, wanting to get home, applied to the Governor +and Council for his discharge. The Council +thought it highly reasonable that his request +should be granted; and the Governor made no +opposition, there being at that time no ship in +readiness to carry him off: but, as he had foreseen, +when the <i>Defence</i>, Captain Heath, bound +for England, came into harbour, he then made +many excuses, and at length absolutely refused +to permit him to go. In vain did Captain Heath +remonstrate; and in vain also did Mr. Goddard, +the chief mate, interest himself in Dampier’s release,⁠—the +Governor was inflexible. The <i>Defence</i> +had touched at Indrapore before she put into +Bencouli; and Mr. Moody had consigned the +other half-share of the slaves to Mr. Goddard, on +having been previously acquainted by letter from +Dampier of his intention to sail for England. In +consequence of this assignment, the Prince who +some time before had been attacked with an infectious +distemper, of which his mother died, and +of which he was but just recovered, was put on +board the <i>Defence</i>; and it was privately agreed +<span class='pagenum'>420</span>between Captain Heath and Dampier, that, if +the latter could make his escape, the former +would undertake to carry him safe off. Accordingly, +when all the company’s business was completed, +and the letters put on board, notice was +given to Dampier of the precise time when the +ship was to sail; “and, says he, after several +assays, I slipt away at midnight; and, creeping +through one of the port-holes of the fort, +I got to the shore, where the ship’s boat waited +for me, and carried me on board.” +</p> +<p> +On the 25th of January, 1691, they set sail +for the Cape of Good Hope; and, the wind being +fair, they proceeded at first very successfully: +but they had not been long at sea before the men +began to droop, being attacked with a distemper +that stole insensibly upon them, and before they +thought themselves ill were ready to die. Dampier +attributes this fatal disorder to the badness +of their water, which was filled from a river fed +by many noxious streams from the low swampy +lands that in the dry season, as it were, drained +their dregs into it, which at times were as +black as ink. Besides, it was stowed among the +pepper in the hold, which heated it to that degree, +that every morning when the men went to +take their allowance, it was so hot, they could +hardly bear to hold a bottleful of it in their +hands; “a thing scarce to be credited, says +Dampier, that water should be ready to boil +in a ship’s hold.” This distemper was so +universal, that not a man in the ship was wholly +<span class='pagenum'>421</span>unaffected by it; so that when the wind blew a +hard gale, there wanted hands to work the ship. +</p> +<p> +Captain Heath, pitying the condition of his +men, distributed every day among them a quantity +of tamerinds, some jars of which he had +brought with him from India; and this was a +very seasonable relief: but the wind coming +south, and the passage being already protracted +to an unusual length, the Captain called the +whole ship’s crew together, to consult what was +best to be done in the present extremity, and +desired every man, from the highest to the lowest, +to deliver his opinion freely. Thus all circumstances +being duly considered, it was unanimously +agreed at last, notwithstanding the wind +was then contrary, to prosecute their voyage to +the cape. But as that determination would infallibly +require a more than ordinary exertion of +labour from those that were well, to supply the +place of those that were sick, the Captain promised +a month’s extra pay to every man who +should assist on all occasions that should require +help, whether it was his watch or not and this +premium he engaged to pay at the cape. This +offer was first accepted by the Officers, and then +as many men as were capable of duty entered +themselves upon the roll. In a short time, it +pleased God, says Dampier, to favour us with a +fair wind, which being improved to the best +advantage by the incessant labour of those new-listed +men, wafted us in a short time to the cape; +and, being brought safe to an anchor by the assistance +<span class='pagenum'>422</span>of 100 Dutch sailors, who unbent the sails, +and did every thing for us they were required to +do, the sick were presently sent on shore, where +they remained about six weeks, and all but three +or four recovered. +</p> +<p> +On the 23d of May they sailed from the cape +in company with the James and Mary, and the +Josiah Indiamen. They directed their course +towards the island of St. Helena, and met with +nothing remarkable, except a swelling sea, which +taking them on the broad side, rolled every thing +about that was loose between the decks and in +the hold. This great tumbling sea took them +soon after doubling the cape; “an eminent +token, says Dampier, that the south-west +winds were now violent in the higher latitudes +towards the South Pole, we having fine +clear weather all the while.” +</p> +<p> +On the 20th of June they arrived at Santa +Helena, where they staid four or five days, and +afterwards continued their voyage to England +without any remarkable incident; and arrived +safe in the Downs, Sept. 16, 1691. +</p> +<p> +What advantage Dampier and his partner +Mr. Goddard made of their painted prince is +not related; but they certainly sold him to be +carried about the country to be shewn for money. +He was painted all down his breast, between his +shoulders, on his thighs, and round his legs and +arms like bracelets. “I cannot, says Dampier, +liken the drawings to any figure of animals, +or the like; but they were very curious, full +<span class='pagenum'>423</span>of great variety of lines, flourishes, chequered +work, and innumerable convolutions, keeping +a very graceful proportion, and appearing very +artificial, even to the wonder of all that beheld +him.” It has already been remembered, +that the mother of the Prince died in India +of the infectious disorder of which he was but +just recovered when he embarked for Europe. +On that occasion Dampier did what he could to +comfort Jeoly, for that was the name they gave +him; but he took on extremely, insomuch that +it was feared he could not have long survived; +on which account a grave was immediately dug +to hide the dead body out of his sight; and being +shrouded decently with a piece of fine new calico, +the corpse was about to be interred; but +Jeoly was not satisfied till he wrapped all his mother’s +cloaths about her, and two new pieces of +chintz that Mr. Moody gave her, saying they +were her’s, and she must have them. After this +he suffered her to be interred, which was done +with great solemnity; but he continued to pine +after her during the whole time he continued in +India. +</p> +<p> +In the printed relation that was given of him +when he was shewn for a sight, the showmen +heightened their account with a romantic story +of a beautiful sister of his being a slave with +him at Mindanao, and of the Sultan’s falling in +love with her, and taking her to his bed; but +these were stories indeed! They reported also, +that the paint with which he was ornamented +<span class='pagenum'>424</span>was of such virtue, that serpents and all venomous +creatures would fly from him: but poor +Jeoly was as much afraid of serpents, scorpions, +and centipedes, as a little child, for he was exceedingly +timorous. He died at Oxford, but +Dampier does not tell the year. +</p> +<p> +The publication of the above voyage round +the world having recommended Dampier to the +notice of persons of the first eminence, he was +afterwards employed by government in discoveries, +both in the Eastern and Southern Seas. His +first expedition was to the coast of New Holland, +which could have no other object but discovery +in view. He sailed from the Downs, on +Jan. 14, 1698, in his Majesty’s ship the Roebuck, +carrying only 12 guns, and 50 men, and +having 20 months provisions on board. On the +1st of August they fell in with the western coast +of New Holland, in lat. 26 deg. S. where, however, +they found nothing very different from +what Dampier had before described. The only +land animals they saw, were a small sort of racoons, +different from those of the West-Indies +chiefly in their legs, which are short before, and +on which they run jumping; and a sort of guano’s, +or lizards, peculiar to the country, which +appear to have two heads, but in reality have +but one, and no tail; and, what is no less remarkable, +their four legs seem to be all forelegs, so +formed as that the creature may walk either way. +To these may now be added the kanguroo, a +quadrupede of a particular shape, as large as a +<span class='pagenum'>425</span>sheep, and a creature of the oppossum kind, discovered +by Mr. Banks; with dogs and wolves +seen by the Endeavour’s crew; of the latter sort +some were seen by Dampier’s men, but so lean +that they were nothing but skin and bone. In +latitude 23 deg. S. they saw dolphins, and small +whales, and abundance of scuttle-shells, swimming +in the sea. +</p> +<p> +Captain Cook found plenty of water on the +east side of this island; but Dampier was much +distressed for want of it on the west side. Being +ashore employed in digging a well, he was +assaulted by ten or twelve of the natives, with +whom he had a skirmish, and was forced to shoot +one of them dead, to disengage a young man +who was surrounded by three of them, and +wounded in the check with a lance. On a +gun’s being fired over the heads of the assailants, +though it startled them at first, they soon recovered +their surprize, and continued their hostilities; +but as soon as they saw a man fall, they +were terribly frightened, and fled with precipitation. +Dampier very humanely adds, that he +attempted the natives no farther, being very +sorry for what had happened. +</p> +<p> +Among the natives engaged on this occasion, +there was one who by his appearance and carriage +seemed to be the chief of them. He was a +young brisk man, not very tall, nor so personable +as some of the rest, though more active and +courageous. He was painted with a circle of +white pigment about his eyes, and a white streak +<span class='pagenum'>426</span>down his nose from his forehead to the tip of it; +his breast and some part of his arms were also +made white with the same paint; not for beauty +or ornament as it should seem, but, as some wild +Indian warriors are said to do, to make themselves +look more terrible in war. He was indeed +a very frightful being; for the manner in which +he was painted, adding to his natural deformity, +gave him more the appearance of a monster of +the woods, than of a man born of a woman. +Dampier in this second voyage to New Holland, +confirms what he said of the natives in his first, +that they are the worst-featured savages he ever +beheld. Captain Cook, on the contrary, or his +editor, assures us, that their features are not disagreeable, +their noses are not flat, nor are their +lips thick; their teeth are white and even, and +their hair naturally long and black, but universally +cropt short: in general it is straight, but +sometimes has a small curl; their beards are of +the same colour with their hair, bushy and thick, +which they shorten by singeing: they are of the +middle stature, in general well made, clean limbed, +remarkably vigorous, active, and nimble; +their countenances not altogether void of expression, +and their voices remarkably soft and +effeminate. Such are the different descriptions +given by voyagers of the same people; or, to +speak more precisely of people on the east and +west side of the same continent; for which it is +not easy to account. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>427</span>Our voyager, however, not being able either +to find fresh water, or a harbour to careen his +ship, set sail from this miserable country about +the beginning of September, 1699; and, directing +his course to the island of Timor, arrived +there September 15, and received a supply of +water and provisions from the Chief of the +Dutch factory there. He was likewise hospitably +entertained by the gentlemen of the Portuguese +factory on the same island. From thence +he sailed to the coast of New Guinea, traded +with the inhabitants, and ranging along the coast, +found the main land divided into two parts. To +the easternmost division he gave the name of +New Britain. +</p> +<p> +In his return back he touched again at Timor, +and from thence sailed to Batavia; where +having careened his ship, and supplied himself +with necessaries of every kind, on the 17th of +October, 1700, he set sail for the Cape of Good +Hope; from thence continuing his voyage to +St. Helena, he arrived at that island January 31, +1701; but in his course home his ship sprung +a leak at sea, and, after endeavouring in vain to +stop it, he was obliged to run her a-ground on +the island of Ascension; where having landed +his men, and taken from on board all necessary +provisions, they in a short time discovered a fine +spring of water, and lived tolerably, till they +were at last relieved by some English men-of-war, +who were convoying home the Canterbury +Indiaman, and brought them all safe to England. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>428</span>In 1703, notwithstanding the bad success of +the voyage just mentioned, Dampier was again +employed in an expedition to the South Sea, in +conjunction with Captain Pulling, who had each +a ship of 26 guns, and 120 men under his command. +That commanded by Captain Dampier +was called the St. George; and that by Captain +Pulling, the Fame. They were victualled for +nine months, and had commissions from his +Royal Highness Prince George of Denmark, +then Lord High Admiral, to proceed in a warlike +manner against the French and Spaniards; +and both were upon the same terms of <em>No purchase +no pay</em>. But while they were in the Downs, +some difference having arisen between the two +Captains, Captain Pulling set sail alone, and left +Dampier to take his own course; who, stopping +some time in Ireland, was joined by the Cinque +Ports galley of 90 tons, 16 guns, and 63 men, +Captain Charles Pickering Commander. In this +expedition, Dampier had three grand objects in +view: the <em>first</em> was, to sail to Buenos Ayres, in +order to surprize the Spanish galleons that usually +take in their lading at that port; the <em>second</em> depended +on missing the first, in which case they +were to pass through the straits of Magellan to +cruise upon the coasts of Peru, for the Baldivia +ships that carry gold to Lima; and the <em>third</em> +was only to take place, if both the former miscarried; +and was, to proceed to the coast of +Mexico, to intercept the Manilla ship that annually +arrives at Acapulco, and is said to be +<span class='pagenum'>429</span>worth eight or nine millions of pieces of eight, +equal to a million and a half of our money. +</p> +<p> +Full of these projects, they set sail from Kinsale, +in Ireland, on the 11th of September, 1703, +and on the 25th arrived off Madeira, where they +learned that the galleons were sailed from Buenos +Ayres, and then lay at Teneriff. The first project +being thus defeated, they proceeded to put +the second in execution with all possible dispatch. +On the 24th of November they anchored on the +island Le Grand, on the coast of Brazil, where +they buried Captain Pickering, and chose Lieutenant +Stradling in his room. +</p> +<p> +From this island they sailed the 8th of December; +and, doubling Cape Horn on the 20th of +January, they changed their direction, sailed to +the northward, and on the 10th of February +came to an anchor in the great bay of Juan +Fernandez, where they met their consort Captain +Stradling, with whom they had parted in passing +Cape Horn in a violent storm, which happened +on the 26th of January. +</p> +<p> +At Juan Fernandez they continued refitting +their ships till the 29th, when seeing a sail, they +slipt their cables, and put to sea. She proved +to be a French ship of 400 tons, 30 guns, and +full of men. The St. George fought her about +seven hours, when a gale springing up, she sheered +off. On this occasion, the Cinque Ports behaved +but indifferently, firing only a few guns, +and lying by. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>430</span>Next day, in returning to Juan Fernandez, +they fell in with two French men-of-war of 36 +guns each; from whom they narrowly escaped, +leaving their cables, anchors, and five or six of +their men belonging to the Cinque Ports on that +island, with a new suit of sails, and several other +necessaries which they could ill spare. +</p> +<p> +They now proceeded upon their second enterprize; +but they were equally unfortunate in that +as in the former. The Baldivian ships were sailed, +and the gold secured. They then meditated +a surprize against the town of Santa Maria, in the +gulph of Panama, where the Spaniards getting +intelligence of their designs, laid ambuscades, and +after killing and wounding several of them, put +the rest to flight. +</p> +<p> +In this manner, disappointments succeeding +disappointments, differences began to arise between +the Commanders and they concluded to +part company. But about this time, a large ship, +fortunately for them, coming to an anchor in the +night close by them, they instantly boarded and +made prize of her. She was deeply laden with +flour, sugar, brandy, wine, about thirty tons of +malmalade of quinces, a considerable quantity of +salt, with some tons of linnen and woolen-cloth. +This proved a seasonable supply; and provisions +that were before so scarce, that only five green +plantains were the daily allowance for six men, +were now so abundant on board the prize, that +they might have laid in a stock for several years; +yet in less than six months we find them starving. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>431</span>After rummaging the prize and dividing the +spoil, the Captains parted; and in two or three +days, Dampier fell in with a Spanish man-of-war, +fitted out on purpose to take him. The two +ships had a smart engagement, and parted in the +night by consent. +</p> +<p> +Soon after this engagement, Dampier and +Clippinton, his first Lieutenant, having some +difference, Clippinton seized upon the ship’s tender, +in which were the stores and ammunition, +and with 21 of the best men weighed anchor, +and set sail. When he had cleared the islands, +he sent to invite all those who were willing to +sail with him to come on board; but Dampier’s +last project being now on the point of being carried +into execution, the men who remained with +him resolved to abide the issue. Clippinton, +though he had quarrelled with the Captain, had +no mind to distress the men; he therefore +thought fit to restore the powder and ammunition, +reserving only enough for his own use. In +the bay of Tacames, Dampier had taken a small +bark of 60 tons, laden with plantains. This +bark they intended to keep as a tender. She +had two masts, with two square sails; and they +named her the Dragon. +</p> +<p> +The Master of this bark, Christian Martin by +name, was a Spaniard by birth, but taken prisoner +while he was a boy, and bred up in England. +This man they kept prisoner on board +and now proceeded to intercept the Manilla +ship. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>432</span>On the 6th of December in the morning, they +saw a sail, and soon came up with her. She proved +their last hope, the great Manilla ship, from +the East-Indies. They instantly bore down upon +her, and before she could bring her guns to bear +gave her several broadsides; and, taking her unprepared, +put the company on board in the utmost +disorder. Captain Martin, though a Spaniard, +advised to lay her aboard immediately, +before the Spaniards had recovered their surprize; +but that advice was disregarded till it +was too late; for while two parties were quarrelling +on board the St. George, the one for laying +the enemy aboard, the other not, the Spaniards +got out a tier of 24-pounders, every one +of which that took place was ready to send the +St. George to the bottom. The assailants were +therefore soon beaten off with disgrace, after +having received a shot between wind and water +in the powder-room, by which two feet of planking +was driven in on each side the stern. And +now, being disappointed of this their last expectation, +all the men grew discontented, and impatient +to return home. However, they were prevailed +upon to cruise a few weeks longer on the +coast of Mexico; and with that view passed the +ports of Acapulco, Port Angels, Port Guatulco, +and several others; but without meeting with +any prize worth waiting for. +</p> +<p> +Ill success is generally succeeded by discontent; +the men who were before impatient of fatigue +without reward, grew now ungovernable. +<span class='pagenum'>433</span>A party, therefore, formed the design of returning +home by way of the East-Indies; and these +were encouraged by Mr. Funnel, the chief mate, +who, having the command of the small Spanish +prize already mentioned, determined to hazard +every thing to regain his native country, rather +than continue under the direction of a man with +whom there was no keeping terms. He therefore +embraced the first opportunity to reach the +gulph of Amapalla, to new-water his bark, and +prepare for his voyage home. +</p> +<p> +It should seem, that this voyage of Dampier, +though countenanced with a government commission, +was notwithstanding fitted out by private +adventurers; for, on this occasion, the +owners agent is said to have divided the provisions +and stores between those who chose to remain +with Dampier, and those who determined +to follow the fortune of Mr. Funnel. Their +whole number was already reduced to 60 effective +men, 33 of whom chose to accompany Funnel, +and 27 only remained with Dampier, but +upon what terms they engaged, or what course +they pursued afterwards, we are not told; for +Dampier, though he returned home, never published +any account of this voyage. What we +have related concerning it, in order to complete +his adventures, as far as our materials extend, +we have extracted from the account published +by Funnel; who, having left Dampier in the +gulph of Amapalla, on the 1st of February, 1705, +takes no farther notice of his Captain; but goes +<span class='pagenum'>434</span>on with the story of his own voyage, which was +indeed unfortunate enough; for his ship was +seized by the Dutch at Amboyna, the goods on +board confiscated, and most of the men cruelly +used, being confined and half-starved by our +good friends the Dutch, who were jealous lest +they should make discoveries prejudicial to their +commerce. Funnel himself, however, soon got +released; and, having made strong representations +against the authors of his sufferings at +Amboyna, he at length obtained some shew of +redress; with which, though not a compensation +for his losses, he was forced to be contented. +On the 2d of Nov. he, with two of his company, +got passage to Europe in the Dutch East-India +fleet; and, on the 15th of July following, +arrived safe in the Texel, from whence, after +visiting the principal towns in Holland, he came +to England, and published the account just +mentioned, in which he followed the example of +Dampier, by giving a description of the natural +productions of the islands at which he touched, +their inhabitants, arts, and commerce. +</p> +<p> +We can find no traces of the latter part of the +life of Dampier, who seems to have been an able +navigator, but of a restless turbulent spirit, like +the ocean on which he was bred. He certainly +possessed the art of sailing in a very eminent degree; +but he wanted that happier art of conciliating +the wavering discordant passions of his followers +and associates. He seems, too, to have +been more cautious than brave, more subtle +<span class='pagenum'>435</span>than wise, and more enterprizing than fortunate. +In all his engagements, both as an inferior officer +and as a commander, he seems neither to +have braved danger nor to have feared it. It is +not easy to determine, whether his thirst for gold, +or desire of knowledge, was the governing principle +that led him to range the world for new +discoveries. If the former, he seems totally to +have failed in the pursuit; if the latter, he was +more successful. At Mindanao, we find him +poor; at the Bashee islands he laments the want +of every article that could purchase from the natives +a small specimen of the yellow metal that +bore the resemblance of gold; but withal so honest, +that he would neither take the iron belonging +to the owners of the ship to give in exchange, +nor would he take the metal from the inhabitants +without an equivalent. In short, I think, we may +conclude, from what he himself has written, that +Dampier was a man of strong natural parts, of +blunt manners, of quick discernment, inflexible +in his resolutions, but deficient in natural qualities +to command respect, and in acquired abilities +to maintain it. +</p> +<div class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'>436</span> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='lspc'>THE</span><br> +<span class='font2p'><span class='lspd'>VOYAGE</span></span><br> +<span class='lspc'>OF</span><br> +<span class='l12'><span class='lspb'><span class="small-caps">Master COWLEY</span></span></span><br> +<span class='lspc'>ROUND THE WORLD</span>. +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +O<span class='toupper ip2'>f</span> Master Cowley we can find no other +account than what is contained in the +voyage written by himself; therefore, we shall, +in his own words, preserve such parts of that +voyage as have not already been related in the +voyage of Dampier; premising only, that his +first setting out among the buccaneers was in +the same prize, in which Dampier set sail from +Virginia, under the command of Captain Cook; +that he continued to serve that Commander, as +Master, during his life; and that, after sailing +sometime in consort with Captain Eaton in +the South Seas, he chose rather to serve that +gentleman than to continue with his own Captain’s +successor. One remark more, and then +to proceed. We find him, in every collection of +voyages in which he is introduced, distinguished +by the appellation of <span class="small-caps">Captain</span> Cowley, though +the highest employment to which he ever seems +to have arrived, was Master on board the buccaneers +before-mentioned; who, during the +time they were suffered to commit their ravages, +traversed the globe as wolves the forest, +<span class='pagenum'>437</span>merely for the sake of whom they might +devour. We find, however, but few of them +successful; by far the greatest part, like other +robbers, died miserably; and such of them as +escaped with life, were, at certain times, exposed +to sufferings not less shocking to human +nature, than the distresses to which they reduced +innocent people by their cruelty and lust for +gold. But now to proceed: +</p> +<p> +In August, 1683, I departed, says Cowley, +from Cape Charles in Virginia, lying in latitude +36 deg. N. and in longitude 305 deg. in the +good ship called the Revenge, Captain John +Cook Commander, pretending to me, that I +should navigate the ship to Petitguavaz, where +a Frenchman was the Governor, and to which +port I began to shape my course; but was told, as +soon as we had left the shore, that they were now +bound for the coast of Guinea, to provide a better +ship; and that then their design was to sail +to the Great South Sea. I was thereupon obliged +to alter my course, and to steer E. S. E. +for the Cape de Verd islands in lat. 16 deg. N. +</p> +<p> +In the month of September, we made the +island of Salt, where we came to an anchor, +careened our ship, and afterwards sailed to St. +Nicholas, where was held a consultation of officers, +whether to sail directly for the South +Seas in their present ship, or pursue their former +resolution and proceed to the coast of Guinea to +seek a better. After much debate, it was at +length concluded to try St. Jago, another of the +<span class='pagenum'>438</span>Cape de Verd islands, and, if any ship was found +in that road fit for their purpose, to lay her on +board, and make her their prize. +</p> +<p> +On our approach to this island on the eastern +side, we descried a large ship from the mast-head, +which proved to be a Dutch East Indiaman +of 50 guns, and, as we afterwards learnt, +of 400 men, most of whom were on shore; +but on seeing us stand towards the road, they +instantly repaired to their posts, clapt a spring +upon their cable, heaved their broad side to us, +struck out their ports below, and running out +their lower tier of guns, made themselves ready +to receive us. We had now advanced too near; +but marking their force, and that it was in vain +to attempt a conquest, we put before the wind, +and steered directly to the coast of Guinea, where +we had no sooner arrived, than we fell in with a +new ship of 40 guns, which we boarded, and carried +away. Upon examination, we found her +well stored with brandy, water, and provisions; +and in order to furnish her with other necessaries +from our old ship, we put into Sherborough, resolving +to touch at no other port till we should +come to Juan Fernandez, in lat. 33 deg. 40. min. S. +</p> +<p> +About the beginning of December, we sailed +from latitude 8 deg. N. steering S. W. till +we arrived in 12 deg. S. when we steered away +S. W. by W. till we came into soundings on the +coast of Brazil; and finding 80 fathom water in +a sandy bank, we altered our course to the S. W. +and about the latitude of 40 deg. S. found the +<span class='pagenum'>439</span>sea as red as blood, occasioned by great shoals of +shrimps, which coloured the ocean, for many +leagues together. We found also a multitude of +seals, and such abundance of small whales as to +exceed the number found in the North Seas in +the proportion of one hundred to ten. We +held, on our course till we came into lat. 47 deg. +where we saw land, never before discovered. It +proved an uninhabited island, to which I gave +the name of Pepy’s island, and at which ships may +conveniently wood and water, having a harbour +where 1000 sail may ride in safety. In this island +we saw plenty of fowls, and round it there is no +doubt abundance of fish; but, it blowing a +storm, we could neither dare to approach it, nor +to examine its coasts. We therefore stood to +the southward, shaping our course S. S. W. till +we came into the latitude of 50 deg. S. and +then steering S. W. by W. resolving not to attempt +the straits of Magellan, but to make the +land of Ter del Fuego; and there, finding +great riplings, and apprehending danger, we +resolved to attempt the passage discovered by +Bartholomew Sharpe, in 1681, and to sail round +all, leaving Staten land to the N. With this +view, hauling away S. W. we came a-breast of +Cape Horn on the 14th of February, where, +chusing valentines, and discoursing of the +witchcraft of women, there arose a prodigious +storm, which continued till the last day of the +month, driving us into latitude 60 deg. 30 min. +which is farther than any ship ever yet sailed to +<span class='pagenum'>440</span>the south; so that we concluded that talking of +the wiles of women at sea was very unlucky discourse. +</p> +<p> +About the beginning of March, the wind +coming to the south, we were soon wafted into a +warmer climate; for in the 60th deg. the weather +was so extremely cold, that we could bear +drinking three quarts of burnt brandy a man in +four-and-twenty hours, without being the least +intoxicated. We steered north-by-east till we +came into lat. 40 deg. S. where we fell in with +the Nicholas of London, Captain John Eaton +Commander; and, being glad of each others +company, we sailed in consortship to the island +of Juan Fernandez, where we found plenty of +good fat goats, good fish, wood, and water. [Here +Cowley relates the story of the Moskito-man, the +account of which has already been given by Dampier.] +This island is naturally fortified; so that +with 100 men, and at 100 l. expence, it may be +defended from the attacks of 2000 men, in case +of an invasion. [Accordingly the Spaniards have +taken the hint; for when the last ships sailed +upon discoveries, they found it fortified.] It lies +110 leagues due west from the port of Valparayso. +</p> +<figure class='max100' style='width: 49em;'> +<img src="images/534.jpg" class="w100 v_align_b" alt=""> +<figcaption><i>Cowley & his Men taking in Provisions at the Island of Iuan Fernandez.</i></figcaption> +</figure> +<p> +We steered from this island north-north-east, +till we made the high land of Arica, in latitude +18 deg. S. Being before the bay, the officers +of both ships held a consultation whether best +to go into Arica-bay, or proceed farther on the +coast; when it was resolved to sail as low down +<span class='pagenum'>441</span>at Cape Blanco, and there wait for the Spanish +plate-fleet coming to the bay of Panama. This +was an unfortunate resolution; for in Arica-bay +rode at that time a ship with 300 tons of silver on +board, which we missed, and in the room of her +took a timber-ship bound to Lima, with 30 +hands on board, which at that time stockt us +with more mouths than we could well spare meat +to fill. With this ship we sailed away north to +the island of Lobos, in lat. 7 deg. S. where we set +our sick men on shore, though we could neither +find wood or water upon it. Here having heeled +our ships, at a general council it was resolved, to +attack the town of Truxillo, in lat. 8 deg. N. ten +miles within land; and with this view just as we +were weighing anchor to proceed, some of our +people from the mast-head espied three sail of +ships passing by, which we instantly ran out and +took. These ships were all laden with flour, +fruit, and sweet-meats; but having had intelligence +that we were upon the coast, they had left +all their silver (their silver-service plate not excepted) +on shore. Their provisions, however, +were very acceptable; and we now thought +only of seeking a proper place to lay up our +stores in security, and where we might conceal +ourselves for five or six months, to make the +enemy believe that we had forsaken their seas, +and that they had nothing to fear from fresh attacks. +On this occasion, the islands called by +the Spaniards Gallapagoes, or Enchanted Islands, +were proposed, and the only objection made was, +<span class='pagenum'>442</span>the uncertainty of finding them; but that being +overcome, we weighed anchor, and after three +weeks sail came in sight of them, being seventeen +in number, to all which I gave distinct +names. We came to an anchor in a very good +harbour, lying towards the northernmost end of +a fine island under the Equinoctial Line, in which +we found plenty of fish, sea and land-tortoises, +fowls of various sorts, among which were turtle-doves, +so tame at first that they would often light +upon the hats and shoulders of our men as they +walked abroad; but not being able to satisfy +their hungry appetite by catching them alive, +the sailors so scared them at last, by frequently +firing upon them, that they became, like other +birds, very shy. +</p> +<p> +This island I called the Duke of York’s Island, +near to which lies a small island, which being +viewed in several directions, always assumed a +different shape. This I called Cowley’s Enchanted +Island. I examined several others; but upon +none of them found fresh-water, save only upon +the Duke of York’s Island. The bay in which +we anchored I called Albany-bay, and the harbour +York-road; and, after having laid up 1500 +bags of flour, with a quantity of sweet-meats, +and other provisions, in a convenient store-room, +we sailed to the northward, to try for fresh water +a second time; lest, being distressed, we should +be forced, upon some future occasion, to seek +relief in other harbours, when it might not be +possible for us to reach the present; but we +<span class='pagenum'>443</span>found good water in none of them; and, to our +great surprize, we met with such a violent current, +that when we would have returned to the +Duke of York’s Island, we could not stem it; +and we were obliged to bear away N. N. E. when +the first land we made upon the main was Cape +Trespontas, upon the easternmost shore of which +we watered our ship. The first day after our +arrival, we buried our Captain; the second day, +three Spanish Indians came down, whom our +men brought on board. Being strictly examined +concerning the strength and opulence of the town +of Ria Lexa, they gave very satisfactory answers: +but, while they were under examination, our +long-boat being sent on shore to get beef, a party +of Spanish Indians came down, and set their boat +on fire, and drove the crew for shelter upon a +rock, where they were forced to remain till we +sent another boat with 20 men to rescue them. +</p> +<p> +We retained the three Indians, and led them +with ropes about their necks as guides to conduct +us afterwards to Rio Lexa; but one of them +having got his neck out of the collar, made his +escape, and alarmed the town; so that our men +returned very much discouraged at this second +disappointment. We now found it necessary to +turn all our prisoners away to shift for themselves; +and then directed our course to the gulph +of St. Miguel, where we took two islands, one +inhabited by Indians, the other plentifully stocked +with cattle; but for gold and silver, we got +but little. Here we staid and careened our ships; +<span class='pagenum'>444</span>and here Captain Cook’s ship and Captain Eaton’s +broke consortship; and, both ships being +refitted, I got on board Captain Eaton, where I +was entertained as his master, to navigate his +ship to any place or port where he should direct. +</p> +<p> +[It is now that the voyage of Master Cowley +may be said to commence. Hitherto he has gone +hand-in-hand with Dampier; but now Cowley +pursues one course with Captain Eaton, and +Dampier another with Captain Davis, the successor +of Captain Cook.] +</p> +<p> +We in our ship, continues Cowley, towards +the middle of August, set sail from the gulph of +Miguel [in the bay of Amapalla], steering for +Cape St. Francisco, where we chaced a ship that +escaped from us; and then we bore up to latitude +7 deg. S. where finding the country alarmed, +we stood for Payta, in lat. 5 deg. S. where +we took two ships lying at anchor; which the +Spaniards refusing to ransom, we, by way of +farewel, set them on fire. From hence we sailed +to Gorgona, at which island we watered our ship +for the East-Indies. +</p> +<p> +This island lies in lat. 3 deg. 15 min. N. and +in long. 305 deg. E. and as soon as we had supplied +ourselves with wood and water, we took +our departure, steering W. N. W. till we came as +low almost as the rocks of St. Bartholomew, in +long. 240 deg. then we sailed into lat. 15 deg. N. +till we judged we were past those rocks; and +then returned into 13 deg. N. which latitude +we held till we made the island of Guam, in lat. +<span class='pagenum'>445</span>13 deg. N. and in long. 150 deg. E. according to +our reckoning; at which island, when we arrived, +we had a very sickly ship, no man being free +from the scurvy, and most of us in a consuming +condition. It was on the 14th of March about +seven in the morning that we saw land. At 12 +o’clock we were in lat. 13 deg. 2 min. N. by observation, +having made out on our sailing, by +judgment, 7646 miles, that is to say, departed +so many miles from Gorgona by loss made out +in longitude, which is about 2549 leagues. The +next day we sailed about the south-west part of +the island, and came to an anchor in a fair bay, +from whence we sent a boat on shore, with a flag +of truce; but, on landing, our people found that +the natives had burnt their houses, and had fled; +however, our men felled some cocoa-nut trees, +and brought a hundred or two of them on board +to refresh the crew. In the mean time a party +of Indians rushed from behind the bushes, and +in a hostile manner threatened to attack us; but +we made signs of friendship, and one of the Indians +returned to the wood, and having peeled +a stick so as to make it appear white, he came +forward, when one of his companions perceiving +that he had no cap to compliment our people, +called him back, and presented him with one for +that purpose. +</p> +<p> +From Sunday the 15th till Tuesday the 17th, +we continued a free trade with the Indians; but +on that day our men going over to a small island +on the west side of Guam, the Indians fell upon +<span class='pagenum'>446</span>them with stones and lances, which occasioned a +fray, in which some of the Indians were killed +upon the spot. +</p> +<p> +Two days after, the Governor, who happened +to be a Spaniard, came to a point of land near +the ship, and sent a letter written in Spanish, +French, and Dutch, demanding in the name of +the King his Master, who we were, whither we +were bound, and from whence we came? Our +answer was written in French, that we were employed +by some gentlemen in France upon the +discovery of the unknown parts of the world. +On the return of the messenger, the Governor +sent a letter of invitation to the Captain to come +on shore, with which he instantly complied, and +was received under a triple discharge of cannon +from the fort, which was answered by the same +number of guns from the ship. They soon came +to a good understanding. Our Captain made an +apology for killing some of the Indians in his +own defence; and the Governor gave for answer, +that, if he had killed them all, he should have +esteemed the favour the greater. We were afterwards +told, that the Indians on the small island +were in rebellion. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday, about 12 o’clock, a Spanish +Captain came on board, and continued with us +till 12 the next day. He brought as a present +from the Governor 10 hogs, a large quantity of +potatoes, plantains, oranges, papas, and red +pepper; in return for which our Commander +<span class='pagenum'>447</span>sent the Governor a diamond-ring, and presented +the Officer with a rich sword. +</p> +<p> +The next day the Governor sent on board a +captain, a jesuit, and a friar, with a request +to our Commander to spare him some powder, +of which he was in want. This request was +readily complied with; we sent him four barrels, +and offered him four great guns. The +first he thankfully received, and sent a box in +which were 1600 pieces of eight in gold and +silver for the Captain to pay himself for the +powder; but the guns he politely declined accepting. +Our Captain returned the box with +the money untouched, and afterwards received +from the Governor a valuable present. +</p> +<p> +While mutual civilities were passing between +the Governor and our Captain, our people went +out every day chasing the Indians, whom they +had full license to kill and destroy wherever +they met with them; but they, finding us not to +be Spaniards, became very tractable, and offered +to assist in supplying us with fish and fruit, +which they exchanged with us for old nails +and old iron. After having tarried here sometime, +and a free intercourse had been established +between the Indians on shore and our people +on board the ship, the Indians made signs for +as many of our men as chose it, to come and +see them haul the seine. Our men, not suspecting +any design, manned the boat, and went to +look at them; but, while the men were amusing +themselves with the sport, the Indians had very +<span class='pagenum'>448</span>artfully brought their seine round the boat, with +a design to draw it on shore, and thereby entangle +both boat and crew; but the sailors, discovering +the plot, gave the Indians no time to +carry it into execution; for, being provided +with fire-arms, which they never went ashore +without, they fired amongst the thickest of +them, killed a great many, and drove the rest +away. +</p> +<p> +These Indians are large in stature, some of +them being seven feet and a half high; they go +stark-naked; never bury their dead, but let +them lie in the sun to rot. They have no arms +but slings and lances; the sharp ends of the +latter are pointed with dead mens bones, +which, being cut like scoops, and jagged at the +edges like unto saws, if a man happens to be +wounded by them, and is not cured in nine +days, he certainly dies. Our people took +four of these treacherous savages prisoners, +bound them, and brought them on board; +but they had not been long among us, before +three of them leapt into the sea, and with their +hands tied behind them swam away like fishes. +However, we sent the boat after them, and +found that a strong man at the first blow could +not penetrate their skins with a cutlass. One of +them, in my judgment, had received 40 bullets +in his body before he died; and the last of the +three that was killed, swam a good English +mile, not only with his hands tied behind him, +but with his arms pinioned, before he expired. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>449</span>The Spanish Governor’s kindness increased in +proportion to the mischief done to the Indians. +He sent us, the succeeding day, by one of his +captains, thirty hogs, some melons, pumpkins, +potatoes, fruits, and rice; and received in return +six small patararoes. +</p> +<p> +Having now new rigged our ship, and supplied +ourselves with wood and water, we began +to prepare for our departure. On the first of +April, we weighed anchor, and next day came +a-breast of the fort, which we saluted with three +guns, and were complimented with the same +number; and on the 3d the Governor sent his +last present to our Captain. On the 4th we set +sail, and steered W. by S. till we arrived at the +height of St. Bartholomew, when we shaped our +course W. N. W. till we came into the latitude +of 20 deg. 30 min. N. where we fell in with a +cluster of islands lying to the north of Luconia, +distant from Guam 560 leagues. They seemed +to be uninhabited; but the men who went ashore +in the boat, found abundance of nutmegs on one +of them, and saw some goats. +</p> +<p> +From these islands we steered S. W. for the +island of Luconia, and on the 26th of April +Cape Bajadore bore from us east; after which +we came up with Cape Mindato, where the S. W. +monsoon overtaking us, we were obliged to bear +away for Canton, in China, where we lay and refitted +our ship, and where we might have laden +ourselves with plunder from thirteen Tartar +ships, who came thither full of the richest goods +<span class='pagenum'>450</span>of China: but our men, being under no government, +refused to attack them; saying, +They came for gold and silver, not to be made +pedlars to carry packs. But, alas! had reason +prevailed, we might have all made our fortunes, +without injuring any prince or subject in christendom; +for these goods the Tartars had taken +from the Chinese about two years before, and had +stored them at Macao, an island near Canton, +to be taken away when they judged it convenient. +</p> +<p> +From Canton we sailed for Manilla, to wait +for the Tartar ship that annually goes thither, +and which, we were informed, was laden one +half with silver; but, though we were fortunate +enough to come in sight of her, yet she out-sailed +us, and escaped. We then bore away for +an island that lies to the north of Luconia, intending +there to stay till the wind came fair to +carry us to Bantam, not then knowing that +Bantam had been taken from the English by the +Dutch. +</p> +<p> +At this island we stored ourselves with fruit, +goats, and guanos; which last are here good +meat: and here we found an Indian who directed +us to an island, where there was plenty of +great cattle; but the wind soon coming fair, we +made sail to the southward, steering our course +S. S. W. till we came into lat. 10 deg. N. where +we were so entangled among the islands of Paragoa, +that none of us ever expected to escape +with life. After three days, however, we very +<span class='pagenum'>451</span>providentially got clear; and stood in for an +island at the north end of Borneo, where we +hauled our ship ashore, and erected a tent, +planting a battery of ten guns for our defence, +in case of an attack from the natives. Here we +unloaded our ship, and, having provided sufficiently +for our security, we ranged the country +for natives to trade with us; but they, having +never seen any white men before, were very +shy; and when, by chance, our men fell in with +one of their canoes that was full of women, (among +whom was the queen of the country and her retinue) +on the approach of our ship’s boat, they +all leapt over-board; but, after taking them +up, and treating them kindly, they laid aside +their fears, and grew familiar; and, upon our +offering them civility, instead of avoiding, they +soon became fond of us. They brought us fish +in great plenty, with oranges, lemons, mangoes, +plantains, and pine-apples; and, besides these, +we exchanged some trifles for bezoar, musk, and +civet, with which the island is well stored. +</p> +<p> +The year was now drawing to a close, when +we set sail from this little island, directing our +course for Timor, where, finding the ship’s company +begin to grow mutinous, and not under +command of their Captain, myself, Mr. Hill, +and eighteen more, joined our forces together, +and purchased a large boat, in which we sailed +to the island of Java, distant from Timor 300 +leagues. The wind being contrary to carry us +to Batavia, we bore away for Cheribon, a factory +<span class='pagenum'>452</span>belonging to the Dutch, lying eastward of Batavia, +where we were kindly received by the Governor. +There we heard that King Charles was +dead, and that his brother James was proclaimed +king; we heard also that Bantam had been +taken from the English; and that the Dutch +had erected a new factory in that island. +</p> +<p> +After refreshing at Cheribon, we agreed to divide +our twenty men into three parties; two of which +chose to sail for the bay of Bengal, and the third +to stay with me; but knowing that Batavia +was the Hollander’s magazine for India, we +proposed first to sail thither, and there to provide +for ourselves as well as we could. Being +all arrived, we were courteously received by the +General; and I, with Mr. Hill and another +friend, who were all my party, were promised +our passage to Europe in their East-India fleet. +About this time the General was sending four or +five ships of war, with soldiers, to procure satisfaction +from the King of the island for an +outrage that had been committed on a party of +Hollanders, who, to the number of 80, had +been slaughtered by the Javanese. These ships, +it seems, were originally designed against Sillebar, +an English settlement on the west coast of +Sumatra; but this act of hostility happening to +intervene, it had diverted their purpose, and +saved the factory for this time. There were +now in Batavia twenty of us, who, on hearing +this news, would willingly have repaired to Sillebar; +but the Dutch would by no means permit +<span class='pagenum'>453</span>us, though we had bought a sloop for that purpose. +When we were just ready to sail, the General +ordered our sloop to be seized; and when +we remonstrated against this incivility, they produced +an old law, by which the subjects of the +republic in India are forbidden to sell any vessel +to any foreigner; and they even went so far as +to imprison those who had transgressed it. To +us, indeed, they gave the prime cost of the sloop, +but paid us nothing for fitting her up. +</p> +<p> +This project failing, Mr. Hill, another friend, +and I, embarked on board the <i>Solida</i> Indiaman, +bound to Holland; and, as we were putting out +of the road, we saw our ship Captain John Eaton +coming in; however, we held our course; but, +finding the wind unfavourable, we turned down +to Bantam to take in provisions, and from +thence steered to Prince’s Island, where we lay +for a fair wind three weeks. About the end of +March, we set sail from thence, with the wind at +N. W. and shaped our course to the Cape of +Good Hope. On the 11th of May, after a pleasant +passage, we made the land called Point Primicra, +bearing from us N. W. distant 12 leagues. +We had the wind at N. E. being distant from +the cape 560 miles, the land trending away +S. W. by W. The fish which came about the +ship near the island of Mona, the 30th of March, +left us now, when we judged ourselves in latitude +32 deg. 47 min. S. From the 15th of May to +the 29th we had sailed only 96 miles; but observing +next day, we found by our latitude that we +<span class='pagenum'>454</span>had a very strong current, that had driven our +ship to the southward 34 miles farther than we +judged ourselves to be; for we thought we had +been in the latitude of 33 deg. 41 min. S. whereas +we found ourselves in lat. 34 deg. 15 min. S. our +course having been S. W. 40 miles. I argued +the reason with the chief mate of the ship, and +he told me it once happened in this place, that +they lay a-trie with three main-sails, and the +wind at W. S. W. three days; and when they +took their observation, they found the ship driven +to windward 200 English miles; and likewise +in lat. 36 deg. 37 min. they say, they often +find the like. +</p> +<p> +From hence to the 27th nothing remarkable +happened; but on that day we had the wind +very furious, blowing a storm from W. S. W. +We lay a-trie with our main-sails, and found we +were in lat. 30 deg. 2 min. S. coming in with +the land; and now the current went to the eastward, +and we began to fear lest we should lose +our passage by the cape. Our Captain, who had +long been sick, was now judged to be past recovery, +and in the middle of the night died: this +occasioned a great deal of confusion; and, to add +to our difficulties, our water began to fail, and +we were reduced to a pint a day per man. Next +day we heaved our Dutch Captain’s corpse overboard, +when a council-of-war was called, wherein +it was resolved, that Captain Tominall, Commander +of the Critsman, should command the +Solida, and that Captain Tominall’s chief-mate +<span class='pagenum'>455</span>should command the Critsman. The pilot also +of the Solida, whose name was Houdin, was ordered +on board the Critsman; but he refused to +go, and the men assembled tumultuously, and +declared, they would not part with him. The +Lord Van Heldine was in a great rage with the +steersman; but the crew were resolute, and he +was obliged to yield. +</p> +<p> +On the 1st of June we again came in sight of +land. It appeared like a round hill flat at top, +and bore from us N. N. E. with a smaller hill to +the eastward of it. Next day we were before +the harbour of the cape, with the wind at north, +and fine fair weather. On the 3d, at night, we +came to an anchor in the bay before the castle, +in nine fathom water. Three days before we +lost sight of the Critsman in the hard gale; but +this day we saw a sail at sea, and concluded that +it must be the Critsman. Here we heard, that +the Francis Maria was lost, with 400 men on +board; and here likewise we were told, that the +King of England had taken the Duke of Monmouth, +and that he was beheaded. Another piece +of news we learned was, that a Portuguese carrack +was cast away upon the reef, having on board +four millions of guelders in gold, sent as a present +from the King of Siam to the King of Portugal; +and that four Dutch ships had likewise +struck upon the same reef, but that they had +fortunately escaped with very little damage. +</p> +<p> +This day four of the natives came down to +the city, dancing naked, and offering their wives +<span class='pagenum'>456</span>to the Hollanders for little bits of tobacco. They +were the filthiest men I ever saw. Next day my +two friends and I walked about the town, in +which are about 100 houses, built very low to +save them from the boisterous gales of wind that +blow here in the months of December, January, +and February: but the Dutch have here a strong +castle, with 80 guns well mounted, and a spacious +garden with pleasant walks, and planted +with almost every kind of fruit, flowers, and +herbs. This is the greatest rarity that we saw at +the cape. We walked, moreover, without the +town to the village inhabited by the Hodmandods +(so called by the Hollanders), who are the +natives of the country. These people are said +to be born white, but make themselves black by +anointing their bodies, and exposing their infants +to the sun and smoke. Their houses, or huts, +are built round, like the cabbins in Ireland of +the wild Irish, with the fire-place in the middle, +round which they all lie in common, covered +only with the skins of some beast, and without +any other bed than the ashes of the wood on +which they dress their meat. They eat any thing +that is foul, and will gather from the dunghills +the offal that is thrown out by the Dutch to feed +their dogs. Their men are not at all jealous of +foreigners; but will beat their wives unmercifully +for lying with their neighbours. When +the women marry, they cut off a joint of the +middle-finger; and if the husband dies, and the +widow marries again, she cuts off another joint; +<span class='pagenum'>457</span>and so many men as they marry, so many joints +of their fingers they lose. They are supposed to +worship the moon, because at the full and change +they assemble in great numbers, dancing and rejoicing +when she shines, but howling and lamenting +when they are deprived of her light. +</p> +<p> +It happened while we were at the cape, that +one of the Hodmandods drank himself dead at +the fort; of which his countrymen getting intelligence, +they assembled about him, and with oil +and milk endeavoured to recover him; but, +finding all their efforts vain, and that they could +perceive no spark of life remaining, they began +to make preparations for his funeral, which they +performed in the following manner. They first +brought knives, and shaved him from head to +foot; then, digging a hole in the ground, they +carefully placed him in a sitting posture, with +his body and head erect, and his legs and +thighs stretched out horizontally, and pressed +down streight; this being performed, they propt +him up in this attitude with stones and then +came a company of their women to howl over +him, who accompanied their lamentations with +a hideous shrieking, as if death appeared before +them in the shape of a monster, and was ready +to devour them. After their time of mourning +was over, they filled up the hole with earth, and +covered it over with the green turf. +</p> +<p> +During the time of our stay at the cape, our +people were chiefly employed in cleansing and +scouring the ship, in fishing her masts, and in +<span class='pagenum'>458</span>fitting and trimming her rigging. We also took +in wood and water, supplied ourselves with fresh +provisions; and, on the 15th of June, when the +wind came fair, we were ready to sail. +</p> +<p> +We were now three ships in company, the +Solida and Critsman, who came together from +Batavia, and the Emeland who came from Bengal. +On Tuesday the 16th, we pursued our +course to the N. W. and N. W. by W. till +Tuesday the 29th, without any material incident +intervening. We had no observation; but I +judged we were in lat. 19 deg. 54 min. S. This +day it was that I spoke with an Englishman on +board the Emeland, that had been some time in +the Dutch service, who told me, that they came +out in company with two English ships, one +named the Resolution, the other the Defence, +with both of whom they had parted in a storm +on the coast of Coromandel; that the Resolution +was leaky, and that there were little hopes +of her crew’s being able to keep her above water. +He told me likewise, that there were several +Englishmen in the King of Siam’s service; +that the English East-India Company was but +little regarded by the Moors; but that the interlopers +were very much encouraged; and that +one Mr. Deane, being their Chief, lived in great +splendor, never going out without 70 or 80 +Moors to attend him. +</p> +<p> +We had, moreover, this day great feasting on +board us, the Commanders of the other ships +being invited to an entertainment. But while +<span class='pagenum'>459</span>the men were loading the guns to pay the usual +salute, they were alarmed by a strange voice +from the sea, crying out, <em>Come help, come help, +a man over-board!</em> on which they forthwith +brought the ship to, thinking to take him up; +but they neither saw, nor heard any more of +him. Enquiry was then made through all the +ships, if any of them had lost a man; but upon +the strictest examination, it appeared that every +ship had her proper complement; so that they +concluded it was the spirit of some man that +had been drowned in that latitude by accident. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th of July another very wonderful +incident very much astonished our company. +When we left Batavia we took a she-goat on +board, which had then two young kids about +three weeks old. This creature was observed to +grow bigger every day; and all that our people +could conjecture was, that it proceeded from +the unwholesomness of the water that made her +swell; but, to the astonishment of all of us, she +now brought forth four young ones, although +no male had been on board. +</p> +<p> +On the 4th of July we threw one man overboard +who died the night before, though no one +knew of his being ill. He was an old Dane, +who, having no body on board to take care of +his effects, those who first perceived he was dead +fell to rummaging his chest, to secure to themselves +what he had saved; but, as in like cases, +they could not agree about dividing the plunder, +the matter came to the knowledge of the Captain, +<span class='pagenum'>460</span>who made the thieves give up all they had +stolen, which he took under his own care for +the benefit of his family. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th of July we came up with the +Island of Ascension, and next day took a new +departure from thence. On the 20th we found +we were in lat. 15 deg. N. And now a council-of-war +was called upon our Captain. His accusation +was, that he had formed a conspiracy with +five men more, to murder a person of quality +and his lady, with some other passengers on +board, and that, when the murders were accomplished, +they were to seize upon their riches, and +run away with the ship. The purser was the +chief accuser; but, upon examination, the whole +charge seemed so improbable, and the man who +broached the story denying upon the trial what +he had confidently affirmed before to the purser, +the Captain was honourably acquitted, and the +villain punished. +</p> +<p> +Wednesday the 22d, we made out in longitude +from the cape 11 deg. 56 min. judging +ourselves to be in long. 355 deg. 56 min. And +no wit was that I cut the same Line which I did +when I departed from Virginia in the year 1683, +having encompassed the globe; and cannot but +note, that I have been farther southward than +any man that I ever heard or read of before me +in this voyage, having, as I have already said, +reached as far as lat. 60 deg. 30 min. S. and so it +happened, that, being bound to go north about +Scotland to make Holland, I passed about 60 +<span class='pagenum'>461</span>deg. north, though I mention this as no extraordinary +thing. +</p> +<p> +We met with no extraordinary occurrence till +the 2d of August, when our Captain, after three +days illness, died of a pain in his bowels. His +chief steersman was made Commander in his +room; but, though his cause was warmly espoused +by the men on a former occasion, yet it was +not till after much opposition that they acquiesced +in his present advancement. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th of September, about 10 at night, +we had a violent storm, and we had like to have +been on board the Critsman; and, by endeavouring +to avoid it, had well-nigh overset our +own ship. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday the 19th, when the weather began +to clear up, I saw land, as did also two men more. +I supposed it to be the island of Shetland; but +our Captain would not believe it; however, +about six in the evening, the Critsman’s people +saw land also, and let go the flag, which nettled +our Captain, who blamed his own incredulity. +</p> +<p> +We came up with the Isle of Farley by the +22d, steered on, and on the 25th had the wind +all round the compass. About this time we +came up with a Scotch ship, who steered so that +we ran her on board on her quarter; and, had +we not slackened sail, should certainly have sunk +her. Two passengers leapt into our ship to save +their lives; but they happened to be more afraid +than hurt. The ship was called the Lion of Leith; +and the crew told us, that the Turks lay at Plymouth +<span class='pagenum'>462</span>and Dartmouth, where they had victualled +and careened, and from whence they had +occasionally slipt out, and had taken 100 sail of +Hollanders, and among them a Dutch frigate +of 36 guns, which gave occasion to many hard +speeches against the English nation; though we +found afterwards that the whole was an idle +story, framed only to amuse the Dutchmen, and +to flatter their humour by belying the English. +</p> +<p> +On sailing next day with the wind at E. S. E. +we found ourselves in latitude 53 deg. 35 min. N. +and I judged us to be on the West-bank. At the +same time we came up with two ships, one a +Dane, the other an Englishman from London, +with whom I sent my quadrant, and with whom +myself and my two friends would willingly have +gone, if our Dutch lord would have given us +leave; but he told us, he could not answer the +letting us go, to his Masters the States-General. +</p> +<p> +On Tuesday the 28th, we came before the +Maes, with the wind at E. N. E. When it was +day we saw the Brill Church, and came to an +anchor in 10 fathom water. On the 30th we +got bread and beer on board. Next day we +entered the harbour at Helvoetsluys, after we had +been seven months in our passage from Batavia. +Three days after our arrival, one of my two +mates died, and I made no great stay here but +went to Rotterdam, where I found the Anne +yacht. In her I came passenger for England, +and, through the infinite mercy of God, arrived +at London, October 12 following. +</p> +<p> +<span class='pagenum'>463</span>Of Cowley’s history, as we can know nothing +but from this relation of his voyage, so it is not +easy either to form a judgment of his capacity +or of his acquirements. He seems to have been +an excellent navigator, as we do not find, in the +whole course of his pursuits, either that he was +ever at a loss in finding the ports he sought, +or that the ships of which he had the direction +were ever in danger of being cast away. The +nature of his employment in a subordinate station, +led him rather to a habit of obedience +than of opposition; and therefore his quitting +the ship in which it was his choice to sail, is +more to be wondered at, than that he should +steal away from his company at Batavia with +only two friends. Perhaps his conduct on this +occasion might be owing to principle; for +of the enormities committed by the buccaneers, +with whom he was engaged, Cowley must be +acquitted, because he was drawn into their service +by stratagem; and a strong proof of his +honesty is, his embracing the first fair opportunity +of deserting them. +</p> +<p> +We know there are writers, and those of no +mean credit, who have taken pains to justify the +practices of the buccaneers, and who have attributed +to their discoveries and to their exploits +the advancement of the art of navigation, and +the emolument of their country: but it neither +appears to us, that their discoveries were of any +consequence in a national sense, or that the +riches they brought home were a counter-balance +<span class='pagenum'>464</span>for the lives that were sacrificed in the acquisition. +</p> +<p> +Their discoveries were chiefly of lurking-places +to which they were forced to retire to +escape the pursuit of the enemy; and, as to +the treasures they acquired, they were generally +purchased with the lives of many brave men, +who, had they been employed in honest commerce, +would have gained profit to themselves +and honour to their country. +</p> +<p> +It is not from the temporary excursions of a +banditti that a nation can hope to become rich; +nor is it by a hasty race round the world that +the art of navigation is to be improved. The +improvements of art are slow in their progress; +and the acquisition of national wealth can only +be obtained by a steady perseverance in industry +and commerce. It is, therefore, the true interest +of every commercial nation to discountenance +plunderers, and to applaud those only who are +employed in cultivating the arts of peace. +</p> +<div class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'>465</span> +<p class='hang_indent'> +*<span class='lower'>*</span>* Though the following relations may seem +foreign to our design of giving an account +only of the discoveries of our English navigators, +yet we have judged them too curious +to be here omitted.</p> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='large lh1p7'><i>Extract from a</i> Dutch <i>Relation of</i> <span class="small-caps">Roggeweign</span>’<i>s</i> <i>Discovery of</i> Easter Island.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +“U<span class='toupper lspz ip2'>pon</span> the 6th day of April, being +in lat. 27 deg. S. and long. 268 deg. +we discovered an island, hitherto unknown to +any European; for which reason, according to +the usual custom on the first discovery of any +unknown land, we christened it by the name of +<span class="small-caps">Easter Island</span>, it being the anniversary of our +Saviour’s Resurrection on that very day that +we arrived there. As soon as the anchors were +ready to drop, we observed at a distance a neat +boat, of a very remarkable construction, the +whole patched together out of pieces of wood, +which could hardly make up the largeness of +half a foot. This boat was managed by a single +man, a giant of twelve feet high, who exerted +all his strength to escape us, but in vain, because +he was surrounded and taken. His body was +painted with a dark-brown colour. We tried +with such signs and words as are used here and +there among the islands in the South Sea, to get +some intelligence from him, but could not perceive +that he understood any thing, wherefore +<span class='pagenum'>466</span>we permitted him to go into his boat again and +depart. Two days afterwards the whole sea was +covered with the savage inhabitants of this +island, who came swimming round the ship in +such multitudes, that we neither could, nor did +we think it adviseable to land. They clambered +like cats up the ship’s sides with the utmost +assurance, and came aboard, where they did not +appear to be in the least afraid of us, but they +seemed very much surprized at the largeness and +extent of our ships and rigging, and could not +conceive the meaning of all that they saw; but +their curiosity was chiefly engaged by the great +guns, which they could not enough admire, and +which they frequently struck their hands upon, +to try if they could not lift them up, and carry +them off; but when they saw that such logs by +such an attempt were too heavy for them, and +could not be moved, these overgrown fellows +stood abashed, and were, in appearance, very +much out of humour. They no sooner came +aboard, than we immediately found that they +were naturally as thievish and nimble-fingered +as the inhabitants of those islands to which voyagers +have affixed the name of the Islands +of Thieves, from the great propensity of the +people to rob and steal, if they were not beaten +from it. Rusty nails, old iron, and whatever +they could catch or lay hold on, was equal to +them, with which they jumped overboard immediately. +They attempted with their nails to +scratch the bolts out of the ship, but these were +<span class='pagenum'>467</span>too fast for them. These huge fellows came at +last aboard in such numbers, that we were hardly +capable to keep them in order, or keep a +watchful eye upon their motions, and the quickness +of their hands; so that fearing they would +become too many for us, we used our best endeavours +to get rid of them in a friendly way; +but they not seeming inclinable to leave us, we +were obliged to use harsher methods, and drive +these savages out of the ships by force. +</p> +<p> +“On the 10th of April we made for the island +in our boats, well armed, in order to land, and +take a view of this country, where an innumerable +company of savages stood on the sea side to +guard the shore, and obstruct our landing; they +threatened us mightily by their gestures, and +shewed an inclination to await us, and turn us +out of their country; but as soon as we, through +necessity, gave them a discharge of our muskets, +and here and there brought one of them to the +ground, they lost their courage. They made +the most surprizing motions and gestures in the +world, and viewed their fallen companions with +the utmost astonishment, wondering at the +wounds which the bullets had made in their +bodies; whereupon they hastily fled with a +dreadful howling, dragging the dead bodies +along with them; so the shore was cleared, and +we landed in safety. +</p> +<p> +“These people do not go naked, as many +other savages do; every person is cloathed in +different colours of cotton and worsted, curiously +<span class='pagenum'>468</span>woven, or stitched; but nothing misbecomes +them more than their ears, which are +abominably long, and in most of them hang +upon the shoulders; so that, though they themselves +look upon this as the greatest ornament, +they appeared very uncouth to us, who were not +accustomed to such; the more so, as there were +in them such extravagantly large holes and +openings, that we could easily put our hands +through them. +</p> +<p> +“Thus far my narrative will gain credit, because +it contains nothing uncommon, yet I must +declare, that all these savages are of a more than +gigantic size, for the men are twice as tall and +thick as the largest of our people; they measured, +one with another, the height of twelve feet, +so that we could easily, (who will not wonder at +it!) without stooping, have passed betwixt the +legs of these sons of Goliah. According to their +height, so is their thickness, and are all, one with +another, very well proportioned, so that each +could have passed for a Hercules; but none of +their wives came up to the height of the men, +being commonly not above ten or eleven feet. +The men had their bodies painted with a red or +dark brown, and the women with a scarlet colour. +</p> +<p> +“I doubt not but most people who read this +voyage will give no credit to what I now relate, +and that this account of the height of these giants +will probably pass with them for a mere fable or +fiction; but this I declare, I have put down nothing +<span class='pagenum'>469</span>but the real truth, and that this people, +upon the nicest inspection, were in fact of such +a surpassing height as I have here described. +</p> +<p> +“After the inhabitants of Easter Island had +made trial of the strength of our weapons, as we +have before related, they began to use us in a +more civil manner, and brought us from their +huts all kinds of vegetables, sugar canes, with +yams, plantains, and a great quantity of fowls, +which came very a-propos, and tended to refresh +us greatly. +</p> +<p> +“What I have seen of the worship and idols +of these savages is very wonderful. Two stones, +of a largeness almost beyond belief, served them +for gods; the one was broad beyond measure, +and lay upon the ground; upon this stood the +other stone, which was of such extent and height +that seven of our people with outstretched arms +would hardly have been able to encircle it; so +that it appeared to me, and all others, impossible +that this stone could have been lifted up and +placed upon the other by the inhabitants of +these islands, how large and strong soever they +might be; for, besides the thickness, it was fully +as high as three men. About the top of this +stone there was cut or carved the shape of a +man’s head, adorned with a garland, which was +set together in the manner of inlaid work, made +of small stones, in a manner not very improper. +The name of the largest idol was called Taurico, +and the other Dago; at least these were the words +<span class='pagenum'>470</span>they called to them by, and wherewith they worshipped +them. +</p> +<p> +“These savages had great respect for the two +idols Taurico and Dago, and approached them +with great reverence, namely, with dancing, +shouting, jumping, and clapping of hands, in +the same manner as we read in holy writ, that +the children of Israel worshipped the golden-calf +which Aaron set up; and when the cannon (of +which they seemed to be in great terror) were +discharged, and the heavy shot sounded in their +ears, they made surprizing and wonderful gestures +and leaps, and pointed with their finger, +first to our people, and then to their gods, whom +they appeared to supplicate for help against us, +and to call upon with a frightful shout, and +howling of Dago! Dago! +</p> +<p> +“While we lay before this Easter Island, a +heavy tempest surprized us, which pressed so +much on the ships, that I had no thought but +that they would drive from their anchors, and +we with them come to a miserable end on this +coast, which God prevented, the storm being at +last appeased, without having done any damage +to the ships. +</p> +<p> +“On the 12th of April, leaving this island, +we put to sea again, and shaped our course to +the westward. +</p> +<p> +“On the 20th of May we came into the latitude +of 14 deg. 41 min. S. where we fell in with +a great number of sunken rocks, rocks above +water, and small islands, all entangled together; +<span class='pagenum'>471</span>so that we were of opinion, they had been joined +together in former times, and composed one +solid piece of land, but separated from one another +afterwards by a pressure of the waters. +Among these an island appeared above the rest, +the most stately and eminent, intersected by +many rivers and springs of water, which therefore +was christened Water Island by Schouten +and Le Maire, who discovered it in 1616, on +their voyage to the Terra Australis. In this +labyrinth of islands and rocks, we had the woeful +misfortune to lose one of our ships, the +African Galley, which struck upon the rocks, +and beat to pieces. It may be accounted, however, +a happy circumstance, that all the people +aboard were saved and brought off; and being +divided among the two remaining ships, were a +reinforcement to their crews. It was impossible +for the ships to approach very near the land, +where no anchoring ground was to be found. +It is a low, sandy, and rocky island, being in the +inland parts almost all drowned land; but upon +the borders it is full of trees, among which +neither palmetto or cocoa-nut trees were to be +found; which I believe is the reason of its not +being inhabited; nevertheless, five of our men +who went ashore willingly remained on the +island, and would not return again to the ships, +being wearied out with the hardships they had +already suffered, and fearing many more unforeseen +disasters were still awaiting them. The loss +of the above-mentioned ship would be a happy +<span class='pagenum'>472</span>circumstance for them, since from the wreck, +and what would be drove ashore, they might be +supplied with arms, and all other necessaries. +</p> +<p> +“On the 25th of May we passed by the island +of Flies, also discovered by the foresaid Schouten +in his above-mentioned voyage. The inland +parts of it are likewise full of salt-water, and it +abounds in great plenty of wild green trees. It +is inhabited by savages of a large stature, armed +with bows and arrows. The island was very +properly named, from the incredible quantity +of nasty flies wherewith it is covered, which also +come aboard, and fall so thick on the face, and +other parts of the body, that one is at a loss to +conceal himself from them, and every thing one +eats or drinks is full of them; they put us to +great trouble for two or three days, when these +uninvited guests departed. +</p> +<p> +“On the 29th of May we passed among a +number of rocks, and islands, from whence we +sometimes saw a smoak ascend, a sign that they +were inhabited; but we had no opportunity of +going ashore. This day we found ourselves in +lat. 15 deg. 17 min. S. and long. 224 deg. +</p> +<p> +“On the 1st of June, in 15 deg. 47 min. and +long. 224 deg. we came in sight of an island hitherto +unknown to, and unlooked for by, any +European. Thither we went in our boats, in +order to take a view of it, and to procure refreshments; +when the inhabitants, who saw us +approach from afar, came down upon the shore +to make us return back, and to prevent our +<span class='pagenum'>473</span>landing. They are people of an excellent shape, +well proportioned, and comely in person; and +what is surprizing, their skin is as <em>clear and white +as that of a native of Holland</em>. They seemed to +shew a resolution to stay for us; for, as soon as +we came near, they jumped like madmen into +the water to meet us, and pushed with great +cruelty with their weapons, which consisted of +spears and lances, whose points were armed with +a very sharp wood as hard as iron: wherefore, +being obliged to free ourselves, and preserve our +lives from this hostile attack, we fired upon them +with our muskets, which made these savage warriors +immediately take to their heels, and obliged +them to look out for a place of safety; for as +soon as they had tasted the deadly effects of these +weapons, they turned their backs upon us, and +fled to a high steep rock, which they scrambled +up like monkies, with incredible swiftness. +</p> +<p> +“From thence, being convinced of our superior +force, they gave us to understand, that all +hostilities should cease on their part, and they +would treat with us as friends; and on our side +we used every means to allure them to us, being +in the utmost want of all manner of refreshments. +Every thing succeeded according to our wishes; +they brought us their commodities, consisting of +cocoa-nuts, and a certain bitter herb of the taste +of Dutch cresses, which is found here in great +plenty. For these we gave them in exchange +several trifles and trinkets; such as small looking-glasses, +glass beads of all colours, combs, +<span class='pagenum'>474</span>bells, and a number of such toys of little value, +with which they were as well, and even better +pleased, than we were with the cocoa-nuts and +bitter herbs, which, however, were much more +agreeable and useful to us in our present condition +than gold and silver, as we thereby enjoyed +a remarkable benefit and amazing relief against +the scurvy, which had already brought us into +a most deplorable situation. +</p> +<p> +“Although it appeared by these mutual exchanges +that these savages were got into good +understanding and friendship with us, we soon +discovered that this was no more than a feigned +reconciliation, serving only to deceive us and +make us the more easily fall into their snares, +with which villainous inclination almost all the +inhabitants of the islands lying in those seas are +infected; for as some of our people, ordered to +view and make a further discovery of the country, +were passing betwixt the rocks and cliffs, +along a strait and narrow path, to see the form +and condition of the place, they were met by +an old grey-headed man, who, although he neither +understood them or they him, endeavoured +by many signs and motions to make them sensible +that they were not in safety, and that it +would be best for them to return back; he pointed +to the road that brought them thither; and +the better to make them understand the secret +ambush and the approaching danger, he took +up a stone from the ground and threw it down +before him. How well soever our people ought +<span class='pagenum'>475</span>to have understood from this, that those barbarians +would attack them from the tops of the +rocks with stones, yet they paid no regard to +the signs and admonitions of the good old savage, +but marched forward, trusting to their +arms. They had not gone far before a dreadful +shower of stones came pouring upon them +from all quarters, when they least thought of it, +in such large quantities and with such violence, +that many of our people were thereby lamed +and wounded, without being able to make resistance +in defending themselves or driving the +savages from above them, who had made their +assault from too secure a place; so that our +people were constrained to slacken their pace, +contrary to their inclinations, and return back +with their wounded heads, being very well +pleased however that they had escaped so well. +</p> +<p> +“What further regards these villains and +traitors, I have already observed that they are +comely and well-proportioned in their persons, +and wear as an ornament pearls of a large size +in their ears. About their necks and bodies they +wear, as a singular ornament, the shells of pearl +oysters. As we received great benefit and relief +from our sickness by means of the bitter +herb which is found here in great plenty, and +was given us by the savages in exchange for our +toys, so this new-discovered island was by us +christened by the name of the Verkwikking’s +island. +</p> +<p> +“After this adventure with these roguish savages +<span class='pagenum'>476</span>no delay was made there, but we got again +under sail; and because the provisions lessened +gradually from day to day, and the disorders, +notwithstanding the relief from the bitter +herbs, continued to increase, to the great grief +of us all, it was resolved, in a council of the +principal officers, to return home by the East-Indies. +We then lay up to lat. 15 deg. 47 min. S. +and according to our reckoning 224 deg. 18 +min. long. being then about 1200 leagues from +the coast of Peru. +</p> +<p> +“On the 12th of June we found ourselves in +latitude 15 deg. 16 min. S. and longitude 205 +deg. 8 min. +</p> +<p> +“On the 14th we discovered two islands, +which we could not approach near enough to +take a proper view of, by reason of the rough +and stormy sea; but, on the other hand, we had +this satisfaction, that the inhabitants came to +take a view of us, and kept hovering about the +ships in a number of boats of such neat and exquisite +workmanship as is almost incredible that any +thing of the kind should have been found among +such savages, they being of such an artful +construction, the furniture so pretty, and +the form so neat, adorned with a number of +the most curious carved figures, that it is impossible +for the imagination to conceive any +thing more elegant; and really their carved +image work (which was the greatest ornament +of these boats) was so exquisite, that I much +doubt if there are many engravers in Europe capable +<span class='pagenum'>477</span>of producing more curious workmanship. +The people in these fine boats were armed with +darts, and had their heads adorned with green +leaves, and their bodies cloathed with reeds. +This island got the name of Bowman’s island from +a captain of that name. It was very pleasant and +delightful to behold, fruitful, and surrounded +with trees, among which the palmetto shewed +itself. +</p> +<p> +“On the 15th we came in sight of an island +about seven miles in length, lying in lat. 13 deg. +41 min. S. and 250 deg. long. Many of us felt a +longing desire to touch at this island, in hopes +of procuring some refreshment; but it was deferred, +and we pursued our voyage without +landing, in order to save time, because our +miseries and inconveniences daily increased, and +the disorders from many causes increased also. +</p> +<p> +“On the 18th of July we perceived many +different islands, and among others New Zealand, +computed to be in extent about 300 +leagues, lying under 6 deg. of S. lat. and 166 +deg. long.” +</p> +<p class='two_space'> +This relation is copied verbatim from Mr. +Dalrymple’s valuable Collection of Spanish and +Dutch Discoveries in the South Seas, as is likewise +the following Relation of the Discovery of +Davis’s Land; but neither the one nor the other +of these discoveries have since been fully confirmed.</p> +<div class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'>478</span> +<h2 class='nobreak'> +<span class='large lh1p7'><i>An Account of the</i> <span class="small-caps">Discovery</span> <i>of the Land called</i> <span class="small-caps">Davis’s Land</span>.</span> +</h2></div> +<p class='two_space drop-cap'> +“W<span class='toupper ip2'>e</span> went from Gallapagoes under the +Line, for the southward; intending to +touch nowhere till we came to the island of Juan +Fernandez. +</p> +<p> +“In our way thither, about four o’clock in +the morning, when we were in the latitude of +12 deg. 30 min. S. and about 150 leagues +from the main of America, our ship and bark +felt a terrible shock, which put our men into +such a consternation, that they could hardly tell +where they were, or what to think, but every +one began to prepare for death. And, indeed, +the shock was so sudden and violent, that we +took it for granted the ship had struck upon a +rock: but, when the amazement was a little +over, we cast the lead, and sounded, but found +no ground; so that, after consultation, we concluded +it must certainly be some earthquake. +The suddenness of this shock made the guns of +the ship leap in their carriages, and several of +the men were shaken out of their hammocks. +Captain Davis, who lay with his head over a +gun, was thrown out of his cabin. The sea, +which ordinarily looks green, seemed then of a +whitish colour; and the water which we took +up in our buckets for the ship’s use, we found +to be a little mixed with sand. This at first +<span class='pagenum'>479</span>made us think there was some spit of land; but +when we had sounded, it confirmed our opinion +of the earthquake. Some time after, we heard +news, that at that very time there was an earthquake +at Callao, which is the road for Lima, +and that the sea ebbed so far from the shore, +that on a sudden there was no water to be seen; +and that after it had been away a considerable +time, it returned in rolling mountains of water, +which carried the ships in the road of Callao a +league up into the country, overflowed the city +of Callao, though it stood upon a hill, together +with the fort, and drowned man and beast for 50 +leagues along the shore, doing mischief even at +Lima, though six miles within land from the +town of Callao. +</p> +<p> +Having recovered our fright, we kept on to +the southward. We steered S. and by E. half +easterly, until we came to lat. of 27 deg. 20 min. +S. when, about two hours before day, we fell +in with a small, low, sandy island, and heard a +great roaring noise, like that of the sea beating +upon the shore, right-a-head of the ship: whereupon +the sailors, fearing to fall foul upon the +shore before day, desired the captain to put the +ship about, and to stand off till day appeared; +to which the captain gave his consent. So we +plyed off till day, and then stood in again with +the land; which proved to be a small flat island, +without the guard of any rocks. We stood +in within a quarter of a mile of the shore, and +could see it plainly, for it was a clear morning, +<span class='pagenum'>480</span>not foggy nor hazy. To the westward, about +twelve leagues, by judgment, we saw a range +of high land, which we took to be islands, for +there were several partitions in the prospect. +This land seemed to reach about fourteen or sixteen +leagues in a range; and there came hence +great flocks of fowls. I, and many more of our +men, would have made this land, and have gone +ashore at it, but the captain would not permit +us. The small island bears from Copayapo almost +due east 500 leagues, and from the Gallapagoes, +under the Line, 600 leagues. +</p> +<p> +Dampier says, “Captain Davis told me lately, +that after his departure from Ria Lexa, he +went, after several traverses, to the Gallapagoes; +and that standing thence southward for wind, to +bring him about Terra del Fuego, in the latitude +of 27 deg. S. about 500 leagues from Copayapo, +on the coast of Chili, he saw a small +sandy island just by him; and that they saw to +the westward of it a long track of pretty high +land, trending away to the N. W. out of sight.” +</p> +<p class='align_c two_space'> +<span class="small-caps">End of the First Volume.</span></p> +<div class='tnote section'> +<p class="align_c space_after"> +Transcriber’s notes +</p> +<p> +New original cover art included with this eBook is granted to the public domain. +</p> +<p> +The illustrations have been moved to appropriate paragraph breaks. +</p> +<p> +The original text used the long s. This has been changed to the regular s. +</p> +<p> +Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. +</p> +<p> +Archaic and inconsistent spelling and hyphenation have been retained. +</p> +<p> +The opening square bracket on <a href='#tg_b237' id='tgb_b237'>page 237</a> appears in the original, there is no matching closing bracket. +</p> +<p> +Marking of quotations in the original is inconsistent: +where quotation marks appear at the start of each line +only those at the start of paragraphs have been retained; in other +cases quotation marks follow the original even when they seem irregular. +</p> +</div> + +<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/77886-h/images/001.png b/77886-h/images/001.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e99e746 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/001.png diff --git a/77886-h/images/048.jpg b/77886-h/images/048.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de3156f --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/048.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/061.jpg b/77886-h/images/061.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..afa8147 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/061.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/069.jpg b/77886-h/images/069.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d38d957 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/069.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/111.jpg b/77886-h/images/111.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8566548 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/111.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/153.jpg b/77886-h/images/153.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3989613 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/153.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/187.jpg b/77886-h/images/187.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..12dc33e --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/187.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/194.jpg b/77886-h/images/194.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..234de63 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/194.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/201.jpg b/77886-h/images/201.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cda0bac --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/201.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/271.jpg b/77886-h/images/271.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..751cf13 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/271.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/308.jpg b/77886-h/images/308.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbf2144 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/308.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/334.jpg b/77886-h/images/334.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba5d121 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/334.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/390.jpg b/77886-h/images/390.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..68033c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/390.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/428.jpg b/77886-h/images/428.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14dda5d --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/428.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/460.jpg b/77886-h/images/460.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1032b72 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/460.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/504.jpg b/77886-h/images/504.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f7d3a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/504.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/534.jpg b/77886-h/images/534.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c67d3a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/534.jpg diff --git a/77886-h/images/cover.jpg b/77886-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..207ce3f --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c72794 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0deb9a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #77886 +(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/77886) |
